# ListPlus Help Center > Every published ListPlus help article as clean markdown. HTML version: https://listplus.ai/en/help. Per-article markdown: append .md to an article URL. ## Section: Getting started ## What is ListPlus? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/what-is-listplus Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus is a web app that turns whatever you start with into **contacts that are ready for a job**: a CRM import, a cold-email campaign or a call list. You bring a list, a name or a description of the people you want to reach. ListPlus checks the data, fills the gaps and hands the finished list to the tool you work with. You use it in the browser at listplus.ai/app. It is made for people who prepare business contact data: founders and salespeople who do their own outreach, sales and marketing teams, CRM admins who clean exports, agencies, and technical users who want an AI agent to work on a list. A few words used throughout the help: - **Enrichment** (Anreicherung): looking up missing data for a contact, such as an email address, phone number, job title or company details, from specialised data providers. Most lookups cost credits. - **Evaluation** (Auswertung): the job you want a list to be ready for, such as Cold Email. ListPlus rates every row against it. - **Sequencer**: a tool that sends email campaigns, such as Lemlist. ListPlus is not one. - **CRM**: the system where your company keeps customers and deals, such as HubSpot or Salesforce. ### The four ways in - **A list you already have.** Import an Excel, CSV or JSON file (costs credits, every plan), or connect a tool such as Google Sheets (Pro) or HubSpot (Premium); every request to a connected tool costs credits. - **One person.** Look them up in **Person Search** (Personensuche) by name and company, email or LinkedIn URL. - **An audience by criteria.** Filter about 300 million profiles from our data provider in **Segment Search** (Segmentsuche); each results page costs credits. - **An audience no database has.** Describe your target group in your own words in **AI Research** (KI-Recherche); AI agents search the open web and bring back matches with evidence and a fit score — you choose 25, 50, 100 or no limit, up to 200 per run (1,000 with a target list). Records can also come in by themselves — through a list's webhook or form, an app event, or e-mails forwarded to your Inbox (see Flows). For companies instead of people, Find also has **Companies** and **Markets**. Which one fits your goal is explained in "Which finder do I use?". ### What "ready" means A contact is ready when it has everything a specific job needs, in a usable form. In a list, pick an evaluation such as **Cold Email**, **CRM Quality** or **Cold Calling** in the **Find & evaluate** (Finden & auswerten) field in the middle of the list header. Each row is then rated **ready** (einsatzbereit), **enrichable** (anreicherbar: something essential is missing but can be looked up) or **unusable** (unbrauchbar). You enrich only the enrichable rows, and the app shows the maximum cost first. Details: "Is my list ready for cold email, CRM or calling?". ### A typical workflow 1. **Get contacts in**: import, connect a tool, or use **Add to list** (Zu Liste hinzufügen) in Person Search, Segment Search or AI Research. 2. **Check**: click **Analyze** (Analysieren) in the list header to run the quality checks. 3. **Choose the job**: pick an evaluation in **Find & evaluate**. 4. **Enrich the gaps**: click **Enrich** (Anreichern) in the list header; lookups cost credits. 5. **Keep it**: your edits are saved automatically; changes the AI suggests wait until you click **Apply** (Übernehmen). 6. **Hand it over**: download a file, send the list to your CRM or email tool, or hand selected contacts to a **pipeline** that passes them on to your CRM, Slack, a sequencer or your own API when you release them. The "First 10 minutes" article walks you through this with the sample list. ### Working as a team Everything lives in a **workspace**: its lists, Watchlist, Inbox, AI Research runs, pipelines and connected accounts are shared with everyone you invite. Members are free and use the workspace owner's plan and credits. Agencies can create one workspace per client. See "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)". ### What ListPlus is not - **Not a CRM**: no deal stages, notes or tasks. (**Pipelines** in ListPlus are not sales pipelines: they pass records on to other tools.) - **Not a sequencer**: it does not send emails, make calls or run campaigns. - **No own contact database**: all data comes from external data providers. - **Not a scheduler for everything**: exports and writing changes back to your source only happen when you (or an AI agent you connect) start them. Some things do run on their own once you set them up: a list from an online source can **Refresh automatically** (daily or weekly), Watchlist alerts are checked weekly or daily, list rules (triggers) act when a record is added or changed — their **Enrich** action included —, a pipeline set to Automatic release sends waiting entries by itself, and a list's webhook, form or app event writes incoming records into the list. ### Where to go next - Getting started: First 10 minutes · First steps by goal · Which finder do I use? · Navigation and glossary · Comparisons (how ListPlus differs from Clay, Apollo and similar tools). - Costs: Plans and pricing · Do plans include credits every month? · Price list. - Trust: Where does the data come from? · Where is my data? · What the AI sees. - For technical users: API connection overview (give Claude, ChatGPT or your own agent access to one list). **Related topics:** first-10-minutes · first-steps-by-goal · which-finder-do-i-use · navigation-and-glossary · comparisons · plans-and-pricing · price-list · campaign-ready-evaluations · where-does-the-data-come-from · where-is-my-data · what-the-ai-sees · api-connection-overview · saving-is-manual · what-is-a-workspace · pipelines-overview ### FAQ #### What is ListPlus? ListPlus is a web app (listplus.ai/app) that turns contact data into contacts that are ready for a job, such as a CRM import, a cold-email campaign or a call list. You import a list or find new people, ListPlus checks the data and looks up what is missing, and you hand the finished list to your CRM, email tool or a file. It is not a CRM and does not send emails itself. #### Who is ListPlus for? ListPlus is for anyone who prepares business contact data: founders and salespeople doing their own outreach, sales and marketing teams, CRM admins cleaning exports, and agencies. You need no technical knowledge. Technical users can also connect an AI agent or their own scripts to a list. #### What can I start with in ListPlus? There are four ways in: a list you already have, one person in Person Search, an audience by criteria in Segment Search, or an audience no database has in AI Research. Importing a file (Excel, CSV, JSON) works on every plan and costs credits; everything that goes through a connected tool needs Pro at least (Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps), and HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe imports need Premium. Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research use credits per lookup, page or run; the Price list has the numbers. #### What does enrichment mean? Enrichment (Anreicherung) means looking up missing data for a contact, such as an email address, phone number, job title, LinkedIn profile or company details, from specialised data providers. Most lookups cost credits, for example company data from a domain; a few, such as finding a LinkedIn URL or company website via Google, are free. In a list, click Enrich (Anreichern) in the list header to start. #### What does "ready" mean in ListPlus? Ready means a contact has everything a specific job needs. In a list, click the Find & evaluate field in the middle of the header, pick an evaluation such as Cold Email, CRM Quality or Cold Calling, and every row is rated ready, enrichable (something is missing but can be looked up) or unusable. You then enrich only the enrichable rows, and the app shows the maximum credit cost first. #### What does a typical workflow in ListPlus look like? Get contacts into a list, click Analyze in the list header to run the quality checks, then pick an evaluation in Find & evaluate to see which rows are ready. Click Enrich to look up the missing data (credits per lookup), and fill the empty cells — your edits are saved automatically, while AI suggestions wait until you click Apply. Finally export or send the list to the tool you work with. #### Is ListPlus a CRM? No. ListPlus has no deal stages, notes or tasks and does not replace your CRM; it prepares contacts and hands them over, for example to HubSpot, Google Sheets or as a file (every plan). Its Pipelines feature is not a sales pipeline but passes records on to your CRM, Slack, a sequencer or your own API. #### Does ListPlus send emails or run campaigns? No. ListPlus is not a sequencer: it does not send emails, make calls or run campaigns. It gets contacts ready (checked, verified, complete) and sends them to a tool such as Lemlist or into a file, where you run the campaign. #### Does ListPlus have its own contact database? No. ListPlus owns no contact database; the roughly 300 million profiles in Segment Search come from our data provider. ListPlus combines several providers and keeps the best value per field. #### Can ListPlus enrich or sync my contacts automatically on a schedule? Partly: exports and writing changes back to your source only happen when you start them, but a list from an online source can refresh automatically (daily or weekly), and a list rule can enrich new or changed records with its Enrich action. A pipeline set to Automatic release sends waiting entries by itself, and a list's webhook, form or app event writes incoming records into the list. #### Who makes ListPlus? ListPlus is made by salesperformer GmbH in Krailling near Munich, Germany. The imprint, privacy policy and terms are linked in the footer of the listplus.ai website; for questions write to support@listplus.ai or ask the AI help (? button). --- ## Your first 10 minutes with ListPlus Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/first-10-minutes Last updated: 2026-10-17 The fastest way to see what ListPlus does is the built-in sample list. It is already loaded with realistic — and deliberately incomplete — contact data, so you can see what the checks find in a minute. Then you create a list of your own and go from "empty account" to "checked, enriched, exported list" in about ten minutes. ### 1. Sign up (or just look around first) You can browse the app without an account — including the shared sample list and its checks (step 2). The moment you want your own list, save anything or spend credits, ListPlus asks you to sign in: enter your email address and a one-time code sent to it — no password, no credit card. A new account comes with starting credits — enough for everything in this walkthrough. ### 2. Open the sample list **To look first (no account, free):** on the **Home** page, the **"Try a sample list first"** card (**"Just looking around? Try a sample list."** without an account) has an **Open sample list** button; the **Lists** page shows the same offer as **"Just want to look around?"**, and the **New List** page has it at the top. The button opens the shared **Sample contacts** list — 247 business contacts across 21 columns, with gaps and mistakes built in on purpose (missing company names and domains, missing job titles and genders, a few malformed email addresses, a couple of generic addresses like info@ and admin@). The checks open by themselves and run live. This list is **view only**: a banner at the top says so, and **Create your own list** takes you on. The sample is shared by everyone and never changes; opening it never copies anything into your workspace. Its banner reads "Sample list: Try the checks – edit and enrich in your own list." To fix, enrich and export (steps 5 to 10), click **Create your own list** and import your own data. ### 3. Get your bearings Three things in the list's header are all you need to start: 1. **Find & evaluate** — the field in the middle of the header, for searching the table or picking a goal to rate your data against. 2. **Four quick buttons** — one click opens **Analyze** (checks data quality and selects rows), **Record** (every field of one contact), **Enrich** (finds emails, companies and contacts) or **Triggers** (rules that act on new or changed rows). 3. **Everything else in one place** — click **More** (the grid icon with a caret) to open sublists, change history, columns, prompts, automation and the dashboard. ### 4. See what needs fixing The **Analyze** panel opens and runs automatically — no button needed. It opens on **All checks**; pick **Overview** in the category menu to see a quality score, a distribution of contacts from excellent to unusable, and a list of checks such as "Company missing", "Job title missing" or "Invalid email format", each showing how many rows it affects. Running the checks is free, and the optional **Include AI Analysis** setting (off by default) is marked in the app as using credits. ### 5. Create your own list Click **Create your own list** in the sample banner (or **New List**) and import your own file. Or start an empty list: choose its columns, then pick **Enter data yourself** → **Open table** and type or paste rows straight into the table. Click **Analyze** to see your list's checks, as in step 4. Importing a file costs credits (every price: "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). ### 6. Fix the quick wins Checks that can be corrected automatically (like capitalization or stray characters) are collected under **Fixes** in the category menu, each with a **Fix** button (**Fix all** is in the dialog view, **Open as dialog**). Clicking it applies the correction to every matching row; this doesn't cost credits. The corrected cells show up highlighted as suggestions — nothing is written yet. ### 7. Apply the fixes Click **Apply · N** in the list header to write the suggestions to the list, or **Discard** to drop them. Your own edits (typing, paste, new rows) need nothing — they are saved automatically about a second after you make them. If you try to leave with suggestions still open, ListPlus asks: **Apply**, **Discard** or **Cancel** (to stay on the page). ### 8. Pick a goal In the **Find & evaluate** field, choose the **Cold Email** evaluation — a saved set of rules for what a contact needs to be ready for a specific job. Every row is instantly rated **ready**, **enrichable** (something needed for cold email is missing but can be looked up) or **unusable**, and a bar lets you filter by each status (details: "Is my list ready for cold email, CRM or calling?"). ### 9. Enrich a handful of rows To try enrichment without spending much, tick the checkbox next to 5 rows (pick some from the "enrichable" filter) and click **Enrich** in the selection bar that appears. A dialog titled **Enrich** ("5 contacts · choose what you want to enrich") lists fields to tick, grouped under Person, Company and Tasks & analyses — for example **Company** under Company data or **Email** under Contact details. As you tick data fields, the footer shows the maximum cost for the fields you picked, for the 5 contacts (this covers the data fields, not separate tasks like Verify email); click **Next**, then **Start enrichment**. Most lookups are only charged when they find something; a few checks, like Verify email, cost a small amount per clear result. As results arrive, ListPlus fills the empty cells by itself — there is no extra dialog. It only touches cells that were empty and never overwrites data you already have, and the filled cells are saved automatically. ### 10. Export your result Export lives in a separate **⋯** icon button at the far right of the header (not the More button from step 3). Open it and choose **Export as Excel** for an instant download of the current list. For other formats and destinations — CSV, JSON, Google Sheets, HubSpot and more — choose **Export Data** in the same menu (or **Export Wizard** from the command palette, ⌘K) to open the export wizard, which lets you export a selection, a filtered view or the whole list. ### What this costs in total - Importing your own file: costs credits, plus a small amount of AI credit for automatic column detection. Looking at the sample list costs nothing. - Checks and fixes: **free**, and the optional **Include AI Analysis** setting (off by default) is marked in the app as using credits. - Applying fixes and picking an evaluation: **free**. - Enriching 5 rows: the cost depends on which fields you tick. If you tick **Company** and **Email** for 5 contacts, expect a modest number of credits for this whole walkthrough. Company data by domain is the cheapest lookup, a verified email with company phone costs more (only if found), and a full contact profile from an email costs more again. Most lookups are only charged when they find something; a few checks, like **Verify email**, are charged per clear result. A mobile number is charged per hit and costs several times the price of an email, so ticking Phone/Mobile for 5 contacts can use more than your starting credits. The Enrich dialog shows the maximum cost for the data fields you pick before you confirm (every price: "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). - Exporting: **free**. All told, importing a small file plus a Company/Email enrichment test on 5 rows typically uses only a part of your starting credits — richer fields like Mobile can use more. ### If something looks different - If you already have lists, the Home page shows your list grid instead of the empty-state card; the sample is then behind **Open the sample list** at the top of **New List**. ### For advanced users The Analyze panel's checks, the evaluation ratings and the selection-bar enrichment plan are all computed live from the current grid state, so re-running any step after an edit (including Fix all) recalculates the numbers you see. **Related topics:** what-is-listplus · first-steps-by-goal · which-finder-do-i-use · quality-checks-overview · campaign-ready-evaluations · fixing-issues · saving-is-manual · selecting-rows · enrichment-overview · fill-empty-cells · export-overview · price-list · credits-explained. ### FAQ #### What should I do first in ListPlus? Start with the built-in sample list: click Open sample list on the Home page to see what the checks find in a ready-made contact list (no account needed). It is view only, so then click Create your own list in its banner and import your own data to fix, enrich and export. #### Where do I find the sample list? Click Open sample list on the Home page ("Try a sample list first"), Open a sample list on the Lists page ("Just want to look around?") or the same button at the top of the New List page: it opens the shared Sample contacts (247 rows with deliberate gaps), view only, with the checks running. Opening it never copies anything into your workspace. #### Does opening the sample list cost credits? No. Opening the shared sample list is free and needs no account. A new account comes with starting credits, which you use when you import and enrich your own list. #### Why is the sample list missing so much data? It's on purpose: most rows in the sample contacts are missing company name and domain, and some are missing job title, gender, or have a malformed or generic (info@, admin@) email address. This lets you see what the Analyze checks catch and what enrichment can fill in, before you try it on your own list. #### What should I do with the errors in the sample list? Open the Analyze panel (it opens and runs automatically) to see the issues listed by check; in the sample list you can only look, so do the fixing in your own list: choose Fixes in the category menu and use Fix (or Fix all in the dialog view) wherever it's offered to correct them for free, then click Apply in the list header to keep the corrections. Anything left over — like the missing company names and domains — you look up afterwards with Enrich. #### Which rows should I enrich when I first try it? In your own list, pick the "enrichable" filter after choosing an evaluation like Cold Email, then select just a handful of rows (for example 5) instead of the whole list. ListPlus shows the maximum cost for exactly the rows and fields you picked before you confirm. The sample list itself can't be enriched. #### How much does it cost to try ListPlus? Looking at the sample list is free; in your own list, importing a file costs credits, checks, fixes, evaluations and exporting cost none, and most enrichment lookups are only charged when they find something. Enriching 5 contacts with Company and Email typically uses only part of the starting credits; a mobile number (charged per hit) can use more. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### Can I try ListPlus without signing up? You can browse the app without an account and open the shared sample list with its checks; creating your own list, editing or enriching data requires a free account (email address + one-time code, no credit card). A new account comes with starting credits — enough to import a list, run the free quality checks and enrich a few contacts. #### Is there a guided tour of the app? No tour starts by itself — click the round Help button (a question mark) in the bottom-right corner of a main view instead. It lists short step-by-step guides for the view you are in and ticks off the ones you opened. If you hid the button, choose Help in the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) or in the menu at your avatar. #### What should I do after trying the sample list? Click Create your own list in the sample banner and import your own file — drag it onto the New List page or pick it with the file picker, which also costs credits — or try Person Search to look up one specific contact. From there the same steps apply: check, fix, evaluate, enrich and export — edits are saved automatically. --- ## First steps by goal: "I want to…" Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/first-steps-by-goal Last updated: 2026-10-17 Pick the sentence below that matches what you're trying to do. Each one gives you the first few clicks, what it costs, and which help topic to read next for the full picture. If none of these fit, "Which finder do I use?" compares Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research side by side, and "[Navigation and glossary](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/navigation-and-glossary)" explains every place in the app. ### I want to clean up or check a list I already have Import the file on the **New List** page — drop it or click **Select File** (CSV, Excel or JSON) — then open the list and click **Analyze** in the list header. In the **Fixes** category, **Fix** next to a check corrects that issue for free (or use **Tidy up** for a guided pass with preview); click **Apply** in the list header afterwards to keep the corrections. Importing costs credits; checks and fixes cost none — the optional **Include AI Analysis** setting (off by default) is marked in the app as using credits. Next: Quality checks overview. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### I want to find missing emails or phone numbers for my list With the list open (select specific rows first if you only want those), click **Enrich** in the list header, open the **Find Missing Email or Phone** group, and pick **Find Email (by Name & Company)** or, for a phone number too, **Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)**. Finding an email this way costs credits, depending on the provider, only charged when one is actually found; Find Email + Phone costs more, the phone tier charged only when a phone is found. The price is shown before you start. Next: Find a verified email (and Find phone and mobile). ### I want to find one specific person Click **Find** in the left rail, then **Individual** in the switch at the top, to open **Person Search**, then type a name and company, an email address or a LinkedIn URL and click **Search**. For a name, confirm which person you mean (ListPlus asks even for a single match); an email address or LinkedIn URL skips that step. The profile then loads automatically for a small amount of credits. Next: Person Search. ### I want to build a list of people by role, industry or company size Click **Find** in the left rail, then **People** in the switch at the top, to open **Segment Search**, set filters such as job title, seniority, industry, location or company size (or describe your audience in a sentence to build the filters automatically), then click **Search Contacts**. Each page of up to 25 results costs credits, and revealing a verified email or mobile number for a specific person is a separate, later step. Next: Segment Search (audience database). ### I want to find leads with signals no database has Click **Find** in the left rail, then **AI Research** in the switch at the top, describe your target group in a sentence (role, a visible signal, ideally industry or region, best in English), and click **Start research**. You're billed for the actual work the AI does rather than a fixed price per lead, and you need a small minimum balance to start. Next: AI Research. ### I want to turn notes, signatures or invitations into contacts Click **Flows** in the left rail, then **Inbox** in the left column, then paste text, attach a PDF, or forward an email to your personal Inbox address for this workspace (Flows → **Email forwarding**, under Inbox in the left column; click **Create address** the first time). Open the entry and click **Recognize contacts**, review the suggested people, then click **Add to list** or **Save**. Every recognition run costs credits, with longer free text (an email body, a note, a forwarded PDF) adding the AI's actual token cost on top; a short line such as a signature costs just the base price. Next: Inbox. ### I want to send my finished contacts to my CRM, Google Sheet or email tool Open the **⋯ menu at the far right of the list header** and choose **Export Data** to go straight to the export wizard and pick a destination — an instant download, or send to an app such as Google Sheets, Lemlist or HubSpot. For a quick file instead, the same **⋯** menu also has **Export as Excel**, and the wizard is reachable via Commands (⌘K) too. File downloads are free. Pushing a later change back to a connected source is something you trigger yourself, with **Write to HubSpot** (or the source's name) in the Changes panel; for records to go on by themselves, set up a pipeline with automatic release. Next: Export overview (and Sync overview for push-back details). ### I want to work on lists together with my team Open the **workspace switcher** in the Home page header (or the workspace row in your avatar menu) and choose **Members & invites**, then enter your colleagues' email addresses and click **Invite**. Everyone who joins sees the workspace's lists, Watchlist, Inbox, AI Research runs and pipelines; members are free and spend the workspace owner's credits, so only the owner needs a plan. Next: What is a workspace (and Invite teammates to a workspace, Credits, plan and limits in a workspace). ### I want to give Claude or ChatGPT access to a list Click **More** in the list header (the panel-switcher button) to open the panels list, choose **Automation** under **More tools**, then in the **Automations** panel click **+ Add** and choose **Add API Endpoint**. Copy the URL and the **Copy AI instruction** text into Claude, or add the same URL as an MCP connector — a standard several AI apps, including ChatGPT, use to plug into outside tools. This is included on every plan, including Basic; whatever actions the AI takes are billed at the same per-action credit rates as doing them yourself in the app. Next: API connection overview. ### I want to enrich contacts from Outlook Install the ListPlus add-in from Microsoft AppSource, then open an email and open the add-in's sidebar to see the sender's job title, company details and LinkedIn profile. A cached match is free; a new lookup uses credits from your account and is written into an auto-created "Outlook Contacts" list. Next: Outlook add-in. **Related topics:** which-finder-do-i-use · navigation-and-glossary · quality-checks-overview · price-list · find-verified-email · find-phone-and-mobile · person-search · categories-audience-database · ai-research · inbox · export-overview · sync-overview · what-is-a-workspace · invite-teammates · api-connection-overview · outlook-addin. ### FAQ #### I want to clean my list — where do I start? Import your file on the New List page (drop it or click Select File), open the list, and click Analyze in the list header to see every quality issue. In the Fixes category, Fix next to a check corrects the issue for free (or use Tidy up for a guided pass with preview) — click Apply in the list header afterwards to keep the corrections; checks and fixes are free (the optional Include AI Analysis setting, off by default, is marked as using credits). #### How do I find missing emails or phone numbers for my list? With the list open, click Enrich in the list header, open the Find Missing Email or Phone group, and pick Find Email (by Name & Company) or Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company) — select rows first to enrich only those. Finding an email this way costs credits, only when one is actually found; Find Email + Phone costs more, with the phone tier charged only when a phone is found. The price is shown before you start (all prices: "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). #### How do I find one specific person? Click Find in the left rail, then Individual in the switch at the top, to open Person Search, type a name and company, an email address or a LinkedIn URL, and click Search. For a name, confirm which person you mean (ListPlus asks even for a single match); an email address or LinkedIn URL loads the result directly. Loading the basic profile costs a small amount of credits. #### How do I build a lead list from scratch by role, industry or size? Click Find in the left rail, then People in the switch at the top, to open Segment Search, set filters like job title, industry, location or company size (or describe your audience in a sentence to build them automatically), and click Search Contacts. Each page of up to 25 results costs credits; revealing a verified email or mobile number is a separate step. #### How do I find leads with signals no database has? Click Find in the left rail, then AI Research in the switch at the top, describe your target group in a sentence — the role, a visible signal, and ideally industry or region — and click Start research. You pay for the actual work the AI does rather than a fixed price per lead, and you need a small minimum balance to start. #### How do I turn notes, signatures or meeting invitations into contacts? Click Flows in the left rail, then Inbox in the left column, then paste text, attach a PDF, or forward an email to your personal Inbox address; open the entry and click Recognize contacts, review the suggested people, then click Add to list or Save. Every recognition run costs credits, and longer free text such as an email body or a note adds the AI's actual token cost on top (a short signature stays at the base price). #### How do I get my contacts into HubSpot, Google Sheets or Lemlist? Open the ⋯ menu at the far right of the list header and choose Export Data to open the export wizard, then pick the app to send to, such as Google Sheets, Lemlist or HubSpot. Nothing keeps syncing on its own; you export again whenever you want the destination refreshed. #### How do I give Claude or ChatGPT access to my list? Click More in the list header to open the panels list, choose Automation under More tools, then in the Automations panel click + Add and choose Add API Endpoint. Copy the URL plus the Copy AI instruction text into Claude, or add it in ChatGPT as an MCP connector (the standard AI apps use to plug into outside tools); this is included on every plan, and actions the AI takes are billed at the same rates as doing them yourself. #### How do I enrich contacts from Outlook? Install the ListPlus add-in from Microsoft AppSource, open an email, and open the add-in's sidebar to see the sender's job title, company details and LinkedIn profile. A cached match is free; a new lookup uses credits from your account and lands in an auto-created "Outlook Contacts" list. --- ## Which finder do I use? Person Search vs Segment Search vs AI Research Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/which-finder-do-i-use Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus has three ways to find people, and each answers a different question: **Person Search** for "who is this one person", **Segment Search** for "who matches these criteria", and **AI Research** for "who is doing this specific thing right now". All of them live behind **Find** in the left navigation (it opens the search you used last), and a switch at the top of each page — **Individual · People · Companies · Markets · AI Research** — lets you jump between them. Individual is Person Search, People is Segment Search; Companies and Markets are for finding companies (see below). The **?** at the end of that switch starts a short tour of all five again (it shows by itself the first time you open Find). ### Comparison | | Person Search | Segment Search | AI Research | | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Best for | One named person | A group defined by filters (role, industry, size, location) | A group defined by a signal no filter can see (hiring, funding, a complaint) | | You type | Name + company, email, domain or LinkedIn URL | Filters, or one sentence turned into filters | A plain-language brief, ideally in English | | You get | A profile drawer for that one person | A table of up to 25 people per page | Match cards with a fit score, each with a source link and evidence — you choose 25, 50, 100 or no limit, up to 200 per run | | Cost | Searching usually costs nothing (a name search in the people database can cost credits when it returns people); opening a profile loads the basics for a small amount of credits; a verified email with company phone and a mobile number cost more, each only when found | Costs credits per page of 25 results (nothing is charged if nothing matches); a verified email with company phone and a mobile number cost more, each only when found | You need a small minimum balance to start; the run itself is billed by usage, plus optional paid sources per search | | Speed | Seconds | Seconds | Several minutes; can keep running in the background | | Without an account | Understanding your input and the candidate list are free; you can also open a few full profiles free to try it before signing up | You can build filters for free, but running the search needs a free account | You can write a brief for free, but starting the research needs a free account | ### Choose Person Search when… You already know who you're looking for: a specific name, an email address, or a LinkedIn URL. You want their verified email, phone or a quick profile check, not a list of candidates. ### Choose Segment Search when… Your audience is defined by attributes a database can filter on — job title, seniority, industry, company size, location. You want a table of matching people you can page through and add straight to a list. ### Choose AI Research when… Your audience is defined by something happening rather than a fixed attribute — a company hiring for a role, a person complaining about a tool, a startup that just raised funding. No filter captures that, so AI agents search the open web (and, optionally, Reddit or X) and bring back evidence for each match. ### For companies: Companies and Markets **Companies** (in Segment Search) finds companies by industry, size, location and revenue. **Markets** starts from your ideal customer: pick region, industry, technology, size and growth, see how many companies match as bar charts, then load them into a list and add their decision makers. Each new calculation and each company loaded costs credits; details in "Markets". ### Combining them The three finders feed the same lists, so you can mix them: build the bulk of a list in Segment Search from clean criteria, add the one VIP contact you need through Person Search, and layer in a smaller, signal-based group from AI Research that Segment Search can't find. If you type a group description into Person Search by mistake, it recognizes this and offers to open the same criteria in Segment Search instead of searching for one nonexistent person. **Related topics:** person-search · categories-audience-database · ai-research · markets · first-steps-by-goal · what-is-listplus · find-verified-email · find-phone-and-mobile · price-list. ### FAQ #### Which finder should I use? Use Person Search if you have a name, email or LinkedIn URL for one specific person. Use Segment Search if you can describe your audience with filters like role, industry or company size. Use AI Research if your audience is defined by something happening — hiring, funding, a complaint — that a filter can't capture. #### What is the difference between Person Search and Segment Search? Person Search looks up one named person and opens their profile in seconds; Segment Search filters a database of roughly 300 million profiles from our data provider by criteria like role, industry, seniority or company size and returns a table of matching people. Use Person Search when you know who you want; use Segment Search when you know the criteria but not the individual names. #### What is the difference between Segment Search and AI Research? Segment Search filters an existing provider database by fixed attributes such as job title, industry or headcount, with credits charged per page of 25 results. AI Research instead searches the open web for people showing a specific signal that a filter database doesn't track, and takes several minutes rather than seconds. #### I want a lead list of CEOs in Germany — which tool do I use? Use Segment Search — its filters (Job Title or Seniority, Person Location) are built for exactly this: pulling a page of matching people by role and location, rather than searching for individual names. See "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)" for the filters and steps. #### I need the email of one specific person — which tool do I use? Use Person Search — it's built to look up one known person's contact details directly, rather than filtering a database of many people. Open their profile and use the email add-on there; see Find a verified email for the exact steps and cost. #### Can I find leads with signals like hiring or funding? Segment Search has dedicated filters for hiring activity and funding stage, so try those first if your signal fits a filter. For less structured signals — a specific job ad, a forum complaint, a press mention — AI Research is built for it: describe the signal in your brief and it searches the open web (plus optional paid sources) for evidence a filter can't match. #### Which finder is cheapest? Each finder bills on a different model: Person Search charges per profile you open plus optional per-contact add-ons, Segment Search charges per page of results, and AI Research has no fixed per-lead fee — it bills by the AI's actual usage. Segment Search also repeats an identical search free within 30 days, and reveals in Person Search and Segment Search only charge when something is actually found; see the price list for exact rates. #### Which finder is fastest? Person Search and Segment Search both return results in seconds. AI Research is the slowest of the three: it searches the web over several minutes, though it can keep running in the background while you do something else. #### Do the finders give me emails and phone numbers immediately? No. Person Search and Segment Search show whether a verified email or mobile exists and let you reveal it as a separate paid step, charged only when something is actually found — see Find a verified email and Find phone and mobile for exact rates. AI Research matches come with evidence but no contact details until you enrich them afterwards in a list. #### Can I use the finders without an account? Person Search goes furthest without an account: understanding your input and the candidate list are always free, and you can open a few full profiles free to try it before you're asked to sign up. Segment Search lets you build filters for free and AI Research lets you write a brief for free, but actually running either one needs a free account. #### Why did Person Search send me to Segment Search? Because your search described a group of people, not one person — for example "marketing managers in Berlin" — and a group is what Segment Search's filters are built for. ListPlus shows a "Target-group search detected" card with your criteria already set; click Open in Segment Search to run it there instead. #### Can I combine Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research in one list? Yes — all three finders write to the same lists via their own Add to list button (Segment Search shows it as Add To List), so you can build the bulk of a list in Segment Search, add a VIP contact from Person Search, and layer in signal-based matches from AI Research. Run the duplicate check afterwards, since the same person could come from more than one finder. --- ## Recipes: common ListPlus workflows Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/recipes Last updated: 2026-10-17 These are short, numbered paths through ListPlus for common goals. Each step names the exact place to click and points to the topic with the full detail — no new facts here, just the order to do things in. If your goal isn't below, start with "First steps by goal" or "Which finder do I use?" instead. ### 1. Prepare a cold-email campaign 1. Get your contacts in: import a file or build an audience in Segment Search ("[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)", "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)"). 2. In the list header click **Find & evaluate**, choose **Cold Email**, and use the cockpit bar's ready / enrichable / unusable counts ("[Is my list ready for cold email, CRM, or cold calling?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/campaign-ready-evaluations)"). 3. Fix format issues (typos, duplicates, invalid emails) — "Fix and Fix all", "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)", "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)". 4. Enrich the enrichable rows for a verified email — "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)". 5. Send the ready rows to your sequencer — "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)". ### 2. Clean a HubSpot export and push updates back 1. Bring the export in: import the CSV, or connect HubSpot directly (needs Premium) — "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)", "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)". 2. Run the checks and clean up duplicates and format issues — "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)", "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)", "Fix and Fix all". 3. Fill any gaps you want enriched — "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)". 4. Push the cleaned values back: on a list connected to HubSpot, apply any open AI suggestions and click **Write to HubSpot** in the Changes panel ("[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)", "[Setting up how changes push back to your source](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/push-changes-back)"); on a list imported from a CSV, use **Export** → HubSpot → **Contacts Only**, which creates or updates contacts ("[Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets)"). ### 3. Find decision makers at 50 target accounts 1. Open Segment Search and set the Company filter to your target accounts (names or websites) plus a Job title filter for the roles you want (e.g. VP, Director, Head of) — "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)", "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)". 2. Click **Search Contacts** (credits are charged per page of up to 25) and review the results table. 3. Tick the rows you want and click **Add To List** — with nothing ticked, ListPlus asks how many to add (the ones loaded, a number, or all). ### 4. Turn event or Zoom attendees into leads 1. Import the attendee list as a file, or connect Zoom (needs the Pro plan) to pull a webinar's Registrants or Participants directly — "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)", "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)". 2. Run the checks and remove duplicates — "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)", "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)". 3. Enrich for company, job title and a verified email — "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)". 4. Export or send the finished list onward — "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)". ### 5. Enrich inbound leads from a form 1. Give the list its own webhook: in the list click **Set up** in the header → **Webhook** → **Create webhook**, and point your form tool or a Zapier/Make/n8n step at the URL. Submissions land in the matching columns, free — "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". 2. Every submission goes into the list by default. To keep test entries, spam and invalid emails out, tick the **Hold back** options in the webhook panel; those records then wait in the Inbox for **Add anyway** or **Discard**. If your form can only notify you by e-mail, forward that e-mail to your Inbox address instead and click **Recognize contacts** (costs credits per run) — "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)". 3. Run the checks and enrich for the fields you need — "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)", "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)". 4. Continue as with any list: dedupe, export or sync onward — or hand the finished contacts to a pipeline (recipe 7). 5. To have this run without anyone clicking, set up two triggers in the list (**Triggers** in the list header): one with **a record is new in the list** and the action **Enrich** (choose the fields, a budget per record and the fill mode), and one with **a record is new or was changed** and the conditions a finished lead meets (for example a verified e-mail) that hands it to your CRM or Slack pipeline. Set that pipeline's **Release** to Automatic. The trigger template **Enrich, then pass on** sets up both: step 1 enriches new decision makers' e-mails, and after you save it, step 2 opens to pass them to the pipeline you pick — "[Triggers — hand records on automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers)" and "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)". ### 6. Get alerts when customers change jobs 1. For an ongoing check: put the people on the **Watchlist** (open their profile, or add them from the Inbox), tick them on the Watchlist page and click **Set alert** → **Job change** (costs credits per contact and month; checking daily costs more than weekly). ListPlus reports a new company, a new role or that the person left; pick a pipeline under **Send news to** if the news should go to Slack or your CRM by itself — "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)". 2. For a one-off check of a list: import or connect your customer/contact list — "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)", "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)". 3. Run **Detect Company Changes** (Enrich menu, AI Analysis group; free), or the **Detect Job Changes** wizard (Enrich menu → ENRICHMENT WIZARDS) for a fresh check: it verifies the email (charged per clear result) and re-fetches the LinkedIn profile (charged per profile found) — "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)". Both are one-off checks that you repeat yourself whenever you want an update; flagged rows show the old and new company in the record panel under "Signals". ### 7. Notify your team about new leads 1. Click **Flows** in the left rail, then **+** beside **Goes out · Pipelines** in its left column, and create a pipeline with the target your team reads — for example **Notify your team in Slack**, or a **Team email** digest to members of your workspace (see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)"). Owners and admins set pipelines up. 2. In a list, on the Watchlist or in a contact's detail view, click **Add → Send to pipeline** and pick the pipeline. 3. Open the pipeline and click **Send** to release the waiting entries, or set its **Release** to Automatic so they go out by themselves. A pipeline to a connected tool such as Slack needs Pro. Every record a pipeline delivers costs credits — the price depends on the target (a CRM costs more than a Slack message, your own webhook least; see the price list); only the Team email digest and handing records to another list are free. 4. To do it by itself, use the trigger template **Notify your team** in the list: new decision makers with a business e-mail go to your Slack pipeline and get the status "Qualified" — "[Trigger templates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-templates)". **Related topics:** first-steps-by-goal · which-finder-do-i-use · enrichment-overview · export-overview · pipelines-overview. ### FAQ #### How do I prepare a cold-email campaign? Import or build your list, check it against the Cold Email evaluation, fix format issues and duplicates, enrich the enrichable rows for a verified email, then send the ready rows to your sequencer. See "[Is my list ready for cold email, CRM, or cold calling?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/campaign-ready-evaluations)" and "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)" for the details of each step. #### How do I clean a HubSpot export and push updates back? Import the export (or connect HubSpot directly — needs Premium), run the checks, remove duplicates and fix issues, enrich any gaps, then push the cleaned values back: **Write to HubSpot** in the Changes panel on a connected list, or **Export** → HubSpot → **Contacts Only** on an imported one. See "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)", "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" and "[Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets)". #### How do I find decision makers at a list of target accounts? In Segment Search, set the Company filter to your target accounts (names or domains) together with a Job title filter for the roles you want, run the search, and add the matching rows to a list. See "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)" and "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)" for how the Company and Job title filters combine. #### How do I turn event or Zoom attendees into leads? Import the attendee list as a file, or connect Zoom to pull a webinar's Registrants or Participants directly, then run checks, dedupe and enrich the list like any other. See "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)" for what Zoom can import and "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)" for filling in the gaps. #### How do I enrich inbound leads from a form? Give the list its own webhook (in the list: Set up → Webhook → Create webhook) and point your form tool or a Zapier, Make or n8n step at the URL: submissions land in the matching columns for free, and with a Hold back option ticked, spam, test entries and invalid emails wait in the Inbox instead; then run the checks and enrich the fields you need. See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)"; if the form can only send e-mail, forward it to your Inbox address and use Recognize contacts instead. #### Can inbound leads be enriched and sent to my CRM or Slack automatically? Yes. A list webhook or a form brings the lead into a list; a trigger with "a record is new in the list" and the action Enrich fills its missing fields, and a second trigger whose conditions a finished lead meets (for example a verified e-mail) hands it to your CRM or Slack pipeline. With the pipeline's Release set to Automatic nobody has to click; connected targets need Pro (HubSpot: Premium). #### How do I get alerts when customers change jobs? For an ongoing check, tick the people on the Watchlist page and click Set alert → Job change (costs credits per contact and month; checking daily costs more than weekly): ListPlus reports a new company, a new role or that the person left, optionally straight into a pipeline. In a list, Detect Company Changes (free) and the paid Detect Job Changes wizard stay one-off checks you run yourself. See "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)" for what each option does and costs. #### How do I notify my team about new leads? Set up a pipeline in Flows (the "+" beside Goes out · Pipelines) with a Slack channel or a Team email digest to your workspace members as the target, then add contacts from a list, the Watchlist or the contact view with Add → Send to pipeline. Entries wait in the pipeline until someone clicks Send (or go out by themselves if the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic); each delivered Slack message costs credits per record, the Team email digest is free. Only owners and admins of a workspace can create pipelines; every member can add and send entries. #### What if my use case isn't one of these recipes? Start with "First steps by goal" to find the right topic for what you're trying to do, or "Which finder do I use?" if you're not sure whether Person Search, Segment Search or AI Research fits your situation best. --- ## How ListPlus compares to Clay, Apollo, Lusha and others Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/comparisons Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus is built around getting one list ready for a job, not around owning a database or running campaigns. You start from an import, a person, an audience or a description; ListPlus checks the data and fills gaps by calling several specialised data providers (never one proprietary database), and you pay in credits only for what is actually looked up. The app is EU-hosted in Frankfurt, and the same read-and-write API and MCP server are included on every plan, including Basic (no cost), so an AI agent can query, enrich and clean a list without a human clicking through a web app. ### Comparison table | | ListPlus | Clay | Apollo | Lusha | Cognism | ZoomInfo | Dealfront (now Leadfeeder, formerly Echobot) | Kaspr | Hunter.io | | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | **What it is** | List-readiness tool: import or find contacts, check them, fill gaps, export | Visual enrichment-workflow builder | Contact database with built-in email sequencing | Contact lookup (browser extension + web app) | Sales-intelligence database, known for phone-verified data | One of the largest US B2B databases plus a sales-engagement suite | Website-visitor identification and an EU contact database | LinkedIn contact-reveal extension (part of Cognism since 2022) | Email finder and verifier with a smaller lead database | | Own contact database | No — pulls from external data providers | No — a marketplace of 150+ third-party providers | Yes, its own | Yes, its own | Yes, its own | Yes, its own | Yes, plus its own visitor identification | Yes, its own | Yes, a smaller one ("Discover") | | Data sources | Several providers (for example Prospeo, FullEnrich, CompanyEnrich, Crunchbase, LinkedIn data, free web search) | 150+ third-party data providers | Mostly its own database | Its own database | Its own database, including phone verification | Its own database plus intent-data partners | Its own database plus website-visitor identification | Its own database, sourced from LinkedIn | Its own crawled and verified email data | | Pricing model | Basic plan at no cost plus two paid plans (monthly or yearly); lookups are billed in credits bought separately | Usage credits (data + platform actions) on tiered monthly plans | Paid seats plus usage credits | Paid seats plus credits, mostly billed annually | Per-seat, quote-based, sold on annual contracts | Quote-based, sold on annual contracts; no public price list | Tiered monthly or annual plans plus credits | Paid seats plus credits | Credits on monthly or annual plans | | EU hosting | Yes — Frankfurt | US company; no published EU hosting region | US datacenter; no EU/UK data-residency option (transfers use Standard Contractual Clauses and the EU-US Data Privacy Framework) | Israel/US company; EU personal data processed under an adequacy decision | UK company; stores EU personal data inside the EU/EEA | US company | EU company (Germany); processes and stores data inside the EU | France (EU company) | France (EU company) | | CRM sync | Sync back is started by you; pipelines can hand records to your CRM automatically once set up | Automatic CRM sync on higher plans | Native CRM integrations | CRM integrations | CRM enrichment/integration | Deep CRM integrations | CRM automations on higher plans | CRM integrations (HubSpot, Salesforce and more) | CRM integrations | | Sends emails | No | Yes, native sequencing or email-tool integrations | Yes, built-in email campaigns | No — connects to your outreach tool instead | No — data and enrichment only | Yes, via its sales-engagement add-on | No — identification and intent only | No — connects to your outreach tool instead | Yes, built-in email sequences | | API / MCP for AI agents | Yes, on every plan including Basic; an agent can read and write the whole list | Yes, an official MCP server | Yes, an official MCP server, works without a paid Apollo plan | Yes, an official MCP server | API tokens are self-serve, but only on the Platinum plan and above; an MCP connector has been announced but is not available yet | Yes, an official MCP server, but it needs a paid subscription | Yes, an MCP server (beta), only on paid plans | An API exists for paying subscribers; no confirmed official MCP | Yes, an official MCP server on all plans | No price in euros or dollars is quoted for competitors above because contract pricing changes often and most of them do not publish it; ListPlus's own prices are in "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)" and "Price list". ### Clay **Choose Clay when** you want to design your own multi-step enrichment logic across a spreadsheet-style canvas, calling many providers in sequence with conditional branches. Clay's strength is that flexibility: a GTM engineer can wire together 150+ providers by hand for a very specific workflow. **Choose ListPlus when** you want the checks, enrichment and CRM hand-off to already work without building a workflow first — pick an evaluation such as Cold Email, and ListPlus tells you which rows are ready and what the gaps would cost to fill. **Using both:** some teams build a one-off, unusual lookup in Clay, export the result as a file, and bring it into ListPlus to run quality checks, fill any remaining gaps from ListPlus's own providers, and hand the list to a CRM or export. ### Apollo **Choose Apollo when** you want one tool that combines a large owned contact database with built-in email sequencing, so prospecting and outreach happen in the same product. **Choose ListPlus when** you don't want your enrichment tied to a single database, don't want to send emails from the same tool that cleans your data, or want an AI agent to have full read-and-write access on every plan, including Basic. **Using both:** import an Apollo export or connect it through the AI agent API, run ListPlus's checks and enrichment to fill what Apollo didn't have, then send the finished list on — as a file, or with the export wizard to Instantly, Smartlead, Lemlist, Google Sheets, HubSpot or your own system by webhook. ### Lusha **Choose Lusha when** your work is mostly one profile at a time on LinkedIn — its browser extension reveals an email or phone with a click while you browse. **Choose ListPlus when** you're working with a whole list rather than one profile at a time: importing, checking, deduplicating and filling gaps across hundreds or thousands of rows before a campaign or a CRM import. **Using both:** export your Lusha lookups to a file and import them into ListPlus to check for duplicates, missing fields and formatting issues before you push the list onward. ### Cognism **Choose Cognism when** phone-verified mobile numbers at scale are the core requirement, particularly for EMEA sales teams running a rep-led outbound motion — that verification is a genuine strength of its dataset. **Choose ListPlus when** you want self-serve sign-up without a sales call, a flat monthly or yearly plan instead of per-seat annual contracts, or an AI agent operating the list directly. **Using both:** export the records where Cognism's phone data matters, import them into ListPlus, and use ListPlus's checks and other providers to fill everything else before the list goes to your CRM. ### ZoomInfo **Choose ZoomInfo when** your target accounts are mostly large US companies and you need the depth of one of the largest US B2B databases, plus intent and org-chart data, and have the budget for an enterprise annual contract. **Choose ListPlus when** you want transparent, self-serve pricing without a sales call, EU hosting, or an agent API that isn't gated behind a paid subscription. **Using both:** if you already have ZoomInfo, export the accounts you need and bring them into ListPlus to check data quality and fill gaps with ListPlus's own providers before syncing to your CRM. ### Dealfront / Echobot Echobot and the visitor-intelligence tool Leadfeeder merged into a single brand called Dealfront in 2023; as of 2026 the combined product goes back to being called Leadfeeder, so "Dealfront" and "Echobot" now point to the same, EU-hosted German company. **Choose it when** your priority is spotting anonymous website visitors and buying-intent signals for companies that already exist in your target market — that's what it was built for and ListPlus does not do it. **Choose ListPlus when** you need to turn a list of companies or people into checked, enriched, campaign-ready contacts rather than identify who is visiting your website. **Using both:** bring the companies it surfaces into a ListPlus list, then use Person Search or Segment Search to find and enrich the actual people at those accounts. ### Kaspr **Choose Kaspr when** you're prospecting on LinkedIn itself and want a quick email or phone reveal for the profile you're currently looking at, without leaving the page. **Choose ListPlus when** you're working from a list rather than one LinkedIn profile at a time, or you want quality checks and multiple providers instead of a single database. **Using both:** export the contacts you've revealed in Kaspr and import them into ListPlus to deduplicate, check and fill any remaining gaps before export. ### Hunter.io **Choose Hunter.io when** you just need to find or verify one email address by domain and don't need broader contact enrichment, company data or list management. **Choose ListPlus when** email is one of several things you're missing — ListPlus also verifies emails (charged per clear result) but adds phone numbers, LinkedIn URLs, company data and full-list checks in the same place. **Using both:** Hunter's Discover database and ListPlus's own providers can both miss the same contact; when one comes up empty, exporting to the other is a reasonable fallback. **Related topics:** what-is-listplus · which-finder-do-i-use · plans-and-pricing · price-list · where-does-the-data-come-from · api-connection-overview ### FAQ #### How is ListPlus different from Clay? Clay is a visual workflow builder: you wire together 150+ third-party providers yourself, step by step, to design a custom enrichment flow. ListPlus instead gives you a working list-readiness flow out of the box — import or find contacts, run checks, enrich the gaps and export — without building a workflow first, and most lookups are billed in credits only when data is found (some are billed per attempt, and AI commands by usage). #### How is ListPlus different from Apollo? Apollo combines its own contact database with built-in email sequencing, so prospecting and outreach happen in one tool. ListPlus has no contact database of its own and does not send emails; it checks and enriches a list from several providers, then hands it on to a sequencer such as Instantly or Smartlead or Lemlist, or to a CRM such as HubSpot, with an AI agent API included on every plan. #### Is ListPlus a Lusha alternative? Partially. Lusha is a browser extension for revealing an email or phone on one LinkedIn profile at a time; ListPlus works at the list level instead — importing, checking, deduplicating and enriching many rows together —. #### Why choose ListPlus instead of ZoomInfo? ZoomInfo is sold through sales on annual contracts with no public price list, and it is a US company. ListPlus has transparent self-serve pricing with no sales call, is EU-hosted in Frankfurt, and includes the AI agent API on every plan rather than gating it behind a paid subscription. #### How does ListPlus compare to Dealfront or Echobot? Dealfront (built from Echobot and Leadfeeder, and now trading again as Leadfeeder) identifies anonymous website visitors and buying-intent signals for companies — a use case ListPlus does not cover. ListPlus instead turns a list of companies or people you already have into checked, enriched contacts; many teams use the two together, feeding accounts it surfaces into a ListPlus list. #### How does ListPlus compare to Kaspr? Kaspr is a browser extension for revealing an email or phone while you browse LinkedIn profiles one at a time, and is part of Cognism. ListPlus works on a whole list at once — checks, deduplicates and enriches many rows from several providers — rather than one profile in your browser. #### How does ListPlus compare to Hunter.io? Hunter.io is focused on finding and verifying one email address by domain. ListPlus also verifies emails, but in the same list you can add phone numbers, LinkedIn URLs and company data, and run quality checks across the whole list before export. #### How does ListPlus compare to Cognism? Cognism is strong on phone-verified mobile numbers at EMEA scale, sold per seat on annual contracts with a sales-led sign-up. ListPlus has self-serve sign-up with no sales call, a flat monthly or yearly plan, and multiple data providers instead of one database, including phone lookups. #### Can I use ListPlus together with Apollo or Clay? Yes. Import an Apollo export or a Clay-built list as a file (or connect it through the AI agent API), and use ListPlus to run quality checks, fill any remaining gaps from ListPlus's own providers, and hand the finished list on — to Instantly, Smartlead, Lemlist, HubSpot or a webhook with the export wizard. #### Which is cheaper, ListPlus or a competitor? It depends on how you buy, not just the sticker price: ListPlus has no per-seat pricing. A team works in a shared workspace, where teammates join free and spend the workspace owner's plan and credits, so compare one owner's plan plus the credits the whole team uses. Most database vendors instead add seats on top of credits, often sold on annual contracts; see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)" for ListPlus's exact numbers and the comparison table above for each competitor's pricing model. --- ## Navigation and glossary Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/navigation-and-glossary Last updated: 2026-10-17 ### Where things are in the app The left navigation is a permanent icon rail. Item order and the label under each icon tell you where you are — there are no group headings any more. Top to bottom: **Home** (Start; your projects and lists at a glance) and **Lists** (Listen), then **Find** (Finden). Clicking it opens the search you used last (the first time: Person Search); at the top of every search page a switch leads to the others: **Individual** (Person Search), **People** and **Companies** (Segment Search), **Markets** and **AI Research** (starting a new run also works on a phone — see "[Using ListPlus on a phone or tablet](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/mobile-and-small-screens)"). Then **Flows**, the overview of everything that moves records through your workspace (see "[Flows — everything that moves records, on one page](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/flows-overview)"). The **Inbox** (Eingang) is a page of Flows: click **Flows**, then **Inbox** in the left column under **Comes in**; **Add content** at its top right opens the manual input. Clicking **Flows** opens **To do** first. The number on the Flows icon is what needs you: entries to release, failed or held ones, undecided Inbox entries, places that need attention and new AI research hits. Its left column also holds To do, the Inbox, lists with their own way in, Connected accounts and your **Pipelines**, where you set up where your records are sent on to — your CRM, Slack, a sequencer, n8n, Make, Zapier or your own API (see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)"). **Watchlist** (formerly Saved / Gemerkt) sits right after **Find**, before **Flows**: the bookmark icon labelled "Watch", with a small grey number of contacts on your watchlist once they have been loaded. The number turns **violet** when contacts or companies with alerts have news you haven't seen yet (a job change, a new LinkedIn post, new job postings of a company); clicking it then opens the Watchlist's **News** view (see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)" and "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). Home, Lists, the searches, Inbox, Watchlist and Flows all open a full page — none of them is a floating panel any more. Clicking **Lists** from another page opens the **Lists** view with your project/list tree and nothing chosen yet; it never jumps straight into the list you had open (see below). Clicking the rail item of the page you are already on shows or hides that page's left column — this works for Lists, Watchlist and Flows on windows 750 pixels wide or more. Clicking **Find** while you are on a search does nothing; use the switch at the top of the page instead. At the bottom: **Commands** (a magnifier icon only, no text label — ⌘K on Mac, Ctrl+K elsewhere), your credit balance, a **gear icon** for **Settings** (once signed in), and your avatar. Text labels under the icons only appear once your browser window is at least 768 pixels wide and 720 pixels tall; on a smaller window you see icons with tooltips instead. On short windows (below 605 pixels tall) the rail also hides the Commands icon to save vertical space — everything stays reachable through Commands (⌘K) or by making the window taller. The **gear** icon opens **Settings** (`/app/settings`) as a full page, not a floating panel any more. It groups everything in two sections: **My account** holds **Profile & sign-in** (your language, email, passkeys, signed-in devices and "Delete account"); **Workspace** holds **General**, **Members**, **Company knowledge**, **Plan & billing**, **Credits & usage**, **Connected accounts**, **Privacy & compliance** (the workspace policy and the privacy documents) and **Block list** — see "Where are my settings, and where is the Block list?" below. Your **avatar** opens a separate menu: your name, a card for the active **workspace** (its plan badge, a switch icon, and your credit balance with **+ Top up** for the owner), then **Settings**, **Plan & billing**, **Help**, **Language** (English, Deutsch, Español, Français) and **Sign out**. Without an account, the avatar menu shows **Guest** with a **Start for free** button and the **Plans & Billing**, **Help**, **Language** and **Login** rows. ### Workspaces Everything you work on — lists, projects, the Watchlist, the Inbox, AI Research runs, pipelines and connected accounts — lives in a **workspace** and is shared with its members. Every account starts with one workspace, and you can create more. The **workspace switcher** sits in the header of the Home page (where the plan button used to be) and is also reachable from the workspace row in your avatar menu; use it to switch workspaces, invite people, open **Workspace settings** or **Create workspace**. See "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)" and "[Switch, create and rename workspaces](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/switch-and-create-workspaces)". ### The Lists view Clicking **Lists**, or opening any list, puts you in the Lists view. On windows 750 pixels wide or more, a project/list tree can be docked as a column next to the rail. With no list open it is always shown; inside a list it **starts collapsed** so the list gets the full width — open it with **Show list tree** in the list header, **⌘⇧L**, or a second click on **Lists** in the rail. You can collapse it again (the round button on its divider, or **⌘⇧L**) and resize it by dragging the divider (double-click resets it, and your width and open/closed state are remembered). On phones (below 750 pixels) the rail itself is replaced by a **Menu** button at the top left, the docked tree is hidden, and the list header shows a **Show list tree** button (also ⌘⇧L) that opens it as a panel instead. With no list open, you see **"Pick a list"** once you have lists ("All your lists and projects are on the left – one click opens a list here.") or the **"No lists yet"** start page if you don't — with six ways to a first list and **Open a sample list** (see "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)"). This page is browsable without an account. A **+** next to the "Lists" title in the tree starts a new list; owners and admins of the workspace can drag a list onto a project folder to move it in, or onto **Your Lists** to take it back out — see "Projects and list management" for the full rules. ### Inside a list The list header, left to right: the list's title (click to rename), the **Find & evaluate** search field, **Reload** (only for lists imported from an online source), the save status (**Saved** / **Saving …** — edits are saved automatically) with **Undo** and **Redo**, four quick buttons — **Analyze**, **Record**, **Enrich**, **Triggers** — each opening one panel, a **More** menu split into **Essentials** (those same four panels) and **More tools** (Sublists, Changes, Columns, Prompts, Automation, Dashboard), an **Export** arrow, a **Set up** icon (two sliders next to the list's name; a full page with everything the list can do — webhook, statuses, columns, look, permissions; see "[Set up: what a list can do, and its settings](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-settings)"), and a **⋯** menu with more export options, Add Column and List Settings (which opens the same Set up page). Selecting rows shows a selection bar above the grid with actions for just those rows (Enrich, Status, Tag, Add) — this bar only appears when no evaluation is active; with an evaluation active, the evaluation bar offers enrichment for the selection instead. The status bar at the bottom shows view filters (All, Filtered, Selection, Changes), your tag chips, the credits spent on this list, and the zoom level. See "list-editor-tour" for the full walkthrough of every panel. ### Glossary | Term (EN / DE) | Meaning | Where you see it | | ------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | | List (Liste) | A table of rows and columns holding your contacts or companies. | Lists view, list header | | Record / row (Datensatz / Zeile) | One entry in a list, usually one person or company. | Grid, status bar, record limit | | Column & content type (Spalte & Inhaltstyp) | A field in a list; its content type (email, first name, company, phone, LinkedIn URL and more — about 170 in total) decides which checks, enrichments and AI examples are offered for it. | Add Column dialog, Set up → Columns | | Project (Projekt) | A folder on Home that groups related lists together. | Home page | | Workspace (Workspace) | The shared space for a team or client: its lists, projects, Watchlist, Inbox, research, pipelines and connections. Paid actions use the workspace owner's plan and credits. | Home header switcher, avatar menu | | Owner / Admin / Member (Owner / Admin / Mitglied) | The three roles in a workspace. The owner's plan and credits pay for it; owners and admins manage lists and settings; members work with the data. | Members & invites | | Sublist (Subliste) | A saved segment of a list: a named rule (a filter) with a color and a live count of the rows it applies to. | Sublists panel | | Tag (Tag) | A free-text label on an individual row. | Selection bar, status bar tag chips | | Check (Check) | A free, automatic test of your data's quality, such as invalid emails or duplicate names. | Analyze panel | | Evaluation (Auswertung) | The job you want a list ready for, e.g. Cold Email; every row is rated ready, enrichable or unusable against it. | Find & evaluate field | | Enrichment (Anreicherung) | Looking up missing data — email, phone, company, LinkedIn — from external data providers; most lookups cost credits. | Enrich panel, the ✨ cell wand | | Provider (Anbieter) | The external data source behind a lookup, such as Prospeo or FullEnrich. | Record panel, "Enriched" sections | | Credit (Credit) | The currency for paid actions in ListPlus, shown as "CR". | Rail footer, Settings → Credits & usage | | Balance (Guthaben) | Your current credit total. | Avatar menu workspace card, Settings → Credits & usage | | Record limit (Datensatzlimit) | The rows the workspace owner's plan edits, counted across all lists in all workspaces that person owns; above it the lists are read-only (Basic imports up to 25,000, edits 5,000). | Record-limit warning | | Watchlist (formerly Saved / Gemerkt) | People your workspace chose to keep — from a search or the Inbox — until they go into a list or a pipeline. Contacts on it can get alerts (Set alert: job change, new LinkedIn posts, checked weekly or daily — paid per contact and month). Companies are kept apart under Companies and can get alerts on new job postings. Someone you only viewed isn't on it; they show under Recently viewed (bottom of the Watchlist page's left column). | Watchlist page | | Inbox (Eingang) | Where you paste notes, signatures or invitations — or forward an email — and ListPlus recognizes the people in them. | Flows → Inbox | | API connection / MCP (API-Verbindung) | A token that gives one AI agent (Claude, ChatGPT, or your own script) scoped access to one list. | Automation panel | | Push back / Write to source (Zurückspielen) | Sending your edits back to the source system you imported from — one-way, and only when someone clicks it. | Changes panel → **Write to HubSpot** (or the source's name) | | Reload from source (Neu laden) | Pulling fresh data from the source into the list — the opposite direction from push back. | Reload button in the list header | ### App vs website names The app uses short names; the listplus.ai website uses descriptive ones for the same thing: | App name | Website name | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Segment Search (Segmentsuche) — **People** / **Companies** in the Find switch | Audience database | | AI Research (KI-Recherche) | AI audience research | | Person Search (Personensuche) | Person lookup / email finder | | Basic | The plan without a monthly fee (never "Free" — you still need credits once your starting 25 are used) | The Inbox is neither your email inbox nor the Outlook add-in — see the FAQ below. ### For advanced users - A **list** is a table of records (rows) and columns; records count against the workspace owner's record limit, across all workspaces that person owns. - Each column has a **content type** (email, first name, company, phone, LinkedIn URL, country and more — about 170 in total), detected automatically at import and changeable later. The type decides which checks, enrichments and AI examples are offered for that column. - Every row keeps its **enrichment results by provider**, separate from your own cell values — nothing overwrites a cell on its own. You choose when to fill empty cells from them, or take a single value over in the Record panel. - **Sublists** are saved segments of a list: each is a named rule (a filter) that shows the rows it applies to right now. **Tags** are free labels on individual rows; a sublist rule can use them. **Related topics:** what-is-listplus · which-finder-do-i-use · list-editor-tour · saving-is-manual · what-is-a-workspace · enrichment-overview · campaign-ready-evaluations · segments-and-tags · account-and-login. ### FAQ #### Where do I find things in the app? The left navigation is a permanent icon rail with no group headings: Home and Lists sit at the top, then Find (it opens the search you used last; a switch at the top of each search leads to Individual, People, Companies, Markets and AI Research), then the Watchlist (bookmark icon), then Flows (it opens To do; its left column leads to the Inbox and to your pipelines). At the bottom sit Commands (a magnifier icon, ⌘K or Ctrl+K), your credit balance, a gear icon for Settings, and your avatar. Every item opens a full page; the workspace switcher is in the Home page header and in your avatar menu. #### Where is the Enrich button in a list? The Enrich button sits in the list header next to Analyze and Record, and opens the Enrich panel. Select rows with no evaluation active and a selection bar above the grid offers Enrich for just those rows; with an evaluation active, the evaluation bar offers enrichment instead. Enrichment costs credits per lookup, and the Enrich menu and the selection bar show the maximum cost before you start. #### Where are the other list panels like Prompts or Automation? In a list, click More in the header. Essentials holds Analyze, Record, Enrich and Triggers; More tools holds Sublists, Changes, Columns, Prompts, Automation and Dashboard — Enrich, Triggers, Prompts and Automation only appear if you can edit the list. #### Why are the app names different from the website? The app uses short names, the website uses descriptive ones: Segment Search (Segmentsuche) is the website's "audience database", AI Research (KI-Recherche) is its "AI audience research", and Person Search (Personensuche) is its "person lookup". The plan without a monthly fee is called Basic, not Free — you still need credits once your starting 25 are used. #### Is the Inbox my email inbox? No — the Inbox (Eingang) is a place in ListPlus where you paste notes, email signatures or calendar invitations, or forward an email to your own Inbox address, and ListPlus recognizes the people in them; it does not read your mailbox. It is also not the Outlook add-in, which works inside Outlook itself. Entries disappear after 14 days unless you save the contacts or add them to a list. #### How is data organised in ListPlus? (technical) A list is a table of records (rows) and columns, and each column has a content type — email, first name, company, LinkedIn URL and about 170 more — that decides which checks, enrichments and AI examples apply to it. Every row keeps its enrichment results by provider, separate from your own cell values, and you choose when to fill empty cells from them. Sublists are saved segments of a list (each a named rule that filters the rows), and tags are free labels on individual rows. #### What is a sublist? A sublist is a saved segment of a list — a named rule (a filter) with a color and a live count, showing the rows it applies to right now, which you can filter, enrich or export on their own. You can't add single rows by hand; to collect rows yourself, tag them and make a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of …". Create or manage sublists in the Sublists panel, under More in the list header. #### What is the difference between tags and sublists? Tags are free-text labels on individual rows, good for quick, informal marking. Sublists are saved rules that show the matching rows of a list, which you can filter or export on their own. They work together: a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of …" shows every row that carries a tag, and a row can carry several tags and match several sublists at once. #### What is a project? A project is a folder on the Home page that groups related lists together, showing their combined list count, record count and last-modified date. Create one with + New under Projects, then drag a list onto it, or create a new list while inside the project. Deleting a project does not delete its lists — they just become unassigned. #### What is a content type, and why does it matter? Every column has a content type — email, first name, company, phone, country, LinkedIn URL and many more — that ListPlus detects automatically when you import data. The content type decides which quality checks, enrichment routes and AI example prompts are offered for that column, so a wrong type can hide the right options. Change it any time under Set up → Columns in the list, though the page reloads after you save. #### What does the CR number at the bottom mean? CR is the small label under the number at the bottom of the left navigation — the number above it is your current credit balance. Click it, or open Settings → Credits & usage (gear icon, or your avatar menu), to buy more credits or see how they were spent. (What credits are and cost is explained in "credits-explained".) #### Why don't I see labels under the navigation icons? Labels only appear once your browser window is at least 768 pixels wide and 720 pixels tall; a smaller or narrower window shows icons with tooltips instead. On short windows (below 605 pixels tall) the app also hides the Commands icon to save vertical space. Everything stays reachable — open Commands with ⌘K (or Ctrl+K), or make the window taller. #### Where are my settings, and where is the Block list? Click the gear icon at the bottom of the left navigation, or "Settings" in your avatar menu, to open Settings as a full page. "My account" holds Profile & sign-in (your language, email, passkeys and signed-in devices); "Workspace" holds General, Members, Company knowledge, Plan & billing, Credits & usage, Connected accounts, Privacy & compliance (the workspace policy, the privacy package and the DPA) and Block list — the emails and domains your workspace never wants in a list or pipeline. On a phone, Settings shows as a list of sections that each open full-width. #### What is the difference between the Watchlist and Lists? Lists is the **Lists** item in the left rail: it opens the Lists view with your project/list tree, and inside a list it shows or hides that tree. The Watchlist (formerly Saved, German Gemerkt) is the bookmark icon after Find in the rail, labelled "Watch" there; the page is titled "Watchlist" in every language; the article on the Watchlist and Lists explains why both exist and how they differ. #### What does "enrichable" mean? Enrichable means a row is missing something your chosen evaluation needs, but that data can likely be looked up through enrichment — unlike ready (already complete) or unusable (missing something enrichment can't fix, such as no name and no company to search by). You see these labels once you pick an evaluation, such as Cold Email, in the Find & evaluate field. Enriching only the enrichable rows keeps costs down, and the app always shows the maximum cost first. --- ## Using ListPlus on a phone or tablet Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/mobile-and-small-screens Last updated: 2026-10-15 There's no separate app in the App Store or Google Play — ListPlus runs in your phone's or tablet's browser, at the same listplus.ai/app address as on a computer. ### What works on a phone or tablet Person Search, Segment Search, the Watchlist and the Inbox all work in a mobile browser, and so does opening a list to check, enrich or edit it — the layout adapts to the narrower screen. On a list, the header keeps every button, but on narrow headers the save status shows only its icon (no "Saved" text) and the Apply button for AI suggestions only its number, to leave room for the list's title. Between 750 and 767 pixels wide the left navigation shows icons only, without labels. Below 750 pixels (phones) the navigation disappears: a **Menu** button at the top left opens a list of all destinations, with Find's searches listed under it. Pages with two columns (Lists, Inbox, Pipelines, Watchlist, Segment Search, AI Research) keep both columns down to 750 pixels — collapse the left one with its round button when you need the room. Below 750 pixels the left column (list tree, folders, filters, pipelines, Inbox entries, researches) becomes a panel that fills the screen: open it with the worded button at the right of the page header (such as **Filter** or **Entries**; in a list, the icon left of the title). The panel's own button leads back (such as **Results →**) or says **Close**; Esc closes it too. Picking an entry closes it for you; on the Inbox, Pipelines and AI Research it opens by itself while nothing is selected yet. Starting a new **AI Research** now also works on a phone: with no run open, the usual form to describe and start one fills the screen, and tapping **+** in the header (icon only, on phones) returns to it from an open run — the runs list itself lives in that side panel. Watching a research also works from a phone — every research runs on the server, so you can open one started on your computer, follow its progress and review matches. You can also forward an email into your Inbox from your phone's own mail app, the same as from a computer. Switching workspaces works on a phone too: tap your avatar and open the workspace row (the same menu as the switcher in the Home header). Without an account, the avatar menu shows **Guest** with a **Start for free** button to sign up. ### Getting support on the go On a phone there is no round **?** button: open the menu (top left) and tap **Help**, then use the **Ask ListPlus** field under the guides. Email support@listplus.ai works the same everywhere. See "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for details. **Related topics:** ai-research · background-runs · contact-support · switch-and-create-workspaces. ### FAQ #### Is there a ListPlus app for phones? No — there's no app in the App Store or Google Play. ListPlus runs in your phone's or tablet's browser at listplus.ai/app, the same address as on a computer. #### Can I check, enrich and edit a list from my phone? Yes. Opening a list, running quality checks, enriching rows and editing cells all work in a mobile browser, though a computer is easier for large lists. #### Can I use Person Search or Segment Search on a phone? Yes, both work in a mobile browser — Segment Search, for example, moves its filters into a full-screen panel you open with the Filter button in the page header. Below 750 pixels wide the left navigation is replaced by a Menu button at the top left. #### Can I start an AI Research from my phone? Yes — with no run open, the form to describe and start a research fills the phone screen the same way it does on desktop. Tap "+" in the header (shown as an icon only on phones) to get back to that form from an open run; the list of your past runs lives in a full-screen panel you open with the button in the page header. #### Why does the list header only show an icon instead of "Saved" on my phone? On narrow screens the list header shows the save status as an icon only, to leave room for the list's title and other buttons: a check means saved, a spinner means saving, red means not saved yet (it retries automatically). There is no Save button — edits are saved automatically about a second after you make them. #### Can I watch a research that's already running, on my phone? Yes — every research runs on the server, so one you started on your computer shows up on your phone too. Opening it, watching its progress, and reviewing and adding its matches to a list all work on a phone. #### Does the support chat work on a phone? There is no live support chat, but the AI help works the same as on a computer: open the menu at the top left, tap Help and type your question into the "Ask ListPlus" field. To reach a person, use "Send to support" under an answer or email support@listplus.ai. #### Can I import a file or connect a tool from my phone? Yes — importing a file or connecting a tool such as Google Sheets or HubSpot both work in a mobile browser, though a computer is easier for large lists. --- ## Help in the app: guides, video and AI help Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/help-in-the-app Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every main view has a round **?** button in the bottom-right corner (on a phone: **?** in the menu). It opens the help for the view you are in: its recorded guides, the questions people have there, and a field to ask the AI help. Nothing opens by itself: ListPlus has no automatic tour, you ask for help when you want it. On a computer the button flashes briefly once, about six seconds after a view opens — once per view and browser session, and never again in a view where you have opened the help. ### Where the button is The button appears in Home, a list, New list, Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research, Inbox, Watchlist, Pipelines and the Flows pages. In a list it sits just above the status bar. Other pages have no help list and no button. ### What the card shows Click the button and a card opens above it. It shows a headline for the view, then the view's recorded guides with a counter such as "1 of 3 viewed" and a progress bar. A video is marked **Video** and with a play icon; others show a guide length in minutes. On Home, **Watch the intro** at the bottom of the card plays the short product video "[What is ListPlus?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/what-is-listplus)". Below the guides come the view's questions in groups — for example in a list **Data quality** ("How do I find duplicates — even with different spellings — and merge them?") and **Enrich & hand on**; **Step by step** holds the tasks whose guide is not recorded yet. Each view has its own questions. One group is open at a time; click a group's heading to open it. Click a question and the AI help answers it in the same window. Under the question field, the line **Prefer email? support@listplus.ai** opens a mail to support directly. Press Esc or click the button again to close the card. ### Opening a guide Click an entry: the guide opens in a dialog on top of the page, with the buttons **Open in its own window** and a close button. On a phone the guide opens directly in a window of its own. Opening an entry ticks it as viewed, and you can open a ticked entry again at any time. A task whose guide is not recorded yet is not a guide entry: it stands under **Step by step** as a question, and the AI help answers it from the help articles. ### What is remembered The ticks and the views where you hid the button are kept with your account, so they are the same on every device. Without an account they are kept in the browser only. ### Hide the button, bring it back Click **Hide here** at the bottom of the card to remove the button from that view only; other views keep theirs. To bring it back, open the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) and choose **Help**, or choose **Help** in the menu at your avatar. That shows the view's card again with its button. On a page that has no help list, **Help** opens the help window with the cursor in the question field. ### Ask ListPlus: the AI help Under the questions is a field titled **Ask ListPlus** ("AI help · knows your plan and credits") with the placeholder "What would you like to know?". Asking opens the conversation in the same window (header **ListPlus Help**); a line shows the active workspace's plan and credits, and **Guides** takes you back to the list. **Contact support** at the bottom of the Home page and **Help** in the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) or the avatar menu open this window with the cursor in the question field. The answers come from an AI, not a person. It answers only from the help articles and from your workspace's plan and credit balance. When you ask in an open list, it also gets that list's counts — rows, which columns were recognised and how many rows have a value in them, rows without an e-mail that a lookup can still search, duplicate or invalid e-mail addresses — and answers with your numbers ("140 of your 312 rows have …"). It never sees the values in your list or its name. An answer can carry up to three buttons that open the right place (for example **Import from HubSpot** or **Open the Block list**), links to places inside its text, a link to a guide and its source articles. If the help says nothing about a question, it says so ("The help says nothing about this."); questions that are not about ListPlus are declined. Button names are given in the language of your interface. Asking costs no credits. You can drag the window by its top area. It stays open when you go to another page while a conversation is open, and the conversation is kept until you close the browser tab. ListPlus keeps each question and its answer for 30 days to check and improve the answers — without your name, e-mail address or user ID. There is a daily limit of questions per person, and several questions in a row that are not about ListPlus pause the help for a while. If your workspace's owner switched off AI features, the AI help is off too. ### Reaching a person Under an answer that found nothing, that concerns a topic for a person (an invoice, lost data) or that ended in an error, **Send to support** lets you add a line and click **Send**: the conversation, your workspace, plan and the page you are on are e-mailed to support and you get a copy. Support answers by e-mail, usually within one working day. You can also write to support@listplus.ai yourself — the address is a link under the question field of the help card (**Prefer email?**); **Copy conversation** copies the chat for your mail. See "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for what to include. On the ListPlus website, the button **Questions about ListPlus?** at the bottom right of the website's pages (only a small round button on blog posts, none on the legal pages) opens the same AI help for visitors without an account. **Related topics:** contact-support · navigation-and-glossary · first-10-minutes. ### FAQ #### Where is the help button in ListPlus? The round ? button sits in the bottom-right corner of Home, a list, New list, Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research, Inbox, Watchlist, Pipelines and the Flows pages. Click it to open the guides for the view you are in. #### What does the help card show? A headline for the view, its recorded guides with a counter like "1 of 3 viewed", then the view's own questions in groups (one open at a time), the question field "Ask ListPlus" for the AI help with the line "Prefer email? support@listplus.ai" under it, and at the bottom "Hide here". #### How do I open a guide? Click its entry in the help card and the guide opens in a dialog on the page. Use "Open in its own window" in the dialog to see it larger; on a phone it opens directly in its own window. Opening it ticks the entry as viewed. #### Where are the guides that are not recorded yet? Under Step by step, as questions: click one and the AI help answers it from the help articles. Once its guide is recorded, it moves up to the guides. #### Where is the intro video? Click the ? button on Home, then Watch the intro at the bottom of the help card. #### Are my viewed guides saved? Yes. The ticks are kept with your account, so they show on every device you sign in with. Without an account they are kept only in your browser. #### Does ListPlus start a tour or open help by itself? No — there is no automatic tour, and the help card opens only when you click the ? button. On a computer the button flashes briefly once per view and browser session, until you have opened the help in that view. #### How do I hide the help button? Open the help card and click "Hide here". The button disappears from that view only and the other views keep theirs. #### How do I bring the help button back? Open the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) and choose Help, or choose Help in the menu at your avatar. That shows the button and the card of the view you are in again. On a page without a help list, Help opens the help window with the cursor in the question field. #### How do I ask a question from the app? Type it into the "Ask ListPlus" field under the guides in the help window, or click one of the view's questions. An AI answers from the help articles and your workspace's plan and credits, free of charge. If it cannot help, click "Send to support" under its answer; support replies by e-mail. #### Is the AI help a person? No. It is an AI that answers only from the ListPlus help articles and your workspace's plan and credits, and it does not see the contents of your lists. A person answers only by e-mail, via "Send to support" or support@listplus.ai. #### Does the conversation stay when I change page? Yes, while a conversation is open the window stays open on other pages. In your browser it is kept until you close the tab; ListPlus keeps each question and answer for 30 days, without your name or user ID, to improve the answers. --- ## Section: Plans, credits & billing ## Plans and pricing Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus has three plans, billed monthly or yearly. A plan decides how many records you can work with across all lists in the workspaces you own, which tools you can connect and what a credit costs, for you and every member of those workspaces; it does not include monthly credits — credits pay separately for lookups and AI (see "Do paid plans include credits every month?"). ### The plans | Plan | Monthly | Yearly (2 months free) | Records across all lists | Contacts with alerts | Price per credit | Adds | | ------- | ----------- | ---------------------- | ------------------------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Basic | €0 / $0 | — | Import 25,000, edit 5,000 | 100 | €0.05 / $0.06 | Nothing to unlock — file import/export from day one | | Pro | €49 / $55 | €490 / $550 | 100,000 | 1,000 | €0.03 / $0.035 | Connected tools: Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps; pipeline targets such as Slack | | Premium | €129 / $149 | €1,290 / $1,490 | 1,000,000 | 5,000 | €0.03 / $0.035 | HubSpot everywhere; import from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion, Stripe; reference lists | "Contacts with alerts" is how many people on the Watchlist a workspace can have alerts on (job changes, new LinkedIn posts) at the same time (paid per contact and month — see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)"). One list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan; the numbers in the table are totals across all your lists. On Basic you can import up to 25,000 records and edit up to 5,000. Above 5,000 your lists become read-only — you can still view, filter, analyse and export everything, and nothing is deleted — until you upgrade or delete lists (see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)"). You pay in euros if you're in Europe (EU/EEA, the UK, Switzerland or the Balkans) and in US dollars everywhere else, based on the country you're paying from; once you've paid once, you keep that currency for later purchases. Yearly pays the full year upfront at 10× the monthly price, which is why it's shown as "2 months free." Every plan, including Basic, already includes: Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research, all quality checks in Analyze, every enrichment provider, file import and export (CSV, Excel, JSON), the Agent API (REST + MCP) for connecting an AI agent to a list, and list webhooks (a list's own address for forms, Zapier, Make or n8n — they cost no credits; Basic takes up to 100 records a day this way, Pro 5,000, Premium 50,000 — see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)"). Pro and Premium add the listed connected tools (nothing that goes through a connected tool works on Basic; each request to the tool costs credits — a pipeline delivery is priced per record instead — see the price list), a higher record limit and credits that cost 40% less; Premium also adds **reference lists** (mark existing customers, competitors and partners everywhere and use them in pipelines and triggers) and includes everything Pro does. Current prices in both currencies are always shown at listplus.ai/pricing. ### Plans and credits are separate Subscribing to Pro or Premium does not give you a monthly credit allowance — the only credits tied to a plan are one-time, granted once per plan tier. You get 25 free credits when you sign up, a 250-credit bonus the first time you subscribe to Pro, and a 1,000-credit bonus the first time you subscribe to Premium; if you start on Pro and later upgrade to Premium, you receive both bonuses, each once. Renewing or staying on the same plan never repeats a bonus, and every lookup or AI action is still paid from your credit balance, which you top up in packs on any plan — with Pro or Premium every pack costs 40% less (see "[Buying credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits)"). Credits never expire — not when the month ends, not when you change or cancel your plan. See "Do paid plans include credits every month?" and the price list for what things cost. ### How to subscribe or change your plan 1. Open **Plans & Billing** (Settings → Plan & billing → **Compare plans**, or **Plans & Billing** in the avatar menu when signed out) and toggle **Monthly / Yearly · 2 months free** at the top to compare both prices. 2. If you're on Basic, click **Subscribe to Pro** or **Subscribe to Premium** on the plan and interval you want — this is for a first subscription only. You're taken to Stripe Checkout to pay, and the plan plus its one-time credit bonus apply as soon as payment succeeds. 3. If you're already on Pro or Premium, the button on another plan's card reads **Switch to {plan}**, and the button on your own plan's card reads **Switch to yearly** or **Switch to monthly** once you move the toggle — use either to switch plan, interval, or both (Premium → Pro, monthly → yearly, or both at once). You can do the same from **Change plan** in **Settings → Plan & billing**. Every one of these opens Stripe's own confirmation page showing the prorated amount for exactly that change; the change applies immediately and the difference is invoiced right away (Stripe credits you for the unused time on your old plan or interval). ListPlus refuses to start a second subscription, so you can never end up paying for two plans at once. ### How to see your current plan The avatar menu's workspace card shows the plan badge of the active workspace (hover the avatar to see "Name · Pro-Plan"); **Settings → Plan & billing** shows "Current plan: Pro". For the next charge date, payment method, billing address and invoices, open **Settings → Plan & billing**. ### What ListPlus does not offer ListPlus has no enterprise tier, no free trial of a paid plan, and no discounts or coupon codes — three plans at listed prices, monthly or yearly, is the whole model. There is no per-seat price either: teams work in a shared workspace, where the owner's plan and credits cover every member, and members are free (see "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)"). ### Payment and VAT Plan and credit pack prices are net prices: VAT is never included. Both subscriptions and credit packs are sold through Stripe Managed Payments: the sale is handled on our behalf by Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company, as merchant of record; it appears on the checkout page and on your invoice ("Sold through Link"). Link adds VAT or sales tax for your country at checkout, calculated from your billing address, pays it to the tax authorities and emails you the receipt and invoice. You pay by card, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Link or a local method the checkout offers. For invoices and other VAT questions, see "[Invoices and VAT](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat)". ### For advanced users Everything that goes through a connected tool — connecting under "Connect a system" on the New List page, importing, reloading, syncing back, exporting to Google Sheets and pipeline targets such as Slack — needs Pro (Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps); HubSpot needs Premium everywhere, and importing from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion or Stripe needs Premium. Turning a list into a **reference list** (Premium) and your **record limit** across all lists depend on your plan. Exporting a list as a file (Excel, CSV, JSON) and the **Agent API** work on every plan. **Related topics:** which-plan-do-i-need · credits-explained · price-list · record-limit · buying-credits · invoices-and-vat · cancel-downgrade-leave · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### Which plans does ListPlus have? ListPlus has three plans, each billed monthly or yearly: Basic (€0/$0), Pro (€49/month or €490/year, $55/month or $550/year) and Premium (€129/month or €1,290/year, $149/month or $1,490/year). Every plan already includes all finders (Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research), enrichment, quality checks, exports and the Agent API. Pro and Premium add more integrations, a higher record limit across your lists and credits that cost 40% less. #### Is the Basic plan actually free? Yes, the plan without a monthly fee is called Basic in the app. You can import up to 25,000 records across all lists and edit up to 5,000; above 5,000 your lists are read-only until you upgrade, but you can still view, analyse and export them. Lookups still need credits: you get 25 free credits at sign-up and can buy more at any time, at €0.05/$0.06 per credit. #### What do Pro and Premium add over Basic? Pro (€49/month or €490/year; $55/month or $550/year) raises your record limit to 100,000 across all lists (at most 50,000 in one list), all editable, unlocks connected tools (Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps and pipelines to Slack and similar targets), makes credits 40% cheaper (€0.03/$0.035 instead of €0.05/$0.06) and gives a one-time 250-credit bonus on first subscription. Premium (€129/month or €1,290/year; $149/month or $1,490/year) raises the limit to 1,000,000 records, adds HubSpot (everywhere), importing from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe and reference lists, and gives a one-time 1,000-credit bonus, on top of everything in Pro. #### Are list webhooks included in my plan, and how many records can they take? Yes, list webhooks are free on every plan and use no credits. Basic takes up to 100 records a day (100 per call, 30 calls per minute), Pro 5,000 a day (500 per call, 60 calls per minute) and Premium 50,000 a day (500 per call, 120 calls per minute). The daily number counts all list webhooks of a workspace together. #### How much do Pro and Premium cost? Pro costs €49/month or €490/year (outside Europe: $55/month or $550/year), and Premium costs €129/month or €1,290/year ($149/month or $1,490/year) — yearly is 10× the monthly price, so you get 2 months free compared with paying monthly. Basic has no monthly fee. Current prices in both currencies are always shown at listplus.ai/pricing. #### How do I subscribe to Pro or Premium? Open Settings → Plan & billing → Compare plans, pick Monthly or Yearly, and click Subscribe to Pro or Subscribe to Premium — this takes you to Stripe Checkout to pay. If you're already on a paid plan, the button instead reads Switch to {plan} or Switch to yearly/monthly, opening Stripe's confirmation for that change instead of a fresh checkout. The plan and its one-time credit bonus apply as soon as payment succeeds. #### Where do I see my current plan? The avatar menu's workspace card shows the plan badge of the active workspace (hover the avatar to see "Name · Pro-Plan"); Settings → Plan & billing shows "Current plan: Pro". For the next charge date, payment method and invoices, open Settings → Plan & billing. #### Is the plan credit bonus paid every month? No — each plan's credit bonus is one-time, granted once per plan tier: your first Pro subscription adds 250 credits and your first Premium subscription adds 1,000, both one-time, not monthly. If you start on Pro and later upgrade to Premium, you get the Premium bonus too, since it's granted once per tier; renewing or staying on the same plan never repeats one. #### Is there an annual plan, enterprise tier, trial or discount? Yes for annual: Pro and Premium can both be billed yearly instead of monthly, at 2 months free (10× the monthly price) — toggle Monthly/Yearly on Plans & Billing. There's still no enterprise tier, no free trial of a paid plan and no discount codes. You can subscribe, cancel or change your plan any time under Plans & Billing or Settings → Plan & billing. #### Are prices including VAT? No. Plan prices (for example €49/$55 for Pro, €129/$149 for Premium) and credit pack prices are net prices; Sold Through Link, LLC — the Stripe company that handles the checkout for ListPlus as merchant of record — adds VAT or sales tax for your country on top, calculated from your billing address. See "[Invoices and VAT](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat)" for invoice questions. #### What does ListPlus cost overall? Two things: the plan (Basic, Pro or Premium) sets your record limit, which integrations you can use and the price per credit (40% less with Pro or Premium), and credits, bought separately in packs, pay for each lookup or AI action. See the price list for the cost of every action and "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" for the cheapest route to an email or phone. #### Can I pay yearly? Yes. Pro and Premium both offer a Monthly/Yearly toggle on Plans & Billing; yearly costs 10× the monthly price, so you effectively get 2 months free compared with paying month to month. You pay the full year upfront, and the same toggle lets you switch between monthly and yearly later. #### Why do I see prices in dollars? ListPlus charges in euros inside Europe (EU/EEA, the UK, Switzerland and the Balkans) and in US dollars everywhere else, based on the country you're paying from. Once you've paid once, you keep that currency for future purchases even if you later browse from a different country, though the checkout can show and charge the amount converted into your local currency. Current prices in both currencies are always shown at listplus.ai/pricing. #### How do I switch from monthly to yearly, or back? On Plans & Billing, move the toggle to Yearly (or Monthly) and click Switch to yearly or Switch to monthly on your current plan's card — or use Change plan in Settings → Plan & billing. Either opens Stripe's confirmation page showing the prorated amount; it applies immediately, and the difference is invoiced right away, crediting the unused time on your old interval. #### Did prices change? Yes. Since October 2026 Pro costs €49/$55 a month and Premium €129/$149, Basic imports up to 25,000 records and edits 5,000, and credits cost 40% less with Pro or Premium. --- ## Which plan do I need? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/which-plan-do-i-need Last updated: 2026-10-17 Pick a plan by what you actually want to do, not by feature count: **Basic** covers file-based work and trying ListPlus on your real lists, **Pro** adds everything that goes through a connected tool (Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps, and pipelines to Slack, Salesforce, Pipedrive and similar targets), a higher record limit and credits that cost 40% less, and **Premium** adds HubSpot (everywhere), importing from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe, reference lists and the highest record limit. All three plans already include every finder (Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research), every enrichment provider, all quality checks, file import/export, and the Agent API — see "Which plans does ListPlus have?" for prices and what each plan includes. ### Decision guide by goal | Your goal | Plan needed | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------- | | Import/export CSV, Excel or JSON files; edit up to 5,000 records | Basic | | Import up to 25,000 records to view, analyse and export them | Basic | | Edit more than 5,000 records, or pay 40% less per credit | Pro | | Import from or reload Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom or another app; sync back to or export to Google Sheets | Pro | | Send pipeline records to Slack, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly or "Other app" (HubSpot: Premium) | Pro | | Keep up to 100,000 records across your lists (at most 50,000 in one list) | Pro | | Import or reload HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion or Stripe; sync back to HubSpot, Salesforce, Attio or Notion; export to HubSpot | Premium | | Use HubSpot in any way, including as a pipeline target | Premium | | Keep up to 1,000,000 records across your lists (at most 50,000 in one list) | Premium | | Mark existing customers, competitors and partners with reference lists | Premium | | Send pipeline records by Email, to a Webhook or into Another list | Any plan | | Search for people or companies, run AI Research, run quality checks, enrich contacts | Any plan | | Export a list as a file (CSV, Excel, JSON …) | Any plan | | Connect a list to an AI agent via the Agent API (REST or MCP) | Any plan | ### What happens when a feature needs a higher plan If you click a data source in "Connect a system" that your plan doesn't unlock — for example HubSpot on Basic — its card shows a small lock icon, and selecting it opens a screen with a heading like "HubSpot requires Premium" explaining what that plan adds. It has two buttons: Go Back, and Upgrade to Premium, with the monthly price in your own currency on the button (€129/mo in Europe, $149/mo elsewhere), which takes you straight to Plans & Billing to subscribe. If an import or an action on an existing list would push you over your record limit, it's held back until you delete lists or upgrade. On Basic, holding more than 5,000 records makes your lists read-only (view, analyse, export still work) until you upgrade — see "What happens if an import would put me over my limit?" in Record limit. ### Plans in a team In a workspace, only the **owner** needs a plan: the owner's plan applies to every member of every workspace the owner owns, and members are free. Pick the plan for the combined needs of the team, because the record limit counts the lists of all the owner's workspaces together. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)". ### Connected tools need a plan, and their requests cost credits Nothing that goes through a connected tool works on Basic: connecting an account, importing, reloading (also the automatic refresh), syncing changes back, exporting to Google Sheets and pipeline targets that reach a connected tool. On top of the plan, each request to the tool costs credits; a pipeline delivers records at a price per record instead (also to a webhook of your own — only the Team email digest and Another list are free) — see the price list. If you later move to a lower plan, your accounts stay connected but are not used until the plan covers them again. ### Credits are needed on every plan A plan controls what you can connect, how many records you can work with and what a credit costs (€0.05/$0.06 on Basic, €0.03/$0.035 with Pro or Premium) — it doesn't include a monthly credit allowance. Every enrichment lookup and AI action is paid from your credit balance on Basic, Pro and Premium alike; see "How do credits work?" for what you get for free and how to buy more. **Related topics:** plans-and-pricing · credits-explained · buying-credits · record-limit · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### Which plan do I need? It depends on your goal: Basic covers file import/export, imports up to 25,000 records and edits up to 5,000, Pro adds connected tools (Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom, other apps and pipelines to Slack and similar targets), 100,000 editable records and credits that cost 40% less, and Premium adds HubSpot, importing from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe, reference lists and 1,000,000 records. Searching, enriching, AI Research, quality checks and the Agent API work the same on every plan. #### What can I do on Basic without upgrading? On Basic you can already import and export files (CSV, Excel, JSON), use every finder — Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research — every enrichment provider and quality check, and the Agent API to connect a list to an AI agent. What stays locked on Basic is everything that goes through a connected tool — connecting, importing, reloading, syncing back, exporting to Google Sheets and pipelines to Slack, Salesforce and similar targets (Pro; HubSpot and imports from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium) — as well as reference lists (Premium), editing more than 5,000 records, and the 40% lower credit price of Pro and Premium. #### Why is a connection locked, and what do I see? Connecting a data source under "Connect a system" on the New List page (Airtable and other apps via the 3,000+ apps tile) depends on your plan: Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom and other apps need Pro, and HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium; only file import/export is open to every plan. A locked source shows a small lock icon, and opening it shows a screen like "HubSpot requires Premium" with two buttons: Go Back, and Upgrade to Premium (with the price in your currency), which takes you to Plans & Billing. You can browse every source; you just can't connect a locked one until you upgrade. #### Can I export my list on Basic? Yes, downloading a list as a file (CSV, Excel, JSON and more) works on every plan, including Basic. Exporting to Google Sheets or importing from a connected tool such as HubSpot is what needs Pro or Premium. #### Do I need Premium for the API or an AI agent connection? No — the Agent API (REST and MCP) for connecting a list to an AI agent like Claude is included on every plan, including Basic, with no plan check. It's separate from connecting third-party tools like HubSpot or Google Sheets under "Connect a system", which does depend on your plan. #### Can I try a Pro or Premium feature before paying? You can see every locked feature — its card, description and lock icon are all visible on Basic or Pro — but you can't actually use it until you subscribe to the plan that unlocks it. There's no time-limited trial of a locked integration or a higher record limit. #### Which plan does my team need? Only the workspace owner needs a plan; members work on the owner's plan and credits for free. Choose it for the whole team's needs: the record limit counts all lists in all workspaces the owner owns, and the integrations unlock for every member. --- ## How credits work Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/credits-explained Last updated: 2026-10-15 Credits are ListPlus's currency for anything that costs real money to produce: a data lookup from a provider, an AI command, or a file import. Plans decide how many records you can work with, which tools you can connect and what a credit costs; credits pay for use, on every plan including Basic. ### Value and where credits come from One credit costs about €0.03 (about $0.035 if you pay in US dollars) with Pro or Premium, and €0.05 ($0.06) on Basic — with a subscription credits cost 40% less. Credits can be fractional — a small lookup can cost 0.1 or 0.25 of a credit. Lookups and file imports show their price before you confirm; AI commands, AI derivations (gender, job title, industry …) and AI Research are billed by usage instead, so their charge only appears afterwards. You start with 25 free credits on sign-up, add more any time in packs (see "[Buying credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits)"), and get a one-time bonus the first time you subscribe to Pro or Premium (see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)"). Credits never expire, however you got them. ### What costs credits Credits pay for: data lookups (enrichment) such as a verified email, phone number or company profile; Segment Search results, 2 credits per page; imports from a file or a LinkedIn import; every request to a connected tool (importing, reloading, syncing back, exporting to Google Sheets); each record a pipeline delivers to a tool or webhook; AI commands and AI derivations (gender, job title, industry …) on a list; AI Research; and recognizing contacts in your Inbox — every recognition run costs at least 0.5 credits, more for free-text entries. The exact price of every action is in the price list, and most provider lookups charge only when something is actually found — see "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" and "Cost examples" for worked-through cases. Every charge is a one-off, with one exception: an **alert** on the Watchlist — on a contact (job change, new LinkedIn posts) or on a company (new job postings, funding rounds) — is billed per contact or company and month, the first month when you start and then monthly until you stop. Alerts are the only recurring credit charge in ListPlus (see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)" and "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). ### Your balance Your balance is shown as a number, above a small **CR** label, at the bottom of the left navigation, and again wherever an action's cost is shown. It turns red once it drops below 5 credits; clicking it opens Settings → Credits & usage, where the owner finds **Buy credits** and members find **Ask for credits** (only the owner can buy credits for their workspace). In a workspace someone else owns, the balance shown is the owner's (for example "Anna's credits"). Once it rounds down to 0, a popup offering to top up also appears automatically next to the balance in the navigation. Settings → Credits & usage breaks down what you spent by day, by AI model and by the last 100 transactions — see "[Where did my credits go?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/where-did-my-credits-go)" for the full walkthrough. ### When you don't have enough credits An action is refused whenever your balance is below that action's price — for example, 1 credit left won't cover a 2-credit lookup, even though your balance isn't literally zero. A refused action does nothing until you top up; anything you already found stays in your lists and on the Watchlist. See "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)" for the exact messages you may see and what to do about them. ### Credits in a workspace Everything that costs credits in a workspace is paid from the balance of the workspace **owner**, whoever in the team does it. Your own balance pays for the workspaces you own. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)". ### Credits and plans are separate Subscribing to Pro or Premium does not add credits every month — plans only raise your record limit and unlock integrations, and the only credits tied to a plan are the one-time bonuses on first subscription. Every plan, including Basic, draws from the same credit balance for lookups and AI. Details and numbers are in "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)". ### For advanced users AI commands are metered by the amount of text they process (input and output), not by a flat per-command price; replies that run a command show their exact charge at the end, and every charge appears on the Credits & usage page in Settings. Paid actions run a balance check first, so you're told upfront if you can't afford an action. In a shared workspace, a running batch can still stop partway when teammates use up the same balance at the same time; the remaining rows are then not charged. Credits can have decimals (e.g. 0.25 credits), so a cheap lookup isn't rounded up to a whole credit. There is no auto top-up: when you're out, you buy a pack yourself. **Related topics:** plans-and-pricing · price-list · what-does-one-contact-cost · cost-examples · where-did-my-credits-go · buying-credits · not-enough-credits · record-limit · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### What are credits in ListPlus? Credits are ListPlus's currency for paid actions: data lookups (enrichment), AI commands, AI derivations, AI Research and imports. Plans only unlock features and your record limit, so you need credits on every plan, including Basic. Lookups and imports show their price before you confirm; AI commands, derivations and AI Research are billed by usage and shown afterwards. #### How much is one credit worth? One credit costs about €0.03 ($0.035 in US dollars) with Pro or Premium, and €0.05 ($0.06) on Basic. Per-action prices are set in credits, so an action costs the same number of credits on every plan — only the money per credit differs. See the price list for what individual actions cost. #### Do credits expire? No. Credits never expire, whether they came from your sign-up bonus, a purchased pack, or a plan's one-time bonus — they stay on your balance until you use them. #### How many credits do I get when I sign up? Every new account gets 25 free credits, no credit card required. From there you can top up in packs at any time — see "[Buying credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits)" for the pack sizes and prices. #### Do paid plans include credits every month? No. Pro and Premium raise your record limit and unlock integrations, but there's no monthly credit allowance — credits are bought separately in packs. See "Is the plan credit bonus paid every month?" in Plans and pricing for how each plan's one-time bonus works. #### What does it mean when my balance turns red? Your balance turns red once it drops below 5 credits, as an early warning to top up. Once it rounds down to 0, a popup offering to top up appears automatically next to the balance in the navigation. #### What happens when I run out of credits? An action is refused whenever your balance is below that action's price — for example, 1 credit left won't cover a 2-credit lookup, even if your balance isn't literally zero. Nothing you already found is lost: results already in your lists and on the Watchlist stay exactly as they are. #### Can my credit balance go negative? No. ListPlus checks your balance before a paid action runs and blocks it if you can't afford it, so your balance never drops below zero. #### Why do I see decimal amounts like 0.25 or 4.1 credits? Credits can have decimals, so a small lookup like an email verification can cost 0.3 credits instead of rounding up to a whole one. This lets ListPlus charge close to the real cost of each action rather than overcharging for cheap ones. #### Are there any recurring credit charges? Only alerts on the Watchlist: on a contact (Job change 2 credits checked weekly or 14 daily, New LinkedIn posts 1 credit weekly or 7 daily) or on a company (New job postings 0.05 weekly or 0.2 daily, Funding rounds 0.25), each per contact or company and month. An alert is charged for the first month when you set it and then monthly from the workspace owner's balance until you stop. Every other action — lookups, AI, imports, Inbox recognition — is a one-off charge. #### Do AI commands use credits? Yes. AI commands on a list are billed by how much text they process, typically around 0.2 credits per command, and replies that run a command show their exact charge at the end; every charge is listed on the Credits & usage page in Settings. --- ## Price list: what every action costs Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list Last updated: 2026-10-17 This page is the one place where ListPlus prices are listed: every paid action, what it costs in credits, and when it is charged. One credit costs about €0.03, or about $0.035 if you pay in US dollars, with Pro or Premium (€0.05 / $0.06 on Basic) — see "[How credits work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/credits-explained)". In a workspace every cost is paid from the workspace owner's balance, whoever runs the action. Three rules hold almost everywhere: - **The price is shown before you spend it** — on the button, beside the menu entry, or as "at most" in the selection bar's dialog (the ceiling, fallbacks included; AI tokens on top). An Enrich icon on an Analyze check card and an enrichment you ask the AI chat for show no price; they charge per hit and never more than that ceiling. Only AI work billed by usage (AI commands, AI Analysis, AI checks, column detection, AI Research reasoning) shows its amount afterwards. - **A lookup that finds nothing costs nothing.** The exceptions are named in the tables below ("per attempt", "per check", "per run", "per search", "per calculation", "per call"). - **What you already paid for is reused.** A LinkedIn lookup that found data is not charged again for 30 days, a person lookup (Prospeo, FullEnrich) for 7 days, and a company already in ListPlus's company cache costs nothing. ### Lists & imports | Action | Credits | Charged | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | | Empty list ("Start without data") | 0 | — | | File import (Excel, CSV, JSON) — uploaded or loaded from a URL | 1 | when the list is created | | Import from a connected tool (Google Sheets, Airtable, HubSpot, …) | 1 per request to the tool | as the records are read | | **Add to list** from a finder → existing list | 0 | — | | **Add to list** from a finder → new list | 1 | when the list is created | | LinkedIn: Sales Navigator | 35 + 1 per person | base when the import starts, people when they arrive | | LinkedIn: Company employees | 2 + 1 per person | base when the import starts, people when they arrive | | LinkedIn: Company employees, each company searched on its own | 1 per company (at least 2) + 1 per person | as above | | LinkedIn: Keyword search (Profile Search) | 1 per person | when the people arrive | | LinkedIn: Post reactions | 1 per person | when the people arrive | | LinkedIn: Post comments | 1 per person | when the people arrive | | "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" after a LinkedIn import: Contact Profiles / Company Profiles | 2 / 0.5 per record | when found | | Column type detection during an import | AI usage | on every import | | List webhook (receiving records from a tool) | 0 | — | | Requests to a connected tool (see "Requests to a connected tool") | 1 per request | after each request that went through | A LinkedIn import needs the full maximum in your balance before it starts — the base plus the maximum number of people you asked for. The base is taken when the import starts and is kept even if the search finds nobody or the run fails; the per-person part is charged for the people actually delivered, also for a run that stopped early. Only an error on ListPlus's own side is refunded. A Sales Navigator import takes up to 2,500 people, the other LinkedIn imports up to 1,000. Company employees are searched one company at a time when you paste more than 10 companies, or set **Max results per company** for several companies. ### Enrichment in a list Several lookups carry a different label depending on where you start them — the Enrich menu of a list, the record panel of one row, the single-cell fill window, or a Person Search card. The table names every label. | Action | Credits | Charged | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | "Company Lookup" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell window) / "Company Profile" (Person Search) — by domain or by name | 0.25 | when found | | Email verification ("Verify Email Deliverability", "Verify Email") | 0.3 | only for a clear result (valid, invalid, disposable) | | "LinkedIn Profile" (by LinkedIn URL) | 0.5 | when found | | "LinkedIn Company" (by LinkedIn URL) | 0.5 | when found | | "Verify LinkedIn Profile" (by name + company) | 0.25 or 0.5 | per check, also without a match | | "LinkedIn Profile Search" (by name + company) | 1 | per attempt, also without a match | | "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" and "Company Website (by Name)" — Google search | 0 | — | | "Contact Brief" (Enrich menu, record panel) / "Verified Email & Company Phone" or "… (by Name)" (Person Search) — Prospeo | 2 | when a verified email is found | | "Contact Profile (by Email)" — CompanyEnrich (single-cell fill window only) | 2 | when found | | "Contact Profile (by Email)" — FullEnrich | 4 | when found; if FullEnrich finds nobody, CompanyEnrich is asked: 2, only for a person whose name fits the address | | "Find Email (by Name & Company)" (Enrich menu) / "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" (single-cell window) / "Deep Email Search" (Person Search) — FullEnrich | 6 | when an email is found | | "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" (Enrich menu, record panel — with a follow-up profile lookup) — FullEnrich | 6, up to 12 | 6 when an email is found; 6 more only if the follow-up also succeeds | | "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" / "Deep Mobile Search" — FullEnrich | 42 | 42 only if a phone is found; 6 if it only finds an email | | "Reveal Mobile Number" (record panel, single-cell window, Person Search — not the Enrich menu) — Prospeo | 18 | only if a number is found | | "Company Profile Crunchbase" | 1 | when found | | Company extras in the record panel: "Workforce Insights" 1 · "Similar Companies" 5 · "Find Employees" 5 · "Company Contacts (Prospeo)" 2 · "Job-Change Radar" 2 (Premium only) | 1–5 | when they return data | | **Find** → "Similar companies" (new records in the list) | 1 per company added, at least 2 | per run | | AI Analysis in the Enrich menu (gender, name splitting, job title, industry, address) | AI usage | per run | | Selection bar **Enrich** (one job over several steps) | sum of the routes that hit | per hit; never above the "at most" you accepted | | Gender as a field in the selection bar's **Enrich** or an AI chat enrichment | AI usage | after each group, on top of the "at most" | | Cleaning phone numbers ("Local (Free & Instant)") | 0 | — | Both email-to-profile options are labeled "Contact Profile (by Email)", so the price tells them apart: 2 credits is CompanyEnrich (single-cell fill window only), 4 credits is FullEnrich. In the Enrich menu the title "Find Email (by Name & Company)" is also used for Prospeo's 2-credit lookup — again the amount beside the entry tells you which one it is. **Enrichment wizards** (Enrich menu → ENRICHMENT WIZARDS) run several of the lookups above as one plan and add up their prices. The menu shows a range per row — Company Enrichment 0.25–1.75, Campaign-Ready 2–8, Full Profile 4–12 — and the exact total for your rows is on the **Start Plan** button before anything runs. With the steps that are on by default a row typically costs from 0.25 (Company Enrichment), 2.25 (Campaign-Ready) or 2.75 (Full Profile); optional steps add their own price. **Detect Job Changes** charges two of its steps: the email check (0.3) and the LinkedIn profile (0.5 per profile found). ### Person Search & profile add-ons Searching is not charged, with one exception: when Google does not find the person for certain, ListPlus also searches the people database by name — 2 credits, only when the database returns people. Opening a profile loads its **basics** automatically: | Piece | Credits | Charged | | ----------------- | -------- | ---------- | | LinkedIn profile | 0.5 | when found | | Company profile | 0.25 | when found | | **Typical total** | **0.75** | — | If ListPlus knows no LinkedIn URL for the person and Google finds none either, it may first run a LinkedIn Profile Search (1 credit per attempt), a LinkedIn company lookup (0.5) or a company lookup by name (0.25), which pushes the total above 0.75. You can switch the automatic loading off with "Auto-load basics: on" below the profile. Every add-on is a card you click yourself, with its price on the card: | Add-on | Credits | Charged | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | | "Verified Email & Company Phone" / "… (by Name)" — Prospeo | 2 | when a verified email is found | | "Deep Email Search" — FullEnrich | 6 | when an email is found | | "Deep Mobile Search" — FullEnrich | 42 | 42 only if a phone is found; 6 if it only finds an email | | "Contact Profile (by Email)" — FullEnrich | 4 | when found | | "Reveal Mobile Number" — Prospeo | 18 | only if a number is found | | "Verify Email" | 0.3 | only for a clear result | | "Find Employees" | 5 | when found | | "Company Contacts" | 2 | when found | | "Job-Change Radar" (Premium only) | 2 | when found | | "Deep Company Profile" | 2 | when found | | "Similar Companies" | 5 | when found | | "Workforce Insights" | 1 | when found | | "Open Jobs" | 1 | when found | | "Google Maps Profile" | 1 | when found | | "Web Traffic" | 1 | when found | | "Email Infrastructure" | 1 | when found | | "Latest LinkedIn Posts" | 1 | when found | | "Post Engagement Leads" (recent posts, or one post) | 8 | when found | | "Company News", "Person in the News" | 0 | — | | "Search LinkedIn live" (when the person is not in the results) | 8 | per search, also when it finds nobody | | AI web research (when the regular lookups find no contact) | 1 per run + 2 | the 2 only when it delivers an email or phone number | An add-on, or a selection of add-ons, of 10 credits or more first asks you to confirm in a "Paid enrichment" window. A link that opens a profile with add-ons runs at most 4 of them automatically, and only add-ons of 12 credits or less. Add-on cards such as Company Contacts or Find Employees are not reused and charge again each time they find something. ### Segment Search & Markets | Action | Credits | Charged | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Segment Search — one page of up to 25 people or companies | 2 | per page; not for an empty result or the same search within 30 days | | Segment Search — reveal the work email (with company phone) | 2 | only if a verified email is found | | Segment Search — reveal the mobile number | 18 | only if a number is found | | Segment Search — opening a row (basics) | about 0.75 | each part when found | | Markets — picking values, opening a chart | 0 | — | | Markets — **Calculate** for a new combination of filters | 1 | per calculation; not for one calculated within the last hour | | Markets — loading companies | 0.25 per company | per company loaded | | Markets — loading companies with "Companies like these" | 1.25 per company | per company loaded | In Markets you always load a sample first — 10, 25 or 50 companies, that is 2.5, 6.25 or 12.5 credits — and the price is on each button. One search hands over at most 1,000 companies. From a list, **Find** → "From the database" opens Segment Search for the selected companies at the same 2 credits per page, and **Find** → "Over LinkedIn" starts a Company employees import (from 2 credits + 1 per person). ### AI Research The agent's own reasoning is billed by usage — there is no price per match and no price per run. You need at least 1 credit to start, and you set a budget for the run: 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 credits (50 by default), which covers the reasoning and every paid source. Each source is a switch under **Allowed AI tools**, with its price beside it: | Source (switch) | Credits | Per | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | | Web search, Read web pages, Job postings, News, Hacker News, Find LinkedIn | 0 | — | | Database | 2 | search page of up to 25; not for an empty or repeated page | | LinkedIn people | 4 + 0.5 per profile | search (up to 25 profiles); the 4 also when nobody is found | | LinkedIn posts | 0.5 | search (up to 50 posts) | | LinkedIn posts — reading who commented and reacted | 0.75 | post that is read | | Reddit | 10 | 25 posts or comments requested | | X (Twitter) | 3 | 100 posts requested | | Email check ("Your AI" only) | 0.3 | email address checked | | Enrich ("Your AI" only) | up to 10 | hit | A switch only allows a source; the agent calls a paid source when the brief needs it, and each call is charged whether or not it turns up something useful. **Resume** grants the chosen budget again. A research you run through your own AI assistant ("Your AI") is not charged for the matches it reports; the paid sources you switch on count against a spending cap of 10, 25 or 50 credits. ### Inbox | Action | Credits | Charged | | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------- | | Receiving content — pasted, sent by your own automation, forwarded by e-mail | 0 | — | | Receiving an **app event** (a Slack message, a form answer, a booking) | 1 per event | when it arrives | | An app event's message for a list: recognizing its contacts | 0.5 + AI usage, on top | only when it names a contact | | **Recognize contacts** — vCard, calendar invite, table rows, one-per-line list | 0.5 (exact, on the button) | every run | | **Recognize contacts** — free text, a forwarded e-mail, a PDF | 0.5 + AI usage at double the normal rate | every run | | **Recognize again** | same as the first run | every run, including repeats | For entries that need AI the button shows an upper bound marked "~": about 1.6 to 1.7 credits for a short text read by the standard AI model. Long texts (over about 4,000 characters), newsletters and e-mail threads are read by a stronger AI model; there the upper bound is about 23 to 31 credits, and you need that amount in your balance to start. The actual charge is lower than the bound, because it is billed on the text actually processed. If the balance is below the price shown, the button is replaced by **Top up credits**. ### Watchlist alerts The only recurring charge in ListPlus. An alert is billed per contact (or per company, see below) and month: the first month when you set it, then monthly from the workspace owner's balance until you stop. | Alert | Checked weekly | Checked daily | | ------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------------------ | | Job change (new company, new role, left) | 2 per contact and month | 14 per contact and month | | New LinkedIn posts (at most 3 reported per check) | 1 per contact and month | 7 per contact and month | Switching a contact from weekly to daily in a paid month charges the difference; switching back or stopping gives no refund for the current month. If the balance cannot cover a renewal the alerts pause until there are credits again. Looking up a missing LinkedIn URL for a contact with an alert costs nothing, and a contact with no profile found waits and is not billed. Alerts on companies are billed the same way, per company and month: | Alert | Checked weekly | Checked daily | | --------------------------------------- | -------------------------- | ------------------------- | | New job postings (and "Hiring a lot") | 0.05 per company and month | 0.2 per company and month | | Funding rounds | 0.25 per company and month | 0.25 per company and month | A company without a LinkedIn page cannot be checked for job postings and is not billed for them; the funding alert finds the company by its domain. ### AI features | Action | Credits | Charged | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------- | | AI command (chatting with a list) | usage, typically ~0.2 | per command; the amount is shown after the reply | | AI Analysis in the Enrich menu, AI checks in Analyze | usage | per run; the amount is shown afterwards | | Score with an **AI statement** | 0.02 per judgment | once per set of equal values | | **AI text** column | 0.02 per text | once per set of equal inputs; an empty text costs nothing | | Testing an AI statement or an AI text on 10 rows | 0 | — | | Scores by rules, formulas, Label columns | 0 | — | | **Scan business card** on a list's form | usage, typically ~0.1 | per scan, from the list's workspace; also when nothing could be read | | **Scan business card** in the Inbox | usage, typically ~0.1 | per photo, also when nothing could be read; recognizing the contact is the usual 0.5 | Automatic recalculation of AI judgments — after a change in the list — is capped at 50 credits per list and day; a run you start yourself shows its maximum before it starts and does not count against that ceiling. ### Pipelines Sending a record through a pipeline costs a fixed number of credits per record that arrived, whatever the target needs for it (a CRM target searches for the contact first, writes it and links it; a message is one request). The price is shown on the target's tile when you set up a pipeline: | Target | Credits per record | | -------------------------------------------- | ------------------ | | HubSpot, Salesforce, Attio | 2 | | Pipedrive | 3 | | Lemlist, Instantly | 1 | | Slack, Google Sheets, "Other app" | 1 | | Webhook (your own endpoint) | 0.25 | | Email, Another list | no delivery charge | A record that was held at the data check, or that the target turned down (an error status, a Slack message Slack refuses), is not charged. The receiving tool may charge its own fees. **Test connection** → **Send test** costs one record's delivery price when the test really delivers (Slack, Webhook, Email draft); a HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Lemlist, Instantly, Google Sheets, "Other app" or Another list test only checks what would happen, writes nothing and costs nothing. The **Enrich** action of a rule (Triggers) runs the lookups from "Enrichment in a list" at their usual prices, within the budget you set under **At most per record** — 5, 10, 25 or 50 credits (10 by default). A step that would exceed the budget is not started. ### Requests to a connected tool Everything ListPlus does through a connected tool is made of requests: reading pages of records for an import or reload, writing changes back, and exporting to Google Sheets. Each request that reached the tool costs 1 credit (a pipeline delivery is the exception: it is priced per record, see "Pipelines"). A request that did not get through, or that the tool answered with an error status, is not charged, and neither is a Slack message that Slack turns down (for example because the account is not in the channel). An import from a connected tool has no price besides its requests, and looking at a source in the import wizard (choosing a sheet or object, the preview, the record count) is not charged. A sync, a send, an export or a refresh does not start when the balance does not cover one request. If the balance runs out during such an operation, it stops at the next request; what was done until then stays. Connecting, listing or disconnecting accounts and browsing the app catalogue cost nothing extra. Which plan each tool needs is in "[Which plan do I need?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/which-plan-do-i-need)". | What you do | Requests | | --------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Import or reload from HubSpot | one per 100 records read, plus previews and pickers in the import wizard | | Sync changes back to Google Sheets | one write per 500 rows, plus the reads that compare | | Sync changes back to Attio | one write per record, plus the reads that compare | | Pipeline targets | not per request: a fixed price per record that arrived (Pipelines above) | | Automatic refresh of a list | the requests of the reload, on every run | ### What is not charged - A lookup that finds nothing — except the ones marked "per attempt", "per check", "per run", "per search", "per calculation" or "per call" above - A repeat of your own successful lookup: LinkedIn within 30 days, person lookups within 7 days; a company already in ListPlus's company cache - Google searches for a LinkedIn URL or a company website, "Company News" and "Person in the News" - The standard quality checks in Analyze, local cleanups, formatting fixes, cleaning phone numbers, transferring or joining columns - Scores by rules, formulas and Label columns - Creating an empty list, adding to an existing list, exporting to a file (Excel, CSV, JSON) - Receiving records: the Inbox, the forwarding address, list webhooks - Pipelines to the Team email and Another list targets - Picking values and opening charts in Markets - Workspaces and members - The API connection of a list (what an agent enriches through it costs the same as in the app) If a paid action is blocked because the balance is too low, see "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)". ### For advanced users Most provider lookups charge only once the provider returns a value. Three kinds of action charge for the attempt itself, because the underlying search runs whatever the outcome: LinkedIn Profile Search (1 credit), Verify LinkedIn Profile (0.25 credits, or 0.5 when the company first has to be looked up from the email domain) and the per-run and per-search prices — LinkedIn live search, AI web research, the base of a LinkedIn import, the paid AI Research sources and a Markets calculation. Email verification is billed only when the verification service returns a clear verdict: an obviously invalid address (bad format, a disposable domain, a role-based address, a test domain, a typo in the domain) is marked locally at no cost, and catch-all or unknown results are not charged either. "Find Email + Phone" asks for a phone as well as an email; the phone tier (42 credits in total) is charged only when a phone number is found, and a lookup that only finds an email costs the 6-credit email price. The follow-up profile lookup of "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu and record panel costs its 6 extra credits only when it succeeds; the single-cell fill window runs no follow-up. AI commands, AI Analysis and AI checks are metered on the text actually processed, so a short command can cost less than 0.2 credits and a long one more. AI Research meters every reasoning step the same way and charges paid sources per call; a single run can call the same source several times. AI texts in email drafts are metered the same way, on top of the draft itself: with the fast model usually well under 0.1 credits per draft, with the stronger model about twenty times as much; the same inputs are reused for the rest of the day at no cost. **Check content** in an Email draft pipeline usually costs 0.1–0.2 credits, and **Suggest from your website** in Settings → Company knowledge about 0.3–0.6 credits. **Related topics:** credits-explained · what-does-one-contact-cost · cost-examples · where-did-my-credits-go · buying-credits · not-enough-credits · which-finder-do-i-use. ### FAQ #### Where do I see what something costs before I run it? The price is on the button, beside the menu entry or as an estimate before you spend anything: in the Enrich menu, on record panel buttons, on Person Search cards and as "Estimated cost" for an import; the selection bar's Enrich dialog shows "at most" (fallbacks included, AI tokens on top). An Enrich icon on a check card and an enrichment asked of the AI chat show no price and never charge more than that ceiling. Only AI work billed by usage shows its amount afterwards; everything you spent is under Settings → Credits & usage. #### Am I charged when a lookup finds nothing? Usually not — most lookups cost credits only when they return data. The exceptions charge for the attempt: LinkedIn Profile Search (1 credit), Verify LinkedIn Profile (0.25 or 0.5), LinkedIn live search (8), AI web research (1 per run), the base of a LinkedIn import, a Markets calculation (1), Find → Similar companies in a list (at least 2 per run) and the paid sources of AI Research. #### Who pays for an action in a workspace? Every cost is paid from the workspace owner's credit balance, whoever in the workspace runs the action. Members do not need credits of their own. #### Does creating an empty list cost credits? Creating an empty list costs no credits. On the New List page choose "Start without data"; only imports and paid lookups are charged. #### Does importing a file cost credits? Importing a file (Excel, CSV or JSON) costs 1 credit per list, on every plan, charged when the list is created. If the balance is below 1 credit the import does not start and the message names the amount you need. Creating an empty list costs nothing. #### How much does importing a file from a URL cost? Loading a file from a URL — "Load from URL" on the New List page, also a public Google Sheets link — costs 1 credit per list, the same as a file you upload. It is charged when the list is created; if the balance is below 1 credit the import does not start. #### Does opening the sample list cost credits? No — opening the shared sample list to look at it costs nothing. It is view only; to edit and enrich, create your own list. #### Does connecting a tool cost credits to import? Importing through a connected tool such as Google Sheets, Airtable or HubSpot costs 1 credit per request ListPlus makes to the tool to read the records; there is no extra price per import. Choosing the source and looking at the preview in the import wizard is not charged, and the plan decides which tools you can connect (Pro or Premium). #### How much does it cost to add found contacts or companies to a list? Adding them to an existing list costs no credits; creating a new list for them costs 1 credit, the same as a file import. This applies to Add to list in Person Search, Segment Search, Markets and AI Research. You choose the list, or "…or create a new list", in the window that opens. #### Does a list webhook cost credits? A list webhook costs no credits, on every plan. Records a tool sends to it go into the list without a charge; only what you do with them afterwards, such as enrichment, costs credits. #### Does recognising my columns during import cost credits? Yes — every import uses AI to recognise the column types from the headers and sample values, billed by usage like an AI command, which is a small amount on top of the import price. A **Skip AI Enhancement** button only appears if AI is unavailable or the analysis hits an error; it is not an option to avoid the cost upfront. #### How much does a Sales Navigator import cost? Importing a Sales Navigator search costs 35 credits plus 1 credit per person, for up to 2,500 people per import. The 35-credit base is charged when the import starts and is kept even if the search finds nobody or the run fails; the per-person part is charged for the people actually delivered. The New List page shows the estimated cost before you start. #### How much does a Company Employees import cost? Importing the employees of companies from LinkedIn costs 2 credits plus 1 credit per person — the base when the import starts, the per-person part for the people actually delivered. With more than 10 companies in one import, or with "Max results per company" set for several companies, each company is searched on its own and the base is 1 credit per company (at least 2). The New List page shows the estimated cost before you start. #### How much does a LinkedIn keyword search import cost? The LinkedIn import "Keyword search" (Profile Search) costs 1 credit per person, with no base. It is charged for the people actually delivered, so a search that finds nobody costs nothing; the estimated cost is shown on the New List page before you start. #### How much does a LinkedIn Post reactions import cost? Importing the people who reacted to LinkedIn posts costs 1 credit per person, with no base. It is charged for the people actually delivered, and the estimated cost is shown on the New List page before you start. #### How much does a LinkedIn Post comments import cost? Importing the people who commented on LinkedIn posts costs 1 credit per person, with no base. It is charged for the people actually delivered, and the estimated cost is shown on the New List page before you start. #### How much does a Profile Search, Post Reactions or Post Comments import cost? These three LinkedIn imports each cost 1 credit per person with no base, charged for the people actually delivered once they arrive. Each import takes up to 1,000 people. #### Why am I charged for a LinkedIn import after it finishes, not before? ListPlus only knows the number of people once a LinkedIn import delivers them, so the per-person charge is taken then. The base (35 credits for Sales Navigator, 2 for Company employees) is the exception: it pays for running the search and is taken when the import starts. You see the estimated maximum before you start. #### How much balance do I need to start a LinkedIn import? You need the full maximum in your balance before a LinkedIn import can start — the base plus 1 credit for each of the people you asked for at most. The base is taken at the start; the per-person part is charged for the people you actually get. If the balance is too low, the cost box on the New List page shows a **Buy Credits** button. #### Am I charged if a LinkedIn import finds nothing? Only the base is charged when a LinkedIn import finds nobody — 35 credits for Sales Navigator, 2 for Company employees — and it is also kept when the run fails or times out. Keyword search, Post reactions and Post comments have no base, so they cost nothing when they find nobody. A run that stops early still delivers the people it found and charges 1 credit each; only an error on ListPlus's own side is refunded. #### How much does a company lookup cost? Looking up a company by domain or by company name costs 0.25 credits, charged only if the company is found. It is labeled "Company Lookup" in the Enrich menu, record panel and single-cell fill window, and "Company Profile" on a Person Search card — same lookup, same price. The amount is shown beside the entry before you run it. #### Is a company lookup charged again for a company ListPlus already knows? A company that is already in ListPlus's company cache costs no credits. Company data is the same for everyone, so a lookup for a domain that was looked up before is answered from the cache without a charge. #### How much does email verification cost? Checking one email address costs 0.3 credits, charged only for a clear result: valid, invalid or disposable. An obviously invalid address (bad format, disposable domain, role-based address like info@, test domain) is marked at no cost before the verification service is called, and catch-all or unknown results are not charged either. The entry is "Verify Email Deliverability" in the Enrich menu and "Verify Email" in the record panel and on a Person Search card. #### How much does a LinkedIn profile lookup cost? Loading a person's LinkedIn profile from its URL costs 0.5 credits, charged only if the profile is found. Repeating your own successful lookup within 30 days is not charged again. The entry is "LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL)", with the price beside it. #### How much does a LinkedIn company page lookup cost? Loading a company's LinkedIn page from its URL ("LinkedIn Company") costs 0.5 credits, charged only if the page is found. The price is shown beside the entry in the Enrich menu and on the record panel button. #### How much does "Verify LinkedIn Profile" cost? "Verify LinkedIn Profile" costs 0.25 credits per check, or 0.5 when ListPlus first has to look up the company from the email domain. It is charged for every check, also when no profile is found, because the search itself runs either way. #### How much does searching LinkedIn by name cost? "LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company)" costs 1 credit per attempt, charged whether or not a profile is found, because the search itself runs either way. When it succeeds it returns the full profile with job title, company and experience. To find only the URL without a charge, use "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" first. #### Does finding a LinkedIn URL by Google search cost credits? "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" costs no credits. It looks for the person's LinkedIn URL with a Google search and fills in the URL only; loading the profile behind it is the separate 0.5-credit lookup. #### Does finding a company website by name cost credits? "Company Website (by Name)" costs no credits. It looks for the company's website with a Google search, so that the 0.25-credit company lookup by domain can run afterwards. #### How much does finding a verified email cost? A verified email via Prospeo costs 2 credits, charged only when a verified email is found; the company's main phone number comes with it at no extra cost. The lookup is called "Contact Brief" in the Enrich menu and record panel and "Verified Email & Company Phone" on a Person Search card. If it finds nothing, the wider FullEnrich search costs 6 credits when it finds an email. #### How much does "Contact Brief" cost? "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" and "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" each cost 2 credits, charged only when a verified email is found. They return the verified email, the company phone and company data, and the price is shown beside the entry in the Enrich menu and record panel. #### Does the company phone number cost extra? The company's main phone number costs nothing extra: it comes with the 2-credit "Contact Brief" or "Verified Email & Company Phone" lookup. A personal mobile number is a separate reveal for 18 credits, charged only when a number is found. #### How much does a contact profile from an email cost via FullEnrich? Looking up a person's name, job title and LinkedIn URL from their email via FullEnrich costs 4 credits, charged only if a match is found. If FullEnrich finds nobody, ListPlus asks CompanyEnrich automatically, which costs 2 credits only when it finds a person whose name fits the address. It is labeled "Contact Profile (by Email)" in the Enrich menu, record panel and on a Person Search card, with the price beside it. #### How much does a contact profile from an email cost via CompanyEnrich? Looking up a person from their email via CompanyEnrich costs 2 credits, charged only if a match is found. It is also labeled "Contact Profile (by Email)" but only appears in the single-cell fill window; the Enrich menu offers FullEnrich's 4-credit version, so the price tells the two apart. #### How much does "Find Email (by Name & Company)" cost? "Find Email (by Name & Company)" costs 2 credits when it runs through Prospeo and 6 credits when it runs through FullEnrich, each charged only when an email is found. The Enrich menu uses the same title for both, and the amount beside the entry tells you which one it is. Try the 2-credit one first. #### How much does a deep email search cost? FullEnrich's search for an email from name and company costs 6 credits, charged only if an email is found. The same lookup is labeled "Find Email (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu, "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" in the single-cell fill window and "Deep Email Search" on a Person Search card. #### How much does "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" cost? It costs 6 credits in the single-cell fill window, charged only if an email is found. From the Enrich menu or a row's record panel the same label also runs a follow-up profile lookup and can cost up to 12 credits: 6 for the email, and 6 more only if the follow-up succeeds. It is not a phone lookup — for a phone number use "Find Email + Phone". #### How much balance do I need to start "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)"? You need 12 credits in your balance to start it, the price of one record with both steps. You are charged 6 credits when an email is found and 6 more only if the follow-up profile lookup succeeds; a record that finds nothing costs nothing. #### What does Enrich from the selection bar cost? You pay the per-hit price of each route that finds something, so a record that finds nothing costs nothing. The dialog shows "at most" — the ceiling with every fallback route counted — and the job never spends more than that; AI steps such as gender are billed by usage on top. #### Does the Gender field cost credits? Yes, a little: gender is worked out by AI and billed by AI usage after each group of records, not per hit. That is why the selection bar's dialog says "plus AI tokens" next to the "at most". #### How much does "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" after a LinkedIn import cost? Contact Profiles (verified email, phone, job title and company from Prospeo) costs 2 credits per record when found, and Company Profiles costs 0.5 credits per company when found. Skip the prompt and nothing is charged; you can run the same lookups later from the Enrich menu. #### How much does finding an email and phone together cost? "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" via FullEnrich costs 42 credits, charged only when a phone number is found. If the lookup only finds an email you pay 6 credits, and if it finds nothing you pay nothing. On a Person Search card the same lookup is called "Deep Mobile Search". #### How much does "Deep Mobile Search" cost? "Deep Mobile Search" on a Person Search profile costs 42 credits, charged only when a phone number is found; if it only finds an email it costs 6 credits. The price is on the card, and because it is above 10 credits you confirm it in a "Paid enrichment" window first. #### How much does a mobile number cost? Revealing a verified mobile number ("Reveal Mobile Number", via Prospeo) costs 18 credits, charged only when a number is found. It is offered in the record panel, the single-cell fill window, on a Person Search card and as "Reveal · 18 Cr" in a profile — not in the Enrich menu. It needs a LinkedIn URL, or a name and company. #### How much does a Crunchbase lookup cost? Looking up a company on Crunchbase by name or domain — labeled "Company Profile Crunchbase" — costs 1 credit, charged only if a match is found. It adds funding, technology and growth signals to the basic company profile. #### How much does the Company Enrichment wizard cost? The Company Enrichment wizard shows a range of 0.25 to 1.75 credits per row in the Enrich menu; with the steps that are on by default a row costs 0.25 credits for the company lookup. Optional steps add their own price: LinkedIn profile 0.5, LinkedIn company page 0.5, verified contact data 2, Crunchbase 1. The exact total for your rows is on the Start Plan button before anything runs. #### How much does the Campaign-Ready wizard cost? The Campaign-Ready wizard shows a range of 2 to 8 credits per row in the Enrich menu; with the steps that are on by default a row typically costs from 2.25 credits (company data 0.25, verified email 2). The email step is charged only when an email is found. The exact total for your rows is on the Start Plan button before anything runs. #### How much does the Full Profile wizard cost? The Full Profile wizard shows a range of 4 to 12 credits per row in the Enrich menu; with the steps that are on by default a row typically costs from 2.75 credits (LinkedIn profile 0.5, company data 0.25, verified email 2). Optional steps add their own price: Crunchbase 1, a contact profile from the email 4. The exact total for your rows is on the Start Plan button before anything runs. #### How much does the Detect Job Changes wizard cost? Detect Job Changes charges two of its steps: verifying the email costs 0.3 credits per clear result, and loading the LinkedIn profile costs 0.5 credits per profile found. Its other steps cost no credits. #### How much does "Similar companies" in a list cost? Find → "Similar companies" costs 1 credit per company added to the list, and at least 2 credits per run. Companies already in the list are not added twice, but the 2-credit minimum applies to every run. The window shows the maximum for the number you chose before you click "Find companies". #### How much does it cost to find contacts at the companies in my list? Find → "From the database" opens Segment Search for the selected companies and costs 2 credits per page of up to 25 results. Find → "Over LinkedIn" starts a Company employees import, from 2 credits plus 1 credit per person. Both prices are shown in the Find menu. #### Are AI-powered fixes like gender or industry billed? Yes — gender detection, name splitting, job title classification, industry standardization and address enrichment, run from the Enrich menu under "AI Analysis", are billed by usage like an AI command, whether you run them on one row or many. The menu shows no fixed price; the amount appears under Settings → Credits & usage afterwards. #### Does cleaning phone numbers cost credits? Cleaning phone numbers into international format costs no credits. It is in the Enrich menu's group "Local (Free & Instant)" and runs without an AI call. #### How much do the quality checks in Analyze cost? The standard checks in Analyze cost no credits. The AI checks you switch on are billed by usage from the workspace's credits, and the amount is shown after the run. #### From which amount does ListPlus ask me to confirm a paid lookup? From 10 credits: an add-on, or a selection of add-ons, that costs 10 credits or more first shows a "Paid enrichment" window with the amount. Cheaper add-ons run on the click, with the price on the card. #### Can a link run paid add-ons automatically? A link that opens a profile with add-ons runs at most 4 of them automatically, and only add-ons that cost 12 credits or less each. More expensive ones, such as the 18-credit mobile reveal, stay a click in the profile. #### Does searching in Person Search cost credits? A search by LinkedIn URL, email or domain is not charged, and a search by name is not charged when Google finds the person. If Google is not sure, ListPlus also searches the people database by name, which costs 2 credits — only when the database returns people, and only when you are signed in. Opening a profile then loads its basics for about 0.75 credits. #### How much does opening a profile in Person Search cost? Opening a profile typically costs 0.75 credits: the LinkedIn profile (0.5 credits) plus the company profile (0.25 credits), each charged only if it is found. It is shown as "Basics (profile, company)" and loads automatically when you open a profile. #### Does Person Search cost more if there's no LinkedIn URL? Yes — if ListPlus knows no LinkedIn URL for the person and the Google search finds none either, it may first run a LinkedIn Profile Search (1 credit per attempt), a LinkedIn company lookup (0.5 credits) or a company lookup by name (0.25 credits). Opening the profile then costs more than the usual 0.75 credits. #### Can I turn off automatic loading in Person Search? Yes — it is on by default; click "Auto-load basics: on" below the profile to switch it off, or "Turn off" while the basics are loading. Profiles you pick from the candidate list then load their basics only when you click "Load" on the "Basics (profile, company)" bar. Searches by LinkedIn URL, email or domain still load their result straight away, and the setting is remembered in this browser. #### How much does "Search LinkedIn live" cost? "Search LinkedIn live" in Person Search costs 8 credits per search, whether it finds someone or not. It is offered under "Not there?" when the person is not among the results, and it asks you to confirm the price before it runs. #### How much does "Verified Email & Company Phone" cost? "Verified Email & Company Phone" (by LinkedIn URL) and "Verified Email & Company Phone (by Name)" each cost 2 credits, charged only if a verified email is found. In a list's Enrich menu the same Prospeo lookup is labeled "Contact Brief". #### How much does "Find Employees" or "Company Contacts" cost? "Find Employees" (up to 10 employees with roles and LinkedIn profiles) costs 5 credits, and "Company Contacts" (up to 25 decision-makers with masked email and mobile teasers) costs 2 credits. Both are charged only if results are found, and both charge again each time you run them. #### How much does "Find Employees" cost? "Find Employees" costs 5 credits, charged only when employees are found. It returns up to 10 people with roles and LinkedIn profiles; in a list's record panel it adds them as new rows. #### How much does "Company Contacts" cost? "Company Contacts" costs 2 credits, charged only when contacts are found. It returns up to 25 decision-makers with masked email and mobile teasers; in a list's record panel it is called "Company Contacts (Prospeo)" and adds them as new rows. #### How much does "Job-Change Radar" cost? "Job-Change Radar" costs 2 credits and is part of the Premium plan. It returns decision-makers at a company who changed jobs in the last 90 days; on Basic and Pro the card is shown locked. #### How much does "Deep Company Profile" or "Similar Companies" cost? "Deep Company Profile" (funding rounds, tech stack and open job titles in one lookup) costs 2 credits, and "Similar Companies" (5 lookalike companies) costs 5 credits. Both are charged only if they return data. #### How much does "Deep Company Profile" cost? "Deep Company Profile" costs 2 credits, charged only if it returns data; a repeat for the same company within 7 days costs nothing. It brings funding rounds, tech stack and open job titles in one lookup, and the price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does the "Similar Companies" add-on cost? The "Similar Companies" add-on costs 5 credits, charged only if it returns data. It shows 5 lookalike companies for one company, on a Person Search profile or in a list's record panel. #### How much do the small company add-ons cost? Workforce Insights, Open Jobs, Google Maps Profile, Web Traffic, Email Infrastructure and Latest LinkedIn Posts each cost 1 credit, charged only when they return data. #### How much does "Workforce Insights" cost? "Workforce Insights" costs 1 credit, charged only if it returns data. It shows the observed employee count and the headcount by department, on a Person Search profile or in a list's record panel. #### How much does "Open Jobs" cost? "Open Jobs" costs 1 credit, charged only if it returns data. The price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does "Google Maps Profile" cost? "Google Maps Profile" costs 1 credit, charged only if it returns data. The price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does "Web Traffic" cost? "Web Traffic" costs 1 credit, charged only if it returns data. The price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does "Email Infrastructure" cost? "Email Infrastructure" costs 1 credit, charged only if it returns data. The price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does "Latest LinkedIn Posts" cost? "Latest LinkedIn Posts" costs 1 credit, charged only if posts are found. It needs the person's LinkedIn URL, and the price is on the card in the Person Search profile. #### How much does "Post Engagement Leads" cost? Finding the people who liked or commented on a person's recent LinkedIn posts costs 8 credits, and the same for a single post. It is charged only if such people are found, and it asks nothing extra per person. #### Where do I get a company's tech stack, and what does it cost? A company's technologies are part of "Deep Company Profile" (2 credits) and of "Company Profile Crunchbase" (1 credit), each charged only when it returns data. There is no separate tech-stack lookup. #### Is "Company News" or "Person in the News" free? Yes — "Company News" and "Person in the News" cost no credits. They are simple news searches on a Person Search profile. #### What is web research and does it cost credits? AI web research costs 1 credit per run, plus 2 credits when it delivers an email or phone number — at most 3 credits per run. Person Search offers it when its regular lookups find no contact. You need 3 credits in your balance to start it. #### Do I pay again if I revisit a contact I already looked up? Partly — a LinkedIn lookup that found data is not charged again for 30 days, companies in ListPlus's company cache cost nothing, and person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data are reused for 7 days in your account. Lookups that found nothing are run again, and add-on cards such as Company Contacts or Find Employees charge again each time they find something. #### How much does a page of Segment Search results cost? Each page of up to 25 results in Segment Search costs 2 credits, for people and for companies. A page is not charged if the search returns no results, or if it repeats a search you already ran in the last 30 days. #### How much balance do I need for a Segment Search? You need at least 2 credits in your balance, the price of one results page. Below that the search does not run and shows "Insufficient credits". #### How much does revealing an email or mobile number in Segment Search cost? Revealing a verified email in a Segment Search result costs 2 credits, and revealing a mobile number costs 18 credits — both charged only when the reveal finds a value. A masked preview like "j•••@company.com" costs nothing to see. #### How much does it cost to reveal a work email in Segment Search? Revealing the work email costs 2 credits, charged only when a verified email is found; the company's main phone number comes with it. Open the result and click "Reveal · 2 Cr" next to Work email under Reachability. #### How much does it cost to reveal a mobile number in Segment Search? Revealing the mobile number costs 18 credits, charged only when a number is found. Open the result and click "Reveal · 18 Cr" next to Mobile number under Reachability; it asks you to confirm first because it costs more than 10 credits. #### Does opening a result in Segment Search cost credits? Opening a result loads the person's basics — LinkedIn profile and company — for about 0.75 credits, each part charged only when found. Click "Auto-load basics: on" in the profile to switch this off if you only want to look. #### How much does Markets cost? In Markets each calculation for a new combination of filters costs 1 credit, and loading companies costs 0.25 credits per company. Picking values, opening a chart and a combination calculated within the last hour cost nothing. #### How much does one calculation in Markets cost? One calculation costs 1 credit: each click on Calculate for a new combination of filters, also when the result is zero. A combination that was calculated within the last hour, and the whole market with no filter set, cost nothing. The price is on the Calculate button. #### How much does loading companies in Markets cost? Loading companies in Markets costs 0.25 credits per company. The price for the number you load is on each button, and one search hands over at most 1,000 companies. #### How much does a sample in Markets cost? A sample of 10 companies costs 2.5 credits, 25 companies 6.25 credits and 50 companies 12.5 credits — 0.25 credits per company. You always load a sample first; the buttons for loading more or all appear once it has arrived. #### How much do similar companies cost in Markets? With the filter "Companies like these" loading costs 1.25 credits per company instead of 0.25. A calculation still costs 1 credit, and the price for the number you load is on each button. #### How much does AI Research cost? AI Research has no fixed price per match or per run: the agent's reasoning is billed by usage, plus the paid sources you switch on. You need at least 1 credit to start and you set a budget of 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 credits (50 by default); the run stops when it is reached. A live counter shows the credits used while it runs. #### How many credits do I need to start an AI Research run? You need at least 1 credit in your balance to start a run. If the credits run out during the run it stops itself and keeps what it found. #### What budget can I set for an AI Research run? 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 credits, 50 by default, set under "at most" before you start. The budget covers the agent's reasoning and every paid source, and the run stops when it is spent. Resume grants the chosen budget again. #### Which AI Research sources cost extra, and how much? Database costs 2 credits per search page, LinkedIn people 4 credits per search plus 0.5 per profile found, LinkedIn posts 0.5 per search plus 0.75 per post that is read, Reddit 10 per 25 results and X (Twitter) 3 per 100 posts. Each is a switch under Allowed AI tools with its price beside it, charged per call. #### Which AI Research sources are free? Web search, Read web pages, Job postings, News, Hacker News and Find LinkedIn cost no credits. Only the switches with a price beside them are charged. #### How much does the Database source cost in AI Research? The Database source costs 2 credits per search page of up to 25 people or companies. An empty page, or the same search repeated within 30 days, is not charged. #### How much does the LinkedIn people source cost in AI Research? The LinkedIn people source costs 4 credits per search plus 0.5 credits per profile found, with up to 25 profiles per search — at most 16.5 credits. The 4 credits are charged for the search itself, also when it finds nobody. The "LinkedIn people" switch under Allowed AI tools shows the 0.5 per profile; the 4 per search is in its tooltip. #### How much does the LinkedIn posts source cost in AI Research? The LinkedIn posts source costs 0.5 credits per search of up to 50 posts, plus 0.75 credits for each post whose comments and reactions the agent reads. So the total depends on how many posts turn out to be worth reading. #### How much does the Reddit source cost in AI Research? The Reddit source costs 10 credits per 25 posts or comments requested. It is charged per call, whether or not it finds something useful, and the agent can call it several times in one run. #### How much does the X (Twitter) source cost in AI Research? The X (Twitter) source costs 3 credits per 100 posts requested. It is charged per call, whether or not it finds something useful, and the agent can call it several times in one run. #### What does a research with my own AI ("Your AI") cost? The matches your AI reports cost no credits. You pay for the paid tools you switch on — at the same prices as in a ListPlus run — and they count against a spending cap of 10, 25 or 50 credits that you set. #### How much does the Email check cost in a "Your AI" research? The Email check costs 0.3 credits per email address checked. If the verification service fails, the charge is given back. #### How much does Enrich cost in a "Your AI" research? Enrich costs what the lookups for a hit really cost, at most 10 credits per hit, and never more than the research's spending cap. #### How much does recognizing an Inbox entry cost? Every recognition run costs at least 0.5 credits, including vCards, calendar invites, table rows and one-contact-per-line lists. Free text, a forwarded e-mail or a PDF adds AI usage at double the normal rate. The **Recognize contacts** button shows the price before you click: an exact number, or an upper bound marked "~" — about 1.6 to 1.7 credits for a short text, about 23 to 31 for long texts, newsletters and threads. #### How much does recognizing a vCard, calendar invite or table cost in the Inbox? Recognizing a vCard, a calendar invite, table rows or a one-contact-per-line list costs exactly 0.5 credits per run. The price is on the Recognize contacts button. #### How much does recognizing free text, an e-mail or a PDF cost in the Inbox? It costs 0.5 credits plus the AI usage for reading the text, at double the normal rate. The Recognize contacts button shows an upper bound marked "~": about 1.6 to 1.7 credits for a short text, and about 23 to 31 credits for long texts, newsletters and threads, which a stronger AI model reads. The actual charge is lower than the bound, and you need the bound in your balance to start. #### Does "Recognize again" cost credits? Yes — Recognize again costs the same as the first run, at least 0.5 credits, every time you click it. #### Does receiving content in the Inbox cost credits? Receiving costs no credits: pasting content, a connected tool sending it, or forwarding an e-mail to your Inbox address. Credits are spent only when contacts are recognized in an entry. #### Does automatic recognition in the Inbox cost credits? Recognition in the Inbox does not run by itself: you start it with Recognize contacts, at 0.5 credits per run plus AI usage for free text, and add the contacts to a list yourself. #### How much does an alert on a contact cost? Per contact and month: Job change costs 2 credits checked weekly or 14 checked daily, New LinkedIn posts 1 credit weekly or 7 daily. The first month is charged when you set the alert on the Watchlist, then monthly from the workspace owner's balance until you stop. The Set alerts window shows the sum per month before you confirm. #### How much does a Job change alert cost? A Job change alert costs 2 credits per contact and month when checked weekly, and 14 credits per contact and month when checked daily. The first month is charged when you set the alert, then monthly. It reports a new company, a new role, or that the person left the company. #### How much does a New LinkedIn posts alert cost? A New LinkedIn posts alert costs 1 credit per contact and month when checked weekly, and 7 credits per contact and month when checked daily. The first month is charged when you set the alert, then monthly. It reports the person's own posts, at most 3 per check. #### How much does an alert on a company cost? A New job postings alert costs 0.05 credits per company and month when checked weekly, and 0.2 when checked daily; a Funding rounds alert costs 0.25 credits per company and month, weekly or daily. The first month is charged when you set the alert, then monthly. A company without a LinkedIn page is not checked or billed for job postings; the funding alert needs only its domain. #### What does switching an alert from weekly to daily cost? Switching a contact to daily in a month that is already paid charges the difference: 12 credits for Job change (14 instead of 2) and 6 for New LinkedIn posts (7 instead of 1). Switching back to weekly gives no refund; the lower price applies from the next renewal. #### Do I get credits back when I stop an alert? There is no refund for the current month when you stop an alert, and starting again bills a full month. If the balance cannot cover a renewal, the alerts pause until there are credits again. #### Does looking up the LinkedIn profile for an alert cost credits? Looking up a missing LinkedIn profile for a contact with an alert costs no credits. If no profile is found, the contact waits and is not billed. #### How much does an AI command cost? AI commands on a list are billed by how much text they process, typically around 0.2 credits for a short command. The exact amount is shown right after each reply, and longer or more complex commands cost more. #### How much does scanning a business card on a list form cost? A scan is billed by AI usage, typically around 0.1 credits per card, and the list's workspace pays it — not the person who fills in the form. It is charged for every scan, also when nothing could be read from the photo. The scan button only exists when you switch on "Scan business card" in the form's settings. #### How much does scanning a business card in the Inbox cost? Reading the card is billed by AI usage, typically around 0.1 credits per photo, also when nothing could be read. The card's details become an Inbox entry; recognizing the contact from it then costs the usual 0.5 credits of a recognition run. The photo is not stored. #### How much does an AI column cost? An AI text column costs 0.02 credits per text. Rows with the same input share one text, so 1,000 rows with only 50 different companies cost 50 texts — 1 credit — and an empty answer costs nothing. The dialog shows the maximum before you create the column. #### How much does an AI statement in a score cost? An AI statement in a score costs 0.02 credits per judgment. Records with the same values are judged once, and the wizard shows the maximum for the first run before you start. Scores, tiers and Label columns that work by rules cost no credits. #### Does testing an AI column or AI statement cost credits? Testing on 10 rows costs no credits, for an AI text column and for an AI statement in a score. Credits are charged only when the column runs on the list. #### Is there a daily limit on what automatic AI judgments can cost? Yes — automatic recalculation of AI judgments is capped at 50 credits per list and day. A run you start yourself, for a new or changed column, shows its maximum before it starts and does not count against that ceiling. #### Do pipelines cost credits? Yes: a delivery costs a fixed price per record that arrived, shown on the target's tile (see the next answer); the Team email and Another list targets cost nothing. A test that really delivers (Slack, Webhook, Email draft) costs one record's price; a CRM, Lemlist, Instantly, Google Sheets or Other app test only checks what would happen, writes nothing and costs nothing. A rule's Enrich action is not a target; it spends credits on lookups within the budget you set per record. #### What does an app event cost? 1 credit per event received, charged when it arrives — also when the record is merged into an existing one or held back. For a message that is meant for a list, recognizing its contacts costs 0.5 credits plus AI usage on top, only when the message names a contact. Setting up, the preview and a paused app event cost nothing. #### What does a request to a connected tool cost? Every request that reached the tool costs 1 credit. A request that did not get through, or that the tool answered with an error status, is not charged, and neither is a Slack message that Slack turns down (for example because the account is not in the channel). Connecting accounts, browsing the app catalogue, the preview in the import wizard and choosing a destination for an export or a pipeline are not charged. #### What does a pipeline to Slack, HubSpot or another connected tool cost? A fixed price per record that arrived, shown on the target's tile: 2 credits for HubSpot, Salesforce and Attio, 3 for Pipedrive, 1 for Slack, Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly, Email draft (per draft created; a skipped repeat costs nothing) and "Other app", 0.25 for a webhook to your own endpoint. A record the target turned down is not charged, and Team email and Another list have no delivery charge. #### Is a pipeline or the export cheaper for sending many contacts to HubSpot? For many contacts at once the export is cheaper: Export to HubSpot writes up to 100 contacts per request, so 500 contacts are about 10 requests at 1 credit each. A pipeline delivers record by record at 2 credits per contact, so the same 500 contacts cost about 1,000 credits. A pipeline is the right choice when records should reach HubSpot by themselves as they arrive or change, each with its own result in the history. #### What does syncing changes back to the source cost? Syncing back costs 1 credit per request to the tool. Google Sheets takes up to 500 rows per write request and HubSpot up to 100 records, while Attio needs one request per record; the reads that compare with the source are requests too. #### What does reloading or updating a list from a connected tool cost? A reload or update reads the source in pages and costs 1 credit per request; HubSpot returns 100 records per request, so 10,000 contacts are about 100 requests. The automatic refresh pays its requests on every run, and if the balance runs out mid-run the run stops at the next request. #### How much does the Enrich action of a rule cost? A rule's Enrich action charges the usual price of each lookup it runs for a record, and never more than the budget under "At most per record": 5, 10, 25 or 50 credits, 10 by default. A step that would exceed the budget is not started, and a field the record already has is not bought again. #### What does enriching a contact in the Outlook add-in cost? In the Outlook add-in, Company Lookup costs 0.25 credits, LinkedIn Profile and Find LinkedIn Profile 0.5 each, Contact Profile Lite 2, Contact Profile Waterfall 4 and Crunchbase 1 — the same prices as the matching lookups in the web app. Each price is shown on its button before you run it, and the credits come from the workspace you last used. #### Does the API connection of a list cost credits? The API connection itself costs no credits and is included in every plan. What an agent enriches or looks up through it is charged at the same prices as in the app. #### What never costs credits in ListPlus? These never cost credits: Google searches for a LinkedIn URL or company website, a company already in ListPlus's cache, cleaning phone numbers, the standard quality checks in Analyze, and exporting a list to a file. Creating an empty list, receiving content in the Inbox or over a list webhook, and pipelines to the Team email or Another list targets cost no credits either. A pipeline to a Webhook target costs 0.25 credits per record delivered; other pipeline targets cost their delivery price per record, and imports, reloads, syncs and exports through a connected tool cost credits per request. #### What do AI texts, Check content and the website suggestion cost? They are metered on the text the AI actually processes: AI texts in an email draft usually well under 0.1 credits per draft with the fast model (about twenty times as much with the stronger one), Check content usually 0.1–0.2 credits, and Suggest from your website about 0.3–0.6 credits. The email draft itself costs 1 credit per draft created. --- ## What does one contact cost? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost Last updated: 2026-10-17 It depends on what you already know about the person. In the single-cell fill window, ListPlus lists the single lookups cheapest first and marks the cheapest with a "cheapest" badge (a multi-step option marked "recommended" may appear at the top); in the Enrich menu and the record panel, you pick which lookup to run yourself. Almost every route only charges credits when it actually finds something — a miss is free — except LinkedIn Profile Search by name and company (1 credit, always) and Verify LinkedIn Profile (0.25–0.5 credits, always); see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full list. ### The routes, cheapest first | You already have | Click | Credits | Charged | What you get | | -------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------- | ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | A LinkedIn URL | "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) / "Verified Email & Company Phone" (Person Search card) — Prospeo | 2 | on hit | Verified email, the company's main phone number, and basic company data | | A name and company (no LinkedIn URL, no email) | "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) / "Verified Email & Company Phone (by Name)" (Person Search card) — Prospeo | 2 | on hit | Same as above, matched by name + company instead of a URL | | Only an email address (reverse lookup, finds the most matches) | "Contact Profile (by Email)" — FullEnrich (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window, Person Search card) | 4 | on hit | Name, job title, company, LinkedIn URL, location; if FullEnrich finds nobody, CompanyEnrich is asked automatically (2, only for a person whose name fits the address) | | Only an email, cheaper but finds fewer matches | "Contact Profile (by Email)" — CompanyEnrich (single-cell fill window only) | 2 | on hit | Same fields as above; only offered from the single-cell fill window | | Need a personal mobile | "Reveal Mobile Number" — Prospeo (record panel, single-cell fill window, Person Search card) | 18 | only if a number is found | A verified personal mobile; needs a LinkedIn URL or a name + company to start from | | Company data only, no person | "Company Lookup" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) / "Company Profile" (Person Search card) — CompanyEnrich | 0.25 | on hit | Industry, size, location, LinkedIn company URL and more | "Reveal Mobile Number" isn't offered directly in the Enrich menu — start it from the record panel, the single-cell fill window, or a Person Search card. In a list, you can still reveal mobiles for many rows at once by selecting the rows first and choosing Contact details → Phone in the selection bar's field picker (it runs the same 18-credit mobile reveal). If "Contact Brief" doesn't find an email, from either a LinkedIn URL or a name and company, the next step is the 6-credit "Find Email (by Name & Company)" (FullEnrich), charged only on a hit — labeled "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" in the single-cell fill window and "Deep Email Search" on a Person Search card. In the Enrich menu, Prospeo's Contact Brief lookup also appears a second time under this exact same "Find Email (by Name & Company)" label, at its usual 2 credits, so check the credit amount shown on the button rather than the name alone. The Enrich menu and record panel additionally offer a chained version of "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" that can cost up to 12 credits — 6 for the email, and 6 more only if a follow-up profile lookup also succeeds; in the single-cell fill window the same label is a flat 6 credits with no chain. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full breakdown of which surface charges what. Needing both an email and a direct phone number from just a name and company is a separate, pricier route: "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu, or "Deep Mobile Search" on a Person Search card — 42 credits via FullEnrich; the phone tier is charged only when a phone number is found (6 credits if it only turns up an email). ### Why the prices differ Cheaper lookups (0.25–2 credits) work from either an exact key — a LinkedIn URL or a domain — or a single verified database matched by name and company, so only one provider needs to be checked. The pricier 6-credit and 42-credit routes instead run a waterfall across 20+ data sources to catch matches the cheap route missed, which costs more to run — worth trying only after the cheap route comes up empty. Mobile numbers are the most expensive single reveal (18 credits) because a verified personal mobile is far scarcer and costlier to source than a work email or a company's main phone number, which already comes free with a Contact Brief lookup. ### How to keep it cheap - **Free steps first.** Finding a LinkedIn URL by name and company via Google search costs nothing — do this before paying for anything that needs a LinkedIn URL. - **Reuse what's already there.** If a row was enriched earlier but the cell stayed empty, clicking an enrich button fills it from that existing data in your list first, with no new API call and no credits spent. - **Start with Contact Brief.** Try the 2-credit route before the 6-credit deep search — most contacts are found on the first, cheaper try. - **Pick only what you need.** Pick "Find Email" instead of "Find Email + Phone" unless you actually need the phone number — the phone version costs several times more. - **Enrich a selection, not the whole list.** Select only the rows that still need a contact before clicking an enrich button, so you don't pay to re-check rows that already have one. - **Revisit for free.** Re-running a LinkedIn lookup that already found data costs nothing for 30 days, and cached companies are free; person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data are reused for 7 days in your account, while lookups that found nothing are run again. ### A worked example As an example only — actual costs depend on what's found. In the best case, "Contact Brief" already includes basic company data, so one contact can cost as little as 2 credits with nothing else needed. If Contact Brief's company data isn't enough and you also run a separate "Company Lookup" (0.25 credits), that's about 2.25 credits for one contact. Adding a verified mobile number ("Reveal Mobile Number," 18 credits) brings that same contact to about 20.25 credits. See "[Cost examples: worked totals for common tasks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cost-examples)" for larger, worked-through scenarios. **Related topics:** price-list · cost-examples · credits-explained · where-did-my-credits-go · which-enrich-button · enrichment-overview. ### FAQ #### How much does it cost to find one email address? Usually 2 credits: "Contact Brief" via Prospeo, from a LinkedIn URL or a name and company, charged only if it finds a verified email. Finding the LinkedIn URL first, if you don't have one, is a free Google search. If Contact Brief finds nothing, the next step is the 6-credit "Find Email (by Name & Company)" via FullEnrich. #### I have a LinkedIn URL — what should I click first? Start with "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" in the Enrich menu or record panel — labeled "Verified Email & Company Phone" on a Person Search card. It costs 2 credits via Prospeo, charged only if a verified email is found, and also returns the company's main phone number and basic company data in the same call. #### I only have a name and company — how do I find their email? Start with "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" — 2 credits via Prospeo, charged only on a hit. If it doesn't find a match, the 6-credit "Find Email (by Name & Company)" via FullEnrich searches a wider waterfall of sources, still only charged if it succeeds. #### I only have an email — how do I find their name and job title? This reverse lookup is labeled "Contact Profile (by Email)" everywhere you start it. FullEnrich's 4-credit version finds the most matches; CompanyEnrich's cheaper 2-credit version, only available from the single-cell fill window, is cheaper but finds fewer. Both charge only if a match is found, and when FullEnrich finds nobody, ListPlus asks CompanyEnrich by itself (2 credits, only for a person whose name fits the address). #### Why do some email lookups cost 6 credits and others only 2? The 2-credit "Contact Brief" (Prospeo) checks one verified database using a LinkedIn URL or a name and company — the cheapest starting point. The 6-credit "Find Email (by Name & Company)" (FullEnrich) instead waterfalls across 20+ data sources for a higher hit rate on harder contacts, so it's worth trying only after Contact Brief comes up empty. #### Why is a mobile number so expensive? "Reveal Mobile Number" costs 18 credits via Prospeo because a verified personal mobile is far scarcer and costlier to source than a work email, and it's only charged when a number is actually found. If that doesn't find one, the remaining route to a phone number is the 42-credit "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" via FullEnrich — the full 42 only when a phone is found, 6 if it only turns up an email. #### How do I avoid paying twice for the same contact? If a row was already enriched earlier but the cell is still empty, clicking an enrich button fills it from that existing data already in your list first, at no extra cost and no new credits spent. Repeating a person lookup (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data within 7 days is also free, because the earlier result is reused in your account. #### What's the cheapest way to get someone's phone number? A company's main phone number already comes free with a "Contact Brief" lookup (2 credits). For a personal mobile, use "Reveal Mobile Number" (18 credits via Prospeo, charged only if found); if that doesn't find one, "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" (42 credits via FullEnrich, the phone part only charged when a phone is found) is the remaining option. #### Contact Brief found nothing — what next? Try the 6-credit "Find Email (by Name & Company)" via FullEnrich — labeled "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" in the single-cell fill window and "Deep Email Search" on a Person Search card — which searches a wider waterfall of 20+ sources and is charged only if it succeeds. For a phone number instead, "Reveal Mobile Number" (18 credits) or "Find Email + Phone" (42 credits) are the next paid options. --- ## Cost examples: worked totals for common tasks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cost-examples Last updated: 2026-10-17 These are worked-through totals for tasks people actually do, built from the per-action prices in the price list. Real results vary — how many contacts a lookup actually finds is never guaranteed — so each example states its "hit rate" as a clearly labeled assumption, not a promise. One credit is worth about €0.03, or about $0.035 if you pay in US dollars, with Pro or Premium (€0.05 / $0.06 on Basic) — the totals below are shown in euros at the Pro and Premium rate, but the same credit counts apply either way, so multiply by $0.035 instead for a dollar estimate. For the reasoning behind each price, see "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" and the price list. ### 1. Emails for 1,000 names + companies Starting point: a list of 1,000 rows with first name, last name and company, no LinkedIn URL and no email yet. | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | ---------------- | -------- | | "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" — Prospeo | 2 cr on hit | up to 1,000 | 2 × hits | | "Find Email (by Name & Company)" — FullEnrich, fallback for the rest | 6 cr on hit | remaining misses | 6 × hits | Two Enrich-menu entries share the exact label "Find Email (by Name & Company)" — Prospeo's cheaper 2-credit lookup and FullEnrich's 6-credit one. The credit amount shown on the button is how you tell them apart; for this fallback step, pick the one showing 6 credits. - **Best case** — Contact Brief finds all 1,000: 1,000 × 2 = **2,000 credits** (≈ €60). - **Worst case** — Contact Brief finds none, but the 6-credit fallback finds every one of them: 1,000 × 6 = **6,000 credits** (≈ €180). - **Realistic estimate** (assumption: 60% found by Contact Brief, another 20% by the fallback, 20% not found at all): 600 × 2 + 200 × 6 = **2,400 credits** (≈ €72) for about 800 emails. 1,000 records fit comfortably within the 5,000 records Basic edits across all your lists. **Spend less:** the selection bar's **Email** field does this by itself: Contact Brief first, the FullEnrich search only for the rows it missed. The "at most" figure its dialog shows adds both prices per row, although a miss is free, so the real bill is normally lower. Select just the rows still missing an email before you enrich, so you're not re-paying for ones you already have. ### 2. Clean & verify 5,000 CRM contacts Starting point: a 5,000-row export from a CRM, imported as a file. | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------ | ----------- | -------------- | | File import | 1 cr flat | 1 list | 1 | | AI column detection (runs automatically on every import) | billed by usage, no fixed rate | 1 list | small | | Analyze: checks, fixes, duplicate merging (rule-based) | free | 5,000 rows | 0 | | "Verify Email Deliverability" (only once the service is actually called) | 0.3 cr | up to 5,000 | 0.3 × verified | Analyze's own checks and fixes — deduplication, formatting, placeholder detection and the like — are rule-based and free. AI-based checks or fixes, such as the Enrich menu's AI-derived fields, are billed separately by usage and aren't part of "cleaning" in this example. - **Best case** — most addresses are caught for free as obviously invalid, disposable, role-based or test-domain, so few ever reach the paid verification step: close to the cost of the import plus column detection alone, both small. - **Worst case** — every address looks plausible and needs the paid verification call: 5,000 × 0.3 + 1 = **1,501 credits** (≈ €45), plus the small column-detection charge. - **Realistic estimate** (assumption: a typical CRM export is mostly plausible-looking addresses, so about 85% reach the paid check and 15% are caught free): 5,000 × 0.85 × 0.3 + 1 = **1,276 credits** (≈ €38), including the import. 5,000 records are exactly what Basic edits across all lists — with other lists on top, you'd need Pro to keep editing. **Spend less:** run Analyze first (free) and only verify rows that don't already have a known-good status, instead of re-verifying the whole list every time. ### 3. 500 database leads with verified email (Segment Search) Starting point: a Segment Search matching your audience; you want 500 results and a verified email where available. There's no bulk "reveal email" inside Segment Search itself — you add results to a list page by page, then enrich them from the list. | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------- | --------- | -------- | | Segment Search page fetch (up to 25 results each) | 2 cr/page | 20 pages | 40 | | "Add To List" (asks how many to add; a new list costs 1 credit) | 0 | once | 0 | | "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" — Prospeo, from the list's Enrich menu | 2 cr on hit | up to 500 | 2 × hits | If a page returns fewer than 25 results, you'll need more than 20 pages to reach 500. - **Fewest credits spent** — no Contact Brief lookup finds a value: **40 credits** (≈ €1.20) for 500 leads with no email found. - **Full yield** — every lookup finds a verified email: 40 + 500 × 2 = **1,040 credits** (≈ €31). - **Realistic estimate** (assumption: about 60% of the 500 leads get a verified email via Contact Brief): 40 + 500 × 0.6 × 2 = **640 credits** (≈ €19). 500 leads fit easily within the 5,000 records Basic edits. **Spend less:** the masked email/mobile preview on a Segment Search result is always free to browse, so shortlist which leads you actually want before adding pages and enriching — the page fetch is the one cost you can't avoid per batch of 25. ### 4. One AI Research run AI Research has no fixed total: the agent's reasoning is billed by actual usage, the same way AI commands are, so it scales with how many steps a run takes rather than a flat rate. If your balance runs out mid-run, the run simply stops and keeps whatever it already found. Only the optional paid sources have a fixed per-call price. | Step | Rate | Count (assumption) | Credits | | --------------------------- | ----------------------------- | ------------------ | -------- | | Reasoning steps | billed by usage, no flat rate | — | variable | | Reddit search (opt-in) | 10 cr/call | 2 calls | 20 | | X (Twitter) search (opt-in) | 3 cr/call | 1 call | 3 | - **Best case** — no paid sources switched on, a short run: just the (variable, usage-billed) reasoning cost, no source charges at all. - **Worst case** — Reddit and X are both called many times over the course of a long run: the run never spends more than the budget you set (10–500 credits, 50 by default), source charges and reasoning included. - **Worked example** (the source-call counts in the table above — 2 Reddit searches, 1 X search): 20 + 3 = **23 credits** in source charges, plus reasoning billed separately. You need at least 1 credit in your balance to start any run, and you choose how many matches it looks for — 25, 50, 100 or no limit, up to 200 per run (1,000 with a target list). **Spend less:** leave Reddit and X off unless you need them — Google search, used throughout every run, is always free. ### 5. Mobile numbers for 100 people Starting point: 100 rows that already have a name and company (or a LinkedIn URL), selected in the grid. For one person, the record panel's "Reveal Mobile Number" is the direct route. For a batch like this, select the rows, click **Enrich** in the selection bar, and pick Person → Contact details → **Mobile** in the field picker that opens — the same underlying lookup, with the maximum cost shown before you confirm (check it shows 18 credits per row). | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------ | --------- | --------- | | "Phone" (selection bar → Enrich → Contact details) — Prospeo, same lookup as "Reveal Mobile Number" | 18 cr on hit | up to 100 | 18 × hits | - **Fewest credits spent** — no reveal finds a number: **0 credits** (an unlikely outcome, since you'd get no mobiles either). - **Full yield** — every reveal finds a number: 100 × 18 = **1,800 credits** (≈ €54). - **Realistic estimate** (assumption: mobile coverage is lower than email coverage, about 30% of people have a discoverable verified mobile): 100 × 0.3 × 18 = **540 credits** (≈ €16). **Spend less:** a company's main phone number already comes free with a 2-credit "Contact Brief" lookup — only select rows you actually need a personal number for before running the Mobile field, so you're not paying to check people you won't call. ### 6. Import a 2,000-row Excel and fill company data Starting point: a 2,000-row Excel file with a company domain or name per row, no company data yet. | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------ | ----------- | ----------------- | | File import | 1 cr flat | 1 list | 1 | | AI column detection (runs automatically on every import) | billed by usage, no fixed rate | 1 list | small | | "Company Lookup" (by domain) — only when it isn't already free from the shared cache | 0.25 cr on hit | up to 2,000 | 0.25 × rows found | "Company Lookup" checks ListPlus's shared company cache first — a domain another user recently looked up costs nothing. The figures below assume every match calls the paid provider, so they're an upper bound; your actual cost can be lower. - **Fewest credits spent** — few domains resolve to a company, or most hit the free cache: close to the cost of the import plus column detection alone, both small. - **Full yield, all paid** — every domain resolves and none is cached: 2,000 × 0.25 + 1 = **501 credits** (≈ €15). - **Realistic estimate — upper bound** (assumption: about 70% of domains resolve to a company profile, all via the paid lookup): 2,000 × 0.7 × 0.25 + 1 = **351 credits** (≈ €11) or less. 2,000 rows fit comfortably within the 5,000 records Basic edits across all your lists. **Spend less:** only run "Company Lookup" on rows that actually have a domain or company name — skip blanks. "Company Lookup" checks ListPlus's shared company cache first, so domains already in the cache cost nothing. ### 7. Sales Navigator import of 500 leads + LinkedIn enrichment Starting point: a Sales Navigator search URL, importing up to 500 leads. Sales Navigator leads don't include email addresses, so finding one is a separate step afterwards. | Step | Rate | Count | Credits | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------ | ------------------- | ---------------- | | Sales Navigator import | 35 cr base + 1 cr/result | up to 500 results | 35 + 1 × results | | "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" prompt → Contact Profiles (Prospeo; same lookup as Contact Brief by LinkedIn URL) | 2 cr on hit | up to 500 | 2 × hits | | Same prompt → Company Profiles | 0.5 cr when found | up to 500 rows | 0.5 × found | | "Find Email (by Name & Company)" fallback — FullEnrich, the entry showing 6 credits | 6 cr on hit | remaining misses | 6 × hits | The 35-credit base fee is charged when the import starts and is kept even if the search returns zero leads or the provider's run fails; the per-result part is charged for the leads actually delivered once they arrive. Right after a successful import, an "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" prompt offers **Contact Profiles** (verified email, phone, job title and company from Prospeo, charged only when found) and **Company Profiles** (industry, size, website, description, charged when found), with an "Enrich Now (~credits)" button showing the live estimate. Contact Profiles is pre-ticked; Company Profiles is pre-ticked only for Sales Navigator. This prompt is the email step: ticking Contact Profiles is the same lookup as "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)", so don't run both. As with the earlier examples, two menu entries share the label "Find Email (by Name & Company)"; pick the one showing 6 credits for the fallback. - **Best case** — full 500 leads imported, Contact Profiles finds every email: (35 + 500) + 500 × 2 = **1,535 credits** (≈ €46). - **Worst case** — full 500 leads imported, Contact Brief misses everyone but the 6-credit fallback finds them all: 535 + 500 × 6 = **3,535 credits** (≈ €106). - **Realistic estimate** (assumption: 60% found by Contact Brief, 20% by the fallback, 20% not found): 535 + 300 × 2 + 100 × 6 = **1,735 credits** (≈ €52). These figures include the Contact Profiles lookup as the email step. They don't include Company Profiles: ticking it for all 500 leads adds up to about 250 more credits (less once shared companies are deduplicated and only when a company page is found). 500 leads fit within the 5,000 records Basic edits. **Spend less:** starting a Sales Navigator import needs the full 535-credit maximum available in your balance up front, even though the per-result part is only charged for results actually returned — check your balance before you start a large one. Untick Company Profiles in "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" if you only need emails, try the Contact Profiles lookup before the pricier fallback, and only enrich the leads you'll actually contact. **Related topics:** price-list · what-does-one-contact-cost · credits-explained · buying-credits · plans-and-pricing · which-plan-do-i-need. ### FAQ #### How much does it cost to find emails for 1,000 contacts? Assuming a mix of hit rates, a realistic estimate is around 2,400 credits (≈ €72) for about 800 emails found: 60% found via the 2-credit "Contact Brief" and another 20% via the 6-credit fallback. Best case (everyone found by the cheap route) is 2,000 credits; worst case (everyone needs the expensive fallback) is 6,000 credits. 1,000 rows fit within the 5,000 records Basic edits. #### What does cleaning and verifying 5,000 contacts cost? Cleaning — Analyze's rule-based checks, fixes and duplicate merging — is free; only automatic column detection (billed by usage) and email verification cost credits, with verification at 0.3 credits per address once the service is actually called. A realistic estimate, including the 1-credit import, is around 1,276 credits (≈ €38), assuming most addresses look plausible enough to need the paid check. 5,000 records are exactly what Basic edits — with other lists on top, you'd need Pro to keep editing. #### What do 500 leads with verified emails from Segment Search cost? Fetching 500 results (20 pages of up to 25) costs a flat 40 credits, and "Add To List" puts them into an existing list at no extra cost (a new list costs 1 credit more) — there's no bulk email reveal inside Segment Search itself. From the list, "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" costs 2 credits per hit, so a realistic estimate assuming about 60% of leads get a verified email is around 640 credits (≈ €19); the range runs from 40 credits (no hits) up to 1,040 credits (every lead hits). #### How much is one AI Research run? There's no fixed total — the agent's reasoning is billed by actual usage, scaling with how many steps the run takes, and the run stops itself if your balance runs out. Only the optional paid sources have a fixed rate: for example, 2 Reddit searches and 1 X search add up to 23 credits (20 + 3) in source charges, on top of the separately billed reasoning. You need at least 1 credit in your balance to start a run. #### What do mobile numbers for 100 people cost? Mobile lookups cost 18 credits per hit either way: "Reveal Mobile Number" in a single contact's record panel, or, for a batch, select the rows and pick Person → Contact details → Phone after clicking Enrich in the selection bar. Assuming a realistic 30% of people have a discoverable verified mobile, 100 people costs around 540 credits (≈ €16); the range runs from 0 credits (no hits) up to 1,800 credits (every one hits). #### How much is a Sales Navigator import of 500 leads? Importing up to 500 leads costs 35 credits base plus 1 credit per result — 535 credits (≈ €16) for a full 500; the base is charged when the import starts, the per-result part once the leads arrive. Adding email enrichment on top (the "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" prompt's Contact Profiles at 2 credits per hit, with a 6-credit fallback for the rest) brings a realistic estimate to around 1,735 credits (≈ €52) for the import plus enrichment together; Company Profiles in the same prompt is optional and adds 0.5 credits per company found. #### What does filling company data for 2,000 rows cost? A realistic estimate is around 351 credits (≈ €11), including the 1-credit import, assuming about 70% of domains resolve to a company via the paid "Company Lookup." That figure is an upper bound — "Company Lookup" checks ListPlus's company cache first, so some domains cost nothing. #### Can I do this with the 25 free credits? Not at this scale — 25 credits covers roughly a hundred 0.25-credit Company Lookups on their own, less once an import's 1-credit charge and column detection's small usage-based cost are taken out. It's enough to test one or two lookups, not a 1,000-row or 500-lead task — see "[Buying credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits)" for pack sizes to cover a real batch. #### How many credits do I need per month? There's no fixed number — credits are usage-based, so size your own need by estimating your typical monthly volume of lookups, imports and AI use and multiplying by the price list's per-action rates. Reusing a worked total above for a similarly sized task is the fastest way to get a rough monthly figure. --- ## Where did my credits go? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/where-did-my-credits-go Last updated: 2026-10-17 Every place credits get spent also shows the cost, and **Settings → Credits & usage** pulls it all together in one history for the balance that pays in your current workspace. This topic walks through where to look, in Settings and inside a list. ### Open Credits & usage Click the gear in the left rail, or your avatar menu → **Settings**, then **Credits & usage**. (⌘K → "Credits & usage" opens it directly too, and clicking your credit balance anywhere also lands here.) This shows your balance at the top, then the full usage report underneath — the credit history of the balance that pays in the active workspace. An old bookmark to /app/usage takes you straight here as well. ### Usage in a workspace When more than one person spent credits in the active workspace this month, the page also has a section **Usage by person** with this month's credits per person, so you can see who spent what. The rest of the page depends on whose balance pays: - **In a workspace you own**, the page shows your full credit history across all workspaces you own, including purchases. - **In a workspace someone else owns**, the balance shown is the owner's (for example "Anna's credits"), and the page only shows that workspace's spending: no purchases, no lifetime totals of the owner, nothing from other workspaces. A note says "You only see this workspace's usage. The balance belongs to …". ### What each part of the page shows - **Balance**, at the top — your credit total right now, with what one credit costs on your plan underneath ("1 credit ≈ €0.03", or $0.035, with Pro or Premium; €0.05 or $0.06 on Basic) — and a **Buy credits** button (**Ask for credits** if you're a member, not the owner). - **Today** and the current month (for example "October 2026") — credits spent and number of paid actions (requests) in each period; the month tile also says how many people spent credits. - **In total** — every credit you've ever spent, with its approximate € value. - **Usage by process** — what this workspace spent its credits on, for the period you pick at the top right: **Today**, **7 days**, **This month** or **90 days**. The rows are groups — **AI**, **Enrichment**, **Search**, **Import**, **Pipeline delivery**, **Connected tools** — and a click opens a group: Enrichment by provider (Prospeo, FullEnrich, CompanyEnrich, email verification …), AI by feature (AI columns, AI texts in email drafts, column recognition …), Import by kind (file, Sales Navigator …), Pipeline delivery by target and Connected tools by tool. Columns: Process, Requests, Credits, Avg/Request and Share (of the period). It shows the biggest four groups; **Show all →** opens the rest. A refund counts against what it gives back. Under an enrichment provider you also see how often it found something, for example "312 of 400 found (78 %) · 2.00 credits per hit" — lookups that found nothing cost nothing, so this tells you what a result really costs. - **Usage by person** — with more than one person spending, who spent how much in the same period. - **Usage by list** — which lists the credits were spent on in the same period; a list's name opens it. - **Transaction History** — a table of your individual transactions (see below), with a "Last 13 Weeks" heatmap above it: darker days spent more, and clicking a day filters the table to just that day's transactions (click again, or close the day chip, to see everything). Charges that belong together — one enrichment run, one pipeline send, several calls of the same AI feature in a row — are one row, for example "Prospeo · List · Leads Q4 · 1,000 charges"; click it to see the single charges. The table keeps the latest 1,000 transactions; for an older day the heatmap and the totals still count, but the single transactions are no longer listed. The € amount under **In total** is a rough guide to value and shows the same way even if you pay in dollars; your invoices (Settings → Plan & billing) are always in the currency you actually paid. ### Reading one transaction Each row in Transaction History has four columns: **Date**, **Details**, **Credits** (positive adds to your balance, negative subtracts) and **Balance** right after it. The table shows ten rows at a time; **Load more →** shows the next ones. Details shows what the credits paid for (e.g. an AI model name, a search by its name, or the connected tool a request went to) and where — Person search, Segment Search, AI Research, Import, Enrichment, Pipeline delivery, Request to a connected tool, AI, or a specific List; when it names a list, the list name is a clickable link that opens it (or shows "deleted list" if it no longer exists). A credit pack reads "Credits purchased"; a bonus, a refund or a correction reads "Bonus", "Refund" or "Adjustment". Pipeline deliveries (charged per delivered record) read "Pipeline delivery" with the target; requests to connected tools (imports, reloads, sync back, Google Sheets exports) read "Request to a connected tool" with the tool. ### Per-list spend in the status bar Inside a list, the status bar at the bottom shows a "credits spent" chip whenever that list has cost anything. Click it to open **Credits Used on This List**, which splits the total into **AI Commands** (chat, selections, analysis) and **Enrichment** (data lookups & verification) — this counts what everyone in the workspace spent on that one list, not your account total. ### Where an AI reply shows its cost When you give the AI an instruction — edit data, select rows, tag them, analyze them — its reply ends with a small footer naming the model and the exact credits that reply cost, e.g. "0.23 Credits." Plain conversational AI replies are billed the same way but don't show this footer inline — their cost still lands in Usage by process and Transaction History in Settings → Credits & usage. ### Where an enrichment run shows its total While an enrichment job runs and right after it finishes, a small status bar floats at the top of the screen showing its progress — click it to expand and see, per job, how many records were enriched (and how many from the cache), how many found nothing, any provider errors, and the credits it used. A run that stopped — for example because credits ran out — has a **Continue** button there that picks it up where it stopped. An enrichment you started from the AI chat shows up there too — the chat only confirms that it started. ### How refunds appear Most lookups simply aren't charged at all when they fail to find anything — the price list marks which ones are charged only on a hit versus per attempt. ListPlus automatically refunds credits in a few narrower cases: a paid AI Research source (like email verification during a research run through your own AI assistant) that fails after already being charged, an Inbox recognition result discarded before you could use it, and the base fee of a LinkedIn import that could not be started — see "Refunds". AI commands and AI reasoning that already ran are billed regardless of how useful the reply was, and aren't refunded. ### If something looks wrong 1. Open **Settings → Credits & usage** and find the transaction — use the heatmap to jump to a day, or scroll the Transaction History table. 2. Note its date, amount, type and Details text (what it paid for, and where). 3. Email **support@listplus.ai** with those details so support can look up the exact charge. ### For advanced users Kinds of transactions: "Credits purchased" (a credit pack you bought), a charge (an action that spent credits — Details names it), "Bonus" (a one-time grant, e.g. your sign-up credits or a plan's first-subscription bonus), "Refund" (an automatic credit-back, see "Refunds"), and "Adjustment" (a manual correction made by ListPlus support). **In total** and a list's credit total are both gross figures: a refund adds the credits back to your balance but doesn't reduce what **In total** or that list already counted. A list's status bar chip rounds to a whole number of credits, while the "Credits Used on This List" modal it opens shows exact decimals; while a job runs, the chip and Credits & usage update at slightly different moments and agree once the job has finished and you reload. Today and the month are counted by UTC calendar day/month, so they can roll over at a different local time than midnight where you are. AI usage is converted to credits from the actual input and output tokens of that reply, using a per-model rate — not a flat per-command price — which is why the same instruction can cost a slightly different amount twice. Usage history belongs to the balance it was paid from (the workspace owner's): ListPlus keeps the last 1000 transactions in total, the Transaction History table shows only the most recent 100 of those, and the 13-week heatmap is built from the full 1000 — so a very active account's heatmap can reach further back than the visible table. **Related topics:** credits-explained · price-list · what-does-one-contact-cost · navigation-and-glossary · not-enough-credits · buying-credits · refunds · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### Where can I see a breakdown of what I spent my credits on? Open Settings → Credits & usage — it shows your balance, Usage by process (AI models, enrichment, searches, imports, requests to connected tools), a 13-week heatmap, and your latest transactions, each labeled with what it paid for and where (a search, an import, an enrichment, or a specific list). #### Why did my balance drop? Every paid action — a data lookup, an AI command, a file import — deducts credits the moment it runs, so your balance can drop outside of when you buy a pack. A LinkedIn import takes its base fee when it starts and the per-person part when the people arrive. Open Settings → Credits & usage to see exactly which transactions lowered it. #### How do I see what a single list cost? Inside the list, look at the "credits spent" chip in the status bar at the bottom and click it to open "Credits Used on This List," which splits the total into AI Commands and Enrichment. This counts what everyone in the workspace spent on that one list, rounded to a whole number in the chip (the modal shows exact decimals). #### What do the transaction types mean? Transaction History has no separate type column: the Details column says "Credits purchased" for a credit pack, "Bonus" for a one-time grant, "Refund" for credits returned automatically and "Adjustment" for a manual correction from support; every other row is a charge and names what it paid for. Positive amounts add to your balance, negative amounts subtract from it. #### I was charged but got no result — what now? Most lookups only charge credits when they actually find something; a few are charged per attempt even without a match, and the price list marks which is which for every action. A failed lookup normally isn't charged, and a few charge-first cases (such as a failed paid research source during a research run through your own AI assistant, a discarded Inbox recognition, or a LinkedIn import that could not start) are refunded automatically — check Credits & usage in Settings for a Refund entry, and email support@listplus.ai with the date and amount if a charge still looks wrong. #### How do I see what an AI command cost? When you give the AI an instruction — edit, select, or tag rows — its reply ends with a small footer showing the model and the exact credits it cost. Every AI reply's cost — including plain question-and-answer replies that don't show this footer — also appears in Settings → Credits & usage, under Usage by process and in Transaction History. #### How do I see what an enrichment run cost? While an enrichment job runs, and for a few seconds after, a small status bar floats at the top of the screen; expand it to see how many records were enriched (and how many from the cache), how many found nothing, any provider errors, and the credits used, per job; a stopped run has a **Continue** button there. An enrichment you started from the AI chat shows up there too — the chat only confirms that it started. #### Why does Usage by process show "Enrichment", "Import" or search rows? Usage by process lists every kind of paid activity, not just AI models: enrichment lookups, searches, imports and requests to connected tools appear as their own rows, by their names in the app. Each row's share is its percentage of all the credits you've ever spent, not just AI spend. It shows the biggest four; click **Show all →** for the rest. #### How does recognizing Inbox contacts show up in Credits & usage? As a charge in Transaction History at the time you clicked **Recognize contacts**. It's the same run you paid for on that button — the amount matches the price shown there (or less, for free text). #### Why doesn't my list's credit counter match Credits & usage? The status bar chip only counts that one list (spend by everyone in the workspace), not the whole balance, and it rounds to a whole number while the modal it opens shows exact decimals. While a job runs, the chip and Credits & usage update at slightly different moments, so they can briefly disagree until the job has finished and you reload. #### I clicked a day in the heatmap and see no transactions — why? The heatmap is built from your last 1000 stored transactions, but the table below it only ever holds the most recent 100 — so clicking an older, lower-activity day can find nothing in the visible table even though the heatmap shows spend that day. This only happens on accounts with heavy usage; email support@listplus.ai with the date if you need details on an older transaction. #### Can I download or export my transaction history? Not from Credits & usage itself — there's no download or export button there today. If you need your transaction history for accounting or another external use, email support@listplus.ai with the date range you need. #### How far back does my usage history go? ListPlus keeps your most recent 1000 transactions; older ones aren't retained. The Transaction History table only shows the latest 100 of those, while the 13-week heatmap above it summarizes the full 1000 by day, so it can cover more history than the table on a very active account. #### I think I was charged too much — who do I contact? Email support@listplus.ai with the transaction's date, credit amount, and its "what/where" details from Credits & usage, so support can look up the exact charge. Check the price list first if you just want to confirm what an action is supposed to cost. #### Why don't I see purchases or my full history in Credits & usage? You are in a workspace someone else owns, so the page shows that owner's balance and only the spending in this workspace, without purchases or other workspaces. Switch to a workspace you own to see your own full history. The section "Usage by person" shows this month's credits per person when more than one person spent credits. --- ## Buying credits Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits Last updated: 2026-10-16 Credits are bought in fixed packs, paid for through Stripe, and land on your balance automatically as soon as the payment succeeds. You can buy a pack on any plan, including Basic, and credits never expire. ### Where to buy credits The **Purchase Credits** window opens from a few places once you're signed in, always showing the same four packs: - **Settings → Credits & usage → Buy credits**. - the **+ Top up** link on the workspace card in your avatar menu (owner only). - **Plans & Billing** → **Buy Credits**. - Automatically, whenever an action would cost more credits than you have: ListPlus opens the same window with a note about what you were trying to do. Buying credits doesn't resume that action for you — top up, then run the action again yourself. Buying credits needs a signed-in account. Anonymous visitors see no balance; **Plans & Billing → Buy Credits** asks them to sign up first (free, no credit card needed) before the purchase window opens. ### Buying credits in a workspace Credits you buy always go to **your own** balance, and your balance pays for the workspaces you own. In a workspace someone else owns, everything is paid from the owner's balance: there is no **Buy Credits** button on Plans & Billing, and the places above open a note ("Balance empty – please ask … to top up") instead of the Purchase Credits window. Ask the owner to top up. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)". ### The four packs | Pack | Credits | With Pro or Premium | On Basic | Badge | | ---------- | ------- | ------------------- | -------------- | ------------ | | Starter | 150 | €5 / $6 | €7.50 / $9 | — | | Basic | 500 | €15 / $18 | €25 / $30 | MOST POPULAR | | Pro | 1,000 | €30 / $35 | €50 / $60 | — | | Enterprise | 3,500 | €100 / $115 | €165 / $199 | BEST VALUE | With Pro or Premium, credits cost 40% less: about €0.03 / $0.035 per credit instead of €0.05 / $0.06 on Basic. The Purchase Credits window always shows the prices of the plan of the workspace owner who pays; on Basic it adds the note "With Pro or Premium, credits cost 40% less." Credits never expire — not when the month ends, not when you change or cancel your plan. You pay in euros if you're in Europe (EU/EEA, the UK, Switzerland or the Balkans) and in US dollars everywhere else, based on the country you're paying from — the same rule as for plans (see "Why do I see prices in dollars?" in "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)"). These four pack names (Starter, Basic, Pro, Enterprise) only label credit packs — they are not your subscription plan. Your plan is Basic, Pro or Premium (see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)"); there is no Enterprise plan. MOST POPULAR and BEST VALUE are fixed labels on the Basic and Enterprise packs, not a ranking that changes. "% cheaper", shown on a card whose price per credit is lower than the Starter pack's, compares the two — the Starter pack is the baseline everything else is measured against. On Basic only the Enterprise pack is cheaper per credit; the other cards show their rate per credit instead. ### How checkout works The window opens with the Basic pack preselected. Click a card to select a different pack, then click the buy button at the bottom, for example **Buy 500 Cr · €15** (with Pro or Premium). This takes you to the checkout page in the same tab. ListPlus sells through Stripe Managed Payments, so the name on that page and on your invoice is Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company that handles the sale for us as merchant of record ("Sold through Link"). The checkout accepts cards, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Link and, in some countries, local payment methods, and adds VAT or sales tax for your country on top of the net price, calculated from your billing address — see "[Invoices and VAT](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat)" for details. ### When credits arrive, and where you land Credits are added to your balance as soon as Stripe confirms the payment, normally within a few seconds of finishing checkout. You're first returned to Plans & Billing, then automatically taken on to Home about two seconds later — your balance is normally already updated by the time you land there. ### If payment fails or you close the window If you cancel checkout, close the tab, or the payment doesn't go through, you're simply returned to Plans & Billing with nothing charged and no credits added. You can start the purchase again at any time; nothing about your account or existing credits changes. ### Invoices Every credit pack produces an invoice automatically: Link emails you a receipt and an invoice with tax shown, with PDFs attached, and the order appears in your history at link.com and under **Settings → Plan & billing → Invoices**; no email to support needed. Every purchase also appears as PURCHASE with its amount on the Credits & usage page, so you always have a record even before you check the invoice — see "[Invoices and VAT](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat)" for more. ### For advanced users Each payment is credited to your balance once, matched to the pack you paid for. If your balance hasn't updated within a couple of minutes of a completed payment, contact support@listplus.ai with the approximate time of purchase. **Related topics:** credits-explained · plans-and-pricing · price-list · where-did-my-credits-go · invoices-and-vat · refunds · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### How do I buy credits? Open Settings → Credits & usage and click Buy credits, or click + Top up on the workspace card in your avatar menu (clicking your balance in the left rail also takes you to Credits & usage) — the Purchase Credits window opens. Select a pack and click the buy button to pay through Stripe; credits land as soon as payment succeeds. In a workspace you don't own you see Ask for credits instead, because only the owner can top up. #### Which credit packs are there and what do they cost? There are four packs — with Pro or Premium: Starter (150 credits, €5/$6), Basic (500 credits, €15/$18), Pro (1,000 credits, €30/$35) and Enterprise (3,500 credits, €100/$115). On Basic they cost €7.50/$9, €25/$30, €50/$60 and €165/$199, so with a subscription every credit costs 40% less. You pay in dollars outside Europe and in euros inside it. #### Which pack is the best value? The Enterprise pack (3,500 credits, €100 with Pro or Premium, €165 on Basic) has the lowest price per credit, about 2.9 cents with a subscription, and carries the BEST VALUE label. The Basic pack (500 credits, €15) carries the MOST POPULAR label — these are fixed labels on those two packs, not a live ranking. #### What does the "% cheaper" note on a pack mean? It shows how much less you pay per credit on that pack compared with the smallest pack, Starter. The Starter pack itself shows no percentage, since it's the baseline every other pack is compared against; a pack with the same rate as Starter shows its rate per credit instead. #### Can I buy a custom number of credits? No — there are only the four fixed packs (150, 500, 1,000 or 3,500 credits); there's no option to enter a custom amount. If none of the sizes fit, buy the closest one and top up again later. #### Do several credit purchases add up? Yes. Every pack you buy adds its credits to the same balance, so you can buy as many packs as you like, at any time, and they all stack — there's no limit on how many purchases you make. #### Which payment methods are accepted? ListPlus sells through Stripe Managed Payments; its checkout accepts cards, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Link and, in some countries, local payment methods. Payment is handled entirely on Stripe's secure checkout page, not inside ListPlus, and the sale is handled there by Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company, as our merchant of record. #### Can I pay by bank transfer, SEPA direct debit or PayPal? The checkout decides which methods it offers in your country: cards, Apple Pay, Google Pay and Link everywhere, plus some local methods. ListPlus can't add a method the checkout doesn't show — an alternative isn't guaranteed. #### Do I need a paid plan to buy credits? No. Credit packs are available on every plan, including Basic, since credits and plans are billed separately. You do need a signed-in ListPlus account; anonymous visitors are asked to sign up first. #### When do purchased credits show up in my balance? Credits are added automatically as soon as Stripe confirms your payment, normally within a few seconds. Your balance updates on its own — no manual refresh or claim step needed. #### Where do I end up after paying? You're first sent back to Plans & Billing, then automatically on to Home about two seconds later. If you opened the purchase window because an action was blocked, that action doesn't resume by itself — go back and run it again once you're topped up; a stopped AI Research run has a Resume button instead. #### I paid but don't see the credits — what now? Give it a couple of minutes after checkout, since crediting happens right after Stripe confirms the payment and can occasionally lag slightly. If your balance still hasn't updated after that, contact support@listplus.ai with the approximate time of purchase and they'll sort it out. #### Is there automatic top-up when I run low? No. ListPlus never charges you automatically — you always pick a pack and confirm the purchase yourself. #### Where do I get the invoice for a credit pack? Link emails it to you right after the payment, with the PDF attached; the order is also in your history at link.com and listed under Settings → Plan & billing → Invoices. There's no need to email support for it. #### Why do credits cost more on Basic? Basic has no subscription, so credits cost €0.05/$0.06 each. With Pro or Premium every credit costs 40% less — about €0.03/$0.035. Credits you already bought keep their full value on every plan and never expire. --- ## Invoices and VAT Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat Last updated: 2026-10-16 Every payment on ListPlus, subscriptions and credit packs alike, runs through **Stripe Managed Payments**. The name on your receipt and invoice is **Sold Through Link, LLC**, a Stripe company that handles the sale for us as merchant of record ("Sold through Link"): Link calculates and collects the VAT or sales tax, emails you the receipt and the invoice and answers questions about the payment itself. ListPlus (salesperformer GmbH) provides the product: your plan and your credits. ### Where to find your invoices After every payment Link emails you a receipt and an invoice with tax shown ("Rechnung mit Steuerausweis"), each with a PDF attached. The line item reads "salesperformer GmbH · …", for example "salesperformer GmbH · Starter Pack — 150 credits". You can also see your order history at link.com — sign in there with the email address you paid with; if you paid as a guest, Link invites you to create an account to get there. In ListPlus, **Settings → Plan & billing** (gear icon in the left rail, or avatar menu → **Settings**) lists your invoices under **Invoices**, with a **PDF** button where one is available. ### Payment method and billing address You can change both in two places: - **Settings → Plan & billing**: **Payment method → Change** and **Billing address → Edit** open Stripe on that exact step and bring you back to Settings. - **link.com**: update the payment method and billing address of your orders, and see or cancel your subscription. Your billing address decides the tax: Link calculates VAT or sales tax from it, so keep it current. ### Who sees this in a workspace Only the workspace **owner** sees invoices and the payment method in ListPlus, because the owner's plan and credits pay for the whole workspace. Members see their own current plan and a note that plan and credits run through the owner — ask the owner for an invoice. ### VAT and your VAT ID All ListPlus prices are net: VAT is never included and is added on top at checkout. Link calculates the VAT, sales tax or GST for your country from your billing address, shows it before you pay, collects it and pays it to the tax authorities, for both subscriptions and credit packs. In Germany, for example, the invoice shows "USt. – Deutschland 19 %". Buying for a company? Choose **Buy as a business** in the checkout and enter your company name and VAT ID. Link then applies the reverse-charge mechanism where the law provides for it, and the invoice shows your company and VAT ID. For a question about the VAT on an invoice already issued, contact Link support at support.link.com, which handles invoice questions for purchases sold through Link; you can also email support@listplus.ai and we'll help you find the answer. ### Correcting an invoice already issued Link issues the invoices, so a corrected invoice comes from Link: ask at support.link.com with the purchase date and amount. A billing address you change applies to payments from that point on. ### For advanced users On your card statement the payment appears as **LINK.COM\* LISTPLUS** (or a similar descriptor starting with "LINK.COM\*"). Payments in the EU are processed by Stripe Technology Europe, Limited. Prices are set in euros for customers in Europe and in US dollars everywhere else (see "Why do I see prices in dollars?" in "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)"); the checkout can also show and charge the amount converted into your local currency, and each invoice is in the currency that purchase was actually charged in. **Related topics:** buying-credits · plans-and-pricing · where-did-my-credits-go · refunds. ### FAQ #### Where do I download my invoices? Link emails you a receipt and an invoice with a PDF after every payment, subscription or credit pack. Your order history is also at link.com, and Settings → Plan & billing → Invoices lists the invoices in ListPlus with a PDF button where one is available. #### How do I get an invoice for a credit pack? The same way as a subscription invoice: Link emails it to you with a PDF right after the payment, and the order is in your history at link.com. Check the inbox of the email address you paid with. #### I cancelled my subscription — how do I get my old invoices? They stay in your emails from Link and in your order history at link.com, and they stay listed under Settings → Plan & billing → Invoices after your plan reverts to Basic. If one is missing, ask Link support at support.link.com or email support@listplus.ai with the purchase date and amount. #### Can I enter my VAT ID when I pay? Yes. In the checkout, choose **Buy as a business** and enter your company name and VAT ID. Link then applies the reverse-charge mechanism where the law provides for it, and the invoice shows your company and VAT ID. For a VAT question about an invoice already issued, contact Link support at support.link.com, or email support@listplus.ai. #### How is VAT calculated at checkout? ListPlus prices never include VAT. Link adds the VAT, sales tax or GST for your country on top, calculated from your billing address, and shows it before you pay, for every subscription and credit pack purchase. Link also pays it to the tax authorities. #### I forgot to enter my VAT ID — can my invoice be corrected? Invoices come from Link, so ask Link support at support.link.com with the purchase date and amount. You can also email support@listplus.ai and we'll help. #### Can I change the company name or address on an invoice? For future payments, update your billing address in Settings → Plan & billing → Billing address → Edit, or at link.com. For an invoice already issued, ask Link support at support.link.com with the purchase date and amount. #### Which currency are my invoices in? Whichever currency you paid in: prices are set in euros for Europe (EU/EEA, the UK, Switzerland or the Balkans) and US dollars everywhere else, and the checkout can convert the amount into your local currency. Each invoice shows the amount in that purchase's own currency. #### Where do I see what I've paid, besides the invoice? Every purchase appears immediately as a PURCHASE row with its amount on the Credits & usage page in Settings — see "[Where did my credits go?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/where-did-my-credits-go)" for the full breakdown. Your orders are also listed at link.com. #### I'm on Basic — where do I find my invoices? The same place as on any plan: in your emails from Link, at link.com, and under Settings → Plan & billing → Invoices. A credit pack bought on Basic is there too. #### Where exactly do I manage billing — is there a "customer portal"? Two places. In ListPlus, Settings → Plan & billing has your plan and next charge, payment method, billing address and your invoices; its buttons open Stripe on that one step and bring you back. At link.com you see your orders and can cancel or update your subscription, payment method and billing address. #### Does ListPlus send an invoice automatically after I pay? Link does: after every subscription charge and every credit pack purchase it emails you a receipt and an invoice with tax shown, with PDFs attached — no request needed. #### Why does my card statement say LINK.COM? Because ListPlus sells through Stripe Managed Payments, where Sold Through Link, LLC (a Stripe company) handles the sale for us as merchant of record. Your statement shows "LINK.COM*" followed by our name, for example LINK.COM* LISTPLUS. It's your ListPlus purchase. --- ## Cancel, downgrade and leave Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave Last updated: 2026-10-17 Cancelling, downgrading and leaving are separate questions. This article covers what actually happens to your plan, your credits, your lists and your data — see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)" for how subscribing and switching plans works day to day. ### Cancel your subscription Open **Settings → Plan & billing** and click **Cancel subscription**; this opens Stripe's confirmation for exactly that. You normally keep full access to everything your plan includes until the end of the billing period you already paid for, and the plan row then shows "Ends on {date} — then Basic." After that date your account moves to Basic automatically — nothing is deleted in the process. Changed your mind before then? The same section shows a **Keep my plan** button that undoes the pending cancellation. Because ListPlus sells through Stripe Managed Payments, you can also see and cancel your subscription at link.com — Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company, handles the sale for us as merchant of record and is the name on your invoice. ### Switching between Pro and Premium, or monthly and yearly Use **Change plan** in Settings → Plan & billing, or **Switch to {plan}** / **Switch to yearly** / **Switch to monthly** on Plans & Billing, to move between Pro and Premium or between monthly and yearly billing — see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)" for the full walkthrough. Either opens Stripe's confirmation page showing the prorated amount; the change applies immediately and the difference is invoiced right away. ### Downgrading to Basic — what changes Once you're on Basic, you can edit up to 5,000 records across all lists (and hold up to 25,000), credits cost €0.05/$0.06 instead of €0.03/$0.035, you can no longer use connected tools (a move to Pro keeps Pro's tools but not HubSpot or the other Premium sources). Your connected accounts stay connected but are not used until your plan covers them again. Reference lists (a Premium feature) you already set up **keep working** after a downgrade from Premium — badges, pipeline and trigger conditions and the Block role stay active, so "not an existing customer" never quietly lets customers through. You just can't turn another list into a reference list until you're on Premium again. ### If you own workspaces with members Your plan applies to every workspace you own, so cancelling or downgrading changes them all: the record limit counts all their lists together (above it, all of them become read-only), and the connected tools your new plan doesn't include can't be used by any member there. Members don't need a plan of their own, so let them know before you downgrade. To hand a team over to someone else instead, transfer the workspace to them (see "[Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete)"). Leaving a workspace someone else owns is not the same as cancelling: it only ends your access to that workspace and doesn't touch your own plan, credits or workspaces. ### Your credits after cancelling Your credit balance is untouched by cancelling or downgrading — credits are separate from your plan, never expire, and stay exactly as they were, so you can keep using them for lookups and AI on Basic. See "[How credits work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/credits-explained)" for the full picture. ### Lists above your new record limit Nothing is deleted, hidden or resized. If your workspaces hold more records than Basic edits (5,000), your lists become **read-only**: you can still view, filter, sort, analyse and export every row and delete whole lists, but editing cells, adding or deleting rows, statuses, tags, enrichment, AI columns, pipelines, triggers and automatic refresh pause. Each list shows a banner with an **Upgrade to edit** button. Upgrade again, or delete lists until you're at 5,000 or fewer, and editing comes back. See "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)" for the details. ### Take your data with you before you leave Every list can be exported on every plan, for free, any time. Open the list and use the **⋯** button at the top right: **Export Data** opens the export wizard, where you pick columns and a format such as Excel, CSV or JSON (the same wizard opens from **Export Wizard** in the ⌘K command palette). To export just your current selection or the filtered/visible rows instead of the whole list, use **Export Selected Records** or **Export Visible Records** in the same menu; **Export as Excel** there is a one-click shortcut straight to a file, no wizard needed. The Watchlist has no export button of its own — select what you want and use **Add to list** first, then export that list. Anything sitting in Inbox that you haven't saved or added to a list is temporary and is deleted after 14 days, so save or add-to-list what you want to keep. ### Closing your account The **Delete account** button in Settings → Profile & sign-in deletes your account and your data together, immediately and irreversibly: every workspace you own (with all its lists, Watchlist, Inbox, research runs and pipelines), your membership in any workspace you don't own, your profile and the accounts you connected, and any remaining credits (they aren't refunded). An active subscription is cancelled right away, so nothing more is charged; your invoices stay at Stripe and Link for legal record-keeping. Export anything you want to keep first, and if colleagues work in a workspace you own, transfer it to one of them before you delete your account, since that workspace is deleted along with everything in it. For how to delete an individual list, saved contact or Inbox entry without deleting your whole account, see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)". ### Refunds Cancelling itself never costs anything and normally keeps your access until the date you already paid through. For a refund question — for example cancelling partway through a paid month — email support@listplus.ai with your account email and the date, and support will get back to you. You can also ask Link support at support.link.com: Link is the name on your invoice, pays refunds out and may decide on a refund within 60 days of the purchase. ### For advanced users Downgrading doesn't touch any list data by itself — only your plan and subscription details change automatically; nothing is deleted, hidden, truncated or resized. If the total is above what the new plan edits, the lists become read-only until you upgrade or delete lists. **Related topics:** plans-and-pricing · credits-explained · record-limit · invoices-and-vat · export-overview · buying-credits · delete-account-and-data · billing-in-workspaces · leave-remove-transfer-delete. ### FAQ #### How do I cancel my ListPlus subscription? Open Settings → Plan & billing and click Cancel subscription — this opens Stripe's confirmation, where you confirm. You normally keep full access to your plan until the date shown there, then your account moves to Basic automatically; Keep my plan undoes a pending cancellation. #### When does my plan actually end after I cancel? Normally at the end of your current billing period — once you've cancelled, Settings → Plan & billing shows "Ends on {date} — then Basic" with the exact date. Until that date you keep your full record limit and integrations; after it, your account moves to Basic on its own. #### Do I lose my credits if I cancel my subscription? No. Credits are separate from your plan and never expire, so cancelling or downgrading to Basic doesn't touch your balance — you keep using it for lookups and AI on Basic exactly as before. #### What happens to my lists if I have more records than Basic allows? Nothing is deleted. If you hold more than 5,000 records, your lists become read-only: you can still view, filter, analyse and export every row and delete whole lists, but editing, enrichment and automations pause until you upgrade again or delete lists to get back to 5,000 or fewer. #### Can I reactivate after cancelling? Yes — once your plan has reverted to Basic, subscribe to Pro or Premium again the normal way from Plans & Billing. The one-time credit bonus for that plan was already granted the first time you subscribed to it, so it won't be granted a second time. #### Do I get money back if I cancel partway through the month? There's no automatic refund for the unused part of a billing period, and cancelling normally keeps your access until the date already paid for. If you still want to ask about a refund, email support@listplus.ai with your account email and the date, or ask Link support at support.link.com — Sold Through Link, LLC is the name on your invoice. #### How do I export everything before I leave? Open a list and use the ⋯ button at the top right — Export Data opens the export wizard (also reachable as Export Wizard in the ⌘K command palette), where you choose columns and a format like Excel, CSV or JSON. To export just your current selection or the filtered/visible rows instead of the whole list, use Export Selected Records or Export Visible Records in the same menu; Export as Excel there is a one-click shortcut. Exporting is free on every plan — repeat this for each list you want to keep. #### Can I export the contacts on my watchlist directly? Not directly — the Watchlist has no export button of its own. Select the ones you want and use Add to list to move them into a list first, then export that list the normal way. #### How do I delete my account and data? Use the Delete account button in Settings → Profile & sign-in — it deletes your account and all your data together immediately, with no undo, including every workspace you own and your remaining credits. Export anything you want to keep first, and transfer ownership of any shared workspace before you delete your account; for deleting single lists or contacts without closing your account, see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)". #### What happens if my payment fails? While Stripe is still retrying a failed payment your plan stays active; if the subscription becomes unpaid after the retries, your account moves to Basic automatically, the same way it does after a normal cancellation. Update your payment method under Settings → Plan & billing → Payment method before that happens to keep your plan active. #### Will my connected HubSpot, Google Sheets etc. keep working if I downgrade to Basic? No — the accounts stay connected, but a pipeline send, sync, reload or export answers that a higher plan is needed ("Connected systems need the Pro plan…" or "…the Premium plan…"), and an automatic refresh shows "The workspace's plan no longer includes this source…" and skips its runs until the plan covers the source again — this does not count as a failure. Basic uses no connected tool at all; HubSpot and imports from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium, the rest Pro. #### Does cancelling my plan affect my team? Yes, if your team works in a workspace you own: your plan applies there, so the record limit and integrations change for every member too. Members' own plans and credits are not touched. To hand the team over, transfer the workspace to a member first. #### Is leaving a workspace the same as cancelling? No. Leaving a workspace (Settings → General → Leave, for non-owners) only ends your access to that one workspace. Your own plan, credits and the workspaces you own stay as they are. --- ## Record limit Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit Last updated: 2026-10-17 Your plan sets how many records you can work with. On Basic there are two numbers: how many records you may **import** and how many you may **edit**. This article covers what counts, what happens above each number, and how to get back to editing. ### What counts as a record A record is one row in a list — one contact. The limit is a single total, not a per-list limit: it adds up every list in every workspace you **own**. Separately, one list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan. Lists in a workspace where you are only a member count toward that workspace's owner, and the owner's plan sets the limit there. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)". ### The limits per plan | Plan | Records you can edit | Records you can import | | ------- | -------------------- | ---------------------- | | Basic | 5,000 | 25,000 | | Pro | 100,000 | 100,000 | | Premium | 1,000,000 | 1,000,000 | Both numbers count across all lists of all workspaces you own. The largest single list is 50,000 records on every plan. On Pro and Premium they're the same, so everything you hold stays editable. See "Which plans does ListPlus have?" for prices and what else each plan adds. ### Basic: import 25,000, edit 5,000 On Basic you can bring in your real lists — up to 25,000 records in total — and see everything ListPlus finds in them. As long as your total is 5,000 or less, everything works as usual. Above 5,000 records, the whole workspace becomes **read-only**. Nothing is deleted, and: - **Still works:** viewing your lists, filtering, sorting, analyses (quality checks), export, and deleting whole lists. - **Paused until you upgrade:** editing cells, adding or deleting rows, statuses and tags, enrichment, AI columns, pipelines and triggers that write to your lists, the Agent API's writing actions, and automatic refresh from a source. Each list then shows a banner: "Your workspace holds 6,240 records; your plan edits 5,000. Viewing, analysing and exporting still work – editing comes back with an upgrade." with an **Upgrade to edit** button that opens Settings → Plan & billing. Members of someone else's workspace don't get the button; they see "Only {owner} can upgrade." instead. ### Getting back to editing Two ways: - **Upgrade** to Pro (100,000 records) or Premium (1,000,000). Editing comes back as soon as the payment goes through. - **Delete whole lists** until your total is 5,000 or less. Deleting single rows isn't possible while read-only, so delete lists you no longer need (export them first if you want to keep a copy). Ignoring or filtering rows doesn't lower your total — only deleting does. ### What pauses in the background While a workspace is read-only, nothing writes to its lists: - **Automatic refresh** from a source (HubSpot, Salesforce …) fails with "Refresh failed:" and the reason "Your workspace is over its plan's record limit – its lists are read-only until you upgrade." After three failed attempts it pauses, like any failing refresh; click **Turn back on** under Set up → Refresh automatically once you're back under the limit. - **Triggers** don't act; the trigger shows "The workspace is over its plan's record limit. Nothing is handed over until it upgrades – the records stay noted." The noted records run after the upgrade. - **Pipelines** hand nothing over to a list or an enrichment and show the same reason. - **List webhooks** still accept calls, but the records don't reach the list: they are held back in the Inbox with the reason "Plan's record limit reached". **Add anyway** works once you're back under the limit (until then it answers "Your plan's record limit is reached – upgrade to add these rows."). Inbox entries are deleted after 14 days, so act within that time. See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". - **Agent API (/d, MCP):** reading and analysing actions still work; actions that change data answer with an error saying the lists are read-only until the plan is upgraded. A full list is a different case (one list holds at most 50,000 records): see "[How many records fit in one list?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/list-size-limit)". ### Where you see how many records you're using There's no single "records used" counter. Each list card on Home shows that list's own record count, and a project's card shows the combined total for the lists inside it — add up the lists of all workspaces you own to estimate your total. Once you're above the edit limit, the banner in the list shows the exact total. ### Importing a file that's bigger than your limit Creating a new list from a file imports as many rows as still fit under your plan's import limit (25,000 on Basic), and shows a warning above the preview: "Importing X of Y rows due to your plan's record limit." A file larger than one list can hold is cut at 50,000 rows — see "[How many records fit in one list?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/list-size-limit)". Under the plan warning, a plain-text hint reads "Upgrade your plan to import all rows." — this is not a link, just a note; use the avatar menu or Plans & Billing to actually upgrade. If you have no capacity left at all, ListPlus doesn't import anything: a window says "You have no remaining capacity. Upgrade your plan to import more records.", with two buttons — **Upgrade Plan**, which takes you to Plans & Billing, and **Go Back**, which returns you to Home. An import on Basic can take you above 5,000 records — the new list arrives in full, and the workspace becomes read-only until you upgrade or delete lists. ### Duplicating, merging or adding rows Duplicating a list, using **Consolidate Lists** (merging lists together) or adding rows to an existing list counts against the number of records you can **edit** (5,000 on Basic). If it would push your total over that, it's blocked: you'll see a "Record limit reached" window stating your plan's limit and your current record count, with two buttons: **Upgrade Plan**, which takes you to Plans & Billing, and **Cancel**. The 50,000-per-list ceiling applies on top, on every plan; see "[How many records fit in one list?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/list-size-limit)". ### After a downgrade or cancellation Downgrading never deletes, hides or resizes any list or row. If you hold more records than your new plan edits (5,000 on Basic), your lists become read-only as described above — still viewable, analysable and exportable. See "What happens to my lists if I have more records than Basic allows?" in Cancel, downgrade and leave. ### For advanced users The limit is based on the total row count stored in the lists of all workspaces you own. That count is always the actual number of stored rows, not what's currently visible — filtering or scrolling in the grid doesn't change it. A list stops counting toward your total the moment you delete it. If an import or action seems to be limited unexpectedly, contact support@listplus.ai. **Related topics:** plans-and-pricing · which-plan-do-i-need · cancel-downgrade-leave · credits-explained · buying-credits · billing-in-workspaces · list-size-limit. ### FAQ #### What is the record limit? Your plan sets how many records (rows) you can edit, counted over all lists of all workspaces you own — Basic 5,000, Pro 100,000, Premium 1,000,000. On Basic you may import up to 25,000; above 5,000 your lists are read-only until you upgrade. It's one combined total, separate from your credit balance; on top of it, one list holds at most 50,000 records. #### How many records does each plan allow? Basic lets you import up to 25,000 records and edit up to 5,000. Pro allows 100,000 and Premium 1,000,000, all of them editable. Everything is counted across all lists of every workspace you own, and a single list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan. #### What happens above 5,000 records on Basic? Your workspace becomes read-only, and nothing is deleted. You can still view, filter and sort your lists, run analyses, export everything and delete whole lists. Editing cells, adding or deleting rows, statuses, tags, enrichment, AI columns, pipelines, triggers and automatic refresh pause until you upgrade or delete lists to get back to 5,000 or fewer. #### Why are my lists read-only? Your workspace holds more records than its plan edits — for example more than 5,000 on Basic. The banner in the list shows your total and the limit, with an Upgrade to edit button. Upgrade, or delete whole lists you no longer need, and editing comes back. #### I'm a member — why can't I upgrade? The workspace owner's plan sets the limit, so only the owner can upgrade. The banner says "Only {owner} can upgrade." — ask the owner to upgrade or to delete lists they no longer need. #### Do lists in a workspace I've joined count toward my limit? No. Lists count toward the owner of the workspace they are in, and that owner's plan sets the limit there. Only the lists in workspaces you own count toward your own limit. #### Do ignored or filtered rows still count? Yes. The limit counts every row actually stored in your lists, regardless of whether it's currently visible — filtering or ignoring rows in the grid doesn't remove them or free up space, only deleting them does. #### What happens if my import is bigger than my limit? ListPlus imports as many rows as still fit under your plan's import limit (25,000 on Basic) and shows the warning "Importing X of Y rows due to your plan's record limit," with a plain-text note to upgrade if you want the rest. A file larger than 50,000 rows is also cut to 50,000 on every plan, with the hint to import the rest into a second list. If you have no remaining capacity at all, nothing is imported until you delete lists or upgrade. #### Why can't I duplicate or merge a list? Duplicating a list, merging lists with Consolidate Lists or adding rows is blocked when it would push your total over the number of records your plan edits (5,000 on Basic). You'll see a "Record limit reached" window with your current total and your limit, and buttons to Upgrade Plan or Cancel. #### How do I free up space? Delete whole lists you no longer need — that lowers your total right away. While your workspace is read-only, single rows can't be deleted, so export a list first if you want to keep a copy. Ignoring or filtering rows doesn't help, since they're still stored. #### Why did my automatic refresh stop? If your workspace is over its plan's record limit, its lists are read-only, so an automatic refresh shows "Refresh failed:" with that reason and pauses after three attempts. Upgrade or delete lists to get back under the limit, then click Turn back on under Set up → Refresh automatically to resume the schedule. #### What happens to records my list webhook receives while my lists are read-only? They aren't written to the list: the webhook holds them back in the Inbox, in an entry named after the list, with the reason "Plan's record limit reached". After you upgrade or delete lists to get back under the limit, open the entry and click Add anyway. Inbox entries are deleted after 14 days, so decide within that time. #### Where do I see how many records I use? There's no single counter; each list's card on Home shows its own record count, and a project's card shows the combined total for the lists inside it. Once you're over the edit limit, the banner in a list shows your exact total and the limit. #### Does the record limit reset every month? No, it isn't a monthly quota. It's how many records you hold across your lists at any one time. #### Does upgrading raise my limit right away? Yes. As soon as your payment goes through, your new plan's limit applies: read-only lists become editable again, and an import or action that was held back by the old limit goes through if you try it again. --- ## How many records fit in one list? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/list-size-limit Last updated: 2026-10-17 One list holds at most **50,000 records**, on every plan. This is separate from your plan's record limit, which is a total over all your lists (see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)"): on Pro or Premium you can hold far more than 50,000 records, spread over several lists. ### Where the ceiling shows - **Importing a file:** a larger file is cut to its first 50,000 rows. The preview warns "Importing X of Y rows – one list holds at most 50,000 records." with the hint "Import the remaining rows into a second list." - **Importing from a connected tool** (HubSpot, Google Sheets …): at most 50,000 records are brought into the list. - **Adding rows** to a full list is refused with "A list holds at most 50,000 records – start a new list for more." - **Merging lists** into one that would be larger is refused with "One list holds at most 50,000 records – the merged list would have N." Nothing is changed. - **Automatic refresh:** when the source has more new records than fit, the refresh changes nothing and says "The source has more new records than fit – one list holds at most 50,000 records. Nothing was changed." To work with more contacts, split them over several lists, for example by country, segment or source. **Related topics:** record-limit · create-list-and-import-file · merge-lists · import-problems · reload-from-source. ### FAQ #### How many records can one list hold? One list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan, however high your plan's total record limit is. The plan limit (Pro 100,000, Premium 1,000,000) is a separate total across all your lists, so large totals mean several lists. #### Why were only 50,000 rows of my file imported? One list holds at most 50,000 records, so the wizard imports the first 50,000 rows and warns "Importing X of Y rows – one list holds at most 50,000 records." Create a second list from the remaining rows, as the hint under the warning says. #### Why can't I add rows to this list ("A list holds at most 50,000 records")? The list has reached the per-list ceiling of 50,000 records, which applies on every plan. Start a new list for more rows; deleting rows in this list makes room again. #### Why does merging two lists say the merged list would be too large? Because one list holds at most 50,000 records and the merged result would have more. The message reads "One list holds at most 50,000 records – the merged list would have N." and nothing is changed; merge fewer records or keep two lists. #### Why did my automatic refresh say "more new records than fit"? The source has more new records than one list can take, so the refresh stops with "The source has more new records than fit – one list holds at most 50,000 records. Nothing was changed." Narrow what the source delivers or import the surplus into a second list. #### How do I work with more than 50,000 contacts? Split them over several lists: each list holds at most 50,000 records, and your plan's total (Pro 100,000, Premium 1,000,000) counts across all of them. Import the remaining rows into a second list when the wizard offers it. #### Does an import from HubSpot or Google Sheets stop at 50,000 records? Yes. An import from a connected tool brings at most 50,000 records into one list, on every plan. Narrow the import with the source's filters, or import the rest into a second list. --- ## Not enough credits Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every paid action checks your balance before it runs and is refused if the balance is below its price — even a balance that isn't literally zero can be too low for a specific action. When that happens, the **Purchase Credits** window opens and tells you how much the action needs and what your balance is ("This needs … credits; your balance is …"), or simply "You don't have enough credits for this operation. Please purchase more credits." In a workspace, the balance that counts is always the workspace owner's. ### Where you may see it and what to do | Where you see it | What happens | What to do | | ------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Person Search (Personensuche) | "Not enough credits for this search." — and the Purchase Credits window opens. | Top up, then search again. | | Segment Search, Markets, profile add-ons, AI commands | The Purchase Credits window opens with what the action needs and your balance. | Top up in the window, then run the action again. | | Inbox (Eingang) → Recognize contacts | "Not enough credits for recognition." — on an entry not yet recognized, the Recognize contacts button is replaced by a **Top up credits** button; on an already-recognized entry, **Recognize again** just shows the message. | Click **Top up credits** where it appears, or top up from your balance in the left navigation, then click Recognize again. | | New list → file or connected-tool import | The Purchase Credits window opens before the import starts. A file import needs the import price; a connected tool needs the price of its first request, and every further request is checked as it is made. | Top up, then start the import again. | | New list → LinkedIn import | An amber cost box showing the estimated cost, with a **Buy Credits** button; the **Create List & Start Import** button stays disabled. | Click **Buy Credits** in the box, then start the import. | | Enrich menu / analytics panel / selection bar | The run does not start when the balance cannot pay for its first lookup; the Purchase Credits window opens. | Top up, then start it again. | | AI Research (KI-Recherche) | Needs at least 1 credit to start; if it runs out mid-run, the run stops itself and the Purchase Credits window opens. | Top up, then click **Resume** on the stopped run to keep searching, or start a new research. | | API / agent connections | An HTTP error response instead of a UI message (see "For AI agents / API" below) | Top up the account, or check the balance first. | ### In a workspace you don't own Everything in the workspace is paid from the owner's balance, and only the owner can buy credits for it. Wherever the table above says the Purchase Credits window opens, members see "Balance empty – please ask … to top up" (with the owner's name) and a **Got it** button instead. Let the owner know, then run the action again once they have topped up. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)". ### When credits run out in the middle of something - **Enrichment runs** (the Enrich menu, analytics panel buttons, the selection bar) start as long as the balance pays for the first lookup, then check it again before every group of lookups. If it no longer covers the next group (for example because teammates in the same workspace spent credits meanwhile), the run stops with a note that credits ran out — everything found so far stays in the list, and the rows not yet looked up are not charged. After a top-up, click **Continue** in the run's task card and it goes on where it stopped. - **AI Research** is billed step by step as it works. If your balance runs out during a run, it uses what's left, stops the run and opens the Purchase Credits window — everything it already found stays in the run. After topping up, click **Resume** to keep searching. - **Connected tools** (import, reload, sync back, Google Sheets export) are charged per request; a run that runs out of credits stops at its next request. An automatic refresh that finds no credits skips its turn and resumes by itself after a top-up. - **A LinkedIn import** checks the full estimated amount before it starts, takes its base fee at the start and the per-person part when the people arrive — see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### What to do - **Buy credits** — see "How do I buy credits?" for the packs and how checkout works. - **Reduce the selection** — enriching or importing fewer rows at once lowers the cost below your balance. - **Pick a cheaper option** — for enrichment, a cheaper provider or a narrower add-on may cost less than the one that was blocked. ### For AI agents / API A per-list REST API connection returns an HTTP 402 error with a JSON body describing the shortfall, for example "Insufficient credits. Need up to 60 for 30 records. Balance: 12". Over MCP, the same error text comes back as a tool error instead of a separate response code. When a connection is allowed to enrich, the REST API also exposes a `credit_balance` action an agent can call first to check the balance before running a large batch. See the API connection topic for how to set up an endpoint. **Related topics:** credits-explained · buying-credits · price-list · where-did-my-credits-go · api-connection-overview · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### I have credits, but I still get the message — why? Every action needs its own price in your balance, and in a workspace the owner's balance counts, not yours. An enrichment run also checks before every group of lookups, so it can stop halfway when teammates spent credits meanwhile. Top up, then start the action again or click **Continue** on the stopped run. #### Why did my AI Research run stop? AI Research is billed as it works, so when your balance runs out it uses what's left and then stops the run, and the Purchase Credits window opens. Every lead it already found stays in the run. After topping up, click **Resume** on that run to keep searching for new matches, or start a new research. #### Why can't I start a LinkedIn import even though I have some credits? A LinkedIn import shows an estimated cost box before you start, and needs that full amount available in your balance (base fee + per-result rate × Max Results) — see "How much balance do I need to start a LinkedIn import?" in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for exactly how that maximum is calculated. Click **Buy Credits** in the box to top up without leaving the wizard. #### Inbox says "Not enough credits for recognition" — what do I do? Every Inbox recognition run costs credits, so once your balance is below the price shown, recognizing is blocked. On an entry not yet recognized, the **Recognize contacts** button is replaced by a **Top up credits** button — click it, then run recognition again; on an already-recognized entry, top up from your balance in the left navigation instead. Nothing you pasted into Inbox is lost while you do this. #### What happens after I top up — does the action continue automatically? No. Buying credits only adds to your balance — you start the search or import again yourself. A stopped enrichment run goes on with **Continue** in its task card and a stopped AI Research run with **Resume**; an automatic refresh resumes by itself. #### What does my AI agent or API integration get when credits run out? The per-list REST API returns HTTP 402 with a JSON error stating how many credits were needed and what your balance was; over MCP the same text comes back as a tool error. On the REST API, an agent can call the `credit_balance` action (returns `credits_remaining`) before a large batch — it's available when the connection is allowed to enrich. #### Why does Person Search show a different message than Segment Search? Person Search also shows "Not enough credits for this search." on the page; Segment Search only opens the Purchase Credits window. Both open that window, and both mean the same thing — your balance is below that search's price. #### Do file imports and connected-tool imports need the same amount of credit? No. A file import (CSV, Excel, JSON) needs the file-import price in your balance before it starts; an import through a connected tool such as Google Sheets or Airtable has no flat price — it needs the price of its first request, and each further request is charged and checked as it goes. If the balance is short, the Purchase Credits window opens. #### What should I do whenever I see one of these messages? Buy a credit pack from the window that opens (or from your balance in the navigation), then run the same action again — a stopped enrichment run continues with **Continue**, a stopped AI Research run with **Resume**. If you're only over the limit by a little, selecting fewer rows or a cheaper option can also bring the cost under your current balance. --- ## Automatic credit refunds Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/refunds Last updated: 2026-10-16 ListPlus automatically credits you back in a few narrow cases where you were charged but got nothing usable in return. For money you paid — a subscription or a credit pack — there's no automated refund; you ask us or Link support. ### When credits are refunded automatically **Inbox recognition, discarded.** Recognizing an Inbox (Eingang) entry always costs at least 0.5 credits, more for free text, a forwarded e-mail or a PDF (see "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)"). If you delete the entry or edit its text while that run is still in progress, the result is thrown away, and any credits that run spent are refunded automatically. **Email verification in a research handed to your own AI assistant.** When you run a research through your own AI assistant (such as Claude or ChatGPT) via its private URL, verifying an email it found is charged before the check runs. If the check then fails, that charge is refunded automatically, both from the run's spend and from your balance. Research run by ListPlus's own agent works differently: stopping a run, or a run that stops because your balance ran out, keeps its matches, and the credits already spent aren't refunded. **A LinkedIn import that never started.** A LinkedIn import takes its base fee when you start it. If the import could not be started at all, or you cancelled it before it started, the base fee comes back. If ListPlus fails to write the people it delivered into your list, what they cost is refunded too. **A file import over the record limit.** If an import is refused because it would take the workspace past its plan's record limit, no list is created and the import's credits come back. **A live LinkedIn search that did not run.** A live LinkedIn search is paid when it starts; if the search could not run, it is refunded. These refunds post as a **Refund** transaction in Settings → Credits & usage (see "[Where did my credits go?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/where-did-my-credits-go)"), usually within moments of the failure. ### What doesn't need a refund Most enrichment lookups (finding an email, phone number or company by Prospeo, FullEnrich, CompanyEnrich and similar) are only charged when they find something — a miss simply isn't billed in the first place, so there's nothing to refund. The price list marks which actions work this way. AI commands and AI replies are billed for the work done regardless of whether you liked or used the answer, and aren't refunded. ### Refunds for money you paid Subscriptions and credit packs are sold through Stripe Managed Payments: the name on your invoice is Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company that handles the sale for us as merchant of record, and refunds are paid out through Link. There's no self-service refund button in ListPlus. For a subscription cancelled partway through a paid month, see "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)". For an unused credit pack, credits never expire, so there's normally nothing to refund. For a specific concern, email support@listplus.ai with your account email and the purchase date, or ask Link support at support.link.com, which handles payment and refund requests for purchases sold through Link and may decide on a refund within 60 days of the purchase. A refund includes the VAT you paid, and Link emails you a refund notice. **Related topics:** where-did-my-credits-go · buying-credits · cancel-downgrade-leave · not-enough-credits. ### FAQ #### Do I get credits back if a paid action fails? Yes, in a few automatic cases: an Inbox recognition discarded because you deleted or edited the entry, a failed email verification in a research run through your own AI assistant, a LinkedIn import that could not start (its base fee), a file import refused by the record limit, and a live LinkedIn search that did not run. They show up as a Refund transaction in Settings → Credits & usage. #### When is an Inbox recognition charge refunded? If you delete an Inbox entry or edit its text while recognition is still running on it, that run's result is thrown away and any credits it spent are refunded automatically. You don't need to ask. #### When is an AI Research charge refunded? When you run a research through your own AI assistant (such as Claude or ChatGPT) via its private URL, verifying an email it found is charged before the check runs, and refunded automatically, both from the run's spend and your balance, if that check fails. A research run by ListPlus's own agent works differently: stopping it, or it stopping because your balance ran out, keeps its matches without refunding the credits already spent. #### Do I get a refund if a lookup doesn't find anything? Usually there's nothing to refund: most enrichment lookups (email, phone, company data) are only charged when they actually find a result, so a miss was never billed. The price list shows which actions are charged only on a hit versus on every attempt. #### Can I get a refund for an AI command or reply I didn't want? No. AI commands and AI chat replies are billed for the work done as soon as they run, whether or not the result was useful to you, and aren't refunded. #### Can I get a refund for an unused credit pack? There's no refund button for credit packs in the app. Credits never expire, so unused ones stay on your balance until you use them. To ask about a specific purchase, email support@listplus.ai with your account email and the purchase date, or contact Link support at support.link.com. #### How do I ask about a refund for my subscription or a credit purchase? Email support@listplus.ai with your account email and the date of the charge, or contact Link support at support.link.com — Sold Through Link, LLC is the name on your invoice and pays refunds out. For money back after cancelling partway through a month, see "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)". --- ## Section: Find contacts ## Person Search Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search Last updated: 2026-10-15 **Person Search** (Personensuche) is for one specific person you already know by name, email, LinkedIn URL or role — not for a whole audience. Click **Find** in the left navigation, then **Individual** in the switch at the top right (Find opens the search you used last). ### Search for a person Type into the field ("e.g. “Sarah Chen, Stripe” or a LinkedIn URL") and click **Search**, or start from one of the example cards (below). Good inputs are a name with a company ("Satya Nadella, Microsoft"), a LinkedIn profile URL, an email address, a company domain, or a role question such as "current CEO of BMW". ListPlus shows what it recognised as **Understood as** chips (name, company, location and similar). Understanding your input and looking for matching people are free. If your text actually describes a group of people rather than one person ("marketing managers in Berlin"), ListPlus recognizes that and shows **Open in Segment Search** to open the same criteria there instead, since a target group is a filter job. ### Example cards on the start page Before you search, the Person Search page shows six example cards under **Try an example**: **Name + company**, **Role at a company**, **Company or domain**, **LinkedIn profile**, **Email address** and **Email signature**. After your first few searches the cards fold away; click **Show examples** to see them again, or **Hide** to fold them. Clicking a card only fills the search field with its example — it never starts a search on its own, so nothing is charged until you click **Search**. The Email address and Email signature cards (**Paste into search**) leave the field empty for you to paste your own. Below the cards, links lead to the Inbox for whole e-mails or many contacts at once, and to Segment Search or AI Research when you are looking for several matching people. ### Pick the right person For a name search, ListPlus stops at a checkpoint before anything is charged, even when it found only one match: **Which person do you mean?**, asking "Is this the right person?" underneath when there's just one candidate. Each card shows name, headline, location, whether the company matches and, once you're signed in, the estimated cost of loading the profile. People you have looked at before carry an **In history** badge. Click the right card to open the profile. If nobody fits, click **Refine search** under "Not the right one?" and add a location or role. If you enter an exact identifier — a LinkedIn URL, an email address or a company domain — there is no one to choose between, so ListPlus skips this step and loads the result straight onto the page, including the basics described below. ### What the profile shows and what it costs Picking a person opens the profile drawer and automatically loads the "basics" — the LinkedIn profile and the company profile — which costs credits, each part only charged if it is found. Auto-loading is on by default; to turn it off, click **Auto-load basics: on** below the profile (or **Turn off** while the basics are loading). With it off, profiles you pick open with a **Basics (profile, company)** bar and a **Load** button instead. The setting is remembered in this browser. The drawer shows contact details, career history, education, company information and how many sources the profile was enriched from; career stops, employees and similar companies are clickable and open a new search in a new tab. From there, add-on cards such as a verified email, a mobile number or company details each run only when you click them and show their price first, charged only when they find something. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### Recently viewed The **Recently viewed** column at the left of the Person Search page lists the contacts you opened, newest first (up to 50); on a phone, open it with the clock button in the header. Click one to reopen it straight from the stored snapshot: it hydrates the drawer instantly, with no new search and no credits charged. Every contact you only viewed is also listed under Recently viewed at the bottom of the Watchlist page's left column. To keep a person for longer, save or file it (below). ### Save or add to a list A profile where at least one lookup found data counts as enriched and stays on the **Watchlist** page (left navigation) automatically, without expiring. To sort someone into a folder, use **Save in …** in the drawer header and pick a folder or **New folder …**. To move a result into a list, click **Add to list**: pick one under "Add to an existing list" (free), or create one with **New list** or **…or create a new list** (which costs credits, like a file import). If the person is already in that list, the entry is merged instead of duplicated. "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)" covers folders in detail. ### Without an account You can try Person Search without an account. Understanding your input and the list of matching people are free, and you can open a few full profiles free to try it out before ListPlus asks you to sign up (free, email address and one-time code, no password). Paid add-ons and adding to a list need an account. After sign-up, the search you were running continues in your new account; profiles you viewed before signing up aren't carried over afterward. ### If nothing is found Check the spelling, add the company or city, or pick one from **Similar names — same last name, different first name** if ListPlus suggests any. The next help topic covers what to do when a search comes up empty, including an AI web research fallback for that one person. ### For advanced users A role question ("current CEO of BMW") shows a slightly different checkpoint: "These people match your question" (or "Is this the person you mean?" for a single match) instead of "Which person do you mean?". If you search too quickly in a row, ListPlus asks you to wait a moment before trying again. Results loaded directly onto the page from a LinkedIn URL, email or company domain have no **Save in …** button — reopen them from Recently viewed to get the profile drawer with Save in …. You can also start a search straight from a URL with parameters instead of typing — see the deep-links topic. ### FAQ #### What are the example cards on the Person Search page? Under Try an example, six cards show what you can search for: Name + company, Role at a company, Company or domain, LinkedIn profile, Email address and Email signature. Clicking one only fills the search field (the e-mail and signature cards let you paste your own); nothing is searched or charged until you click Search. The cards show only while the field is idle; after your first few searches they fold away and Show examples brings them back. #### How do I find a specific person? Click Find in the left navigation, pick Individual in the switch at the top right, and type a name with the company, a LinkedIn URL, an email address or a company domain. For a name, ListPlus first shows the matching people for free and you click the right one; the profile then opens with its basics loaded, which costs credits, each part only charged when found. A LinkedIn URL, email or domain skips that choice and loads the result directly. #### What can I type into Person Search? A name with a company ("Satya Nadella, Microsoft"), a LinkedIn profile URL, an email address, a company domain, or a role question such as "current CEO of BMW". A last name on its own isn't enough to find candidates — add the first name or the company. A description of a group ("marketing managers in London") is recognised, and ListPlus shows an Open in Segment Search button to run the same criteria there instead. #### Why does ListPlus ask "Which person do you mean?" Because the same name usually belongs to several people, ListPlus shows the matches it found — with headline, location, whether the company matches and an "In history" badge for people you've looked at — and charges nothing until you click one. It asks even when there is only one match ("Is this the right person?"), so you never pay for the wrong profile. If nobody fits, click Refine search and add a location or role. #### What happens after I pick a person? The profile opens in a drawer and its basics — the LinkedIn profile and the company profile — load automatically, which costs credits, each part only charged when found. You then see contact details, career, education and company data, plus add-on cards for anything more. To stop the automatic loading, click "Auto-load basics: on" below the profile. #### What does the profile show me? Contact details, career history, education, company information and how many sources it was enriched from. Career stops, employees and similar companies are clickable and open a new search for that person or company in a new tab; verified email, phone and other details are separate add-on cards you run yourself. #### How do I get someone's email address or phone number? Open the profile and click the add-on card you need; each shows its price before you run it and is only charged when it actually finds something. Expensive add-ons, such as a mobile number, ask you to confirm first. The prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### Are my Person Search results saved? Yes, when you're signed in: every profile you open appears in the Recently viewed column of the Person Search page (up to 50; reopening costs nothing). A profile where at least one lookup found data counts as enriched and also stays on the Watchlist without expiring, while one you only viewed shows under Recently viewed on the Watchlist page and drops out after 30 days of no activity. Use Save in … in the profile drawer's header to file someone into a folder. #### What is "Recently viewed" on the Person Search page? It's the column at the left of the Person Search page listing the contacts you opened, newest first (up to 50; on a phone, the clock button in the header opens it). Clicking one reopens it straight from the stored snapshot — no new search, no credits charged. Every contact you only viewed is also listed under Recently viewed at the bottom of the Watchlist page's left column, where Save keeps them for good. #### How do I add a Person Search result to a list? Click Add to list in the profile drawer, then pick an existing list (free) or choose …or create a new list (which costs credits) — this needs an account. If the person is already there, ListPlus merges the new data into the existing row (matched by email, LinkedIn URL, phone or name and company) instead of creating a duplicate. #### Can I use Person Search without an account? Yes — understanding your input and the list of matching people are free without an account, and you can open a few full profiles free to try it out. After that, and for paid add-ons or adding to a list, ListPlus asks you to sign up (free, no password); the search you were running continues after sign-up. #### It says "You've used your free searches" — what now? That message means the free profiles for visitors without an account are used up. Sign up free with your email address and a one-time code (no password) to keep searching; a new account comes with starting credits — enough to keep going, and a profile's basics cost credits. --- ## Person Search: what you can type Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search-inputs Last updated: 2026-10-15 Person Search reads one line of free text and works out what you meant. This topic is a closer look at exactly what you can type into that field and what it does with each kind of input. For the search-and-pick flow itself, what a last-name-only or group search does, see "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)"; for what to do when nothing turns up, see "[Person not found — what now?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/not-found-what-now)". ### What works - **Name + company** — "Satya Nadella, Microsoft" or "Smith, Goldman Sachs". This is the most reliable input and goes through the candidate picker, since a name alone can belong to several people. - **Name + city** — "Jane Doe, Ulm" is read as a name with a place, not a company: a recognized city or town without a legal suffix (GmbH, Inc, Ltd and similar) becomes the location instead. Add the company too if you know it, for a tighter match. - **Email address** — an exact identifier. There's nobody to choose between, so ListPlus skips the candidate picker and loads a result for that address directly. - **Company domain** — also an exact identifier. With no person to disambiguate, ListPlus loads the company's profile directly instead of a picker. - **LinkedIn profile URL** — also an exact identifier; same direct-load behaviour. - **A role question** — "current CEO of BMW" is understood as a role at a company. ListPlus still shows the matches before loading anything. When web sources confirm who holds the role, the picker says "These people match your question" (or "Is this the person you mean?" for one); otherwise you see the usual "Which person do you mean?". - **An e-mail signature** — paste a whole signature block; name, role, company and phone are picked out of it. Because the search field is a single line, a pasted multi-line text is joined into one line with commas automatically. The field's placeholder reads "e.g. “Sarah Chen, Stripe” or a LinkedIn URL". The example cards under **Try an example** fill in "Satya Nadella, Microsoft", "CFO at HubSpot", "hubspot.com" or a LinkedIn profile URL; the Email address and Email signature cards leave the field for you to paste your own (see "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)"). ### What does not work - **A last name on its own** isn't enough to return candidates — see "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)" for what to add instead. - **Dictation / voice input.** Person Search has no microphone or dictate button; type your search instead. Dictation is available elsewhere in ListPlus — Segment Search (Segmentsuche), AI Research and the Inbox (Eingang) — just not here. - **A description of a group of people**, such as "marketing managers in London", is offered to Segment Search instead — see "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)" for that handoff. ### Related topics See "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)" for the full search-and-pick flow and what a profile costs, and "[Person not found — what now?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/not-found-what-now)" for tightening a search that comes up empty. ### FAQ #### Can I search by name and city? Yes — "Jane Doe, Ulm" is read as a name with a place, since a known city or town without a legal suffix is recognized as a location rather than a company. Add the company name too if you know it, for a tighter match. #### What do I get when I search a company domain? A company domain has no person to disambiguate, so ListPlus skips the candidate picker and loads the company's profile directly instead. If you're looking for someone at that company, search by their name and the company instead. #### What happens when I paste an email address? An email address is also an exact identifier, so ListPlus skips the picker and loads a result for that address right away. If it doesn't already know who's behind it, use the "Contact Profile (by Email)" add-on to look up their name and other details. #### Can I paste an e-mail signature into Person Search? Yes — paste the whole signature into the search field; name, role, company and phone are picked out of it. The field is a single line, so a multi-line paste is joined into one line with commas automatically. Then click Search and pick the right person as usual. #### Can I dictate my search into Person Search? No — Person Search has no dictation or voice-input button, so type your search into the field. Dictation is available on Segment Search (Segmentsuche), AI Research and the Inbox (Eingang) instead. #### What's a "role question" and how is it different from a name search? A role question like "current CEO of BMW" names a position at a company instead of a person's name. ListPlus still shows the matches before loading anything. When web sources confirm who holds the role, the picker says "These people match your question" (or "Is this the person you mean?" for one); otherwise you see the usual "Which person do you mean?". #### I typed an email or LinkedIn URL — why didn't I get to pick from a list? An email address, a company domain and a LinkedIn profile URL are exact identifiers with nobody to choose between, so ListPlus loads that result straight onto the page instead of showing the "Which person do you mean?" picker. #### Does understanding my input cost credits? No — reading your input and listing matching people cost nothing, except a name search in the people database, which costs credits when it returns people. Charges start when a profile loads its basics or you run an add-on; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for what each costs. --- ## Person Search: the profile drawer and its add-ons Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/profile-and-add-ons Last updated: 2026-10-10 Opening a Person Search result opens a profile drawer. This topic covers the drawer's layout, the automatic "basics" toggle, and how the add-on cards inside it behave — prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)", not repeated here. ### The drawer layout The header has three controls: **Save in …** to file the profile into a folder (shows the folder name once filed), an **"Open in new tab"** icon button, and a primary **Add** button with **Add to list** and — once the contact is on the Watchlist — **Send to pipeline**. The save icon on a result card shows the tooltip **Save** or **Unsave**. The body shows contact details, career history, education and company information, plus a note such as "Enriched from 3 sources". Career stops, employees and similar companies inside the profile are clickable — each opens a new search for that person or company in its own browser tab, so you can follow the network without losing your place. For a contact on the Watchlist that was sent to a pipeline, an **In pipelines** section at the bottom shows each pipeline with its state (for example waiting or sent) and date; see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)". ### Auto-load basics The "Auto-load basics: on/off" switch below the profile decides whether the LinkedIn and company basics load automatically when you open a profile; the price list has what that costs and how the switch behaves. ### The Suggestions toggle Below the profile, "Hide suggestions" hides the grey placeholders that offer to load missing fields ("Show suggestions" brings them back). It changes nothing about cost, the Enrich button still works, and the setting is remembered in this browser. ### Add-on cards and confirmation Empty fields and sections show a placeholder; hover it to see its price and click to run it. The Enrich button at the bottom of the profile opens every add-on at once. Any add-on, or selection of add-ons, above a certain amount first shows a **"Paid enrichment"** confirmation, showing the credits and an approximate euro amount, with **Enrich** / **Cancel** buttons; cheaper cards run immediately. If nothing is found, its hint changes to "Nothing found" instead of disappearing, so you can see it was already tried. Add-ons that add a new section, such as news, employees or similar companies, scroll it into view when done. ### Without an account Without signing in, clicking any other add-on shows "Sign in to load add-ons like LinkedIn posts, news or contact details." and opens sign-up — there's no cost dialog first. "Company News" and "Person in the News" stay free to try either way. ### Related topics See "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)" for the search-and-pick flow that opens a profile, "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the prices, and "[Get emails and phone numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/reveal-email-and-phone)" for the reveal flow in Segment Search results. ### FAQ #### What do the buttons at the top of the profile drawer do? Save in … files the person into a Watchlist folder and shows the folder name once filed. Open in new tab opens the same profile as a full Person Search page. Add opens Add to list and, for a contact on the Watchlist, Send to pipeline; the buttons become active once the profile has loaded. #### Why does ListPlus ask me to confirm before some add-ons? Any add-on, or selection of add-ons, that costs more than a set amount shows a "Paid enrichment" confirmation with the credits and an approximate euro amount before it runs, so you don't spend more than expected by mistake. Cheaper add-ons run on one click. #### What does "Hide suggestions" do? It hides the grey placeholders that offer to load missing fields, next to the auto-load toggle below the profile; "Show suggestions" brings them back. It changes nothing about cost, and the Enrich button still works either way. #### An add-on card found nothing — did it disappear or fail? Neither — its hint changes to "Nothing found" instead of vanishing, so you can see it was already tried. Most add-ons are only charged on a hit; "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" shows when each one is charged. #### Can I use the profile drawer's add-ons without an account? "Company News" and "Person in the News" stay free to try either way, but clicking any other add-on without an account shows "Sign in to load add-ons like LinkedIn posts, news or contact details." and takes you straight to sign-up instead of a cost dialog. Sign-up is free and needs no password. #### Where can I see how much each add-on card costs? "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" lists the cost and when each one is charged; every card also shows its own price before you click it. --- ## Person not found — what now? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/not-found-what-now Last updated: 2026-10-10 A Person Search that comes up empty isn't a dead end — ListPlus offers a few next steps depending on what it did and didn't find. This topic covers all of them: tightening the search, look-alike matches, an AI web-research fallback for that one person, and when to switch to Segment Search instead. ### First: tighten the search Most "not found" results come down to spelling or a name that's too common. Double-check the spelling, and add whatever you know — the company, the city, or the person's role — since a last name on its own isn't enough for ListPlus to show candidates. If you have it, type the full name with the company ("Jane Doe, Airrange") rather than just the last name. ### Similar names and look-alikes When you search with both a first and last name but nobody matches both, ListPlus shows a **"No [name] found in [city]."** (or **"No [name] found."**) message, with the note **"No matching entry in the profile databases. AI research scans the open web — company sites, imprints, press, directories."** Below it are any people who are only a partial match — same last name with a different first name, or vice versa — under **Similar names — same last name, different first name**. Each of these look-alike cards carries ✓/✗ badges for **Last name**, **First name** and, if you searched with a location, **Location**, so you can see exactly why it's only a look-alike, not a match. Click one if it turns out to be the right person after all — it opens the profile like any other pick and loads its basics (a small number of credits, each part only charged if found); otherwise use **Refine search** to add a location or role. If ListPlus identifies the company but no personal profile, the page shows the company card. Click **Enrich** (Anreichern) on it to try a name-and-company lookup from the contact add-ons; each one shows its price first. ### Let AI research the web for this person If nobody matched the name you searched, ListPlus offers **AI web research** (Per KI im Web recherchieren). It researches a named person, so include the name you're looking for. It's a separate AI agent that searches the open web — company sites, imprints, press, directories — rather than profile databases, so it can turn up people no database has, and it takes about 30 seconds; it streams its steps live and, at the end, shows whatever it could establish, plus links to the sources it used. Starting it needs a signed-in account and a positive credit balance. If it found an email, phone, website, company or address, click **Use as contact**: the findings become the result on the page, are put on the Watchlist automatically, and can be added to a list with **Add to list**. If you don't click it, the findings aren't kept. If nothing turns up, it says "Nothing reliable found on the open web." It costs credits per run, plus an extra charge when it actually delivers an email or phone number (with a cap per run) — see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact billing rule. ### Looking for a group instead? Use Segment Search If your search actually describes a role or type of person rather than one individual, ListPlus recognizes that upfront and offers to open it in **Segment Search** (Segmentsuche) instead — see "[Person Search](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/person-search)" for that flow. If a role question with specific filters (like headcount, funding or technology) comes up empty, ListPlus additionally offers a **Try Segment Search** button, since a database filter search may succeed where a single lookup didn't. ### Why some people can't be found ListPlus relies on public web sources and its data providers, so some people simply aren't findable. Common reasons a real person still doesn't turn up: they keep their LinkedIn profile private or don't have one, they started their current role too recently for it to show up anywhere yet, the name is common enough that nothing distinguishes them without more detail, or there's a typo or unusual spelling in what you searched. Adding a company, city, role, or trying alternate spellings usually resolves this. ### Did a search with no result cost anything? Understanding your input and the list of matching people cost nothing, except a name search in the people database, which costs credits when it returns people, and the e-mail and phone lookups are only charged when they find something. Two things cost per attempt: AI web research costs credits per run (plus an extra charge only when it delivers an email or phone number), and for a signed-in search by name and company where ListPlus has no LinkedIn URL for the person, it may automatically run a LinkedIn Profile Search, which costs credits per attempt even without a match. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the prices. ### For advanced users The **Try Segment Search** hand-off only appears when the failed role question carried structured filters (industry, headcount, funding stage or recent funding, technology, job-change window, or a verified-email/mobile requirement). It appears under **"The web sources give no clear answer. Next options:"**. AI web research needs at least a full name or a first and last name — it isn't offered for a search that was only an email or a domain, since there's no name to research from; for those, re-run the search with the person's name instead. Other messages you may see: a hint such as **"Add First name + Last name to run "…""** tells you which details would unlock the next lookup. **"I couldn't recognize a contact in that input. Try "Lastname, Company", an email address, or a LinkedIn URL."** means your text wasn't read as a person. If you pick a candidate and the profile shows **"Nothing found"**, no profile data could be loaded for that person — go back and try another candidate or add details. In the look-alike view, a city or country chip marked **"· no match"** means none of the candidates is in that location. ### FAQ #### The person I searched for wasn't found — what can I do? Check the spelling and add the company, city or role — a last name alone isn't enough. If ListPlus shows look-alike candidates, check whether one of them is actually the right person; otherwise start the AI web research offered on the results page, which costs credits per run, plus an extra charge when it actually delivers an email or phone number. #### ListPlus shows people with a similar name but not mine — what now? That's the "Similar names — same last name, different first name" list: people who share only part of the name you searched, shown with ✓/✗ badges so you can see why each one is just a look-alike. If none of them is right, click Refine search and add a location or role, or start the AI web research option shown above the list. #### What do the ✓/✗ badges on a candidate mean? A green check means that candidate's Last name, First name or Location matches what you typed, and a grey cross means it doesn't; the Location badge appears only when you searched with a city or country. They only appear on the look-alike list, to show at a glance why a candidate is only a partial match rather than an exact one. #### What is the AI web research and when should I use it? AI web research is a fallback search agent for one specific person that ListPlus offers when the regular lookup finds nobody or only look-alikes. Instead of profile databases, it scans the open web — company sites, imprints, press, directories — so it can find people no database has. It needs a signed-in account and costs credits per run, plus an extra charge when it delivers an email or phone number. #### How long does AI web research take and where do the results appear? It takes about 30 seconds and shows its steps live as it searches. Whatever it finds — email, phone, website, LinkedIn URL, role, company or address, with source links — appears in the same panel; click "Use as contact" to make it the result on the page, where it's put on the Watchlist automatically and can be added to a list. #### Was I charged even though nothing was found? Usually not — understanding your search and the candidate list cost nothing, except a name search in the people database, which costs credits when it returns people, and the e-mail and phone add-ons are only charged when they find something. Two exceptions: AI web research costs credits per run even when it finds nothing (with an extra charge only on a delivered email or phone), and the automatic LinkedIn Profile Search that ListPlus may run for a name-and-company search when it has no LinkedIn URL for the person costs credits per attempt, even without a match. #### Why can't ListPlus find this person at all? Usually because they have no public LinkedIn profile or keep it private, they started their current role too recently to show up anywhere, the name is too common without more detail, or there's a typo in what you searched. Try adding a company, city or role, or double-check the spelling. #### I only have their email and nothing comes back — what now? An email or domain search skips the candidate picker and loads a result directly, so if that address genuinely returns nothing, AI web research can't be started from it either, since that fallback needs a name to research. Try searching by the person's name and company instead, if you know them. #### The person ListPlus found is the wrong one — what do I do? Close the profile, go back to the candidate list and click Refine search (next to "Not the right one?"), then add a location, role or the company and search again. On look-alike cards, the ✓/✗ badges show which of last name, first name and location didn't match. Opening the wrong profile has already loaded its basics (a small number of credits, each part only charged if found). #### Does ListPlus ever suggest Segment Search when a person search fails? Yes — if a role question like "who is the CEO of X" comes up empty and included filters such as industry, headcount, funding or technology, ListPlus shows a "Try Segment Search" button that opens the same search in Segment Search (Segmentsuche). --- ## Sharing a search result Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/share-a-result Last updated: 2026-10-03 A shared result is a read-only public page with one person's (or company's) profile — no login needed to open it, and nothing on it can be edited or searched from. ### How to share Open a profile — from Person Search, AI Research or the **Watchlist** — and, once it has finished loading, click the share icon at the top right of the profile card (tooltip: **Copy result link**). ListPlus copies a link to your clipboard that anyone can open without an account; creating the link needs a ListPlus account, so sign in first. Sharing doesn't look up anything new and doesn't cost credits; it publishes the data already loaded in the profile. ### What the other person sees The shared page shows the same profile card, without the search box or any of the paid add-on buttons — just the data, plus a small "Found with ListPlus Contact Search" link at the bottom that leads back to ListPlus's own Person Search. Apart from a **Search yourself** button that opens ListPlus, there's nothing they can click, enrich or save. ### How long a link stays open A shared link works for **seven days from the moment you create it** — opening it doesn't extend that, however often people visit. After the week, the page shows "This link has expired" with a button to search for themselves instead; share the profile again for a fresh link. **Related topics:** person-search · saved-contacts. ### FAQ #### How do I share a search result? Once the profile has finished loading, click the share icon at the top right of the profile card (tooltip: Copy result link). This copies a link to your clipboard that opens a read-only page — no login needed, no data can be edited or searched from it. #### Who can open a shared result link? Anyone with the link, even without a ListPlus account. It's a public, read-only page — there's no way to browse to it without the exact link. Only creating the link needs a ListPlus account. #### How long does a shared link stay valid? Seven days from the moment it was created. Opening the link doesn't extend that, so after a week it stops working however often it was viewed; share the profile again to get a fresh link. #### What happens when a shared link expires? The page shows "This link has expired" instead of the profile, with a button to run their own search on ListPlus. Share the profile again to create a fresh link. #### Can I share a result from my watchlist, not just a fresh search? Yes — open any entry on the Watchlist and, once it has finished loading, click the share icon at the top right of the profile card (tooltip: Copy result link), the same as from a fresh search. It shares whatever data is currently loaded in that profile. #### Does sharing a result cost credits? No. Creating and opening a shared link is free; it only publishes data your account already loaded, it doesn't look anything up. --- ## Starting a search from a link (deep links) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/deep-links Last updated: 2026-10-15 You can open **Person Search** with a person already filled in, or even already searched, by adding parameters to its URL — useful for linking into ListPlus from a CRM, an email tool or your own script. ### The parameters Add these after `https://listplus.ai/app/search?`: | Parameter | What it does | | -------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | `q` | Free text — parsed by AI, same as typing it in the box | | `first_name`, `last_name`, `name` (or `full_name`) | A person's name, understood directly (no AI parsing) | | `company`, `domain` | Company name or domain | | `email` | An email address | | `linkedin`, `company_linkedin` | A person's or company's LinkedIn URL | | `job_title`, `city`, `country`, `phone`, `website` | Extra signals that narrow down the match | | `autosearch=true` | Start the search immediately instead of just filling the box | | `addons=a,b,c` | Auto-run add-ons (such as a verified email lookup) once the result loads | Example: ``` https://listplus.ai/app/search?first_name=Torben&last_name=Schulz&company=Rows&autosearch=true&addons=prospeo_linkedin,serper_news ``` Parameter names are not case-sensitive and ignore underscores, so `first_name`, `firstName` and `firstname` all work — `first_name` is the form to use when you're writing the link by hand. ### Safety limits on add-ons An `addons` link can only auto-run **up to 4 add-ons**, and only ones whose price is **at or below a set limit** (see the price list) — anything more expensive, or available only on Premium, is skipped and stays a manual click in the profile instead. The mobile reveal is the usual example: a link can name it, but it never runs by itself; you click it in the profile, and above a certain amount ListPlus asks you to confirm the cost first, as it does for every add-on you click yourself. This keeps a link from silently running up a large charge on your account. Add-ons only auto-run when you're signed in, and only the first four ids in the list count, even if some of them are skipped. ### Where to look up every add-on id A reference page lists every available add-on id and its price (all prices are also in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"), plus the worked example above: open **listplus.ai/app/search/help** in a browser. It isn't linked from the app's navigation — bookmark it if you're building links regularly. ### Links to a specific row or a contact on the Watchlist ListPlus also creates links that open one exact record: the **Open in ListPlus** links in pipeline messages (Slack and e-mail digests) open either the row in its list — selected, with the record panel open — or the contact or company on the **Watchlist**, with its detail view open. These links only work when you're signed in and a member of the workspace the record belongs to. The Watchlist lives at `listplus.ai/app/watchlist`. **Related topics:** person-search · person-search-inputs · saved-contacts · pipelines-overview. ### FAQ #### Can I open Person Search with a person already filled in? Yes — add parameters like `first_name`, `last_name` and `company` (or a free-text `q`) to the `/app/search` URL, and ListPlus fills the search box with them. Add `autosearch=true` to also run the search immediately instead of waiting for a click. #### Which parameters can I use in the link? Name parts (`first_name`, `last_name`, `name`), `company`, `domain`, `email`, `linkedin`, `company_linkedin`, and the extra signals `job_title`, `city`, `country`, `phone`, `website` — or a single free-text `q` that ListPlus parses with AI. The full reference with examples is at listplus.ai/app/search/help. #### How do I make the link run the search automatically? Add `autosearch=true` to the URL. Without it, ListPlus only fills the search box and waits for you to click Search. #### Can a link also trigger add-ons, like finding a verified email? Yes — add `addons=` followed by a comma-separated list of add-on ids, and ListPlus runs them automatically once the profile loads, the same as clicking them by hand. The full list of ids and their prices is on the reference page. Only use links you created yourself or trust. #### Are there limits on what a link can auto-run? Yes. Add-ons in a link only run when you're signed in, and only a limited number per link. Only open ListPlus links that run add-ons from sources you trust. #### Do the parameter names need exact capitalization? No — `first_name`, `firstName` and `firstname` are all understood the same way, but writing links with underscores (`first_name`) is the documented form to use. #### Where can I see the full parameter and add-on reference? Open listplus.ai/app/search/help in a browser — it lists every parameter, every add-on id with its price, and a working example URL. It's a standalone reference page, not linked from the app's own navigation. --- ## Segment Search: the audience database Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database Last updated: 2026-10-15 **Segment Search** (Segmentsuche) is where you filter a large B2B contact database by criteria — role, industry, company size, location and more — instead of searching for one named person. It gives you filtered access to our data provider's database, which by the provider's figures holds roughly 300 million profiles and 143 million verified email addresses, updated weekly, and lets you add matching people straight to a list. Open it with **Find** in the left navigation, then **People** in the switch at the top right of the page. ### Three modes: People, Companies, Markets The switch at the top right of the page (**Individual · People · Companies · Markets · AI Research**) sets what you search for; on a phone it is a dropdown. **People** is the search described here. **Companies** returns one row per company with the company filters only (industry, size, location and so on) and is charged per page in the same way. **Markets** shows how many companies match before you load any — see "[Markets: size a market before you load companies](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/markets)". ### Describe your audience or set filters At the top of an empty search, type a sentence describing who you want — for example "Heads of Sales at B2B SaaS companies in Germany with 50 to 200 employees" — into the box under "Which audience are you after?" and click **Build filters**. You can also click the microphone icon (Dictate) next to the box to speak your sentence; the text appears in the box, and you then click **Build filters**. Building filters costs no credits and needs no account; dictation also costs no credits but needs an account. You can also set filters by hand, grouped into **Person**, **Company**, **Signals** and **Reachability** (job title, seniority, industry, company size, funding, verified email or mobile, and more). Below the search box, six example audiences under **Try an example** set a whole filter set with one click (**Apply filters**); hover a card to see its exact filters. The examples fit your market, chosen by your app language: US audiences in English and French (for example "Sales leaders at US SaaS", "IT leaders at US hospitals", "Marketing leaders using HubSpot"), DACH audiences in German and Spanish audiences in Spanish. Applying an example only fills the filters — nothing is searched or charged until you click **Search Contacts**, and you can adjust every filter first. The filter groups, how they combine and which fields must be picked from suggestions are covered in "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)". ### Run the search and what it costs Click **Search Contacts**. Each page of up to 25 results costs credits, charged only after results come back — a search that matches nothing costs no credits. Each further page is a new charge, unless it repeats an identical search you ran in the last 30 days. ListPlus checks you have a small minimum balance before it runs the search and shows an error instead of searching if you don't; running a search needs an account (sign-up is free), though building filters above doesn't. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### Reading the results Results appear as a table: name, title, company, seniority, since (the start date in the current role), location, industry, company size, domain, website and LinkedIn. Email and mobile columns show a masked preview (partly hidden, with a green check) wherever a verified value exists on the provider's side — the table never shows the full address or number. ### Reveal email and phone Click a row to open that person's profile panel. Like a profile opened in Person Search, it automatically loads the basics (the LinkedIn profile and the company profile), which costs a small number of credits, each part only charged when found; click **Auto-load basics: on** in the panel to turn it off if you only want to look. To turn a masked preview into the real value, click the **Reveal** button next to Work email or next to Mobile number under **Reachability** in the panel (each button shows its price), each charged only when something is found; the mobile reveal asks you to confirm first. ### Add results to a list Tick the rows you want, or use the header checkbox, and click **Add** → **Add to list**. With nothing ticked and more hits than are loaded, ListPlus then asks how many to add — the ones loaded, a number, or all (every further page is charged like the first). Then choose an existing list (no credits) or click **New list** (which costs credits, like a file import) — ListPlus suggests a name from your filters. Rows arrive with name, job title, company, LinkedIn URL, industry, company size, website, domain and location; email and phone stay empty until you enrich them in the list afterwards. People already in the list (matched by email, then LinkedIn, then phone, then name plus company) are merged with the existing row instead of added twice; the message afterwards says how many were added and how many merged. ### Examples - **DACH SaaS sales leaders**: Job title (Head of Sales, VP Sales, CRO), Location (Germany, Austria, Switzerland), Industry (pick e.g. "Software Development" from the suggestions), Employees (51–100, 101–200). - **Founders of freshly funded startups**: Seniority (Founder/Owner, C-Suite), Funding (Seed or Series A, funded within the last 6 months), Company HQ (your target region). - **HubSpot users reachable by phone**: Technology (HubSpot), Job title (Marketing Manager, RevOps), Contact data (Has verified mobile). ### For advanced users A search identical to one you ran in the last 30 days (same filters, same page) costs no credits; you still need a small minimum balance for the search to start. The **History** tab (next to Filter in the filter panel; on phones open **Filters** first) keeps your workspace's searches, one history per mode (People, Companies, Markets), on the server: colleagues see them too, marked with their name ("You" for your own). **Clear all** removes only your own entries of that mode. Opening one restores its filters and the result page stored with it, without a charge; paging from there to a page you haven't fetched before is a new, paid page. Results show the total number of matches, and you can page through up to 25,000 of them, 25 per page. Filters marked "Not available" — such as Job change — can't be selected at the moment; to find people new in their role, use "Time in role (months)" or "Time at company (months)" instead. **Related topics:** which-finder-do-i-use · filters-explained · reveal-email-and-phone · categories-to-list · price-list · not-enough-credits. ### FAQ #### How do I find contacts by role, industry or company size? Open Find in the left navigation and pick People in the switch at the top right, set filters such as job title, seniority, industry, headcount or location, and click Search Contacts. Each page of up to 25 results costs credits, and a search that matches nothing costs no credits. Tick the rows you want and click Add → Add to list. #### What are the example audiences in Segment Search? Under Try an example, six cards set a complete filter set with one click (Apply filters), such as "Sales leaders at US SaaS" or "Marketing leaders using HubSpot"; hover a card to see its filters. The examples follow your app language: US audiences in English and French, DACH audiences in German, Spanish audiences in Spanish. Applying one costs no credits and only fills the filters — you adjust them and click Search Contacts yourself. #### Why do the results not show email addresses? The results table shows only a masked preview with a green check where a verified email or mobile exists, never the full address or number. Open the row and click the Reveal button next to Work email or Mobile number under Reachability (each shows its price), each charged only when found. You can also add the rows to a list first and enrich them there in bulk. #### How do I add the results to a list? Tick the rows you want, click Add → Add to list (with nothing ticked and more hits than are loaded, ListPlus asks how many to add), and pick an existing list at no charge or click New list, which costs credits like a file import. Rows arrive with name, job title, company, LinkedIn URL, industry, company size, website, domain and location; email and phone stay empty until you enrich them. People already in the list are merged with their existing row, not added twice. #### Can I describe my target group in words instead of setting filters? Yes — type a sentence such as "Heads of Sales at B2B SaaS companies in Germany with 50 to 200 employees" into the box at the top of Segment Search and click Build filters. ListPlus sets the matching filters for you to check before you run the search; this step costs no credits and needs no account (dictating via the microphone icon needs an account). #### How big is the database and where does the data come from? Roughly 300 million profiles with 143 million verified email addresses, updated weekly, from our data provider. ListPlus doesn't own a contact database itself; Segment Search gives you filtered access to the provider's data, which you can then enrich further with other sources. #### Can I search companies instead of people? Yes — pick Companies in the switch at the top right of the page; you get one row per company charged per page of 25, as in People mode. To see how many companies match before loading any, switch to Markets. In People mode each row still carries the company's name, domain, website, industry and size. #### Do I need an account to use Segment Search? You can build filters, use the example audiences and type a "describe your audience" sentence without an account, all at no cost in credits. Clicking Search Contacts asks you to sign up first (sign-up is free: email address and a one-time code, no password). Adding results to a list also needs an account. #### Does viewing page 2 of my results cost credits again? Yes — each page you fetch, including page 2 and beyond, is a separate charge, because it's a new request to the database. It costs no credits if the page has no results or repeats an identical search (same filters, same page) you ran in the last 30 days. #### Does reopening a recent search from History cost credits again? No — the History tab restores a past search's filters and the result page stored with it, with no new request and no charge. The history belongs to your workspace, so colleagues see your searches and you see theirs. Paging to a page you haven't fetched before in that search is still a new, paid page. #### Can I dictate my audience description instead of typing it? Yes — click the microphone icon (Dictate) next to the "describe your audience" box at the top of Segment Search, speak for up to about two minutes, and the text appears in the box. Then click Build filters to turn it into filters. Dictation costs no credits but needs an account; typing the sentence works without one. #### Does clicking a result in Segment Search cost credits? Yes, by default: opening a row loads the person's basics (LinkedIn profile and company) automatically, which costs a small number of credits, each part only charged when found. Click "Auto-load basics: on" in the profile panel to turn it off if you only want to look; revealing the email or mobile is a separate click, and each Reveal button shows its price. --- ## Markets: size a market before you load companies Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/markets Last updated: 2026-10-15 **Markets** (Märkte) is one of the modes of **Find**, next to People and Companies. Instead of showing a list of results, it first shows **how many companies** match your filters — as a total and as a bar chart per property. You narrow the market step by step and load company records only when the numbers look right. Open **Find** in the left navigation and pick **Markets** in the switch at the top right of the page. ### Narrow by numbers The filters are on the left, the charts on the right. Each chart is one property — Region, Industry, NAICS code, Employees, Revenue, Company type and more — with one bar per value and the number of companies behind it. - Click a bar, or add a filter on the left, to pick a value. Picking costs nothing: you can pick as many values as you like, the numbers turn pale to show they still belong to the state before. - Click **Calculate** (the button shows its price; it is at the bottom of the filter pane and, while a choice is pending, above the charts) to count the market for everything you picked — in one step. - Several values of one property mean "any of these" — except Teams, Keywords and Technologies, where all must fit, and Headcount growth, which takes one value. - Charts you have not opened yet show only their title. Click the title to count that property too. - Some charts appear once they make sense — after you picked one value and clicked Calculate: the countries of a region, the states of a country (where it has any), the parts of an industry. They start closed; click the title to count them. To leave a value OUT, hover its bar and click the small minus at its right (or the same value again to allow it): "without companies of 1–10 employees", "without agencies". The filter then reads "without …". This works for region, country, state, industry, NAICS code, both employee properties, revenue, company type and category. More filters, all in the pane on the left: - **Companies like these** — up to 10 companies (pick them by name or domain) as a model; the numbers then show companies similar to them, and every other filter narrows that group. Loading such companies costs five times as much per company. - **Team size** — the headcount of one department, from–to (for example Sales 5–20). - **Team is growing** — a department that grew by at least a percentage in 6, 12 or 24 months. - **Keywords** and **Technologies** — all of them must fit, or tick "Any of them is enough". In the **Industry** filter you can open a main industry to tick single parts of it, or type a word — also one the industry names do not use, such as "fashion". Many companies carry no value for a property (revenue is known for a small share only). Charts where a company has one value only — size, revenue, type, growth — say below the bars how many are "Not stated", as long as nothing is picked in that chart. ### NAICS codes NAICS is the standard industry classification of the United States, Canada and Mexico. In the **NAICS codes** filter you can open a sector and go down level by level, or type a code or a word. A word the official titles do not use — "fashion", for example — is matched to the fitting codes for you. Several codes mean "any of them". A NAICS code takes the place of the Industry filter. The **NAICS code** chart shows the same tree with numbers: the arrow at the right of a bar opens the level below it. ### What it costs - **Calculating:** each time you click **Calculate** for a new combination of filters, credits are charged. Picking values, opening a chart and walking the NAICS tree cost nothing, and neither does a combination calculated within the last hour (by anyone) or the whole market with no filter set. - **Loading companies:** costs credits per company loaded. You always load a **sample** first — 10, 25 or 50 companies, with the price on the button. When the sample is there and looks right, choose an amount from **Load more** — each entry shows its price; the last one loads the rest and asks you to confirm with the price. One search hands over at most 1,000 companies; narrow the market further if you need a different part of it. Click **Save** to keep a calculated market in the **History**, where you and your colleagues can reopen it. ### Looking at the loaded companies Under the total you switch between **Market overview** — the charts — and **Loaded companies**, which shows a number once companies are loaded. The link under the charts (**Load companies from this market →** or **View … loaded companies →**) leads there too. Loading a sample switches to **Loaded companies** by itself: a table of the companies, with the filters still on the left. If you change the filters afterwards, a note warns that calculating starts a new market and replaces the loaded companies — add them to a list first if you want to keep them. The table sorts and filters by column like a list. Click a company to open its detail with everything that was loaded; that costs nothing more. The buttons for loading more are above the table. ### From companies to a list or a pipeline Tick the companies you want — or tick none to take all that are loaded — and use the buttons above the table: - **Add → Add to list** puts them into a list. In the list you can then find the contacts at these companies. - **Add → Send to pipeline** puts them on the Watchlist and sends them to the pipeline as company records. There is no button that only puts them on the Watchlist; to watch companies without a pipeline, add them to a list and use **Add from a list** on the Watchlist under Companies (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". **Related topics:** categories-audience-database · filters-explained · categories-to-list · price-list · provider-companyenrich. ### FAQ #### What is Markets in ListPlus? Markets is a mode of Find, next to People and Companies. It shows how many companies match your filters — a total and a bar chart per property — before you load any company. Open Find in the left navigation and pick Markets in the switch at the top right of the page. #### How do I find out how big a market is? Open Find, pick Markets in the switch at the top right, pick values by clicking bars or adding filters on the left, and click Calculate. You get the number of matching companies and a breakdown by region and company size; click a chart's title (Industry, Revenue …) to count that property too. One calculation costs credits; the Calculate button shows the price. #### What does Markets cost? Picking values is free; each click on Calculate for a new combination of filters costs credits. Loading companies costs credits per company; the buttons show the prices. Opening a chart, walking the NAICS tree, a combination calculated within the last hour and the whole market with no filter set cost nothing. #### Why do I have to click Calculate in Markets? Picking values only notes your choice, so you can set several filters and pay once. The numbers turn pale while they still show the state before; Calculate counts everything you picked in one paid step. #### How do I load the companies of a market? Under the charts, load a sample of 10, 25 or 50 companies first; the price is on each button. Once the sample is there, choose an amount from Load more (each shows its price); the last entry loads the rest and asks you to confirm. One search hands over at most 1,000 companies. #### Why do I have to load a sample first in Markets? So you can check that the companies fit before you pay for many. A sample costs credits, with the price on its button; only after it has arrived do the buttons for loading more or all appear. #### How do I get contacts for the companies I found in Markets? Open Loaded companies, tick the companies you want (or none for all) and click Add → Add to list. In the list you can then find the contacts at these companies. #### How do I exclude companies in Markets? Hover a bar in a chart and click the small minus at its right; the value is struck out and the filter reads "without …". It works for region, country, state, industry, NAICS code, employees, revenue, company type and category. #### Can I find companies similar to my customers? Yes — add the filter "Companies like these" in Markets and pick up to 10 companies by name or domain. The numbers then show similar companies, every other filter narrows them, and loading them costs five times as much per company. #### Can I filter by team size or a growing team? Yes. "Team size" takes a department and a headcount from–to (for example Sales 5–20); "Team is growing" takes a department, a minimum percentage and 6, 12 or 24 months. Both only match companies whose team sizes are known. #### How do I search by NAICS code? In Markets, add the NAICS codes filter: open a sector and go down level by level, or type a code or a word. Several codes mean "any of them", and a NAICS code takes the place of the Industry filter. #### Can I search industries by a word like "fashion"? Yes. In the Industry filter and in the NAICS codes filter of Markets you can type a word, also one the official names do not use; ListPlus offers the industries or codes that fit it. In the Industry filter you can also open a main industry and tick single parts of it. #### Why do the numbers in Markets differ from the Companies search? Markets counts in a different company database than the Companies search. The two classify industries and company sizes differently, so the same filters give different numbers. #### Why are there two employee charts in Markets? "Employees (estimate)" is the data provider's own estimate; "Employees (reported)" is the number reported elsewhere. They often differ, so open both charts if company size matters for your market. #### Why does a chart show many companies as "Not stated"? Not every company has every property on file; revenue, growth and team sizes are known for a part of the companies only. Filtering by such a property leaves out every company without a value. #### Why do some numbers in Markets appear with a delay? Every bar is counted separately, and the number of counts per minute is limited. When a chart has many bars — the countries of a region, for example — the total comes first and the remaining bars follow by themselves, usually within a minute. --- ## How Segment Search filters work Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained Last updated: 2026-10-15 Segment Search's filter panel has 30+ filters grouped into four tabs. This topic covers how the groups are organized, how filters combine, and the Exclude, match-mode and suggestion mechanics. For how a search runs, what it costs and how results look, see "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)". ### The four groups - **Person** — job title, seniority, department, person name, location, years of experience, time in role, time at company, max per company. - **Company** — company name/website, industry, employees, HQ location, founded year, revenue, keywords, company type, NAICS/SIC codes. - **Signals** — funding, technology used, hiring activity, open job postings, headcount growth, email provider, job change (currently "Not available"). - **Reachability** — Contact data: has a verified email, has a verified mobile, or both; ticking both shows a "Match" toggle (all/any, all by default). ### AND across filters, OR within one Setting several filters narrows the search — Job title AND Location AND Industry all have to match. Inside one filter, adding several values (e.g. three job titles) is an OR-set — any one of them can match. Company Keywords has a "Match: any/all" toggle to switch that one filter from OR to AND. ### For advanced users Excludable filters (job title, seniority, location, company, company HQ, industry, keywords, technology, NAICS, SIC, company website) show an **Exclude** section inside the same pill — values there are removed from the results instead of required. Department doesn't support Exclude (our data provider can't combine include and exclude on that field). Job title also has a **Title match** toggle: Fuzzy (default, catches close variants) or Exact (literal match only). There's no separate Boolean search syntax (no "CEO AND NOT CTO" box) — combine multiple filters for AND, add several values to one filter for OR, and use Exclude for NOT. **Related topics:** categories-audience-database · which-finder-do-i-use · categories-to-list. ### FAQ #### What are the filter groups in Segment Search? Filters are grouped into four tabs: Person (job title, seniority, location, department, years of experience, time in role/company), Company (industry, employees, HQ, revenue, keywords), Signals (funding, technology, hiring, headcount growth, job change), and Reachability (has a verified email or mobile). Open Find, pick People in the switch at the top right, then use the filter panel to switch between tabs. #### Do filters combine with AND or OR? Different filters combine with AND — every filter you set has to match. Inside one filter, adding multiple values (three job titles, say) is an OR-set, so any one of them counts. Company Keywords has its own "Match: any/all" toggle to require all keywords instead of any. #### How does Exclude work? Filters like job title, location, industry, company, company HQ, keywords, technology and NAICS/SIC show an Exclude section inside the same pill — values you add there are removed from the results. It's not available on Department, since the provider can't combine include and exclude on that one field. #### What's the difference between Fuzzy and Exact for job titles? The Job title filter has a "Title match" toggle, which appears once you've added at least one title. Fuzzy (the default) also catches close variants of the titles you list; Exact only matches the literal title text, and both apply to every job title chip in that filter. #### Is there a Boolean search like "CEO AND NOT CTO"? There's no separate Boolean search box. You get the same effect by combining filters: set Job title to CEO, use its Exclude section to remove CTO, and add other filters (location, industry) as additional AND conditions. #### Which filters must I pick from a suggestions list? Location, Company HQ and Industry only accept values from the suggestions that appear as you type — our data provider's database only accepts its own values for these three. You need to be signed in to see suggestions; as an anonymous visitor, use "describe your audience in a sentence" instead, which sets these filters for you. #### Why is the Job change filter greyed out? Job change is marked "Not available" and can't be selected at the moment. To find people new in their role, use "Time in role (months)" or "Time at company (months)" in the Person tab instead. #### Can I type "DACH" or "SaaS" directly into a filter? Typing a region ("DACH", "EMEA", "Benelux") or a vertical ("SaaS", "Fintech") works when you use "describe your audience in a sentence" — it's automatically expanded into the matching countries or industries. Typed directly into the Location or Industry filter by hand, use the specific country or industry name from the suggestions instead, since these two only accept exact database values. --- ## Get emails and phone numbers Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/reveal-email-and-phone Last updated: 2026-10-10 In **Segment Search** (Segmentsuche) results, a masked preview shows you that a verified email or mobile number exists for a person before you pay for it. Revealing the real value is a separate, optional step you trigger yourself, and you're only charged when ListPlus actually finds the number or address. Opening a row also auto-loads the profile's basics for a small number of credits — a separate cost from any reveal, and one you can turn off. ### The masked preview and the green check In the results table, the **Email** and **Mobile** columns show a partly hidden value with a green check mark whenever the data provider has a verified email or mobile on file for that person — for example `j***@a****.com`. No check mark and an empty cell means the provider has nothing verified for that field; revealing it may still work through a name-and-company lookup, but there's no known hit to unlock. The masked value itself is never a real, usable address — it only proves a match exists. ### Reveal a single result Click a row to open its profile. Under **Reachability**, the Work email and Mobile number slots each have a **Reveal** button showing the price: one for a verified email (plus the company's main phone number), one for a personal mobile, which costs considerably more. The verified email is matched by LinkedIn URL when known, otherwise by name and company. You're charged only when a verified email or a mobile number is actually found. The same email lookup appears as "Verified Email & Company Phone" under the profile's **Enrich** button. ### Company phone vs. mobile "Company Phone" from the Verified Email & Company Phone card is the company's main switchboard number, not a line that reaches this person directly. A personal, verified mobile number is a separate lookup — the mobile reveal card — because it comes from a different, more expensive verification step. ### Confirmation for bigger charges Any single reveal above a certain amount first shows a "Paid enrichment" confirmation with the credit cost, with **Enrich** and **Cancel** buttons. The mobile reveal under Reachability asks first. The email reveal runs straight away. Under **Enrich**, "Find mobile number" tries the mobile reveal first without asking. Only if that finds nothing does it ask before a deeper, more expensive search, whose phone tier is charged only when a phone number is found. ### Reveal for many rows at once After adding results to a list, select the rows you want (or use the header checkbox to select all), click **Enrich** in the selection bar, then pick **Contact details → Phone** (or **Email**) in the field picker and confirm. Phone runs the mobile reveal, and ListPlus charges it only for rows where a number is found; for Email, the plan dialog shows the route and its cost before you confirm, and some routes charge per attempt. Rows that already have the field filled can be excluded with the "only what is missing" option. ### Related topics See "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)" for the results table and adding rows to a list, and "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full credit-cost table. ### FAQ #### What does the masked email or mobile in Segment Search mean? It's a preview like `j***@a****.com` showing that a verified value exists for that person on the data provider's side — it's never a real, usable address itself. See "How do I reveal a verified email address?" and "How do I reveal a mobile number?" below for how to unlock it. #### What does the green check mark next to an email or mobile mean? It means the data provider has a verified email or mobile number on file for that person. No check mark and an empty cell means nothing verified is on file for that field, though a name-and-company lookup can sometimes still find one. #### How do I reveal a verified email address? Open the result's profile and click the Reveal button next to Work email under Reachability (it shows the price). It's charged only when a verified email is actually found; the same lookup is labeled "Verified Email & Company Phone" under the profile's Enrich button. #### How do I reveal a mobile number? Open the result's profile and click the Reveal button next to Mobile number under Reachability (it shows the price); it asks you to confirm first. You're only charged if a number is actually found — a miss costs no credits. #### What's the difference between "company phone" and a mobile number? "Company Phone," included with the Verified Email & Company Phone card, is the company's general switchboard number, not a direct line to that person. A personal, verified mobile number is a separate, more expensive lookup via "Reveal Mobile Number." #### Do I pay if a reveal doesn't find anything? No — both the email/company-phone reveal and the mobile reveal only charge you when the lookup actually returns a value. The optional deep mobile search under Enrich → Find mobile number charges its phone tier only when a phone number is found (if it only turns up an email, you pay the lower email part). #### Why does revealing a mobile number ask me to confirm first? Revealing a mobile with the Reveal button in the profile's Reachability section shows a "Paid enrichment" confirmation first, because it costs more than a certain amount. The email reveal runs without asking. "Find mobile number" under Enrich runs the mobile reveal directly and asks only before escalating to the deeper search. #### Can I reveal emails or mobile numbers for many rows at once? Yes — after adding results to a list, select the rows, click Enrich in the selection bar, and choose Contact details → Phone (the mobile reveal) or Email in the field picker. Phone is charged only for rows where a mobile is found; for Email, the plan dialog shows the route and its cost before you confirm, and some routes charge per attempt. #### If I already saw the masked preview in Segment Search, does revealing it later in the list still find it? Yes — the row carries over its LinkedIn URL, name and company, so the same reveal typically finds the same match once you run it in the list. Adding a row to a list never fills the email or mobile cell automatically; the cell stays empty until you run the reveal, in Segment Search or afterwards in the list. --- ## Adding Segment Search results to a list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-to-list Last updated: 2026-10-15 This topic covers what happens when you click **Add** → **Add to list** in Segment Search: which columns arrive, when it's free, and how people already in the list are merged. For how a Segment Search itself works and what it costs, see "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)". ### Add to list Tick the rows you want with the row or header checkbox. With nothing ticked and more hits than are loaded, ListPlus asks **How many contacts to add?** — the ones loaded, a number, or all; further pages cost credits each, with the price shown before you confirm. If the search fits on the page, the page is taken. Click **Add** → **Add to list**, then either pick an existing list — free — or click **New list**, which costs credits, the same as a file import. ### Columns that arrive Each added row brings first name, last name, job title, company name, industry, company size, website, company domain, LinkedIn profile URL, LinkedIn company URL, city and country. Email and phone are always empty on arrival — Segment Search' search results never include the address or number itself, only whether a verified one exists — so enrich or reveal them in the list afterwards. ### For advanced users Adding to an **existing** list checks for contacts already in it: a row that matches one by email, then LinkedIn URL, then phone, then name plus company is merged into the existing row (empty cells filled) instead of added again. The message afterwards says how many were added and how many merged. Duplicates that were already in the list stay — run the list's duplicate check for those (see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)"). Creating a new list costs credits (all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"); adding to an existing list is free. **Related topics:** categories-audience-database · filters-explained · duplicates · create-list-and-import-file. ### FAQ #### What columns do I get when I add Segment Search results to a list? First name, last name, job title, company name, industry, company size, website, company domain, LinkedIn profile URL, LinkedIn company URL, city and country. Email and phone columns are added but stay empty until you enrich or reveal them in the list. #### Why are email and phone empty after adding to a list? Segment Search's search results only show a masked preview of email and mobile, never the full value, so nothing lands in those columns when you add rows to a list. Revealing an email in Segment Search doesn't fill it into the list either, so add the rows first and then run enrichment on the list to fill email and phone in bulk. #### Can I add all my search results at once, not just one page? Yes — click Add → Add to list with nothing ticked: when the search has more hits than are loaded, ListPlus asks "How many contacts to add?" and offers the ones loaded, a number, or all. Every further page that has to be loaded costs credits, and the window shows the maximum before you confirm. #### Can I add just some rows instead of the whole page? Yes — tick the checkbox on each row you want, or use the header checkbox to select the whole page at once, then click Add → Add to list. Only the ticked rows are added; with nothing ticked and more hits than are loaded, ListPlus asks how many to add (the ones loaded, a number, or all). #### Does adding from Segment Search twice create duplicates? No — people already in the list (matched by email, LinkedIn URL, phone, or name plus company) are merged into their existing row instead of added again, and the message says how many were merged. For duplicates that were in the list before, open the list, click Analyze and use the Duplicates checks — see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)". #### How do I find the list after adding contacts from Segment Search? A notification with "Click to open" appears right after the add — click it to jump straight to the list you just added to or created. Otherwise, it's in your Lists like any other list. --- ## Data coverage by country and industry Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/coverage-by-country Last updated: 2026-10-10 Segment Search gives you filtered access to our data provider's B2B database — roughly 300 million profiles worldwide. Coverage isn't even everywhere: how many people, how many verified emails and how many verified mobile numbers the provider has for a given country or industry varies, and we don't have exact per-country figures to publish here. ### What to expect As a general rule, coverage tends to be strongest for larger companies and common B2B roles in major markets, and thinner for small companies, niche industries and countries with less public professional data. Verified mobile numbers are typically scarcer than verified emails in any market, since fewer people list a mobile number publicly in the first place; this is general guidance, not a per-country figure we can confirm. Rather than guess whether your target market or industry is well covered, **try a small sample first**: set your filters in Segment Search, run one page (a page costs credits, the price is shown before you run it) and look at how many of the 25 results already carry a masked email or mobile preview with a green check before committing to a larger search. See "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)" for how a search and its cost work ("[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" has the prices), and "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)" for setting Location, Industry and Reachability filters precisely. ### If coverage is thin for your search - Broaden the filter that's narrowing you down most (a wider location, a broader industry, a lower seniority) and compare how many results carry a masked email or mobile preview with a green check. - Add the people you need to a list anyway, then enrich them individually — most lookups are only charged when they find something (the price list marks the few that charge per attempt), so trying costs you only the ones that succeed. See "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)" and "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)". - For a target group no filter-based search covers well, describe it in AI Research instead, which searches the open web rather than one provider's database. ### Language of the research AI Research works best with an English brief, even for non-English targets — see "Should I write my brief in English?" in "Write a good research brief" for why. Location, Company HQ and Industry must be picked from the suggestions list. **Related topics:** categories-audience-database · filters-explained · write-a-good-research-brief · reveal-email-and-phone · which-finder-do-i-use. ### FAQ #### Is coverage the same in every country? No — coverage (how many people and verified contact details the database has) varies by country and by industry. We don't have exact per-country numbers to publish; run a small sample search first to see how well your specific market is covered. #### Is coverage weaker for smaller companies or niche industries? Generally yes — larger companies and common B2B roles tend to have better coverage than small companies and niche industries, as a general pattern rather than a guaranteed rule. If your search returns few masked email or mobile previews with a green check, try broadening a filter and compare. #### Are mobile numbers harder to find than emails? Verified mobile numbers are typically scarcer than verified emails in any market, simply because fewer people have a mobile number listed publicly at all. This is general guidance, not a country-specific figure. #### Is DACH (Germany, Austria, Switzerland) coverage good? We don't have exact figures for DACH specifically. Set your filters (e.g. Location: Germany, Austria, Switzerland) in Segment Search and run one page to see how many results carry a masked email or mobile preview with a green check before running a larger search. #### How do I check coverage before spending credits on a big search? Run one page of your filtered search first — it costs credits for up to 25 results, with the price shown before you run it — and look at how many results already show a masked email or mobile preview with a green check. That gives you a real sample for your exact filters instead of a general estimate. #### What can I do if coverage for my target group is thin? Broaden the filter narrowing your results the most (a wider location, industry or seniority), or add the people to a list and enrich them individually — most lookups are only charged when they find something (the price list marks the few that charge per attempt). For a group no filter search covers well, describe it in AI Research instead, which searches the open web. #### Does the database cover languages other than English? Location, Company HQ and Industry must be picked from the suggestions list. AI Research works with any language but finds more sources with an English brief, since most public web content it searches is in English. #### Why did my search return fewer verified emails than I expected? Coverage for your specific combination of location, industry and seniority may simply be thinner than average — this varies and isn't something ListPlus controls. Try a broader filter, or enrich individual results afterward with "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)". --- ## AI Research Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research Last updated: 2026-10-15 **AI Research** (KI-Recherche) finds audiences no filter can find: people or companies that did something visible on the open web. Open it with **Find** in the left navigation, then **AI Research** in the switch at the top right. The form has three steps: **Describe the leads**, **Set up the research** and **Allowed AI tools**. Two kinds of agent can run it: **ListPlus** — our own agent, working on the server, even with your window closed — or **Your AI** — an assistant you already use, such as Claude or ChatGPT, through a private link (its own topic: "[Letting your own AI research for you](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/your-ai-researches)"). Every match carries a fit score and the evidence behind it, and a run never returns the same match twice. ### Describe the leads Type your audience in your own words, best in English — the field's own placeholder shows a full example ("CEOs and founders of B2B SaaS companies in the US that raised seed or Series A in the last few months"). Click **Insert example** to drop that exact brief into the field as a starting point, or use the microphone button next to it to dictate instead of typing. For the formula behind a strong brief and more example signals, see "[How do I write a good AI Research brief?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/write-a-good-research-brief)" ### Allowed AI tools Step 3, **Allowed AI tools**, lists every source as its own switch, in folding groups that each show how many are allowed: **Find** (Database, LinkedIn people, Web search, Read web pages), **Signals** (Job postings, News), **Community & intent** (LinkedIn posts, Reddit, X, Hacker News) and **Verify & enrich** (Find LinkedIn). A switch is a permission, not an order: the agent may use a source you tick, and it queries one only when your brief calls for it — a database lookup when the brief names a role, place or industry, job postings when it asks for companies that are hiring, LinkedIn posts when it asks who talks about a topic. Ticking a source never triggers a query by itself, and a ticked source that the brief doesn't need costs nothing. Each tile shows what it's for and what it costs. Web search, reading pages, job postings, news, Hacker News and finding a real LinkedIn profile are free; Database, LinkedIn people and the community sources other than Hacker News are paid per call — see "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)"; all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### Stop conditions and budget In step 2, **Set up the research**, **Search goal** → **Stop after** sets how many matches (or, with a target list, new records in it) the run looks for: **25**, **50**, **100** or **no limit**. Under **Budget & model**, **Credit limit** sets the credit budget for the run — you pick it from a list before you start (the options are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)") — and the run ends at whichever of the two it hits first, or once a round finds nothing new. **Keep searching until … are found** (on by default, shown when you set a target) makes ListPlus start another round, up to 5 times and never past the credit limit, when the agent would otherwise stop early with fewer matches than you asked for. **Model** picks the AI that does the work: the default is fast and cheap, the alternative has the strongest judgment but costs many times more per step. With the stronger model, a hint shows about how many steps your credit limit buys. ### Sending hits to a list By default matches stay in the research; tick the ones you want and click **Add to list** to file them into an existing list (free) or a new one (which costs credits). You can also answer **Automatically add new matches to a list?** in step 2 with **Yes, add them as they are found**: pick a list (or a new one) and every qualifying hit is added on its own, with duplicates kept out — full detail, including the fit-score filter, in "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)." ### Watching a run Every run works on the server, so it keeps going when you close the tab, switch away or your laptop sleeps, and you can review or start a research on your phone too. In a workspace, researches are shared with the whole team: everyone sees them in the **Researches** column, and a run a colleague started shows their name. Click **Stop** at any time to end a run and keep everything found so far, or **Resume** on a paused, stopped or even finished run to open another pass the size of what you originally chose — see "[AI Research always runs on the server](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/background-runs)" for how long an unattended run keeps working before it needs a Resume. ### Costs The usual AI costs apply: the agent's reasoning is billed by usage, with no flat fee per match, and the stronger model costs more per step. On top, each tool you allow under **Allowed AI tools** that isn't free is billed per call it makes while the run works. Which sources cost credits: "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)"; running out of credits mid-run: "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)." ### For advanced users A resumed run reuses the switches, target and budget it started with — change any of those by starting a new research instead. Without a target list a run holds at most 200 matches in total; with one, up to 1,000, since the list itself absorbs and dedupes the hits instead of the run's own memory. Finding a real LinkedIn profile (`identity`) is always free and runs to ground a match before it's recorded, which is also why the agent can't invent people. **Related topics:** research-costs-and-sources · write-a-good-research-brief · research-results-to-a-list · background-runs · your-ai-researches · not-enough-credits · what-is-a-workspace. ### FAQ #### What is AI Research and when should I use it? AI Research finds people or companies that did something visible on the open web — hiring for a role, complaining about a tool, raising money or speaking at an event — that no database filter can find. You describe the audience in a sentence, pick which of our own agent or "Your AI" (an assistant you already use) should search, and matches come back with evidence and a fit score. Use Segment Search instead when your audience is defined by role, industry and company size alone. #### How do I describe a good target group? Type the role or company trait, a visible signal, and an industry or region, best in English — the field's placeholder shows a full working example, and clicking **Insert example** drops it straight in. You don't pick person vs. company mode yourself; the agent infers it from your wording. #### Does ticking a source mean the agent searches it? No. The switches under Allowed AI tools are permissions: the agent may use a ticked source, and it queries one only when your brief calls for it — the database when you name a role, place or industry, job postings when you ask for companies that are hiring, LinkedIn posts when you ask who talks about a topic. A ticked source the brief doesn't need is never called and costs nothing; an unticked source doesn't exist for the agent, even when the brief would need it. #### What does an AI Research cost? The usual AI costs apply — the agent's reasoning is billed by usage, with no flat fee per match — plus the paid sources the agent actually calls — only ones you allowed under Allowed AI tools, and only when the brief needs them — each billed per call. See "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)" for which sources are paid, and "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the prices. #### How long does a research take and can I close the window? Several minutes for a small target, longer for a bigger one. Yes — every research runs on the server and keeps going after you close the tab, switch away or your laptop sleeps, for a solid block of unattended work before it needs a manual Resume. #### What does "Your AI" mean? Instead of ListPlus's own agent, you can hand the research to an AI assistant you already use — such as Claude or ChatGPT — through a private link that reports matches back into the same cockpit. It's a separate way to run a research, covered in "Letting your own AI research for you." #### Why did the research find fewer people than I asked for? Only people or companies with real evidence on the web are returned — the agent never invents matches. With **Keep searching until … are found** on (the default), ListPlus starts another round, up to 5 times and never past the credit limit, until it reaches your chosen number or stops finding anything new; turning on more sources, or broadening the brief, usually finds more. #### How many matches can one AI Research find? You pick a stop target of 25, 50, 100 or no limit under **Stop after**; the run also stops if its **Credit limit** runs out first. Click **Resume** — even on a finished run — to open another pass the same size as what you originally chose, up to 200 matches in total without a target list or 1,000 with one. #### How do I get the matches into a list? Tick the matches you want and click **Add to list** to file them into an existing list (free) or a new one (which costs credits); open a single match to view its full profile and save it to a folder instead. You can also turn on automatic hand-off so every qualifying hit goes to a list by itself — see "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)." #### How long are my AI Research results kept? A research is kept for 7 days after you start it by default, whether running, finished or stopped. With automatic hand-off to a list, the research and its link are kept for 30 days instead; the records themselves live on in the list. #### Can more than one research run at the same time? Yes — there's no fixed limit on how many researches run at once. Each one spends credits as it works, so your balance is the only real limit. #### What is a fit score? Every match gets a fit score from 0 to 100, with a one-line reason, rating how well it matches your brief on role, company, place and signal. See "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)" for using it to filter what reaches a list. --- ## How do I write a good AI Research brief? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/write-a-good-research-brief Last updated: 2026-10-15 The brief you type is the only input AI Research works from, so a specific one finds far more real matches than a vague one. See "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" for the basics of how a run works; this article goes deeper on writing the brief itself and on the ready-made examples the screen offers. ### The three-part formula Aim for one sentence with three parts, ideally written in English: 1. **Role** — who you're looking for (or the kind of company, for a company-level search). 2. **A visible signal** — something the person or company actually did publicly, that shows up somewhere on the open web. 3. **Industry or region** — narrows the pool so the agent doesn't have to guess what "relevant" means. Example: "CEOs and founders of B2B SaaS companies in the US that raised seed or Series A in the last few months" — role (CEOs and founders), signal (raised seed or Series A), industry and region (B2B SaaS, US). ### Starting from an example While the field is empty, click **Insert example** to drop a full, working brief straight in and adapt it from there. Each source tile under **Allowed AI tools** also carries its own **Example: … →** link (its tooltip shows the brief; open a folded group to see its tiles) — clicking one loads a brief built around that specific source (a database lookup, a job-posting signal, a LinkedIn-post signal, and so on) and switches that source on for you. ### More research ideas Below the sources, the collapsed **More research ideas** panel holds six ready-made pattern cards, each tagged with the kind of signal it uses — Database, Signal, Intent or Event — for example **Who fits** (a database profile), **Who's hiring** (a job posting), **Who's talking** (LinkedIn comments on a topic), **Who's listening** (people engaging with one person's posts), **Who just raised** (funding) and **Who's exhibiting** (a trade show). Click a card to load its brief into the field and switch on the sources it needs, then adapt the wording — your own region, industry or event — before starting. ### Person or company — there's no switch to flip A ListPlus-run research has no on/off toggle for people vs. companies — the agent reads your brief and decides. Name a role (CTOs, Heads of Sales, Founders) and it searches for people; describe a company-level trait with no role attached — a funding round, a product launch, a technology migration — and it searches for companies instead. If you want one mode specifically, make that clear through wording rather than looking for a switch. ### Related topics "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" · "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)" · "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)" · "[Segment Search: the audience database](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/categories-audience-database)". ### FAQ #### What counts as a "visible signal"? Something the person or company actually did publicly that shows up in a job post, a forum thread, a press release, a company page or a LinkedIn post — hiring for a role, complaining about a tool, switching technology, raising money, launching a product, or speaking at an event. A concrete signal is what lets the agent find and verify real matches instead of guessing. #### Where do I find example briefs to start from? Click **Insert example** next to the empty field for one full working brief, or open the source-specific **Example: … →** link on any tile under **Allowed AI tools**. The collapsed **More research ideas** panel below has six further pattern cards — such as Who's hiring or Who just raised — each loading its own brief and switching on the sources it needs. #### Can I dictate my brief instead of typing it? Yes — use the microphone button next to the input field to dictate your brief instead of typing it; click again to stop and transcribe. #### How do I get AI Research to return companies instead of people? You don't switch modes; the agent infers it from your wording. Naming a role (Heads of Sales, Founders, CTOs) returns people, while describing a company-level trait with no role — a funding round, a product launch — returns companies instead. #### Should I write my brief in English? Written in English if possible — the agent still understands other languages, but English briefs tend to find more sources, since most of the public web content it searches (job posts, forums, press) is in English. #### Why did my brief return few or no matches? A vague brief gives the agent nothing concrete to search for and verify, so it returns few or no real matches. Add a specific role, one visible signal, and an industry or region, following the three-part formula above, and make sure a source that can find that signal is switched on. --- ## How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources Last updated: 2026-10-17 "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" covers the basics of what a run costs; this article goes deeper on how the metering actually works, source by source. For the full prices of every feature, see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." ### Metered by actual effort, not a flat fee Every reasoning step the AI takes (deciding what to search, weighing a result, checking a match) is billed by the amount of text it processes — the usual AI costs, same as an AI command or an AI column elsewhere in ListPlus. Starting a run needs a small minimum balance, and you also set a spending budget for it (see below); there's no fixed price per match or per run. ### Every source is its own switch, with its own price Under **Allowed AI tools** (step 3 of the form) each source is a separate checkbox in a folding group (Find, Signals, Community & intent, Verify & enrich), and each has its own price and unit. A checkbox allows a source; it doesn't start a query — the agent calls a paid source only when the brief needs it, so a ticked source the brief never needs costs nothing: | Source (switch) | Cost | Per | | ---------------------------- | ----------------- | --------------------------------------- | | Web search, read web pages, job postings, news, Hacker News, find LinkedIn | Free | — | | Database lookup | Costs credits | search page of up to 25 people/companies | | LinkedIn posts | Costs credits | search (up to 50 posts) | | LinkedIn posts — reading reactions | Costs credits | post whose comments and reactions are read | | Reddit | Costs credits | 25 posts or comments requested | | X (Twitter) | Costs credits | 100 posts requested | | LinkedIn people | Costs credits | profile found, plus each search (up to 25 profiles); the search is charged also when nobody is found | A call is billed whether or not it turns up something useful, since the underlying source bills for the call itself; an empty database page, or one repeating the exact same search within 30 days, is free. Reading LinkedIn posts is two separate charges: the search itself, then a further charge only for the posts whose people the agent actually reads. ### The budget you set **Credit limit** (under **Budget & model**) sets the credit budget for the run — you pick it from a list before you start (the options are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"), covering the AI's own reasoning together with every paid source call. The run paces itself to stay inside that ceiling and stops itself once it's spent, keeping everything found so far. **Keep searching until … are found** (on by default when you set a target) starts another round when the AI ends one early with fewer matches than you asked for — up to 5 times, never past the credit limit. **Model** decides what each step costs: the default model is fast and cheap, the stronger one has the best judgment but costs many times more per step, so the same credit limit buys far fewer steps with it. ### Watching the cost live, and stopping anytime While a run is active, a live counter next to your match count shows credits used so far and updates continuously. Click **Stop** in the header at any point to end the run immediately — everything found up to that moment stays, but credits already used aren't refunded. ### Resuming costs again, and running out of credits Clicking **Resume** — also on a finished run — opens another pass the same size as what you originally chose (matches and budget both), metered exactly like the first pass: reasoning steps plus any paid-source calls. If you run out of credits mid-run, the run stops itself, keeps what it found, and the credits it used aren't refunded; top up and click **Resume** to continue (details: "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)"). ### Related topics "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" · "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" · "[How do I write a good AI Research brief?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/write-a-good-research-brief)" · "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)" · "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)". ### FAQ #### What am I actually paying for during an AI Research run? The usual AI costs — the agent's own reasoning as it reads, searches and verifies, billed by usage — plus a per-call charge for any source you've switched on that isn't free. There's no flat fee per match or per run. #### Which sources are free and which cost credits? Web search, reading web pages, job postings, news, Hacker News and finding a real LinkedIn profile are free. Database lookup, LinkedIn people, LinkedIn posts, Reddit and X all cost credits per call — the table above shows which; prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"; the tech-stack lookup is currently not available. #### Are paid sources like Reddit or X charged once per run? Per call — the agent can call an unlocked source several times in one run, and each call is charged even if it finds nothing. Reddit is charged per batch of 25 posts or comments requested, and X per batch of 100 posts requested. #### What is the spending budget ("at most"), and can I change it mid-run? **Credit limit**, under **Budget & model**, sets the credit budget for the run — you pick it from a list before you start (the options are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)") — covering both the agent's reasoning and every paid source it calls; the run stops itself once it's spent. You set it before starting, and a resumed pass reuses the same ceiling on top of what's already spent. #### Where do I see how many credits a run has used? A live counter next to your match count updates continuously while the run is active, showing the running total spent so far. #### Does clicking Resume on a finished research cost credits? Yes — each Resume opens a new pass the same size as what you originally chose and is billed the same way: reasoning steps by usage plus any paid sources it calls, up to the budget you set again. #### Can I stop a research before it finishes? Yes — click Stop in the header at any time. The run ends immediately and keeps every match already found, and credits already used aren't refunded. #### What happens if my balance runs out mid-run? The run stops itself and keeps everything found so far; the credits already used aren't refunded. Top up your balance and click Resume to continue with a fresh pass. --- ## AI Research always runs on the server Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/background-runs Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every AI Research run works on the server, not in your browser. This article covers how long an unattended run keeps going, why it might pause on its own, how to resume it, and how long results stick around. ### A block of unattended working time, then it pauses A run keeps working on its own for a while, then pauses and shows a status next to the run: **Time limit reached — results are kept**, **Budget reached**, **Nothing new found anymore**, or (if the agent itself decided it's done short of the target) a note that it stopped on its own — in every case, everything found so far is kept exactly as it was. A run with a finite stop target (25, 50 or 100) gets roughly an hour of this unattended chaining; one set to **no limit** keeps auto-chaining for much longer — many hours — before it needs a manual Resume. ### Resuming a run A paused, stopped, errored or finished run, or one marked **Stalled — no more response from the run**, shows a **Resume** button — click it and the agent picks up where it left off, searching for genuinely new matches instead of repeating itself. Each Resume opens another pass the same size as what you originally chose (both the match target and the credit budget) and gives the run a fresh block of unattended working time, so you can resume a run several times, up to 200 matches per research without a target list or 1,000 with one. **Stop** ends a run at any time and keeps everything found so far. ### Runs on your phone too Describing a target group, starting a run, and reviewing its progress and matches all work on a phone now, not only on a desktop browser. ### Shared with your workspace Researches belong to your workspace, so every member sees them on any device they sign in on; a run a colleague started shows their name. Runs are charged to the workspace owner's credit balance. There's no fixed limit on how many researches run at once — credits are the only limit. ### How long results are kept A run and its matches are kept for 7 days counted from when it was started, whatever its status, and are deleted automatically once that window passes — unless you've turned on automatic hand-off to a list, in which case the research is kept for 30 days instead (see "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)"). Add anything you want to keep to a list before the 7 days pass. ### Related topics "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" · "[How do I write a good AI Research brief?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/write-a-good-research-brief)" · "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)" · "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)" · "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)". ### FAQ #### Does a research keep working after I close the tab? Yes — every research runs on the server, so it keeps searching even after you close the tab or the window, switch away for a while, or your laptop sleeps. #### What does "Time limit reached — results are kept" mean? Your run used its block of unattended working time and paused itself; everything it found is kept. Click Resume to give it another block of working time toward the same target. #### What do "Budget reached" and "Nothing new found anymore" mean? Budget reached means the run spent the credit ceiling you set before reaching its match target; Nothing new found anymore means a full round turned up no genuinely new matches. Both keep everything found so far, and Resume opens a fresh pass with a new budget. #### How do I continue a paused research? Click Resume on the run — the agent picks up where it stopped, excluding what it already found, and opens another pass the same size as what you originally chose. Resume also works on a finished, errored or stalled run, up to 200 matches per research without a target list, or 1,000 with one. #### Does resuming a research reset the 7-day clock? No — the 7-day expiry is fixed to when the run was first started, and clicking Resume doesn't push it back. To keep matches beyond that, add them to a list, or turn on automatic hand-off so the research is kept for 30 days instead of 7. #### What does "Stalled — no more response from the run" mean? The run stopped reporting progress before it finished. Everything it found so far is kept — click Resume to continue. --- ## Letting your own AI research for you ("Your AI") Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/your-ai-researches Last updated: 2026-10-17 **Your AI** is a second way to run an AI Research: instead of ListPlus's own agent, you hand the job to an AI assistant you already use — Claude, ChatGPT or an agent of your own — through a private link. It searches on its own and reports what it finds straight into your ListPlus research cockpit. ### Setting it up Open **Find** in the left navigation, then **AI Research** in the switch at the top right. Describe the leads as usual, then under **Who should search?** pick **Your AI** instead of ListPlus. Choose what it should collect — **Contacts**, **Companies** or **Custom fields** (a custom collection lets you name your own item and, if useful, a field that spots duplicates) — and click **Generate URL**. ListPlus shows the link plus an MCP URL and a ready-to-paste instruction; copy any of them into your assistant and it takes it from there. This entity choice — Contacts, Companies or Custom fields — only exists in Your AI mode; a ListPlus-run research decides person vs. company on its own. ### What it costs Reported matches are free. You pay only for the paid tools you switch on: database, LinkedIn people, LinkedIn posts, Reddit, X, the e-mail check (per address) and Enrich (per hit) — each charged at its own price — and all of it counts against the spending cap you set (a choice of several amounts) so your AI can never spend more than you agreed to. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." With Find LinkedIn on (the default), your AI also gets a free lookup to ground a real LinkedIn profile before reporting a match, at no extra cost. If a verification check itself fails, that charge is refunded automatically — see "[Automatic credit refunds](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/refunds)." ### Enriching a hit needs a target list Enrich only works on a hit that has already reached a target list — turn on automatic hand-off to a list (see "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)") before your AI tries to enrich anything; without one, the Enrich call is rejected and nothing is charged. ### How long it runs, and how long results stay Your AI gets roughly 24 hours to search and report before its link stops accepting new results; anything it already reported stays. Separately, you choose how long the whole research is kept in your cockpit under **Link valid for** — 1, 3 or 7 days, after which it's deleted automatically. With automatic hand-off to a list, both the link and the research last 30 days instead (the records themselves live on in the list). Without hand-off, hand the link to your assistant soon after generating it, since the 24-hour work window doesn't get longer just because the keep-time is longer. ### Shared with your workspace A Your AI research is stored like any other research: it appears in the research list of your workspace, every member sees it and its matches, and a run a colleague set up shows their name. Email verification and Enrich charges go to the workspace owner's credit balance. If the person who generated the link leaves the workspace, the link stops accepting results. ### Keep the link private Anyone holding the link can add results to this one research, and use its credit cap for any paid tool you switched on, without signing in. It gives no access to the rest of your account. Treat it like a password: only paste it into the AI assistant or tool you intend to use, and delete the research if you think it leaked — deleting it also disables the link immediately. **Related topics:** ai-research · research-results-to-a-list · background-runs · research-costs-and-sources · refunds · research-with-your-own-ai · what-is-a-workspace. ### FAQ #### What is "Your AI" in AI Research? A way to run a research with an AI assistant you already use — such as Claude or ChatGPT — instead of ListPlus's own agent. You get a private link; your assistant searches on its own and reports matches back into the same research cockpit. #### How do I set up a research for my own AI? In AI Research, describe your target group, choose Your AI under "Who should search," pick what to collect, and click Generate URL. Copy the link, the MCP URL, or the ready-made instruction next to it into your AI assistant and it takes over from there. #### What can my AI collect — only people? Contacts, Companies or Custom fields (your own item type, with an optional field for spotting duplicates) — this three-way choice only exists in Your AI mode; a ListPlus-run research decides person vs. company by itself. #### Does letting my own AI research cost credits? Reported matches are free. You pay only for the paid tools you switch on: database, LinkedIn people, LinkedIn posts, Reddit, X, the e-mail check (per address) and Enrich (per hit). All of it counts against a spending cap you set, and each tool's price is shown beside its switch. #### Can my AI fill in missing details on a hit it already reported? Yes, with Enrich turned on — it completes a reported hit with real provider data such as email, phone, LinkedIn or job title, for a charge per hit that has its own ceiling and never exceeds your spending cap. Enrich only works once that hit has reached a target list, so turn on automatic hand-off to a list first. #### How long does my AI have to search, and how long do results stay? Your AI has roughly 24 hours from generating the link to search and report; after that, new results are rejected. Separately, you pick how long the whole research is kept afterwards — 1, 3 or 7 days — With automatic hand-off to a list, both the link and the research last 30 days instead. #### Can my teammates see a research my own AI ran? Yes — a Your AI research is stored in your workspace like any other research, so every member sees it and its matches in the AI Research list, marked with the name of the person who set it up. Verification and Enrich charges go to the workspace owner's credit balance, and the link stops accepting results if the person who generated it leaves the workspace. #### What happens if an email verification check fails? The credit it cost is refunded automatically, both from the research's spending cap and your balance — see "[Automatic credit refunds](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/refunds)" for details. #### Is the link safe to hand to an AI tool? Anyone holding the link can add results to this one research, and use its credit cap for any paid tool you switched on, without signing in — but it gives no access to the rest of your account. Treat it like a password: only give it to the assistant you intend to use, and delete the research if you think it got out, which also disables the link immediately. --- ## Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list Last updated: 2026-10-15 Instead of reviewing matches yourself and adding them by hand, AI Research can hand qualifying hits over to a list on its own, as they're found — for a ListPlus-run research or for one your own AI reports into. ### Turning it on In a new research, step 2 (**Set up the research**) asks **Automatically add new matches to a list?** Tick **Yes, add them as they are found** and pick an existing list or a new one, named after your description. Left off, matches stay in the research for you to review and add by hand. On a run that already exists, a band above the matches reads **Add hits to a list automatically** (or **Hits go to … automatically** with **Change**). There you choose between **Keep in the research – you add them to a list by hand later** and a list, on a run in progress or after it finishes, at any time. A research with a target list also counts as a way into that list in **Flows**: its new hits show there as records that came in. ### Only the fit matters, and duplicates stay out Every hit is rated with a fit score from 0 to 100 and a one-line reason, judging how well it matches your brief on role, company, place and signal. With automatic hand-off on, **Add** lets you choose **All matches**, **Decent matches and better** (fit 50+), **Good matches and better** (70+) or **Only very good matches** (85+); everything below the bar stays in the research. What counts as a record needs at least a name plus a company, a domain or a LinkedIn URL — duplicates, and hits missing that much, stay out of the list and keep waiting in the research instead. ### The stop target counts what actually landed With a target list chosen, **Stop after** switches from counting matches to counting **new records actually added to that list** — hits that don't clear the fit bar, or turn out to be duplicates, don't count toward it. Without a target list, a run holds at most 200 matches in total; with one, the ceiling rises to 1,000, since the list itself absorbs and dedupes everything instead of the run's own memory. ### The research is kept for 30 days A research with automatic hand-off to a list switched on is kept for 30 days instead of the usual 1 to 7 — it becomes a standing research, so the list can still show where a row came from, while the list itself is the permanent home for what it finds. Its link lasts as long. Turning hand-off back to "Keep in the research" doesn't shorten the window again for a run that already went standing. ### Related topics "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)" · "[How do I write a good AI Research brief?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/write-a-good-research-brief)" · "[AI Research always runs on the server](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/background-runs)" · [Letting your own AI research for you](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/your-ai-researches) · "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)". ### FAQ #### How do I get AI Research hits into a list without adding them by hand? In step 2 of a new research, answer **Automatically add new matches to a list?** with **Yes, add them as they are found** and choose an existing list or a new one (on a run that exists, use the band above the matches). From then on, every qualifying hit is added to that list automatically as it's found. #### What is a fit score, and how do I use it to filter hand-offs? Every hit gets a fit score from 0 to 100 with a one-line reason, rating how well it matches your brief. With automatic hand-off on, use **Add** to send only **Decent matches and better** (50+), **Good matches and better** (70+) or **Only very good matches** (85+), or leave it on **All matches** to send every hit. #### Can duplicates end up in my list from AI Research? No — a hit needs at least a name plus a company, a domain or a LinkedIn URL to count as a record, and duplicates of what's already in the list are kept out automatically. Anything that doesn't qualify stays in the research instead of going to the list. #### Does "Stop after" count the same way with a target list chosen? No — with a target list, the stop number counts new records actually added to that list, not every hit the agent finds; a hit that fails the fit bar or turns out to be a duplicate doesn't count toward it. Without a target list, it counts the hits themselves. #### Does turning on automatic hand-off change how many matches a run can hold? Yes — a run without a target list holds at most 200 matches in total, while one with automatic hand-off on can go up to 1,000, since the list absorbs and dedupes the hits instead of the run's own memory. #### Does a research with automatic hand-off still expire after 7 days? Not after 7 — once automatic hand-off to a list is on, the research becomes standing and is kept for 30 days, since the list is its permanent record and the research only needs to outlive the hand-off. A run you never turned hand-off on for still expires after the 1 to 7 days you chose. #### Can I turn automatic hand-off on for a research that's already running? Yes — use the band above the matches (**Add hits to a list automatically**, or **Change** once a list is set), on a run in progress or even after it finishes. The choice applies to new hits from that point on and doesn't re-file matches found earlier. #### Can I still add matches to a list by hand if I don't turn hand-off on? Yes — the default, **Keep in the research – you add them to a list by hand later**, leaves every hit in the research for you to tick and click **Add to list** yourself, exactly as before; automatic hand-off is optional. --- ## Section: Lists: create & import ## Create a list and import a file Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file Last updated: 2026-10-17 Lists are where the work happens: quality checks, enrichment, AI commands and export all run on a list. You create one from the **New List** button on Home, or by dropping a file anywhere on the Home page — both open the same wizard. A new list is created in your active **workspace**, so every member of that workspace sees it (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). ### The Lists start page ("Start your first list.") Before your workspace has any list, clicking **Lists** in the rail shows **Start your first list.** ("A list comes from your own data or from a search.") with six **Ways to your first list**: - **Import a file** → **Choose file** (Excel, CSV or JSON). - **From Segment Search** → **Open segments** (find an audience by filters). - **From AI Research** → **Start research** (leads no database has). - **From your watchlist** → **Open watchlist** (turn the contacts on your watchlist into a list). - **Connect an app** → **Connect** (HubSpot, Google Sheets and more, gated by plan). - **Empty list** → **Create list** (set up your own columns, free — see "[Starting without data: templates and column sets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/empty-list-and-templates)"). A box **Just want to look around?** offers **Open a sample list**, which opens the shared, view-only sample contacts with their checks — no account needed (see "[Trying ListPlus with a sample list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/sample-list)"). ### Starting the wizard The wizard asks "How do you want to start?". Top right are two buttons: **Start without data** (a template or a blank column set) and **Open the sample list**. Below are two cards: **Import a file** (drop an Excel, CSV or JSON file, click **Select File**, or use **Load from URL**) and **Find Contacts** (Person search, Segment Search or AI Research). **Connect a system** offers Google Sheets, HubSpot, Attio and **3,000+ apps**; a source your plan does not include shows a lock. **Collect from LinkedIn** has five tiles that go straight to the import step: **Sales Navigator**, **Company employees**, **Keyword search**, **Post reactions** and **Post comments**, each showing its price. Dropping a file directly onto the Home page skips straight to this same wizard with your file already attached — you need to be signed in first. Dropping or attaching an Excel file — or a CSV/JSON table file — inside the **Inbox** (in Flows) instead goes straight into this same wizard too, rather than becoming an Inbox entry. ### Importing a file 1. Drop or select the file. CSV, Excel (.xlsx, .xlsm, .xls), JSON, TXT and TSV are accepted, up to 100 MB; encoding and delimiters are detected automatically. 2. For Excel files with multiple tabs, pick the worksheet or table to import. 3. Check the preview (the first 20 rows) and the detected field types. By default ListPlus uses AI to recognise what each column holds — email, first name, company, phone and so on — because checks and enrichment rely on it later. A **Skip AI Enhancement** button appears only if AI is unavailable or the analysis fails; otherwise the AI step always runs. 4. Name the list and click **Create List**. A file import costs credits, checked against your balance before the import starts; see "What happens when I don't have enough credits?" if your balance is too low. Column type detection itself is billed separately, by AI usage — all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### Record limit The workspace owner's plan caps how many records all lists together can hold, counted across every workspace that person owns. On Basic an import can bring the total up to 25,000 records, but only 5,000 stay editable — above that the lists are read-only (view, analyse, export) until the owner upgrades. On top of that, one list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan: a larger file is cut to its first 50,000 rows with a warning, and you import the rest into a second list. See "What is the record limit?" for the exact numbers and what happens when an import is larger than your remaining capacity. ### Duplicates Files are not deduplicated on import; use the duplicate checks in the list afterwards, or **Consolidate Lists** on Home to merge several lists with duplicate detection. ### Starting without data Clicking **Start without data** and picking a template and clicking **Create list** creates the list with an empty row — via **Start without data** this costs nothing, since only file, connected-tool and LinkedIn imports are billed. Fill it later by import or enrichment. The sample-list buttons ("Open a sample list", "Try a sample list") and a finder's "…or create a new list" option are not this path — they create the list from a file behind the scenes, so they cost the usual file-import credits. ### After the import To rename, duplicate, group or delete lists, see "Projects and list management". **Related topics:** record-limit · not-enough-credits · price-list · import-file-details · column-detection · import-from-url · empty-list-and-templates · projects-and-list-management. ### FAQ #### How do I import an Excel or CSV file? Click **New List** on Home, then drop or select your file (Excel, CSV, JSON, TXT or TSV, up to 100 MB). Pick the worksheet if it is an Excel file, check the preview and the detected field types, name the list and click **Create List**. A file import costs credits. #### Which file formats can I import? Excel (.xlsx, .xlsm, .xls), CSV, TSV, TXT and JSON, up to 100 MB per file. You can also load a file from a direct link or a Google Sheets share link, or connect a tool such as Google Sheets, HubSpot or Attio directly — see "Which apps can I connect?". #### Can I just drop a file onto the Home page? Yes — dropping a supported file (.csv, .xlsx, .xls or .json) anywhere on the Home page takes you straight into the New List wizard with that file already attached; you don't have to click New List first. You do need to be signed in. #### How many contacts can I import? As many as the workspace owner's record limit still has room for, counted across all lists in every workspace they own — Basic up to 25,000 (of which 5,000 stay editable), Pro 100,000, Premium 1,000,000 — and at most 50,000 in one list; the wizard imports the first 50,000 rows and says so. See "What is the record limit?" for what happens when a file is larger than your remaining capacity. #### Why does the import ask about field types? ListPlus needs to know what each column holds — email, first name, company, phone and so on — because checks and enrichment depend on it. AI recognises this automatically during every import; you can adjust the detected types in the preview afterwards, or skip the AI step with the **Skip AI Enhancement** button when it's offered. #### Does the import remove duplicates? No, files are imported as they are. Run the duplicate checks in the list afterwards to find and merge duplicates by email, phone, LinkedIn URL or name and company, or use **Consolidate Lists** on Home to merge several lists into one with duplicate detection. #### Can I paste contacts instead of uploading a file? Not in the import wizard. Paste notes, signatures or a small table into the **Inbox** (in Flows) instead and click **Recognize contacts** (it costs credits per run); a table with more than 10 rows and at least 3 columns is offered as **Import as list** instead, opening this same wizard with the table pre-loaded. Inbox entries — recognized or not — expire after 14 days unless you save the people or add them to a list. #### Can I import contacts from LinkedIn? Yes, through the **Collect from LinkedIn** tiles in the wizard: Sales Navigator, Company employees, Keyword search (profiles), or the people who reacted to or commented on a post. These imports deliver names, job titles, companies and LinkedIn URLs but no email addresses — you add those with enrichment afterwards; ListPlus never uses your own LinkedIn account. To start, your balance must cover the maximum cost; the base fee (Sales Navigator, Company employees) is charged when the import starts; the per-person part is charged for the rows actually delivered. #### What are the ways to create my first list? With no lists yet, the Lists page shows "Start your first list." with six ways: Import a file, From Segment Search, From AI Research, From your watchlist, Connect an app, and Empty list. A file import costs credits, an empty list costs no credits, and the finders charge for their searches as usual. To just look around first, click Open a sample list on the same page. #### Which workspace does a new list go into? Every new list — imported, created empty or added from a finder — is created in the workspace that is active when you create it, and every member of that workspace can see and edit it. Check the workspace name in the Home page header before importing, and switch there if needed. Lists can't be moved between workspaces afterwards, only exported and imported again. #### Can I start a list with no data at all? Yes — click **Start without data** in the wizard, pick a template (Contacts, Companies, HubSpot, Outbound or Custom structure), adjust the columns if you like, name the list and click **Create list**. The list opens with an empty row, ready to fill. This is free; fill it later with an import, a finder or enrichment. --- ## File import details (encoding, sheets, JSON shapes, size limit) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-file-details Last updated: 2026-10-17 This article covers the technical details behind a file import — what happens automatically, and what you can adjust. For the step-by-step import flow, see "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)." ### Encoding and delimiters are automatic ListPlus detects your file's character encoding automatically (falling back through UTF-8, ISO-8859-1 and Windows-1252 if needed), so accented or non-Latin characters from older exports come through correctly without you choosing an encoding. For CSV, TSV and TXT files, the delimiter (comma, semicolon, tab or pipe) is also detected automatically — there's no manual picker for either setting. ### Excel: picking a sheet or table If your Excel file (.xlsx, .xlsm, .xls) has more than one worksheet with data, or more than one named table, a **Select a Table or Worksheet** step lists them so you can pick which one to import. With a single sheet, it's imported directly. If a worksheet has no named tables, a note says the entire sheet will be imported; a worksheet with no data is flagged as empty so you don't end up with a list that has no columns. ### JSON shapes ListPlus understands The straightforward case is a JSON array of objects, one object per row — that's what ListPlus expects by default. It also handles a few looser shapes: a plain array of values (each value becomes a row in a `value` column, plus an `original_index` column), an array that is at least 80% objects (the objects are imported, the rest skipped), and a single JSON object with an array of objects as one of its top-level properties (the first such array is imported). A JSON value with no array at the top level, such as a single flat object, can't be turned into a list. ### Size limit and formats Every file type — Excel, CSV, TSV, TXT and JSON — is limited to 100 MB, checked as soon as you select the file, both in your browser and on the server. One list holds at most 50,000 rows: a larger file is cut to 50,000 with a warning, and you import the rest into a second list. Your plan's overall record limit applies on top (see "What is the record limit?"). ### Dropping a file, and skipping a column Dropping a .csv, .xlsx, .xls or .json file anywhere on the Home page jumps straight into the New List wizard with that file attached — an unsupported file type shows "Please select a CSV, Excel, or JSON file" instead. In the preview step, if you don't want a column imported, click the three-dot (**⋯**) button in that column's header and choose **Ignore column** — the column is left out of the list ListPlus creates. **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · record-limit · column-detection · linkedin-imports. ### FAQ #### Do I need to tell ListPlus my file's character encoding? No — ListPlus detects the encoding automatically (falling back through UTF-8, ISO-8859-1 and Windows-1252), so there's no manual setting to get wrong on older exports with accented characters. #### Does ListPlus know which delimiter my CSV or TSV file uses? Yes, it detects the delimiter — comma, semicolon, tab or pipe — automatically from the file; TXT files are parsed the same way as CSV and TSV. #### My Excel file has multiple tabs — which one gets imported? If your file has more than one worksheet with data, or more than one named table, a **Select a Table or Worksheet** step lets you pick which one to import; with a single sheet, it's imported directly, and if no named tables are found, the whole sheet is imported instead. #### What happens if I try to import an empty worksheet? ListPlus flags it as an empty worksheet so you're not left with a list that has no columns; pick a different sheet or table in the same step. #### What JSON structure can I import? A JSON array of objects — one object per row — is the standard shape. ListPlus also accepts a single object with an array of objects at the top level (it imports the first one) and an array that is at least 80% objects (the objects are imported, the rest skipped); a JSON value with no array at the top level can't become a list. #### Is there a file size limit for imports? Yes, 100 MB per file, for every supported format (Excel, CSV, TSV, TXT and JSON) — checked as soon as you select the file. One list holds at most 50,000 rows, so a larger file is cut to 50,000 with a warning — import the rest into a second list. Your plan's overall record limit applies on top. #### Which files can I drop onto the Home page? Dropping onto Home accepts .csv, .xlsx, .xls and .json files. For .xlsm, .tsv or .txt files, click **New List** and choose the file under **Import a file**. Dropping them on Home shows "Please select a CSV, Excel, or JSON file". #### How do I stop one column from being imported? In the preview step, click the three-dot (**⋯**) button in that column's header and choose **Ignore column** — it's left out of the list ListPlus creates, and the rest of your file imports normally. --- ## How column type detection works Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/column-detection Last updated: 2026-10-15 When you import a file, ListPlus uses AI to work out what each column actually holds — email, first name, company, job title, phone and more — instead of leaving every column as plain text. This matters because checks and enrichment look for specific column types (an email check needs to know which column is the email column), so getting the type right up front saves manual fixing later. ### Why it runs Checks, enrichment and finder features all look up columns by what they contain, not by their header name — a header called "E-Mail", "Mail" or "Contact" is still recognized as the email column. Column detection is what makes that recognition possible, so it runs automatically on every import, right after you pick your file and before you click **Create List**. There is no way to turn it off in advance. ### What you see In the preview step, click **Configure field types** below the preview to review and correct the detected types before you click **Create List**. A **Skip AI Enhancement** button only appears if the detection is unavailable or fails — it is not a way to opt out of the cost, since it only shows up when the step can't run anyway. For exactly what data this step sends to the AI, see "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)." ### Cost Detection is billed by AI usage, the same metered way as AI commands — there is no fixed credit amount shown up front. It is separate from the charge for the import itself; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for both prices and for how AI usage is billed. ### Fixing a wrong type later If a column was detected wrong, or you change your mind after import, click **Set up** in the list header (or **⋯** menu → **List Settings...**) and open **Columns**. Each column has a **Content Type** dropdown (email, phone, company, job title and more) and a **Data Type** dropdown (string, number, boolean, date, lookup). Click **Apply Changes** to save; the list reloads with the new types, with no re-import needed. **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · import-file-details · what-the-ai-sees · price-list. ### FAQ #### What does column type detection actually do? It looks at your file's headers and a sample of real values to work out what each column holds — email, first name, last name, company, phone, job title, country and more — instead of treating every column as plain text. Checks, enrichment and finders then use those types to find the right column automatically, regardless of your header wording. #### Does column detection run every time I import a file? Yes, on every import, automatically, right after you choose your file and before you create the list — there's no setting to turn it off in advance. Click Configure field types in the preview step to review and correct the detected types before clicking Create List. #### What happens if I click Skip AI Enhancement? The button only appears when the column analysis is unavailable or fails for that import. Skipping creates the list with your columns as plain text; you can set each column's type later under Set up → Columns in the list. #### The AI got a column type wrong — how do I fix it? Click the Set up icon next to the list's name, open Columns, pick the correct Content Type for that column and click Apply Changes. #### Why does it matter if a column's type is correct? Checks and enrichment look up columns by their type, not by header name — an email check needs to know which column is the email column, whatever it's called. A wrong or missing type means those features won't find the data, even though it's visibly there in the grid. #### What column types can ListPlus recognize? Common ones include email, first name, last name, full name, phone, company, job title, country, city, state, postal code, gender, domain, website, LinkedIn URL and industry. Columns that don't match a known type are left as plain text and can still be typed manually under Set up → Columns. --- ## Importing from a URL or a Google Sheets link Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-from-url Last updated: 2026-10-10 Instead of uploading a file, you can point ListPlus at a direct link to a CSV, Excel or JSON file, or at a public Google Sheets link. ### How it works On the New List page, click **Load from URL** below the file drop area, paste the link, and click **Load data**. ListPlus fetches the file, then takes you through the same preview, field-type check and naming steps as a regular file import — see "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)" for that part. Your credit balance is checked before the import starts, and you'll see an error if it isn't enough. ### Google Sheets links Paste the sheet's share link directly — ListPlus tries to read it without you downloading anything first. The sheet must be shared as "Anyone with the link can view," or the load fails; see "[Import problems](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/import-problems)" for the exact error and how to fix the sharing setting or download the file instead. **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · import-problems · empty-list-and-templates. ### FAQ #### How do I import data from a URL instead of uploading a file? On the New List page, click **Load from URL** below the file drop area, paste a direct link to your CSV, Excel or JSON file (or a public Google Sheets link), and click **Load data**. You'll then see the same preview and field-type steps as a normal file import. #### Where do I find the "Load from URL" option? It's on the New List page, as a link below the file upload area, next to "Import a file." Click **New List** on Home to get there. #### Can I import a public Google Sheets link? Yes, paste the sheet's share link directly into the URL field. The sheet must be shared as "Anyone with the link can view" — see "[Import problems](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/import-problems)" for what happens and how to fix it if it isn't. #### What file types can I load from a URL? Direct links to CSV, Excel (.xlsx, .xls) or JSON files, plus public Google Sheets links. #### Does importing from a URL cost credits? Yes — it costs the same as importing a file you upload, charged when the list is created (the amount is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). If your balance isn't enough, you'll see an error and can top up credits before trying again. #### What happens after ListPlus loads my data from a URL? You get the same preview, field-type detection and list-naming steps as a regular file import — see "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)" for details on that flow. --- ## Starting without data: templates and column sets Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/empty-list-and-templates Last updated: 2026-10-15 Clicking **Start without data** (top right on the New List page) skips import entirely — pick a template for a ready-made set of columns, or start from a blank structure and pick your own. Before you have any lists, the Lists page offers the same path as **Empty list** → **Create list** under "Ways to your first list". The new list is created in your active workspace. ### Templates Three templates are shown up front: **Contacts** (a full CRM-quality record — person, company and location fields), **Outbound** (campaign-ready fields: email, LinkedIn, phone plus the ICP data used to target leads) and **Companies** (company profile and firmographic fields). Click **More templates** for **HubSpot** (contact and status fields matching HubSpot's own properties) and **Custom structure**, which starts with no columns and opens the column picker immediately. ### Customizing the columns Every template pre-selects a set of columns, grouped as Person, Contact, Company, Location and Other details. Click **Customize columns** to check or uncheck any of them, search for and add a column from the full catalogue (dozens of types across categories like social, marketing, sales and more), or click **Show all columns** to browse the whole catalogue by category. You can rename, add or remove columns again at any time after the list is created — see "[Adding and managing columns](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/columns-formulas-ai-columns)." ### Naming and creating The list name auto-fills from the template (e.g. "My contacts," "Outbound campaign") but you can edit it before clicking **Create list**. ### "How do you want to fill this list?" A list that has columns but no records yet opens with this question and four cards: - **Manual — Enter data yourself** (**Open table**): opens the table with one empty row, ready for typing or pasting rows. - **AI research — Let AI find contacts** (**Start research**): opens AI Research with this list already chosen as the place the hits go. Describe who you're looking for; matching people land straight in the list. Research costs credits as usual — see "[AI Research](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/ai-research)". - **Form — Collect with a form** (**Create form**): opens the list's **Set up** page on the **Form** section and creates the list's own form, to share as a link or embed in your website. Free — see "[List forms: collect contacts with your own form](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-forms)". - **Webhook — Receive from a tool** (**Get the webhook URL**): opens the list's **Set up** page on the **Webhook** section, where **Create webhook** gives the list its own address for a form, Zapier, n8n or Make. Free; the fields land in the matching columns automatically — see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". The screen comes back each time you open the list until it holds data. You can also still import a file into a new list, or add contacts from a finder. To let an AI agent work on the list, set up the list's API connection instead: **More** → **Automation** in the list header (see "[Give an AI agent access to one list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-connection-overview)"). ### Cost Starting a list this way is free — only file, connected-tool and LinkedIn imports are billed. **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · columns-formulas-ai-columns · sample-list · list-webhooks · ai-research. ### FAQ #### What templates can I choose from when starting without data? Contacts, Outbound and Companies are shown up front; click **More templates** for HubSpot and **Custom structure** (no preset columns). Each pre-selects a set of columns you can adjust before creating the list. #### What's the difference between the Contacts and Outbound templates? Contacts is a full CRM-style record with person, company and location fields. Outbound is trimmed to what a campaign needs — email, LinkedIn, phone and the firmographic fields used for targeting, like industry and company size. #### What does the HubSpot template include? Contact fields (email, name, company, job title, phone, city, country) plus HubSpot-specific fields like lead status, lifecycle stage and owner, matching HubSpot's own properties. #### What is "Custom structure"? A blank starting point with no preset columns — choosing it opens the column picker right away so you build your own set from the full catalogue. #### Can I change which columns are included before I create the list? Yes — click **Customize columns** to check or uncheck any of the template's columns, search the catalogue to add more, or click **Show all columns** to browse every available column type by category. #### Does starting a list without data cost credits? No, it's free. Only importing a file, connecting a tool, or a LinkedIn import charges credits. #### Where do I start an empty list? On the New List page (New List button on Home), click Start without data (top right). If you have no lists yet, the Lists page also shows Empty list with a Create list button under "Ways to your first list", which opens the same template step. Either way it is free, and the list is created in your active workspace. #### Can I just start with a blank list and add my own rows? Yes — pick **Custom structure**, choose your columns, name the list and click **Create list**. On the "How do you want to fill this list?" screen click **Enter data yourself** (**Open table**): the table opens with one empty row, and you add more rows and type or paste your data in directly. #### What are the options under "How do you want to fill this list?" A list with columns but no records offers four cards. Enter data yourself opens the table for typing or pasting, Let AI find contacts starts AI Research with this list preset as the target for the hits (research costs credits), Collect with a form creates the list's own form to share as a link or embed in your website (free), and Receive from a tool opens the Webhook section of the list's Set up page so a form, Zapier, n8n or Make can send records to it for free. #### Where did the "AI Agent" card on an empty list go? The empty-list screen now offers Manual, AI research, Form and Webhook instead. Agent access is still included on every plan: the workspace owner or an admin opens the list, clicks More in the list header, then Automation, and clicks Set up agent access. --- ## List forms: collect contacts with your own form Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-forms Last updated: 2026-10-11 Every list can have its own **form**: a small public page whose fields are columns of the list. You send its link around or embed it in your website, and what people enter lands in the list — in the right columns, with duplicates merged, ready for the list's checks, triggers and pipelines. You don't need a separate form tool. It is part of every plan and uses no credits — except the optional business card scan, which uses AI. A form is for people who type their details themselves. If a tool sends the records (Typeform, Zapier, n8n, your own code), use the list's webhook instead — see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". ### Creating the form A list has at most one form. Anyone who can edit the list can create it: - **In the list:** click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name (the two sliders) → **Form**. Opening the section creates the form as a **Draft**. - **On a list without records:** the card **Form — Collect with a form** (**Create form**) opens the same section. The draft starts with the fields that matter most, as far as the list has columns for them: **E-mail** (required), **First name**, **Last name** and **Company**. On the right, **Preview** shows the form exactly as your visitors will see it; every change shows there at once and saves by itself. A reference list that is refreshed from its source takes no data and has no form. ### Draft, Test, Publish Next to the heading you see the form's state and its actions: - **Draft** — the form exists but is not public. Its link shows visitors that the form is closed. - **Test** opens the draft in a new tab, for you only. What you send there lands in your list like a real entry, so you can try the whole way. - **Publish** makes the form public. The **Share** card appears at the top with the link and the embed code. - **Published** — **Open** shows the public form, **Pause** closes it: the link stays, visitors see that the form is closed. **Publish again** opens it. Changes you make after publishing are live at once. ### Sharing it The **Share** card (after publishing): - **Link to the form:** copy it and send it by e-mail, post it, or turn it into a QR code. - **Embed in your website:** copy the code and paste it where the form should appear. The embedded form adjusts its height by itself and has no page background of its own. - **Where an entry came from:** add `?source=…` to the link (for example `?source=newsletter` or `?source=booth-qr`); `utm_source`, `utm_medium`, `utm_campaign`, `utm_term` and `utm_content` work the same way. The value is kept with the record — in a column of that name if the list has one. An embedded form reads these from the address of the page it sits in, and also keeps that page's address as `page`. ### What should visitors fill in? Each field fills one column of the list. The card lists the fields with **Required** or **Optional**. Click a field (or **⋯ → Edit field**) to change its **label**, its kind — **Text**, **Long text** or **Choice** (type the choices separated by commas) — and whether it is required. The **⋯** menu also moves a field up or down and removes it. **+ Add field** offers the list's other columns, or **New column …**, which creates the column in the list and adds it to the form in one step. A form has at most 20 fields. The fewer fields, the more people complete a form. Ask only what you need from the person — enrichment can add company, job title and more later. If a column is deleted or renamed later, the field stays in the form and shows "The column … no longer exists"; what people enter there is kept with the record instead of in a column. ### What does the form say? **Heading**, **Introduction**, **Button text**, and what visitors see **After sending** (a title and a text). **Thank-you page** under the preview shows that text without sending anything. ### Look - **Match my website:** enter your website's address and click the button. ListPlus reads the accent colour, background, text colour, the corners of your buttons and your logo, and picks the one of its fonts that comes closest to yours. It is a suggestion: check the preview and adjust what doesn't fit. Your website's own font files are not copied or loaded. - **Ready-made designs:** Light, Dark, Warm, Fresh. - **Adjust colours and font:** accent colour, background, text colour, font (System, Inter, Poppins, Nunito, Lora), corners, and the address of a logo image. The fonts are served by ListPlus itself; a form loads nothing from a font service. ### Privacy What a form has to say about data protection depends on the country and on what you do with the entries, so you choose: - **Show a privacy notice** (on by default) — a line of text under the fields, with a link to your privacy policy if you enter one. Untick it for no line at all. - **Visitors must agree (required checkbox)** — the visitor has to tick a box before sending. The record then keeps `consent: yes` and the time (`consent_at`). You can change the text. ListPlus does not give legal advice; if you are unsure what your form needs, ask your legal counsel. ### What happens to an entry An entry goes the same way as a record sent to the list's webhook: - It lands in the list. If it matches an existing record (e-mail, LinkedIn, phone, name + company), it fills that record's empty fields instead of adding a duplicate. - The list's checks, triggers and pipelines run for it like for any new record. - Under **More settings → Check conspicuous submissions first** you can have invalid, disposable and test addresses, or spam and test entries (AI check), wait in the **Inbox** for your decision instead. Both are off by default. Matches of your Block list and entries the list can't take (plan limit) are always held there. - A hidden trap field catches simple bots: what fills it is dropped silently. A submission sent faster than 2 seconds after the page opened is dropped silently too, and a page left open for more than 24 hours asks the visitor to reload and send again. **Recent submissions** at the bottom of the section shows what came in. ### Limits - Entries count against the same daily limit as the list webhooks of your workspace: **100** a day on Basic, **5,000** on Pro, **50,000** on Premium. When the limit is reached, the form tells visitors it is closed at the moment; it opens again the next day (UTC). - One visitor can send a form 5 times a minute. - "Powered by ListPlus" is shown under the form on Basic; on Pro and Premium you can switch it off under **More settings**. ### More settings - **Language of the form** (English, German, Spanish): a new form starts in the language you use ListPlus in. Switching it changes the notes the form shows by itself ("Please fill in this field") and every text you haven't changed — heading, button, thank-you text, consent text and the labels of the standard fields. What you wrote yourself stays as written. - **Open your own thank-you page:** visitors go to this address after sending instead of seeing the thank-you text. - **Check conspicuous submissions first** and **Show "Powered by ListPlus"** — see above. - **Delete form** removes the link, the embedded form and the settings. The records in the list stay. ### Scan business card Switch on **Scan business card** in the form's settings and the form gets a **Scan business card** button above its fields. On a phone it opens the camera; on a computer you choose a photo. The card is read by AI and the form's fields are filled in — the visitor checks them and sends the form as usual; nothing is sent by the scan itself. - A field is filled by what its column holds (first name, e-mail, company …), not by its label. - What is on the card but not asked for by the form (a mobile number, the website, the address) is shown under the fields and kept with the record's extra data. It is not written into a column. - The photo is used for this one reading and is not stored. - Each scan is an AI call paid from the credits of the list's workspace, by usage (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). A visitor can scan a limited number of cards per day, and a form has a daily limit too. Without credits, or when the workspace has switched off its AI features, the form says the scanner is not available; the form itself keeps working. **Related topics:** list-webhooks · list-settings · empty-list-and-templates · inbox · list-triggers · record-limit · plans-and-pricing. ### FAQ #### Can I create a form in ListPlus without a separate form tool? Yes. Every list can have its own form: in the list, click the Set up icon next to its name and open Form — a draft with E-mail, First name, Last name and Company (as far as the list has these columns) is ready. Click Publish and share it as a link or embed it in your website; it is free on every plan and uses no credits. #### How do I share a list form or put it on my website? In the list's Set up page, open Form and click Publish; the Share card then appears at the top. Copy "Link to the form" to send it by e-mail, post it or turn it into a QR code, or copy the code under "Embed in your website" and paste it where the form should appear on your site. The embedded form adjusts its height by itself. #### How do I add or change the fields of a list form? Each field fills one column of the list: under "What should visitors fill in?" click a field to change its label, make it Required or choose Text, Long text or Choice, and use the "..." menu to move or remove it. "Add field" offers the list's other columns, and "New column …" creates a column and adds it in one step. A form has at most 20 fields. #### Can a list form use the colours and logo of my website? Yes. Under Look, enter your website's address and click "Match my website": ListPlus suggests its accent colour, background, text colour, corners and logo plus the closest of its fonts, which you check in the preview. You can also pick a ready-made design (Light, Dark, Warm, Fresh) or set everything by hand under "Adjust colours and font". #### Does a list form use my website's font? It uses the closest of ListPlus's own fonts (Inter, Poppins, Nunito, Lora or the system font), which ListPlus serves itself. Your website's font files are not copied, and the form loads nothing from a font service. #### Does a list form need a consent checkbox? That depends on your country and on what you do with the entries, so you choose under Privacy: "Show a privacy notice" (a line of text with an optional link to your privacy policy — on by default, untick it for no line) and "Visitors must agree (required checkbox)", which the visitor must tick; the record then keeps the consent and its time. ListPlus does not give legal advice — ask your legal counsel if you are unsure. #### What happens to an entry sent through a list form? It lands in the list in the columns of its fields. If it matches an existing record (e-mail, LinkedIn, phone, name + company), it fills that record's empty fields instead of adding a duplicate. The list's checks, triggers and pipelines run for it like for any new record. #### How do I test a list form before it goes public? A new form is a draft: its link shows visitors that the form is closed. Click Test next to the section's heading to open the draft in a new tab, for you only; what you send there lands in your list like a real entry. When it works, click Publish. #### How do I see where a form entry came from? Add ?source=… to the form's link, for example ?source=newsletter; utm_source, utm_medium, utm_campaign, utm_term and utm_content work the same way. The value is kept with the record, in a column of that name if the list has one. An embedded form reads these from the address of the page it sits in and also keeps that page's address. #### Does a list form protect against spam? A hidden trap field drops simple bots silently, a submission sent faster than 2 seconds after the page opened is dropped silently too, a page left open for more than 24 hours asks the visitor to reload and send again, and one visitor can send a form 5 times a minute. Under More settings → "Check conspicuous submissions first" you can also have invalid, disposable and test addresses, or spam and test entries (AI check), wait in the Inbox for your decision; both are off by default. There is no CAPTCHA. #### What are the limits of a list form, and does it cost credits? A form is part of every plan and uses no credits; only the optional business card scan uses AI and is billed by usage. Entries count against the same daily limit as your workspace's list webhooks: 100 a day on Basic, 5,000 on Pro and 50,000 on Premium. When the limit is reached, visitors see that the form is closed at the moment; it opens again the next day (UTC). #### Can a list form scan a business card? Yes — switch on "Scan business card" in the form's settings; the form then has a button that opens the camera on a phone, reads the card with AI and fills in the fields for the visitor to check and send. What the form does not ask for (mobile number, website, address) is kept with the record's extra data, and the photo is not stored. Each scan costs credits by AI usage, paid by the list's workspace. #### Can I remove "Powered by ListPlus" from a list form? On Pro and Premium, yes: switch it off under More settings in the Form section. On Basic the line is always shown. #### How do I pause or delete a list form? Pause, next to the section's heading, closes a published form: the link stays and visitors see that the form is closed; Publish again opens it. "Delete form" under More settings removes the link, the embedded form and its settings; the records in the list stay. #### Can a list have more than one form? No, a list has one form. To tell several places apart — your website, a newsletter, a booth — use the same form with a different ?source=… at the end of the link. --- ## App events: let a tool you use fill a list or the Inbox Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/app-events Last updated: 2026-10-15 An **app event** is something that happens in a tool you already use — a message in a Slack channel, a new Typeform answer, a Calendly booking — and arrives in ListPlus by itself. You pick the app and the event; there is no address to copy and nothing to build. One app event has one destination, and the destination is the place you set it up in: - **In a list** → what arrives becomes a record of that list. - **In the Inbox** → what arrives becomes an Inbox entry for you to look at. If you would rather send records from your own automation (Zapier, Make, n8n, your own code), use a list webhook instead — see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". ### Setting one up - **For a list:** open the list, click **Set up** next to its name and choose **App events**. (A list that already has one also appears in the Flows column under **Lists with their own way in**.) - **For the Inbox:** open **Flows** in the left navigation; in the column, under **Comes in**, click **App events** below Inbox. (With an empty Inbox, the Inbox page also shows App events as its first card.) Click **Add app event**. The dialog asks one thing after the other, and each choice folds into a line you can change: 1. **App** — Slack, Typeform, Calendly, Tally, Jotform, Webflow or Gmail; **Another app …** searches the other apps. 2. **Account** — the connected account to use, or connect one. With only one account for the app this step is skipped. 3. **Event** — what should arrive, for example "New Message In Channels". **Show all events** lists the app's other events. The event names come from the app's connector and are in English. 4. **Settings** — what the event needs, for example the Slack channel or the form. 5. **Preview** — the latest event as it will arrive: as an Inbox entry, or with its fields and the columns they go to. If the tool has nothing to show yet, the preview says so. Nothing arrives and nothing is charged until you click **Activate**. Closing the dialog before that discards the setup. Events from before the moment you activate are not brought in. ### What arrives in a list **A finished record** — a form answer, a booking, a new contact: its fields are placed in the list's columns the way a list webhook places them. Known names (email, first name, company …) go to their column, names ListPlus has not seen before are placed by AI once and remembered, and fields without a column are kept with the record. A record that matches an existing one fills that record's empty fields instead of adding a duplicate. **A message** — a Slack message, an e-mail: it has no fields, so it is read for contacts first. Every message becomes an Inbox entry; if it names a contact, ListPlus recognizes it, and whoever comes with **enough to work with** — an e-mail address, a LinkedIn profile, or a name with a company — is added to the list by itself. The entry then shows where the contact went. Anything else — a message that names nobody, a name without a company — stays in the Inbox as an entry for you, where you can recognize or complete it by hand. In the list, your triggers run for these records like for any other new record — so a lead someone reports in Slack can be enriched and passed on by a pipeline without anyone touching it. ### What arrives in the Inbox A message becomes an entry with its text, the channel and the sender; any other event is kept whole. From there it is an Inbox entry like any other: you click **Recognize contacts** and decide what happens with them. The Inbox itself never adds contacts to a list by itself. ### Reporting leads in Slack — an example 1. Create a Slack channel, for example #leads, and a list "Reported leads". 2. In the list: **Set up** → **App events** → **Add app event** → **Slack** → **New Message In Channels** → choose the channel → **Activate**. 3. A colleague writes "Ralf Hertneck, CloudValues" in the channel. 4. The contact appears in the list. A trigger "a record is new in the list" with the action Enrich can fill its missing fields, and a second trigger can send the enriched contact on, for example to your CRM. **Condition.** If the channel carries more than leads — or tools post into it — enter a text under **Condition**, for example a code word: only messages that contain it arrive, and the others are neither delivered nor charged. Upper and lower case count. Without a condition every message of the channel arrives. Replies in threads are never read for a list. Bot messages can be left out in the event's settings (**More settings**); leave them in if a tool posts your leads. ### The list of your app events Each app event is a line with the app, the event, its setting, when something last arrived, how many events arrived in the last 24 hours and its state. The **⋯** menu has **Pause**, **Resume** and **Remove**. Pausing stops the tool from delivering, so nothing is charged while paused; removing also takes the event down in the tool's connector. What already arrived stays. An app event can stop by itself and say so: **Stopped: no credits** or **Stopped: plan no longer covers it**. Top up or change the plan, then click **Resume**. ### Plan, price and limits - **Plan:** app events use a connected tool, so they need **Pro** or Premium, like every connected tool. - **Price:** every event received costs credits — also a record that is merged into an existing one or held back, because the delivery happened. For a message that is meant for a list, recognizing its contacts costs credits on top, only when the message names a contact. Setting up, the preview and a paused app event cost nothing. The amounts are in the price list ("What does an app event cost?"). - **Limits:** up to 120 events per minute per app event; an event of up to 256 KB. Records that go into a list have a daily limit per workspace: 5,000 on Pro and 50,000 on Premium (the same amounts as for list webhooks, counted separately). An event the list or the Inbox cannot take because a limit is reached is not charged. **Related topics:** list-webhooks · inbox · send-to-inbox-from-tools · recognition-and-review · price-list · connect-crm-and-sheets. ### FAQ #### What is an app event? Something that happens in a tool you use — a Slack message, a new form answer, a booking — and arrives in ListPlus by itself. You choose the app and the event; there is no address to copy and no automation to build. Set up in a list it becomes a record of that list, set up in the Inbox it becomes an Inbox entry. #### How do I set up an app event? For a list, open it, click Set up and choose App events; for the Inbox, open Flows in the left navigation and click App events under Comes in. Click Add app event, choose the app, the account, the event and its settings, check the preview and click Activate. Nothing arrives or is charged before you activate. #### Which apps can I connect as an app event? Slack, Typeform, Calendly, Tally, Jotform, Webflow and Gmail are offered first, with events ListPlus has checked. Another app … searches the other apps; their events arrive as records whose fields are placed automatically, without ListPlus having checked each one. Google Sheets' "new row" event is not offered first because it sends no column names. #### Can a Slack message add a contact to a list automatically? Yes — add the app event in the list (Set up → App events → Slack → New Message In Channels) and choose the channel. Each message is read for contacts; whoever comes with an e-mail address, a LinkedIn profile, or a name with a company is added to the list by itself. A message that names nobody, or a name without a company, stays in the Inbox as an entry for you. #### Can I limit a Slack channel to certain messages? Yes — enter a text under Condition when you set the app event up, for example a code word. Only messages that contain exactly this text arrive (upper and lower case count); the others are neither delivered nor charged. Leave the condition empty and every message of the channel arrives. #### What counts as "enough" for a contact to be added automatically? An e-mail address, a LinkedIn profile, or a name together with a company. With that the list — and an enrichment after it — can find the person again. A first name alone, a name without a company, or only a company is not enough: the message stays in the Inbox as an entry, where you can recognize or complete it by hand. #### Does an app event cost credits? Yes: every event received costs credits when it arrives, also when the record is merged into an existing one or held back. For a message that is meant for a list, recognizing its contacts costs credits on top, only when the message names a contact. Setting up, the preview and a paused app event cost nothing; the amounts are in the price list. #### Which plan do I need for app events? Pro or Premium. App events use a connected tool, and connected tools are not part of Basic. If the plan no longer covers an app event it stops and shows "Stopped: plan no longer covers it"; after changing the plan, click Resume. #### Do I have to map the fields of an app event to my columns? No. Fields are placed the way a list webhook places them: known names go to their column, names ListPlus has not seen are placed by AI once and remembered for that app event, and fields without a column are kept with the record. The preview shows where the latest event's fields go before you activate. #### Does an app event create duplicates? No. A record that matches an existing one — by e-mail, LinkedIn, phone, or name and company — fills that record's empty fields instead of being added again. This also applies to contacts recognized in a message. #### Are older messages or form answers brought in when I activate? No, only what happens after you click Activate arrives. The preview may show the latest existing event so you can see what will come, but it is not added. To bring in what is already there, import it once. #### Why did an app event stop? Because the workspace ran out of credits or the plan no longer includes connected tools; ListPlus then asks the tool to stop delivering, so nothing more is charged, and the line shows the reason. Top up or change the plan, then choose Resume in the app event's ⋯ menu. Events that happened while it was stopped are not brought in afterwards. #### How do I pause or remove an app event? Open the ⋯ menu on its line and choose Pause, Resume or Remove. Pausing stops the tool from delivering: nothing is charged while paused, and what happens meanwhile is not brought in later. Removing deletes the app event for good; records and Inbox entries that already arrived stay. #### What is the difference between an app event and a list webhook? An app event needs no setup in the other tool: you pick the app and the event in ListPlus. It costs credits per event and needs Pro. A list webhook is an address you paste into a form tool, Zapier, Make, n8n or your own code; it is free on every plan, and you build the sending yourself. #### Do triggers and pipelines run for records from an app event? Yes. A record that arrives through an app event is a new record of the list like any other, so triggers such as "a record is new in the list" run and can hand it to a pipeline — for example to enrich it and pass it on to your CRM or a Slack channel. --- ## List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every list can have its own **webhook**: a private URL that a form, Zapier, Make, n8n or your own code sends records to. Every record lands in the list, in the matching columns, and the list's own checks show what is wrong with it. If you like, doubtful records wait in the **Inbox** for your decision first — that is an option per webhook, off by default. It is free on every plan and uses no credits. If the records come from a tool ListPlus can connect to directly — Typeform, Calendly, Tally, Jotform, Webflow, a Slack channel — you don't need a webhook at all: see "[App events: let a tool you use fill a list or the Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/app-events)". A list webhook is for structured records (JSON) that belong in one particular list and that you send yourself. Forwarded emails, PDFs and pasted text still go to the Inbox itself — see "[Sending into the Inbox from n8n, Zapier, Shortcuts, scripts and email](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/send-to-inbox-from-tools)". ### Creating the webhook A list has at most one webhook. Anyone who can edit the list can create it, in two places: - **In the list:** click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name (the two sliders; the **⋯** menu → **List Settings...** opens the same page) → **Webhook** → **Create webhook**. - **On a list without records:** under "How do you want to fill this list?", click the **Receive from a tool** card (**Get the webhook URL**). It opens Set up on the Webhook section. The Inbox no longer creates list webhooks: it points you to the list's **Set up**. You then see the URL with a **Copy** button, the status (**Active** or **Paused**) and a counter such as "Today 14 / 100". Treat the URL like a password: anyone who has it can send records to this list. A reference list that refreshes automatically from its source can't have a webhook — it takes its records from the source only ("This list is refreshed from its source and takes no data here."). ### What to send Send a **POST** request with JSON: one object per record, or an array of objects for several records at once. The **How to set up your tool** section of the panel has a tab for each case: - **Fields** — a JSON template built from this list's own columns. With these field names every value lands in its column right away. - **curl** — the same body as a ready command for a terminal. - **n8n** — add an "HTTP Request" node, choose "Import cURL" and paste the command from the curl tab. - **Zapier · Make** — Zapier: the "Webhooks by Zapier" action with "POST"; Make: the "HTTP" module with "Make a request". Paste the URL, choose JSON and add the fields from the Fields tab. - **Typeform · Calendly** — paste the URL as a webhook in Typeform ("Connect" → "Webhooks"), or point a Calendly webhook for "invitee.created" at it. These tools send their own format; ListPlus reads the answers, and the question's title becomes the field name. Click **Send test** to check the setup: it sends the template as a dry run and tells you how many fields would be placed. Nothing is written to the list. ### How fields find their columns There is no mapping step. The list knows what its columns are (email, first name, company …), so common field names in English, German, French and Spanish are placed on their own — `email`, `E-Mail`, `first_name`, `Vorname`, `company`. A field name ListPlus has never seen is looked at by AI once per webhook, and the answer is remembered, so the same form never asks twice. A full-name field fills the first-name and last-name columns when the list has no full-name column. A field without a matching column is **not lost**: its value stays with the record. After the first call, the **Mapping** section lists every field that arrived, with an example value and the column it goes to. There you can pick another column, choose **No column**, or pick **+ Create as column** to add a column named like the field. A change applies to the records that arrive from then on. ### What happens to a record By default **every record goes into the list**. The webhook doesn't judge your leads: the list's own checks in **Analyze** flag an invalid email, a placeholder or a test entry like in any other list, and an evaluation shows which records are ready, enrichable or unusable (see "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)"). - **New records** are added. Triggers on the list act on them like on any new record, so webhook → list → trigger → pipeline works. - **Duplicates** are merged: a record that matches an existing one by email, LinkedIn URL, phone or name + company fills that record's empty fields instead of adding a second row. Two things are **always held back** in the Inbox instead, whatever you set: - records that match your workspace's **Block list** ("On the block list"); - records the list can't take: "Plan's record limit reached" (the workspace is over its plan's record limit — see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)"), "List takes no data" or "Could not be written". ### Hold back (optional) The **Hold back** section of the panel has two checkboxes, both off at first. What you tick waits in your Inbox for your decision instead of going into the list; a change is saved at once and applies to the records that arrive from then on. - **Hold back invalid, disposable and test addresses** — simple rules on the email address: not a valid address, a throwaway provider, or a test domain. No AI involved. - **Hold back spam and test entries (AI check)** — records with nothing that says who it is (no name, email, company, phone or LinkedIn), placeholder values, and what an AI check clearly judges to be a test entry, keyboard mashing or spam. When the AI is unsure, the record goes through. This is the only setting that sends record values to an AI — see "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)". Leave both off if a trigger or your own checks sort the records anyway; tick them if every record in the list should be worth a look, for example when a public form feeds a list that hands records straight to your CRM. ### Deciding held-back records in the Inbox Held-back records appear in the Inbox as an entry named after the list, marked "n to review", in the **All** and **To review** tabs. A very large batch is spread over several entries of up to 200 records each. Open it to see each record with its **Reason** — "On the block list" or "Plan's record limit reached", and with a Hold back option on also "Invalid email", "Disposable address", "Test address", "No name, no email", "Placeholder" or "Looks like a test or spam". Then click **Add anyway** or **Discard**. The list is already set, so there is nothing to choose. Tick single rows to decide only those; without a tick the buttons act on all open records. **Add anyway** puts the records into the list without checking them again; a duplicate is still merged. Like every Inbox entry, an entry with held-back records is deleted **14 days** after it arrived, so decide within that time. The Inbox keeps up to 500 live entries; if it is full, held-back records can't be stored and the panel's log says "Inbox full – rows dropped". A list with a webhook gets a line of its own in the Flows column, under **Lists with their own way in**, with the number of records waiting. Click it to see its entries and its webhook page (the same panel as under Set up → Webhook, plus **Open list**). A further list gets its line once you set up a webhook or an app event in that list, under **Set up**. ### When the same person comes in again A record that matches an existing one only fills that record's empty fields. Under **When the same person comes in again** in the webhook section you can set what a repeated entry changes beyond that — useful for sources that report every visit or every event: - **Overwrite these columns with the newer value** — for example Last seen and Last page. - **Count in this column how often the person came in** — a new record starts at 1, every further entry adds 1. A value that arrives as a moment in time (for example `2026-10-02T09:15:00Z`) is stored as its day in a date column. Triggers that react to matching records run again when such a column changes — for example "Last page contains /pricing". ### RB2B: identified website visitors RB2B sends a fixed set of fields per visitor. Under **How to set up your tool**, choose **RB2B** and click **Set up for RB2B**: ListPlus shows which columns it will add (it uses the ones the list already has — e-mail, name, company and so on — and adds the rest, including **Last seen**, **Last page**, **Referrer** and **Visits**), places RB2B's fields and sets the rule for repeated visits. No mapping, no AI question. Then, in RB2B: 1. Open **Integrations → Webhook**, paste the list's webhook URL and save. 2. Switch on **Send repeat visitor data** if you want Last seen, Last page and Visits kept up to date. Leave **Sync company-only profiles** off — the list holds people, and a visitor without a person has nothing to be matched by, so every such visit would add a row. 3. Click **Send a Test Event**. The test visitor appears in the list. RB2B often identifies a visitor by LinkedIn profile without an e-mail address. Such records show as enrichable in the list's checks — enrich only the ones that fit your audience. RB2B does not resend an event that was missed, and on Basic the daily limit is 100 records. ### Limits | Plan | Records per day | Records per call | Calls per minute | | ------- | --------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | | Basic | 100 | 100 | 30 | | Pro | 5,000 | 500 | 60 | | Premium | 50,000 | 500 | 120 | The daily number counts all list webhooks of a workspace together; calls per minute count per webhook. The workspace owner's plan decides. Over a limit the sender gets an error (HTTP 429) instead of the record being dropped silently, so tools like Zapier or n8n can try again; a call that hit the daily limit also shows in the panel as "refused – daily limit reached". ### Pause, new URL, delete The **⋯** menu next to the counter offers: - **Pause** / **Resume** — a paused webhook refuses calls; nothing is stored while it is paused. - **Create a new URL** — the current URL stops working right away; mapping and log are kept. Use it if the URL may have leaked. - **Delete webhook** — the URL stops working, mapping and log are deleted. The records in the list stay. Under **Recent calls** you see what the latest calls did, for example "3 received · 1 new · 2 held back". ### For advanced users - **Request:** `POST` with `Content-Type: application/json`. A form post (`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`) works too. A `GET` on the URL returns a description: the list's fields, an example body, the limits and the response codes. - **Body shapes:** an object, an array of objects, or an object that wraps an array under `rows`, `records`, `items`, `leads`, `contacts` or `data`. Nested objects are flattened: `company.name` becomes `company_name`, while a mere wrapper such as `contact.email` becomes `email`. Arrays of question/answer pairs become fields. - **Sizes:** body up to 1 MB, up to 100 fields per record, up to 2,000 characters per value. - **Responses:** `202` with `{ "success": true, "received": n }` — the answer comes at once, and placing, checking and writing happen right after it. `400` no JSON object or array of objects, `401` invalid or replaced URL, `409` webhook paused or the list takes no data, `413` too many records in one call or body too large, `429` limit reached (per minute or per day). - **Dry run:** add `?test=1` to the URL. The answer shows where each field would go and which names are not placed yet; nothing is written or counted. - **Where a call came from:** add `?source=…` to the URL (for example `?source=partner-acme` or `?source=booth-qr`) to tell several senders of one webhook apart. `utm_source`, `utm_medium`, `utm_campaign`, `utm_term` and `utm_content` work the same way. The value is kept with every record of the call like any other field: in a column of that name if the list has one, otherwise with the record. A field of the same name in the record itself wins. Values are cut at 200 characters. - **If something is busy for a moment:** an accepted call is kept until its records are stored. If the list is busy with another change, the call is tried again (up to three times, about 30 seconds apart) before its records are held in the inbox as "Could not be written". - **Daily counter:** runs on UTC days. A call that would pass the daily limit is refused as a whole. - **What the AI gets:** with both Hold back boxes off and field names the list knows, a call uses no AI at all. An unknown field name is sent once, with one example value (up to 80 characters) and the list's column names and types. With "Hold back spam and test entries" on, each record's values (up to 12 fields, 120 characters each) go to the AI check. Details in "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)". - **Log:** the panel shows the latest 8 calls; 50 are kept. - There is no signature header; the secret is the URL. **Related topics:** send-to-inbox-from-tools · inbox · zapier-make-n8n · list-triggers · record-limit · what-the-ai-sees · quality-checks-overview. ### FAQ #### What is a list webhook? A private URL that belongs to one list: a form, Zapier, Make, n8n or your own code sends records to it as JSON, and they land in that list's matching columns. By default every record goes into the list and the list's checks show what is wrong with it; if you like, doubtful records wait in the Inbox for your decision first. Each list can have one webhook, on every plan. #### How do I create a webhook for a list? In the list, click the Set up icon next to the list's name, open the Webhook section and click Create webhook, then copy the URL. On a list without records, the card "Receive from a tool" opens the same section; anyone who can edit the list can do this. #### What format does a list webhook expect? A POST request with JSON: one object per record, or an array of objects for several records in one call. The Fields tab under "How to set up your tool" shows a ready JSON template built from the list's own columns, and the curl tab the same as a command. Typeform and Calendly webhooks and plain form posts are understood too. #### Do I have to map the webhook's fields to my columns? No. Fields find their column by the list's column types (email, first_name, company …), and a name ListPlus doesn't know is looked at by AI once and then remembered. Fields without a column are kept with the record; in the Mapping section you can assign them to a column or pick "+ Create as column", which applies to records arriving from then on. #### How do I connect Zapier, Make, n8n, Typeform or Calendly to a list webhook? Zapier: the "Webhooks by Zapier" action with POST; Make: the HTTP module with "Make a request"; n8n: an HTTP Request node with "Import cURL" and the command from the panel's curl tab. Typeform ("Connect" → "Webhooks") and Calendly (a webhook for "invitee.created") can call the URL directly, and the question's title becomes the field name. The panel's "How to set up your tool" tabs show these steps next to your URL. #### Does a list webhook block bad leads, spam or test entries? Not by default: every record goes into the list, and the list's checks in Analyze flag invalid emails, placeholders and test entries. To keep them out, tick "Hold back invalid, disposable and test addresses" and/or "Hold back spam and test entries (AI check)" in the Hold back section of the webhook panel (Set up → Webhook); those records then wait in your Inbox for Add anyway or Discard. Contacts on your workspace's Block list are always held back, whatever you tick. #### Why did a record sent to my list webhook not appear in the list? Look in the Inbox for an entry named after the list, marked "to review": the record was held back because it is on your Block list, your plan's record limit is reached, or you ticked a Hold back option that caught it. It may also have been merged into an existing record as a duplicate (the Recent calls log says "merged"), or the call was refused — a paused webhook, an old URL or a limit all return an error to the sender. Recent calls in the webhook panel shows what each call did. #### Where do held-back webhook records go, and how do I add them? Records on your Block list, records the list can't take and whatever you chose to hold back wait in the Inbox as an entry named after the list, marked "n to review" and shown in the To review tab. Open it to see each record with its reason, then click Add anyway or Discard — the list is already set, and you can tick single rows to decide only those. The entry is deleted 14 days after it arrived, like every Inbox entry, so decide before then. #### Does a list webhook create duplicates? No. A record that matches an existing one in the list by email, LinkedIn URL, phone or name + company is merged: it fills that record's empty fields instead of adding a second row. The "Recent calls" log shows this as "merged". #### How do I send RB2B visitors into a ListPlus list? Open the list's Set up page → Webhook, choose RB2B under "How to set up your tool" and click "Set up for RB2B": ListPlus adds the columns RB2B's fields need (using the ones the list already has), places the fields and sets the rule for repeated visits. Then paste the webhook URL in RB2B under Integrations → Webhook and click "Send a Test Event". No field mapping is needed. #### Can a list webhook update a contact that comes in again, for example on a repeat visit? Yes. By default a repeated record only fills the existing record's empty fields; under "When the same person comes in again" you choose columns that take the newer value (for example Last seen and Last page) and a column that counts the visits. "Set up for RB2B" sets this for you. #### Does a list webhook cost credits, and what are its limits? It is free on every plan and uses no credits — only enriching the records afterwards costs. The plans differ in the limits: Basic 100 records a day (100 per call, 30 calls a minute), Pro 5,000 (500 per call, 60 a minute), Premium 50,000 (500 per call, 120 a minute), counted for all list webhooks of the workspace and shown as "Today 14 / 100". Over a limit the sender gets an HTTP 429 error so the tool can retry; nothing is dropped silently. #### How do I pause a list webhook, get a new URL or delete it? Open the ⋯ menu next to the "Today" counter under Set up → Webhook: Pause stops it taking calls until you click Resume, and nothing is stored while it is paused. "Create a new URL" makes the old URL stop working at once and keeps mapping and log — use it if the URL leaked. "Delete webhook" removes URL, mapping and log; the records in the list stay. #### How do I test a list webhook and see what arrived? Click Send test in the panel: it sends the list's field template as a dry run and reports how many fields would be placed, without writing anything to the list. After real calls, "Recent calls" shows per call how many records were received, new, merged and held back. Before the first call the Mapping section says "Waiting for the first call …". #### Do triggers and pipelines run for records that arrive by webhook? Yes. A record the webhook adds to the list is a new record like any other, so the list's triggers check it and can hand it to a pipeline, set a status or tag it. Since the webhook lets every record through by default, give the trigger conditions or tick a Hold back option if only good records should be handed on; held-back records reach the list, and its triggers, only after you click Add anyway. --- ## Importing from LinkedIn (Sales Navigator, employees, profiles, posts) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/linkedin-imports Last updated: 2026-10-17 Besides importing a file, you can build a list straight from LinkedIn. In the New List wizard, pick a tile under **Collect from LinkedIn**; it goes straight to the import step. Each tile shows its price (all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"): - **Sales Navigator** (a base fee plus a price per person) — paste a Sales Navigator search URL; imports the people in your results (up to 2,500, typically 5–10 minutes). Filters that depend on your own LinkedIn account (Relationship, Lead Interactions, Groups) are stripped from the URL automatically; everything else keeps working. - **Company employees** (a base fee plus a price per person) — paste up to 100 LinkedIn company page URLs, one per line, with optional location, job title, seniority and function filters (up to 1,000 employees total, across all companies, typically 3–8 minutes). Up to 10 companies are searched together; with more than 10, or with "Max results per company" set, each company is searched on its own and the base is then a smaller fee per company, with a minimum, instead of one fee per import. - **Keyword search** (a price per person) — a keyword search (supports AND/OR/NOT and quotes) with an optional location filter (up to 1,000 profiles, typically 3–8 minutes). - **Post reactions** / **Post comments** (a price per person) — paste one or more LinkedIn post URLs; Comments also offers a time filter and an option to include replies, Reactions lets you filter by reaction type (up to 1,000 results total, across the posts you pasted, typically 2–5 minutes). None of these use your own LinkedIn account or session — the import runs through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side. See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for how that provider is used elsewhere too. ### What you get Every LinkedIn import fills in names, job titles, companies (where LinkedIn shows them) and LinkedIn URLs (plus engagement details like comment text or reaction type for the post-based imports) — never email addresses. Once the import finishes, an **Enrich LinkedIn Data?** prompt offers **Contact Profiles** (verified email, phone, job title and company from Prospeo, charged only when found) and **Company Profiles** (company data) for the new rows; **Company Profiles** is pre-selected only for a Sales Navigator import. Click **Enrich Now** to run it, or **Skip** and use the list's Enrich menu ("Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)") whenever you like instead. ### Cost and timing Before you start, the wizard shows an **Estimated cost** box (base fee + results × per-result rate), and your balance must cover it. The exact rates, and when each part is charged, are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · price-list · where-does-the-data-come-from · which-enrich-button · find-verified-email · gdpr-your-responsibilities. ### FAQ #### What LinkedIn imports can I run in ListPlus? Five: a Sales Navigator search, a company's employees, a LinkedIn profile search by keyword, people who reacted to a post, and people who commented on a post. Start any of them from a tile under **Collect from LinkedIn** in the New List wizard. #### What data do I get, and are there email addresses in it? You get names, job titles, companies and LinkedIn URLs (plus comment text, reaction type or post date for the two post-based imports) — never email addresses. Add emails and phone numbers afterwards with enrichment. #### How do I import a Sales Navigator search? Paste your Sales Navigator search URL into the **Sales Navigator** import; ListPlus imports up to the number of results you set (maximum 2,500) and automatically removes any filter tied to your personal LinkedIn account. #### How do I import a company's employees, or people who engaged with a post? For employees, paste up to 100 LinkedIn company page URLs (optionally narrowed by location, job title, seniority or function); for post reactions or comments, paste one or more LinkedIn post URLs. Each of these imports up to 1,000 results in total. #### How much does a LinkedIn import cost, and when am I charged? Before you start, the wizard shows an **Estimated cost** box (base fee + results × per-result rate) and your balance must cover it. The base fee (Sales Navigator, Company Employees) is charged when the import starts and is kept even if the search finds nothing or the provider's run fails; the per-result part is charged for the rows actually delivered — also for a run that stopped early. The exact rates are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." #### Can I enrich the imported rows with emails afterwards? Yes. When the import finishes, an **Enrich LinkedIn Data?** prompt offers **Contact Profiles** — verified email, phone, job title and company from Prospeo, charged only when found — and **Company Profiles** (industry, size, website, description); Company Profiles is pre-selected only for Sales Navigator. Skip it and you can run the same lookup later as "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" in the list's Enrich menu; see "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)." #### Is it legal to import LinkedIn data this way? The import runs through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side and never uses your LinkedIn account or session. How you then use the contacts, for example for outreach, is your responsibility as the controller under GDPR — see "[Your responsibilities under GDPR](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities)" (general orientation, not legal advice). --- ## Trying ListPlus with a sample list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/sample-list Last updated: 2026-10-19 For the full walkthrough of what a sample list is for and how to use it, see "[Your first 10 minutes with ListPlus](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/first-10-minutes)." This article is just the quick reference. **To look first — free, no account:** click **See the sample lists** on the **Lists** page ("Just want to look around?"), on the empty Lists page ("Try a sample list first") or at the top of the New List page — or search "sample" with ⌘K. A page offers the sample lists, each with a short word on what it shows; pick one. The first, **Contact list with checks**, opens **Sample contacts** — 247 business contacts across 21 columns, with deliberate data gaps — and shows its checks right away; they run live. This sample is shared by everyone, the same for all, and **view only**: you can look around, filter and open the checks, but not edit, fix or enrich. Opening it never copies anything into your workspace. A banner at the top says "Sample list: Try the checks – edit and enrich in your own list."; **Create your own list** in it takes you to the New List page. A few of its contacts carry enrichment data (the small number at the end of the row), so you can see what enrichment adds: real company data for some, and made-up sample data for the made-up people. **To see a flow — also free, no account:** the second, **GTM funnel** (the list is called **Sample GTM funnel**), shows how records move through a list: leads come in from a form, an AI research, a database search, a webhook, the Chrome extension and an import; rules sort them into ICP tiers, enrichment runs only for the ones that fit, and pipelines send the sales-ready ones to HubSpot and Slack. It opens in the list's **Flow funnel** (switch **Columns / Flow** for the Sankey chart) and is view only, like the first sample. The people and companies in it are made up. **To edit, fix and enrich:** click **Create your own list** and import your own data (or start an empty list). The sample is for trying the checks. **Related topics:** first-10-minutes · create-list-and-import-file · empty-list-and-templates. ### FAQ #### What is the sample list for? It's a ready-made list with deliberate data gaps and errors, so you can see what the checks find before you import your own data. Editing and enriching work in your own list. See "[Your first 10 minutes with ListPlus](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/first-10-minutes)" for the full walkthrough. #### Which sample lists are available? Two, both shared and view only — **See the sample lists** offers them: **Contact list with checks** (Sample contacts: 247 business contacts across 21 columns, with intentional gaps — to try the checks and filters) and **GTM funnel** (Sample GTM funnel: leads from many ways in, sorted by rules, enriched and delivered — it opens in the Flow funnel). The Flow funnel's own hints open the GTM funnel directly. #### Is a sample list different from starting an empty list? Yes. The sample list is pre-filled, shared by everyone, view only and costs no credits; starting without data creates an empty list of your own from a template and costs no credits. See "[Starting without data: templates and column sets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/empty-list-and-templates)" for that option. #### Can I delete a sample list once I'm done with it? There's nothing to delete: the sample belongs to nobody's workspace and is the same for everyone. #### Why can't I edit or enrich the sample list? The list that Open a sample list opens is shared by everyone and view only, so you can look around and see what the checks find without an account. The banner says "Sample list: Try the checks – edit and enrich in your own list."; click Create your own list there and import your data to edit, fix and enrich. #### Do I need to sign in to look at the sample list? No. Open a sample list opens the shared, view-only sample with its checks without an account. You sign in only to create a list of your own, as with any other way of creating a list. #### Does a sample list count toward my plan's record limit? No, the shared sample doesn't count toward any limit. See "What is the record limit?" for the limits of your own lists. #### Does opening the sample list copy it into my workspace? No. **Open sample list** shows the one shared, read-only list; opening it never copies anything into your workspace. To try editing and enriching, click Create your own list and import your own data. #### What does "Create your own list" in the sample banner do? It takes you to the New List page, where you import a file, connect a source or start an empty list. Nothing from the sample is carried over. --- ## Folders and list management Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/projects-and-list-management Last updated: 2026-10-15 Rename, duplicate, delete and group your lists — all from the Home page (where your lists live) or the folder/list tree in the **Lists** view, opened from its own rail icon. Lists and folders belong to the active **workspace** and are shared with all its members: every member can open, edit and rename a list, while duplicating, deleting and moving lists into folders is for the workspace's owners and admins (see "[Workspace roles and permissions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/roles-and-permissions)"). Folders were called projects before. ### Rename a list Open the list and click the **Set up** icon (the two sliders next to the list's name): the Overview starts with **List name** and **Description** — change them and click **Save**. The quick way: click the list's name at the top of the screen — it turns into a text field; press **Enter** or click the checkmark to save, or the **✕** to cancel. From Home or the tree, a list's **⋯** menu → **List Settings...** opens the list with that same Overview. ### Duplicate a list On Home or in the Lists view's tree, open a list's **⋯** menu and choose **Duplicate**. This makes a full, independent copy — including any enrichment data and tags already on the rows — at no credit cost. Only owners and admins of the workspace see Duplicate. The copy gets the same name with a number added, for example "Leads (2)", lands in the same workspace (so every member sees it) and is not in any folder; a toast confirms it as "List duplicated as '...'". Duplicating is blocked if it would push the workspace owner over their plan's record limit — see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)". ### Delete a list If you are an owner or admin of the workspace, choose **Delete list** from the same **⋯** menu and confirm with **Yes, delete**. The list is deleted for every member of the workspace. This is permanent — see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for exactly what happens and what else you can delete. ### Folders: grouping your lists A **folder** is a place for related lists — for example everything for one campaign or client (see "[Navigation and glossary](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/navigation-and-glossary)" for the short definition). Create one with the **+** at the top of the Lists panel → **New folder**: type a name ("Folder name…") and click **Create folder**. On Home, a list's **⋯** menu → **Move to folder** → **New folder** creates a folder and moves the list into it; the new folder's card opens with its name ready to edit. On Home, folders appear as cards in front of your lists. The tree is the same one shown with no list open and, once opened with **Show list tree**, next to an open list, so you can create, rename and delete folders without leaving the list you're working in. Grouping lists in a folder doesn't merge their data, change ownership or affect the record limit — each list still behaves on its own. Any signed-in workspace member can create, rename or delete a folder; folders belong to the workspace, so every member sees the same ones. Move a list into a folder by dragging its card onto the folder's card on Home, dragging it onto the folder in the Lists panel/tree, or from the list's **⋯** menu on Home via **Move to folder** (for owners and admins of the workspace — dragging a list also needs that permission). A list can only be in one folder at a time, so moving it into a new folder takes it out of the old one. To take a list out of its folder, drag it out of the folder onto the lists below the folders in the tree, or use **Move to folder → Remove from folder** on Home; a failed drag shows "Could not move the list." A folder can be renamed from its own **⋯** menu → **Rename**, in either location. Deleting a folder (its own **⋯** menu → **Delete folder**) keeps its lists exactly as they are, just without a folder: on Home this happens immediately with no confirmation, while the Lists panel/tree asks you to confirm first and names the folder. ### Moving a list to another workspace There is no move between workspaces. To take a list's data into another workspace, export it (for example as CSV or Excel) from the list's **⋯** menu, switch to the other workspace and import the file there as a new list (a file import, which costs credits). Delete the original afterwards if you no longer need it. **Related topics:** navigation-and-glossary · record-limit · delete-account-and-data · roles-and-permissions · switch-and-create-workspaces. ### FAQ #### How do I rename, duplicate or delete a list? To rename a list, open it and either click its name at the top — it becomes editable; press Enter or the checkmark to save — or open Set up (the two sliders next to the name, or List Settings in the list's ⋯ menu), where the Overview has List name and Description (every workspace member can rename). Owners and admins of the workspace also see Duplicate in the "..." menu on the list's card on Home or in the Lists view's tree, for a free, independent copy including its enrichment data, and Delete list to delete it permanently for everyone. See "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for the full flow. #### Why can't I duplicate, delete or move a list? Duplicate, Delete list and Move to folder are only shown to owners and admins of the workspace; members can open, edit, enrich and rename lists but not restructure them. Ask an owner or admin to do it, or to make you an admin. See "[Workspace roles and permissions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/roles-and-permissions)" for the full overview. #### How do I create a folder (project) and add lists to it? Click the "+" at the top of the Lists panel, choose New folder, type a name and click Create folder — or, on Home, open a list's "..." menu → Move to folder → New folder, which creates the folder and moves the list into it. Add more lists by dragging their cards onto the folder's card or folder in the tree, or with Move to folder in a list's "..." menu on Home. #### Can I create, rename or delete a folder while I'm inside a list? Yes — open the Lists panel with "Show list tree" (or ⌘⇧L) next to your open list; its "+" → New folder, and each folder's own "..." menu, work the same as on Home. Any signed-in workspace member can manage folders this way, not just owners and admins. #### Can a list be in more than one folder? No — a list belongs to at most one folder at a time. Moving it into a different folder automatically takes it out of the one it was in. #### How do I take a list out of a folder without deleting it? Open the list's "..." menu on Home, go to Move to folder, and choose Remove from folder — or drag it out of the folder onto the lists below the folders in the Lists view's tree. The list itself is untouched — it just has no folder any more. #### What happens to my lists if I delete a folder? Nothing happens to the lists themselves — deleting a folder (from its own "..." menu → Delete folder) only removes the folder; its lists stay exactly as they were, just without a folder. On Home this happens immediately with no confirmation; in the Lists panel/tree it asks you to confirm first. --- ## Merge two lists (Consolidate Lists) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/merge-lists Last updated: 2026-10-17 Merging combines two lists of your current workspace into one. This is separate from the in-list Duplicates checks (see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)") — this article covers Consolidate Lists, which brings two whole lists together. ### How to start a merge On Home, drag one list card and drop it onto another list card (grid or list view). Both lists must be in the workspace you are working in, and only owners and admins of the workspace can drag list cards, so members ask one of them to merge. This opens the **Consolidate Lists** window: the list you dragged becomes the **Source**, and the list you dropped it on becomes the **Master**. ### Choose a mode On the **Overview** step, choose a mode: - **Create New List** (default) — merges both lists into a brand-new third list; the Source and Master stay unchanged. - **Update Master In-Place** — appends the Source's rows directly onto the Master list; the Source stays unchanged. Not possible when the Master refreshes automatically from its source — use Create New List then. ### Map Columns Next, choose which Source columns come across and where they go. ListPlus auto-suggests matches by column name and type; uncheck a column to leave it out, or point it at a different Master column using the dropdown. Choosing "Create new column" adds a new column — to the new list in Create New List mode, or to the Master in Update Master In-Place mode. ### Handle duplicates On the **Duplicates** step, choose **Keep all rows** to append everything, or **Skip duplicates** to leave out Source rows that already exist in the Master. With Skip duplicates, pick the column to compare under **Match on column**, one dropdown for each list. If the Master has an email column, it is pre-selected. A Source row is skipped when its value in that column matches the value of any Master row, ignoring upper/lower case and leading or trailing spaces. Empty values never count as duplicates, and duplicates inside the Source list itself are not removed. The step shows how many Source rows would be skipped before you continue. ### Review and execute The **Review** step summarizes the mode, mapped columns, duplicate count and resulting row total, then click **Consolidate** to run it. ### Cost and record limit Merging lists is free — no credits are charged. The rows it adds count toward your plan's record limit the same as an import: with Create New List, the new list's full row count (Master + Source, minus any skipped duplicates) counts, since the two originals still exist too; with Update Master In-Place, only the Source rows actually added count. The Overview and Review steps warn **Record limit would be exceeded** based on the Create New List total. The final check runs when you click **Consolidate** and uses your actual mode. If you'd go over, a **Record limit reached** window shows your limit and current total — see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)" for freeing up space or upgrading. One list also holds at most 50,000 records on every plan. A merge whose result would be larger is refused with "One list holds at most 50,000 records – the merged list would have N." and nothing is changed. **Related topics:** duplicates · record-limit · create-list-and-import-file · projects-and-list-management. ### FAQ #### What does merging two lists do? Consolidate Lists combines two lists of your current workspace — either into a brand-new third list (originals unchanged) or by appending one list's rows onto the other. You choose the mode, map columns, and optionally skip rows that already exist in the target. #### How do I start merging two lists? On Home, drag one list card and drop it onto another list card; the dragged list becomes the Source and the one you dropped onto becomes the Master. Both lists must be in your current workspace, and dragging list cards is available to the workspace's owners and admins. #### What's the difference between Create New List and Update Master In-Place? Create New List builds a third list containing both lists' rows and leaves the Source and Master untouched. Update Master In-Place appends the Source's rows directly onto the Master list, growing it in place. #### Can I choose which columns come across when merging? Yes — the Map Columns step lets you uncheck any Source column to leave it out, redirect it to a different Master column, or create a new column for it. ListPlus pre-fills suggested matches by column name and type, which you can adjust before continuing. #### How does "Skip duplicates" decide which rows to leave out? You pick a column in each list under Match on column — a Source row is skipped when its value matches any Master row's value there, ignoring case and leading/trailing spaces. Empty values are never treated as duplicates, and it doesn't remove duplicates that already exist inside the Source list itself. #### Does merging lists cost credits? No, merging two lists with Consolidate Lists is free. #### Do the rows added by a merge count toward my record limit? Yes. If the result would push your total records over your plan's limit, ListPlus blocks the merge and shows your current total and limit instead of running it — see "[Record limit](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/record-limit)" for how to free up space or upgrade. The same happens if the merged list would exceed 50,000 records, the most one list can hold: "One list holds at most 50,000 records – the merged list would have N." #### Who can merge lists, and can I merge lists from different workspaces? Both lists must be in the workspace you are currently working in, and only owners and admins of that workspace can drag list cards on Home to start a merge. Lists from another workspace can't be merged directly: export one of them, switch workspaces and import it there first. --- ## Section: Check & clean ## What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview Last updated: 2026-10-17 The **Analyze** panel checks every row in your list against over 100 rules (which ones apply depends on the columns in your list) — missing fields, invalid formats, duplicates, and more — and gives you an overall quality score. The standard checks cost nothing and need no setup. ### Open the Analyze panel In a list, click **Analyze** — one of the four quick buttons in the header (alongside **Record**, **Enrich** and **Triggers**). You can also reach it from the **Find & evaluate** field in the header. The analysis runs automatically the first time you open the panel; to refresh it later, open **Analysis settings** (gear icon) and click **Re-run Analysis**. ### The quality score Under **Overview** (pick it in the panel's category menu; the panel opens on **All checks**), a ring shows **Contact Quality**: a score from 0 to 10 (one decimal, for example "8.3"), with the number of contacts analyzed underneath. Each contact gets points for having usable key fields — a business email counts most, then full name, company, job title, phone, LinkedIn and location — counting only the columns your list has, and the ring shows the average. Below it, a bar breaks your rows down into five bands by each contact's own score — **Excellent**, **Good**, **Fair**, **Poor**, **Unusable**. Under the score, checks are listed with how many rows each one affects (for example "Company missing — 42 rows"); click checks to combine them into one selection, then click **Select N rows** to show those rows and highlight the affected cells so you can see and fix them. ### Over 100 checks, grouped by topic There are more than 100 individual checks, covering names, emails, phone numbers, companies, job titles, addresses, LinkedIn URLs, gender, duplicates, compliance and general completeness. **Analysis settings** (gear icon) lets you switch check categories on or off — all categories run on the first analysis — and checks can also be grouped by view, **Outbound** or **CRM**, to show which issues matter for each purpose. Each topic area has its own detail article; see the pointers below. The category menu in the panel lists: Overview, Fixes, All checks, Targeting, Send-ready, Data quality, Already known, Duplicates, Completeness, Inconsistent values, Geo & compliance, LinkedIn, Campaign and CRM-ready. Only categories with findings show. Some checks carry an **Enrich (n)** icon (or **Import company data (n)**) that fills the missing field for the affected rows right away — see "[Enrich straight from a check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/enrich-from-checks)". ### Free and automatic vs. optional AI Almost every check is **deterministic** (pattern- and rule-based) and **free** — it runs automatically the first time you open the panel, with no extra step. A separate **Include AI Analysis** setting (off by default) adds a small number of checks that need real-world judgment, such as spotting an implausible name; tick it in **Analysis settings** and click **Re-run Analysis** — these AI checks are billed by usage from the workspace's credits, don't run when the balance is too low, and are available only to signed-in members who can edit the list. Which checks use AI and what data they see is covered in a separate article. ### Checks read your saved data The Analyze panel reads the list as it is **saved**. Your own edits are saved automatically about a second after you make them; AI suggestions (for example from Fix) only after you click **Apply** in the list header. Then click **Re-run Analysis** (in Analysis settings) to see the changes reflected in the checks. ### Related topics - **duplicates** — finding and merging duplicate contacts. - **email-quality-and-bounces** — invalid, disposable, role-based and personal email checks, and what "verified" does and doesn't guarantee. - **campaign-ready-evaluations** — turning checks into a ready / enrichable / unusable verdict for a specific goal like cold email. - **fixing-issues** — what Fix and Fix all do, and what still needs manual or enrichment work. - **ai-checks** — which checks use AI and what data they see. ### FAQ #### How do I check the quality of my list? Open a list and click Analyze — one of the four quick buttons in the header, next to Record, Enrich and Triggers. It runs automatically the first time it opens, with no button to press and no cost for the standard checks. #### What is the quality score? It's the "Contact Quality" number in the ring under Overview in the Analyze panel, from 0 to 10. Each contact gets points for having usable key fields (a business email counts most, then full name, company, job title, phone, LinkedIn and location), counting only the columns your list has, and the ring shows the average. #### What do Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor and Unusable mean? Each contact's own score puts it in a band: Excellent 8–10, Good 6–7.9, Fair 4–5.9, Poor 1–3.9, Unusable below 1. The bar shows how many contacts fall into each band. #### How many checks does ListPlus run? Over 100 individual checks across areas like names, emails, phone numbers, companies, job titles, addresses, LinkedIn URLs, duplicates and general completeness. Each check reports how many rows it affects; click checks to combine them into one selection, then click Select N rows to show those rows and highlight the affected cells. #### Do the checks cost credits? No — the standard checks are deterministic (rule-based, not AI) and completely free, and they run automatically the first time you open the Analyze panel. Only the separate, optional "Include AI Analysis" setting costs credits: its AI checks are billed by usage from the workspace's credits and don't run when the balance is too low. #### What does "Include AI Analysis" do? It's an off-by-default setting in the Analyze panel that adds a small set of AI-powered checks — for example spotting implausible or fake-looking names — on top of the free deterministic checks. Tick Include AI Analysis in Analysis settings and click Re-run Analysis; the AI checks are billed by usage from the workspace's credits and run only for signed-in members who can edit the list (readers of the sample list get the free checks only). #### Does the Analyze panel check my latest edits? It reads the saved list: your own edits are saved automatically within about a second, open AI suggestions (such as fixes) only after you click Apply in the list header. Then click Re-run Analysis in Analysis settings to see the changes reflected in the checks. #### Does running a check change my data? No — checks only read and report; nothing in your list changes until you take an action like an edit, applying a Fix, or an enrichment. See "fixing-issues" for what Fix and Fix all do. #### Can I select rows based on a check? Yes — click checks in the Analyze panel to combine them into one selection, then click Select N rows to show those rows and highlight the specific cells causing the issue, so you can review or fix them directly. #### Where do I find checks for a specific goal, like cold email readiness? That's a separate feature called evaluations, found in the same "Find & evaluate" field: pick a goal like Cold Email and every row is rated ready, enrichable or unusable for that specific purpose. See "campaign-ready-evaluations" for details. #### Are duplicate contacts caught by the Analyze panel? Yes, duplicates are one of the check categories shown in the Analyze panel. Finding and merging them is covered in its own article, "duplicates". #### Do checks work the same on every plan? Yes — the standard checks and the quality score are available on every plan, including Basic, since the standard checks don't call any paid provider. --- ## Is my list ready for cold email, CRM, or cold calling? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/campaign-ready-evaluations Last updated: 2026-10-10 An **evaluation** rates every row in your list against a specific goal — cold email, CRM import, or cold calling — instead of a generic quality score. Each row gets one of three verdicts: **Ready**, **Enrichable**, or **Unusable**, and you can fix the gaps with one click, and you see the maximum cost before anything runs. ### Choose an evaluation In a list, click the **Find & evaluate** field in the header. With nothing typed, the dropdown shows **"Choose evaluation"** with a short list of evaluations, each with a small bar showing how much of your list is currently ready. Click one to activate it (or **"No evaluation"** to turn it off again). Three are built in and always available: - **Cold Email** - **CRM Quality** - **Cold Calling** Click **"Edit evaluations"** to open the full management dialog. There, click **More evaluations …** and **Add** to bring in three more (LinkedIn / Social, Multichannel Sequence, Deliverability). To make your own, click **New evaluation**, or use **Duplicate** on an existing one, then adjust which fields matter and how strict each rule is. Standard evaluations are read-only; edit one and click **Save as new evaluation** to keep your version. Once an evaluation is active, a cockpit bar appears under the header, with count buttons such as **All**, **42 ready**, **17 enrichable**, **5 unusable**, and stays visible while you work the list. ### What each evaluation checks Only fields marked **Essential** decide a row's verdict (Important and Nice-to-have fields are shown too, but don't block Ready). | Evaluation | Essential fields | | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Cold Email** | Email (personal/free-mail and role-based addresses like info@ don't count), Name, Company | | **CRM Quality** | Name, Email (role-based addresses don't count; personal email is fine), Company | | **Cold Calling** | Name, Phone (must include a country code), Company | An essential field must be both **present** and **valid** — passing the same checks the Analyze panel already runs (see "quality-checks-overview"). For example, under Cold Email a row with `info@acme.com` in the email column is not Ready, because a role-based address fails that evaluation's rule, even though the cell is filled. ### Ready, Enrichable, Unusable - **Ready** — every essential field is present and valid. Nothing to do. - **Enrichable** — one or more essential fields are missing or invalid, and ListPlus can fill every one of them by enrichment from what the row already has (for example, no email yet, but there's a name and company or a LinkedIn URL to look it up from). - **Unusable** — at least one essential field is missing or invalid and there's no way to reach it: no usable starting point on the row (no LinkedIn URL, no email, no name + company), or the missing field simply has no enrichment route. Click a count (ready, enrichable or unusable) in the cockpit bar to filter the grid to those rows. Click **All** to show every row again. The **×** at the end of the cockpit bar ("Close evaluation") turns the evaluation off. ### Fix the gaps at a known worst-case cost Click **Enrich** in the cockpit bar (it shows the number of enrichable rows it will act on) to open the enrichment dialog. It groups the enrichable rows into **gap patterns** — rows missing the same fields from the same starting data — and shows, for each pattern, the route it will take and shows the maximum cost (sometimes with an expected figure) before you start. Uncheck any pattern you don't want to run, then click **Start enrichment**. Most steps charge only when they find something, so the real total is usually lower than the number shown. Some steps also charge without a hit: LinkedIn Profile Search charges per attempt, and a LinkedIn profile lookup charges when the profile is found, even without an email. See "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)" for the charge rule of each step. If you have rows selected in the grid, Enrich acts only on the selected enrichable rows. Rows with no usable starting point at all are listed separately and are never charged. ### Is choosing an evaluation free? Yes. Activating, switching, or turning off an evaluation doesn't call any paid provider or use credits — it re-reads the same free checks the Analyze panel already computed. Only the enrichment you run afterward from the Enrich button costs credits. ### Does my choice follow me to another device? No. Which evaluation is currently active is remembered per browser (on this device), not synced to your account — open the list on another device or browser and you'll need to pick it again. The active evaluation also stays selected when you open another list in this browser. Evaluations you create or customize yourself, and template evaluations you've added, however, do sync to your account and are available wherever you sign in. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · find-verified-email · duplicates · email-quality-and-bounces · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### What is an evaluation in ListPlus? An evaluation rates every row against a specific goal — like Cold Email, CRM Quality, or Cold Calling — as Ready, Enrichable, or Unusable, instead of a generic quality score. Pick one from the "Find & evaluate" field in the header. #### How do I check if my list is ready for cold email? Open the "Find & evaluate" field in the header, choose the "Cold Email" evaluation, and a cockpit bar appears showing how many rows are Ready, Enrichable, or Unusable for that goal. #### What does "Ready" mean? The row has every field that evaluation requires (its "essential" fields) both present and valid — for example, under Cold Email, a real company-domain email, a name, and a company, none of them flagged by the underlying checks. #### What does "Enrichable" mean? One or more required fields are missing or invalid, and ListPlus can fill all of them from what the row already has — for example the email is missing, but there's enough (a LinkedIn URL, or a name and company) to look it up. #### What does "Unusable" mean? At least one required field is missing or invalid and there's no way to fill it: no starting point on the row for enrichment to work from, or that type of field simply has no enrichment route. #### How do I fill in the missing fields for the enrichable rows? Click Enrich in the cockpit bar. It groups the enrichable rows by the pattern of what's missing and shows the route and the maximum cost for each group before anything runs; most steps charge only on a hit. #### Does choosing or switching an evaluation cost credits? No — activating or switching an evaluation costs no credits; it reuses the same free checks the Analyze panel already ran. Only running an enrichment from the Enrich button costs credits. #### Which evaluations are available by default? Cold Email, CRM Quality, and Cold Calling are built in. Three more (LinkedIn / Social, Multichannel Sequence, Deliverability) can be added from "Edit evaluations" → "More evaluations …" → Add. #### Can I create my own evaluation? Yes — open "Edit evaluations," click New evaluation or Duplicate an existing one, and adjust which fields are essential, important, or nice-to-have and how strict rules like blocking role-based emails or requiring a phone country code are. Standard evaluations are read-only; edit one and click Save as new evaluation to keep your version. #### Does my chosen evaluation carry over if I open the list on my phone or another computer? No — which evaluation is currently active is remembered only on the device/browser you picked it on (though it stays selected across lists in that same browser). Evaluations you create yourself, and templates you've added, do sync to your account, but you'll need to reselect one as active on each device. --- ## The Outbound and CRM views in the Analyze panel Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/outbound-and-crm-views Last updated: 2026-10-17 The same 100+ checks can be regrouped by two views — **Outbound** ("can I send to this contact?") and **CRM** ("is my CRM data clean?") — so the same findings read as either a campaign risk list or a database-hygiene list. ### Where to find it On the **Overview** (Überblick) in the Analyze panel — pick it in the category menu; the panel opens on **All checks** — or in the **Find & evaluate** dialog, next to the **Contact Quality** ring, two tabs switch the grouping: **Outbound** and **CRM**. The score itself doesn't change — only how the issues below it are bundled. ### What each view groups together **Outbound** bundles checks into groups like Unsendable, Duplicates, Bounce Risk, Fake & Placeholder, Personalization Broken, Incomplete, Wrong Persona, Geo & Compliance, LinkedIn Broken, LinkedIn Company Page, Rep Entry Errors and Freemail Addresses — issues that matter before a send. **CRM** bundles the same pool of checks differently: CRM Junk, Duplicates, Formatting Broken, Inconsistent Values, Enrichment Gaps, Field Conflicts, Stale Data, Compliance Risk, Rep Entry Errors, and a Sync-Ready group (not the same as the category CRM-ready) for records with no issues at all — issues that matter for keeping a database clean. The individual checks behind each group are described in the topic for their data type (names, emails, companies, and so on); this view just regroups the same findings by purpose. Click a group to select and highlight its rows, the same way clicking an individual check does — see "select-rows-by-checks" for how selecting and combining works. A group that includes an AI-powered check (for example Wrong Persona or Fake & Placeholder) only shows those rows once **Include AI Analysis** has been run; see "ai-checks" for which checks that affects. ### Not the same as an evaluation This is a different feature from **evaluations** (Cold Email, CRM Quality, Cold Calling), which rate each row Ready / Enrichable / Unusable for one specific goal — see "campaign-ready-evaluations". Outbound and CRM are views over the same check results; an evaluation is a separate verdict. ### Cost Free — switching views only re-groups checks you've already run; it doesn't call any paid provider or re-run the analysis. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · select-rows-by-checks · campaign-ready-evaluations · ai-checks. ### FAQ #### What are the Outbound and CRM views in the Analyze panel? Two tabs next to the Contact Quality ring that regroup the same 100+ checks into different bundles: Outbound groups issues by what blocks a send, CRM groups them by what breaks database hygiene and sync. #### Where do I switch between the Outbound and CRM views? On the Overview in the Analyze panel (pick it in the category menu; the panel opens on All checks) or in the "Find & evaluate" dialog, click the Outbound or CRM tab next to the Contact Quality ring at the top. #### Does switching between Outbound and CRM change my quality score? No — the Contact Quality score stays the same; only the grouping of issues shown below it changes. #### What kinds of issues does the Outbound view group together? Groups like Unsendable, Duplicates, Bounce Risk, Fake & Placeholder, Personalization Broken, Incomplete, Wrong Persona, Geo & Compliance, LinkedIn Broken, LinkedIn Company Page, Rep Entry Errors and Freemail Addresses — everything relevant to whether you can safely send to a contact. #### What kinds of issues does the CRM view group together? Groups like CRM Junk, Duplicates, Formatting Broken, Inconsistent Values, Enrichment Gaps, Field Conflicts, Stale Data, Compliance Risk and Rep Entry Errors, plus a Sync-Ready group for records with no issues — everything relevant to keeping your CRM clean. #### Is this the same as choosing an evaluation like Cold Email? No — evaluations (Cold Email, CRM Quality, Cold Calling) give each row a Ready / Enrichable / Unusable verdict for one goal; Outbound and CRM just regroup the same check findings by purpose. See "campaign-ready-evaluations" for evaluations. #### Does using the Outbound or CRM view cost credits? No — it's free on every plan; it only regroups checks that have already run. --- ## Selecting and highlighting rows from checks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/select-rows-by-checks Last updated: 2026-10-17 The Analyze panel doesn't just report problems — clicking checks turns them into a live selection of rows in your grid, with the exact cells that caused each issue highlighted. This is how you go from "42 rows have no company" to actually seeing, and fixing, those 42 rows. ### Clicking checks stacks them into one selection In the Analyze panel (or the **Find & evaluate** field in the list header), every check is listed with the count of rows it affects. Click a check to add it to your selection; click it again to remove it. Selected checks appear as chips at the bottom with the number of selected checks ("3 selected"), and the button shows the combined row count — the footer says "Click checks — they stack into one combined selection." **Combining is OR, not AND:** a row is included if it matches _any_ of the checks you've selected, so adding more checks only ever grows the selection, it never narrows it. There's no fixed limit on how many checks you can combine. ### Select N rows As soon as you click a check, the matching rows are already selected live in the grid checkboxes, and the count on the button updates as you add or remove checks. Clicking **Select N rows** goes one step further: it filters the grid down to just those rows and highlights the specific cell that caused each issue — not the whole row. If a row failed two different checks on two different columns, both cells are highlighted. Clicking **Select N rows** again with the same checks clears the filter and deselects the rows; opening a fresh combination first clears whatever was active before. ### What you can do with the selection Clicking checks already sets the grid's normal row selection, so anything that works on selected rows works here too, even before you click Select N rows: open **Enrich** to fill the highlighted gaps for just these rows, use **Export Selected Records** from the ⋯ menu, or delete them (saved automatically). **Fix** (in the Fixes category) is separate: it corrects every row the check affects, not only your selection. See "fixing-issues" for what Fix and Fix all do, and "quality-checks-overview" for how the checks and the quality score work overall. A check with an **Enrich (n)** icon fills its field for its rows directly, without opening the Enrich menu; n counts only your selected rows when rows are selected (see "[Enrich straight from a check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/enrich-from-checks)"). **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · fixing-issues · do-not-contact-and-block-list. ### FAQ #### How do I select the rows that fail a specific check? In the Analyze panel, click the check (for example "Company missing"), then click Select N rows. The grid filters to just those rows and highlights the cell causing the issue. #### Can I combine several checks into one selection? Yes — click as many checks as you want; each one is added to the same selection and the row count updates live. Click a selected check again to remove it. #### If I select two checks, do I get rows that fail both, or either? Either — combining checks is OR, not AND. A row is included in the selection if it fails at least one of the checks you've selected, so adding a second check only adds more rows. #### What exactly gets highlighted when I select rows from a check? The specific cell that caused the issue, not the whole row — for example only the company column is highlighted for a "Company missing" check, so you can see exactly what needs fixing. #### How do I clear a check-based selection? Click Select N rows again with the same checks selected — this clears both the grid filter and the row selection. Removing chips only changes which rows are selected. #### Can I fix or enrich just the rows I selected from a check? Yes for Enrich, Export Selected Records and delete — Select N rows sets the normal grid row selection, so those actions apply to just those rows. Fix is separate: it corrects every row the check affects, not only your selection. See "fixing-issues" for details on Fix and Fix all. #### Is there a limit to how many checks I can combine into one selection? No fixed limit — you can stack as many checks as you like; the combined row count and highlighted cells just keep growing as you add more. --- ## Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues Last updated: 2026-10-17 Many of the issues the **Analyze** panel finds can be corrected automatically instead of by hand. These live under the **Fixes** (Korrekturen) category, alongside the other check categories (Send-ready, Data quality, Duplicates, Completeness and so on). ### Where to find Fixes Open **Analyze** in the list header, then switch to **Fixes** in the category menu, or click the "n fixes" link above the checks. Click **Fix** next to a check to correct every row it affects. To run them all at once, click **Open as dialog** in the Analyze panel header; **Fix all** exists only there. It appears at the top of Fixes and runs the checks one after another, with a progress count. Fix all skips normalization checks (for example gender, address or inconsistent spellings) — their Fix opens a review window where you approve the proposed values, so run those one at a time. ### What gets fixed Fixes only cover checks that have an automatic correction — most issues that need judgment (a wrong company name, an implausible job title) still need a manual edit or enrichment, not a Fix button. What Fixes does cover: - **Formatting corrections** — trimming extra spaces, fixing capitalization, removing emoji or invisible characters, stripping title prefixes like "Dr." from a name field, and similar text cleanup in names, companies and job titles. - **Typo and format corrections** — for example fixing common email typos or misplaced dots. - **Empty Row** — rows with no data in any column (a row holding only enrichment data does not count) are marked ignored (you can restore them via the **Ignored** chip in the status bar). - **Duplicate merges** — see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" for exactly what a duplicate Fix does; **Fix all also runs the duplicate merges**, so if you want to review duplicate groups first, fix the duplicate checks one at a time instead of using Fix all. - **Normalizing values** — unifying different spellings of the same value (gender, address fields, inconsistent values) after you review them. Not every check has a Fix button — checks that flag something for you to judge (like "Similar Name + Company") show no Fix, only a count of affected rows to select and review. ### Suggestions you apply Formatting and typo fixes arrive as highlighted suggestions: the list header shows **N suggestions** with **Apply · N** and **Discard**, and nothing is written until you click Apply. Ignoring rows (empty rows, and the extra rows of a duplicate merge) and the field values a duplicate merge copies onto the surviving row are saved automatically — see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" for that detail. ### Undoing a fix Before you apply, click **Discard** in the list header to drop every suggested fix. After you've applied, click **Undo** or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z — the whole Apply is one undo step, as long as you haven't switched lists or reloaded the page. Rows ignored by the Empty Row fix, and rows ignored by a duplicate merge, can be brought back via the **Ignored** chip in the status bar (or **Show Ignored Rows** from Commands ⌘K) — select them and click **Restore**. ### Cost Fixes are free — no credits are charged for any correction in this category. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · duplicates · email-quality-and-bounces · saving-is-manual. ### FAQ #### How do I fix issues quickly? Open Analyze in the list header, choose Fixes in the category menu (or click the "n fixes" link), and click Fix next to any check that offers one — it corrects every affected row for free. To run them all, click Open as dialog and then Fix all. #### What does Fix all actually change? Click Open as dialog in the Analyze panel header to reveal Fix all, which runs every eligible check in Fixes one after another: formatting cleanup (spacing, capitalization, emoji, prefixes), common typo fixes, marking empty rows as ignored, and merging duplicates. It skips checks that need manual review, including normalization checks and checks with no Fix button at all. #### Does Fix all merge my duplicates too? Yes — Fix all also runs the duplicate-merge checks, marking the extra rows in each matching group as ignored. If you want to review duplicate groups before merging, fix the duplicate checks one at a time instead of using Fix all; see "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" for how a merge decides which row survives. #### Do I need to click Save after using Fix or Fix all? There is no Save button, but formatting and typo corrections are suggestions at first — click Apply · N in the list header to write them to the list, or Discard to drop them. Ignoring rows (empty rows, and the extra rows of a duplicate merge) saves automatically in the background. #### Can I undo a fix? Before applying, click Discard in the list header to drop every suggested fix; after applying, click Undo or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (the whole Apply is one step, within the same session). Rows ignored by the Empty Row fix or a duplicate merge can be brought back via the Ignored chip in the status bar (or Show Ignored Rows in Commands), then select them and click Restore. #### Does Fix or Fix all cost credits? No, Fixes are free on every plan. #### Why doesn't a check I see have a Fix button? Some issues need human judgment rather than a rule-based correction — for example, near-duplicate names that might be two different people. Those checks show only an affected-row count so you can select and review them yourself, with no automatic Fix. --- ## Enrich straight from a check Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/enrich-from-checks Last updated: 2026-10-17 Some checks in the **Analyze** panel can fill the gap they found. A check card then shows an **Enrich (n)** icon: one click starts an enrichment for exactly the rows of that check, without opening the Enrich menu and without a cost dialog. ### Which checks have it - **Missing Name** — finds the person's name from what each row holds (e-mail, LinkedIn). - **Empty Job Title** — finds the job title from e-mail, LinkedIn, or name + company. - **Empty Company** — finds the company from domain, e-mail or LinkedIn. This one needs a company column in the list. - **Company Data Available** — shows **Import company data (n)** (Firmendaten übernehmen) instead: it copies company data we looked up before. It needs an e-mail column and is free. ### What the number means n is the number of rows of that check. When you have rows selected in the grid, n counts only the check's rows that are also selected; with nothing selected it counts all of the check's rows. At 0 the icon is hidden. ### What happens when you click - **Enrich (n)** starts one enrichment job at once. For each row the cheapest route is tried first, and the next route only if that finds nothing. Only empty cells are filled, never a cell that already holds a value, and there is no "Fill empty cells?" prompt. - You are charged per hit; a row with no result costs nothing. The prices are in the price list. - A message says "Enrichment started for N records — the cells fill as results arrive." Progress and the result appear in the task indicator ("Enrichment · step N", then "Enrichment completed"), as for any other enrichment. - **Import company data (n)** reads our own company cache, fills the empty company cells and says "Company data taken from the cache for N records." ### When you don't see the icon The icon is hidden when the list is read-only for you, when it is the shared sample list or a reference list locked to its source, when the check found no rows (or none of the selected rows), and on checks that have no enrichment. Import company data also needs an e-mail column. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · select-rows-by-checks · fixing-issues · enrichment-overview. ### FAQ #### Can I enrich the rows a check finds, right from the Analyze panel? Yes — on checks such as Missing Name, Empty Job Title and Empty Company, click the **Enrich (n)** icon on the check card. It starts an enrichment for exactly that check's rows, fills only empty cells and needs no extra dialog. #### Which checks have an Enrich icon? Missing Name, Empty Job Title and Empty Company show **Enrich (n)**; Company Data Available shows **Import company data (n)**. No other check offers it. #### What does the number in "Enrich (n)" count? The rows of that check. If you have rows selected in the grid, it counts only the check's rows that are also selected; with no selection it counts all of them, and the icon disappears at 0. #### What does Enrich from a check cost, and is there a confirmation? It starts at once with no cost dialog, tries the cheapest route per record, and charges per hit only — a row with no result is free. The per-lookup prices are in the price list; only empty cells are filled. #### What is "Import company data" and why is it free? It fills empty company cells from company data we already looked up for the same domain earlier, so no new lookup happens and it is free. It appears on the Company Data Available check and needs an e-mail column in the list. #### Why don't I see the Enrich icon on a check? It is hidden on read-only lists, on the shared sample list, on reference lists locked to their source, when the check has no rows (or none of your selected rows), and on checks without an enrichment. Create your own list to try it. #### Where do I see the progress of an enrichment started from a check? In the task indicator: it reads "Enrichment · step N" while running and "Enrichment completed", "stopped" or "cancelled" at the end, with counts such as enriched and not found. The cells fill as results arrive. --- ## Finding and merging duplicates Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates Last updated: 2026-10-17 Click **Analyze** in the list header. The checks run as soon as the panel opens, and duplicates are one of the categories. Analysis runs automatically the first time you open the list; click **Re-run Analysis** to refresh it after you've made changes. It checks the whole list against itself and groups rows that look like the same contact. ### Duplicate checks - **Duplicate Email** — same email address (case- and whitespace-insensitive) and the same person. An address shared by different names, or a role mailbox like info@, is reported as **Shared Email** instead and has no Fix. - **Duplicate Name + Company** — same first name, last name AND company (legal form, accents and umlaut spellings ignored: "Müller / Acme GmbH" matches "Mueller / Acme AG"; rows with different LinkedIn profiles are not flagged). - **Duplicate LinkedIn** — same LinkedIn profile (country subdomains like `de.`, mobile links, sub-pages and `?query` parts ignored; a company page in a person column is not a duplicate). - **Duplicate Phone** — same phone number for the same person (formatting and extensions ignored: `+49…` and `0049…` are the same number). A number shared by different names is a switchboard and is reported as **Shared Phone** without a Fix; work-phone columns are never checked. - **Sparse Name Duplicate** — same first + last name where one row has no email, company, LinkedIn URL or phone at all (a "ghost" entry) and the other row does — possibly the same person, an info-level guess; rows whose city, country or job title disagree are not flagged. Check these rows before merging. - **Similar Name + Company** — catches typos, accents and legal-suffix differences (e.g. "Johnathan Smith / Acme Inc" vs. "Jonathan Smith / Acme GmbH") that the exact checks miss; short names must match exactly, "Michael" and "Michaela" are two people. This one only flags rows for you to review; it has no Fix. Each check only runs if your list has the columns it needs (an Email column for Duplicate Email, First Name + Last Name + Company for Duplicate Name + Company, and so on). A check card shows how many rows are affected. ### Merging duplicates Click a duplicate check to select its rows and review them. To merge, open the **Fixes** category in Analyze and click **Fix** next to the duplicate check. Fix applies to every group of matches for that check in the whole list. For each group ListPlus: 1. Keeps the most complete row (the one with the most filled-in fields, prioritizing email, name, company, job title, phone and LinkedIn) as the surviving row. 2. Copies any value the surviving row is missing from the other rows in the group, so you don't lose data that was only on a duplicate. 3. Marks the other rows in the group as **Ignored** — they leave the working list but are not deleted. A confirmation message reports how many groups were merged, how many rows were removed (ignored, not deleted), and how many fields were filled in from the ignored rows. Review before you fix. A merge only touches the rows the check reported: shared inboxes and switchboard numbers are reported separately as Shared Email / Shared Phone and are never merged. Sparse Name Duplicate is a guess, so look at those rows first. **Fix all** in Fixes also runs the duplicate merges, so fix duplicate checks one at a time. ### Saving and undoing A merge is saved automatically: both the ignored duplicate rows and the field values copied onto the surviving row. There is nothing to click. To undo a merge, click the **Ignored** chip in the status bar, or run **Show Ignored Rows** from Commands ⌘K, then select the rows and click **Restore** (or right-click → **Restore** with the number of rows). This brings the ignored rows back into the list; it does not undo the field values that were copied onto the surviving row. To take those back, press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or click **Undo** in the list header) right after the merge, within the same session — or edit them back by hand. ### Cost Finding and merging duplicates inside a list is free — no credits are charged. ### Merging duplicates across lists The Duplicates checks only compare rows inside one list. To combine two lists, drag one list card onto another on Home to open **Consolidate Lists**. The dragged list is the **Source** and the one you drop it on is the **Master**. Choose **Create New List** (the originals stay unchanged) or **Update Master In-Place**, then **Map Columns**. In the **Duplicates** step, choose **Keep all rows** or **Skip duplicates**, and under **Match on column** pick a column such as Email. The wizard shows how many source rows already exist in the master before you click **Consolidate**. Skipped rows are left out, not merged into the existing row. It's free, but the added rows count toward your plan's record limit. ### Adding contacts without creating duplicates Adding a contact to a list from **Person Search** merges into an existing row (matched by email, LinkedIn URL, phone, or name and company) instead of creating a duplicate. **Segment Search** does not do this: adding the same page of results to a list twice creates duplicate rows, because Segment Search always adds new rows. Run the Duplicates checks afterward to clean those up. ### FAQ #### What duplicate checks does ListPlus run? The Analyze panel's Duplicates category checks for matching email, matching LinkedIn URL, matching phone number, matching first name + last name + company, and same first/last name where one entry has no other identifying data. A "Similar Name + Company" check also flags close matches (typos, accents, legal suffixes) for manual review, and Shared Email / Shared Phone point out an address or number that several different people use. #### Where do I see duplicates in my list? Open the Analyze panel in the list header. It runs automatically when the list opens and shows a Duplicates card with the number of affected rows for each duplicate check. #### What happens when I click Fix on a duplicate check? ListPlus finds every group of matching rows for that check across the whole list, keeps the most complete row in each group, copies any values that row is missing from the other rows in the group, and marks those other rows as Ignored so they leave the working list (they are not deleted). Review the rows first — only the rows the check reported are merged, and an address or number that different people share is reported as Shared Email / Shared Phone and never merged. #### Which row's data wins when duplicates are merged? The row with the most filled-in fields is kept, weighted toward email, name, company, job title, phone and LinkedIn. Any field left empty on that row is then filled in from the most complete other row that has a value. #### Does merging duplicates cost credits? No. Finding and merging duplicates within a list is free. #### Can I undo a duplicate merge? Yes for the ignored rows: click the Ignored chip in the status bar (or Show Ignored Rows from Commands ⌘K), select the rows, and click Restore to bring them back. Field values that were copied onto the surviving row during the merge are not reverted by Restore — undo them with ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z right after the merge (same session), or edit them back manually. #### Do I need to click Save after merging duplicates? No. The merge is saved automatically — the ignored duplicate rows and any empty fields it filled in on the surviving row alike. #### What does the Similar Name + Company check find? It catches near-duplicates the exact checks miss — typos, accented letters, and different legal suffixes (GmbH vs Inc) on the same company. It only flags rows for you to review; there is no Fix for it. #### Does merging two lists remove duplicates? Consolidate Lists (drag one list onto another on Home) has its own "Duplicates" step: choose "Skip duplicates" and pick a column (such as Email) to match on, and it won't add source rows that already exist in the master list. This is separate from the in-list Duplicates checks and doesn't merge field values — it just leaves matching source rows out. #### Why did adding contacts from Segment Search create duplicates but Person Search didn't? Adding a contact from Person Search merges into an existing matching row instead of creating a new one. Segment Search always adds new rows, so adding the same page of results twice will create duplicates — run the Duplicates checks in the list afterward to merge them. --- ## Email quality checks and verification Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces Last updated: 2026-10-14 ListPlus checks the quality of your email column two ways: free, instant pattern checks that run automatically on every list (see "What are the Analyze panel checks?" for the full picture), and an optional, paid deliverability check that actually asks a mail server whether an address is real. This topic covers both for email specifically, and explains what a "verified" result does and doesn't guarantee. ### The free email checks ListPlus runs these checks on every row each time you open the **Analyze** panel, at no cost and with no setup. You'll see them there with the exact labels below: - **Invalid Email Format** — not a valid email at all (missing `@`, spaces, more than one `@`, no top-level domain, stray characters such as a trailing dot or `mailto:`; the last ones come with a one-click fix). - **Disposable Email Domain** — a temporary/throwaway address (e.g. a 10-minute-mail service). - **Role-Based Email** — an address like `info@`, `admin@`, `support@` or `bewerbung@` rather than a named person. Send-only addresses like `noreply@` are reported by the Do-Not-Contact check instead. - **Personal Email Domain** — a free consumer provider (Gmail, Yahoo, Outlook.com and similar) — informational, not an error. - **Email Domain Typo** — a likely typo in the domain (e.g. `gmial.com`), with a suggested fix you can apply. - **Numeric-Heavy Email** — a local part that is mostly digits (`4711@`); a name followed by a year (`hans1985@`) is not flagged. - **Test Domain Email** — a development/test domain (e.g. `example.com`, `app.herokuapp.com`, `acme.local`) rather than a real contact address. A few more detailed checks also run but are less common: Consecutive Dots in Email, Plus Addressing (`name+tag@`: deliverable, same mailbox as `name@`), Tenant Default Domain (`…onmicrosoft.com`), and Random Email Local Part. All of these look only at the text of the address — they never contact a mail server, so they cost nothing and run instantly, even on lists with tens of thousands of rows. Fixing what they find (accepting a typo suggestion, clearing a bad value) is covered in "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)". ### Verifying deliverability (the paid step) Format checks can't tell you whether an address actually exists. For that, open a row's **Record** panel or the list's **Enrich** panel (next to Analyze and Record in the list header) and use **Verify Email Deliverability** (in the Enrich panel it's under **Verify**). It checks each address against the mail server for its domain and costs credits per email (the price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)") — but only when the answer is `valid`, `invalid` or `disposable`; a `catch-all`, `unknown` or `error` result is not charged. Results are cached for 7 days, so re-running verification on the same address within that window doesn't cost credits again. After the check, the email cell is marked: **red** means the address is invalid, disposable or couldn't be checked; **amber** means the result was unclear (unknown). Valid and catch-all addresses stay unmarked. The results behind these colours are: - **valid** — the mail server confirmed the mailbox exists. - **invalid** — the mail server rejected the address; it doesn't exist. - **catch-all** — the domain accepts mail for any address at that domain, so the server can't confirm this specific mailbox exists or not (see below). - **disposable** — a temporary/throwaway domain (same signal as the free Disposable Email Domain check, confirmed at the mail-server level). - **unknown** — the mail server gave no clear answer (for example a timeout or greylisting). Treat it as unverified, not as bad. - **error** — the check failed. ListPlus marks the address red and skips it in later enrichments; run the verification again later. Some addresses never reach the mail server at all: if the free checks already flag an address as invalid, disposable, a role account, a test domain, or a typo, ListPlus marks it right away, for free, without calling the mail server: format errors, role accounts like info@, test domains and typos are marked **invalid**, disposable domains **disposable**, and addresses with lots of digits **unknown**. Keep this in mind if you want to email a role account: it will show as invalid. ### What "verified" does and doesn't guarantee A `valid` result means the mailbox existed and accepted mail at the moment of checking — it is a strong, real-time signal, not a promise. Mailboxes get deleted, fill up, or start rejecting mail after the fact, and no verification service — including this one — can guarantee that a message sent later won't bounce. Verifying your list before a send meaningfully reduces bounce risk; it does not eliminate it. ### Catch-all domains A catch-all domain accepts any address, valid or not, so the verifier can't say whether one specific mailbox is real. Many companies run their mail this way on purpose. Treat a `catch-all` result as "unconfirmed, proceed with normal caution" rather than as an error — it is not the same as `invalid`. In the list, a catch-all address isn't highlighted, so it looks like a valid one. It is still unconfirmed. ### Related topics See "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)" for how checks work across all data types, "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)" for applying suggested fixes, "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full credit table, and "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" for merging repeated contacts. ### FAQ #### What free email checks does ListPlus run automatically? Invalid Email Format, Disposable Email Domain, Role-Based Email, Personal Email Domain, Email Domain Typo, Numeric-Heavy Email and Test Domain Email — all pattern-based and free, and they run automatically every time you open the Analyze panel. #### What counts as an invalid email format? Missing the `@` symbol, having more than one `@`, containing a space, missing a top-level domain (like `.com`) after the `@`, or stray characters around the address like `mailto:` or a trailing dot (those get a fix). ListPlus flags these instantly with the **Invalid Email Format** check — no mail server is contacted. #### What is a disposable email address? An address from a temporary or throwaway email service (the kind used to sign up once and never check again). The **Disposable Email Domain** check flags these for free by matching known disposable domains; email verification can also return `disposable` at the mail-server level. #### What is a role-based email address? An address like `info@`, `admin@`, `support@` or `sales@` that reaches a team inbox rather than a named person. The **Role-Based Email** check flags these — useful to know before a personal, name-addressed campaign, since these addresses usually aren't monitored by one individual. #### Does ListPlus flag personal email addresses like Gmail? Yes — the **Personal Email Domain** check marks addresses on free consumer providers (Gmail, Yahoo, Outlook.com and similar). This is informational, not a quality problem; it just tells you the address isn't on a company domain. #### Can ListPlus fix a typo in an email domain? Yes. The **Email Domain Typo** check catches common misspellings (like `gmial.com` instead of `gmail.com`), one-letter slips of the big free-mail domains (`gmaik.com`, `tonline.de`) and typo endings like `.ocm` or `.con`, and suggests the corrected domain, which you can apply from the Analyze panel. #### How do I verify whether an email is actually deliverable? Open the row's **Record** panel, or select rows and open the **Enrich** panel, and click **Verify Email Deliverability** under the **Verify** group. It costs credits per email, and only when the result is valid, invalid or disposable — a catch-all, unknown or error result isn't charged. #### What does a "catch-all" verification result mean? The domain accepts mail for any address, so the mail server can't confirm whether this specific mailbox is real. It's not an error — many legitimate companies configure mail this way — treat it as unconfirmed rather than bad. #### If an email is verified, is it guaranteed not to bounce? No. A "valid" result means the mailbox accepted mail at the moment it was checked — it significantly lowers bounce risk but can't guarantee a future send will succeed, since mailboxes can fill up or be deleted afterward. No verification service, including this one, can promise zero bounces. #### Am I charged for every email I verify? Only when the result is valid, invalid or disposable (charged per email). Catch-all, unknown and error results aren't charged, and addresses the free checks already flagged as invalid, disposable, a typo, a role account or a test domain are marked invalid (or disposable/unknown) without spending a credit. Results are cached for 7 days, so re-checking the same address in that window doesn't cost again. --- ## Name, company and job title checks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/names-companies-job-titles Last updated: 2026-10-15 Names, companies and job titles share the same kinds of problems — bad capitalization, placeholder text, leftover LinkedIn scraping noise, and values leaked from the wrong field. This topic lists the actual checks behind those issues. ### Name checks Capitalization: **Name in ALL CAPS**, **Name in all lowercase**, **Unusual Capitalization** (e.g. "jOHN"; "deGrom" and "mcDonald" are spellings), **Partial ALL CAPS in Name** (e.g. "Frank KOHLER"). Content problems: **Missing Name**, **Placeholder Name** ("test", "N/A", "unbekannt"), **Single Character Name** (a one-character Chinese or Korean name is a name), **Name Too Long**, **Invalid Characters in Name** (including numbers, and text after a comma that is no credential: "Smith, CEO"), **Identical First and Last Name**, **Extra Spaces in Name**, **Name Cut to Initial** ("Z." with no name left). Field mix-ups: **Full Name in Field** ("Hans Smith" with an empty last name; the fix splits it), **Email in Name Field**, **E-mail Local Part as First Name** ("anja.hagen", "hsmith"), **Title Instead of First Name** ("Dr." as the whole first name). Scraping/format artifacts: **Title Prefix in Name** (Dr., Prof., Herr, Frau, Mme, Sra.), **Suffix in Last Name** (Jr., sen., III), **Credential Suffix in Name** (MBA, PhD, CPA, LL.M.; known credentials only), **Connection Degree in Name** (LinkedIn's "· 1st", German "· 1.", "· Sie"), **LinkedIn Status Text in Name** ("We're hiring", "#OpenToWork"), **Middle Initial in Name**, **Encoding Issues**, **Emoji in Name**, **Invisible Characters in Name**, **Remark in Name** (a remark in brackets or quotes such as "(she/her)" or a nickname). A list with a single "Name" column gets the same checks on that column. Capitalization checks only look at values that have the shape of a name: a value with a dot, brackets or digits is not offered a capitalization fix, and up to three capital letters alone ("TDF") are not treated as a name in capitals unless the other name field is in capitals too. ### Company checks **Empty Company**, **Placeholder Company** (also LinkedIn's stand-ins for no company: "Self-employed", "Freelancer", "Student", "Retired"), **Company in ALL CAPS**, **Company in all lowercase**, **Encoding Issues**, **URL as Company Name** (a bare domain like "Booking.com" is only noted), **Legal Suffix Normalization** (GmbH, AG, SE, Ltd, Inc casing; only the case changes, no period is added), **LinkedIn Status Text** ("We're hiring!"), **Tagline in Company Name** ("Acme - Leading provider of…"; "Acme | Globex" is a dual name and stays), **Emoji in Company Name**, **Invisible Characters**. For company names, a part with a digit or sign ("meal&heal", "1KOMMA5°") is left as it is. In an all-caps company name, a known abbreviation ("SAP SE", "KPMG AG") and a part of two letters, or three without a vowel, stay in capitals ("SFC Asset Management", "Hafn IT"); a single word in capitals ("NVIDIA") is not flagged at all, because brand spelling is not something a rule knows. ### Job title checks **Empty Job Title**, **Placeholder Job Title**, **Job Title in ALL CAPS** (acronyms stay: "VP Sales", "Head of Sales DACH"), **Job Title in all lowercase**, **Suspicious Characters in Job Title** (gender forms like "Werkstudent*in", C++ and C# are fine), **Job Title Too Long**, **Tagline in Job Title** ("CEO | Building the future of work" — the fix keeps "CEO"), **Former/Ex Role** ("former", "ex-", "retired", "a. D.", "i. R." at the start of the title; "Founder | Ex-Google" is a current role), **Company Name in Job Title** (the row's company inside the title, or an "at Company" pattern — the fix keeps the title alone), **Emoji in Job Title**, **Invisible Characters in Job Title**, **LinkedIn Status Text in Job Title** ("Open to Work"). ### AI checks in this area Four checks need real-world judgment and run only with **Include AI Analysis** turned on: **Fake/Test Name** (e.g. "Max Mustermann"), **Person Name as Company** (a person's name sitting in the company field), **Department Name Instead of Job Title** (e.g. "Marketing" instead of an actual title), and **Seniority Classification** (sorts titles into C-Level, VP, Director, Manager, IC, Intern). See "ai-checks" for how they work and what data they see. ### Fixing what these checks find These checks have a **Fix** button that corrects every affected row for free: the ALL CAPS, lowercase and capitalization checks for names and companies, Job Title in ALL CAPS and in all lowercase, Tagline in Job Title, Company Name in Job Title, Title Prefix in Name, Credential Suffix in Name, Connection Degree in Name, Remark in Name, First and Last Name E-mail Local Part as First Name, Full Name in Field, LinkedIn Status Text in Name, Extra Spaces in Name, Legal Suffix Normalization, the LinkedIn Status Text checks, Tagline in Company Name, and the Emoji and Invisible Characters checks. See "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)" for what Fix and Fix all do and don't cover. All other checks here, including Encoding Issues, Suffix in Last Name, Placeholder, Former/Ex Role, Job Title Too Long and all four AI checks, show only an affected-row count to select and review. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · fixing-issues · ai-checks · select-rows-by-checks. ### FAQ #### What name checks does ListPlus run? Capitalization (ALL CAPS, lowercase, partial caps), missing/placeholder/too-short/too-long names, names cut to an initial, a title such as "Dr." instead of a first name, invalid characters (including numbers), and LinkedIn-scraping artifacts like title prefixes, suffixes, credential suffixes and connection-degree markers ("· 1st"). #### Can ListPlus strip "Dr." or "Prof." from a name automatically? Yes — the Title Prefix in Name check flags a title/honorific in the first name field and offers a Fix (Strip Title Prefix) that removes it from the field. #### Does ListPlus catch company names that are really a person's name? Yes, with the AI-powered Person Name as Company check (part of Include AI Analysis) — it flags when the company field actually holds a person's name rather than a company. #### What does ListPlus check on job titles besides format? Beyond formatting (ALL CAPS, special characters, length), it flags a tagline after a separator ("CEO | Building the future of work"), Former/Ex Role titles (the person may have left), Company Name in Job Title (the row's company inside the title), department names used as a title (AI check), and classifies seniority (AI check). #### Does ListPlus remove LinkedIn scraping noise like "We're hiring!" from company or job title fields? Yes — LinkedIn Status Text (company) and LinkedIn Status Text in Job Title both catch this and offer a Fix to remove it. #### Are these checks free? The checks listed above under Name, Company and Job Title checks are all free and run automatically. Only the four AI checks (Fake/Test Name, Person Name as Company, Department Name Instead of Job Title, Seniority Classification) are part of the separate, optional Include AI Analysis setting — see "ai-checks". #### Where do I fix the issues these checks find? Open Analyze, and use Fix on any check that offers one for a free automatic correction; checks needing judgment (placeholders, former roles, company-in-job-title, the AI checks) only let you select and review the rows. See "fixing-issues" for details. #### What does the "Remark in Name" check do? It finds a remark in brackets in a name field, such as "(she/her)" or "(HC/SIT-PT)", and its Fix takes it out of the name. The removed remark is kept with the row. #### What does "E-mail Local Part as First Name" mean? The first name field holds the local part of the e-mail ("anja.hagen", "hans_smith", "hsmith") while the last name is empty. The check only reports rows whose e-mail address starts exactly like that; a two-part value is split into first and last name by its Fix. #### Why is a name or company not offered a capitalization fix? Values with a dot, brackets or digits, a domain in the company field ("impact.com"), and company parts with a digit or sign ("meal&heal") are left alone. In an all-caps company name, short parts such as "SFC" or "IT" stay in capitals as abbreviations. --- ## Phone number checks and cleanup Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/phone-numbers Last updated: 2026-10-17 The **Analyze** panel checks the phone column you already have for formatting problems and numbers that are probably not real. It doesn't look up new phone numbers — for finding a company phone or a personal mobile number you don't have yet, see "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)." ### The phone checks All of these are free, deterministic (rule-based) checks that run automatically the first time you open Analyze, and each only runs if your list has a detected phone column: - **Missing Country Code** — the number doesn't start with `+` or `00`. - **Phone Too Short** — fewer than 7 digits. - **Phone Too Long** — more than 15 digits. - **Letters in Phone** — the value contains letters, not just digits and formatting characters; extensions and notes such as `(mobil)` are not counted. - **Fake Phone Pattern** — the subscriber number (country code and leading 0 not counted) is all one digit (like `111 111 1111`) or one straight sequence (like `234 567 8901`), which almost never happens in a real phone number. - **Placeholder Phone** — the cell holds `n/a`, `-`, `?`, `0` or `keine` instead of a number. - **Phone Has Extension** — the value includes an extension (`ext.`, `x123`, `Durchwahl 12`) that will likely be rejected by dialing tools. Two of these offer a **Fix**: Missing Country Code adds the dial code when your list has a country column, and Phone Too Long keeps the first number when two were put in one cell. The others flag the rows so you can review and correct them by hand, or replace the number with a verified one through enrichment. Duplicate phone numbers are a separate check, covered in "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)." ### Clean Phone Numbers (free) **Clean Phone Numbers**, in the Enrich menu's free local section, is a free formatting tool — it doesn't look anything up. It opens a preview where you choose the **Target Format** (E.164, the default — for example `+49301234567` — International or National), set a default country for numbers without a `+` (or use your country column), and optionally **Clear invalid numbers**, then click **Apply to N numbers**; the changes are saved automatically (⌘Z / Ctrl+Z undoes them as one step). It never adds a number that isn't already there — running it can resolve the Missing Country Code check when you set a default country or country column, but it won't fix a number that's genuinely too short, too long or fake, since those need a real, verified number from enrichment instead. See "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)" for the full steps and where the button lives. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · fixing-issues · duplicates · find-phone-and-mobile · email-quality-and-bounces. ### FAQ #### What phone number checks does ListPlus run? Missing Country Code, Phone Too Short, Phone Too Long, Letters in Phone, Fake Phone Pattern (repeated or sequential digits), Placeholder Phone, and Phone Has Extension. They're all free, rule-based checks in the Analyze panel (under All checks, or type the check name in the Analyze search; Fake Phone Pattern also appears under Send-ready), and only run if your list has a phone column. #### Can I fix a bad phone number automatically? Only where the right value is obvious: Missing Country Code adds the dial code from your country column, and Phone Too Long keeps the first of two numbers in one cell. A "too short" or "fake" number usually needs a real replacement value, so those checks only flag the rows. Use Clean Phone Numbers to fix formatting issues for free, or look up a verified number through enrichment for numbers that are genuinely wrong or missing. #### What does Clean Phone Numbers do? In the Enrich menu (free local section), Clean Phone Numbers opens a preview: choose the Target Format — E.164 (default, `+49301234567`), International or National — set a default country for numbers without `+` (or use your country column), and optionally Clear invalid numbers, then click Apply to N numbers. The changes are saved automatically, and ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z undoes them as one step. The item only appears when your phone column has numbers that need cleaning. #### Will Clean Phone Numbers find a phone number I don't have? No — it only reformats existing values; it never adds a number for a row that's empty. To find a new phone number, see "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)," which covers the company switchboard and personal mobile lookups (paid, only charged on a hit). #### Why does a number get flagged as "fake"? The Fake Phone Pattern check looks at the subscriber number only (the country code and a leading 0 are not counted) and flags it when it is all one digit (like `111 111 1111`) or one straight ascending or descending sequence (like `234 567 8901`) — patterns real phone numbers essentially never have, often left over from test data. A standard layout like `+41 44 123 45 67` passes. #### Are duplicate phone numbers caught here too? Duplicate phone numbers are a separate check, Duplicate Phone, covered in "[Finding and merging duplicates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/duplicates)" along with how the merge and formatting-insensitive matching (`+49…` vs `0049…`) work. #### Do the phone checks work without a detected phone column? No — each phone check only runs if ListPlus has recognized a column in your list as the phone column. If your phone numbers aren't being checked, confirm the column's type under Set up → Columns in the list (Content Type). --- ## Country, city and postal code checks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/addresses-and-countries Last updated: 2026-10-14 ListPlus checks country, city and postal code fields for formatting problems and, with AI turned on, for whether the values actually make sense together. ### Format checks (free, automatic) - **Invalid Country Format** — the value is a placeholder, has numbers or invalid special characters, or a 2–3 letter value isn't a real ISO country code (checked against the complete ISO 3166-1 list; `UK` and `UAE` are accepted). - **Invalid ZIP/Postal Code Format** — too short, too long, a city name in the ZIP field, or a placeholder like `00000`; when a country column is present, ListPlus also checks the country's pattern (5 digits for Germany, France, Italy, Spain; 4 for Austria, Switzerland, Belgium; 5 or 5-4 for the US; the UK postcode; and the Dutch, Polish, Canadian, Swedish, Portuguese and Irish patterns). A leading zero Excel stripped, a `D-` prefix or a space instead of the hyphen gets a **Fix**. - **Placeholder City** — `remote`, `n/a`, `tbd` or `unknown` in the city field. - **Country in ALL CAPS** / **Country in all lowercase**, **City in ALL CAPS** / **City in all lowercase** / **Unusual City Capitalization** (e.g. "BErlin"; `Frankfurt (Oder)`, `Freiburg i.Br.` and `Washington, DC` are fine). - **Empty Country Field** / **Empty City Field**. - **Country Format Inconsistency** — the same country appears in different forms across your list (e.g. "US" vs "USA" vs "United States"); it flags the less common forms and offers a **Normalize** fix. This opens a review window that groups the variants and suggests one standard value per group, which you confirm or change before anything is applied. Fix all skips it. - **Phone-Country Mismatch** — the phone's country code doesn't match the country column (the postal code is checked by the ZIP format check). ### AI checks (Include AI Analysis, off by default) Three checks need real-world knowledge an ISO list can't provide, so they run only when **Include AI Analysis** is turned on: - **Misspelled Country Name**: catches misspellings in any language and has a **Fix** that applies the corrected spelling. - **Country Name → ISO Code**: flags full country names (e.g. "Germany", "Deutschland") and has a **Fix** that converts them to the ISO-2 code ("DE"). **Fix all** includes this fix, so if you want to keep full country names, don't use Fix all after an AI analysis. - **City-Country Mismatch** — checks whether the city actually belongs to the country in that row (e.g. "Munich" in "France"). Like every check under Include AI Analysis, these are marked in the app as using credits — see "ai-checks" for how they work and what data is sent. ### Related topics "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)" · "[Which checks use AI, and what they see](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/ai-checks)" · "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)" · "[Selecting and highlighting rows from checks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/select-rows-by-checks)". ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus validate ISO country codes? Yes — the Invalid Country Format check flags a 2–3 letter value that isn't a real ISO country code (all 249 ISO 3166-1 codes are known, UK and UAE accepted), and the AI-powered Country Name → ISO Code check suggests converting a full country name to its ISO-2 code. #### Can ListPlus catch postal codes that don't match the country? Yes — the Invalid ZIP/Postal Code Format check validates the code against the country column for 22 countries (DE, AT, CH, US, GB, FR, NL, PL, CA, SE, PT, IE and more), offers a Fix for a stripped leading zero or a D- prefix, and reports 00000 or n/a as placeholders. #### Does ListPlus catch a city that doesn't belong to the country in the same row (e.g. "Munich" in "France")? Yes, with the City-Country Mismatch check — it's AI-powered (any list of cities would always be incomplete), so it only runs when Include AI Analysis is turned on in the Analyze panel. #### What happens if the same country is written differently across my rows ("US", "USA", "United States")? The Country Format Inconsistency check flags the less common variants and offers a Normalize fix: a review window groups the variants and suggests one standard value per group for you to confirm. Fix all skips it. #### Are the country and city format checks free? Yes — Invalid Country/ZIP Format, ALL CAPS/lowercase checks, Empty Country/City and Country Format Inconsistency are all free deterministic checks. Only Misspelled Country Name, Country Name → ISO Code and City-Country Mismatch are AI checks, part of the separate Include AI Analysis setting. #### Does the AI-based City-Country Mismatch check actually cost credits? It's part of Include AI Analysis, which the app marks as using credits, the same as every other check in that setting — see "ai-checks" and "quality-checks-overview" for how that setting is billed. --- ## Column structure, inconsistent values and cross-field checks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/completeness-and-consistency Last updated: 2026-10-17 Beyond checking individual fields, ListPlus looks at your list as a whole — whether a column mixes types or date formats, whether the same value is written differently across rows, and whether values in different columns contradict each other. All of these are free, deterministic checks. ### Column structure - **Mixed Types in Column** — a column mostly numbers or dates has a minority (over 10%, at least three values) of a different type, often a misaligned import; text columns such as ZIP, phone, names or employee ranges are not checked. - **Date Format Inconsistency** — a date column mixes formats, e.g. `YYYY-MM-DD` with `DD.MM.YYYY`. - **Empty Row** — a row with no data in any column (a row that only holds enrichment data does not count); its **Fix** ("Ignore Empty Rows") marks it as ignored, restorable via the **Ignored** chip in the status bar. ### Inconsistent values (Normalize) Nine content types get their own consistency check when your list has that column: **State**, **Industry**, **Language**, **Salutation**, **Seniority**, **Department**, **Job Function**, **Lead Source** and **Lead Status Inconsistency**. Each flags case or spelling variants of the same value (e.g. "california" vs "California") and offers a **Normalize** fix, which opens a review window where you confirm the standard value for each group. Fix all skips it — see "fixing-issues" for how Normalize fits into Quick fixes. ### Cross-field conflicts - **Email-Company Mismatch** — the email domain doesn't match the company name. - **Name-Email Mismatch** — the email address is not made of the person's name: not the name, not a short form (alex@ for Alexander), not initials (tvm@ for Thomas Van Maele). That can mean the wrong person is attached to that row. Role addresses (info@) are left to the role-address check. ZIP and phone number mismatches against the country column are covered in "addresses-and-countries". ### Related topics "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)" · "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)" · "[Country, city and postal code checks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/addresses-and-countries)" · "[Selecting and highlighting rows from checks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/select-rows-by-checks)". ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus flag an e-mail like alex@ for a contact named Alexander? No — Name-Email Mismatch accepts short forms, initials and the usual arrangements (john.smith, jsmith, smithj, tvm for Thomas Van Maele); it flags only an address that carries no part of the name, like jason@ for Thomas Bannister. #### Can ListPlus catch a column that mixes text, numbers and dates? Yes, with Mixed Types in Column — it flags the minority-type values when a column is mostly one type (number or date) but over 10% of values, and at least three, are something else; text columns such as ZIP or phone are not checked. #### How does ListPlus normalize inconsistent values like "california" and "California"? For nine content types (State, Industry, Language, Salutation, Seniority, Department, Job Function, Lead Source, Lead Status), the matching consistency check flags less common spellings and offers a Normalize fix that opens a review window where you confirm the standard value before anything changes. #### What does "cross-field conflict" mean? A value in one column contradicts a value in another on the same row — for example the Email-Company Mismatch check flags when the email domain doesn't match the company name, and Name-Email Mismatch flags when the email is not made of the person's name. #### Does ListPlus catch inconsistent date formats in a column? Yes — Date Format Inconsistency flags rows using a minority date format (e.g. a handful of `DD.MM.YYYY` values mixed into a mostly `YYYY-MM-DD` column). #### Are these checks free? Yes — every check listed on this page is deterministic and free, and runs automatically the first time you open the Analyze panel. --- ## Block List and the do-not-contact check Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/do-not-contact-and-block-list Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus doesn't send email on your behalf — but it has two ways to flag contacts that must never end up in a list or go out through a pipeline: a Block list you maintain yourself, and an automatic check for clearly unreachable addresses. The list check surfaces as a check in the **Analyze** panel — see "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)" for how checks and selections work in general. ### What is the Block list for? The Block list, in Settings, holds emails and domains that don't belong in your workspace's lists or pipelines — people who objected, competitors and the like. It's **workspace-wide**, not personal: every member of the workspace adds to and is covered by the same list. Two things enforce it: pipelines never pass a blocked contact on to an external tool (your CRM, Slack, a webhook, a sequencer …), and the quality check in a list flags every matching row so you can exclude it before exporting. Neither filters search results, blocks enrichment, nor removes anything automatically on import — see "What it does not do" below. ### Where the Block list lives and how it works Open **Settings** (the gear icon at the bottom of the left rail, or "Settings" in your avatar menu) → **Block list**, under "Workspace", or via **⌘K** → "Open block list". There's one Block list per **workspace**: every member sees the same entries and can add or remove them, and it's enforced across every list and pipeline in that workspace — you add an entry once, not per list. If you work in several workspaces, each has its own Block list (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). Type or paste entries into the box, one per line (commas and semicolons also work), and click **Add**. ListPlus detects the type automatically: anything with an `@` is treated as an email, anything else as a domain (e.g. `example.com`); duplicates are skipped and a confirmation shows how many were added and how many duplicates were skipped. Hover an entry in the list and click the trash icon to remove it. There's no bulk file import — paste multiple lines at once instead. ### What gets flagged or blocked, and how domain entries match A domain entry covers every email at that domain and all its subdomains — add `competitor.com` once and `anna@competitor.com` as well as `anna@eu.competitor.com` are covered. Don't start a domain entry with `@`; ListPlus treats anything containing `@` as an email, so `@competitor.com` would be stored as a literal (and useless) email address instead of a domain. Matching is case-insensitive. The two enforcement points differ slightly in reach: - **Pipelines** (sending to an external target such as a CRM, Slack or a webhook) check the contact's email, company domain and website against the Block list, subdomains included, and skip the entry instead of sending it. Pipelines that only work inside ListPlus, such as Enrich, are not affected. - **The "On the block list" check** in a list's Analyze panel flags a row by the same rule: its email, company domain or website matches the Block list, subdomains included. It runs when the list has an email, a company-domain or a website column. ### A reference list can act as a block list too Besides the Block list in Settings, any list in the workspace that's set up as a reference list with the role **Block** (Set up → Reference list, on that list) is enforced the exact same way, automatically: pipelines skip a matching contact when sending to an external target, and the "On the block list" check flags it. You don't need to copy its entries into the Block list by hand. Like the Block list, it blocks by email address and domain (a LinkedIn URL alone doesn't block), and a change to it can take up to about a minute to take effect. See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for how to set one up — it's a good fit when you want to manage and enrich the blocked companies or contacts as a normal list, with more than just an email or a domain. ### Block list vs. the automatic do-not-contact check These are two separate things. The Block list (and the pipeline check built on it) only covers addresses and domains you added yourself. **Do-Not-Contact Email** is a separate, automatic list check that needs no setup: it flags addresses that are clearly not a person, such as `noreply@`, `unsubscribe@`, `bounce@`, `notifications@`, `alerts@`, `mailer-daemon@` or `postmaster@`, regardless of what's on your Block list. ### What it does not do The Block list does not filter Segment Search results, does not block enrichment lookups, and does not remove or skip anything automatically when you import a file, save a research hit, or hand off from the Inbox — a blocked contact can still land in a list that way. It also does not remove a flagged row from a file export by itself: use **Select N rows** on the "On the block list" check (see "[Selecting and highlighting rows from checks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/select-rows-by-checks)"), and delete or exclude those rows before exporting (deleting is saved automatically). Only sending through a pipeline to an external target is blocked automatically. **Related topics:** quality-checks-overview · select-rows-by-checks · reference-lists · gdpr-your-responsibilities (the legal "right to object" behind this feature) · fixing-issues. ### FAQ #### How do I flag an email or domain so it never ends up in a list or pipeline? Open Settings (the gear icon in the left rail, or "Settings" in your avatar menu) → Block list, or press ⌘K and search "Open block list", then paste the email or domain, one per line, and click Add. From then on, pipelines skip that contact when sending to an external tool, and the "On the block list" check flags every matching row already in your lists. Nothing is hidden, removed or skipped from an import automatically. #### Can I block a whole domain, not just one email? Yes — enter the domain alone (e.g. `example.com`, without `@` or `www.`). Every email, company domain and website at that domain and its subdomains is then covered: pipelines don't send it on, and the list check flags it. #### Does the Block list apply to one list or all of them? There is one Block list per workspace, enforced across every list and pipeline in that workspace, not a separate list per project. Every member of the workspace sees and can edit the same entries; if you work in several workspaces, each one has its own Block list. #### Can I upload a CSV of addresses to block? There's no file upload for the Block list; paste the addresses or domains into the add box, one per line (or comma/semicolon-separated), and click Add in one go. #### Does adding someone to the Block list stop them from appearing in Segment Search or being enriched? No — the Block list only drives the pipeline send check and the "On the block list" list check. It doesn't filter Segment Search results and doesn't block enrichment lookups. #### Does a pipeline really skip blocked contacts automatically? Yes, for pipelines that send to something outside ListPlus — your CRM, Slack, a webhook, a sequencer. A matching entry is skipped instead of sent, checked by email, company domain and website (domains include their subdomains). Pipeline steps that stay inside ListPlus, such as Enrich, aren't affected. #### Does the Block list remove blocked rows from my export automatically? No — a flagged row still exports unless you act on it first. Use the check's Select N rows to select the blocked rows, then delete them before exporting — the deletion is saved automatically. #### What's the difference between the Block list and the do-not-contact check? The Block list only covers entries you added yourself. The separate Do-Not-Contact Email check is automatic and always on — it catches addresses like noreply@, unsubscribe@, notifications@ or postmaster@ without any setup. #### How do I remove an entry from the Block list? Open Settings → Block list, hover the entry, and click the trash icon next to it. #### Can I use a whole list as a block list instead of pasting entries? Yes — set that list's role to "Block" under Set up → Reference list in that list. It's then enforced exactly like the Block list (pipelines skip it, the list check flags it), without adding its entries to the Block list by hand. See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for how to set one up. --- ## Which checks use AI, and what they see Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/ai-checks Last updated: 2026-10-10 Almost all of ListPlus's 100+ checks are rule-based and free. A small set needs real-world judgment instead of a fixed pattern, so they run on AI — this topic lists exactly which ones, and points to what data they see. ### The 9 AI checks - **Fake/Test Name** — detects fake, test or placeholder names (e.g. "Max Mustermann"). - **Second Given Name in Last Name** — the last name may start with a second given name ("Jona" | "David Hoffmann"). It is a hint with no automatic fix. - **Not a Person (AI)** — the name fields hold a company, a mailbox like "office", random characters, or a company beside the name. It is a hint with no automatic fix, and only name fields that do not simply look like a person's name are sent. - **Person Name as Company** — the company field actually holds a person's name. - **Department Name Instead of Job Title** — a department/team name (e.g. "Marketing") sits in the job title field. - **Seniority Classification** — classifies job titles into C-Level, VP, Director, Manager, IC or Intern. - **Misspelled Country Name** — catches country-name misspellings in any language. - **Country Name → ISO Code** — suggests converting a full country name to its ISO-2 code. - **City-Country Mismatch** — checks whether the city in a row actually belongs to the country in that same row. Every other check in the Analyze panel is deterministic (pattern- and rule-based) and free. Two of them, Misspelled Country Name and Country Name → ISO Code, have a Fix button (see "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)"); the other seven only flag rows for review. ### Turning them on These 9 checks are off by default. Open **Analysis settings** (gear icon) in the Analyze panel, tick **Include AI Analysis**, and click **Re-run Analysis**. The AI checks are billed by usage from the workspace's credits (the amount shows afterwards, like other AI actions); if the balance is too low, the AI part doesn't run and you see an insufficient-credits message while the free checks still complete. They run only for signed-in members who can edit the list — readers of the sample list get the free checks only. ### What the AI sees None of these checks send whole rows to the AI. They collect the distinct values of the column being checked (or unique value pairs for a check that compares two columns, like city and country), remove duplicates, and send only that short list together with the rule — a 10,000-row list with a few hundred unique job titles is sent as a few hundred values, not ten thousand rows. See "what-the-ai-sees" for the full picture of what ListPlus sends to AI across every feature, not just checks. ### Related topics "[What the Analyze panel checks and how the quality score works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/quality-checks-overview)" · "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)" · "[Fix and Fix all — correcting issues automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/fixing-issues)". ### FAQ #### Which checks in the Analyze panel use AI? Nine: Fake/Test Name, Second Given Name in Last Name, Not a Person (AI), Person Name as Company, Department Name Instead of Job Title, Seniority Classification, Misspelled Country Name, Country Name → ISO Code, and City-Country Mismatch. Every other check is rule-based and free. #### How do I turn on the AI checks? Open Analysis settings (gear icon) in the Analyze panel, tick Include AI Analysis, then click Re-run Analysis. They're off by default. #### Do the AI checks cost credits? Yes — the 9 AI checks are billed by usage from the workspace's credits, with the amount shown after the run, unlike the standard checks, which are free. With too few credits the AI part doesn't run (you see an insufficient-credits message), and the AI checks run only for signed-in members who can edit the list; readers of the sample list get the free checks only. #### Does an AI check see my whole row? No — it only sees the distinct values of the column(s) that specific check looks at (for example just the city and country values, with duplicates removed), never your other columns or whole rows. See "what-the-ai-sees" for details. #### Why is City-Country Mismatch an AI check instead of a lookup list? A fixed list of every city in every country, in every language, would always be incomplete and hard to maintain — an AI check handles this reliably without one. #### If I don't turn on Include AI Analysis, do I miss any format or completeness checks? No — all checks covering formats, missing fields, duplicates and consistency run automatically for free. Include AI Analysis only adds the 9 checks above, plus a short written AI assessment of the list in the overview. #### What does the "Not a Person (AI)" check find? It flags name fields that hold a company, a mailbox like "office", random characters, or a company beside the person's name. It is a hint with no automatic fix, and only name fields that do not simply look like a person's name are sent to the AI. --- ## Tidying up a list step by step Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/tidy-up-a-list Last updated: 2026-10-17 **Tidy up this list** is a guided cleanup. It goes through the problems in name, e-mail, company and job title columns that have an automatic fix, in small groups, shows every change on examples from your own list, and writes only after your approval at the end. ### Where to find it Open **Analyze** in the list header. When at least one check has an automatic fix, a **Tidy up** (Aufräumen) link sits beside the "n fixes" link above the checks (tooltip "Step by step, with preview and approval"). It opens a side panel; the list stays usable beside it. The link is not shown on Overview, inside Fixes, while you search or while the analysis runs, and not on the shared sample list or a list you can only read. In a narrow panel it shrinks to its icon, and in a very narrow one it is hidden — widen the panel to get it back. ### How a run goes 1. **Start** — the panel states what will never happen: nothing is written until you approve, no row is deleted, no column is removed, nothing is written back to your source. Click **Start tidying**. 2. **Structure** — what moves or removes a part of a value: remarks in brackets taken out of names, "first.last" split into two fields, titles, remarks in brackets or quotes (incl. nicknames), emoji, invisible characters. 3. **Name fields (optional)** — the AI can sort out name fields that do not hold a person (see below). 4. **Spelling** — capitalisation, legal forms and e-mail typos. It is proposed on top of what you accepted before. 5. **Approval** — the groups you accepted, each with its number of rows and up to 3 examples, and the total number of cells that would be written. One button writes. Each group shows how many rows and which columns it touches, up to 10 random example rows (old value struck through, new value beside it), and the grid beside the panel shows exactly that group's rows with the affected cells highlighted. Per group you choose **Review** or **Skip**; a Safe group also offers **Accept all**. ### Safe and Please review - **Safe** — no letter is lost and none is added. You may accept all rows of the group at once. - **Please review** — the spelling changes. Click **Review** and tick the rows you want (a checkbox at the top ticks all); nothing is pre-ticked. A fix that would lose or invent characters is not proposed at all — except the correction of a known e-mail domain typo, which always comes as "Please review". Groups of more than 500 rows come in parts. ### The draft Every proposed change sits in a draft. The draft is not kept: closing the panel or reloading the page discards it, and you start again. ### After you approve The approval lists the changes per group; you can still take a group out. A cell someone changed during the run is not overwritten — the report lists it. Every written change keeps its old value and can be undone one by one in the **Changes** panel; what a fix removed from a value (a remark, a remark in brackets or quotes) is kept with the row. The checks are counted again automatically, without the AI checks. The changes are not sent to a connected source — that stays a separate step in the **Changes** panel (**Write to HubSpot**, or whichever source the list comes from). **Related topics:** fixing-issues · names-companies-job-titles · ai-checks · what-the-ai-sees. ### FAQ #### What is "Tidy up this list"? It is a guided cleanup in the Analyze panel: it goes through the problems in name, e-mail, company and job title columns that have an automatic fix, in small groups, shows each change on examples from your list, and writes only after your final approval. Other fixes (countries, duplicates, empty rows) stay in the Analyze panel. #### Where do I find Tidy up this list? Open Analyze in the list header; the Tidy up link beside "n fixes" above the checks appears when at least one check has an automatic fix (not on Overview or inside Fixes; hidden when the panel is very narrow). It is not offered on the shared sample list or on a list you can only read. If none of the fixes is in a name, e-mail, company or job title column, the run says "Nothing to tidy". #### Does Tidy up change my data before I approve? No — nothing is written until you click the write button at the final approval. Every proposed change sits in a draft; no row is deleted, no column is removed, and nothing is written back to your source. #### What happens if I close the panel or reload the page? The draft is discarded and nothing is written; you start again with "Start tidying". Changes you already approved and wrote stay in the list. #### What do the examples in each group show? One group of changes is shown at a time, with up to 10 random example rows from your own list (old value struck through, new value beside it). The grid beside the panel shows exactly that group's rows with the affected cells highlighted. #### What is the difference between "Safe" and "Please review"? "Safe" means no letter is lost and none is added, so you may accept the whole group at once. "Please review" means the spelling changes; you tick the rows you want, nothing is pre-ticked. A fix that would lose or invent characters is not proposed at all, except a known e-mail domain typo, which always comes as "Please review". #### In which order does Tidy up work? First Structure (remarks in brackets or quotes taken out of names, "first.last" split, titles, emoji, invisible characters), then optionally the AI sorts the name fields, then Spelling (capitalisation, legal forms, e-mail typos). The spelling is proposed on top of what you accepted before. #### What is the AI step "Do the name fields hold people at all?" It is an optional step between Structure and Spelling that sorts name fields holding a company, a mailbox like "office", random characters, or a name with a company in the other field. The name fields of rows it names get no capitalization fix; the grid shows these rows so you can edit them yourself. You can skip the step with "Go on without sorting". #### Does the AI step cost credits and what does it see? Yes, it uses AI and consumes credits, like the AI checks of an analysis. Only name fields that stand out are sent, not whole rows; rows that simply look like a person's name and rows with a LinkedIn profile are left out, and each distinct value is sent once. #### What happens if a cell changed while I was tidying? A cell that someone changed during the run is not overwritten. The report after writing says how many cells were left as they were and shows up to 10 of them. #### Can I undo what Tidy up wrote? Yes — every change keeps its old value and can be undone one by one in the Changes panel. What a fix removed from a value (a remark in brackets or quotes, including a nickname) is kept with the row, and the checks are counted again automatically afterwards (without the AI checks). #### Are the changes sent to HubSpot, Attio or another connected source? No — Tidy up only changes the list. Sending changes back to a connected source is a separate step in the Changes panel (the button "Write to …" with the source's name). --- ## Section: Enrich ## How enrichment works Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview Last updated: 2026-10-17 Enrichment fills the gaps in a list: missing emails, phone numbers, LinkedIn profiles, job titles and company data. ListPlus asks specialised providers, keeps the best value per field, and only charges credits when data is actually found (a few checks charge per attempt — see the price list). ### Where to start - **The Enrich button** in the list toolbar — ready-made assistants (Company Enrichment, Campaign-Ready, Full Profile) and single steps grouped by goal. - **The selection bar**, after selecting rows — pick exactly which fields to fill for just those rows. - **The wand icon** that appears on hover over an empty, enrichable cell — fills that one cell. - **The record panel**, open on a single row — runs any single lookup for that contact. See "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" for a full decision table of when to use each one. ### Before you run it: the plan When you enrich selected rows from the selection bar, ListPlus shows a plan before anything is charged: which contacts qualify, the likely route and the most it can cost ("at most …"). That ceiling already includes the fallback routes ListPlus tries when the first one finds nothing; with gender it says "plus AI tokens", because AI is billed by usage. ListPlus plans every row again when the job starts and never spends more than the "at most"; you pay only per hit. For the details see "Enrich selected rows". The "only what is missing" switch, on by default, lists only fields that still have gaps, and rows that already have every chosen field are skipped. Actual cost is usually lower, since most lookups only charge on a hit. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" and "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" for exact per-action prices, "Find a verified email" for email routes, and "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)" for phone and mobile routes. ### What happens with the results An enrichment of selected rows or of the whole list is a **run** on the server: the rows show a running ring, and as results arrive the server writes them into the empty cells of those rows by itself — the rule is "only empty cells", so a cell that already has a value, including one you typed, is not overwritten (⌘Z / Ctrl+Z undoes a fill). There is no prompt to confirm. Every value also stays in a data layer next to the row, so you can take it over later or review it record by record — see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)". One rule picks the value per field: the most recent job title and company, a working address at the current company, a mobile before a landline, otherwise the most reliable source. ### Good to know - You don't have to wait: a run continues on the server when you close the tab or switch lists. The task indicator at the top shows its progress, and the rows keep their ring until they are done. FullEnrich lookups are sent in bulk and can take a few minutes for a large list. - A run that cannot continue stops and says why — not enough credits, the provider is not answering, or the maximum you accepted at the start is reached. Nothing is lost: click **Continue** in the task indicator, or start the same enrichment again — rows already enriched are not charged again. - If a row was already enriched but its cells stayed empty, "Apply values" in the Enrich menu, or **Take over** next to a value in the record panel, writes the stored data into the cells for free. - Repeating a LinkedIn, company or person lookup that already found data is usually served from ListPlus's cache at no cost. - Your own edits are written automatically before an enrichment starts. The Enrich menu only blocks while AI suggestions are open — Apply or Discard them first. - In a workspace, enrichment spends the **workspace owner's** credits (see "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)"). If that balance runs out during a run, the run stops and the remaining rows aren't charged; after a top-up, start it again — see "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)". - Checks in Analyze are free and show you which rows are ready and which need enrichment first. **Related topics:** enrich-selected-rows · which-enrich-button · find-verified-email · find-phone-and-mobile · fill-empty-cells · price-list · what-does-one-contact-cost. ### FAQ #### How do I enrich my list? Click Enrich in the list toolbar and choose an assistant such as Campaign-Ready or a single step such as Company Lookup, or select rows first and use the selection bar. The selection bar's dialog shows the most it can cost ("at most") before it starts and Enrich menu entries show their price; lookups charge only on a hit. See "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" for the right entry point. #### Which data can enrichment add? Company data (industry, size, location, website, LinkedIn page), LinkedIn profiles, verified emails, company and personal mobile numbers, and email verification results. Free local clean-ups (like formatting phone numbers) and AI-derived fields such as gender or seniority are also available from the Enrich button. #### What does enrichment cost? Most enrichments cost credits, from a small amount for an email check up to a much higher price for a deep email-and-phone search; e-mail and phone lookups only charge when they actually find something, while searches and imports are charged per run. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full table and "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" for the cheapest route to an email or phone. #### Why were my cells not filled after the enrichment? A run fills only empty cells, and rows with a ring are still being worked on. If a run stopped early (credits, provider, or your accepted maximum), click Continue in the task indicator (or start it again) for the rest. For rows enriched earlier whose cells stayed empty, select them, open the Enrich menu and click "Apply values" ("Fill empty" tab); see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)". #### What does the enrichment need to work? At least one identifier per row: an email or domain for company data, a LinkedIn URL or a name plus company for person data. ListPlus picks the best available input automatically and skips rows that have nothing usable. #### Why does the same enrichment cost nothing the second time? LinkedIn profile, company and person lookups that already returned data are kept in ListPlus's cache for a while — person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) for 7 days in your workspace. Running them again is served from the cache and shows as cached in the progress, without spending credits. Lookups that found nothing are run again. #### Can I enrich a single contact instead of the whole list? Yes. Select just that row and use Enrich, or click the wand icon that appears on hover over an empty, enrichable cell to fill only that one field. The record panel also lets you run any single lookup for one contact. #### Which source wins when several providers return different values? One rule picks the value per field: the most recent job title and company, a working address at the current company, a mobile before a landline, otherwise the most reliable source. Filling never overwrites a cell you typed, unless you set a list rule's Enrich "Cells" setting to overwrite. If a different provider value suits you better, edit the cell directly. See "[When enrichment sources disagree, which value is offered?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/which-source-wins)" #### Can I close the tab while an enrichment is running? Yes. The run continues on the server and fills the empty cells as results arrive; when you come back, the task indicator shows the progress or result and unfinished rows show their ring. A run that stopped early tells you why, and Continue (or starting it again) goes on with the rows that are left. #### How do I know which button to click to enrich? It depends on scope: the Enrich button for a ready-made assistant or the whole list, the selection bar to pick exact fields for selected rows, the wand icon for one empty cell, and the record panel for one contact. See "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" for the full decision table. --- ## Which Enrich button do I use? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus has several ways to start an enrichment, and they all end up in the same engine — the difference is only _scope_: how many rows and which fields. This article is a decision table for picking the right one. For how the enrichment itself works, costs and the review step, see "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)," "Find a verified email," "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)," and "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)." ### Decision table | I want to… | Use | Where | Good for | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Run a ready-made bundle (e.g. Campaign-Ready, Full Profile) on the whole list, or pick a single step for everyone (or only the selected rows, if any are selected) | **Enrich menu** | List toolbar | No field-picking; a preset that covers several fields at once | | Fill exactly one or two fields (e.g. only Email) for a specific set of rows | **Selection bar's Enrich** | Appears after you select rows in the grid | Precise control over which field and which rows before anything is charged | | Fix one empty cell right now | **Wand icon** | Hover over an empty, enrichable cell | The fastest single fix, with the cheapest option preselected | | Run several lookups on one contact, or see everything already known about that row | **Record panel** | Open a row's record panel | Working through contacts one at a time | | Fill exactly the rows still missing what a specific campaign goal needs (e.g. Cold Email needs a deliverable email) | **Evaluation cockpit's Enrich button** | The strip under the header, once an evaluation is active | Opens a plan for the enrichable rows, and you start it with "Start enrichment"; no manual field-picking | | Fill the field a check finds missing (Missing Name, Empty Company, Empty Job Title) | **Enrich (n)** on the check card | Analyze panel | One click, cheapest route per record, charged per hit, starts at once | | Type what you want instead of clicking through menus | **Prompts panel (AI command)** | Prompts panel (More → Prompts in the list header) | Free-form requests like "enrich company data from email domains"; the AI works out the right lookup | ### Evaluation cockpit Click the **Find & evaluate** field in the middle of the list header and choose an evaluation (for example Cold Email or CRM Quality) under "Choose evaluation" — this is the same picker used to grade your list against a campaign goal. Once an evaluation is active, a strip appears under the header showing how many rows are ready, enrichable, and unusable for that goal, plus an "Enrich" button. Clicking it opens an Enrich dialog for the rows counted as enrichable (or only the enrichable rows in your current selection). It groups them by what they are missing ("Gap patterns"), shows the route and the worst case ("at most N Cr"), and lets you untick patterns. Nothing is charged until you click "Start enrichment". Contacts with nothing to search from are skipped and not charged. Use "Edit evaluations" in the same picker to change which fields a goal requires. ### AI command (Prompts panel) The Prompts panel (More → Prompts in the list header) — type into the "Ask about your data..." field — accepts plain requests such as "enrich company data from email domains," "get company info from LinkedIn," or "find LinkedIn profiles by name and company." The AI turns your request into the fields it asks for and starts the same job as the selection bar: each row gets the cheapest route from what it holds, with fallbacks, and empty cells fill on the server as results arrive. It only fills empty cells — a request to re-enrich filled cells is declined; clear those cells first. Above 500 rows a "Large operation" confirmation comes first. Every AI command is also billed by usage, typically a small fraction of a credit for understanding the request (see "[How credits work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/credits-explained)"); for a paid enrichment task, that AI-command charge comes on top of the enrichment's own credits. A typed enrichment request asks once ("Run this action?") before it runs. That question shows what the AI wants to do, but no worst-case cost — if you want to see the cost before anything is charged, use the selection bar's Enrich instead. **Related topics:** enrichment-overview · find-verified-email · find-phone-and-mobile · fill-empty-cells · credits-explained. ### FAQ #### Which button should I use to enrich my whole list at once? Click Enrich in the list toolbar and pick a ready-made bundle like Campaign-Ready or Full Profile, or a single step such as Company Lookup. It runs on the whole list without you picking fields one by one. #### How do I fill just one field for a group of selected rows? Select the rows, click Enrich in the selection bar, and pick exactly the field you need (for example Person → Contact details → Email) in the field picker. This gives you the most control over scope before anything is charged. #### What's the fastest way to fix a single empty cell? Hover over the empty cell and click the wand icon that appears — it opens a single-cell window listing every route that can fill it, cheapest first. #### How do I run several lookups on one contact? Open that row's record panel. It offers every single lookup for that one contact and shows any enrichment data already stored for the row. #### What is the Enrich button in the strip under the header, and when do I see it? It only appears once you've picked an evaluation (a campaign goal like Cold Email) from the "Find & evaluate" field's "Choose evaluation" picker. It then shows ready/enrichable/unusable counts for that goal, and its Enrich button opens a plan for the enrichable rows, and you start it with "Start enrichment". #### Can I just type what I want instead of clicking through menus? Yes — the Prompts panel (More → Prompts in the list header) — type into the "Ask about your data..." field — takes plain requests like "enrich company data from email domains" or "find LinkedIn profiles by name and company," and the AI starts the same enrichment job as the selection bar's Enrich (empty cells only). #### Does typing an enrichment request cost more than clicking the Enrich menu? The enrichment itself is charged the same way either way. Typing the request adds the usual small AI-command usage fee for understanding your message, on top of any enrichment credits the task itself spends. #### I don't have any rows selected — can I still enrich? Yes. With nothing selected, the Enrich menu in the toolbar runs on the whole list, the wand icon fills one cell, and the record panel handles one row at a time — the selection bar is only needed when you want to target specific rows. --- ## Enrichment Wizards: Company Enrichment, Campaign-Ready, Full Profile Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-assistants Last updated: 2026-10-15 The Enrich menu's **ENRICHMENT WIZARDS** section offers ready-made, multi-step enrichment plans instead of one lookup at a time. Each wizard runs several lookups in sequence, and later steps skip rows that an earlier step already filled. For single lookups and the other ways to start an enrichment, see "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" ### The three wizards - **Company Enrichment** — fills in domain, industry, employee count, location and LinkedIn company data; an optional step adds deeper Crunchbase data (funding, founded year). - **Campaign-Ready** — fills in what outbound needs: LinkedIn profile, job title, company data and an email, plus AI-derived gender and seniority. - **Full Profile** — everything Campaign-Ready does, with LinkedIn profile data switched on by default, plus optional Crunchbase and FullEnrich (profile from email) steps. A wizard's price is the sum of the paid steps that are on by default (company data, LinkedIn profile, verified email); optional steps add their own price (Crunchbase, FullEnrich profile), steps with nothing left to do cost no credits, and the email lookup charges only on a hit. The step prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." The exact figure for your rows is shown on the Start Plan button before the start. A fourth wizard, **Detect Job Changes**, lives in the same menu section but solves a different problem — see "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)" for what it does. ### How a plan works Clicking a wizard opens a plan instead of running anything right away. The plan groups the lookups into steps (for example "Find Company Identifiers," "Get Company Details"); each step shows one primary lookup plus, when there are cheaper or alternative ways to get the same data, a "+N Fallbacks" toggle you can expand. Click the dot next to any step or fallback to switch it on or off before you start — a step with nothing left to do, because an earlier step already filled it, is dimmed automatically. Steps that are optional by nature (marked "opt," such as Crunchbase) start switched off; turn them on for the extra data at the extra cost. ### Budget: no cap field, just toggles There's no separate budget field to fill in. The Start Plan button shows the live estimated total and updates as you switch steps on or off, so you control the cost before you start. ### Running and billing The wizard runs its enabled steps one after another, waiting for each to finish before starting the next, and re-plans the remaining steps after each one, so later steps concentrate on rows still missing data. Credits are charged per step for the lookups that actually run — see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the general rule. The AI steps (Detect Gender, Analyze Job Seniority) aren't included in the estimate; they're billed by AI usage like other AI derivations. You can cancel a running wizard — the step running at that moment finishes and its results and charges stay, and steps not yet started are skipped and never charged. In a workspace, a wizard spends the workspace owner's credits like any other enrichment. If the balance runs out, the step running at that moment stops with the reason "not enough credits" (see "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)"), and the next steps don't start while the balance can't cover their estimate. After a top-up, run the wizard again — rows already enriched are not charged again. ### Scope and results A wizard runs on your selected rows if you have any selected, otherwise on the whole list — see "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" for how this compares to the other enrichment entry points. Each step runs on the server like any other enrichment run: empty cells are filled as results arrive, with no prompt, and cells that already have a value are never touched. Filled cells are saved automatically. **Related topics:** which-enrich-button · fill-empty-cells · job-change-detection · enrichment-overview · price-list. ### FAQ #### What is the Enrichment Wizards section in the Enrich menu? It's a set of ready-made, multi-step enrichment plans — Company Enrichment, Campaign-Ready and Full Profile — that run several lookups in sequence instead of you picking one at a time. A fourth wizard, Detect Job Changes, covers a different task; see "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)." #### What's the difference between Company Enrichment, Campaign-Ready and Full Profile? Company Enrichment is the cheapest and fills only company data — domain, industry, size, location, LinkedIn. Campaign-Ready costs more per row and adds LinkedIn profile, job title, company data and an email, plus AI-derived gender and seniority, while Full Profile costs the most and runs everything Campaign-Ready does with LinkedIn profile data switched on by default, plus optional Crunchbase and FullEnrich profile steps that add their own price. The exact figure for your rows is shown on the Start Plan button before the start. #### Can I turn off individual steps before running a wizard? Yes. Every step and fallback has its own on/off dot in the plan; steps marked "opt" (like Crunchbase) start switched off, and you can also disable any step that's on by default. #### Is there a budget I can set before running a wizard? There's no separate budget field. The Start Plan button shows the live estimated total, and it updates as you switch steps on or off, so you control the cost by choosing which steps run. #### When am I charged credits during a wizard run? Per step, as it completes, for the lookups that actually run — see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the general rule. Steps you switch off, or that have nothing left to do because an earlier step already filled it, never charge anything. The AI steps (Detect Gender, Analyze Job Seniority) aren't part of this estimate; they're billed by AI usage like other AI derivations. #### What happens if the credits run out while a wizard is running? The step running at that moment stops with the reason "not enough credits": rows it already enriched keep their results and filled cells, and the rest are not charged. The following steps don't start while the balance can't cover their estimate. In a workspace the wizard spends the owner's credits, so once the owner has topped up, run the wizard again on the rows that are still missing data — rows already enriched are not charged again. #### Does a wizard run on my whole list or just selected rows? It runs on your current selection if any rows are selected, otherwise on the whole list — the same scope rule as the rest of the Enrich menu. #### What happens to the results after a wizard finishes? Each step runs on the server like any other enrichment run: the rows show the running ring, and empty cells are filled as results arrive — there is no prompt to confirm. Cells that already have a value are never touched; see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)" for applying stored values later. #### Can I cancel a wizard while it's running? Click Cancel (it replaces Start Plan while the wizard runs); the step running at that moment finishes, and its results and charges stay. Steps not yet started are skipped and never charged. --- ## Find a verified email address Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email Last updated: 2026-10-17 Inside a list, ListPlus finds emails the same way no matter which button you click: it looks at what you already have for that row — a LinkedIn URL, an email to reverse-lookup, or just a name and company — and runs the cheapest lookup that can work from it. This page is about running that lookup in a list, on one row, one cell, or many rows at once. For exact credit amounts and charge rules per action, see "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" and "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)." ### Four ways to start it - **Select rows, then the selection bar's Enrich button** — opens a field picker: choose the **Person** entity (selected by default), then **Contact details** group, then the **Email** field (also available: Phone, Mobile, LinkedIn URL). Click Next to see the plan. - **The Enrich button in the list toolbar** — under **Contact Enrichment**: "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)," "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)," "Contact Profile (by Email)" and "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)"; under **Find Missing Email or Phone**: "Find Email (by Name & Company)" and "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)." Items only appear when the list has the input they need. Each item shows its estimated cost for the rows it applies to. - **The record panel**, open on a single row — the same named buttons, for just that contact. - **The wand icon** over an empty email cell — opens a single-cell window that lists every possible route for that one row, cheapest first, with a "cheapest" or "recommended" badge. ### The plan: which route it picks and why After you pick Email in the selection-bar field picker, ListPlus shows the plan before charging anything. For each record it picks the cheapest route that can work from what the row already has and, if that finds nothing, the next one (for example Contact Brief, then the wider FullEnrich search); the "at most" covers both and you pay only per hit. For example, it starts from a LinkedIn URL when there is one, and otherwise from name + company. The plan screen shows each group of rows with its route, the cost of each step, and the worst case ("at most N Cr"). Rows with no usable input at all (no LinkedIn URL, no email, no name+company) are listed under "Remains open (no route)" and are skipped, never charged. ### What you need for each button | You already have | Use | Returns | | ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | A LinkedIn profile URL | "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" | Verified email, the company's main phone, company data | | A name and company | "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" | Same as above, matched by name + company | | A name and company, no hit yet | "Find Email (by Name & Company)" | Verified email from a wider waterfall search | | A name and company, need phone too | "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" | Verified email and a direct phone number | | Only an email (reverse lookup) | "Contact Profile (by Email)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) | Name, LinkedIn URL (job title, company when available) | | Only a company name (no person) | none of the above — find a name or a LinkedIn URL first (see below), then use a Contact Brief button | — | If you have none of these for a row, a free Google search for a LinkedIn URL by name and company ("LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu) is usually the cheapest way to get an input the paid routes can use. ### What gets charged and when Most email routes charge only when they find something, so a miss costs nothing. Three exceptions: LinkedIn Profile Search by name and company charges for every attempt. A LinkedIn profile lookup charges whenever the profile is found, even if it contains no email. "Find Email + Phone" charges the email price when it finds only an email, and its higher phone price only when it finds a phone. The plan screen lists each step, so you can see which one applies before you start. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full charge rule per action, including the two-part charge on the chained version of "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)." ### Verify what you found Finding an email and confirming it's deliverable are two separate steps. After a lookup fills the cell, run "Verify Email Deliverability" (Enrich menu or record panel) to check the address against a live mail server before you send to it — see "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)" for what a verified/invalid/catch-all result means and what it costs. ### When no email is found A route that finds nothing doesn't charge you (except the cases listed above), and the cell stays empty so you can try a different route — for example, if "Contact Brief" comes up empty, the wider "Find Email (by Name & Company)" waterfall checks more sources. From the selection bar this fallback runs by itself; from the Enrich menu you start it yourself. If every route is exhausted, the row simply has no known input a lookup can start from; check the row for a usable name, company, or LinkedIn URL first, since a missing anchor is the most common reason nothing is found. **Related topics:** which-enrich-button · what-does-one-contact-cost · price-list · reveal-email-and-phone · email-quality-and-bounces · fill-empty-cells · find-phone-and-mobile. ### FAQ #### How do I find emails for everyone in my list at once? Select the rows, click Enrich in the selection bar, choose Person → Contact details → Email, then Next. ListPlus shows the route and worst-case cost for the selected rows before charging anything. #### Which button finds an email from just a LinkedIn URL? "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" in the Enrich menu, the record panel, or the single-cell fill window — it returns the verified email, the company's main phone number, and basic company data, charged only if it finds an email. #### Which button finds an email from a name and company? Start with "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" — the cheaper route. If it finds nothing, "Find Email (by Name & Company)" runs a wider waterfall search across more sources for a higher chance of a hit, at a higher cost only if it succeeds. #### Can I find who an email belongs to, instead? Yes — "Contact Profile (by Email)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) takes an email you already have and returns the person's name, job title, company, and LinkedIn URL, charged only on a match. #### How does ListPlus decide which route to use? It looks at what each row already has, such as a LinkedIn URL or a name and company, and picks the cheapest route per record; if that finds nothing, the selection bar's job tries the next one (for example Contact Brief, then the wider FullEnrich search), and the "at most" covers both. Before you start, the plan screen shows each group of rows with its route, the cost of each step and the worst case ("at most N Cr"). #### Am I charged if no email is found? Usually not. Exceptions: LinkedIn Profile Search (charged per attempt), a LinkedIn profile lookup (charged when the profile is found, with or without an email) and "Find Email + Phone" (charged when it returns data). #### What if a row has no LinkedIn URL and no name + company? That row is listed under "Remains open (no route)" in the plan and is skipped without any charge — every email route needs at least one of these as a starting point. Add a LinkedIn URL, or the person's name together with their company, and try again. #### How do I fill only the rows that are still missing an email? Rows that already have an email are skipped automatically: the plan only includes rows where the email is missing. The "only what is missing" switch in the field picker (on by default) also hides fields that no selected row is missing. #### How do I check that a found email actually works? Run "Verify Email Deliverability" on the column after enrichment — it checks the address against a live mail server and reports valid, invalid, catch-all, disposable, or unknown. See "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)" for what each result means. #### Where does a found email go — straight into the cell? Yes, if the cell is empty: a run writes each found email into the empty email cell of its row as the result arrives, on the server, without a prompt. A cell that already has a value keeps it — the found address stays stored with the row and can be taken over from the record panel; see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)". --- ## Find phone and mobile numbers Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile Last updated: 2026-10-10 ListPlus finds two different kinds of phone number, and they come from two different lookups. This article covers finding them **inside a list**; for the single-profile reveal steps in Segment Search and Person Search, see "[Get emails and phone numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/reveal-email-and-phone)." For exact prices, see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" and "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" ### Company phone vs. personal mobile - **Company phone** — the company's main switchboard number, not a line that reaches one person directly. It comes bundled, at no extra cost, with a "Contact Brief" lookup (Enrich menu or record panel: "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" or "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)"), which also returns a verified email. This is a Prospeo call that costs credits, charged only if a verified email is found — the company phone rides along at no extra cost with that same hit. - **Personal mobile** — a verified mobile number for that specific person. This needs its own, separate lookup: "Reveal Mobile Number" in the record panel, via Prospeo, which costs credits and is charged only when a number is actually found. It needs a LinkedIn URL, or a name and company, to start from. There is no button that finds someone's direct-dial extension at a company. ListPlus offers the company switchboard number and a personal mobile — not internal extension numbers. ### Reveal a mobile number for one contact Open a row's **record panel** and click "Reveal Mobile Number" under Contact. It shows the price and only charges you if a verified mobile is actually found — a miss costs nothing. "Reveal Mobile Number" isn't in the Enrich menu itself; start it from the record panel, the single-cell fill window (the wand icon on an empty Mobile cell — Reveal Mobile Number), or a Person Search / Segment Search result card. ### Reveal for many rows at once Select the rows in the grid, click **Enrich** in the selection bar, then pick **Contact details → Phone** in the field picker. ListPlus shows a plan first — "at most N cr for M contacts" — before anything is charged. Pick **Phone**: for each row this plans "Reveal Mobile Number", charged only where a mobile is found. The company switchboard number isn't a field you can pick. It comes with a Contact Brief lookup. Rows that already have a phone number are skipped automatically. ### The pricier option: email + phone together If Contact Brief and Reveal Mobile Number don't find anything, "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu (under "Find Missing Email or Phone") runs a wider FullEnrich waterfall for both an email and a phone number at once — the phone tier is charged only when a phone number is actually found (if it only turns up an email, you pay just the email part). It's more than twice the price of the mobile reveal because it also covers the email side and searches a much wider set of sources; use it only after the cheaper routes have come up empty. ### Formatting phone numbers you already have (free) **Clean Phone Numbers**, in the Enrich menu's local cleanup section, is free and runs entirely on your own data — no lookup, no credits. It normalizes existing phone numbers to international format (e.g. `+49 30 12345678`), strips spaces, dashes and Excel artifacts, and fixes common formatting issues. It only appears when your list has a detected phone column with values that need cleaning; it never adds a number that isn't already there. **Related topics:** reveal-email-and-phone · find-verified-email · what-does-one-contact-cost · price-list · enrichment-overview · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### How do I find someone's mobile number in a list? Open the row's record panel and click "Reveal Mobile Number" (via Prospeo, charged only on a hit; the button shows the price). For several rows at once, select them, click Enrich in the selection bar, and choose Contact details → Phone (it runs Reveal Mobile Number, charged per number found). #### Does ListPlus charge me if no mobile number is found? No. "Reveal Mobile Number" only charges credits when a verified mobile is actually returned; a miss costs no credits. #### What do I need to find a mobile number? A LinkedIn URL, or a first name, last name and company (domain or company name). Without at least one of those, "Reveal Mobile Number" isn't offered for that row. #### Can I find phone numbers for many rows at once? Select the rows, click Enrich in the selection bar, choose Contact details → Phone, and click Next. ListPlus runs "Reveal Mobile Number" (via Prospeo) for each row, charged only where a mobile is found, and shows the worst-case cost ("at most N cr for M contacts") before you confirm. The company's main number isn't a picker field — it comes at no extra cost with a Contact Brief lookup. #### Where do I find a company's main phone number? It comes bundled with "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" or "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu or record panel — it costs credits, charged only when a verified email is found, with the company phone included in the same result. #### Can I find someone's direct-dial extension at a company? ListPlus doesn't look up internal office extensions. For a number that reaches the person directly, use "Reveal Mobile Number" (charged only on a hit). The company's main switchboard number comes at no extra cost with a Contact Brief lookup. #### Is there a cheaper or more thorough option than Reveal Mobile Number? If Reveal Mobile Number doesn't find anything, "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu runs a wider FullEnrich search for both at once — it costs more, with the phone tier charged only when a phone number is actually found (only the email part if it only turns up an email). Try the cheaper routes first. #### Can I clean up phone number formatting without paying credits? Yes — "Clean Phone Numbers" in the Enrich menu normalizes the formatting of phone numbers you already have (e.g. into `+49 30 12345678`) and removes Excel artifacts, and it costs no credits. It only reformats existing values; it doesn't look up new numbers. #### Why didn't the mobile reveal find a number for this contact? Not every person has a verified mobile number on file with the data provider — a miss costs nothing. Try the pricier "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)," which searches a wider set of sources and charges the phone tier only when a phone is found, or check "Not found — what now?" for other next steps. --- ## Company data: by domain vs by name Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/company-data Last updated: 2026-10-17 Company Lookup fills in company details — industry, size, website and more — for rows that already have a company domain. For rows without a domain, the Company Enrichment wizard can search by company name instead. ### By domain vs by name In the Enrich menu, Company Lookup works by domain only: it uses the domain from your email, domain or website column. Personal addresses such as Gmail are skipped. To search by company name when there is no domain, run the Company Enrichment wizard (Enrich menu → ENRICHMENT WIZARDS) or use the single-cell fill window on an empty company cell. A name-based match is less certain than a domain match, especially for short or generic company names, so check that the company it found is actually the one you meant before relying on the result. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact credits and when they're charged. The logo next to a company name in a list comes from the row's domain column, or else from the domain of its e-mail address; an address at a personal mail provider (Gmail, Outlook, iCloud, GMX, web.de and similar) gives no logo, and an empty company cell does not show that mail provider's domain as a grey hint. ### What fields it fills Company name, domain, website, industry, employee count and LinkedIn company URL, plus address (street, postal code, city, state, country), metrics (revenue, founded year, company type, description, NAICS code) and social links (Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, YouTube, logo). Pick exactly which of these you want from the selection bar's Enrich → Company → field groups. ### The cache Company data is the same for every ListPlus customer who looks up the same domain, so a shared, free cache serves repeat lookups of a domain without calling the provider again — see "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for how that cache works and how long your own repeat lookups elsewhere (like LinkedIn) stay free. **Related topics:** which-enrich-button · price-list · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · enrichment-overview. ### FAQ #### Does Company Lookup work by domain or by company name? In the Enrich menu, Company Lookup works by domain only: it uses the domain from your email, domain or website column, and personal addresses such as Gmail are skipped. To search by company name when there is no domain, run the Company Enrichment wizard (Enrich menu → ENRICHMENT WIZARDS) or use the single-cell fill window on an empty company cell. #### Is a name-based company lookup as accurate as a domain-based one? It's less certain, especially for short or generic company names where several companies could share a similar name. Always check that the company returned is actually the one you meant before you rely on the result. #### What fields does Company Lookup add? Company name, domain, website, industry, employee count and LinkedIn company URL, plus optional address, revenue/founding/classification, and social profile fields you can pick individually from the selection bar's field picker. #### Where do I run a company lookup? The Enrich menu's "Company Lookup" step fills company fields for rows with a domain. For rows without one, run the Company Enrichment wizard (Enrich menu → ENRICHMENT WIZARDS), which also tries by name, or use the single-cell fill window on an empty company cell. The selection bar's Enrich lets you pick exactly which company fields to fill for selected rows. #### Why did a company lookup return nothing? The row needs a usable domain (from an email, domain or website column) to search with. Rows with a personal email address (Gmail, Outlook …) and no company domain are skipped by Company Lookup; run the Company Enrichment wizard instead to try a name-based search. #### Why didn't ListPlus fill "Google" as the company for a gmail.com address? Free-mail domains (Gmail, Outlook and similar) are never sent to a company lookup, because the domain says nothing about the person's employer and would write the mail provider's name. The cell stays empty rather than getting a wrong company. #### Can I enrich company data for contacts with only a personal email? Not from the address itself. Add a company name or a website column for those rows, then use the Company Enrichment wizard or a name-based lookup. #### Why is the company name shorter than on LinkedIn? Text after a spaced bullet, pipe or middle dot is treated as a tagline and dropped, so "AIRRANGE • Turn Spreadsheets into Code" becomes "AIRRANGE". A hyphen is kept, because it belongs to names like "Smith - Jones LLP". If a company cell in your list still carries a tagline (an imported one, or one after a hyphen), the Analyze check "Tagline in Company Name" flags it and its Fix removes it. #### Is repeating a company lookup free the second time? Often, yes. When ListPlus already has current data for a domain, the lookup is served from ListPlus's company cache and costs nothing. #### Can I get funding or technology data on top of the basic company profile? Yes — "Company Profile Crunchbase" in the Enrich menu adds funding rounds, technology stack and growth signals on top of the basic company profile; see the price list for its cost. --- ## LinkedIn data: find, fill and verify Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/linkedin-data Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus has four separate LinkedIn actions, each for a different situation — finding a URL you don't have, filling a full profile from a URL you do have, searching for a profile without a URL, and checking whether a profile exists for a name and company at all. ### The four actions - **"LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)"** — a free Google search that finds a person's LinkedIn profile URL from their name and company. It only fills empty LinkedIn URL cells and doesn't fetch the profile itself. - **"LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL)"** — fetches the full profile (current job title, company, location, experience) once you have the URL, whether it came from the free search above or from your own data. - **"LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company)"** — searches LinkedIn directly by name and company and returns the full profile in one step, when you don't want to find the URL first. It costs more than the free URL search plus a profile fetch combined. - **"Verify LinkedIn Profile" (by name + company)** — checks whether a LinkedIn profile exists for that name and company, without pulling the full profile. If it finds one and your LinkedIn URL cell is empty, it fills in the URL. It costs credits (a higher price when it first has to look up the company from the email domain), and it's charged per check even without a match. A LinkedIn company page follows the same by-URL pattern: "LinkedIn Company" looks up a company's LinkedIn page and returns industry, size, headquarters and website. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact credits and charge rule for each — the free URL search always runs for free, and two of the four ("LinkedIn Profile Search" and "Verify LinkedIn Profile") charge even when they don't find anything, since the search or check itself still runs against LinkedIn. ### Where to run them In the Enrich menu, Verify LinkedIn Profile is under Verify, and the other three are under Contact Enrichment ("LinkedIn Company" is under Company Enrichment). In the selection bar you pick the field (LinkedIn URL) and ListPlus chooses the route, starting with the free search. The record panel offers LinkedIn Profile, LinkedIn Profile Search and LinkedIn Company, but not the free URL search or Verify. See "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" for the full decision table. **Related topics:** which-enrich-button · price-list · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · find-verified-email. ### FAQ #### How do I find someone's LinkedIn URL if I don't have it? Run "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" from the Enrich menu — it's a free Google search that fills empty LinkedIn URL cells from the person's name and company, without charging credits. #### What's the difference between "LinkedIn Profile" and "LinkedIn Profile Search"? "LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL)" fetches the full profile from a URL you already have, charged on a hit. "LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company)" does the search and the fetch in one step when you don't have the URL, charged per attempt, even without a match. #### What does "Verify LinkedIn Profile" actually check? It checks whether a LinkedIn profile exists for that name and company, without pulling the full profile data. If it finds one and your LinkedIn URL cell is empty, it fills in the URL for you. #### Does Verify LinkedIn Profile cost credits even if it finds nothing? Yes — it costs credits every time it runs, whether or not it finds a match, and the price is higher when it first has to look up the company from the email domain. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact prices. #### Can I look up a company's LinkedIn page the same way? Yes — "LinkedIn Company" in the Enrich menu takes a LinkedIn company page URL and returns industry, size, headquarters and website, priced the same way as a person's "LinkedIn Profile" lookup. #### Why doesn't the job title match the LinkedIn headline? ListPlus takes the job title from the person's current main position; the headline is the person's own tagline and is not used as the job title. #### Does ListPlus use my own LinkedIn account for any of this? No. All LinkedIn lookups run through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side; it never signs in as you and never uses your LinkedIn account or session. #### Is repeating a LinkedIn lookup free the second time? Yes, for a while — your own LinkedIn profile and company lookups are reused for free if you repeat them within 30 days. See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for the full caching rules. #### Which action tells me whether a contact is on LinkedIn at all? "Verify LinkedIn Profile" — it checks whether a LinkedIn profile exists for a name and company without fetching (and paying for) the full profile, and fills in the URL cell at no extra cost when it finds one. --- ## Fill empty cells with enrichment data Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells Last updated: 2026-10-17 Enrichment fills empty cells and does not overwrite a cell that already has a value (the one exception: a first or last name cut to an initial, "Z.", is completed by the full name; a list rule's Enrich "Cells" setting can also be set to overwrite). A **run** — an enrichment of selected rows or of the whole list — fills the empty cells of its rows by itself on the server as results arrive, with the rule "only empty cells"; there is nothing to confirm, and the list does not need to stay open (see "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)"). This article covers the "Fill empty cells with enrichment data?" dialog that only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu still shows, exactly what a fill changes, why some cells stay empty, and how to take over stored data later. ### The dialog After an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu (gender, job titles, industries …), ListPlus asks: "Fill empty cells with enrichment data?", naming how many rows were analysed and offering to fill their empty cells with the results. Lookups — from the Enrich menu, the selection bar, the wand icon or the record panel — don't ask: the server fills the empty cells as it goes. The dialog only appears while the list stays open — if you navigate away before it shows, reopen the list and use "Apply values" (see below) to apply the results. - **Yes, fill empty cells** — writes the enriched values into every column that already exists and is currently empty for the affected rows. Cells that already contain a value, including one you typed yourself, are never touched. - **No thanks** — closes the dialog and changes nothing. The enrichment results are not lost; they stay stored with the row and can be filled in later at no cost. - **Don't ask again** — a checkbox in the dialog. Once ticked and confirmed, future runs skip the dialog and fill empty cells automatically. The choice applies in this browser. The dialog only opens when there is at least one empty cell a match could fill; if nothing qualifies, ListPlus skips it entirely. ### What "fill" actually changes Filling only ever affects cells that are empty for the current row and column combination — never a cell that already has a value. The written values are saved automatically, exactly like typing into the grid yourself, and ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or **Undo** in the list header) takes the whole fill back as one step. The underlying enrichment result always stays available and can be applied again later. Fill only writes into columns that already exist in your list. If none of your columns match a piece of returned data (for example, enrichment returned a job title but your list has no job-title column), that value is simply skipped — ListPlus does not create a new column for it. Add the column yourself first if you want that value captured. ### Why cells can stay empty after clicking Yes - **No match found** — the enrichment run did not return a value for that row (for example, a lookup found no phone number). - **No matching column** — a value came back, but your list has no column for that kind of data, so it has nowhere to go. - **You clicked No thanks** — nothing was written; the data is still stored and can be taken over later. - **The cell was not actually empty** — fill never overwrites an existing value, including a placeholder you typed yourself. ### Take over later If you clicked No, or closed the list too early, the enriched data is still stored with each row. Select the affected rows and open the Enrich menu. When any selected row has enrichment data, an "Apply values" button with a row count appears at the top. It opens "Merge Enriched Information" on the "Fill empty" tab, which writes only into empty cells and costs no credits, since it only copies data ListPlus already has. See "[Transfer data record by record, or join columns from another list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/take-over-and-join)" for the full record-by-record review flow, including the option to overwrite existing values instead. ### Values shown in the record panel The record panel also offers this directly. Under "From sources", each value that fits a column has **Take over**: under "Additional data" it fills the empty cell, under "Different from the list" it replaces the list's value. It costs no credits and is saved automatically. **Related topics:** enrichment-overview · take-over-and-join · which-enrich-button · price-list. ### FAQ #### What does the "Fill empty cells with enrichment data?" dialog do? It appears after an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu (gender, job titles, industries …) and asks whether to write the results into empty cells. Clicking "Yes, fill empty cells" fills only cells that are currently empty; "No thanks" leaves the grid unchanged and keeps the data stored for later. Lookups — from the Enrich menu, the selection bar, the wand or the record panel — don't ask: the server fills the empty cells itself as results arrive. #### Will filling empty cells overwrite data I already have? No. Only cells that are empty are written; a cell that already has a value, including one you typed yourself, is left alone — the one exception is a first or last name cut to an initial ("Z."), which the full name completes. A list rule's Enrich "Cells" setting can be set to overwrite. #### Are the filled cells saved automatically? Yes. Once you confirm the dialog, the filled cells are saved automatically like any edit you type; ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or Undo in the list header) takes the whole fill back as one step. The enrichment data itself is never lost. #### Why did some cells stay empty even after I clicked Yes? Either the enrichment run found no value for that row, your list has no column matching the type of data that came back, or the cell already had a value and was correctly left alone. #### What happens if I click "No thanks"? Nothing is written to the grid. The enrichment results stay stored with each row, and you can apply them later for free using "Apply values" in the Enrich menu. #### How do I fill cells later if I skipped the dialog? Select the rows and open the Enrich menu. An "Apply values" button appears when the selected rows have enrichment data. It opens "Merge Enriched Information" on the "Fill empty" tab, which writes only empty cells and costs no credits, since it just copies data already fetched. #### Does filling empty cells cost credits? No. Filling cells with stored enrichment data, whether from the dialog or from "Apply values" later, is free — credits are spent when the enrichment lookup itself runs, not when its results are copied into the grid. #### Why didn't the dialog appear at all after my enrichment? Only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu asks; lookups (including the wand and the record panel) fill by themselves. For an AI Analysis, either there was nothing to fill, you had ticked "Don't ask again", or you left the list before it finished — the dialog only shows while the list is open. Use "Apply values" from the Enrich menu to fill in the results afterward. #### Can I move a value I see in the record panel straight into its column? Yes. In the Record panel under "From sources", each value that fits a column has **Take over**: under "Additional data" it fills the empty cell, under "Different from the list" it replaces the list's value. It costs no credits and is saved automatically. #### Does enrichment ever create a new column for data I don't have a column for? No. Fill only writes into columns that already exist in your list; a returned value with no matching column is skipped. Add the column yourself first if you want to capture that data. #### Why don't I get the "Fill empty cells?" question any more? Lookups no longer ask: the wand, the record panel, the selection bar and the Enrich menu's lookups fill empty cells on the server by themselves. Only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu (gender, job titles, industries …) still asks before writing its results. --- ## Transfer data record by record, or join columns from another list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/take-over-and-join Last updated: 2026-10-17 This article covers two separate tools: reviewing enrichment results one record at a time (instead of a bulk fill), and pulling specific columns into your list from another list you own, matched row by row. For the standard flow — a run fills empty cells by itself, single-cell enrichments ask first — see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)"; this article goes deeper on the record-by-record dialog, plus the separate join feature. ### Transfer data record by record Selecting rows with stored enrichment data and clicking **Apply values** in the Enrich menu opens **Merge Enriched Information** — the same dialog described in "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)," here reviewed one record at a time instead of applying to every row at once. For the current record, two tabs show what would change: - **Fill empty** — values for columns that are currently empty on this row. - **Overwrite all** — the best value ListPlus has for each field, including ones that would replace something already in the cell (shown struck through next to the new value). Each line in the dialog is a field (a content type like email or job title) with a checkbox, its source (for example FullEnrich, LinkedIn, or an AI analysis), and the value it would write. Uncheck a field to leave it out. Selected records with nothing to transfer are shown as "N skipped" and left out of the review. When more than one record has values to apply, arrows next to a "current / total" counter step through them, and a checkbox labelled **Ignore this** skips the current record without applying anything to it. **Apply this** applies only the current record's checked fields; **Apply to all like this** applies the checked fields (from the active tab) to every record still pending, in one go. When only one of the selected records has values to apply, a single **Apply** button applies it directly. This never costs credits — it only writes data ListPlus already fetched, the same as the automatic fill of empty cells during a run. Applied values are saved automatically; ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z undoes them. ### Join columns from another list Separate from Consolidate Lists (see "[Merge two lists (Consolidate Lists)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/merge-lists)"), which combines two whole lists into one, this pulls specific columns from another list you own into matching rows of your current list — without adding any new rows. It works like a VLOOKUP/SVERWEIS: you pick a column each list shares (like email or domain), and ListPlus copies chosen columns from the matching row in the other list. Start it from the **⋯** menu in the list header (near Add Column and List Settings), labelled **Add Another List...**, or from Commands ⌘K, labelled **Join from Another List**. Both open the **Enrich from List** page, with four steps (Select Source · Define Link · Map Columns · Review & Apply): 1. **Select Source List** — pick another list of yours to pull data from. 2. **Define Join Key** — choose a column in your list and a column in the source list to match on, and a match strategy: **Exact match** (values must be identical, ignoring upper/lower case and leading or trailing spaces), **Domain extraction** (compares the domain part of a URL or email), or **Fuzzy company name** (ignores legal suffixes like GmbH or Inc and punctuation). A live preview shows how many rows matched before you continue. If several source rows match, the first one is used. 3. **Map Columns** — choose which source columns to bring over, point each at an existing column or create a new one. 4. **Review & Apply** — choose **Fill empty cells only** or **Overwrite existing**, then click **Apply Join**. After **Apply Join**, click **Review in List**. The matched values are saved automatically; ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or **Undo** in the list header) takes them back as one step. Any _new_ columns the join created are different: they are added to your list as soon as you click Apply Join and stay even if you undo the values. Delete them by hand if you don't want them. Joining columns from another list is free, and both lists must be in the workspace you're currently working in. A list from another workspace can't be used as either side — switch to that workspace, or export the list there and import it here (see "[Switch, create and rename workspaces](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/switch-and-create-workspaces)"). **Related topics:** fill-empty-cells · merge-lists · enrichment-overview · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### Can I review enrichment results one record at a time instead of filling everything at once? Yes — select the rows and click "Apply values" in the Enrich menu to open Merge Enriched Information, which steps through each record with arrows and a "current / total" counter so you can review and apply one at a time. #### What do the "Fill empty" and "Overwrite all" tabs do? "Fill empty" only shows values for columns currently empty on that row; "Overwrite all" shows the best value ListPlus has for each field of the row, including ones that would replace an existing cell value (shown struck through). Each field has its own checkbox so you can pick exactly what to apply. #### What does "Ignore this" do when reviewing records? It skips the current record without writing anything to it and moves on, so it's excluded from "Apply to all like this." You can un-tick it later to bring the record back into the review. #### What's the difference between "Apply this" and "Apply to all like this"? "Apply this" applies only the checked fields for the record you're currently viewing. "Apply to all like this" applies the checked fields from the active tab to every record still pending in the review, in one action. #### Can I join columns from another list, like a VLOOKUP or SVERWEIS? Yes — open "Add Another List..." from the list's ⋯ menu, or "Join from Another List" in Commands ⌘K, to match rows on a shared column (like email or domain) and pull chosen columns from another list in the same workspace into matching rows. #### How do I match rows between two lists when joining columns? On the Define Join Key step, pick a column from each list and a match strategy: Exact match compares values as identical, ignoring upper/lower case and leading or trailing spaces; Domain extraction compares just the domain of a URL or email; Fuzzy company name ignores legal suffixes and punctuation in company names. If several source rows match, the first one is used. #### Does joining columns from another list add new rows? No. It only writes values into existing rows that match a row in the other list — your row count doesn't change. To combine two lists' rows into one, use "Merge two lists" (Consolidate Lists) instead. #### Do I need to click Save after joining columns from another list? No. The matched cell values are saved automatically, and ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or Undo in the list header) takes them back as one step. Any new columns the join created are added immediately when you click Apply Join and stay even if you undo the values, so delete an unwanted one by hand. #### Can I join columns from a list in another workspace? No, both lists must be in the workspace you're currently working in. Export the other list as a file in its workspace, import it into this one, and then join from the imported copy. #### Does transferring data record by record, or joining columns from another list, cost credits? No, both are free. Transferring only copies enrichment data ListPlus already fetched, and joining only matches and copies values between lists in your workspace. --- ## Detecting job changes Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus can flag contacts whose company no longer matches what's in your list — inside a list, from data you already have or from a fresh lookup — and it can check people on the Watchlist for job changes on an ongoing basis (alerts). The Segment Search audience database's own "Job change" filter is not currently available. ### Detecting a change automatically or for free - **"Detect Company Changes"** — in the Enrich menu's AI Analysis group (shown once the list has a company column and some enriched rows; also available as "Detect job change" under Tasks & analyses in the field picker). It compares the company cell with the best company name already stored for that row from any earlier lookup; rows with an empty company cell are skipped. It's free. - **Automatic flag on any lookup** — when a LinkedIn Profile or contact lookup returns a current company that differs from your company column, the row is flagged at no extra cost, on top of whatever that lookup itself costs. Either way, a flagged row shows the previous and new company (and job title, when available) in that row's record panel, under "Signals". Running either action again on rows that now match clears the flag. ### Detect Job Changes (the wizard) For a fresh check instead of relying on data you already have, run "Detect Job Changes" from the Enrich menu (under ENRICHMENT WIZARDS) or from ⌘K ("Detect Job Changes"). It's a step-by-step wizard: it shows a plan and an estimated total, then runs all enabled steps after one click on "Start Detection (… Cr.)". Steps: - Check which rows have a known company — free. - Verify the email — charged per clear result; an email that no longer delivers is a strong sign the person left. - Find missing LinkedIn URLs via Google — free. - Fetch the LinkedIn profile — charged per profile found; a profile looked up in the last 30 days is reused at no cost, so a very recent change may not show yet. - Compare the old and new employer — free. Credits are charged per step as it runs, and you can switch individual steps off before starting. Results appear in the same row's record panel under "Signals". ### Job-change alerts on the Watchlist (ongoing) Both options above are one-off checks you run yourself. For an ongoing check, put the people on the **Watchlist**, tick them there and click **Set alert** → **Job change**: it costs credits per contact and month, more for a daily check than for a weekly one (the first check within about 6 hours; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"), with news shown under **News** on the Watchlist page and optionally handed to a pipeline you pick under **Send news to**. A change is reported only when ListPlus is sure; doubtful ones (a new company without a LinkedIn page, a side role such as board or advisor, self-employed, a new job that began long before the old one ended, very few connections, no title) appear as **Held back – not certain enough** and are applied only with **Take it over anyway**. "Left the company" is reported only after two empty checks in a row. Alerts work only on the Watchlist, not inside a list — see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)" for caps per plan, billing and pausing. ### Segment Search The "Job change" filter shown in Segment Search's person filters is marked "Not available" and can't be selected. See "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)" for the full filter list and what's available on Segment Search's current data plan. **Related topics:** linkedin-data · company-data · which-enrich-button · filters-explained · price-list · saved-contacts. ### FAQ #### Can ListPlus tell me if a contact changed jobs? Yes, three ways: "Detect Company Changes" in the Enrich menu compares the company you have against company data already stored for that row, for free; the "Detect Job Changes" wizard runs a fresh LinkedIn-based check; and on the Watchlist, Set alert → Job change checks contacts weekly or daily (charged per contact and month) and reports new company, new role or left the company. #### Can ListPlus check for job changes automatically on a schedule? Yes, on the Watchlist: tick the contacts, click Set alert and choose Job change, checked weekly or daily, charged per contact and month (the daily check costs more; first check within about 6 hours). News shows under News on the Watchlist page and can go straight to a pipeline you pick under "Send news to". Inside a list, Detect Company Changes and the Detect Job Changes wizard remain one-off checks you run yourself. #### Why is a job-change alert "Held back – not certain enough"? ListPlus reports a change only when it's sure; doubtful ones are held with the reason — a new company without a LinkedIn page, a side role (board, advisor, investor, part-time), self-employed, a new job that began long before the old one ended, very few connections, or no title for the new job. Click "Take it over anyway" to apply it, and note that "Left the company" is reported only after two empty checks in a row. #### Do enrichments flag job changes automatically? Yes — when a LinkedIn Profile or contact lookup returns a current company that differs from your company column, the row is flagged at no extra cost, on top of whatever that lookup itself costs. #### Where do I see that a contact's company changed? Open that row's record panel and look under "Signals" — a flagged change shows the previous company, the new company, and the job title if available. #### Why didn't "Detect Company Changes" find anything? It only compares data you already have — if a row has no company cell value, or was never enriched with a company name to compare against, no flag is set. Run Company Lookup, a LinkedIn lookup, or the "Detect Job Changes" wizard on those rows first. #### What does the "Detect Job Changes" wizard actually do? It re-checks contacts fresh: verifies the email, finds a LinkedIn URL if missing, fetches the LinkedIn profile (one looked up in the last 30 days is reused), and compares the employer it finds against your company column — all from one "Start Detection" click, with each paid step shown before you run it. #### Is there a "Job change" filter I can search by in Segment Search? It's marked "Not available" and can't be selected. See "[How Segment Search filters work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/filters-explained)" for what's available. #### If a contact's company matches again, does the flag go away? Yes — running "Detect Company Changes", the "Detect Job Changes" wizard, or another lookup on a row where the company now matches clears the earlier flag automatically. --- ## Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits Last updated: 2026-10-17 ### A run works on the server An enrichment of selected rows or of the whole list is a **run**: ListPlus takes the rows in small groups, asks the provider, and writes each result into the empty cells of its row as soon as it arrives. The rows show a **running ring** until they are done. The run does not depend on your browser — close the tab, switch lists or shut the laptop, and it carries on; when you come back, the rows that are finished are filled and the rest still show their ring. There is no "Fill empty cells?" prompt for a run: the fill rule is "only empty cells", so a value that is already there is never overwritten. See "[How enrichment works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-overview)". ### Watching a run While a run is going, a small pill appears at the top of the screen showing how many tasks are running or done; click it to expand a panel with a progress bar (completed / total) for each run and a **Stop** button. When it finishes it shows how many records were enriched (and how many came from the cache), how many found nothing ("not found", in grey — a miss is not an error), errors in red only when a provider failed, and the credits used. A job from the selection bar reads "Enrichment · step N" while it runs, because it works in steps (see "Enrich selected rows"). The panel lists the runs started in this browser session; after a reload or on a colleague's screen it is empty, but the run itself goes on — the filled cells and the running rings come from the server. FullEnrich lookups are sent to the provider in bulk and collected a little later, so a large list can take a few minutes before those rows fill. ### The 5,000-lookup limit A single run can enrich **up to 5,000 lookups** (distinct emails, domains or profiles; rows sharing a value count once). A larger selection is split into several runs automatically, each shown in the task indicator. This limit is per run, not per list or per day — you can start any number of runs one after another, and rows that are still busy in a running enrichment of the same kind are simply skipped by a new one. ### When a run stops A run that cannot continue stops and says why in the task panel: - **Not enough credits** — the balance no longer covers the next group. In a workspace every run spends the **workspace owner's** credits, and other members may be spending them at the same time, so the balance is checked before every group, not only at the start. Rows already enriched keep their results; the remaining rows aren't charged. - **The provider is not answering** — the data provider returned only errors for a while (an outage, an invalid key on their side, or their quota is used up). ListPlus does not keep retrying blindly; click **Continue** a little later. If a provider's daily limit is reached, the run pauses until the provider's limit resets and then continues by itself. - **Accepted maximum reached** — the run has spent the amount you accepted when you started it ("at most N cr"), and rows are left. Nothing is lost when a run stops. Click **Continue** next to the stopped run in the task indicator, or start the same enrichment again on the same rows (or on the rows that are still empty): it continues with what is left, and rows that already have a result are served from the cache and not charged again — see "[Continue a stopped enrichment](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/continue-stopped-enrichment)" for what Continue does and when to start again instead. A run nobody works on for a while is picked up again when you open the list. ### Caching: not all lookups are cached the same way Caching rules differ by data type — there's no single "7 or 30 days" rule for everything: - **LinkedIn profile and company lookups** are reused for free if you repeat them within **30 days**. See "[LinkedIn data: find, fill and verify](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/linkedin-data)" for details. - **Company data by domain** is served from ListPlus's own **shared** cache — once any ListPlus customer has looked up a domain, every customer's repeat lookup of that same domain is free, with no fixed expiry stated to users. See "[Company data: by domain vs by name](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/company-data)." - **Email verification** results are reused for **7 days**; verifying the same address again sooner reads from that cache instead of calling the provider again. See "[Provider: Email verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-email-verification)" for that flow. - **Person lookups** (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data are reused for **7 days** in your workspace — repeating them sooner doesn't charge again; lookups that found nothing are run again. ### FAQ #### How do I see the progress of an enrichment run? A pill at the top of the screen expands to a progress bar (completed of total) and a Stop button for each run; at the end it shows records enriched, not found (grey, not an error), errors (red, only when a provider failed) and the credits used. Rows being worked on show a running ring. The panel lists only runs started in this browser session; after a reload it is empty, but the run goes on. #### How many rows can I enrich in one run? Up to 5,000 lookups per run — distinct emails, domains or profiles, so rows that share the same value count once. A larger selection is split into several runs automatically, each shown in the task indicator. #### Can I run several enrichments at the same time? Yes — for example one Company Lookup run and one email-finding run on the same list. If you start the same kind of enrichment again while a run is still working on some of the rows, those rows are skipped and the new run takes only the others. #### Can I cancel an enrichment run partway through? Yes. Click the progress pill to expand it, then click Stop on the run you want to cancel; it then reads "Enrichment cancelled". Rows already processed before you stopped keep their results and their filled cells; the rest are left untouched and not charged. #### Do I have to keep the list open while an enrichment runs? No. The run works on the server and fills the empty cells itself; you can close the tab or switch lists. When you come back, finished rows are filled and the rows still open show their ring; if the run stopped meanwhile, click Continue in the task indicator (or start the same enrichment again) — enriched rows are not charged twice. #### How long are enrichment results cached? It depends on the lookup: your own LinkedIn profile and company lookups are reused for free within 30 days, company data by domain is often served free from ListPlus's company cache, email verification results are reused for 7 days, and person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data are reused for 7 days within your workspace — a lookup that found nothing is simply run again. #### Why did my enrichment stop with "not enough credits"? The credit balance ran out during the run: in a workspace, runs spend the workspace owner's credits, and other members may spend them at the same time. The run stops at that point, rows already enriched keep their results, and the remaining rows are not charged. After the owner tops up, click Continue in the task indicator (or start the same enrichment again) — it continues with the rows that are left, and rows that already have a result are not charged again. #### What does "the provider is not answering" mean? The data provider behind the lookup returned only errors for a while — an outage, a problem with the key on their side, or their quota being used up — so ListPlus stopped the run instead of retrying blindly. Rows already done keep their results. Wait a little, then click Continue in the task indicator; it goes on with the rows that are left. #### Why did my run stop at the "accepted maximum"? When you started the run you accepted a maximum ("at most N cr"). The run spent that amount and rows are still left. Click Continue to finish the open rows without that ceiling, or start the enrichment again on the remaining rows for a new maximum; rows already enriched are not charged again. #### Why did my run stop without finishing? Look at the reason in the task panel: not enough credits, the provider not answering, or the accepted maximum reached. Closing your tab doesn't stop a run. Rows already processed keep their results; click Continue in the task indicator (or, if the run is no longer listed there, start the same enrichment again) for the rest — nothing is charged twice. #### "These records are being enriched right now" — what does that mean? Another enrichment of the same kind is still working on those records, so a second one is not started. Wait until that run has finished (see the task indicator), then start yours again. #### "Nothing to enrich" — why won't it start? Either the records already hold the fields you picked, or none of them has what a lookup needs to start from (for example an email, a domain, a LinkedIn URL, or a name plus company). Nothing is charged; add a starting point to the rows or pick other fields. #### "Too many records for one enrichment" — what now? A selection above 5,000 lookups is normally split into several runs by itself, so this message is rare. If it appears, start the enrichment again. If it comes back, select a part of the records and enrich the rest in a second run. #### "The enrichment could not start" — what can I do? This is the message for a start that failed for any other reason, for example a connection problem or an error on the server. An enrichment that did not start charged nothing, so try again; if it keeps failing, contact support with the list name and the enrichment you picked. --- ## Why did enrichment find nothing? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-found-nothing Last updated: 2026-10-17 Sometimes a lookup runs and a cell stays empty. This article is about a lookup that genuinely found nothing. If the row still shows its running ring, the run isn't done with it yet; if a run stopped early, the task indicator says why (not enough credits, the provider not answering, your accepted maximum reached) and starting it again continues with the rest — see "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)". If a lookup did find data but the cell is still empty, see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)" instead. ### Why nothing was found - **No starting point for that row.** Every route needs an anchor: a LinkedIn URL, an email, a domain, or a name plus company. A row with none of these appears in the enrichment plan under "Remains open (no route):" before anything runs and is skipped. - **The provider genuinely has no match.** Small or very new companies, personal email domains, and people without an indexed LinkedIn profile are common cases no provider database covers. - **The identifier is wrong or outdated.** A typo in the name, a stale LinkedIn URL, or a domain that no longer belongs to the company can lead to a miss even though the row looks complete. - **The route didn't match the anchor.** A company-only row has nothing for a person route to start from, and vice versa — see the input tables in "Find a verified email" and "[Find phone and mobile numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-phone-and-mobile)" for which button needs which starting point. ### What was charged Almost every lookup only charges when it actually finds something, so a miss usually costs nothing. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" (the "Charged" column of each table and the section "For advanced users") for the short list of exceptions that charge for the attempt itself, and "Find a verified email" for the extra exceptions specific to email routes. ### What to try next - **Try a wider route.** If "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" (charged only on a hit) finds nothing, "Find Email (by Name & Company)" searches more sources at a higher price (also charged only on a hit). - **Give the row an anchor first.** A free "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" search (Enrich menu) can turn a name-and-company row into one with a LinkedIn URL to enrich from, at no cost even on a miss. - **Double-check the row's existing data.** Fix a misspelled name or an obviously wrong domain, then re-run the lookup. - **Accept it and move on.** Some contacts simply aren't in any provider's data — the row stays as-is, and most lookups cost nothing on a miss (see the exceptions under "What was charged"). **Related topics:** enrichment-overview · which-enrich-button · find-verified-email · find-phone-and-mobile · fill-empty-cells · price-list. ### FAQ #### Why is my cell still empty after running enrichment? Either the lookup genuinely found nothing for that row (this article), the run hasn't reached the row yet or stopped early (the row keeps its ring, or the task indicator names the reason — click Continue there for the rest), or an AI Analysis found values you haven't filled in yet ("Fill empty cells?" dialog or Apply values) — see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)" for that last case. #### Was I charged for a lookup that found nothing? Usually not — almost every lookup only charges on a hit. A short list of exceptions charge for the attempt itself even on a miss; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for exactly which ones. #### Why does a row show "no route" and get skipped? Every lookup needs a starting point: a LinkedIn URL, an email, a domain, or a name plus company. A row with none of these has nothing to search from, so it appears in the enrichment plan under "Remains open (no route):" before anything runs and is skipped without charging anything. #### What should I do when a lookup keeps finding nothing for a row? Check whether the row's name, company or domain has a typo, try a wider route if a cheaper one already came up empty, or accept that the contact isn't in any provider's data — most lookups don't charge for a miss; LinkedIn Profile Search and Verify LinkedIn Profile are the exceptions. #### Can I get an anchor for a row that has nothing to start from? Yes — run the free "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" search from the Enrich menu first; it costs nothing even when it doesn't find a URL, and a URL it does find becomes the anchor other lookups can use. #### Does a company lookup that finds nothing still cost credits? No — a company lookup by domain or name only charges when the company is actually found; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the full rule. #### Will ListPlus keep retrying a lookup that already found nothing? The same lookup isn't repeated, but an enrichment from the selection bar, a check card or the AI chat moves on to the next route for that record by itself, within its "at most". A single step from the Enrich menu runs once — start a wider one yourself, for example after fixing the row's data. #### Why did a LinkedIn search charge me even though it found nothing? LinkedIn Profile Search by name and company is one of the few exceptions that charges credits for the attempt itself, whether or not it finds a match, because the search against LinkedIn still runs either way. Verify LinkedIn Profile works the same way, while the "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" search costs no credits. --- ## Continue a stopped enrichment Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/continue-stopped-enrichment Last updated: 2026-10-17 An enrichment run that cannot go on stops and tells you why in the task indicator. You don't have to set anything up again: **Continue** picks the run up where it stopped, and nothing that was already enriched is charged a second time. This article is about that button; "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)" explains how runs work in general. ### Why a run stops There are three reasons, and the task indicator shows the exact sentence. A job started from the selection bar (or the AI chat, or a check card) uses shorter sentences: "Stopped: not enough credits. What was found is kept." · "Stopped: a data provider is not answering. Try again later." · "Stopped at the maximum you accepted. Continue to go on." The sentences below are those of a single Enrich-menu run: - **"Stopped: not enough credits — N of M left. Top up and start again; what was done is kept."** The balance no longer covers the next group of rows. In a workspace every run spends the workspace owner's credits, and the balance is checked before every group — so a run can stop halfway when other members spend the same credits at the same time. - **"Stopped: the provider is not answering — N left. Try again later."** The data provider behind the lookup returned only errors for three rounds in a row, or reported an invalid key or exhausted credits on its side. ListPlus stops instead of retrying blindly. - **"Stopped at the accepted maximum of X credits — N left."** The run has spent the amount you accepted when you started it, and rows are left. In all three cases the rows already done keep their results and their filled cells, and the rows that are left were not charged. ### What the task indicator shows Click the pill at the top of the screen to expand the panel. A run that stopped for credits or for your maximum shows an amber note; one whose provider failed shows a red one. Below it you see the records enriched (and how many came from the cache), how many found nothing, errors and the credits spent so far, and two buttons on the right: **Continue** (with a play icon) and **Dismiss** (×). Dismiss only removes the entry from the panel — it does not cancel anything, and the run can still be continued by starting the same enrichment again (see below). ### What Continue does **Continue** resumes the very same run on the server with the rows that are still open. Rows already enriched are finished and are not looked at again; the open ones carry on in groups, with the balance checked before every group as before. - After **"not enough credits"** — top up first (in a workspace, the owner). Continue keeps the accepted maximum you set at the start; if the balance still doesn't cover the next row, the run stops again at once with the same message. - After **"the provider is not answering"** — wait a little, then Continue. The error count starts from zero; if the provider is still down, the run stops again after three error-only rounds. - After **"accepted maximum"** — Continue **lifts the ceiling**: the run goes on until the open rows are done or the balance runs out. If you want a new ceiling instead, start the enrichment again from the dialog with a smaller selection. Continue works only on a run that stopped by itself. A run you cancelled with **Stop**, a finished run, or a scraper import cannot be continued — start them again instead. A stopped run and its open rows are kept for 48 hours; after that, starting the enrichment again is the way to finish it. ### Starting again instead of Continue You can also start the same enrichment again on the same rows — for example when the Continue button is no longer there. The result is the same: rows that already have a result are served from the cache and cost nothing, and the rows that are left are enriched. Two details: - Rows that an **active** run is still working on are skipped by a new run of the same kind, so two runs never pay for the same row. Rows of a **stopped** run are free to take. - A row whose earlier lookup found nothing is looked up again (only results are cached), with the usual charge rule for that lookup — e-mail and phone lookups charge only on a hit. ### Where the accepted maximum comes from When you start an enrichment from the fields dialog, each pattern shows "≈ X Cr" and "at most Y Cr" (or just "at most Y Cr for N contacts" when the two are close); the footer sums it up as **at most Z Cr**. That "at most" is the most the whole job may spend, counting every fallback route a record might need; AI tokens (for example gender) come on top. The run checks it before every group, so it never spends more than you accepted — and stops with "accepted maximum" when rows are left. Jobs started from the AI chat or a check card use the same ceiling without showing it; only a single step from the Enrich menu has no ceiling beyond the balance. **Related topics:** running-jobs-and-limits · enrichment-problems · enrichment-found-nothing · fill-empty-cells · credits-explained. ### FAQ #### Will I be charged twice when I continue a stopped enrichment? No. Continue resumes the same run with the rows that are still open; rows already enriched are finished and not touched again. If you start the same enrichment again instead, rows that already have a result come from the cache at no cost and only the rows that are left are charged. #### Why did my enrichment stop? Open the task indicator at the top of the screen: the reason is written under the run (amber for credits or your maximum, red when a provider failed). It's one of three: "not enough credits" (the balance doesn't cover the next rows — in a workspace it's the owner's balance), "the provider is not answering" (the data provider returned only errors for a while) or "accepted maximum" (the run spent the amount you accepted at the start). Rows already done keep their results. #### How do I continue a stopped enrichment? Click the pill at the top of the screen, then Continue next to the stopped run. It goes on with the rows that are left; after "not enough credits" top up first, after "accepted maximum" the ceiling is lifted and the run finishes the open rows. If there is no Continue button any more, start the same enrichment again on the same rows — enriched rows are not charged again. #### Can I continue a stopped import? No. A LinkedIn or scraper import that stopped cannot be continued, because the provider's run is over; start the import again. Enrichment runs are different: those can be continued or simply started again without paying twice for finished rows. #### The Continue button is gone after a reload — what now? The task indicator only lists runs started in this browser session, so after a reload (or on a colleague's screen) a stopped run isn't shown. Start the same enrichment again on the same rows: it continues with the open rows, and rows that already have a result are served from the cache at no cost. #### I topped up, clicked Continue, and it stopped again — why? The balance is checked before every group of rows, so the run stops again as soon as it can't cover the next row — in a workspace other members may be spending the owner's credits at the same time, or the top-up didn't cover the rows that are left. Check the balance at the bottom of the navigation bar, top up for the remaining rows, and click Continue again; everything done so far is kept. #### Does Continue keep the maximum I accepted? Yes, except after a stop at the accepted maximum: then Continue lifts the ceiling, because the old one would stop the run again at once. After "not enough credits" or "provider not answering" the accepted maximum stays as you set it. --- ## Enrich selected rows: plan, steps and the "at most" Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrich-selected-rows Last updated: 2026-10-17 Select rows, click **Enrich** in the selection bar, pick the fields you want (for example Email), click **Next** and then **Start enrichment**. That starts one enrichment **job** for all selected rows: the dialog before it is only a preview, and the server then works out the route for every row from what the row holds. This article explains the plan, the "at most" figure and the steps; the stop reasons and the Continue button are in "[Continue a stopped enrichment](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/continue-stopped-enrichment)", how large selections are split in "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)". ### What the plan dialog shows The dialog lists your rows in groups by what they are missing ("Gap patterns"), with the route, the price per hit, and a footer with the most the whole job can cost: **at most N Cr**. Contacts with nothing to search from (no name, no company, no email) are noted as "cannot be enriched" and skipped without a charge. When a step uses AI (gender, for example) the footer adds **plus AI tokens**, because AI is billed by usage after the call. ### What happens after Start enrichment The job works in **steps** (stages). In each step, every row that still misses a field gets its next untried route; if that finds nothing, the next step tries the next route, up to eight steps. While it runs, the task indicator reads "Enrichment · step N" and the rows show their ring. The job fills empty cells only and asks nothing — you can close the tab; the job carries on on the server. ### The "at most" is a ceiling, not a price ListPlus charges per hit: a record that finds nothing costs nothing. The "at most" adds up the most expensive path a record could take — the first route, its fallbacks and the steps a hit opens (name to email, then email to profile) — so it can be above what is really charged. The server takes the smaller of the figure in the dialog and its own worst case, and the job stops with "Stopped at the maximum you accepted" if it would go past it. ### The same job from other places The AI chat, a check card's **Enrich (n)** in the Analyze panel and the cell wand's multi-step plan start the same job. They show no cost dialog, but the job still uses the same ceiling; a single step from the Enrich menu is a plain run without a ceiling beyond your balance. **Related topics:** running-jobs-and-limits · continue-stopped-enrichment · find-verified-email · fill-empty-cells · which-enrich-button · price-list. ### FAQ #### What happens after I click Start enrichment? ListPlus starts one job for all selected rows. The server plans each row again from what the row holds, runs the cheapest route first and fills empty cells as results arrive. Close the tab if you like; the task indicator shows the progress. #### Why does the plan say "at most" — will I pay that? No — "at most" is a ceiling, not a price. Lookups charge only on a hit, so a record that finds nothing costs nothing, and the job never spends more than the figure you accepted. #### Why is the "at most" higher than I expected? It counts the most expensive path a record can take: the first route, the fallback routes tried when it finds nothing, and the steps a hit opens (for example name to email, then email to profile). Rows with identical inputs count once. What you pay is only the routes that actually hit. #### What does "plus AI tokens" mean in the enrich dialog? One of the steps is an AI step, for example gender. AI is billed by usage after the call, so its cost is not inside the "at most" and comes on top. #### Why does the task say "Enrichment · step 2"? A job from the selection bar works in steps: each step gives every open row its next route, and the label shows which step is running. A job has at most eight steps, and it ends as "Enrichment completed" when no row has a route left. #### Does ListPlus try another provider when the first finds nothing? Yes, for a job from the selection bar, the AI chat or a check card: the next step tries the next route for that record (for example Contact Brief, then the wider FullEnrich search), still within the "at most". A single step from the Enrich menu runs once. #### Why does the result say "not found" — is that an error? No. "n not found" (grey) means a lookup ran and the provider had nothing for that record, and it costs nothing. Only "n errors" (red) means a provider failed to answer. #### Can I enrich more than 5,000 selected rows at once? Yes. A selection above 5,000 lookups is split into several jobs automatically, and each one shows in the task indicator. --- ## Section: Export, sync & integrations ## Exporting your list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview Last updated: 2026-10-17 Downloading your list as a file (CSV, Excel, JSON and the other file formats) works on every plan and costs no credits. ### Where to export from Open a list and click the **Export & Sync** arrow button in the list header (not on phones) to open the export wizard directly, or use the **⋯** icon at the far right of the header (not the **More** menu) for more options. In ⌘K, search for **Export Wizard**, **Export All (Excel)** or **Export Visible Rows**. The **⋯** icon's menu includes: - **Export Data** — opens the export wizard, where you pick a destination, choose columns and (for file downloads) a format. - **Export as Excel** — a one-click shortcut that downloads exactly what the grid currently shows as an .xlsx file, no wizard. - **Export Selected Records** — appears when you have rows selected; exports only those rows through the wizard. - **Export Visible Records** — appears when a search, sublist (segment) or the Changes filter is active; exports only the rows currently shown (renamed **Export Sublist "Name"** when a sublist is the active filter). ### The export wizard The wizard has two steps: pick a destination, then pick columns. On the column step you check or uncheck any column, search by name, drag to reorder, and rename a column just for this export (the list itself is unchanged). For a file download you also edit the file name before downloading. Destinations include instant file downloads — Excel, CSV, JSON, and more under "More formats" — plus app destinations. See "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)" for sequencers, "[Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets)" for those two, and "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)" for sending to any other tool through a webhook URL. "[Export file formats: CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL and Markdown](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-files)" covers the file options (CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL, Markdown) in detail. ### Which rows and columns are included **Export Data** (and the header Export button and Export Wizard) exports every row saved in the list, including rows marked ignored, whatever is filtered on screen. **Export as Excel** in the ⋯ menu downloads exactly what the grid shows right now: the current filter, search or sublist, the visible columns, and ignored rows only when Show Ignored Rows is on. **Export All (Excel)** in ⌘K downloads every row, including ignored ones. **Export Selected Records** and **Export Visible Records** limit the wizard to the rows selected or shown. In the wizard, columns default to every column in the list except internal system columns, and you can uncheck any of them on the column step. Exporting only includes what's actually saved in the list's cells. If you looked up data with Enrich but it isn't in the cells (lookups fill empty cells by themselves; only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu waits for the "Fill empty cells?" prompt), that data is not in the export — fill it in first, then export. Two destinations are the exception: the webhook destination has an optional Include enrichment data setting (see "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)"), and Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead fill empty standard fields (name, company, phone, website, LinkedIn) from enrichment results automatically (see "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)"). The export wizard reads the list as it's saved. Your own edits are saved automatically within a second; open AI suggestions are only included after you click **Apply** in the list header. The one-click Excel shortcuts download the grid as you see it. **Related topics:** export-files · send-to-sequencers · export-to-hubspot-and-sheets · zapier-make-n8n. ### FAQ #### How do I export my list? Click the Export button in the list header to open the export wizard directly, or use the ⋯ icon at the far right of the header for more options such as Export as Excel or Export Selected/Visible Records. You can also press ⌘K and search for Export Wizard, Export All (Excel) or Export Visible Rows. #### Does exporting cost credits? No. Downloading a list as a file costs no credits on every plan, including Basic. Sending to apps like HubSpot or Google Sheets needs Pro or Premium and costs credits per request; see that destination's topic. #### Can I choose which columns get exported? Yes. The export wizard's column step lists every column with a checkbox, a search box, drag-to-reorder, and you can rename a column just for that export without changing the list itself. #### Can I export just the rows I've selected? Yes. Select the rows in the grid, then choose Export Selected Records from the ⋯ menu — only those rows go into the export. #### Can I export a filtered view or a sublist (segment)? Yes. With a search, sublist or the Changes filter active, the ⋯ menu shows Export Visible Records (or Export Sublist "Name" when a sublist is the active filter) instead of the full-list option, and only those rows are exported. #### Does exporting the whole list include ignored rows? Export Data and Export All (Excel) include rows marked ignored. Export as Excel in the ⋯ menu leaves them out unless Show Ignored Rows is on. To send ignored-free data through the wizard, open a sublist or search first and use Export Visible Records. #### Will data I looked up with Enrich but haven't filled in yet be exported? No — export only includes what's actually saved in the list's cells, so data Enrich found but that is not in a cell (a value for a cell that was already filled, or an AI Analysis you haven't accepted via the "Fill empty cells?" prompt) is excluded until you fill it in and export. Exceptions: the webhook destination has an optional Include enrichment data setting, and Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead fill empty standard fields from enrichment results automatically (see "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)" and "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)"). #### Do I need to save before exporting? No — your own edits are saved automatically about a second after you make them, and the export wizard reads the saved list. Open AI suggestions are only included after you click Apply in the list header; the one-click Excel shortcuts download the grid as you see it. #### What file formats can I download? CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL and Markdown, plus a one-click Excel shortcut outside the wizard. See "[Export file formats: CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL and Markdown](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-files)" for details on each. #### Can I export straight to my CRM or a sequencer instead of downloading a file? Yes — the export wizard also offers app destinations: Google Sheets, HubSpot, Lemlist, Instantly, Smartlead, and a generic webhook for tools like Zapier, Make or n8n. See the linked topics for each one's requirements. --- ## Export file formats: CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL and Markdown Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-files Last updated: 2026-09-25 Every file format in the export wizard's column step lets you check or uncheck columns, search, drag to reorder, rename a column just for this export, and edit the file name before downloading — see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" for that shared step. This article covers what's specific to each format. CSV, Excel and JSON download right after the column step; SQL and Markdown have one more settings screen first. ### CSV Comma-separated, UTF-8 encoded, with one header row using each column's export name (its renamed name if you changed it on the column step). A value that contains a comma or a quote is automatically wrapped in quotes. There's no delimiter or encoding choice — it's always a comma and UTF-8. There's no byte-order mark, so double-clicking the file in Excel set to German (or another semicolon locale) can put everything in one column and garble umlauts. Use the Excel (.xlsx) export instead, or open the CSV in Excel via Data → From Text/CSV and choose UTF-8 and comma. A multi-line value (like a multi-line address) can split into extra rows when a plain CSV reader doesn't respect the quoting — use Excel or JSON for data like that. ### Excel (.xlsx) A single worksheet, always named "Data Export" internally regardless of your list's name — you can rename the sheet after opening the file. The header row is bold and columns are auto-fit to their content. If the Excel file can't be generated, ListPlus falls back to a CSV file with a ".xls" extension and shows a warning — the file is really a CSV, so Excel may warn you about the mismatch when you open it. ### JSON A single array with one object per row, containing only the columns you selected. JSON keeps the original column names — a rename you make on the column step changes the headers in CSV, Excel, SQL and Markdown, but not the JSON property names. There's no option for line-delimited JSON or any other shape. ### SQL An extra settings screen before download, with a live preview: - **Table Name** — must start with a letter or underscore, letters/numbers/ underscores only. - **SQL Dialect** — PostgreSQL, MySQL, SQLite, or SQL Server, which changes how identifiers are quoted and how column types map (dates become `TIMESTAMP` in PostgreSQL, MySQL and SQLite, `DATETIME` in SQL Server). - **Include CREATE TABLE statement** and **Include DROP TABLE IF EXISTS** — both switches, so you can generate insert statements only if you prefer. - **Wrap in transaction (BEGIN/COMMIT)** — on by default. - **Batch Size** — how many rows go into each INSERT statement (1–5000, default 1000). Click Show Preview to see sample SQL for the first rows before downloading. ### Markdown Also has its own settings screen: - **Column Alignment** — Left, Center or Right aligned, applied to every column. - **Include row numbers** — adds a leading "#" column, off by default. Show Preview displays both the raw Markdown table and a rendered preview, each built from a sample of your list; the downloaded file always has every row. **Related topics:** export-overview · send-to-sequencers · export-to-hubspot-and-sheets · zapier-make-n8n. ### FAQ #### What file formats can I export to? CSV, Excel (.xlsx), JSON, SQL and Markdown, all from the export wizard's "Download a file" section — CSV and Excel are shown first, and JSON, SQL and Markdown are under "More formats". #### Can I change the CSV delimiter or encoding? No — CSV export always uses a comma as the delimiter and UTF-8 encoding; there's no setting to switch to semicolons, tabs or a different encoding. There's also no byte-order mark, so opening it by double-clicking in Excel set to a semicolon locale (like German) can put everything in one column and garble umlauts — use the Excel (.xlsx) export instead, or import the CSV via Data → From Text/CSV and choose UTF-8 and comma. #### What sheet name does the Excel export use? The workbook always contains a single sheet named "Data Export" — there's no setting to choose the sheet name before download, though you can rename it after opening the file. #### What does the JSON export look like? A single JSON array with one object per row, containing only your selected columns — there's no option for line-delimited JSON or a different structure. #### If I rename a column for the export, does that change the JSON output too? No — JSON keeps the original column names. A rename you make on the column step changes the header shown in CSV, Excel, SQL and Markdown, but not the JSON property name. #### What can I configure for a SQL export? Table name, SQL dialect (PostgreSQL, MySQL, SQLite or SQL Server), whether to include CREATE TABLE and DROP TABLE statements, whether to wrap everything in a transaction, and how many rows go into each INSERT statement. #### What can I configure for a Markdown export? Column alignment (left, center or right) and whether to include a row-number column, both applied to the whole table, plus a preview of the raw Markdown and a rendered version. #### Do the SQL and Markdown previews show my whole export or just a sample? Both previews show a sample built from the first 10 rows of your list. The downloaded file always contains every exported row. --- ## Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers Last updated: 2026-10-15 You can push a list straight into a Lemlist, Instantly or Smartlead campaign without downloading a file first. This uses the same export wizard described in "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" — pick one of these three as the destination instead of a file format. ### Picking the destination Open the list, click **Export** in the list header, and on the destination step choose **Lemlist**, **Instantly** or **Smartlead**. These skip the column-selection step: every column in the list is sent, matched automatically to the target tool's fields (see "Which fields are sent" below) — there's nothing to pick or reorder. ### Connecting and entering your API key - **Lemlist** connects through an account picker: click **Connect Lemlist Account**, a connection dialog opens in the page where you enter your Lemlist API key, and once connected you pick that account from a dropdown (you can connect more than one). The key is entered once per account, not per export. - **Instantly** and **Smartlead** ask you to paste your API key directly into the wizard (find it in the tool's API settings) and click **Verify**. The key is used only to load your campaigns and to send this export — it is not saved to your ListPlus account, so you'll paste it again next time you export to that tool. ### Choosing the campaign After connecting (Lemlist) or verifying the key (Instantly, Smartlead), a campaign dropdown (**Select Campaign** for Lemlist, **Campaign** for Instantly and Smartlead) lists your campaigns in that tool, with their current status (running/active, paused, draft, done/completed). Pick one and click **Push to Lemlist** / **Push to Instantly** / **Push to Smartlead** to send the list. ### Which rows and fields are sent Every row in the list is sent, including ignored ones, unless you start the export from Export Selected Records or Export Visible Records (see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)"). Every lead needs an email, read from your column named **email**. Rows without one are not sent — Lemlist and Instantly count them as failed, and Smartlead leaves them out of its count. For the rest, ListPlus matches your list's columns to each tool's known fields (first name, last name, company, phone, website/domain, job title, LinkedIn URL, and a few more depending on the tool) by column name, and sends any extra columns as custom fields/variables — Smartlead accepts up to 20 extra columns as custom fields. If a standard field (name, company, phone, website, LinkedIn) is empty in the cell but Enrich already found a value for that row, that value is sent. Extra columns are only sent from what's in the cells. ### Duplicates Rows that are already in the target campaign are skipped, not sent twice. This check happens inside Lemlist, Instantly or Smartlead itself (matching by email) — ListPlus doesn't pre-filter your list, it just reports how many the tool rejected as duplicates. Smartlead also skips leads that are already in another of your Smartlead campaigns or on its unsubscribe or block lists. ### Result summary After the push finishes, Lemlist shows a message in the pattern "N leads added, N duplicates skipped, N failed" (Instantly: "N leads added, N duplicates, N failed") (failed covers, for example, insufficient data or a rejected value in that tool). Smartlead sends leads in batches of 100. Check the lead count in your Smartlead campaign to confirm the result. ### Cost Pushing to Instantly or Smartlead with your own API key costs no credits and needs no plan. Lemlist works through a connected account, so it needs the Pro plan and every request to Lemlist costs credits (see the price list). ### Alternative: a pipeline The export sends a whole list (or a selection) once, when you click Push. If you'd rather hand contacts to a Lemlist or Instantly campaign in smaller batches, from lists and the Watchlist, and see per contact whether it was sent, set up a pipeline with the Lemlist or Instantly target (see "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)"). Pipelines also send only when you click Send (or go out by themselves if the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic). **Related topics:** export-overview · export-files · connect-crm-and-sheets · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook. ### FAQ #### How do I send my list to Lemlist, Instantly or Smartlead? Click Export in the list header, choose Lemlist, Instantly or Smartlead as the destination, connect your account or paste your API key, pick a campaign, and click the Push button. There is no column-selection step — every column is sent automatically. #### Do I need an API key for these? Instantly and Smartlead need an API key pasted into the wizard (found in that tool's API settings) and verified before you can pick a campaign. Lemlist instead uses a Connect Account dialog: you enter its API key once, and afterwards pick the account from a dropdown. #### Does ListPlus store my Instantly or Smartlead API key? No. The key you paste is used only to load your campaigns and send that one export; it is not saved to your ListPlus account, so you enter it again the next time you export. #### Which campaign do my contacts go into? After connecting your account (Lemlist) or verifying your key (Instantly, Smartlead), a campaign dropdown (Select Campaign for Lemlist, Campaign for Instantly and Smartlead) lists your campaigns with their current status. Every row goes into the single campaign you select. #### Which columns/fields actually get sent? All your columns are sent — there's no column picker for these three destinations. Common fields (name, company, phone, website, job title, LinkedIn URL) are matched to the tool's own fields by column name; anything else goes over as a custom field or variable (Smartlead accepts up to 20 extra columns). #### What happens to rows without an email address? Every lead needs an email, read from your column named email. Rows without one are not sent — Lemlist and Instantly count them as failed, and Smartlead leaves them out of its count. #### Will a contact be added twice if they're already in the campaign? No. Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead each check by email and skip leads already in that campaign; ListPlus reports the duplicate count it gets back but does not send the row twice. Smartlead also skips leads already in another of your Smartlead campaigns or on its unsubscribe or block lists. #### Does sending to a sequencer include enrichment data I haven't filled into the cells? Partly. Empty standard fields such as name, company, phone, website and LinkedIn are filled from enrichment results already found for that row, even if you haven't filled them into the cells. Custom columns are sent only from what's in the cells. #### Does pushing to Lemlist, Instantly or Smartlead cost credits? Instantly and Smartlead, which use the API key you paste, cost no credits. Lemlist uses a connected account, so it needs the Pro plan and costs credits per request (see the price list). #### What does the result message tell me after sending? Lemlist shows "N leads added, N duplicates skipped, N failed" (Instantly: "N leads added, N duplicates, N failed"). Smartlead sends leads in batches of 100 — check the lead count in your Smartlead campaign to confirm the result. --- ## Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets Last updated: 2026-10-11 You can push a list straight to HubSpot or Google Sheets without downloading a file first, using the same export wizard described in "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" — pick HubSpot or Google Sheets as the destination instead of a file format. ### Connecting your account Open the list, click **Export** in the list header, and choose **HubSpot** or **Google Sheets** as the destination. - **HubSpot**: if no account is connected yet you'll see **Connect HubSpot**; click it, click **Continue** in the connection dialog, approve access in HubSpot's sign-in window, and the account appears in the wizard. You can connect more than one account and switch between them, or click **Connect another account**. - **Google Sheets**: the same pattern with **Connect Google Account**, then pick the account from the **Google Account** dropdown. Connected accounts belong to your workspace, so an account a colleague connected is already in the list and can be used by everyone (see "[What access you grant when connecting a CRM or app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/crm-credentials)"). To hand over new contacts one by one as you find them, instead of exporting a whole list, use a pipeline (see "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)"). ### Exporting to HubSpot #### Export mode Choose one of three modes under **Export Mode**: - **Contacts Only** — creates or updates contacts in HubSpot CRM without touching any list. - **New Static List** — creates a new HubSpot static list (name it under **List Name**) and adds the contacts to it. - **Existing Static List** — pick a list from **Select List**, which shows each list's name and current size. #### Create vs. update, matched by email HubSpot contacts are matched by email address: a contact with a matching email is updated, a new email creates a new contact. The email is read from your column named **email**; rows without one are not sent to HubSpot at all and count toward "failed" in the result summary — there's no way to push a row without one. #### Field mapping Under **Field Mapping**, every column in your list (except internal system columns) gets a dropdown to pick the HubSpot contact property it should fill in; ListPlus suggests a mapping automatically based on the column's detected type or its name, grouped by HubSpot's own property groups (e.g. "Contact information"), and you can change or clear any of them before exporting. Columns left unmapped are skipped. If a standard HubSpot contact field (such as first or last name, job title, company, phone, city, country, website or LinkedIn URL) would otherwise be empty, and Enrich already found a value for that row, HubSpot receives the enrichment value, even if it was never filled into a cell or mapped to a column. ListPlus also adds one of its own contact properties behind the scenes so it can recognize a contact it already pushed on a future export — you don't need to map or fill it in. #### Result summary After clicking **Push to HubSpot**, you get a message such as "12 contacts created, 5 updated, 1 failed", followed in New/Existing Static List mode by "— 8 contacts added to list \"Q3 Leads\"". ### Exporting to Google Sheets Choose one of three methods under **Export Method**: - **Create new spreadsheet** — creates a brand-new Google Sheet; name it under **Spreadsheet Name** and its first tab under **Worksheet Name** (default "Sheet1"). - **Add to existing spreadsheet** — pick a spreadsheet under **Select Spreadsheet** and name a **New Worksheet Name**; this adds your data as a new tab inside that spreadsheet, it does not append rows to an existing tab. - **Replace existing data** — pick a spreadsheet under **Select Spreadsheet**; the content of its worksheet named "Sheet1" is cleared and replaced with your export. Three switches, all on by default, control the output: **Include column headers** writes your column names as the first row; in a new spreadsheet, **Freeze header row** keeps that row visible while scrolling and **Auto-resize columns** fits column widths to the content. The default spreadsheet name is "\ - Export \"; change it before exporting if you want something else. Google Sheets does not fill empty cells from enrichment results the way HubSpot does — it sends only what's saved in the cells, matching every other file-download destination. After the export finishes, the spreadsheet opens in a new browser tab. ### Which rows and columns are sent Every row in the list is sent, including ignored ones, unless you start the export from **Export Selected Records** or **Export Visible Records** (see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)"). For Google Sheets you also choose the columns in the wizard's column step; HubSpot skips that step and uses the Field Mapping instead. ### Cost Exporting to Google Sheets needs the Pro plan and exporting to HubSpot the Premium plan. Every request ListPlus makes to the tool costs credits (see the price list); a request that did not get through is not charged. **Related topics:** export-overview · send-to-sequencers · connect-crm-and-sheets. ### FAQ #### How do I push my list to HubSpot? Click Export in the list header, choose HubSpot as the destination, connect your account if you haven't already, pick an export mode (Contacts Only, New Static List or Existing Static List), review the field mapping, and click Push to HubSpot. #### Does exporting to HubSpot create new contacts or update existing ones? Both, matched by email address: a contact whose email already exists in HubSpot gets updated, and a new email creates a new contact. There's no separate create-only or update-only mode. #### What happens to rows without an email address when exporting to HubSpot? The email is read from your column named email; rows without one are not sent and count as "failed" in the result message — HubSpot requires an email to match or create a contact, so those rows are skipped. #### Can I control which HubSpot field each column maps to? Yes. The Field Mapping section lists every column with a dropdown of HubSpot contact properties; ListPlus suggests a mapping automatically, and you can change or clear any mapping. Unmapped columns are skipped. #### Will HubSpot get data I looked up with Enrich but haven't filled into the cells? Yes. For standard contact fields such as name, job title, company, phone, location, website and LinkedIn URL, HubSpot receives the value Enrich found for that row whenever the field would otherwise be empty, even if the value was never filled into the cells. Other columns are sent only if you map them. #### How do I know the HubSpot push worked? After the push, ListPlus shows a message like "12 contacts created, 5 updated, 1 failed", followed by the list name and how many contacts were added when you used New or Existing Static List mode. #### How do I export to Google Sheets, and what are the three methods? Click Export, choose Google Sheets, connect your Google account, then pick Create new spreadsheet, Add to existing spreadsheet (adds your data as a new worksheet tab) or Replace existing data (clears and overwrites the "Sheet1" worksheet of the spreadsheet you pick). #### Does the Google Sheets export write column headers? Yes, by default — the Include column headers switch is on unless you turn it off, and Freeze header row keeps that first row visible while scrolling. #### Does Google Sheets get enrichment data I haven't filled into the cells, like HubSpot does? No. The Google Sheets export sends only what's saved in the list's cells; fill enrichment results into the cells first if you want them included. #### Does exporting to HubSpot or Google Sheets cost credits? Yes — pushing your list to HubSpot or Google Sheets costs credits per request to the tool (see the price list), and it needs the Pro plan for Google Sheets and Premium for HubSpot. A request that did not get through is not charged. --- ## Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus doesn't have a native app in the Zapier, Make or n8n marketplaces. You connect all three the standard way these tools support any service: a webhook. ListPlus sends your list's data out as JSON to a URL you paste in, and each of the three has a matching trigger (Zapier's "Catch Hook", Make's "Custom webhook" module, n8n's "Webhook" node) that receives it. ### Sending your list out via webhook Open the list, click **Export** in the list header, then click **All destinations** next to "Send to an app" (webhook isn't one of the three apps shown by default) and pick **HTTP Request** — it's under the **Data & automation** tab, or search "HTTP". For n8n, use HTTP Request too, not the separate n8n tile. On the next screen: - **Endpoint URL** — paste the URL your Zapier catch hook, Make webhook module or n8n webhook node gives you, and pick the HTTP method (**POST**, **PUT** or **PATCH**; POST is what all three expect). - **Delivery Mode** — how your rows are grouped into requests: - **One request per record** (default) — one HTTP call per row. This is what the app recommends for Zapier and Make.com, since each call fires one automation run there. - **Batched (multiple records per request)** — a chosen number of rows per call (**Records per request**, 1–1000, default 100). Suggested for custom APIs. - **All records in a single request** — every row in one call. Suggested for a custom endpoint (n8n can take this too). A tag under the setting shows the resulting request count, e.g. "3 requests for 250 records". - **Include enrichment data** — off by default. Turn it on to attach an extra object of enrichment results to each record, including values Enrich has already found for that row but you haven't filled into the list's cells yet (see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" for how unfilled enrichment is otherwise excluded). - **Authentication** (optional, collapsed by default) — None (the URL itself is treated as the secret, the default for most Zapier/Make/n8n hooks), Bearer Token, API Key Header, Basic Auth, or Custom Header. - **Custom Headers** (optional) — add any extra header name/value pairs your endpoint needs. Click **Send Test Record** to send the first record of your export to the endpoint before committing to the full send — useful in Make.com, which uses the test call to detect the data structure for the rest of your scenario. It shows the response status and body. When you're ready, click **Send N records** to run the real export. ### What actually happens when you click Send ListPlus's own server makes the HTTP calls (not your browser), one request at a time, waiting up to 30 seconds for each response. If a call fails, it isn't retried automatically — it's counted as failed and the run continues with the next one. When it's done you get a toast: "N records sent successfully", or "N records sent, N failed" if some calls didn't succeed. ### Example payload With **One request per record**, each call looks like this (your actual column names replace `email`/`firstName`): ```json { "record": { "email": "jane@acme.com", "firstName": "Jane", "company": "Acme" }, "meta": { "listId": "…", "listName": "Q3 Leads", "totalRecords": 250, "exportedAt": "2026-09-25T10:00:00.000Z", "columns": [ … ], "recordIndex": 0, "deliveryMode": "one_by_one", "includesArData": false, "source": "listplus" } } ``` **Batched** and **All records in a single request** send `"records": [...]` (an array) instead of `"record"`, plus `batchIndex`, `batchCount` and `recordCount` in `meta`. Each record contains your list's columns plus a stable row ID; other internal fields are stripped; enrichment values only appear if you turned Include enrichment data on. ### Is this triggered automatically? Not from the export wizard: there, sending is a manual action — you open the wizard and click Send each time you want to push the current data out. For automatic sending, use a list trigger that hands rows to a webhook pipeline whose Release is set to Automatic (see below). ### Alternative: a webhook pipeline For a steady flow of single records rather than a whole-list export, use a **pipeline** with the **Webhook** target ("To n8n, Zapier or Make" on the Pipelines start page). You add rows from any list or contacts from the Watchlist, and each one is sent as its own signed JSON request when someone clicks Send. Every record uses fixed field names (such as `email`, `first_name`, `company_name`) whatever your columns are called, so one Zap or scenario works for all your lists, and each record shows afterwards whether it was sent. A webhook pipeline costs credits per delivered record (see the price list; the export wizard's webhook stays free) and sends when you click Send — or by itself if Release is set to Automatic. See "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)". ### Getting data into ListPlus from Zapier, Make or n8n Three ways don't need a native app either: - **A list webhook.** For records that belong in one list — form submissions, new leads, sign-ups — give that list its own webhook: in the list click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name → **Webhook** → **Create webhook**, and POST JSON to the URL from Zapier's "Webhooks by Zapier" action, Make's HTTP module or an n8n HTTP Request node. Fields land in the matching columns without a mapping step and duplicates are merged; if you like, spam, test entries and invalid addresses wait in the Inbox for your decision instead (off by default). It costs no credits on every plan, within daily limits per plan. See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". - **The per-list API connection.** Each list can get its own secret URL that works as a REST API and an MCP server, which Zapier's, Make's or n8n's generic HTTP/REST modules can call to read, add, update or enrich rows in that list. The workspace owner or an admin sets it up from the list header: click **More** → **Automation** → **Set up agent access** (or **Add API Endpoint** if the list already has one). It's included on every plan; enrichment triggered through it costs the same credits as doing it in the app. Its setup screen has ready-made examples for Zapier, Make and n8n. See the API connection topic for the full setup. - **Your Inbox intake address.** In Flows, open **Inbox → Webhook & automations** and click **Create webhook** (or use the ⋮ on that row) to get a webhook URL that anything can POST to — pasted text, a CSV or JSON snippet, a calendar invite (.ics file). The page shows a ready-made snippet for n8n's HTTP Request node and Zapier's Webhooks module; Make's HTTP/Webhooks module works the same way (POST JSON or plain text). The same screen also shows your personal forwarding address for this workspace — useful if the tool notifies you by email rather than calling a webhook. Keep attachments under about 3 MB in total — larger e-mails may not arrive — and note that Excel files and scanned PDFs are skipped. Whatever arrives lands in the workspace's shared Inbox for you to review and turn into contacts (recognition costs credits per run) — see "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" topic for limits and how recognition works. ### Cost Sending your list out via webhook costs no credits, including with Include enrichment data turned on — it only attaches results already looked up, it doesn't trigger new lookups. Getting data in via a list webhook, the API connection or the Inbox intake address costs no credits to receive; credits are only spent the same way they normally are — enrichment, and recognizing contacts in the Inbox (a price per run, whatever the format; all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). **Related topics:** export-overview · send-to-sequencers · export-to-hubspot-and-sheets · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · sync-overview. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus have a native Zapier, Make or n8n app? No, not in any of those three marketplaces. You connect through a generic HTTP Request/webhook destination in ListPlus's export wizard instead — it POSTs JSON to a URL, which is exactly what Zapier's Catch Hook, Make's Custom webhook module and n8n's Webhook node are built to receive. #### How do I send my list to Zapier, Make or n8n? Click Export in the list header, click All destinations, and pick HTTP Request (it's under the Data & automation tab, or search "HTTP"). Paste the URL your Zapier/Make/n8n webhook trigger gave you, pick a delivery mode, and click Send N records. #### Where is the webhook/HTTP Request option in the export wizard? It isn't one of the three apps shown right away (Google Sheets, HubSpot, Lemlist). Click All destinations next to "Send to an app", then open the Data & automation tab or search "HTTP Request" (searching "webhook" won't find it). For n8n, use HTTP Request too, not the separate n8n tile. #### What's the difference between the delivery modes? One request per record sends one HTTP call per row (recommended for Zapier and Make.com, since each call triggers one run there). Batched sends a set number of rows per call (1–1000, default 100). All records in a single request sends everything in one call (recommended for a custom endpoint). #### What does the data sent to my webhook actually look like? Each request is JSON. One request per record sends `{"record": {...your columns...}, "meta": {...}}`; Batched and All-at-once send `{"records": [...], "meta": {...}}` with `batchIndex`/`batchCount` added. Each record carries your columns plus a row ID; other internal fields are stripped; enrichment results are only included if you turn on Include enrichment data. #### Can I test the webhook before sending my whole list? Yes. Click Send Test Record to send the first record of your export to your endpoint and see the response status and body — this is also how Make.com detects the data structure for the rest of your scenario. #### Can I add authentication or custom headers to the request? Yes. The Authentication section supports Bearer Token, API Key Header, Basic Auth or Custom Header (default is None, treating the URL itself as the secret), and you can add any number of extra custom headers separately. #### Does the webhook send automatically, or do I have to trigger it every time? The export wizard's webhook is manual only: you click Send each time, and it is free. For automatic sending, set up a list trigger that hands rows to a webhook pipeline with Release set to Automatic; pipeline deliveries cost credits per record. #### Should I use the export webhook or a webhook pipeline for Zapier, Make or n8n? Use the export webhook to send a whole list (or a selection) once, with your own column names and a choice of batching. Use a pipeline with the Webhook target to hand over single records from any list or the Watchlist over time, with fixed field names, a signature and a per-record sent status; both only send when you click, unless the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic, in which case it also sends by itself. #### How do I get data into ListPlus from Zapier, Make or n8n instead of out? For records that belong in one list, give the list its own webhook (in the list: Set up → Webhook → Create webhook) and POST JSON to it: fields land in the matching columns, at no credit cost on every plan. For unstructured content, send it to your personal Inbox intake webhook URL (Flows → Inbox → Webhook & automations → Create webhook) and recognize the contacts there. To read, update or enrich rows from those tools, use the list's API connection (list header → More → Automation). #### Does sending to a webhook cost credits? No. Sending via webhook costs no credits, even with Include enrichment data on, since it only attaches results already looked up rather than triggering new lookups. --- ## My CRM or tool (Zoho, Dynamics, Outreach…) isn't listed Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/integration-not-listed Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus has built-in export destinations for Google Sheets, HubSpot, Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead, plus a generic webhook. **Pipelines** add further targets: Salesforce, Pipedrive and Attio, and **Other app** for ready-made actions of many more apps (see "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)"). There is no native connector for Zoho, Microsoft Dynamics, Outreach or many other CRMs and sales tools. You can still get your data there. Three ways: ### 1. Webhook, through Zapier, Make or n8n Export via the **HTTP Request** destination (open All destinations in the export wizard; it's under Data & automation, or search "HTTP") and point it at a Zapier catch hook, a Make webhook module, or an n8n webhook node. From there, use that automation tool's own connector for your CRM — Zapier, Make and n8n each support a wide range of CRMs and sales tools, so this is usually the fastest way to reach a tool ListPlus doesn't connect to directly. See "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)" for the full setup, payload shape and delivery modes. A pipeline with the **Webhook** target does the same for records you hand over one by one from lists and the Watchlist (charged per delivered record; the export wizard's webhook is free). ### 2. The per-list API connection Each list can get its own secret REST + MCP endpoint (list header → More → Automation → Set up agent access, set up by the workspace owner or an admin) that a script, an AI agent, or an automation tool's generic HTTP module can call to read rows out of that list. Point it, or a Zapier/Make/n8n flow built on it, at your CRM's own API to push the data across. It's included on every plan. ### 3. Export a file and import it manually Download the list as CSV or Excel (see "[Export file formats: CSV, Excel, JSON, SQL and Markdown](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-files)") and use your CRM's own import feature — most CRMs and sales tools accept a CSV or Excel import. It's a one-time transfer with no live connection, which is often enough for a single campaign or a one-off data push. ### Bringing data in from one of these tools instead Creating a new list works differently: the "Connect a system" section's **3,000+ apps** tile (the "Choose an app" window) reaches a much larger catalog than the curated CRMs, so a tool without a built-in export destination may still show up there as an import source. Search for it before assuming nothing exists — if it appears, it imports through the same generic connect-and-pick-a-record-type flow described in "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)". ### Requesting a tool If none of the above covers what you need, under "Missing your system?" at the bottom of the Choose an app window, click "Request an integration". **Related topics:** zapier-make-n8n · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · connect-crm-and-sheets · export-overview · export-files · sync-overview. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus connect directly to Zoho, Dynamics, Close or Outreach? Salesforce, Pipedrive and Attio are available as pipeline targets; Zoho, Dynamics, Close and Outreach have no native connector. For those, try a pipeline's Other app target, the webhook with Zapier, Make or n8n, the API connection, or a file export. #### How do I get my ListPlus data into a CRM that isn't listed? Three ways: send it out via the HTTP Request webhook destination into Zapier, Make or n8n, which likely has a native connector for that CRM; point a script or automation flow at the list's own API connection; or export a CSV/Excel file and import it into the CRM directly. #### Can I automate pushing data to an unsupported CRM on a schedule? Not from ListPlus directly — an export webhook runs when you click "Send N records", a pipeline sends when someone clicks Send (or by itself if its Release is set to Automatic), and the API connection only runs when your own script or automation flow calls it. See "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)" for what triggers the send. #### Is there a way to pull data in from a tool like Zoho or Dynamics? Possibly — the New List page's 3,000+ apps tile (the "Choose an app" window) reaches a much larger catalog than the curated CRMs shown by default, so search for your tool there before assuming it isn't available. See "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)" for how that generic connect flow works. #### What's the simplest option if I only need to move data once? Exporting a CSV or Excel file and importing it into your CRM's own import tool — no account connection or webhook setup needed, and it costs no credits either way. #### Does using the webhook or API connection cost more credits than a listed integration? Not more: sending via the export wizard's webhook costs nothing, and the API connection is included on every plan. A pipeline delivery, also to a webhook or Other app, costs credits per record like any pipeline target. Enrichment actions you trigger cost the same credits as anywhere else in ListPlus. #### How do I request a new integration? See "[How do I request a new integration?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/request-an-integration)" for where to click and what to include. --- ## Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets Last updated: 2026-10-17 On the New List page, the **"Connect a system"** section lets you pull records straight from another app into a new list, instead of uploading a file. Four tiles are shown: Google Sheets, HubSpot, Attio and **3,000+ apps**. The last one opens the **Choose an app** window, where you can search for Airtable, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Notion, Stripe, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom or many other systems. ### How connecting works 1. Click a source under "Connect a system", or find one via **3,000+ apps** (the "Choose an app" window). 2. A connection dialog opens in the page. Click **Continue**: that service's own secure sign-in window opens — log in and approve access there, not in ListPlus. 3. Pick the account that just connected (or **Connect new account** to add another), then choose what to import. 4. Choose what to import (and, for Attio, HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive and Stripe, an optional filter — see below). You see a preview of the data before the import actually runs. ### What gets locked by plan Nothing that goes through a connected tool works on Basic: connecting an account, importing, reloading, syncing back, exporting to Google Sheets and pipeline targets that reach a connected tool all need Pro at least. Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom and any other app from the catalogue need Pro to import; HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium (HubSpot needs Premium everywhere, a pipeline to Salesforce, Pipedrive or Attio only Pro). In a workspace, the **workspace owner's plan** counts, not yours. A locked source shows a lock icon and, if you click it, a short screen explaining which plan unlocks it — see "Why is a connection locked, and what do I see?" in Which plan do I need for exactly what that looks like. ### What each system imports - **Attio** — People, Companies, or A list (you then pick one of your Attio lists). Deals and custom objects can't be picked as a data type of their own. The list gets one column per Attio attribute, named by its title, including attributes that are empty; see the FAQ on Attio columns. - **HubSpot** — Deals, Companies, or Contacts. - **Salesforce** — Opportunities, Accounts, Contacts, or Leads. - **Pipedrive** — Deals, Persons, Organizations, or Activities. - **Google Sheets** — pick a spreadsheet, then a specific sheet. - **Airtable** — pick a base, then a specific table; all its records import. - **Notion** — pick a database shared with the connection; its records import. - **Stripe** — Customers, Charges, Invoices, Subscriptions, or Payment Intents. - **Lemlist** — Leads from the campaigns you pick (all are selected by default), or Unsubscribes. - **Phantombuster** — one of your lead lists, or the latest run's output for a specific agent. - **Zoom** — a webinar's Registrants, or its Participants (who actually joined). ### Filtering what you import For Attio (People and Companies; not "A list"), HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive and Stripe, after picking the data type you choose: All Records, Created in Last 30 Days, Created in Last 7 Days, or Custom Filter on any field; HubSpot also offers Specified Owners, and Specified Countries appears when the data includes a country. For Attio, the Custom Filter works on text, number, date and select fields, e-mail, phone, domain, name, location and interaction dates and, for people, the company and its domain; owner and other reference fields can't be filtered, and "is empty" / "is not empty" do not work on number, date and select fields. The number of matching records is shown before you import; for Attio it is a rough size ("more than 1,000") when there are more records than the preview loads, and the exact number is known after the import. Google Sheets, Airtable and Notion skip this step — picking the exact sheet, table or database is the filter. Lemlist lets you pick which campaigns to import; Phantombuster and Zoom import the chosen list, agent output or webinar as a whole. **HubSpot with a filter: at most 10,000 records.** HubSpot delivers at most 10,000 records for a filtered query (any choice other than All Records). When the filtered count is higher, the import step warns: "With filters, HubSpot delivers at most 10,000 records — the first 10,000 will be imported. Narrow the filter, or import without a filter to get everything." The import then brings in the first 10,000 instead of failing, and a later Reload or automatic refresh of that list also covers at most the first 10,000 matches. Whatever the source, an online import also stops at 50,000 records — the most one list can hold. While an online import runs, the "Creating your list..." screen shows "N records loaded …" for Attio, HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive and Stripe. ### Connections are shared in your workspace An account you connect belongs to the workspace you're in: every member can use it, and actions with it run under your login. See "[What access you grant when connecting a CRM or app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/crm-credentials)". ### Credits and what's stored Importing from a connected app costs credits for every request ListPlus makes to the tool to read the records (a request that did not get through is not charged); the previews and pickers in the wizard are not charged (a plain file upload — CSV, Excel or JSON — has its own, different price; all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). Each connection uses that service's own secure login (OAuth); your login credentials for HubSpot, Google, Salesforce and the rest are never stored on ListPlus's servers, whatever plan you're on. ### Disconnecting an account Open **Settings → Connected accounts** and click **Disconnect** on the account, or, in the New List flow, click the same source again and click the small delete (trash) icon on the connected account. The workspace owner, an admin or the person who connected it can disconnect. Click **Connect new account** to add a different login for that service afterwards. ### For advanced users The "3,000+ apps" tile (the "Choose an app" window) reaches a much larger catalog than the curated systems above; anything found there imports through the same generic connect-and-pick-a-record-type flow, without the curated filter presets. Pasting a public link (including a publicly viewable Google Sheets link) is a separate, login-free path — see "[Importing from a URL or a Google Sheets link](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-from-url)" for how that differs from connecting your Google account here. **Related topics:** sync-overview · reload-from-source · export-overview · crm-credentials · pipelines-overview · which-plan-do-i-need · cancel-downgrade-leave. ### FAQ #### How do I connect a CRM or app to a new list? On the New List page, click a source under "Connect a system" (Google Sheets, HubSpot, Attio) or click the 3,000+ apps tile to find another one, such as Airtable. A connection dialog opens in the page, and after Continue that service's own secure sign-in window; after you approve access there, pick the connected account and choose what to import. #### Which systems can I connect? Attio, HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Notion, Stripe, Phantombuster and Zoom are all built in, and the 3,000+ apps tile searches a much larger catalog for anything else. Each curated system imports specific record types, like Deals and Contacts from HubSpot or Customers and Invoices from Stripe. #### Which plan do I need to connect a specific system? Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom and other apps need Pro; HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium, and nothing that goes through a connected tool works on Basic. In a workspace the owner's plan decides, not yours. See "[Which plan do I need?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/which-plan-do-i-need)" for what the lock screen shows and how to upgrade. #### What can I import from HubSpot, Salesforce or Pipedrive? HubSpot offers Deals, Companies or Contacts; Salesforce offers Opportunities, Accounts, Contacts or Leads; Pipedrive offers Deals, Persons, Organizations or Activities. Pick one data type per import — run the connect flow again to bring in another. #### What can I import from Attio, and what does the list look like? Attio offers People, Companies, or A list (you then pick one of your Attio lists); deals and custom objects can't be picked as a data type of their own. The list gets one column per Attio attribute, named by the attribute's title and including empty ones, plus Name, First name, Last name, Email, Phone, Domain, City, State, Postal code, Country, Company, Company domain, the owner by name and an Attio URL. Further e-mails, phones and domains go into Other emails, Other phones and Other domains. #### What is the _attio_id column, and does reloading Attio update only changes? _attio_id holds the Attio record id (for a list imported from "A list": the id of the list entry); keep that column, because reload and write-back match rows by it. Reload from Attio always loads everything — there is no "only changes" update. #### What can I import from Google Sheets, Airtable or Notion? For Google Sheets you pick a spreadsheet and then a specific sheet; for Airtable you pick a base and then a table, and all its records import; for Notion you pick a database that's shared with the connection, and its records import. None of these three has a separate filter step — picking the exact sheet, table or database is how you narrow it down. #### What can I import from Stripe, Lemlist, Phantombuster or Zoom? Stripe offers Customers, Charges, Invoices, Subscriptions or Payment Intents; Lemlist offers Leads from the campaigns you pick or Unsubscribes; Phantombuster offers a lead list or a specific agent's latest run output; Zoom offers a webinar's Registrants or its Participants (who actually attended). #### Can I filter what gets imported? For Attio (People and Companies), HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive and Stripe you choose All Records, Created in Last 30 Days, Created in Last 7 Days or a Custom Filter; HubSpot also offers Specified Owners. Attio's Custom Filter can't use owner or other reference fields, and the exact match count is shown before import. Lemlist lets you pick campaigns; Google Sheets, Airtable and Notion have no filter step. #### Does connecting an app and importing cost credits? Yes — every request ListPlus makes to the connected system to read the records costs credits (see the price list); the preview in the import wizard is not charged. A plain file upload (CSV, Excel or JSON) is priced as a file import instead; see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the prices. #### Is my login for HubSpot, Google or Salesforce stored by ListPlus? No. Each connection uses that service's own secure sign-in window, and your login credentials are never stored on ListPlus's servers — this applies on every plan. The access you approve is held by the secure sign-in service, not by ListPlus, and you can remove it at any time by disconnecting the account. #### How do I disconnect a connected account? Open Settings → Connected accounts and click Disconnect on the account, or click the small delete icon on it in the New List flow. The workspace owner, an admin or the person who connected it can disconnect it; click Connect new account afterwards to add a different login. #### Can I import a public Google Sheets link without connecting my Google account? Yes — pasting a publicly viewable link is a separate, login-free path from connecting your Google account here, which instead needs Pro and lets you browse your own private spreadsheets. See "[Importing from a URL or a Google Sheets link](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-from-url)" for how the link-based method works and what it costs. #### What happens to a connection I already made if I downgrade my plan? The account stays connected but is not used: a sync, reload or export answers that the plan is needed, and an automatic refresh shows that the plan is needed and resumes by itself after an upgrade. See "Will my connected HubSpot, Google Sheets etc. keep working if I downgrade to Basic?" in Cancel, downgrade and leave. #### Why does my filtered HubSpot list stop at 10,000 records? HubSpot delivers at most 10,000 records for a filtered query, so an import with a filter (anything but All Records) brings in the first 10,000 matches, and the import step warns you before that; later reloads and automatic refreshes also cover at most the first 10,000. Narrow the filter, or import without a filter, to get everything. #### Can a connected list like HubSpot or Airtable update itself without me clicking Reload? Yes, for lists from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe: set Refresh automatically to Daily or Weekly under Set up → Refresh automatically in that list (the Set up button is in the list header). Google Sheets, scraper imports and file imports don't support this; see "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)" for how it runs. --- ## Keeping a connected list in sync Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview Last updated: 2026-10-15 If you created a list by connecting a source like Google Sheets, Airtable or HubSpot, ListPlus doesn't keep it updated by itself by default: you bring fresh records in and push your edits back out yourself, with two separate, manual actions. **Reload** pulls the latest data from the source into the list, and **Sync** (in the status bar) writes your edits in ListPlus back to the source. For lists from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe you can also turn on **Refresh automatically** in the list's **Set up** page so a refresh runs for you on a schedule — see "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)" for how that works; writing changes back always stays a manual, click-to-write action either way. ### Reload: pulling fresh data in Lists created from a source with a stable record ID — HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe — show a Reload icon in the list header (hover it to see "Reload from {source}"; on narrow windows, widen the window to see it). Clicking it fetches the current records from the source. Lists from Google Sheets, Lemlist, Phantombuster or Zoom have no Reload, because ListPlus can't reliably match their rows to the source records; re-import them instead. Every member of the workspace can reload the list, because the connected account is shared in the workspace. If the source was connected in a different workspace, you see "This data source was connected in another workspace and can only be reloaded there." Attio lists match rows by `_attio_id` (do not remove that column) and always reload everything; the Update choice below is not available for them. For HubSpot lists the Reload icon opens two choices. **Update** fetches only the records that changed in HubSpot since the list was last fetched — changed ones are updated, new ones that match the list's filters are added (up to 1,000 per click; click again for more). It is quick and never removes a row. **Reload everything** fetches all records, as described here, and also removes rows HubSpot no longer returns. Records deleted in HubSpot only disappear with "Reload everything". If you have open AI suggestions in the grid, or saved changes still waiting to sync back, a dialog warns you before reloading: it lists how many open suggestions would be lost (apply them first to keep them), explains that saved pending changes are resolved field by field (see below), and notes that your tags, enrichment results and quality data are kept. Click "Reload anyway" to continue. #### What happens to your edits on Reload Your own edits are saved automatically, so every edit is covered. For each one, ListPlus compares what the source originally had, what you changed it to, and what the source has now: - Source unchanged → your edit is kept. - Source already matches your edit → the pending marker is cleared, nothing lost. - Source has a different new value → the source value wins and your edit is overwritten. Your CRM or source is the leading system: a field only you changed keeps your edit (ready to write back with Sync), a field the source changed too takes the source's value. The same rule applies to an automatic refresh and to every source. Rows that are no longer in the source stay in your list when they carry your work — edits not yet synced back, enrichment results, a status or tags; rows without any of that are removed. Records that are new in the source are added, and columns you added in ListPlus are kept. See "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)" for the full list. Open AI suggestions you haven't applied are not covered by this comparison at all — they're simply lost on reload, which is exactly why the warning dialog calls them out separately. ### Sync: writing your edits back For five connected sources — Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce and Attio — you can write your ListPlus edits back to the original record. When you have edited such a list, the status bar shows "N open changes | **Sync**"; click it to open the Changes panel, which lists the open changes. The first time, click **Choose key column** and pick the **Primary Key Field** (the column whose values identify each row in the source, such as its record ID), then **Save & Enable Sync**. Then click **Write to {source}** (for example "Write to HubSpot"): ListPlus reads the source, compares and writes in one go. If the source changed one of those fields itself in the meantime, nothing is written yet: the panel says "{source} has changed in the meantime" and marks the rows. The source always wins on such a field — the list takes the source's value. Click **Write anyway** to write the rest. Only columns that came from the source are written back; edits in columns you added in ListPlus stay in the list and are never sent. Your own edits are already saved; open AI suggestions are not written until you click **Apply** in the list header. Sync only updates existing source records with the values you changed in ListPlus — it never creates new records in the source and never deletes anything there, and it only runs when you click the button. Every member sees the open-changes count; only the workspace's owner and admins can write the changes back. The changes are written under the login of the person who connected the account. For Attio this works only for lists imported from "People" or "Companies", not from "A list" (see "[Setting up how changes push back to your source](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/push-changes-back)"). Lists from Stripe, Lemlist, Phantombuster or Zoom are import-only: the Changes panel does not offer writing back for them. Export the updated data instead. ### Connecting a new source Nothing that goes through a connected tool works on Basic. Google Sheets, Airtable, Lemlist, Phantombuster, Zoom and other apps need Pro; HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe need Premium, and a reload or sync of a list goes by its source's plan. Every request to the tool costs credits (see the price list). See "[Which plan do I need?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/which-plan-do-i-need)". For a connection you already had before downgrading, see "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)". To hand new contacts to a CRM rather than update the source a list came from, use a pipeline (see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)"). **Related topics:** connect-crm-and-sheets · push-changes-back · crm-credentials · pipelines-overview · which-plan-do-i-need · export-overview. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus keep my connected list updated automatically? By default, no — you pull a fresh copy in with Reload and write your edits back with Sync, both only when you click the button. For HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe lists you can turn on Refresh automatically under Set up (the two sliders next to the list's name) to refresh the list daily or weekly; see "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)". #### What does the Reload button do? It fetches the current records from the connected source into your list. It appears on lists from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe (not Google Sheets), and every member of the workspace can use it. #### What is the difference between Update and Reload everything? On HubSpot lists (the only source with this choice; Attio always reloads everything), Update fetches only the records that changed in HubSpot since the last fetch and adds new matching ones; it never removes a row. Reload everything fetches all records and also removes rows HubSpot no longer returns. Use Update for a quick refresh and Reload everything when the list should match HubSpot exactly. #### Will reloading overwrite the changes I made in ListPlus? Not automatically. For each saved edit, ListPlus checks whether the source changed that field: if it didn't, your edit is kept; if the source now has a different value, the source wins and your edit is overwritten. Rows no longer in the source are removed only if they carry none of your work (pending edits, enrichment results, a status or tags). #### What happens to my edits and open AI suggestions when I reload? Your own edits are saved automatically, so Reload compares them field by field with the source. Open AI suggestions you haven't applied are lost — the warning dialog before reload lists them separately, so click Apply in the list header first if you want to keep them. #### Can I push my ListPlus edits back to Google Sheets, HubSpot or Salesforce? Yes, for sources that support it (see below): click "N open changes | Sync" in the status bar, then Write to {source} in the Changes panel (the first time, Choose key column). It updates the matching record with your value; only columns that came from the source are written, and if the source changed the same field meanwhile, the source's value wins. #### Which connected sources support syncing changes back? Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce and Attio (Attio only for lists imported from People or Companies). Lists from Airtable, Pipedrive, Stripe, Lemlist, Phantombuster and Zoom are import-only; syncing back isn't supported for them. #### Does syncing create new records in the source, or only update existing ones? Only existing records. Sync never creates new records in the source and never deletes records there — new rows you add in ListPlus stay in ListPlus. #### Who is allowed to reload or sync a connected list? Every member can use Reload and sees the open-changes count; only the workspace's owner and admins can write changes back. Both run under the login of the person who connected the account, and only in the workspace where it was connected. #### What does writing changes back (Sync) cost, and which plan does it need? Writing changes back costs credits per request to the source — see the price list — and needs the plan of the list's source: Pro for Google Sheets, Premium for HubSpot, Salesforce, Attio and Notion. Where the tool allows it, ListPlus writes in batches; otherwise it needs one request per record, plus the reads that compare. If the balance runs out during a sync, the sync stops at the next request: what was written stays written, and the remaining changes stay open. #### Does reloading or refreshing a list cost credits or need a plan? Yes — a reload, an update and each automatic refresh run need the source's plan (Pro, or Premium for HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe) and cost credits per request to the source; see the price list. If the balance runs out during a run, the run stops at the next request and the list keeps its previous state. #### Why does my automatic refresh say the plan no longer includes this source? The workspace's plan was lowered, and the source needs Pro or Premium; the message reads "The workspace's plan no longer includes this source. Upgrade to refresh the list again." The refresh stays switched on and is tried again at each due time, so it resumes by itself once the plan includes the source; the same holds when the workspace has no credits left. --- ## Setting up how changes push back to your source Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/push-changes-back Last updated: 2026-10-15 Sync writes your edits back to Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce or Attio. (Lists from Airtable and Pipedrive can be reloaded from their source, but not written back.) Before the first sync, the Changes panel shows "Choose the key column": click **Choose key column** to open **Configure Sync Settings**, pick the field that uniquely identifies each record, and click **Save & Enable Sync**. ### The Primary Key Field ListPlus needs one field that uniquely identifies each record — usually an `id` field or an email address — to match a ListPlus row to the right record in the source. The dropdown lists the list's columns that came from the source; the service's record id (for example `id` for HubSpot, `_attio_id` for Attio) is preselected when the list has it. Pick a column with a unique value in every row. ### Attio A list can be written back to Attio only when it was imported from Attio "People" or "Companies". A list imported from "A list" (the entries of an Attio list) cannot be written back, and the Changes panel does not offer writing back for it. The key column is `_attio_id`, preselected in the sync settings. ListPlus writes text, number, date and select fields; the name (also "First name" and "Last name" on their own); the first e-mail ("Email"), the first phone ("Phone") and the first domain ("Domain"); and the location parts "City", "State", "Postal code" and "Country". It does not write "Company" and other references, "Other emails", "Other phones", "Other domains", or fields Attio maintains itself (interaction dates, "Created at", connection strength). Rows added in ListPlus are not created in Attio. Attio refuses some values: a select value must be an existing option in Attio, a phone number must start with "+" and the country code, and "Country" must be the two-letter code (for example DE). When Attio refuses one value, nothing of that record is written and the change stays open with Attio's reason. Fix the value and sync again. ### Handling conflicts If the source's value for a field changed since you edited it in ListPlus, that field is a conflict, and **the source always wins**: your edit for that field is replaced by the source's current value, and the panel tells you which fields ("{source} now holds: … – the list takes that"). There is no setting for this. When you click **Write to {source}** and the source has changed something, nothing is written yet: the panel says "{source} has changed in the meantime", marks the rows, and the button becomes **Write anyway**. Only columns that came from the source are written back. Edits in columns you added in ListPlus stay in the list and are never sent ("stays in the list – the column is not from {source}"). You can reopen the settings any time with the gear button ("Change Settings") in the panel's "Target {source} · Key: {field}" row, without losing anything you've already synced. Every member sees the open changes; only the workspace's owner and admins can choose the key and write the changes back. The changes are written under the login of the person who connected the account. **Related topics:** sync-overview (which sources support sync back, updates existing records only, who can sync) · connect-crm-and-sheets. For Google Sheets two checks protect your sheet: a cell that holds a formula is never overwritten (that change stays open and says so), and if rows were sorted or inserted while the sync was writing, the rows concerned are reported instead of counted as written — check them in the sheet. ### FAQ #### How does ListPlus know which row matches which record when syncing back? You set a Primary Key Field in Configure Sync Settings (Changes panel → Choose key column) — a field like the record's ID or email that uniquely identifies it in the source. ListPlus uses that field to match each ListPlus row to its record. #### What happens if the source record changed since I edited it? The source always wins: that field takes the source's current value in your list and your edit for it is not written. Nothing is written until you click Write anyway, and the panel marks the rows concerned; there is no setting to change this rule. #### Does ListPlus suggest a primary key field for me? Yes — the dropdown lists the list's columns that came from the source, and the service's record id (for example `id` for HubSpot or `_attio_id` for Attio) is preselected when the list has that column. #### Is my edit lost when the source changed the same field? Yes, for that field: the cell takes the source's current value, and the Changes panel tells you which fields it replaced. Your edits to other fields are still written. #### Where do I set the primary key and conflict handling? Click "N open changes | Sync" in the status bar to open the Changes panel. The first time, click Choose key column, pick the key and click Save & Enable Sync; later the gear button ("Change Settings") in the panel's Target row reopens them — this doesn't undo anything already synced. #### Does Sync push every field, or only the ones I changed? Only the fields you actually edited in ListPlus, and only in columns that came from the source, are compared and written; columns you added in ListPlus stay in the list. Rows with an empty Primary Key Field value, and rows you added in ListPlus, are skipped. #### Can I write my changes back to Attio? Yes, for lists imported from Attio "People" or "Companies" — the key column is `_attio_id`, preselected in the sync settings. A list imported from "A list" (the entries of an Attio list) cannot be written back. #### Which Attio fields does Sync write? Text, number, date and select fields, the name ("First name" and "Last name" too), the first "Email", "Phone" and "Domain", and the location parts "City", "State", "Postal code" and "Country". "Company" and other references, "Other emails", "Other phones", "Other domains" and fields Attio maintains itself (interaction dates, "Created at", connection strength) are not written; rows added in ListPlus are not created in Attio. #### Why does an Attio change stay open instead of being written? Attio refused a value, so nothing of that record was written and the change stays open with Attio's reason. Common causes: a select value that is not an existing option in Attio, a phone number that does not start with "+" and the country code, or a "Country" that is not the two-letter code (for example DE). Correct the value and sync again. --- ## How do I request a new integration? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/request-an-integration Last updated: 2026-10-15 When you start a new list, the **Connect a system** section of ListPlus shows Google Sheets, HubSpot, Attio and a **3,000+ apps** tile that opens the **Choose an app** window, which searches a much larger catalog of connectors. If your tool still doesn't turn up there, you can ask for it directly. ### Where to ask Click the **3,000+ apps** tile on the New List page, search for your tool to confirm it's really missing, then scroll to the bottom of the Choose an app window. Under **Missing your system?** click **Request an integration** — it opens an email to ListPlus with a pre-filled subject, ready for you to describe the tool you need. The same window (with the same link) also opens from Settings → Connected accounts → Connect account, and from a list's Set up → App events. ### What to include Name the app or system, and if you can, what you'd want to do with it — bring records in, push updates out, or both. That helps prioritize which integrations get built next; there's no guaranteed timeline or confirmation that a specific request will be added. ### In the meantime A tool without a dedicated connector often still works today: export a CSV/Excel file and import it into the other tool, send data out through a webhook into Zapier, Make or n8n (which usually has its own connector for many more apps), or connect to it through a list's own API connection. See "My CRM or tool (Zoho, Dynamics, Close, Outreach…) isn't listed" for the full set of workarounds. ### FAQ #### How do I ask ListPlus to add an integration I need? Open the 3,000+ apps tile on the New List page, confirm your tool isn't already searchable there, then click Request an integration under "Missing your system?" at the bottom of the Choose an app window. It opens a pre-addressed email you can fill in. #### What should I include in the request? The name of the app or system, and ideally whether you want to bring data in from it, push data out to it, or both — that context helps prioritize what gets built. #### Will my requested integration definitely be added? There's no guarantee or fixed timeline — requests help ListPlus decide what to build next, but not every request results in a new integration. #### Is "3,000+ apps" the same as the export destinations? No. The 3,000+ apps tile (Choose an app), on the New List page, is mainly for bringing data in (and for connecting accounts and app events). Sending data out uses the export wizard's destinations instead, which cover a smaller, different set of apps — see "My CRM or tool (Zoho, Dynamics, Close, Outreach…) isn't listed" for ways to reach an app that isn't a built-in export destination. #### How large is the catalog 3,000+ apps already searches? Over 3,000 apps — the footer of the Choose an app window says "More integrations via 3,000+ APIs on request," so search there first; Request an integration is for the rare case your tool isn't in that catalog either. #### Can I request an integration from inside an existing list? Yes — in the list, open Set up → App events and connect an app; the Choose an app window has the Request an integration link at the bottom. You also reach it from Settings → Connected accounts → Connect account. --- ## What access you grant when connecting a CRM or app Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/crm-credentials Last updated: 2026-10-15 Connecting HubSpot, Google Sheets, Salesforce or any other app opens a connection dialog inside ListPlus; after **Continue**, that service's own secure sign-in window opens. You log in and approve access there, not on a ListPlus screen — ListPlus never sees or asks for your password. ### What access is granted The sign-in window is run by the service you're connecting to (Google, HubSpot, Salesforce and so on) and lists exactly what it's about to share with ListPlus, such as reading your records or, for sources that support Sync Changes (Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce), writing updates back. Review that screen before approving — it's the same consent screen that service shows for any third-party app, and the access ListPlus ends up with is exactly what you approve there. A few apps, such as Lemlist or Phantombuster, ask for that app's API key in the connection dialog instead of opening a sign-in window; the key is held by the secure sign-in service, not by ListPlus. ### Where the access is held The access you approve is held by the secure sign-in service, not by ListPlus. ListPlus stores no usernames or passwords for HubSpot, Google, Salesforce or any other connected app, on any plan — your password never passes through ListPlus; the access token is kept by the sign-in service and used only when someone imports, reloads, syncs, exports or sends through a pipeline with that account — or, without anyone clicking, by an automatic refresh you switched on (daily or weekly) and by app events you set up. ### Shared in your workspace A connected account belongs to the **workspace** it was connected in, not only to you. The connect window says so: "You're connecting your login for this workspace – everyone on the team can use it, and actions run in your name." Every member of the workspace can use it for imports, Reload, exports and pipelines (writing changes back: owner and admins only), and whatever they do with it happens under the login of the person who connected it. Any member can connect an account. **Settings → Connected accounts** lists all of them with "connected by (name)". Accounts connected in one workspace aren't available in your other workspaces. ### Revoking access You can remove a connection two ways: - **In ListPlus** — open **Settings → Connected accounts** and click **Disconnect** on the account (or, in the New List flow, click the small delete icon on it). The workspace owner, an admin, or the person who connected the account can disconnect it. Each account shows where it is "Used in" (lists, pipelines, app events) or "Not used anywhere", and the disconnect confirmation names the places that stop working. - **In the connected service itself** — from that service's own account or security settings, where it lists apps it has granted access to (for example, Google's "Third-party apps with account access"). Removing the entry for this connection there revokes the access immediately, even if you don't disconnect it in ListPlus first. Either way stops ListPlus from being able to read from or, where enabled, write to that account; imports, sync and pipelines using it stop working until it's connected again. If you only revoke access in the service and leave the connection listed in ListPlus, the next import, reload or sync using it simply fails until you reconnect or remove it. **Related topics:** connect-crm-and-sheets · sync-overview · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · roles-and-permissions · subprocessors. ### FAQ #### What exactly can ListPlus do with my account once I connect it? Only what you approve on that service's own consent screen when connecting — typically reading your records, and for sources that support writing changes back (Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce, Attio), writing updates back or creating records through a pipeline. ListPlus uses this access when someone in your workspace imports, reloads, syncs, exports or sends a pipeline with it, and for an automatic refresh or app events you set up. #### Do all connected apps use a sign-in window? Most do, but a few — such as Lemlist or Phantombuster — ask for that app's API key in the connection dialog instead of opening a sign-in window. The key itself is still held by the secure sign-in service, not by ListPlus. #### Can I revoke ListPlus's access from inside Google or HubSpot? Yes — revoking access in the connected service takes effect immediately, regardless of whether the connection still shows in ListPlus. The next time ListPlus tries to use it, the action fails until you reconnect or remove it from ListPlus. #### When does ListPlus actually use my connected account's access? Only when something in your workspace uses it — an import, Reload, Sync, an export, or a pipeline sending an entry (whether someone clicked Send or its Release is set to Automatic). Two things use it without a click: Refresh automatically on a list (daily or weekly) and app events you set up; nothing else reads the account on a schedule. #### Can other members of my workspace use an account I connected? Yes. A connected account belongs to the workspace, so every member can use it for imports, Reload, exports and pipelines (writing changes back: owner and admins only), and those actions run under your login. It isn't available in your other workspaces; connect it there separately if needed. #### Who can disconnect a connected account? The workspace owner, an admin, or the person who connected it, under Settings → Connected accounts → Disconnect. The account's "Used in" line and the confirmation show which lists, pipelines and app events use it; they stop working until it's connected again. #### Does disconnecting an account delete data I already imported with it? No — disconnecting only removes ListPlus's ongoing access to that account. Lists you already created or imported into with it stay exactly as they are; you just can't Reload, sync or send pipelines with that connection anymore until you reconnect. --- ## Reload: what's kept, what's lost Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source Last updated: 2026-10-17 This article covers two related things: what a **Reload** keeps and what it removes, and the **Refresh automatically** setting that runs a refresh for you on a schedule. For where to click Reload by hand, which sources support it, and pushing your edits back out, see "[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)" — that article is the full guide to the manual side. Your CRM or source is the **leading system**: when both you and the source changed the same field, the source's value wins. This rule is the same for a manual Reload and an automatic refresh, and for every source. ### Kept - A saved edit, if the source field hasn't changed since you made it — it stays marked as a pending change, so Sync can write it to the source later. - Columns you added in ListPlus (your own data columns, AI columns, cells filled from enrichment) — the source only updates the fields it knows. - Tags, statuses, enrichment results and quality-check data on every row that stays in your list. - Rows that are no longer in the source but carry your work: edits not yet synced back, enrichment results, a status or tags. They stay in your list. ### Changed or removed - A saved edit is overwritten if the source changed that field too and now holds a different value — the source wins. - With a manual Reload, rows that are no longer in the source and carry none of your work (no pending edits, enrichment results, status or tags) are removed from your list. An automatic refresh never removes rows. - Rows newly added in the source are added to your list. Reload looks at the whole source, not just the number of records your list had at import, so records added since your first import are picked up too. - Your own edits are saved automatically and compared like any saved edit. Open AI suggestions you haven't applied are not compared at all — they're simply lost, which is why the reload warning calls them out separately. ### Refreshing automatically Some connected lists can refresh themselves on a schedule instead of you clicking Reload by hand: click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name (or **⋯** menu → **List Settings...**), open **Refresh automatically** and set it to **Daily** or **Weekly** (or **Off**). The choice is saved as soon as you pick it. Every workspace member who can edit the list can change it — the same people who can use the manual Reload button. For other lists the section only shows a note that no setting appears there. The setting only shows for lists from an online source with a stable record ID that ListPlus can match rows by: HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio and Stripe — and only in the workspace where that source was connected. It never shows for Google Sheets, for lists imported from a LinkedIn or web scraper, or for a file import (CSV, Excel, JSON): those have no way to reliably tell "this is the same record" between runs. A scheduled refresh runs in the background (you don't need the list, or even the app, open) and shows **Last refreshed:** with the date and time under Set up → Refresh automatically afterwards. It works like a manual Reload, with three differences that protect your list: - **It never removes a row.** Rows the source no longer returns stay as they are, so a partial answer from the source can't cost you rows or their enrichment data. Use a manual Reload if you want rows that left the source cleaned up. - **At most 1,000 new records per run.** If the source has more new records, the rest arrive with the next runs. - **Edits made while it runs are not lost.** The refresh merges with the list as it is at the moment of writing, so a cell someone changed or a row someone added during the run stays. **HubSpot lists only fetch what changed.** For a list from HubSpot, a scheduled run asks HubSpot only for the records modified since the last successful run (starting 10 minutes earlier, so nothing saved during that run slips through) — fast even for large lists. Records HubSpot didn't change are left exactly as they are. A full run still happens on the first run, at least once a week, and whenever the changed records would be more than 10,000. Lists from Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio and Stripe fetch all records on every run. **Filtered HubSpot lists: at most the first 10,000.** If you imported from HubSpot with a filter (anything other than All Records), HubSpot delivers at most 10,000 matching records per query, so a full refresh covers at most the first 10,000 of them; records beyond that are neither added nor updated, but they stay in your list — when HubSpot cuts a result off at 10,000, neither Reload nor the automatic refresh removes any rows. Narrow the filter, or import without a filter, to keep everything in sync. **Reference lists become read-only.** If the list is also a reference list, an automatic refresh makes its record data read-only in ListPlus — change records in the source; statuses, tags and ignoring rows still work. See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for details and how to unlock it. Records it adds or changes are written to the list normally, so **list triggers wake up for them** just like for any other change — a trigger such as "new HubSpot contact → hand to a pipeline" can fire without anyone opening the list. Records the source didn't change are left untouched and wake no trigger. Your plan's record limit still applies: a run whose new records would exceed it fails with "The new records would exceed your plan's limit." instead of adding them. And if the workspace already holds more records than its plan edits (for example more than 5,000 on Basic), its lists are read-only, so every run fails with "Your workspace is over its plan's record limit – its lists are read-only until you upgrade." — after three such attempts the refresh pauses. **Plan and cost.** A reload, an update and every automatic run read the source through the connected account, so they need the source's plan (Pro, or Premium for HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Notion and Stripe) and cost credits per request to the source — an automatic refresh pays its requests on every run, see the price list. After a downgrade the account stays connected, but a reload answers that the plan is needed, and an automatic refresh shows "The workspace's plan no longer includes this source. Upgrade to refresh the list again." It stays switched on and refreshes again by itself once the plan includes the source; the same holds when the workspace has no credits left. Neither counts as a failed attempt. Turning it on for the first time runs the first refresh within about an hour; switching an already-scheduled list between Daily and Weekly keeps its next scheduled run. If a refresh fails, that section shows **Refresh failed:** with the reason — for example that the connection to the source no longer works (reconnect the account), that no row could be matched to the source (the ID column is probably missing; nothing was changed), or that the refresh did not finish in time. A run that doesn't finish in time counts as a failed attempt, and no rows are removed. After **3 failed attempts in a row** it pauses itself ("Paused after 3 failed attempts in a row."), with a **Turn back on** link to resume the schedule once you've fixed the cause. **Related topics:** sync-overview · saving-is-manual · connect-crm-and-sheets. ### FAQ #### What does a Reload keep from my saved edits? A saved edit is kept as long as the source field hasn't changed since you edited it, and stays ready to be written back with Sync. If the source changed that field too, the source wins and your edit is overwritten — your CRM is the leading system, for a manual Reload and an automatic refresh alike. #### Does Reload delete rows that vanished from the source? A manual Reload removes a row that's no longer in the source only if it carries none of your work — rows with edits not yet synced back, enrichment results, a status or tags stay in your list. An automatic refresh never removes any row. #### Will my tags, enrichment results and check data survive a Reload? Yes. They're kept on every row that's still in the source, and a row that has left the source is kept too when it has tags, a status or enrichment results. #### Does Reload add new rows from the source? Yes, records that are new in the source since your last reload are added to your list. An automatic refresh adds at most 1,000 new records per run; the rest arrive with the next runs. #### Does Reload remove columns I added in ListPlus? No. Columns you added yourself — data columns, AI columns, cells filled from enrichment — stay, and their values are kept; the source only updates the fields it provides. #### How does ListPlus know which row matches which source record? Automatically, by the source's own record ID (for Attio the `_attio_id` column — do not remove it) — this matching is separate from the Primary Key Field you set for Sync, and needs no setup from you. If not a single row can be matched (usually because the ID column is missing), the reload stops and nothing is changed. #### How do I make a list refresh itself automatically? In the list, click the Set up icon next to the list's name, open Refresh automatically and set it to Daily or Weekly; it's saved right away. It only appears for lists from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe — not for Google Sheets, scraper imports or file imports. #### Who can turn automatic refresh on or off? Every workspace member who can edit the list — the same people the manual Reload button is available to, not only the owner or admins. #### Does an automatic refresh remove rows that are no longer in the source? No — a scheduled refresh never removes a row, so a partial answer from the source can't cost you rows or their enrichment data. Your own columns, enrichment results, tags, statuses and changes not yet written back are kept as with a manual Reload; use a manual Reload if you want rows that left the source cleaned up. #### Can I keep working in a list while it refreshes automatically? Yes. The refresh merges with the list as it is at the moment it writes, so a cell someone edited or a row someone added during the run is not overwritten. #### Will a trigger fire when an automatic refresh brings in a new record? Yes. New or changed records are written to the list like any other change, so a trigger set to run on new records or on changes picks them up on its own — for example "new HubSpot contact → hand to a pipeline" without anyone opening the list. Records the source didn't change wake no trigger. #### What happens if an automatic refresh fails? Set up → Refresh automatically shows "Refresh failed:" with the reason — commonly that the connection to the source no longer works, that no row could be matched to the source, or that the refresh did not finish in time. After 3 failed attempts in a row it pauses itself; fix the cause, then click Turn back on to resume the schedule. #### Why does my automatic refresh say it did not finish in time? A very large source can take longer than one run allows; such a run counts as a failed attempt, and no rows are removed. After 3 failed attempts in a row the refresh pauses until you click Turn back on under Set up → Refresh automatically. #### Does an automatic HubSpot refresh load the whole list every time? No — for HubSpot lists a scheduled run fetches only the records modified since the last successful run, and leaves all other records untouched. A full run still happens on the first run, at least once a week, and when more than 10,000 records changed; other sources, Attio included, fetch everything on every run. #### Does automatic refresh respect my plan's record limit? Yes — a scheduled run whose new records would push you over your plan's record limit fails with "The new records would exceed your plan's limit." instead of adding them. If the workspace is already over the number of records its plan edits (5,000 on Basic), its lists are read-only and every run fails with "Your workspace is over its plan's record limit – its lists are read-only until you upgrade."; after three attempts the refresh pauses. Upgrade or delete lists, then click Turn back on under Set up → Refresh automatically. --- ## Section: Working in a list ## A tour of the list editor Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-editor-tour Last updated: 2026-10-17 A list editor screen has a header, a set of panels you open next to the grid, the grid itself, and a status bar at the bottom. This article is the map; see the linked topics for how each part actually works. ### Header The header holds the list title, the **Find & evaluate** search field with a **+ Column** button beside it (new column), a **Reload** button (only on lists imported from an online source), the save status with **Undo** and **Redo** (edits are saved automatically), the panel buttons, **Export**, **Set up** (the two sliders next to the list's name that open the list's setup page) and a **⋯** menu with more export options, Add Column and List Settings (the same setup page), plus Add Another List... and Find contacts.... On a phone the header has two rows. See navigation-and-glossary for the full walkthrough of the header and the difference between the **⋯** menu and the **More** panel picker. ### The panels Ten panels are available from the panel picker in the header. **Analyze**, **Record**, **Enrich** and **Triggers** each have their own quick icon; the rest open through **More**, grouped as Essentials (Analyze, Record, Enrich, Triggers) and More tools (Sublists, Changes, Columns, Prompts, Automation, Dashboard). A short tour of the four quick icons and of **More** shows the first time you open one of your own lists; **Tour: this list's tools** at the foot of the **More** menu starts it again: - **Analyze** — runs data-quality checks and lets you select or filter rows from the results. - **Record** — the place to view, edit and enrich one row: "In the list" shows its fields with **Edit** (and "Fill missing fields"); "From sources" starts with **Best values** (one value per field from all sources, with its source icon), then one line per source — LinkedIn with Experience and Education inside — grouping values as "Different from the list", "Additional data" and "Matches the list row", with **Take over**, **Show column** and, in the "⋯" menu, **Remove data** (see "[The Record panel: best values and sources](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/record-panel)"); **Get more data** starts lookups for this row. If the row was sent to a pipeline, an **In pipelines** section at the bottom shows its state there (see "[Seeing which pipelines a record went through](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-marks)"). - **Enrich** — starts lookups for missing data, for one row or the whole list. - **Triggers** — hands records on automatically when they meet a condition you set. - **Sublists** — lists your sublists (saved rules with a live count) and lets you filter by one. - **Changes** — on lists from a connected source, the open changes to write back to it (see "[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)"), plus the list's activity. - **Columns** — shows, hides and reorders columns; this is the grid's own column panel, not one of ListPlus's tool panels. - **Prompts** — runs AI instructions on your data. - **Automation** — the list's API connections for AI agents and scripts (set up by the workspace owner or an admin). - **Dashboard** — charts of your column values; click a chart to filter the grid. Enrich, Triggers, Prompts and Automation are hidden on lists whose records you can't change: a list you can only view, a reference list that refreshes itself from its source, or a list in a workspace over its plan's record limit. On the sample list, Enrich and Triggers show a note that they work in your own list; Prompts and Automation are hidden there. Up to two panels can be open side by side (three on very wide windows); opening one more closes whichever was opened first. On a phone, a panel covers the whole list and has a **List** button to go back. Columns is the exception — it opens on its own and never counts toward that limit. ### Selection bar and status bar Ticking row checkboxes opens a selection bar above the grid with actions for just those rows — see selecting-rows. The status bar along the bottom shows view chips, your tag chips, a New row button, credits spent on this list, and zoom — see search-filter-sort-replace for the view chips and saving-is-manual for the Suggestions chip. ### Cell display Hover an empty cell in a column that supports enrichment (email, phone, company and similar) and a small sparkle icon appears on its left edge, labelled with what it will do — "Find Email," "Reveal Mobile" and so on. Clicking it looks up just that value for that one row. Filled cells and columns that aren't enrichable never show it — see which-enrich-button for every way to start an enrichment. ### FAQ #### What panels does the list editor have? Ten panels are available from the panel picker (the More button) in the list header: Essentials holds Analyze, Record, Enrich and Triggers; More tools holds Sublists, Changes, Columns, Prompts, Automation and Dashboard. Each opens what its name suggests — Record shows, edits and enriches one row, Changes shows the open changes for a connected source and the list's activity, and Dashboard shows charts you can click to filter the grid. #### How many panels can I have open at the same time? Up to two panels can be docked open side by side (three on very wide windows), and opening one more closes whichever was opened first. Columns is the exception — it's the grid's own column panel and opens on its own, so it never counts toward that limit. #### What's the difference between the Analyze, Record, Enrich and Triggers icons and the More button? Analyze, Record, Enrich and Triggers have their own icon buttons in the header for one-click access, while every other panel only opens through the More button next to them. Clicking a panel from the More list adds it alongside whatever's already open; clicking one of the four quick icons instead shows only that panel, closing any others. #### Why don't I see Enrich, Triggers, Prompts or Automation in my panel list? They are hidden on lists whose records you can't change: a list you can only view, a reference list that refreshes itself from its source, or a list in a workspace over its plan's record limit. On the sample list, Enrich and Triggers show a note instead and Prompts and Automation are hidden. Analyze, Record, Sublists, Changes, Columns and Dashboard stay available either way. #### What's the difference between the Record and Enrich panels? Record shows everything ListPlus knows about the row you've clicked — its fields (editable with Edit) and each source's results and Best values, the one value ListPlus picks per field from all sources, including values not yet in a cell — and its Get more data button enriches that one row. The Enrich panel works on many rows or the whole list — see which-enrich-button for how to pick the right option. #### What's the small icon that appears when I hover an empty cell? A small sparkle icon appears on the left edge of an empty cell whose column supports enrichment, such as email, phone or company, labelled with what it will do (for example "Find Email" or "Reveal Mobile"). Clicking it looks up just that value for that one row; filled cells and non-enrichable columns don't get it. #### What are the Find & evaluate field and Reload button in the header for? Find & evaluate is the header's search-and-filter field — see search-filter-sort-replace for how it works — and the same spot lets you pick a campaign-ready evaluation such as Cold Email. Reload only appears on lists imported from an online source and pulls fresh data from that source into the list. --- ## Saving is automatic: undo and AI suggestions Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/saving-is-manual Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus saves your own edits in a list automatically, about one second after you make them. There is no Save button any more. What the AI writes into cells is different: it stays a highlighted **suggestion** until you click **Apply** (Übernehmen) or **Discard** (Verwerfen). ### What is saved automatically Everything you do yourself in the grid: typed cells, paste, fill-handle drags, find & replace, new rows (**New row**), deleted rows, and bulk actions you confirm — taking data over from another list, Clean Phone Numbers, a duplicate merge, or an in-cell enrich that fills a value after the "Fill empty cells?" dialog. The cells an enrichment run fills on the server are stored directly as well. Leaving the page, reloading or switching lists right after an edit still saves it. ### The save status in the header Where the Save button used to be, the list header shows a quiet status: - a check icon and **Saved** (Gespeichert) — everything is stored; - a spinner and **Saving …** (Speichert …) — an edit is on its way; - a red **Not saved** (Nicht gespeichert) — the server can't be reached. Your edits are kept in the page and sent again automatically; you see "Changes could not be saved – retrying automatically", later "Changes saved". On narrow headers and phones only the icon shows. The tooltip reads "Changes are saved automatically. Undo with ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z." ### Undo and redo The **Undo** button sits next to the status; **Redo** appears beside it right after an undo. Shortcuts: ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z to undo, ⇧⌘Z / Ctrl+Y to redo, while a cell is selected but not being edited (inside a cell editor, the text field's own undo applies). One step is one action: a typed cell, a whole paste or fill-handle drag, added rows, deleted rows (they come back complete, in the same place, with their enrichment data), a whole **Apply** of AI suggestions, or a confirmed bulk fill. Undo writes the old values back and saves them like any edit, so teammates, triggers and the change history see it. If a cell was changed in the meantime by someone else or by an enrichment, it is left alone and a notice says "N cells were changed in the meantime and stay as they are". The undo history is per list and per browser session and reaches the last 100 actions. It is cleared when you switch to another list or reload the page. Discarding AI suggestions is not an undo step. ### AI suggestions: Apply or Discard What the Prompts panel (KI-Anweisung) writes, and the text corrections of **Fix** / **Fix all** in the Analyze panel, are not written right away. The cells get a light orange background, the row number is highlighted, and the header shows **N suggestions** with two buttons: - **Discard** — every suggested cell goes back to its previous value. - **Apply · N** — all suggestions are written to the list (toast "N changes applied"); this is one undo step. On narrow headers the Apply button shows just the number. Click a highlighted cell to see a tooltip "AI suggestion – before:" with the previous value and **Discard** / **Apply** for that one cell. Typing your own value into a suggested cell replaces the suggestion — it's your edit then and is saved automatically. The **Suggestions** chip in the status bar filters the grid to rows with open suggestions. ### Leaving the list Saved edits never hold you back. A dialog opens on leaving in two cases only: open AI suggestions — **Open AI suggestions** ("The AI suggested changes that have not been applied yet. Apply, discard or stay on the page?") with **Stay here**, **Discard** and **Apply** — or edits that could not be saved yet (the header shows **Not saved**), where the dialog "Changes not saved yet" offers **Save again** or **Leave without saving**. Leaving anyway loses those suggestions or unsaved edits. ### Checks, segments, exports and enrichment Analyze checks, the export wizard and **Export Data** read the stored list. Your own edits are there within a second; AI suggestions only after **Apply**. Sublists (segments) follow the grid as you see it, live. **Export as Excel** in the ⋯ menu downloads the grid as you see it, suggestions included. Before an enrichment starts, pending edits are written first automatically. An enrichment is blocked only while AI suggestions are open or edits could not be saved — see enrichment-problems. ### Do others see my edits? Yes. Your edits are stored for everyone who opens the list about a second after you make them. AI suggestions stay in your own browser until you apply them. ### Related topics - **editing-and-undo** — inline editing, fill handle, copy/paste, adding rows. - **ai-commands** — the Prompts panel, whose changes arrive as suggestions. - **quality-checks-overview** — Analyze and re-running checks. - **enrichment-problems** — when the Enrich menu is blocked. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus autosave my list? Yes. Your own edits — typed cells, paste, fill handle, new and deleted rows, and bulk fills you confirm — are saved automatically about one second after you make them; there is no Save button any more. Only AI suggestions wait for you to click Apply in the list header. #### Where did the Save button go? It was replaced by a save status in the list header: a check icon with "Saved", a spinner with "Saving …", or a red "Not saved" when the server can't be reached. On narrow screens only the icon shows. There is nothing to click — edits are saved automatically. #### What does "Not saved" in the list header mean? The connection to the server is down, so your latest edits could not be written yet. They are kept in the page and sent again automatically; a toast "Changes saved" confirms when it worked. Keep the tab open until the status shows Saved again. #### Why did my changes disappear? Your own edits are saved about a second after you make them, also when you leave, reload or switch lists right afterwards — so they don't disappear. AI suggestions are different: if you clicked Discard in the "Open AI suggestions" dialog or in the header, those cells went back to their previous values. #### How do I undo a change in a list? Click Undo in the list header or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z while a cell is selected (not being edited); Redo is ⇧⌘Z / Ctrl+Y. One step is one action — a typed cell, a whole paste or fill-handle drag, added or deleted rows, an Apply of AI suggestions, or a confirmed bulk fill. Undo saves the old values back automatically. #### How far back does undo go? Up to the last 100 actions, per list and per browser session. The history is cleared when you switch to another list or reload the page, so undo right away if you regret something. #### Why did undo leave some cells unchanged? If a cell was changed in the meantime by a teammate or by an enrichment, undo leaves it alone so it doesn't overwrite newer data. A notice tells you how many cells were changed in the meantime and stay as they are. #### What are the highlighted orange cells? They are AI suggestions from the Prompts panel or Fix / Fix all — not written to the list yet. Click one to see "AI suggestion – before:" with the previous value and Apply or Discard for that cell, or use Apply · N / Discard in the list header for all of them. #### How do I apply or discard all AI suggestions at once? The list header shows "N suggestions" with Discard and Apply · N. Apply writes them all to the list as one undo step; Discard puts every suggested cell back to its previous value. #### Is there a keyboard shortcut to save? You don't need one — edits are saved automatically about a second after you make them. The Save entry in the command palette (⌘K) only writes pending edits right away, which normally means there is nothing to do. #### Why does ListPlus ask about open AI suggestions when I leave a list? Because the AI suggested changes you haven't applied yet. The "Open AI suggestions" dialog offers Stay here, Discard or Apply. The only other time a dialog stops you is when your last edits could not be saved yet (the header shows "Not saved") — it then offers Save again or Leave without saving; leaving loses them. #### Do I need to save before enriching my list? No. Pending edits are written automatically before an enrichment starts. The Enrich menu only blocks while AI suggestions are open or edits could not be saved — apply or discard the suggestions, or wait until the header shows Saved. #### Will Analyze show my changes right away? Your own edits are stored within a second, so Re-run Analysis in Analysis settings picks them up. AI suggestions are only checked after you click Apply. The export wizard reads the stored list the same way. Sublists follow the grid live. #### Can other people see my changes? Yes, your own edits — they are stored for everyone who opens the list about a second after you make them. AI suggestions stay in your browser until you click Apply. --- ## What the AI sees of your data Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus uses AI in several places while you work in a list — the **Prompts** panel, AI checks, **AI text** columns, scores, import, list webhooks, and enrichment providers. Each of these sees a different, narrow slice of your data, sized for that one job. This article is the canonical answer for what goes where; other topics point here instead of repeating it. **AI commands and questions (Prompts panel).** When you type an instruction or a question in **Ask about your data...**, ListPlus sends your text, the names and types of your columns, the total row count and, if you have rows selected, how many (not which ones or their values), plus the names of the list's statuses and of your workspace's pipelines. No cell values are sent to understand the request. For a column with up to eight fixed options (for example a status column), the option labels are included too. Some commands then need to look at values, for example "select all CEOs", "find companies in Germany" or "unify country spellings". For those, ListPlus sends the distinct values of the column(s) involved, with duplicates removed (or unique value combinations when several columns are compared), and applies the answer to the matching rows. **AI checks.** The optional "Include AI Analysis" checks in the Analyze panel never see full rows. They collect the distinct values of the column being checked, remove duplicates, or unique pairs of values for checks that compare two columns, such as city and country, and send only that short list to the AI together with the rule. A **Normalize** fix (offered on checks like inconsistent country, state or industry spellings) works the same way: it sends the distinct values of that column, with duplicates removed, and asks the AI to group them and propose one standard value per group, which you confirm before anything changes. Enrich → **AI Analysis** works the same way: it sends the distinct values of the source column. **AI text columns.** An AI text column sends your instruction filled in with the row's values from the columns it references. If you tick them under **The AI also reads**, it also sends that record's stored **Enrichment data** (also values that are in no column) and/or its **Quality check findings**, each up to 1,500 characters. Identical requests are sent once and the answer is shared: a 10,000-row list with a few hundred unique job titles needs a few hundred requests — with the extra reads switched on, usually one per record. Other rows are never sent along. **What the AI sees** in the dialog shows the complete request for one of your rows. **Score and Label AI statements.** A score criterion or Label rule that the AI judges sends the values of the columns you chose for it (up to four), once per unique combination of those values, to a specialised classification model (ListPlus's standard model decides where that one is unsure). The answer is mapped back to every row with the same values. **Enrichment providers.** When you enrich a contact, the provider (such as Prospeo, FullEnrich or CompanyEnrich) receives only the identifier needed for that lookup — an email address, a domain, a LinkedIn URL, a name and company, or a company name — never your other columns. **AI Research.** A research run sends your search description (for a target group) or the known identity details of one person (name, company, job title, location) to search public web sources. When you research a contact from your list, only that person's details are sent, not the rest of your list. **Column detection on import.** When you import a file, ListPlus analyses a sample of its first rows, including the actual cell values. The sample is 10% of the file, at least 50 and at most 200 rows, or the whole file if it's smaller. The AI receives your column headers plus a few example values and statistics per column, to suggest column types and names. For gender, country or yes/no columns it also receives the distinct values from the whole file, so it can standardise them. This step runs on every import. The **Skip AI Enhancement** button only appears if the analysis is unavailable or fails. **List webhooks.** A list's webhook (see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)") uses AI in two cases only. With field names the list already knows and the **Hold back** options left as they are, a webhook call uses no AI at all. - **A field name the list doesn't know.** The fields are placed by the list's column types without AI. Only for a field name that matches no column does ListPlus ask its standard AI model once: it sends the field name, **one** example value from the call (at most 80 characters) and the names and types of the list's columns. The answer — a column, or "no column" — is remembered for that webhook, so the same field name is never sent again. - **"Hold back spam and test entries (AI check)"** — off by default. Only when you tick it, each incoming record's values (up to 12 fields, at most 120 characters each) go to an AI check that decides between a real-looking lead and a test entry or spam. Records the rules already hold back (nothing that says who it is, placeholders, your Block list) aren't sent. The check runs on a specialised classification model, requested with zero data retention; if that model is unavailable or unsure, ListPlus's standard AI model decides. Neither the record nor the verdict is kept for later calls. The other option, "Hold back invalid, disposable and test addresses", works with fixed rules and sends nothing to an AI. **Email drafts and company knowledge.** AI texts in an Email draft pipeline run only when the template contains an AI text: then, once per draft, the AI gets the template's text and instructions, the briefing, your company knowledge and that contact's record with its enrichment data; the record's email and phone fields are left out unless you put them into the template as placeholders yourself. **Check content** sends the template with its placeholders (no contact data), the briefing and the company knowledge, and only when you click it. **Suggest from your website** in Settings → Company knowledge reads your public website only when you click it. See "AI texts and the content check in email drafts" and "Company knowledge for the AI". **Where this runs.** All of this happens on ListPlus's servers, never in your browser — provider keys and AI keys are never sent to the client. Each request is scoped to the list you're working in and requires you to be signed in. ### FAQ #### What does the AI see when I use an AI command in the Prompts panel? It sees your instruction, your column names and types, the total row count and, if rows are selected, how many are selected. Your cell values aren't sent to understand the request. If a command has to judge values (such as "select all CEOs"), the distinct values of the columns involved are sent in a second step, with duplicates removed. #### Does the Prompts panel AI see the values in my cells? Not to understand your request. Only column names and types, plus the option labels of columns with up to eight fixed options, are sent. Commands that judge values, like selecting by job title or unifying spellings, send the distinct values of the columns involved, with duplicates removed, and never whole rows. #### If I select rows before asking the AI something, does it see those rows' data? No. The AI learns only how many rows are selected, not their IDs or values; ListPlus then applies the resulting command to your actual selection. #### What do AI checks and AI text columns send to the AI? AI checks send only the distinct (unique) values of the column being checked, with duplicates removed, or unique pairs of values for checks that compare two columns, such as city and country, plus the rule you're applying — a Normalize fix works the same way, sending the column's distinct values and asking the AI to suggest one standard value per group for you to confirm. An AI text column sends your instruction filled in with the row's referenced values, plus — only if you tick them under The AI also reads — the record's stored enrichment data and/or quality-check findings (up to 1,500 characters each); never other rows. "What the AI sees" in its dialog shows the complete request. #### What do enrichment providers receive when I enrich a contact? Only the identifier needed for that specific lookup: an email address, a domain, a LinkedIn URL, a name and company, or a company name. Enrichment providers (such as Prospeo, FullEnrich or CompanyEnrich) never receive your other columns. #### What does AI Research send? A target-group description or a known person's identity details (name, company, job title, location), used to search public web sources for matches. When you research a contact from your list, only that person's details are sent, not the rest of your list. #### What does the AI see when it detects columns during import? Your column headers and a sample of your file's first rows (10% of the file, 50–200 rows), including real cell values: a few example values per column go to the AI. For gender, country or yes/no columns, the distinct values from the whole file are sent too. It runs on every import; Skip AI Enhancement only appears if the analysis fails. #### Does a list webhook send my incoming records to an AI? By default, no: fields are placed by the list's column types, and a call with known field names uses no AI at all. A field name the list doesn't know is sent once, with one example value (at most 80 characters) and the list's column names and types, and the answer is remembered. Record values go to an AI check only if you tick "Hold back spam and test entries (AI check)" on that webhook — then up to 12 fields per record, 120 characters each, requested with zero data retention. #### What does the AI get for texts in email drafts? Only when a template contains an AI text: the template's text and instructions, the briefing, your company knowledge and that contact's record with its enrichment data. The record's email and phone fields are left out, unless you put them into the template as placeholders yourself. #### Does AI processing happen in my browser or on ListPlus's servers? On ListPlus's servers. AI commands, checks, AI text columns, scores, enrichment and AI Research all run server-side; provider and AI keys are never sent to your browser. #### Can the AI see data from my other lists? No. Each AI request is scoped to the one list you're working in and requires you to be signed in; it doesn't include your other lists. #### Do values the AI fills in or derives need to be saved like other changes? Values from the Prompts panel or the fixes of AI checks arrive as highlighted suggestions — click Apply in the list header to write them, or Discard to drop them. The texts of an AI text column and the AI judgments of a score are written directly into the list. Enrichment runs fill empty cells by themselves, and values you confirm in the "Fill empty cells?" dialog (after an AI Analysis) are saved automatically, like your own edits. --- ## Editing cells, undo/redo, and adding rows Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/editing-and-undo Last updated: 2026-10-17 ### Editing a cell Double-click a cell, or select it and press Enter, to start editing — or just start typing over a selected cell to replace its content right away. Enter commits the edit and keeps that cell selected, Tab commits and moves to the next cell, and Escape cancels and restores the previous value. On a phone, double-tap a row (or tap its number) to open it in the Record panel and edit it there with **Edit** under "In the list". Selecting a cell (without opening it for editing) and pressing Delete or Backspace clears it immediately. Every edit is saved automatically about a second later — see saving-is-manual. ### Fill handle, copy and paste Drag the small square at the bottom-right corner of a selected cell or range to copy that value into every cell you drag over. Select a cell or a range, copy with ⌘C / Ctrl+C, then select the target and paste with ⌘V / Ctrl+V — paste is turned off on lists you don't have edit access to. ### Adding new rows Click **New row** in the status bar at the bottom of the grid, right-click any row and choose **Insert Row Below**, or press Tab or ↓ from the last cell of the last row to grow the grid automatically. None of these appear if adding rows has been turned off for that list. ### Undo and redo Click **Undo** in the list header (**Redo** appears next to it after an undo), or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z to undo and ⇧⌘Z / Ctrl+Y to redo while a cell is selected but not being edited (inside a cell editor, the text field's own undo applies). Undo reaches the last 100 actions. One step is one action: a typed cell, a whole paste or fill-handle drag, added rows, or deleted rows (they come back complete, in the same place). Tags, ignored rows and sublist changes are not undo steps. The history is cleared when you switch lists or reload the page. ### AI suggestions in cells Cells the AI filled are highlighted until you take them. Click one to see "AI suggestion – before:" with the previous value and **Discard** or **Apply** for that one cell. See saving-is-manual for applying or discarding all of them at once. ### Related topics - **saving-is-manual** — automatic saving, the save status, undo in detail, and AI suggestions (Apply / Discard). - **selecting-rows** — the selection bar for acting on several rows at once. ### FAQ #### How do I edit a cell? Double-click a cell, or select it and press Enter, to start editing — or just start typing to replace its content right away. Enter commits the edit and keeps that cell selected, Tab commits and moves to the next cell, and Escape cancels and restores the previous value. On a phone, double-tap the row to open it in the Record panel and edit it there. #### What is the fill handle? It's the small square at the bottom-right corner of a selected cell or range — drag it down or across and ListPlus copies that value into every cell you drag over. It works for a single cell or a whole selected range at once. #### Can I copy and paste cells or ranges? Yes — select a cell or a range, copy it with ⌘C / Ctrl+C, then select the target cell or range and paste with ⌘V / Ctrl+V. Paste is turned off on lists you don't have edit access to. #### How do I add a new row? Click New row in the status bar at the bottom of the grid, right-click any row and choose Insert Row Below, or press Tab or ↓ from the last cell of the last row to grow the grid automatically. None of these appear if adding rows has been turned off for that list. #### Is there an undo/redo for the grid? Yes — click Undo or Redo in the list header, or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z to undo and ⇧⌘Z / Ctrl+Y to redo while a cell is selected but not being edited. It reaches the last 100 actions; switching to another list or reloading the page clears the history. #### What does undo/redo cover? Undo/redo covers cell values (typed, pasted, fill-handle fills, an Apply of AI suggestions, confirmed bulk fills) and added or deleted rows — deleted rows come back complete, in the same place. Tags, ignored rows and sublist changes are not undo steps, so remove or restore them the same way you added them. #### How do I revert just one cell back to its previous value? Select the cell and press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z (or click Undo in the list header) right after the edit — the old value is written back and saved. For a highlighted AI suggestion, click the cell and choose Discard in the "AI suggestion – before:" tooltip. #### How do I clear a cell's contents? Select the cell, without opening it for editing, and press Delete or Backspace — it's cleared immediately and saved automatically about a second later; ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z brings the value back. --- ## Search, filter, sort, and find & replace Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/search-filter-sort-replace Last updated: 2026-10-15 ### Header search Type into **Find & evaluate** in the list header — typing alone doesn't filter yet. On narrow windows and phones the field is hidden; use Commands (⌘K) or widen the window. Press Enter, or click the suggestion that appears, and the grid narrows to rows matching that text in any visible column; committing a search also clears any active sublist, Suggestions filter or check selection. The same field also picks a campaign-ready evaluation; see campaign-ready-evaluations. ### Column filters and sort Click the funnel icon in a column header to filter that column: a checkbox list of its values for text and lookup columns, a number range for numeric columns, a date range for date columns. Click a column header to sort ascending, click again for descending, a third click removes the sort, and shift-click another header to add a second-level sort on top of it. The column header menu also has **Filter: {column} …** with comparisons that fit the column's content (for example "is valid" for an email column); such a filter shows in the status bar with an × to remove it. ### View chips The status bar at the bottom always shows **All** (your whole list) — on a list with "done" statuses, **Open** (the working list) sits beside it; **Filtered**, **Selection** and **Suggestions** appear only while a filter, a selection or open AI suggestions exist: **Filtered** shows the count currently shown after a search or column filter (informational only, not clickable), **Selection** (click to show only your ticked rows), and **Suggestions** (click to show only rows with open AI suggestions — see saving-is-manual). Click **All** to go back to showing everything. ### Find & replace Click the swap icon at the right end of the Find & evaluate field, or choose **Find & Replace** in Commands (⌘K), to open Find & Replace — on narrow windows the icon is hidden, so use Commands instead. ⌘F / Ctrl+F jumps to the Find & evaluate field. Step through matches with the arrows, toggle **Match Case** or **Match Entire Cell**, optionally narrow to specific columns, then **Replace** one match or **Replace All**. Replace All only touches the rows currently visible after any active filter or search, and only the columns you've picked (or every column holding your own data if none are picked); there's no regular-expression support — special characters are matched literally — and no preview step. On lists you can only view, Find works but the Replace row is hidden. ### FAQ #### How does the search field in the header work? Type into Find & evaluate in the list header and either press Enter or click the suggestion that appears — typing alone doesn't filter yet. Once you commit, the grid narrows to rows matching that text in any visible column. #### How do I filter a single column? Click the funnel icon in that column's header. Text and lookup columns show a checkbox list of their values, numeric columns give you a range, and date columns give you a date range. #### How do I sort by a column? Click the column header to sort ascending, click again for descending, and a third click removes the sort. Shift-click another header to add it as a second-level sort on top of the first. #### What do the All, Filtered, Selection and Suggestions chips in the status bar mean? All always shows your whole list (with Open beside it on lists with "done" statuses); Filtered, Selection and Suggestions only appear while a filter, a selection or open AI suggestions exist. Filtered shows the count after a search or column filter (informational only), and clicking Selection or Suggestions narrows the grid to just your ticked rows or just the rows with open AI suggestions; click All again to go back to showing everything. #### How do I find and replace text across my list? Click the swap icon at the right end of the Find & evaluate field, or choose Find & Replace in Commands (⌘K) — on narrow windows the icon is hidden, so use Commands instead. ⌘F / Ctrl+F jumps to the Find & evaluate field rather than opening Find & Replace. Step through matches with the arrows, toggle Match Case or Match Entire Cell, then Replace one match or Replace All. #### Which rows and columns does Replace All change? Only the rows currently visible after any active filter or search, and only the columns you've picked in the column selector — leave it empty to cover every column holding your own data. Internal system columns aren't offered. #### Does Find & Replace support regular expressions or show a preview first? No — special characters in your search term are matched literally, not as a pattern, and there's no preview step before Replace or Replace All applies. Check your column selection and active filter before using Replace All on a large list. --- ## Selecting rows and the selection bar Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/selecting-rows Last updated: 2026-10-17 ### Selecting rows Tick the checkbox at the left of each row you want — clicking anywhere else on the row opens or edits a cell instead of selecting it. Tick the checkbox in the column header to select every row that matches the current filter, search or sublist, including rows further down that you haven't scrolled to — not necessarily your whole list. ### The selection bar As soon as one or more rows are selected, a selection bar appears above the grid: a count of selected rows, **Status**, **Tag**, an **Add** menu, **Find**, **Enrich**, already showing how many rows it would enrich, and a **⋯** menu (**Ignore selected records**, **Restore**, and **Delete** if you're allowed to delete rows on this list). Click the **×** next to the count to clear the selection. On the sample list, which you can only view, Status, Tag, Enrich and the **⋯** menu are not shown, and Add offers only Add to list. - **Status** — set or remove one of the list's statuses for every selected row (owners and admins can also create one). See "[Record statuses and the working view (Open / All)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-statuses)". - **Tag** — type a new tag and press Enter, or click one of your list's existing tags to apply it to every selected row. - **Add** — where the selection can go: - **Add to list** — copy the selected contacts into another list. - **Send to pipeline** — put the selected rows into one of your workspace's pipelines as waiting entries; nothing is sent until someone releases them in the pipeline. See "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)". - **Find** — look for contacts at the selected companies (from the database or over LinkedIn) or for similar companies; these searches cost credits. - **Enrich** — see which-enrich-button for how to pick the right lookup. There is no "add to sublist" here: a sublist is a saved rule, not a set of hand-picked rows. To collect your selection, click **Tag** and make a sublist with the rule **Tags is one of** that tag — see "[Sublists (segments) and tags](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/segments-and-tags)". ### When an evaluation is active If a campaign-ready evaluation such as Cold Email is active, the selection bar is replaced by the evaluation bar (see campaign-ready-evaluations): Tag, Add and the **⋯** menu aren't available there, only an Enrich button scoped to your selected, still-enrichable rows. Choose **No evaluation** in Find & evaluate to get the regular selection bar back. ### Related topics - **duplicates** — what ignoring rows does and how to restore them. - **export-overview** — exporting only your selected rows. - **which-enrich-button** — every way to start an enrichment, including from a selection. ### FAQ #### How do I select rows in a list? Tick the checkbox at the left of each row you want — clicking anywhere else on the row opens or edits a cell instead of selecting it. Tick the checkbox in the column header to select every row that matches the current filter, search or sublist, including rows further down that you haven't scrolled to. #### Does "select all" select my whole list or just what's on screen? It selects every row that matches the current filter, search or sublist, including rows further down that you haven't scrolled to — not your whole list unless nothing is filtering it. Clear the filter first if you want every row in the list selected. #### What appears when I select rows? A selection bar appears above the grid showing how many rows are selected, with Status, Tag, an Add menu (to another list or to a pipeline), Find (contacts at, or companies similar to, the selected companies), an Enrich button that already shows how many rows it would enrich, and a ⋯ menu (Ignore selected records, Restore or Delete, if you're allowed to delete on this list). Click the × next to the count to clear your selection. #### How do I tag selected rows? Click Tag in the selection bar, then either type a new tag and press Enter, or click one of your list's existing tags to apply it. It's applied to every row you currently have selected. #### How do I add selected rows to a sublist? Tag them — a sublist is a saved rule, so rows can't be added to it by hand. Click Tag in the selection bar and give the rows a tag (for example "Priority"), then open More → Sublists, click New and create a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of Priority", and every row with that tag shows up in it. #### How do I enrich just a few rows instead of the whole list? Tick the checkboxes next to the rows you want and click Enrich in the selection bar — this only enriches the rows you selected. You see the maximum possible cost before confirming; most lookups charge only when they find something, with a few exceptions listed in "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)". #### Why does my selection bar look different or show different buttons? If a campaign-ready evaluation like Cold Email is active, the selection bar is replaced by the evaluation bar — Tag, Add and the ⋯ menu aren't available there, only an Enrich button scoped to your selected, still-enrichable rows. Choose No evaluation in Find & evaluate to get the regular selection bar back. #### How do I send selected rows to a pipeline? Select the rows, click Add in the selection bar, then Send to pipeline and pick the pipeline. The rows wait there as entries until someone clicks Send in the pipeline (or go out by themselves if the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic), adding them is free; each record the pipeline delivers costs credits at the target's rate (see the price list). See "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)" for how pipelines work. #### Can I ignore or delete several rows at once from a selection? Yes — select the rows, open the ⋯ menu in the selection bar, and choose Ignore selected records (or Restore, if you're viewing ignored rows) or Delete, if you have permission to delete on that list. See "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)" for what ignoring rows does and how to restore them. --- ## Adding and managing columns Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/columns-formulas-ai-columns Last updated: 2026-10-17 Beyond the columns your import created, you can add five kinds of columns — a **Score**, a **Label** column, an **AI text** column, a **Formula** or a **Data column** — and show, hide, reorder, rename or delete any of them. ### Adding a column Click **+ Column** next to the search field in the list's header — or open the list's **⋯** menu and choose **Add Column...** (you can also start this from a column's own header menu, which inserts the new column right next to it). The **New column** dialog offers five kinds; each card shows an example, typical uses and its pricing before you pick it: - **Score** — gives every record points for the criteria it meets, with tiers A/B/C as a second column (see "Scoring a list and assigning records to groups"). - **Label** — puts every record into one of your own groups by rules, for example a segment (same article). - **AI text** — generates a text per row from an AI instruction you write (see below). - **Formula** — computes a value from other columns using a formula you write (see below). - **Data column** — search or browse column types (Email, Phone, Company, and dozens more) or fall back to a generic Text, Number, Date or Boolean column. The name auto-fills from the type; you can overwrite it before creating. ### Show, hide and reorder columns Open **More → Columns** to show or hide columns with a checkbox and drag them into a new order. Column order and visibility are list-level settings, separate from your cell edits. ### Renaming a column Click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name (or **⋯** menu → **List Settings...**), open **Columns**, click a column to expand it, and edit its **Title** field. Click **Apply Changes** at the bottom to save the rename. This section also lets you adjust a column's content type and data type. ### Formula columns A formula column computes its value from other columns in the same row — it's free and never calls the AI. Reference another column by its name in curly braces, e.g. `{Price} * {Quantity}`, `{First Name} & " " & {Last Name}`, `IF({Revenue} > 1000, "Enterprise", "SMB")`, `ROUND({Amount} * 1.19, 2)`, or `COALESCE({Mobile}, {Phone}, "N/A")`. The editor shows a live preview on your first sample rows as you type, and flags an invalid formula before you can create the column. The grid shows the value at once; ListPlus also stores it in the list and recalculates it when a referenced column changes, so formula values are part of your exports, visible to the API and usable in list triggers. A small pulsing dot in a cell means its new value is being stored. ### AI text columns An AI text column lets the AI write a short text for every row from your own prompt, using `{Column Name}` placeholders to pull in that row's values — for example `Classify {Company} in {Industry} as B2B or B2C` or `What seniority level is "{Job Title}"? Reply: Junior, Mid, Senior, or Executive`. The editor previews the rendered prompt on your first sample rows. On the right, under **What the AI sees**, you see what the first run costs at most, and **Test on 10 rows** tries the prompt on ten rows of your list for free and shows the answers — sharpen the prompt there before you pay for the whole list. When you click **Create column**, ListPlus writes the texts for the whole list in the background — every row, not only the ones a filter shows — and stores them directly in the list. There is nothing to apply or confirm. Rows that share the exact same request get one answer (with **The AI also reads** switched on, each row's request usually differs): a 10,000-row list with a few hundred different job titles needs a few hundred texts, not ten thousand. Rows where every referenced column is empty stay empty. Afterwards: - **New rows** get their text automatically. - **A changed value** does not rewrite a text by itself — a text you may already be using should not change under you. The cell gets a small grey dot; click **Run** in the column's header (next to the purple AI badge), or **Run AI column** in the header menu, to write the missing and outdated texts again. - If you change the prompt, the whole column is written again. #### Recipes, what the AI reads, and when it writes The **AI text** dialog has two sides: on the left you say what to write, on the right **What the AI sees** shows the complete request for one of your rows, the cost of the first run and **Test on 10 rows**. - **Start from a recipe** fills in a ready-made instruction with your own column names — Opening line, Why a fit?, What is missing?, B2B or B2C, Seniority. You can change the text afterwards. - **The AI also reads** adds facts about each row to your instruction: **Quality check findings** (what the list's checks find in the row — you can switch single kinds of findings off, each shows how many rows it concerns) and **Enrichment data** (everything enrichment stored for the row, also what is in no column). - **Only write when …** limits the column to rows that meet a condition, for example only rows whose Score is at least 60. A row that does not meet it gets no text and costs nothing. A text costs credits (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"); an empty answer costs nothing, and equal inputs are written once. Automatic texts for new rows have a daily credit ceiling per list. If that is used up, or the balance doesn't cover the next texts, the **Run** button turns into a pause mark that says why — click it to continue. ### Editing or deleting a column Click the menu icon in a column's header for **Edit formula** (formula columns), **Edit score** (score and tier columns), **Edit label** (Label columns), **Edit AI column** and **Run AI column** (AI text columns), or **Delete column** — greyed out for the built-in system columns such as Tags. **Related topics:** scores-and-assigned-columns · saving-is-manual · segments-and-tags · ai-commands. ### FAQ #### How do I add a new column to my list? Click **+ Column** next to the search field in the list's header (or open the list's **⋯** menu and choose **Add Column...**), then pick Score, Label, AI text, Formula, or Data column (a data type like Email or Phone, or a generic Text/Number/Date/Boolean). #### How do I hide or show columns? Open **More → Columns** and use the checkbox next to each column to show or hide it; drag a column in that list to reorder it in the grid. To look at a value from a source without keeping it, use **Show column** in the Record panel — a temporary, read-only column that is not saved (see "[The Record panel: best values and sources](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/record-panel)"). #### How do I rename a column? Click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name, open **Columns**, click the column to expand it, edit the **Title** field, then click **Apply Changes**. #### What is a Formula column and does it cost credits? A Formula column computes a value from other columns in the same row, for example `{Price} * {Quantity}` or `IF({Revenue} > 1000, "Enterprise", "SMB")`. It's free and never calls the AI. The value is shown at once and stored in the list, and it is recalculated whenever a referenced column changes — so it also appears in exports and can be used in list triggers. #### What is an AI text column and how much does it cost? An AI text column lets the AI write a short text per row from a prompt you write, using `{Column Name}` to pull in row values. It costs credits per text; rows with identical inputs share one text, and an empty answer costs nothing. The dialog shows the maximum cost of the first run before you create the column, and Test on 10 rows is free. #### Can an AI text column use the quality checks or enrichment data? Yes. In the AI text dialog switch on Quality check findings or Enrichment data under "The AI also reads"; the AI then gets these facts for every row along with your prompt. "What the AI sees" shows the complete request for a row. #### Can an AI text column write only for some rows? Yes. Switch on "Only write when …" and set a condition, for example Score is at least 60. Rows that do not meet it get no text and cost nothing. #### Do I need to click Save or Apply after running an AI text column? No. The texts of an AI text column are written directly into the list and stored — there is nothing to apply or confirm. To check a prompt before the whole list is written, use Test on 10 rows in the dialog; it is free. #### Does an AI text column run on every row or only the ones I can see? On every row of the list, whatever filter is active. Rows where every referenced column is empty stay empty and are not billed. New rows get their text automatically; a row whose values changed is marked with a small grey dot and written again when you click Run in the column's header. #### Why does an AI text column cell show a small grey dot? The text is missing, or a value the prompt uses has changed since the text was written. ListPlus does not rewrite such a text by itself. Click Run in the column's header to write all missing and outdated texts again; only those are charged. #### How do I edit or delete a Formula or AI text column later? Click the menu icon in that column's header for **Edit formula** or **Edit AI column** (to change the formula or instruction) and **Run AI column** (AI text columns only); **Delete column** is there too, for every column except the built-in system columns such as Tags. --- ## Scoring a list and labeling records by rules Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/scores-and-assigned-columns Last updated: 2026-10-15 A **Score** column gives every record points for the criteria it meets — "how well does this contact fit?" as a number — and can sort the result into **tiers** (A, B, C) in a second column. A **Label** column puts every record into one of your own groups, for example a segment. Both are computed by ListPlus, stored in the list, and kept up to date when the data behind them changes. ### Creating a score Click **+ Column** next to the search field in the list's header (on narrow screens: **⋯** → **Add Column...**) and choose **Score** — or use the **Scoring** card under **Set up**. The dialog has two steps and a live preview on the right. **Step 1 — criteria.** Each criterion has a name, points, and a rule. A record gets a criterion's points when the rule applies; the points of all criteria that apply add up to the score. Points can be negative ("Personal email −10"); the score never goes below 0. The dialog shows the highest score a record can reach. - **Criterion** adds a rule — the same editor as in list triggers: pick a column, a comparison ("is any of", "contains", "greater than", "Seniority is", "is a business address" …) and its values; add **AND** conditions or an **OR** group. - **AI statement** adds a criterion the AI judges (see below). A new score starts with suggestions that fit your columns — "Decision maker" (from the job title), "Business email" and "Personal email" — which you can change or remove. A score can have up to 20 criteria. **Step 2 — tiers.** With **Add tiers as their own column** ticked, ListPlus adds a second column that sorts the score into three tiers. You name them and set from how many points each one starts; the last tier takes everything below. They start at 70 % and 40 % of the highest score. The preview shows a handful of your records with their score, their tier and a ✓ or ✗ per criterion, and how the loaded records spread across the tiers. Click **Create column** when it looks right. ### Criteria the AI judges An **AI statement** is a sentence that is true for a record or not — for example "The company is a B2B software vendor". You choose up to four columns the AI should read (say Industry and Company). For each record the AI answers **yes**, **no** or **unclear**; only a **yes** gives the points. The AI judges from the values in the row only — it knows nothing else about the company or the person. If the columns don't say enough, the answer is "unclear". A statement can be up to 200 characters long. **Test on 10 rows** runs the statement on ten of your records for free and shows the result ("Test: 8× yes · 1× no · 1× unclear"); the preview then counts those answers. Records the AI has not judged yet show a **?**. ### What it costs Rules cost nothing. An AI judgment costs credits (the price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). Records that share the same values are judged once — a list of 10,000 contacts with 300 different industries needs about 300 judgments, not 10,000 — and an answer ListPlus already has costs nothing. Before you create the column, step 2 shows how many judgments the first run needs and the most it can cost. After that, only a new value costs: when a column the statement reads changes for a record, that record is judged again. ### How the values stay up to date Score, tier and group values are stored in the list — they are in your exports, visible to the API, and usable in filters and list triggers ("when the tier is A → send to a pipeline"). When a column a criterion uses changes, ListPlus recalculates the records concerned by itself within seconds. A small pulsing dot in a cell means its new value is on the way. The cells are read-only. If something writes into the column anyway (a paste, an import, the API), ListPlus replaces it with the calculated value. Automatic recalculation with AI statements has a daily credit ceiling per list. If that is used up, or the balance doesn't cover the next judgments, the column waits: a pause mark appears next to its name with the reason. Click the mark to continue — the values that were already calculated stay. Rules that depend on the date ("in the last 30 days") can't be used in a score or a Label column: the value would go out of date without any column changing. ### Is the record already in another list? A rule can also ask whether a record is in one of your **reference lists** — your customers, competitors, partners, or any list you use to look things up (see "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)"). In a criterion or a group, pick the reference list by name as the field, then **is in it** or **is not in it**. Two typical uses: - A **Label** column "Relationship": "Customer" when the record is in your customer list, "Competitor" when it is in the competitor list, "New" for all other rows. - A **Score** criterion "Already a customer" with −50 points, or "On the target account list" with +30. A record is found by its email address or LinkedIn profile (a reference list on person level) or by its company's domain (company level) — never by name. A record with none of these counts as not in the list. As soon as a rule uses a reference list, the dialog asks how the column treats a reference list that changes: - **Dynamic** (the default) — the value follows the reference list. When the reference list changed, the records are looked up again the next time you open the list. - **Static** — the value stays as it was found when the record came in: "was this already a customer when the lead arrived?". It is looked up again only when the record's own email, domain, website or LinkedIn profile changes. Either way, **Run** in the column's header looks every record up again right away — for a list that feeds an export or a trigger without anyone opening it, or to bring a Static column up to date once. Looking records up in a reference list costs no credits. Reference lists are part of the Premium plan. A list can't look itself up. ### Is the record already in HubSpot? When a HubSpot account is connected to the workspace, the rule editor offers two more fields in the same group — no reference list needed: - **HubSpot: contact (by email)** — is there a contact with this email address in your HubSpot? - **HubSpot: company (by domain)** — is there a company with this domain? Pick one, then **is in it** or **is not in it**: a Label column "In CRM" / "New", or a Score criterion "Already in HubSpot" with −30 points. A record is looked up when it comes into the list, and again only when its email address or domain changes. The answer is stored in the list, like every score and group. To look all records up again — after an import into HubSpot, say — click **Run** in the column's header. Looking records up in HubSpot costs credits per request, and one request covers up to 100 records (the price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"); the dialog says so when a rule uses it. HubSpot needs the Premium plan. If the balance or the plan doesn't cover it, the column waits and shows a pause mark with the reason; nothing is lost. ### Why does a record have this score? Hover over a score cell to see which criteria the record meets, with their points. The record panel shows the same for every score of the list: the score, the tier, and a ✓ or ✗ per criterion. ### Labeling records by rules **+ Column** → **Label** creates a column that puts every record into the first group whose rule applies — "Enterprise" when Employees is at least 1,000, "Mid-Market" from 100, and so on. The order of the groups counts. Each group reads as a sentence: **If** its rule applies, **then the cell shows** the value you type. **Otherwise the cell shows** is the value for records no rule applies to; leave it empty and their cell stays empty. For a yes/no column use one group with the value "true" and leave the last field empty. Under **Show as** you choose how the list displays the values: - **Text** — the value in a colored pill. - **Dot** — a colored dot in front of the value. - **Icon** — an icon instead of the text; pick one per group (check, cross, star, flag, warning, minus). - **Checkbox** — a ticked box where the first group applies, an empty box elsewhere. - **Tick only** — the tick where the first group applies, nothing elsewhere. The colored circles under each value set that value's color. Whatever you choose here only changes the display: filters, exports and pipelines keep seeing the value you typed. A score's tier column has the same **Show as** choice (without icons); Checkbox and Tick only mark the top tier. A Label column can have up to 10 values. Rules are free. ### Editing or deleting Open the column's header menu and choose **Edit score** (on the score or its tier column) or **Edit label** (on a Label column). Changing criteria, points or thresholds recalculates the whole column; renaming a criterion does not. Deleting a score column also removes its tier column. **Related topics:** columns-formulas-ai-columns · reference-lists · list-triggers · search-filter-sort-replace · price-list. ### FAQ #### How do I score the contacts in my list? Click + Column next to the search field in the list's header and choose Score. Add criteria — each with a name, points and a rule — and ListPlus adds the points of every criterion a record meets. In the second step you can add a tier column that sorts the score into A, B and C. #### Can I sort a score into tiers like A, B and C? Yes. In step 2 of the score dialog, keep "Add tiers as their own column" ticked. You name the three tiers and set from how many points each starts; the last one takes everything below. The tier is its own column, so you can filter by it and use it in list triggers. #### Can the AI decide whether a criterion applies? Yes. Click AI statement in the score dialog, write a sentence such as "The company is a B2B software vendor" and choose up to four columns the AI should read. For each record the AI answers yes, no or unclear, and only a yes gives the points. It judges from the values in the row only. #### What does an AI statement in a score cost? Each AI judgment costs credits. Records with the same values are judged once, and an answer ListPlus already has costs nothing, so the cost depends on how many different values your columns hold. The dialog shows the number of judgments and the maximum cost before you create the column. Rules cost nothing. #### Can I try an AI statement before paying for it? Yes. Test on 10 rows runs the statement on ten records of your list for free and shows how many were judged yes, no and unclear. The preview on the right then includes those answers. #### Does the score update when my data changes? Yes. When a column a criterion uses changes — by hand, through an import, an enrichment or the API — ListPlus recalculates the records concerned within seconds. A small pulsing dot in the cell shows that a new value is on the way. #### Why is there a pause mark next to my score column? The column has AI statements and is waiting: either the credit balance doesn't cover the next judgments, or the day's credit ceiling for automatic recalculation in this list is used up. Hover over the mark for the reason and click it to continue. Values that were already calculated stay. #### Why does this contact have this score? Hover over the score cell: it lists every criterion with a ✓ or ✗ and the points that counted. The record panel shows the same breakdown together with the tier. A ? means the AI has not judged that criterion for this record yet. #### Can I use the score or the tier in a filter or a trigger? Yes. Both are regular columns with stored values: filter the score as a number, the tier by its values, and use either in a list trigger — for example "when the tier is A, send the record to a pipeline". They are also part of exports and visible to the API. #### How do I put contacts into my own segments? Click + Column next to the search field and choose Label. Create a group for each segment with a rule, for example "Enterprise" when Employees is at least 1,000. Every record goes into the first group whose rule applies; "Otherwise the cell shows" sets the value for the rest. Label columns use rules only and are free. #### Can a column show whether a contact is already a customer? Yes. Make your customer list a reference list, then add a Label column whose group "Customer" has the rule "[your customer list] is in it" — or give a Score criterion with that rule its points. Records are found by email, LinkedIn profile or company domain, and the lookup costs no credits. #### What is the difference between Dynamic and Static for a reference list rule? Dynamic follows the reference list: when it has changed, the records are looked up again the next time you open the list. Static keeps what was found when the record came in and looks it up again only when the record's own email, domain, website or LinkedIn profile changes. Run in the column's header looks everything up right away in both cases. #### Can a column show whether a contact is already in HubSpot? Yes, if a HubSpot account is connected to the workspace: in a Score or Label column pick "HubSpot: contact (by email)" or "HubSpot: company (by domain)" as the field of a rule. A record is looked up when it comes in and the answer is stored in the list; Run in the column's header looks all records up again. It costs credits per request to HubSpot, and one request covers up to 100 records. #### Can I change a score later? Yes. Open the header menu of the score or tier column and choose Edit score. If you change criteria, points or thresholds, the whole column is recalculated; AI answers ListPlus already has are reused and not charged again. #### Can I type into a score or tier cell? No. These cells are calculated and read-only. If a paste, an import or the API writes into the column, ListPlus replaces the value with the calculated one. --- ## Sublists (segments) and tags Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/segments-and-tags Last updated: 2026-10-17 A sublist is a named, saved rule — a filter with a color and a live count — that shows the rows it applies to right now. Tags are a separate, lighter way to label individual rows by hand. ### Sublists Open **More → Sublists** to see, create, filter by and manage them. A list can have up to 30 sublists, and each needs its own name. #### Creating a sublist Click **New**. The **Create Sublist** dialog asks for a name, a color and **Which rows belong to it?** You can start from a template or choose **Write my own rule**. - **Templates** — Decision makers, No email, Risky email, LinkedIn ready, Personal email, Role mailboxes and Company missing, plus "Ready for …" for your workspace's first goals. Only templates that fit your list's columns are shown. - **Write my own rule** — the same rule editor as in list triggers. Pick a field (a column, Status, Tags, Email verification, a pipeline's state or a goal), a comparison and, where needed, values. Rules work on text, numbers and dates, and also on computed columns such as a score, a tier or a Label column. Click **+ AND condition** to add a condition to a group — a row must match every condition in the group. Click **+ OR group** to add a second group — a row belongs to the sublist as soon as it matches one of the groups. Below the rule, the dialog shows how many rows match right now ("12 of 480 rows match right now"), so you can check the rule before you save it. #### How a sublist stays up to date A sublist is not a snapshot. Its count and its rows follow the data in the grid live: change a cell and the row joins or leaves the sublist right away. Rows marked ignored are never counted. #### Putting rows into a sublist by hand You can't add or remove single rows — the rule alone decides. To collect rows by hand, tag them (for example "Priority") and make a sublist with the rule **Tags is one of** "Priority". Every row you tag then appears in it, and removing the tag takes the row out again. #### Using and managing a sublist Click a sublist's name to filter the grid to it; click it again (or click **Show all rows**) to clear the filter. Each sublist shows its own row count. While a sublist is active, the ⋯ menu offers **Export Sublist "Name"**. Use the pencil icon to change its name, color or rule, and the trash icon to delete it — deleting a sublist doesn't delete its rows, only the saved filter. A sublist can't be deleted while an agent (an API connection) is limited to it. The message names the agent; remove the sublist from that connection's **Sublist Visibility** first. While a sublist is active, a trigger's **Use current filter** takes its rule over as conditions (see "[Make a trigger from your current filter](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-from-current-filter)"). ### Tags Tags are free-text labels on individual rows, shown in the built-in **Tags** column at the end of the grid. Click a row's Tags cell to open the tag editor: type to search your existing tags or create a new one, and click a tag to toggle it on or off — a row can carry any number of tags. Tag changes save themselves in the background, like every other edit. ### Sublists vs. tags Use a sublist when you want to filter the grid to a group that a rule can describe, or run an enrichment, check or export on just that group. Use tags for quick labels you set by hand (for example "called," "vip," "wrong number"). The two work together: a sublist with a Tags rule turns a tag into a group you can filter by. **Related topics:** list-triggers · selecting-rows · scores-and-assigned-columns · api-permissions · quality-checks-overview. ### FAQ #### What's the difference between a sublist and a tag? A sublist is a named, saved rule that shows the rows it applies to right now, and you can filter the whole grid by it. A tag is a free-text label you put on individual rows by hand, shown in the Tags column. A sublist with the rule "Tags is one of …" shows all rows that carry a tag. #### How do I create a sublist? Open **More → Sublists** and click **New**. Give it a name and a color, then pick a template or choose **Write my own rule** under "Which rows belong to it?". The dialog shows how many rows match before you save. #### How do I put rows into a sublist by hand? Tag them. A sublist has no hand-picked rows — its rule decides. Give the rows a tag (for example "Priority") and create a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of Priority"; every tagged row appears in it, and removing the tag takes the row out. #### If a sublist has several conditions, does a row need to match all of them or any of them? Both are possible. Conditions inside one group are combined with AND ("+ AND condition") — a row must match all of them. Separate groups are combined with OR ("+ OR group") — a row belongs to the sublist if it matches at least one group. #### What can a sublist rule look at? Any column (text, numbers, dates, and computed columns such as a score, a tier or a Label column), plus Status, Tags, the email verification, a pipeline's state and your goals. It is the same rule editor as in list triggers. #### Which sublist templates are there? Decision makers, No email, Risky email, LinkedIn ready, Personal email, Role mailboxes and Company missing, plus "Ready for …" for your workspace's first goals. Only those that fit your list's columns are offered. Placeholder names, names in ALL CAPS and outdated job titles are found — and fixed — in the Analyze panel instead. #### Why does my sublist's count look wrong? The count follows the data in the grid live, so it changes as soon as a cell changes. Rows marked ignored are never counted, which is the usual reason for a lower number than expected. Open the sublist's rule with the pencil icon to check its conditions — the dialog shows how many rows match right now. #### How many sublists can a list have? Up to 30, and each needs its own name — two sublists in one list can't share a name. #### Why can't I delete a sublist? An agent (API connection) is limited to it. The message names the agent: open that connection's permissions, remove the sublist under Sublist Visibility, then delete it. Deleting a sublist never deletes rows. #### How do I add a tag to a row? Click that row's cell in the Tags column to open the tag editor, then type to search or create a tag and click it to add it — a row can have multiple tags, and they save automatically. #### Can I filter or sort by tags? Yes — the Tags column supports the grid's normal search, filter and sort, so you can find rows by tag directly. For a saved group with a live count, make a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of …". --- ## Ignoring vs. deleting rows Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus has two separate ways to take a row out of your work: **ignoring** (Ignorieren), which is reversible and keeps the data, and **deleting**, which removes the row from the list. ### Ignoring rows Select one or more rows and choose **Ignore selected records** in the selection bar's **⋯** menu, or right-click a row and choose **Ignore N Row(s)**. Ignored rows disappear from every view of the list, including the **Open** working view (see "[Record statuses and the working view (Open / All)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-statuses)") — ignoring is the stronger of the two: unlike a "done" status, an ignored row is also skipped by analysis, triggers and enrichment. To find them again, click the **Ignored** chip (Ignoriert) in the status bar at the bottom of the grid, or run **Show Ignored Rows** from Commands (⌘K) — clicking the chip again, or **Show All Rows**, brings the normal view back. Ignoring rows saves itself automatically in the background. ### Restoring ignored rows In the ignored-rows view, select the rows and click **Restore**, or right-click and choose **Restore N Row(s)**. This is also saved automatically — the rows are back in your normal views immediately. ### Deleting rows Select rows and choose **Delete** from the selection bar's **⋯** menu, or right-click and choose **Delete N Row(s)**. The rows disappear right away and the deletion is saved automatically about a second later. To bring them back, click **Undo** in the list header or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z — the rows return complete, in the same place, including their enrichment data. Undo only reaches back within the same session: after you switch lists or reload the page, deleted rows can't be brought back. Deleting rows is only available if the list allows it — see "[Set up: what a list can do, and its settings](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-settings)" for the **Allow deleting rows** toggle (Set up → Permissions). If it's off, no Delete option appears in the selection bar or the right-click menu. ### Cost Ignoring, restoring and deleting rows are all free. **Related topics:** list-statuses · selecting-rows · duplicates · saving-is-manual · list-settings. ### FAQ #### What's the difference between ignoring and deleting a row? Ignoring takes a row out of every view but keeps its data — you can bring it back anytime with Restore. Deleting removes the row from the list (saved automatically); Undo brings it back until you switch lists or reload the page. #### How do I ignore rows? Select the rows, then open the selection bar's ⋯ menu and click Ignore selected records, or right-click a row and choose Ignore N Row(s). Ignored rows disappear from every view immediately, including the Open working view, and save automatically — no need to click Save. #### Where do ignored rows go, and how do I find them again? Click the Ignored chip in the status bar at the bottom of the grid, or run Show Ignored Rows from Commands (⌘K). Click the chip again, or run Show All Rows, to return to your normal view. #### How do I restore an ignored row? Open the ignored-rows view (the Ignored chip in the status bar, or Show Ignored Rows from Commands), select the rows, and click Restore — or right-click and choose Restore N Row(s). This saves automatically too. #### Do I need to click Save after ignoring or restoring rows? No — there is no Save button; ignoring and restoring both sync to the server automatically in the background, like every edit in a list. #### How do I delete rows, and can I undo it? Select the rows and choose Delete from the selection bar's ⋯ menu, or right-click and choose Delete N Row(s). The deletion is saved automatically; click Undo in the list header or press ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z to bring the rows back complete, in the same place. After you switch lists or reload the page, undo is no longer possible and the deletion is permanent. #### Why don't I see a Delete option for my rows? Deleting is only available when the list allows it. Check Set up → Permissions → Allow deleting rows (Set up is the two sliders next to the list's name); if it's switched off, no Delete option appears for anyone on that list. #### What's the difference between ignoring a row and marking its status "done"? Ignoring is stronger: an ignored row disappears from every view, including Open and All, and is skipped by analysis, triggers and enrichment. A "done" status only leaves the Open working view — the record still shows under All and is still seen by analysis, triggers and enrichment; see "[Record statuses and the working view (Open / All)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-statuses)." --- ## Record statuses and the working view (Open / All) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-statuses Last updated: 2026-10-17 A **status** marks where a record stands — for example "Qualified" or "Waiting for reply." Every list has a built-in **Status** column; owners and admins of the workspace define the list's own statuses, and anyone who can edit the list can set them on records. ### Defining statuses Open **Manage statuses** — from the selection bar's **Status** button, the **Statuses** section of **Set up** (the two sliders next to the list's name), or right-click a row and pick **Set status → Manage statuses** — to add, rename, recolor or remove statuses: up to 12 per list, each with a name (30 characters max) and one of 9 colors. Check **done** on a status to mark that its records are finished work; removing a status makes its records active again. Only owners and admins of the workspace can open this editor and make changes — everyone else sees the list's statuses read-only. ### Setting a status on records Select one or more rows and click **Status** in the selection bar (next to **Tag**), or right-click a row and use **Set status**, to pick an existing status or type to filter. Anyone who can edit the list can set statuses on records; owners and admins can also create a new status on the spot. You can also set the **Status** column cell directly for a single row. ### The numbers: status bar counts The status bar at the bottom of the grid shows a colored chip with a live count for every status that has records, plus a running-jobs chip while a pipeline is enriching rows. Click a chip to filter the grid to just that status; click it again (or **Back to the working list**) to return to your normal view. Chips that don't fit collapse into a **+n** menu. ### The working view: Open vs. All Once a list has at least one status marked **done**, the status bar shows two view chips: **Open** (records that aren't done — your working list) and **All** (every record, including done ones). Records with a done status leave **Open** automatically but stay visible under **All**, or by clicking their status chip directly. A list with no done statuses only shows **All**. ### Status vs. ignored vs. tags A status is one of three ways to set a record apart, and they're not the same: - **Done status** — leaves the **Open** working view, but still counts everywhere else: analysis, triggers, the data API and sync all see it. - **Ignored** (see "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)") — a separate, built-in state that's stronger: ignored records are skipped everywhere, including analysis, triggers and enrichment, not just the working view. - **Tag** (see "Sublists and tags") — a free-text label a row can carry several of at once; a status is the ONE value a record carries right now, chosen from the list's defined set. ### Cost Defining, setting and viewing statuses are all free. **Related topics:** hide-or-delete-rows · segments-and-tags · list-settings. ### FAQ #### What is a record status? A status marks where a record stands, such as "Qualified" or "Waiting for reply." It shows in the built-in Status column and as a colored chip with a count in the status bar at the bottom of the list. #### How do I create or edit statuses for a list? Click Status in the selection bar and choose "Manage statuses," or open Set up (the two sliders next to the list's name) and go to Statuses. There you can add, rename, recolor or remove statuses — up to 12 per list, each with a name and one of 9 colors — and check "done" to mark a status as finished work. #### Who can define statuses, and who can set them on records? Only owners and admins of the workspace can create, rename, recolor, mark "done" or delete statuses. Anyone who can edit the list can set an existing status on records from the selection bar or the Status column, and can create a new status on the fly there only if they are also an owner or admin. #### How do I set a status for many records at once? Select the rows, then click Status in the selection bar (next to Tag) — or right-click any of the selected rows and use Set status — and pick a status from the list, or type to filter. This applies to every selected row at once. #### What do the numbers next to each status mean? Each colored chip in the status bar at the bottom of the grid shows how many records currently carry that status, updating live as records change. Click a chip to filter the grid to just that status. #### What's the difference between "Open" and "All" in the status bar? Once a list has at least one status marked "done," the status bar shows two chips: "Open" (your working list — records that aren't done) and "All" (every record, including done ones). A list with no "done" statuses just shows "All," since nothing leaves the working view. #### What's the difference between a status and a tag? A status is the one value a record currently carries, chosen from the list's defined set (e.g. "Qualified"), and it can be marked "done" to affect the working view. A tag is a free-text label a row can carry several of at once, with no effect on any view — see "Sublists and tags" for details. #### What's the difference between a "done" status and an ignored row? A "done" status only takes a record out of the "Open" working view — it's still counted by analysis, triggers, the data API and sync. Ignoring a row (see "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)") is stronger: ignored records are skipped everywhere, not just in the working view. #### Does setting or managing statuses cost credits? No — creating, editing, setting and viewing statuses are all free. #### Can I remove a status that records still carry? Yes — removing a status from "Manage statuses" makes every record that carried it active again (no status), and the dialog tells you how many records that affects before you save. --- ## Triggers — hand records on automatically Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers Last updated: 2026-10-17 A trigger watches one list and acts on its own: "when a record meets these conditions, do this." It's the way to hand records to a pipeline, change their status, or tag them without doing it by hand every time. ### Where to find it Open a list and click **Triggers** in the list header (the lightning icon, next to Analyze, Record and Enrich). Setting up or changing a trigger is for the workspace's owner and admins; other members can see the triggers and what they've handed over, but not change them. ### When Every trigger has conditions built the same way as a pipeline's data check — field, operator, value, grouped with AND and OR — but with more to choose from, since a trigger belongs to one list: any of that list's own columns, an evaluation goal, the record's status, its e-mail verification, whether it's already in another pipeline, or whether it's in one of the workspace's reference lists (**is in it** / **is not in it** — see "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for what those are; setting one up needs Premium, and below Premium the picker shows a greyed entry "Existing customers, competitors … — with Premium"). Choose when they're checked: - **a record is new in the list** ("New record") — only records that are new in the list. - **a record is changed** ("Changed record") — only records that were changed, not the ones that come in new. - **a record is new or was changed** ("Conditions met") — every record, checked again whenever it's added or changed. - **a record is deleted from the list** ("Deleted record") — a record that is deleted from the list (not one that is marked ignored, and not one that leaves with a reload from the source). It can only be handed to a pipeline — not to one that enriches or writes into another list. The record's data is kept until that pipeline has sent it, then removed. You pick one of these in the trigger's **When …** sentence. Leaving the conditions empty fires on every new record ("New record") or every changed record ("Changed record"); "a record is new or was changed" needs at least one condition. While editing, the live "x of y records match" count leaves reference-list conditions out of the number — the trigger itself still checks them correctly once it runs. **Use current filter** (below the conditions, only while the list is filtered) turns what narrows the list right now into conditions and adds them to the ones already there; the editor lists what it could not take over. See "[Make a trigger from your current filter](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-from-current-filter)". Conditions on time ("older than 30 days", "in the last 7 days") or on a pipeline's state are checked when the record changes — not by themselves once the time has passed or the pipeline moves on; the editor says so under the conditions. ### Then Add up to **5 actions**. Hand-overs to pipelines and **Enrich** always run first, then **Set status**, **Mark as ignored** and **Set tag** in the order you gave them — a step that fails stops the ones after it, but what already happened stays done. Choose from: - **Hand over to pipeline** — adds the record to one of your pipelines. Don't have the right one yet? **Create pipeline** under the picker opens the setup in a dialog; the new pipeline is selected in this action and your rule draft stays as it is (an Endpoint pipeline shows its signing secret once — copy it before you return). - **Set status** — sets one of the list's own statuses. - **Mark as ignored** (Als ignoriert markieren) — gives the record the built-in ignored state, the same as **Ignore** in the grid. - **Set tag** — adds a tag, kept if the record has it already. - **Enrich** — fills the record's own missing fields. You choose the fields, a credit limit per record and what happens to filled cells right in the rule; the enrichment belongs to this rule (see "[Enrich in a rule — fill a record's own missing fields](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrich-pipeline)"). A record the trigger already acted on isn't acted on again for the same trigger, so re-saving or a later change never duplicates a hand-over. ### When triggers run An active trigger checks matching records automatically — there's nothing to click. Records written by automation, webhooks, forms, the API or enrichment are checked within a few seconds. Rows you edit or add yourself in the list are checked about 30 seconds after your first edit, so you have time to finish (for example, set a status and then fix the email). If an automation writes to the list meanwhile, your rows may be checked together with that earlier run. Only active triggers run; pause one with the switch on its card to stop it without losing its setup. ### Records already in the list While building a trigger with "a record is new or was changed", tick **Include records that already match** to also run it once, immediately on save, for records already in the list. It's unavailable once there's nothing left to include, and it never repeats — later changes are covered by the trigger running as usual. ### Starting from a template A list with no trigger yet opens with "Let your list do the work." and one example rule, and, under **Choose a template**, six starting points: **Spot decision makers** (C-level and VP contacts get the status "Qualified", which the list gets if it has none), **Find work emails** (Enrich, a business e-mail where one can be found; charged only when found), **Forward leads** (ready decision makers with a business e-mail go to a pipeline you choose), **Clean up your list** (freemail, disposable and info@ addresses get the tag "Freemail" and are marked ignored), **Enrich, then pass on** (two linked triggers) and **Notify your team** (new decision makers go to your Slack pipeline and get the status "Qualified"). While the list is filtered, **Use current filter** comes first. Each template opens the editor filled in; nothing runs until you save, and cancelling removes a "Qualified" status the template just created if nothing uses it. Or choose **Build your own trigger**. Once a list has triggers, the templates sit under **Choose a template** below them. See "[Trigger templates](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-templates)" for each one. ### Limits Up to 20 triggers per list, up to 5 actions per trigger, and up to 5 OR-groups of up to 12 conditions each in the "When". ### Problems shown on a trigger A trigger's card names why its last run couldn't act, for example "The pipeline no longer exists" (it was deleted — choose another one), "The pipeline is full" (send or remove some of its entries first), or "A condition uses a column this list no longer has" (nothing is handed over until you fix it). **Review trigger** opens the editor on the exact problem. **Related topics:** trigger-templates · trigger-from-current-filter · pipelines-overview · send-records-to-a-pipeline · enrich-pipeline · list-statuses · segments-and-tags · reference-lists · roles-and-permissions. ### FAQ #### What is a trigger in ListPlus? A trigger watches one list and acts automatically when a record meets your conditions: hand it to a pipeline, set a status, mark it ignored, add a tag, or enrich it. Open a list and click Triggers in the list header to set one up. #### What can a trigger do when a record matches? Up to 5 actions: hand the record to a pipeline, set one of the list's own statuses, mark it as ignored or add a tag; there's also Enrich, which fills the record's missing fields with settings made in the rule itself. Hand-overs to pipelines (and Enrich, which works like one) always run first, then status, Mark as ignored and tag in the order you gave them — a failing step stops the rest, and what already happened stays. #### What fields can a trigger's conditions check? Any column of that list, an evaluation goal, the record's status, its e-mail verification, whether it's already in another pipeline, or whether it's in one of the workspace's reference lists — more than a pipeline's own data check can see, since a trigger belongs to one specific list. Build them with AND inside a group and OR between groups. #### Can a trigger check whether a contact is an existing customer or competitor? Yes, if you've set up a reference list (a Premium feature; Set up → Reference list on that list): it shows up as its own condition group with "is in it" / "is not in it", for example "hand over to pipeline" only when company "is not in it" for your Existing customers list. See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for how to set one up and how matching works. #### What's the difference between "a record is new in the list" and "a record is new or was changed"? The first fires for records that are new to the list; the second checks every record again whenever it's added or changed, so it also catches records that become a match later. Pick the first for "do this once, on arrival" and the second for anything that should stay true over time. #### Can a trigger react when a record is deleted? Yes — choose "a record is deleted from the list" in the trigger's When sentence; it fires when a record is really deleted from the list, not when it is marked ignored or leaves with a reload from the source. The only action is handing the record to a pipeline (for example to tell Slack or your CRM), and not to a pipeline that enriches or writes into another list. The record's data is kept until that pipeline has sent it and is removed afterwards. #### Do I need to click something for a trigger to run? No, an active trigger checks matching records by itself: within a few seconds for records from automation, webhooks, forms, the API or enrichment, and about 30 seconds after your first edit for rows you change or add yourself in the list. Pause it with the switch on its card if you want to stop it without deleting its setup. #### Why does a trigger take about 30 seconds after I edit a row? On purpose: rows a person edits or adds in the list are checked about 30 seconds after the first edit, so you can finish typing — for example set a status first and fix the email afterwards — before the trigger acts. Records from automation, webhooks, forms, the API and enrichment are still checked within a few seconds. #### Can a trigger also act on records already in my list? Yes, tick Include records that already match while saving it (only available with "a record is new or was changed") and it runs once, immediately, for the records already there. It's a one-time pass — after that, the trigger runs as usual on new and changed records. #### Why does my trigger's card show a warning? It names why the last run couldn't act — commonly that the pipeline it hands records to was deleted, is full, or that a condition uses a column the list no longer has. Click Review trigger to open the editor on the exact problem. #### What happens to records a trigger already handed over if I delete it? They stay exactly where the trigger put them — in their pipeline, with their status or tag. Deleting a trigger only stops it from acting on future records; it never undoes past hand-overs. #### How many triggers can one list have? Up to 20 triggers per list, each with up to 5 actions and up to 5 OR-groups of up to 12 conditions. If you're close to the limit, combine similar triggers into one with an OR group instead of adding another. #### Does a trigger notice when "older than 30 days" becomes true? No. Time and pipeline conditions are checked only when the record is added or changed, not by themselves as time passes or when a pipeline moves on. --- ## Trigger templates Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-templates Last updated: 2026-10-17 A trigger template opens the trigger editor already filled in. Nothing runs until you save, so you can change the conditions and actions first. Find the templates under **Choose a template** when a list has no trigger yet, or in a fold-out below your triggers once it has some. Setting up triggers is for the workspace's owner and admins. ### The six templates - **Spot decision makers** — new or changed C-level, founder or VP contacts get the status "Qualified". - **Find work emails** — new or changed contacts whose business e-mail can be found are enriched; "Charged only when found". - **Forward leads** — ready decision makers with a business e-mail go to a pipeline you choose. - **Clean up your list** — freemail, disposable and info@ addresses get the tag "Freemail" and are marked as ignored. - **Enrich, then pass on** — two linked triggers. Step 1 enriches new decision makers' e-mails; after you save it, step 2 opens to send them to a pipeline. If you cancel step 2, only step 1 stays. - **Notify your team** — new decision makers with a business e-mail go to your Slack pipeline (the workspace's first one, otherwise you choose) and get the status "Qualified". **Spot decision makers** and **Notify your team** use the status "Qualified". If your list has none, the template creates it when you pick it. If you then cancel the editor and nothing uses that status, it is removed again. While the list is filtered, **Use current filter** comes first. Or choose **Build your own trigger**. **Related topics:** list-triggers · trigger-from-current-filter · enrich-pipeline · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · list-statuses. ### FAQ #### Which trigger templates are there? Six: Spot decision makers, Find work emails, Forward leads, Clean up your list, Enrich, then pass on and Notify your team. Each opens the editor filled in and nothing runs until you save. #### What does "Spot decision makers" do? It gives new or changed C-level, founder and VP contacts the status "Qualified". The list gets that status when you pick the template if it has none, and it is removed again if you cancel and nothing uses it. #### What does "Find work emails" do, and what does it cost? It adds an Enrich action that looks for a business e-mail on new or changed contacts that lack one. It is charged only when an address is found; the price is in the price list. #### What does "Clean up your list" do? Freemail, disposable and info@ addresses get the tag "Freemail" and are marked as ignored, so they drop out of your working view. You can change the conditions or the tag before you save. #### How does "Enrich, then pass on" work with two triggers? Step 1 enriches the e-mail of new decision makers. After you save it, step 2 opens as a "Forward leads" draft that sends them to the pipeline you pick once the e-mail is there. If you cancel step 2, only step 1 stays. #### What does "Notify your team" need? A Slack pipeline. The template picks the workspace's first Slack pipeline, or you choose one. Connected targets such as Slack need Pro, and every delivery costs credits (see the price list). #### Why didn't a template act on contacts already in my list? "Enrich, then pass on" and "Notify your team" fire on "a record is new in the list", so they only see records that arrive after you save. To include records already there, use a trigger with "a record is new or was changed" and tick Include records that already match. #### Where are the templates once my list has triggers? In a fold-out under Choose a template, below your trigger cards. --- ## Make a trigger from your current filter Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/trigger-from-current-filter Last updated: 2026-10-17 **Use current filter** turns whatever narrows your list right now into trigger conditions, so you don't rebuild a filter by hand. It appears below the conditions in the trigger editor and as the first row of the empty state ("Turn what narrows the list now into conditions."), only while something narrows the list. ### How to use it 1. Narrow the list the way you want — a column filter, a status, a sublist or a check in Analyze. 2. Click **Triggers** in the list header, then **Use current filter** (or start a new trigger and click it below the conditions). 3. Check the conditions, add actions under **Then** and save. The result is added to the conditions already there (AND). Setting up triggers is for the workspace's owner and admins. ### What it takes over - Column conditions (shown as "Filter: {column}"), the status chip, a sublist's rule and funnel filters on the list's own columns, Tags and Status. - Analysis checks that look at one record each; each becomes its own OR group. Thirteen map: freemail, disposable address, role address, invalid e-mail format, no e-mail, empty job title, name, company, country or city, phone without country code, LinkedIn company page and invalid LinkedIn URL. - In the working list, "status is none of" the done statuses, but only when another filter is active and no status filter is set. ### What it leaves out The editor lists everything it did not take over under "Not taken over:" — quick search, the Changes filter, Selected rows, Only enriched records, a chart selection and checks that need more than one record. It also leaves out anything that would not fit a trigger: at most 5 OR groups of 12 conditions each and 100 values per condition. The list names what was dropped and why. **Related topics:** list-triggers · trigger-templates · segments-and-tags · quality-checks-overview. ### FAQ #### How do I turn my current filter into a trigger? Filter the list, open Triggers in the list header and click Use current filter. It is below the conditions in the editor and the first row of the empty state, and it adds what narrows the list as conditions. #### Which filters does "Use current filter" take over? Column conditions, the status chip, a sublist's rule and funnel filters on the list's own columns, Tags and Status. Thirteen Analyze checks that look at one record each also map, each as its own OR group. #### What is not taken over, and why? Quick search, the Changes filter, Selected rows, Only enriched records, a chart selection and checks that compare records are not conditions on one record, so they are listed under "Not taken over:". Anything beyond a trigger's limits (5 OR groups, 12 conditions per group, 100 values per condition) is listed with that reason. #### Why does the trigger get "status is none of …" when I'm in the working list? The working list hides done records, and the trigger copies that. It adds the condition only when another filter is active, you set no status filter and the list has done statuses. #### Does "Use current filter" replace the conditions I already have? No. The filter is combined with the existing conditions by AND, so the trigger narrows further. #### What does "too many OR groups — nothing was changed" mean? Combined with the conditions above, the filter would exceed what a trigger can hold, so nothing was changed. Remove a condition or an OR group, or narrow the filter, and try again. #### Why don't I see "Use current filter"? It shows only while something narrows the list, and only to people who may set up triggers (owners and admins). Filter the list first. #### Can I make a trigger from an Analyze check? Yes. Select the check in Analyze, then open Triggers and click Use current filter. Only checks that look at one record each map; others are listed under "Not taken over:". --- ## The Record panel: best values and sources Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/record-panel Last updated: 2026-10-17 The Record panel shows everything ListPlus knows about the row you clicked. Under **From sources**, **Best values** gives one value per field picked from all sources, and below it each source has its own line. ### Best values **Best values** ("from all sources") is open by default and lists up to 17 fields — e-mail, phone, job title, company, domain, location, LinkedIn URLs and more. Each item shows the value and an icon for the source it came from. ListPlus picks the value with one rule that is also used for filling cells (see "[When enrichment sources disagree, which value is offered?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/which-source-wins)"). Hover the source icon to see the source, "Retrieved {date}" and, for e-mail and phone, "Checked {date}: {status}". A check older than 90 days is marked as a hint only. ### One line per source Below Best values, each source has a slim line; open it to see its values in groups: - **Different from the list** — the list cell holds another value. - **Additional data** — fields the list has no value for. - **Matches the list row** — the same value as in the list. - **Source metadata** — technical details of the lookup. A LinkedIn line holds **Experience**, **Education** and **Certifications**. Source names read "Prospeo · Contact", "CompanyEnrich · Company" and so on; some have their own names: "LinkedIn search (Google)", "AI web research", "AI audience search" and "AI analysis". ### Take over, Show column, Remove data - **Take over** fills an empty cell with the value, or replaces the cell's value when it sits under "Different from the list". Best values have no Take over, only the column button. - **Show column** adds a temporary column with that field. It is read-only, sortable and filterable, not saved, and has a light purple background. From Best values it shows the best value of every row. - **Remove data:** open the "⋯" menu on a source's line, choose **Remove data** and confirm with **Remove**. **Related topics:** which-source-wins · list-editor-tour · accuracy-and-wrong-results · fill-empty-cells · take-over-and-join. ### FAQ #### What is "Best values" in the Record panel? Best values, under "From sources", shows one value per field that ListPlus picked from all sources, with an icon for the source. The same rule is used when enrichment fills your cells and for the best-value columns. #### How do I see where a value came from and when it was checked? Hover the source icon next to a value in Best values. The tooltip names the source and shows "Retrieved {date}"; for e-mail and phone it also shows "Checked {date}: {status}", marked as a hint only when the check is older than 90 days. #### What do "Different from the list", "Additional data" and "Matches the list row" mean? They sort a source's values against your list row. "Different from the list" means the cell holds another value, "Additional data" is a field the list has no value for, and "Matches the list row" is the same value you already have. #### What does "Take over" do in the Record panel? It writes that source's value into the list cell: into an empty cell, or over the existing value when the value sits under "Different from the list". It is a deliberate single-field choice, so it can replace a value you typed. #### What does "Show column" do? It adds a read-only column with that field, sortable and filterable but not saved, with a light purple background. Used on a Best value, it shows the best value of every row. #### What are "LinkedIn search (Google)", "AI web research" and "AI analysis"? They are source lines for data that did not come from a data provider's contact record. "LinkedIn search (Google)" found a LinkedIn profile, "AI web research" and "AI audience search" come from AI research, and "AI analysis" is the result of an AI analysis you ran. #### Where are LinkedIn experience and education? On the row's LinkedIn source line in the Record panel, which holds Experience, Education and Certifications. #### How do I remove one source's data from a record? Open the "⋯" menu on that source's line, choose Remove data and confirm with Remove. Its values are no longer used for best values or filling; values already in your cells stay. --- ## Contact list or company list — the kind of a list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-kind Last updated: 2026-10-17 Every list has a **kind**: **Contact list** (rows are people — companies may be in it too) or **Company list** (every row is a company). The kind decides what the list offers you. A company list hides what is about a person, so you only see what fits a company. A contact list shows everything. ### Where you see and change it The small icon **before the list's title** shows the kind: a person for a contact list, a building for a company list. Hover over it to see the kind and how it was set ("detected from the columns", "detected from Markets", …). Click it to pick another kind. You can also change it in **Set up** → Overview, under **Kind of list**. Anyone who can edit the list can change the kind; readers only see the icon. ### How the kind is set The kind is set once, when the list is created: - **From where the records came from.** A list from Markets or a company search becomes a company list; people from Find, the Watchlist or a CRM's contacts become a contact list. A CRM's companies or a LinkedIn import set their own kind too; records that are partly people, partly companies make a contact list. - **Otherwise from the columns.** Company columns (company name, domain or website) without any person column make a company list. - **Everything else is a contact list.** Older lists without a kind count as contact lists too. Reloading, syncing or adding rows never changes the kind. Only you do. ### What a company list hides - **Columns:** the person columns (first name, last name, full name, job title, gender, a person's LinkedIn and similar), **Reachable** and the e-mail column. Phone columns stay visible, because a company has them too. If you need the e-mail (for example info@ addresses), show it again from the column menu — it stays visible until you change the list kind. - **Enrich:** the **Contact Enrichment** and **Find Missing Email or Phone** groups, the person steps of **AI Analysis** (Detect Gender, Split Full Names, Analyze Job Titles, Detect Company Changes), e-mail and LinkedIn verification, **Detect Job Changes** and the person wizards. **Company Enrichment** stays. - **Analyze:** the name, job-title and gender checks, the checks on a person's LinkedIn profile, and the e-mail checks that judge a person's address (personal, role-based or random-looking address). - **Evaluations:** Cold Email, Cold Calling, LinkedIn / Social, Multichannel Sequence and Deliverability. **CRM Quality** stays, as a company version: company, domain or website, industry, address, phone and e-mail. It accepts addresses like info@. - **AI chat and ⌘K:** person enrichments are not offered. If you ask the AI for one, it tells you to switch the list to Contact list first. ### Nothing is deleted The kind is a filter. Hidden columns keep their values. Switch the list back to **Contact list** and every column, check, evaluation and enrichment option comes back at once. A column you show again yourself in a company list stays visible until you change the kind again. ### Cost Changing the kind is free. It does not start an enrichment or an AI check. **Related topics:** columns-formulas-ai-columns · list-settings · campaign-ready-evaluations · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### What is the kind of a list (Contact list, Company list)? The kind says what a row is: a person (Contact list) or a company (Company list). A company list hides person columns, person checks and person enrichments. A contact list shows everything, also when some rows are companies. #### Where do I change whether a list is a contact list or a company list? Click the small icon before the list's title and pick Contact list or Company list. You can also change it in Set up → Overview under "Kind of list". Anyone who can edit the list can change it, and it is free. #### How does ListPlus decide what kind my list is? The kind is set once, when the list is created. It comes from where the records came from (a Markets or company search makes a company list, people from Find or a CRM's contacts make a contact list), otherwise from the columns: company columns without any person column make a company list. Everything else is a contact list; hover over the icon before the title to see how it was set. #### My list has people and companies — which kind is it? A contact list. It is the default whenever it isn't clear that every row is a company, for example company columns next to a contact-person column, and older lists count as contact lists too. A contact list shows everything, exactly as before; switch it to Company list if you only want company options. #### Why are the name, job title and Reachable columns gone in my list? The list is a company list, so its person columns, the Reachable column and the e-mail column are hidden. Their values are still there. Switch the list to Contact list (icon before the title) to show them all, or show a single column again from the column menu. #### Which enrichments and checks does a company list hide? It hides the Contact Enrichment and Find Missing Email or Phone groups, the person steps of AI Analysis, e-mail and LinkedIn verification, Detect Job Changes and the person wizards. Company Enrichment stays. In Analyze, the name, job-title and gender checks, the person LinkedIn checks and the personal and role-based e-mail checks are hidden. #### Which evaluations does a company list offer? Only CRM Quality, as a company version: company and domain or website are essential; industry, address, phone and e-mail are important. It accepts addresses like info@. Cold Email, Cold Calling, LinkedIn / Social, Multichannel Sequence and Deliverability come back when you switch to Contact list; your own evaluations stay. #### Does changing the kind delete any data? No. The kind is only a filter: hidden columns keep their values, and switching back brings every column, check, evaluation and enrichment option back at once. A column you show again yourself stays visible until you change the kind again. #### Does reloading or syncing change the kind of my list? No. Reloading from the source, syncing and adding rows never change the kind. It changes only when someone picks another kind. #### Why won't the AI chat enrich job titles or e-mails in my company list? In a company list the AI does not run person enrichments, and ⌘K does not offer them. The AI tells you to switch the list to Contact list first. Company enrichment works as usual. #### Why does my list say Company list when it has a contact name column? The kind was set when the list was created, from where the records came from or from its columns. If it is wrong, click the icon before the list's title and pick Contact list. Nothing is lost. --- ## Set up: what a list can do, and its settings Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-settings Last updated: 2026-10-17 **Set up** (Einrichten) is the page where you see everything a list can do and change how it works. It opens as a full page over the open list; click **Back to the list** at the top to return. ### Opening it Click the **Set up** icon in the list header — the two small sliders right next to the list's name (hover it to see "Set up"). Everyone who may edit the list has it. **List Settings...** opens the same page from the **⋯** menu inside the list, from the **⋯** menu of a list card on Home and from the **⋯** menu of a list in the Lists tree; from Home or the tree the list opens with its settings already on show. ### Overview: "What this list can do" The start page begins with the list's **List name** and **Description** (change them and click **Save**). Below that it shows one card per capability, with what it is good for, its state in this list and one action: - **Getting data in** — **Form** (Active, Paused or Not set up; the list's own form as a link or embedded in your website — see "[List forms: collect contacts with your own form](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-forms)"), **App events** (how many, or Not set up; **Connect an app**), **Webhook** (Active, Paused or Not set up), **AI research** (opens AI Research with this list already chosen as the place the hits go) and **Refresh automatically** (Daily, Weekly or Off). - **Working** — **Statuses** (how many the list has), **Scoring** (how many scores, or None yet; **Create score** opens the score wizard) and **Columns** (how many). - **Automating** — **Triggers** (how many are active) and **Agent API**. - **Role & rules** — **Reference list** (Active or Off; with a plan lock if your plan doesn't include reference lists). A card that is already in use says **Open**; otherwise it names the first step, such as **Set up**, **Create statuses** or **Create a trigger**. ### The sections The navigation on the left has the same groups (on a phone, a dropdown at the top): - **Overview** - **Form** — create and share the list's own form. See "[List forms: collect contacts with your own form](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-forms)". - **App events** — let a tool you already use (a form answer, a booking, a Slack message) add records to this list. See the App events article. - **Webhook** — the list's own address for forms and tools: URL, status, setup guides, **Send test**, the optional **Hold back** checkboxes, **Mapping** and **Recent calls**. It costs no credits and works on every plan. See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". - **Refresh automatically** — for a list from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion, Attio or Stripe: reloads the list from its source **Daily** or **Weekly** and keeps your enrichments, tags and statuses; saved as soon as you pick a value. Every run costs credits per request to the source and needs the plan of that source (see the price list). For every other list the section only shows the note that no setting appears here. See "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)". - **Statuses** — add, rename, recolor or remove the list's statuses. See "[Record statuses and the working view (Open / All)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-statuses)". - **Columns** — per-column details, see below. - **Look** — how the list looks, see below. - **Triggers** and **Agent API** — these two are not pages of Set up: they close it and open the list's own Triggers panel or Automation panel. See "[Triggers — hand records on automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers)" and "[Give an AI agent access to one list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-connection-overview)". - **Reference list** — use the list as a lookup list (customers, competitors, partners, block). See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)". - **Permissions** — what working in this list allows, see below. ### Permissions - **Allow adding rows** — lets people add new rows to the list. - **Allow deleting rows** — lets people delete rows; see "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)" for how that's different from ignoring. - **Allow row reordering** — lets people drag rows into a new order. It turns on automatically, and can't be switched off, while Allow adding rows is on. - **In-cell enrichment** — shows a small sparkle (wand) icon when you hover an empty cell that can be filled by a lookup; clicking it fills just that one cell: instantly and free if the value is already known, otherwise it opens a small window listing the ways to fill it, cheapest first. Turn it off here to stop it appearing. Click **Save** at the bottom to keep the changes. ### Adding, deleting and reordering rows Click **New row** in the status bar at the bottom of the grid to add one empty row. To reorder, drag a row by its first column — this only works when no column sort is currently applied, and not on a phone. For deleting rows, see "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)." ### Look **Alternate row colors** (striped background for even/odd rows), **Show company favicon** (small icon next to company names) and **Show photo URLs as images** (renders a photo URL cell as a circular thumbnail instead of text). Click **Save** to keep the changes. ### Columns Click a column to expand its details: **Title** (the display name — see "[Adding and managing columns](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/columns-formulas-ai-columns)" for renaming), a **Required** checkbox, **Content Type** and **Data Type** dropdowns, plus read-only details where they apply — a **Value Format** section showing the value patterns detected for that column, a lookup's option list, validation rules, and the AI's confidence score and reasoning from import. Click **Apply Changes** at the bottom to save any edits you made in this section. **Related topics:** hide-or-delete-rows · columns-formulas-ai-columns · enrichment-overview · list-statuses · reference-lists · reload-from-source · list-webhooks · list-triggers. ### FAQ #### How do I open a list's settings (Set up)? Click the Set up icon in the list header — the two sliders next to the list's name; everyone who may edit the list has it. It opens a full page over the list with an Overview and the sections Form, App events, Webhook, Refresh automatically, Statuses, Columns, Look, Reference list and Permissions; Back to the list closes it. The ⋯ menu's "List Settings..." item opens the same page. #### Can I open a list's settings without opening the list first? Yes. Choose "List Settings..." in the ⋯ menu of a list card on Home or of a list in the Lists tree, and the list opens with its settings on show. Inside the list, use the Set up icon or the list's own ⋯ menu. #### Where did the List Settings dialog with its tabs go? It is now the full-page view Set up, opened with the Set up icon next to the list's name or from the ⋯ menu as before. The former tabs are sections there: General is now Permissions (plus Refresh automatically as its own section), Layout is Look, Schema is Columns, and Statuses, Reference list and Webhook kept their names. #### What does the Overview in Set up show? Under "What this list can do" it shows one card per capability, grouped as Getting data in (Form, App events, Webhook, AI research, Refresh automatically), Working (Statuses, Scoring, Columns), Automating (Triggers, Agent API) and Role & rules (Reference list). Each card shows the state in this list — for example Active, Paused, Not set up, Off or the number of statuses, columns or active triggers — and one action that takes you there. #### Why do Triggers and Agent API in Set up take me back to the list? Because they keep their own panels in the list. Clicking Triggers or Agent API in Set up closes the page and opens the list's Triggers panel or its Automation panel, where you create triggers or set up agent access. #### What can I control under Permissions? Whether people can add rows, delete rows, or reorder rows by dragging, plus whether the in-cell enrichment wand icon appears on empty cells; click Save at the bottom to keep those changes. You find it under Set up → Permissions. #### How do I add a new row to my list? Click **New row** in the status bar at the bottom of the grid — it adds one empty row, as long as Allow adding rows is on for the list (Set up → Permissions). #### How do I reorder rows? Drag a row by its first column into a new position. This only works while no column sort is applied and Allow row reordering is on under Set up → Permissions. #### What is the wand icon that appears when I hover an empty cell? It's in-cell enrichment: clicking it fills just that one cell, either instantly from data you already have or through a small window that lists the lookups that can fill it, cheapest first. Turn it off under Set up → Permissions if you don't want it to appear. #### What can I change under Columns in Set up? A column's title, whether it's required, its content type (e.g. Email, Phone) and its data type, plus read-only details like validation rules and the AI's confidence from import. Click Apply Changes to save. #### Where do I turn on automatic refresh for a connected list? Under Set up → Refresh automatically, if the list comes from HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Airtable, Notion or Stripe: set it to Daily or Weekly, and it's saved right away; every run costs credits per request to the source and needs the plan that covers it. For any other list the section only shows a note that no setting appears here. See "[Reload: what's kept, what's lost](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/reload-from-source)" for exactly what it does. #### What is the Webhook section in Set up for? It gives the list its own webhook: click Create webhook and copy the URL into a form tool, Zapier, n8n or Make, and records sent there land in this list's columns. The same section shows the status, today's count, setup guides, the Hold back options, the field mapping and recent calls. It's free on every plan — see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". #### What's under Look in Set up? Alternate row colors (a striped background), showing a company favicon next to company names, and showing photo URL cells as circular thumbnail images. Click Save to keep the changes. --- ## Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists Last updated: 2026-10-17 Any list in your workspace can also serve as a lookup list for your other lists and pipelines — your existing customers, your competitors, your partners, a block list, or something of your own. Once a list is set up this way, pipelines and list triggers can check "is this contact already in it?", and small badges show it wherever that contact appears. Reference lists are a **Premium** feature. Below Premium you still see the **Reference list** tab, greyed out with a lock and the note "Reference lists come with Premium: mark customers, competitors and partners everywhere, and use them in pipelines and triggers." plus a **See plans** button; condition pickers in triggers and pipelines show a greyed entry "Existing customers, competitors … — with Premium". ### Setting up a reference list Open the list, click the **Set up** icon next to the list's name (or **⋯** menu → **List Settings...**), go to **Reference list**, and turn on **Use as reference list**. Choose what the list holds — **Existing customers**, **Competitors**, **Partners**, **Block (never send on)**, or **Something else** (give it a name, e.g. "Investors") — and how it matches: **Company (domain)** or **Person (email, LinkedIn)**. Click **Save**. Only the workspace owner and admins can turn this on or change it, because it changes what every pipeline and trigger in the workspace can see; other members see the setting but can't edit it. Turning a list **into** a reference list needs the Premium plan (the workspace owner's plan). Switching a reference list off, or changing its role or matching level, works on every plan. If the workspace moves from Premium to a lower plan, existing reference lists **keep working** — badges, conditions and the Block role all stay active. That is on purpose: a pipeline rule like "only if **is not in it** [Existing customers]" must never quietly start letting customers through after a plan change. ### Read-only when it refreshes from its source A reference list that also has **Refresh automatically** set to Daily or Weekly (Set up → Refresh automatically, for lists from HubSpot, Salesforce and other connected sources) becomes **read-only** for its record data: the source is the truth, and the next refresh would overwrite any change made here anyway. The list shows a banner: "This list comes from HubSpot and is refreshed daily – change records there. As a reference list it is read-only here." (with your source and schedule). While it's locked you can't edit cells, add or delete rows, enrich, run AI columns, or let a pipeline add records to it or enrich them. It can't have a list webhook either ("This list is refreshed from its source and takes no data here."). What stays possible: setting a **status**, adding or removing **tags**, creating **sublists**, and **ignoring** rows — those belong to ListPlus, not to the source. Set up stays editable too: set **Refresh automatically** to **Off**, or turn off **Use as reference list**, and the list can be edited again. A refresh that is paused after failed attempts doesn't lock the list either. ### How matching works Matching is exact, never fuzzy, and happens on whichever level you picked: - **Company** — a contact counts as "in the list" when their company domain, website, or the domain of their work email is in it. A colleague at the same company counts too, and a domain also covers its subdomains (listing `acme.com` also matches `eu.acme.com`). Personal email addresses (Gmail, Yahoo and similar free providers) never count on company level, and neither do platform addresses: a website or domain on linkedin.com, facebook.com, x.com, twitter.com, instagram.com, xing.com, youtube.com, google.com, github.com or medium.com is ignored, so a LinkedIn company page in a website column never makes "linkedin.com" a customer. - **Person** — only the same individual counts: the same email address or the same LinkedIn profile URL. ### Where it shows up A small colored badge (Customer, Competitor, Partner, Blocked, or your own name for a "Something else" list — "Listed" if you didn't give one) appears on a contact wherever you look it up — on hits in AI Research, on results and candidates in Person Search and the Inbox, in the contact detail panel, and in the row on the Watchlist page. Hover a badge to see which reference list it comes from. It does **not** appear inside a list's own grid or on Segment Search results — to see it in a list, add a Score or Label column with a reference list rule (see "[Scoring a list and labeling records by rules](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/scores-and-assigned-columns)"). After you change a reference list — add, edit or ignore rows, or change its settings — it can take up to about a minute until badges and conditions reflect it. A badge already on screen may need a page reload to update. ### Using it in pipelines and triggers In a pipeline's **Data check** and in a list's **Triggers**, your reference lists show up as their own condition group — pick the reference list by name as the field, then **is in it** or **is not in it** as the operator. A typical rule: "only hand over to HubSpot if company **is not in it** [Existing customers]" keeps current customers out of outreach, or "**is not in it** [Competitors]" makes sure a competitor is never handed to a sequencer or CRM. A trigger's live preview while editing leaves reference-list conditions out of the count (it still checks them correctly once the trigger actually runs) — it notes this under the conditions. ### The "Block" role A reference list set to **Block** behaves exactly like your workspace's Block list (Settings → Block list): a pipeline sending to an external target — your CRM, Slack, a webhook, a sequencer — skips any matching contact automatically, and the "On the block list" check in a list's Analyze panel flags matching rows. You don't need to also add those contacts to the Block list by hand; being in a "Block"-role reference list is enough. Blocking uses email addresses and domains: on person level a Block list blocks by email address (a LinkedIn URL alone doesn't block). See "[Block List and the do-not-contact check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/do-not-contact-and-block-list)" for how that enforcement works in detail. ### For advanced users Matching runs off an index of exact keys (domain, email, LinkedIn URL) built from the reference list's own rows. It's rebuilt automatically after the list changes, at most once a minute (so a list that's being enriched or refreshed isn't rebuilt on every write) — there's nothing to refresh by hand. Rows marked **ignored** in the reference list are left out of the index. A record checked by badge or condition is matched against every reference list in the workspace in one batched lookup, so adding more reference lists doesn't add a request per badge. **Related topics:** list-triggers · pipeline-data-check · do-not-contact-and-block-list · list-settings · segments-and-tags · roles-and-permissions. ### FAQ #### What is a reference list in ListPlus? Any list you turn into a lookup list for your other lists and pipelines — typically your existing customers, competitors, partners, or a block list. Once set up, pipelines and triggers can check "is this contact in it?", and a small badge shows it on that contact everywhere you look them up. #### How do I turn a list into a reference list? Open the list → Set up (the two sliders next to the list's name) → Reference list, turn on Use as reference list, pick what it holds (Existing customers, Competitors, Partners, Block, or Something else) and how it matches (Company or Person), then click Save. #### Who can set up or change a reference list? Only the workspace owner and admins — it changes what every pipeline and trigger in the workspace can see. Other members can see the setting but can't turn it on, off, or change it. #### How does company-level matching work? A contact counts as "in the list" when their company domain, website, or work email's domain matches a domain in the reference list — a colleague at the same company counts too, and a listed domain also covers its subdomains. Personal email addresses (Gmail, Yahoo, etc.) never count on company level. #### How does person-level matching work? Only the exact same person counts: the same email address, or the same LinkedIn profile URL. Two different people at the same company do not match each other on person level. #### Where do I see that a contact is a customer, competitor, or partner? As a small colored badge on hits in AI Research, on results and candidates in Person Search and the Inbox, in the contact detail panel, and in the Watchlist page's table. It doesn't show inside a list's own grid or on Segment Search results. #### Can I use a reference list in a pipeline's data check or a list trigger? Yes — reference lists appear as their own condition group, with the operators "is in it" and "is not in it". A common use: block sending to a pipeline when the company "is in it" for your Existing customers reference list. #### Why does the trigger preview say reference lists are left out? The live count you see while editing a trigger's conditions skips reference-list conditions to keep the preview fast; the trigger itself still checks them correctly every time it actually runs, with no gap in enforcement. #### What does setting a reference list's role to "Block" do? It behaves exactly like your workspace's Block list: pipelines never hand a matching contact to an external target (CRM, Slack, a webhook), and the "On the block list" check flags it in a list. You don't need to copy those contacts into the Block list separately. #### Can I have more than one reference list, or more than one of the same role? Yes — any number of lists in the workspace can be reference lists, including several with the same role (e.g. two separate "Competitors" lists), and each shows up as its own entry wherever reference lists are used. #### Can I still edit a reference list, or why is it read-only? A reference list is an ordinary list you can edit, enrich and import into — unless it also refreshes automatically from its source (HubSpot, Salesforce …): then its record data is read-only, because the next refresh would overwrite edits made here, so change records in the source. Statuses, tags and hiding rows still work, and setting Refresh automatically to Off or turning off Use as reference list under Set up unlocks it. #### Which plan do I need for reference lists? Premium. Below Premium the Reference list section of Set up shows the feature greyed out with a lock and a See plans button, and condition pickers show a greyed entry "Existing customers, competitors … — with Premium". #### Do my reference lists stop working if we downgrade from Premium? No — existing reference lists keep working after a downgrade: badges, pipeline and trigger conditions and the Block role stay active, so a rule like "not an existing customer" never silently lets customers through. You can still switch them off or change their settings; only turning a new list into a reference list needs Premium again. #### Why would I use a reference list instead of the Block list for competitors? The Block list only holds plain emails and domains you paste in by hand. A reference list is a full list — you can enrich it, import it from a CRM, add notes in other columns, and set its role to Customer, Partner or Competitor (not just Block), and it also works with "is in it" / "is not in it" conditions in pipelines and triggers. #### I changed my reference list — why don't badges and conditions show it yet? A change to a reference list (rows added, edited or ignored, or a new setting) can take up to about a minute to show in badges and in pipeline and trigger conditions. If a badge already on screen still looks old after that, reload the page. #### Why doesn't a LinkedIn or Facebook URL match on company level? Platform addresses never count as a company: a website or domain on linkedin.com, facebook.com, x.com, twitter.com, instagram.com, xing.com, youtube.com, google.com, github.com or medium.com is ignored. Otherwise a LinkedIn company page in a website column would make every LinkedIn link match; add the company's own domain instead. --- ## The Dashboard panel: charts that filter your list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/dashboard-charts Last updated: 2026-09-25 **Dashboard** is one of the panels in a list's **More** menu (list header → More → Dashboard). It automatically turns your columns into charts — pie charts for columns with a handful of distinct values, bar charts for columns with more, plus a couple of charts that compare two columns and a short list of insights, like which columns have the most missing data. ### Filtering by clicking a chart Click a bar or a pie segment to filter the grid down to just the rows with that value — the panel header then shows which filter is active, and a **Clear Filter** button appears to remove it. Only one chart filter can be active at a time; clicking a different segment replaces the previous filter rather than adding to it. Closing the Dashboard panel clears the filter automatically. ### Good to know - Charts are generated from the data currently in the grid and rebuild each time you open the panel — there's nothing to configure or save. - It's entirely computed in your browser: no credits are spent and no data leaves ListPlus to build these charts. - With very little data, or columns that are mostly empty or all-unique (like a raw notes field), ListPlus may not have enough to chart and shows an empty state instead. ### FAQ #### What is the Dashboard panel? It's a panel that automatically charts the values in your list's columns — pie or bar charts for how values are distributed, plus a couple of charts comparing two columns and a short list of data-quality insights. Open it from the list header's More menu. #### How do I filter my list using a chart? Click a bar or a pie slice — the grid narrows to the rows matching that value, and the panel header shows the active filter with a Clear Filter button to remove it. #### Can I have more than one chart filter active at once? No, only one at a time. Clicking a different bar or segment replaces the current filter instead of adding to it; use the column funnel filters (see "[Search, filter, sort, and find & replace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/search-filter-sort-replace)") if you need to combine several conditions. #### Does using the Dashboard cost credits? No. All charts and insights are computed in your browser from the data already in the grid — nothing is sent to an AI model or a data provider, so it's completely free. #### Why don't I see any charts for a column? ListPlus needs enough structure to chart a column — a free-text field where almost every value is different, or a column that's mostly empty, usually won't produce a useful chart and is skipped. #### Do the charts update automatically as I edit the list? Charts are generated fresh each time you open the Dashboard panel, so recent edits are included when you open it — they don't update live while it's already open and you're editing elsewhere. --- ## Commands (⌘K) and keyboard shortcuts Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/command-palette-and-shortcuts Last updated: 2026-10-15 Press **⌘K** (Mac) or **Ctrl+K** (Windows/Linux) anywhere in the app to open **Commands** — a searchable list of every action and page ListPlus offers. Type to filter, use the arrow keys and Enter to run something, or Escape to close it. ### What's in it Commands groups everything by category: Navigation (Go to Home, Lists, Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research, Inbox, Watchlist, Pipelines, Open settings, Invite members, Connected accounts, Plan & billing, Credits & usage, Open block list, and a specific list by name), File, Edit, View (open a panel), Enrichment (every single lookup and AI analysis, plus the ready-made wizards), Analytics, Export, Sublists and Advanced. Some entries only appear once a list is open, and enrichment actions only appear once you have edit access. At the top, a **Recent** section shows up to 5 of your last-used commands, remembered per browser. ### Jump to a specific list **Go to List** opens a search box over every list you have, sorted by most recently changed — type to filter and press **Enter** to open the top match. It's the fastest way to reach a specific list from anywhere; the same lists are also one click away in the Lists view's tree, and Home has a **Search lists...** field. Almost everything else in Commands also has a button or menu entry somewhere in the app; Commands is a faster way to reach it, not the only way. ### Shortcuts that work without opening Commands first Most rows in Commands show a keyboard shortcut next to the label, but only a few of those are wired up as real, always-on shortcuts: - **⌘K / Ctrl+K** — open or close Commands, from any page. - **⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L** — **Show/hide sidebar**: in the Lists view it collapses or expands the project/list tree; on Flows (all its pages, including the Inbox and Pipelines), the Watchlist, Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research it shows or hides their left column; on any other page it opens the Lists view. Inside a list, the tree starts collapsed so the grid gets the full width; the left columns of the other pages start open. Clicking the left-rail item of the page you're already on also reopens its collapsed column (not on phones). - **⌘⇧D / Ctrl+Shift+D** — inside a list, open the **Analyze** dialog (the Commands entry **Data Quality – Checks & Selections**) on its overview. - **⌘F / Ctrl+F** — inside a list, jump to and select the **Find & evaluate** field in the header (it does not open Find & Replace). See "[Search, filter, sort, and find & replace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/search-filter-sort-replace)" for the swap icon and Commands entry that open Find & Replace itself. Other rows, such as **Save** shown with a ⌘S label, describe what the entry does but aren't bound as a live keyboard shortcut — pressing the key combination does nothing in ListPlus; click the entry in Commands instead. (**Save** only writes pending edits right away — lists save automatically, so there is normally nothing to do.) ### Editing shortcuts Undo (⌘Z / Ctrl+Z), redo (⇧⌘Z / Ctrl+Y), copy/paste and the fill handle are documented in "[Editing cells, undo/redo, and adding rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/editing-and-undo)" — they work directly in the grid and don't need Commands at all. ### FAQ #### How do I open Commands? Press ⌘K on a Mac or Ctrl+K on Windows/Linux — it works from any page in the app, not just inside a list. Press Escape, or click outside the box, to close it. #### What can I do from Commands? Jump to any page or list, open a panel, run any enrichment lookup or AI analysis, or trigger export and sublist actions — Commands lists everything currently available to you, grouped by category, and lets you search by typing. #### What does the Recent section show? Up to 5 of the commands you ran most recently, remembered in your browser so they're still there next time you open Commands. It's per browser, not synced across devices. #### Is there anything I can only do from Commands? No — almost every command also has a button or menu entry elsewhere in the app. Go to List is simply the fastest way to open a specific list by name (type, then Enter opens the top match); the same lists are one click away in the Lists view's tree, and Home has a Search lists field. #### Which keyboard shortcuts actually work without opening Commands? ⌘K / Ctrl+K opens Commands, ⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L shows or hides the left column of the current page (the list tree in the Lists view, the Flows column on Flows pages; opening the Lists view from pages without one), ⌘⇧D / Ctrl+Shift+D opens the Analyze dialog on its overview inside a list, and ⌘F / Ctrl+F jumps to the Find & evaluate field. Shortcut labels shown next to other rows in Commands, like ⌘S for Save, are not live keyboard shortcuts. #### Does ⌘F open Find & Replace? No — ⌘F / Ctrl+F jumps to and selects the Find & evaluate field in the list header. To open Find & Replace itself, click the swap icon at the right end of that field, or choose Find & Replace in Commands; see "[Search, filter, sort, and find & replace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/search-filter-sort-replace)" for the full flow. --- ## Section: AI on your list ## AI commands in the Prompts panel Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-on-your-list/ai-commands Last updated: 2026-10-17 The Prompts panel lets you edit your list or ask questions about it by typing plain instructions instead of clicking through menus. Open it via **More → Prompts** in the list header, then type into the **Ask about your data...** field. ### What you can do with it **Edit your data by instruction.** Select rows by a condition ("select personal emails"), tag rows ("mark decision makers as key-contact"), set a status the list has ("set status of selected to Qualified"), hand rows to a pipeline ("send selected to HubSpot"), update or clean values ("trim whitespace in company names"), unify inconsistent spellings ("normalize country names" — this one shows you the proposed groupings to approve before applying them), or fill columns from existing enrichment data ("use the industry field from enrichment data"). It also understands enrichment requests ("find emails for selected", "enrich company data from domains"): it starts the same job as the selection bar's Enrich, which picks each record's cheapest route and fills empty cells as results arrive. Requests to re-enrich filled cells are declined — see "[Which Enrich button do I use?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/which-enrich-button)" Values a command writes into cells are **suggestions** at first: the cells are highlighted and the list header shows **N suggestions** with **Apply · N** and **Discard**. Nothing is written to the list until you click Apply (see "[Saving is automatic: undo and AI suggestions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/saving-is-manual)"). Commands that hand records to a pipeline, set a status, mark rows ignored or start an enrichment first show a dialog **Run this action?** — nothing happens until you confirm it. **Ask questions about your data.** Ask things like "how many contacts are from Germany," "what countries are there," or "show statistics by country," and it answers directly rather than changing anything in the grid. For a longer list of example sentences in English and German, see "[AI command examples (English & German)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-on-your-list/ai-command-examples)." ### What it sees The Prompts panel sends your instruction, your column names and types, your total row count, the names of the list's statuses and of your pipelines, and — only for commands that need to judge actual values — the distinct values of the relevant column(s). Your individual cell values aren't sent just to understand a request. See "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)" for the full breakdown. ### Cost per reply Every AI command is billed by usage, not a flat per-command price — it depends on how much the request needed to process. Each reply ends with a small note showing the exact number of credits it used, so you always see the cost after the fact. Typical requests cost a small fraction of a credit (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for how usage-based AI pricing compares to other actions); a request that also triggers a paid enrichment adds that enrichment's own credits on top. In a workspace, the credits come from the workspace owner's balance (see "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)"). If the balance is too low for the request, you'll see an insufficient-credits message before anything runs. ### Which AI model answers? A model chosen by ListPlus answers every request; you can't pick or change it, and there's no model selector. The small note under each reply shows which model handled it and the credits it used. ListPlus may change the model over time, and how you use the panel stays the same. ### Limits - One list at a time: a command only ever reads or changes the list you're currently in, never your other lists. - Commands work on your list as it is in the grid right now, including open suggestions, and only on the rows your current filter or sublist shows. Clear the filter first if you want a command to cover the whole list. - There's a fair-use cap of 1,000 AI requests per day and 20,000 per month. It counts per person, not per workspace, so colleagues in the same workspace don't use up your requests; hitting it shows a "Limit reached" message. - You can type in English, German or other languages — the Prompts panel understands the request either way. - Add "for selected" to a command to target only the rows you've selected in the grid, and combine multiple conditions with "and" or "or" (for example "select where country = France and city = Paris"). **Related topics:** ai-command-examples · what-the-ai-sees · which-enrich-button · price-list · saving-is-manual. ### FAQ #### What is the Prompts panel and how do I open it? It's a field where you type plain instructions or questions about your list instead of clicking through menus. Open it with **More → Prompts** in the list header, then type into **Ask about your data...**. #### Can I edit my list by just typing what I want? Yes — requests like "select personal emails," "tag decision makers as key-contact," or "normalize country names" are understood as edit instructions and applied to matching rows, the same way clicking through the grid's own menus would. Commands that hand records to a pipeline, set a status, mark rows ignored or start an enrichment first ask "Run this action?" and do nothing until you confirm. #### Can I ask questions instead of giving instructions? Yes — questions like "how many contacts are from Germany" or "what countries are there" are answered directly without changing your data. #### Where do I see how much an AI command cost? In a small note right after the reply itself — every AI command is billed by usage, not a fixed price, so the exact number of credits only appears once it's done. See "How much does an AI command cost?" in the price list for typical amounts. #### Which AI model does ListPlus use, and can I choose it? A model chosen by ListPlus; you can't pick it. The note under each reply names the model that answered and the credits used, but there's no setting to switch models. #### Does the Prompts panel see my other lists? No. Every request is scoped to the one list you're working in. #### Are changes from a Prompts command written to my list right away? No — cell values a command changes are shown as highlighted suggestions, and the list header shows "N suggestions" with Apply · N and Discard. Apply writes them to the list (one undo step with ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z); Discard puts the cells back to their previous values. #### Does a command cover rows hidden by my filter? No. Commands act only on the rows currently shown in the grid, so an active filter or sublist narrows what they touch — clear the filter to include the whole list. Open AI suggestions are included: a command sees the grid as it is now. #### Is there a limit to how many AI commands I can send? Yes, a fair-use cap of 1,000 AI requests per day and 20,000 per month, counted per person rather than per workspace, so colleagues don't use up your share. If you ever hit it, wait a while or contact support@listplus.ai. The credits for each request still come from the workspace owner's balance. #### Can I ask the AI to enrich my list? Yes. Requests like "find emails for selected" or "enrich company data from domains" start the same job as the selection bar's Enrich: each record gets its cheapest route, empty cells fill as results arrive, and lookups charge only on a hit. You confirm "Run this action?" first, and the AI usage fee comes on top. #### Why does the AI refuse to re-enrich cells that already have values? Enrichment fills empty cells only, so the AI answers "re-enriching filled cells is not available". Clear the cells you want looked up again and ask once more; only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu re-analyses filled cells. #### What is the "Large operation" question before an AI command? It is a confirmation that appears when a command would process more than 500 records ("This will process N records"). Click Proceed to run it or Cancel to stop. #### Where do I see the result of an enrichment I asked the AI for? In the task indicator at the top of the screen, and in the grid as the cells fill. The chat only confirms the start ("Enrichment started for N records — the cells fill as results arrive"). #### Will the AI look up a company from a Gmail address? No. Free-mail domains such as gmail.com are never sent to a company lookup, because they would only return the mail provider, not the person's employer. --- ## AI command examples (English & German) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-on-your-list/ai-command-examples Last updated: 2026-10-05 These are real, working examples for the Prompts panel (**More → Prompts** in the list header, then type into **Ask about your data...**) — see "[AI commands in the Prompts panel](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-on-your-list/ai-commands)" for how the panel works and what it costs. ListPlus understands both English and German phrasings; a German column name works the same way as an English one. ### Selecting rows by email quality | English | German | | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------- | | select valid emails | wähle gültige E-Mails | | select invalid emails | wähle ungültige E-Mails | | find disposable emails | finde Wegwerf-E-Mails | | select personal emails | wähle persönliche E-Mails | | select non-personal emails (role-based, like info@ or admin@) | wähle nicht-persönliche E-Mails | ### Selecting by a value or a concept | English | German | | ---------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | | select all from Germany | wähle alle aus Deutschland | | select where country = France and city = Paris | wähle wo Land = Frankreich und Stadt = Paris | | select decision makers | wähle Entscheider | | select technical roles | wähle technische Rollen | "Select decision makers" is understood as a concept, not a literal text match — it also catches "Geschäftsführer" or "Directeur" in a job title column, not just the English word. ### Finding duplicates | English | German | | -------------------------------- | ---------------------------------- | | find fuzzy duplicates in name | finde unscharfe Duplikate im Namen | | find duplicate phone numbers | finde doppelte Telefonnummern | | find names similar to John Smith | finde Namen ähnlich wie John Smith | ### Tagging | English | German | | ----------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | | mark decision makers as key-contact | markiere Entscheider als key-contact | | tag invalid emails as needs-review | markiere ungültige E-Mails als needs-review | | tag selected as Priority | markiere die Auswahl als Priority | The AI can't add rows to a sublist or remove them — a sublist is a saved rule you create under **More → Sublists**. If you type "add selected to sublist 'Priority'", the AI tags those rows "Priority" instead. A sublist with the rule **Tags is one of** "Priority" then shows them. ### Setting a status These work when the list has statuses (here: one called "Qualified"). The AI only uses statuses the list already has. | English | German | | ----------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | set status of selected to Qualified | setze den Status der Auswahl auf Qualified | | mark everyone from Germany as Qualified | setze den Status aller aus Deutschland auf Qualified | | remove the status of the selected records | entferne den Status der ausgewählten Datensätze | ### Handing records to a pipeline These work when your workspace has pipelines (here: one called "HubSpot"). The pipeline's data check and release mode apply as usual. | English | German | | --------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | send selected to HubSpot | übergib die Auswahl an HubSpot | | hand everyone from Germany to HubSpot | schicke alle aus Deutschland an HubSpot | | push decision makers to the pipeline HubSpot | übergib Entscheider an die Pipeline HubSpot | ### Cleaning and normalizing values | English | German | | ----------------------- | --------------------------------- | | normalize country names | normalisiere Ländernamen | | unify status values | vereinheitliche die Status-Werte | | clean up city spellings | bereinige Schreibweisen der Stadt | Normalizing shows you the proposed groupings first — for example every spelling of "USA" it found — and only applies them once you approve, so it never silently rewrites a column. ### Asking questions | English | German | | ----------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------- | | how many contacts are from Germany? | wie viele Kontakte sind aus Deutschland? | | what countries are there? | welche Länder gibt es? | | show statistics by country | zeige Statistik nach Land | These are read-only — they answer in the chat without changing any row. **Related topics:** ai-commands · what-the-ai-sees · segments-and-tags. ### FAQ #### What are some example AI commands I can type to select rows? "Select personal emails," "select invalid emails," "select all from Germany," and "select decision makers" all work — the last one matches the concept of a decision-maker job title, not just the literal words. #### How do I select emails by quality with an AI command? Type "select valid emails," "select invalid emails," "find disposable emails," "select personal emails," or "select non-personal emails" — each maps to one of ListPlus's built-in email checks. #### How do I find duplicate rows with an AI command? Try "find fuzzy duplicates in name" for similar spellings, "find duplicate phone numbers" for matching numbers regardless of formatting, or "find names similar to John Smith" to match against one specific name. #### How do I tag rows with an AI command, and can it add rows to a sublist? "Mark decision makers as key-contact" or "tag selected as Priority" tags the matching or selected rows. The AI can't add rows to a sublist or remove them: a sublist is a saved rule. "Add selected to sublist 'Priority'" is turned into the tag "Priority"; create a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of Priority" under More → Sublists to see those rows as a group. #### Can I send records to a pipeline with an AI command? Yes: "send selected to HubSpot" or "hand everyone from Germany to the pipeline Outreach" adds those rows to that pipeline, just like Add to → pipeline, and its data check and release mode apply. A dialog "Run this action?" appears first and nothing happens until you confirm; the AI only uses pipelines that exist and never hands over the whole list unless you say "all". #### Can I set a record's status with an AI command? Yes: "set status of selected to Qualified" or "mark everyone from Germany as Qualified" sets one of the list's statuses after you confirm the "Run this action?" dialog, and "remove the status of the selected records" clears it. The AI only uses statuses the list already has and names them if yours doesn't exist. A name that isn't a status ("mark selected as VIP") becomes a tag, and "tag selected as Qualified" always tags. #### How do I clean up inconsistent values with an AI command? "Normalize country names" or "unify status values" groups the different spellings it finds in that column and shows you the proposed groups to approve before anything changes. #### Can I ask questions about my list instead of giving a command? Yes — "how many contacts are from Germany?", "what countries are there?" and "show statistics by country" are answered directly in the chat, without changing your data. #### Do these commands work in German too? Yes — ListPlus understands German phrasings like "wähle Entscheider" or "normalisiere Ländernamen" the same way it understands the English versions in this article. #### Where do I type these commands? In the Prompts panel: open **More → Prompts** in the list header and type into the **Ask about your data...** field. --- ## AI Analysis: gender, name split, seniority, industry, address Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-on-your-list/ai-derivations Last updated: 2026-10-17 **AI Analysis** is a group of five AI-powered clean-ups in a list's **Enrich** panel that read a column you already have and fill in a new one, using AI inference instead of a data lookup — there's no external provider involved. ### The five analyses - **Detect Gender** — reads the first name column and adds a gender value plus a matching salutation (Mr./Ms./Dear). - **Split Full Names** — splits a full-name column into separate First Name and Last Name columns. - **Analyze Job Titles** — reads job titles and adds a seniority level (C-Level, VP, Director, Manager, Senior/Individual Contributor). - **Classify Industries** — standardizes free-text industry values into a consistent set of names (for example "tech consulting" → "IT & Consulting"). - **Enrich Addresses** — fills in missing city, state, zip and country from whatever address fragments you already have, and normalizes country names. All five need a source column that ListPlus can detect automatically (like a first-name or job-title column) — if none exists, that analysis doesn't appear. **Analyze All** runs every applicable analysis in one go — depending on your columns, that can include steps beyond these five, such as buying roles, lead scoring and outreach briefs, all billed by usage. If many rows lack company data, it first offers **Enrich first, then analyze**, which spends enrichment credits (the dialog shows the estimate). ### AI Analysis is billed by usage — it is not free Every one of the five analyses above calls ListPlus's AI model and is billed the same way as AI commands: by actual usage, shown after it runs, not a fixed price per row. The Enrich panel shows no price up front for these items. Running an analysis is still efficient — ListPlus analyzes each **unique value** in the column once and applies the result to every row that shares it, so a column with many repeated job titles or first names costs far less than analyzing every row separately. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact billing model and how it compares to AI commands and AI columns. The **only free item** in the Enrich panel's AI and local groups is **Clean Phone Numbers**, in the separate "Local (Free & Instant)" group — it reformats phone numbers in your browser with no AI call and no credits. See "[Phone number checks and cleanup](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/phone-numbers)" for that one. ### Where to run it Open the **Enrich** panel (the Enrich button in the list header), select rows first if you only want to analyze some of them, then open the **AI Analysis** group and click one analysis or **Analyze All**. Your own edits are written automatically before the run; the Enrich panel only blocks it while AI suggestions are open (Apply or Discard them first) or while your last edits could not be saved yet (the header shows **Not saved** — wait until it reads Saved). Results are stored with each row, and ListPlus then asks "Fill empty cells with enrichment data?" — the one enrichment that still asks (see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)"). If some AI batches fail, a message says how many values were not analysed; run it again for those. Gender is also a field in the selection bar's Enrich and in the AI chat; there it runs on the server, fills empty cells by itself and is billed by AI usage on top of the shown "at most". ### FAQ #### What does AI Analysis do? It's a group of five AI-powered clean-ups in a list's Enrich panel: detecting gender and a salutation from first names, splitting full names into first and last name, classifying job titles by seniority, standardizing industry values, and filling in missing address details. Each reads a column you already have and adds new values with AI, without calling an external data provider. #### Is AI Analysis free? No. All five analyses (gender, name split, seniority, industry, address) are billed by usage, the same way as AI commands — the Enrich panel doesn't show a price beforehand, and the amount is shown after the run. The only free option in that part of the Enrich panel is Clean Phone Numbers, which runs locally with no AI call. #### How is gender detected and where does the salutation come from? ListPlus reads the first name column and returns a gender value plus a matching salutation (Mr./Ms./Dear), taking cultural context into account where a name's gender differs by country. It adds these as new columns rather than overwriting your first name column. #### How does name splitting work? Select a full-name column and run Split Full Names — ListPlus adds separate First Name and Last Name columns, handling common naming conventions across regions, prefixes like Dr. or Prof., and suffixes like Jr. or III. #### What does "seniority" mean for job titles? Analyze Job Titles reads your job title column and classifies each one into a level such as C-Level, VP, Director, Manager, or Senior/Individual Contributor, so you can prioritize or filter outreach by decision-making authority. #### What does industry standardization change? Classify Industries normalizes inconsistent, free-text industry values into a consistent set of names — for example "tech consulting" becomes "IT & Consulting" — which makes filtering and segmenting by industry more reliable. #### Does AI Analysis cost less if many rows share the same value? Yes. ListPlus analyzes each unique value in the source column once — for example one "CEO" is analyzed once even if 500 rows have that title — and applies the result to every row that shares it, rather than billing per row. #### Can I run just one analysis instead of all five? Yes. Each of the five appears as its own item in the Enrich panel's AI Analysis group; click just the one you need, or use Analyze All to run every applicable analysis — including any beyond these five that your columns support — in one go. #### What does Analyze All do beyond the five listed analyses? Depending on your columns, Analyze All can also run steps like classifying buying roles, scoring leads and generating outreach briefs, all billed by usage the same way. If many rows are missing company data, it may first offer "Enrich first, then analyze," which spends enrichment credits — the dialog shows the estimate before you confirm. #### Can I detect gender from the selection bar or the AI chat? Yes. Gender is a field in the selection bar's Enrich and in the AI chat; there it runs on the server, fills empty cells by itself and is billed by AI usage on top of the "at most" shown in the dialog (which then says "plus AI tokens"). --- ## Section: Inbox & Watchlist ## The Inbox Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox Last updated: 2026-10-15 The **Inbox** (Eingang) is the place for everything that could become a contact: a meeting invitation, an email signature, a note from a call, a participant list, a pasted table, or an email you forward to it. You drop it in first and sort it out later. Nothing is parsed or converted until you ask for it. The Inbox belongs to the **workspace**: every member sees the same entries, whoever added them, and can recognise and save the people in them. If you work in several workspaces, each has its own Inbox (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). ### Adding something by hand: Add content The Inbox shows your entries. To put something in yourself, click **Add content** at the top right (on a phone: in the list of entries). With an empty Inbox the input is what you see first. #### The input The input is only for adding — nothing else is on the page ("Add information."). **Cancel** takes you back to the entries without adding anything; what you typed stays in the field. - **Type or paste text.** Write or paste into the large field and click **Add to inbox** (or press ⌘/Ctrl + Enter). Calendar invitations (.ics), vCards, CSV or JSON snippets and plain notes all work. The microphone button lets you **dictate** a note instead of typing it. - **Add a file.** Drop a file onto the page or click **Choose file**: PDF, CSV/Excel, vCard, calendar and e-mail files (text PDFs up to 30 MB — the text is read in your browser; only the text is uploaded). Scanned PDFs and Excel files aren't read as inbox entries — an Excel file goes straight to the list-import wizard instead (see below). - **Scan business card.** Click **Scan business card** under the file area (on a phone it opens the camera) or drop a photo of a card onto the page. AI reads the card and adds its details as an entry; the photo itself is not stored. Reading the card uses AI and costs credits by usage; recognizing the contact from the entry afterwards is the usual separate step. Other photos are not read. - After adding you are **back at the entries with the new one open**, so you can recognize its contacts right away. - You can also **drop a file anywhere on the Inbox** without opening the input first. - **"Try it:"** shows chips for fictional examples (email signature, call note, calendar invite, attendee list, LinkedIn profile text, business card). A chip only fills the field; nothing is added or charged until you click **Add to inbox**. Adding stores the entry; it does not recognize contacts yet. You do that in Entries with **Recognize contacts**, when you have time. #### Entries This is the Inbox itself: the entries with the tabs **All**, **To review** and **Done** on the left, and the selected entry on the right. The ways into the Inbox have lines of their own in the left column, beneath **Inbox** in the **Comes in** group (click **Comes in** to unfold it): **App events**, **Email forwarding** and **Webhook & automations**. A pause sign means the way in is paused, an empty circle that it is not set up yet; one that runs carries no mark. Clicking a line opens that way in as a page of its own, over the whole width; **Back to entries** or **Inbox** in the column leads back. The **⋮** at the end of the **Email forwarding** and **Webhook & automations** lines renews the address or closes the intake without opening the page — the two share one address, so either line acts on both. With an empty inbox you see all of them on one page ("Connect your inbox."): the app events and two cards — **Email forwarding** (**Create address**) and **Webhook & automations** (**Create webhook**) — each with **Renew address** and **Close intake** once set up, plus a **Guides** section with copyable snippets for n8n, Zapier and Shortcuts, and what was received recently. Above the two cards, a band explains that data for one particular list is connected to that list directly: open the list → **Set up** (see below). Setting this up is optional — adding by hand always works. - **Forward an email.** Forward or send a mail to your address ending `@in.listplus.ai` and the body becomes one entry in the workspace's Inbox; the first 10 attachments are read, and text PDFs, vCards, calendar invites (.ics), CSV, JSON and plain-text files each become their own entry. Excel files, images and scanned PDFs are skipped. Keep attachments under about **3 MB in total** — larger emails may not arrive. Spam and duplicate deliveries are dropped, and ListPlus never replies. Your own account address and the address you forward from are never suggested as a contact. The address is personal **per workspace**: each member has their own, and in another workspace you get a different one. Contacts from the Inbox never go into a list by themselves: you recognize them, check them and add them. For records that should land in a list automatically, give that list its own webhook or form (see below). Each entry holds up to 256 KB and a workspace's Inbox keeps up to 500 live entries; older ones expire on their own. ### App events: straight from a tool you use In the Flows column, under **Comes in**, click **App events** (with an empty Inbox it is also the first card of the Inbox page): choose an app and an event — a message in a Slack channel, a new Gmail message with a label — and each one arrives as an Inbox entry, without an address to set up. See "[App events: let a tool you use fill a list or the Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/app-events)". ### Lists with their own way in Records that belong in one particular list — form answers, bookings, leads reported in Slack — don't need to pass through the Inbox: connect the app to the list itself (in the list: **Set up** → **App events**), or, for automations you build yourself with Zapier, Make or n8n, give the list its own webhook and they land in its columns directly. A list's own webhook, form or app event is set up in the list: open it → **Set up** (see "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)"). The Inbox is a page of **Flows**: the column at the left is the same as on the Flows overview and the Pipelines page. **To do** at the top collects what waits for you. Under **Comes in** it shows **Inbox** (everything), its ways in and **AI research** (new hits of your research runs); under **Lists with their own way in** every list with a webhook or an app event of its own, with the number of records waiting for you. Click a list to see only its entries and, on the right, its app events and its webhook page with the URL, setup guides, mapping and recent calls; **Open list** jumps to the list. On a phone these lines sit above the tabs, under the heading **Lists**. A list webhook writes every record into its list by default. Some records are **held back** for you instead: contacts on your workspace's Block list, records the list can't take (for example because the plan's record limit is reached), and — only if you ticked a **Hold back** option on that webhook — invalid, disposable and test addresses or spam and test entries. They appear as an entry named after the list, marked "n to review", in **All** and **To review**. Open it, read the **Reason** per record and click **Add anyway** or **Discard**; the list is already set. These entries need no recognition and cost nothing. Everything unstructured — forwarded emails, PDFs, pasted notes — still belongs in the Inbox itself. ### Big tables go to the list import, not recognition If an entry — pasted text, something sent from a tool, or an email attachment — is a table (more than 10 rows and at least 3 columns of CSV, TSV or JSON), ListPlus shows "Table with N rows and M columns detected" and offers **Import as list**, which opens the New List wizard with the table pre-loaded (preview, column mapping, every row) instead of contact recognition. Tables of 50 rows or fewer can still be recognised here with **Recognize here anyway**. After an import finishes, the entry is marked **Done** and shows "This table was imported as a list" with a button to open that list. Dropping or attaching an Excel file, or a CSV/TSV/JSON file that is such a table, directly in the Inbox skips the entry step and opens the import wizard right away. ### Recognising contacts Open an entry and click **Recognize contacts**. ListPlus splits it into people and companies — attendees of an invitation, rows of a table, names in a note — and for each one shows what it understood, the evidence from your text, and, for entries with up to 5 people, matching LinkedIn profiles found on the web (for bigger entries, click **Find person** on a row, free). For material from a document (a brochure, a forwarded newsletter), the result also opens with a header naming the organisation the material is from or about and a one-sentence summary, when that's clear from the text. A row marked **Please check** might be a placeholder or test entry, or has only an abbreviated first name; entries with such rows collect under the **To review** tab. A person you already saved shows **Already saved** and is linked, not duplicated. You are never offered as a contact — your account email address and, for forwarded mail, the sender's address are excluded automatically. Every recognition run costs **a base amount of credits** — this applies to every kind of entry, including calendar invites, vCards and tables. Long free text (an email body, a pasted note) also adds the actual AI cost at double the standard rate. The **Recognize contacts** button shows the price before you click: an exact number for invitations, vCards and tables, or a "~" upper bound for free text (the real charge is usually lower than that bound). All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". In a workspace, the credits come from the owner's balance. If the balance is too low for that estimate, the button is replaced by **Top up credits**. Recognition never looks up emails or phone numbers itself — that happens later, from a list or from the Watchlist. If you edit an entry's text or delete it while a recognition run is still in flight, any credits spent on that run are refunded automatically. **Recognize again** re-runs the same process — you're charged again each time — and keeps your earlier decisions on any candidate whose text didn't change. ### What to do with a recognised person Each person is a row with a checkbox you tick. You can correct the fields directly, or open the profile to load the LinkedIn and company basics (which cost credits). If several LinkedIn profiles matched, the row stays locked until you pick the right one under "Is this the right person?" (or **None of these**). Then, for the ticked rows: - **Add to list** (the primary action, shown in the button when rows are ticked): sends the people into an existing or new list. Rows already sent show **In list · name**. - **Save**: puts the people on the Watchlist without spending anything, so you can decide on a list later. Opening a person's profile also saves them automatically. A person already saved stays ticked and selectable — you can still send them to a list from here — but Save itself only acts on people you haven't saved yet; someone recognised by the same email or LinkedIn profile as an existing saved contact is linked to it, not saved twice. - **Don't save** hides a wrong match. ### Done and expiry Entries whose people are all handled (saved, listed or dismissed) move to the **Done** tab automatically; you can also click **Done** on an entry by hand, or **Reopen** to bring it back to "All". Marking an entry Done only hides it from "All" — it doesn't delete it or reset its countdown. Every raw entry is deleted automatically **14 days** after it arrives, and each entry shows its own days-left count (or "Expires today"); the **Expiring soon** filter lists the ones with under 3 days left. People you saved or added to a list from an entry are not affected. ### FAQ #### What is the Inbox for? For everything that could become a contact but is not one yet: meeting invitations, email signatures, call notes, participant lists, pasted tables, or emails you forward to it. You drop it into the Inbox first and recognise the people later, when you have time. Nothing is converted automatically. #### How do I get something into the Inbox? Click Add content at the top right of the Inbox, type or paste your text and click Add to inbox, or drop a text PDF, CSV, JSON or similar file onto the page; the new entry opens. To receive things automatically, click Email forwarding or Webhook & automations beneath Inbox in the left column and set it up there (n8n, Zapier, Make, an iPhone Shortcut or a script). Images, scanned PDFs and Excel files aren't read as inbox entries — Excel goes straight to the list import instead. #### How does "Recognize contacts" work and what does it cost? It splits the entry into people and companies, shows what it understood with the evidence from your text, and finds matching LinkedIn profiles on the web. Every run costs a base amount of credits — including invitations, vCards and tables — plus, for long free text, the actual AI cost at double rate (shown as an upper bound on the button before you click). If your balance is too low, a Top up credits button appears instead of letting the click fail, and any charge is refunded automatically if you edit or delete the entry while a run is still in progress. #### What do Verified, Plausible and Review mean? In the current app these words aren't shown as labels. A recognised person who needs a look is marked Please check — it might be a placeholder or test entry, or the first name is only abbreviated — and such entries collect under the To review tab. Someone you already saved shows Already saved and is linked instead of saved twice. #### Why can't I tick a person in the Inbox? Because several LinkedIn profiles matched and ListPlus doesn't want to guess. Choose the right one under "Is this the right person?", or None of these, and the checkbox unlocks. #### What is the difference between Save and Add to list? Add to list sends the ticked people straight into an existing or new list; Save puts them on the Watchlist (formerly Saved) without spending anything, so they wait there until you decide on a list. A person you already saved stays selectable so you can still add them to a list later, but Save itself only applies to people who aren't saved yet. Both actions are free. #### How long do entries stay in the Inbox? Raw entries are deleted automatically 14 days after they arrive; each entry shows its own days-left count. People you saved or added to a list from an entry are unaffected — only the raw entry disappears. Marking an entry Done just moves it out of the "All" tab; it still expires on the same 14-day schedule, and Reopen brings it back. #### What happens when I paste or forward a big table? Anything with more than 10 rows and at least 3 columns (CSV, TSV or JSON) is offered as "Table with N rows and M columns detected" with an Import as list button that opens the New List wizard instead of contact recognition. Tables of 50 rows or fewer can still be recognised in the Inbox directly with Recognize here anyway. #### Is my intake address safe? Both your forwarding email address and your webhook URL are private: anyone who knows either can send content into your workspace's Inbox, nothing else. Don't publish them — if one leaks, click Renew address and both the old email address and the old URL stop working immediately, and sending stays rate-limited so a leak can't flood your Inbox. Forwarded mail passes through an inbound e-mail service on its way in — see "[Who processes your data (subprocessors)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/subprocessors)". #### Can my colleagues see what's in my Inbox? Yes. The Inbox belongs to the workspace, so every member sees the same entries — including emails you forwarded and entries from your tools — and can recognise and save the people in them. Each workspace has its own Inbox, so switch workspaces to see another one. #### Does everyone in the workspace share one forwarding address? No. Each member gets their own personal address per workspace ("Your personal address for this workspace"), but whatever arrives at any member's address lands in the same shared Inbox of that workspace. In a different workspace you get a different address, so forward to the one of the workspace the contacts belong to. #### What are the example chips under the Inbox text field? In the input (Add content), under "Try it:", you'll find chips for fictional samples such as an email signature, a call note, a calendar invite, an attendee list, LinkedIn profile text and a business card. Clicking one only fills the text field so you can see what the Inbox handles; nothing is added or charged until you click Add to inbox and later Recognize contacts. #### What does "Add content" in the Inbox do? It opens the manual input: a large text field and a file card. Add to inbox stores what you entered and takes you back to the entries with the new one open; Cancel takes you back without adding. The entries are the Inbox itself with the tabs All, To review and Done; with no entry selected, the right side shows a short hint and View setup, which opens the connect page (the Email forwarding and Webhook & automations cards and the setup guides). #### Can the Inbox add recognized contacts to a list automatically? Not the Inbox itself: there you recognize contacts, check them and add them to a list yourself. What can do it is an app event set up in a list — for example a Slack channel in which leads are reported: each message is read, and a contact with an e-mail address, a LinkedIn profile or a name with a company is added to that list by itself (see "[App events: let a tool you use fill a list or the Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/app-events)"). For finished records, a list's webhook or form writes straight into its columns. #### Why does my Inbox show a list of lists on the left? Because at least one of your lists has its own webhook or app event. In the left column, Inbox stands under Comes in, and under Lists with their own way in every list with a webhook or app event and the number of records waiting for a decision. Click a list to see its entries and its webhook page, or Inbox to see everything again. #### What is the Inbox entry named after one of my lists, marked "to review"? Those are records the list's webhook held back instead of adding them to the list: contacts on your Block list, records the list couldn't take (such as "Plan's record limit reached"), or what you chose to hold back on that webhook (invalid addresses, spam and test entries). Open the entry, check the Reason per record and click Add anyway or Discard; the list is already set, and no recognition or credits are needed. See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)" for the Hold back options. --- ## Sending into the Inbox from n8n, Zapier, Shortcuts, scripts and email Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/send-to-inbox-from-tools Last updated: 2026-10-15 You have two private addresses that any tool, script, automation or email client can send content to: a **forwarding email address** and a **webhook URL** for tools. Anything sent to either lands unchanged in the Inbox of the **workspace** the addresses belong to, ready to recognize later. Every member of a workspace has their own pair for that workspace, and everything they receive goes into the same shared Inbox; in another workspace you get a different pair. ### Getting your addresses Click **Flows** in the left bar. In the left column, beneath **Inbox**, click **Email forwarding** or **Webhook & automations**: each opens as a page of its own, the webhook's with the **Guides** beneath it (on a phone these pages are not shown — set it up on a wider screen). There are two cards, and clicking **Create address** or **Create webhook** on either one — once per workspace — sets up both together: - **Email forwarding** — a personal address ending `@in.listplus.ai`, with a **Copy** button. Forward or send mail to it directly from your mail client or phone. - **Webhook & automations** — a private URL for scripts and automations, with a **Guides** section below for n8n, Zapier and iPhone Shortcuts with ready-made snippets you can copy directly. Above the two cards, a band points to a list's own webhook for data that belongs in one particular list: open the list → **Set up**. That is a different address — it belongs to one list, takes JSON records only and writes them into the list's columns without a recognition step. Use it for form submissions and leads from Zapier, Make or n8n; keep the Inbox addresses for everything unstructured (emails, PDFs, notes, text). See "[List webhooks: receive records from forms and tools](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/list-webhooks)". Your Inbox addresses themselves work as before. You get exactly one of each per workspace, tied together: renewing or closing one affects both (see below). Make sure the right workspace is active before you copy an address, because contacts sent there land in that workspace's Inbox. ### Forwarding email Forward or CC any mail to your **Email forwarding** address. ListPlus turns it into inbox entries: - The message **body** becomes one text entry (subject is stored as its note). - The first **10 attachments** are read; text PDFs, vCards, calendar invites (.ics), CSV, JSON and plain-text files each become their own entry. Excel files, images and scanned PDFs are skipped. - **Keep attachments under about 3 MB in total** — larger emails may not arrive at all, body included. - A mail with only skipped attachments still delivers its body as an entry. - **Spam-flagged mail and duplicate deliveries of the same message are dropped.** Mail to an old, rotated address is dropped too. - **ListPlus never replies** to a forwarded mail — not even to reject it. Anyone who knows your forwarding address can send mail into your workspace's Inbox; there is no sender allowlist, only the size and rate limits below. ### What each tool sends - **n8n** — an HTTP Request node: POST to your webhook URL, with the body as plain text or JSON. Add `?source=n8n` to the URL to see that source labeled in your Inbox. - **Zapier** — the Webhooks by Zapier action, Custom Request: POST, with Content-Type `text/plain` or `application/json`, any body. - **iPhone Shortcuts** — the "Get Contents of URL" action: method POST, request body is your text. Works well from the iOS share sheet, so you can send a webpage or a note straight to your Inbox from your phone. - **Your own script** — POST plain text, a JSON object, or a file (`multipart/form-data` with one file field: txt, md, csv, json, ics, vcf, eml, xml, html, or a PDF — text PDFs are extracted server-side, a scanned PDF is rejected with an error; images and other binary files aren't accepted). A plain `curl` call works too, for example `curl -X POST "?source=myscript" -H "Content-Type: text/plain" --data "..."`. Optional query parameters or JSON fields let a sender add context: `source` (who sent it), `hint` (a parser hint like `ics`, `vcard` or `table`), and `note` (a short note, up to 500 characters). ### Limits Each entry can hold up to **256 KB**, and a workspace's Inbox keeps up to **500 live entries** at a time, counted for all members together — older entries expire on their own before that becomes a problem, but if you reach it, new sends are refused until older entries expire. A forwarded email can add up to 11 entries at once (the body plus up to 10 attachments). Sending is also rate-limited per minute and per day for each person so a single runaway script or a leaked address can't flood your Inbox; if you hit a limit, the response (or, for email, silence) tells the difference between a skipped part and a dropped message. Every entry — however it arrived — is deleted automatically 14 days after it was received; see "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" for what that means for people you've already saved or added to a list. ### Renewing or turning it off Both addresses are private: anyone who has one can send into your workspace's Inbox, and nothing else. Renewing or closing only affects your own pair in the current workspace; colleagues' addresses keep working. If either leaks — for example a script logs the URL somewhere public, or you no longer trust who has your forwarding address — click **Renew address**; the old email address and the old URL both stop working immediately, and new ones take their place. You can also click **Close intake** on the same screen, which stops all intake through your pair (email and tools) until you create a new one. If the workspace is deleted, all its addresses stop working. ### FAQ #### How do I get an address that tools can send data to? Click Flows in the left bar, then Email forwarding or Webhook & automations beneath Inbox in the column. Click Create address or Create webhook there, once per workspace. ListPlus shows your personal forwarding address under Email forwarding and a webhook URL under Webhook & automations, along with copyable setup snippets for n8n, Zapier and iPhone Shortcuts in the Guides section below. #### What is the difference between the Inbox webhook and a list webhook? The Inbox webhook is your personal address for anything unstructured — text, emails, files — that lands as an Inbox entry and becomes contacts only when you run Recognize contacts (each run costs credits; the button shows the price). A list webhook belongs to one list, takes JSON records only and writes them straight into the list's columns; it costs no credits and needs no recognition step. For form leads or records from Zapier, Make or n8n that belong in one list, use the list webhook: open the list and choose Set up → Webhook. #### What request format does the webhook URL expect? A POST request with either plain text (Content-Type text/plain), a JSON body, or a file upload (multipart/form-data with one file field — txt, md, csv, json, ics, vcf, eml, xml, html, or a PDF; a scanned PDF is rejected). Optional source, hint and note fields or query parameters let the sender add context shown in your Inbox. #### How do I connect n8n, Zapier or an iPhone Shortcut? n8n: an HTTP Request node POSTing to your webhook URL with the body as text or JSON. Zapier: the Webhooks by Zapier "Custom Request" action, POST, text/plain or application/json. iPhone Shortcuts: the "Get Contents of URL" action, method POST, with your text as the request body — great from the share sheet. #### How do I forward emails into my Inbox? Copy your address from the Email forwarding page (Flows → Email forwarding beneath Inbox — or set it up there with Create address) and forward mail to it; it ends in `@in.listplus.ai` and belongs to the current workspace. The body becomes one entry, and the first 10 attachments are read: text PDFs, vCards, calendar invites, CSV, JSON and plain-text files each become their own entry (kept under about 3 MB in total), while Excel files, images and scanned PDFs are skipped, and ListPlus never replies. #### Why didn't my forwarded e-mail arrive? Most likely the attachments were too large — keep them under about 3 MB in total, since larger emails may not arrive at all. Excel files and scanned PDFs are also skipped rather than stored, and spam-flagged or duplicate mail is dropped; if none of that explains it, check that your forwarding rule sends to the exact address shown and that you're looking at the Inbox of the workspace that address belongs to. #### How big can one entry be, and how many can I have? Each entry can be up to 256 KB, and a workspace's Inbox holds up to 500 live entries at a time for all members together; older entries expire automatically well before that limit matters, but if you reach it, new sends are refused until older entries expire. A forwarded mail can add up to 11 entries at once (body plus up to 10 attachments). Sending is also rate-limited, so a leaked address or a misconfigured script can't flood your Inbox. #### How long does content sent this way stay in the Inbox? Every entry, however it arrived, is deleted automatically 14 days after it was received. People you've saved or added to a list from it are unaffected — only the raw entry disappears. #### What happens if my intake address leaks? Click Renew address on the Email forwarding or Webhook & automations page in Flows (also in the ⋮ menu of those rows) — your old forwarding email address and old webhook URL for this workspace both stop accepting new content immediately, and new ones replace them together; colleagues' addresses aren't affected. Update any tool, script, or mail forwarding rule that was using the old address afterward. #### Can I turn off receiving from tools and email entirely? Yes, click Close intake on the Email forwarding or Webhook & automations page in Flows (also in the ⋮ menu of those rows) — nothing can be sent through your address pair for this workspace, by email or by tool, until you create a new one. Pasting content yourself on the Inbox page still works either way. #### Why do I have a different forwarding address in each workspace? Each address belongs to one person in one workspace, so ListPlus knows which workspace's Inbox a mail belongs in. Forward to the address you see while that workspace is active; creating a new workspace means creating a new address there. --- ## How Inbox recognition works, and reviewing what it found Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/recognition-and-review Last updated: 2026-10-10 "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" covers pasting things in and the overall flow; this goes deeper on what **Recognize contacts** actually does with different kinds of input, what its badges mean, and how to correct what it got wrong. ### Recognition depends on what you pasted - **A calendar invitation (.ics)** — the organizer and every attendee become one candidate each. - **A vCard** — one candidate per card. - **A table (CSV, JSON, or a pasted spreadsheet block)** — one candidate per row, with columns matched to the right field automatically. A table with **10 rows or fewer** is recognized directly with no extra step. Anything bigger (more than 10 rows, at least 3 columns) shows a table card instead: **Import as list** always, plus **Recognize here anyway** when the table is **50 rows or fewer** — over 50 rows, only Import as list is offered. See "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" for that card. - **A short line of text** (a signature, a single contact), or **one contact per line** for several lines — each becomes its own candidate directly, with no AI step. - **Longer free text** (an email body, a forwarded PDF, a note) — read by AI to pull out several candidates, at most 50 per run. This is the one case that adds AI cost on top of the base charge (see "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" for the exact cost); every other case above (invitations, vCards, tables, short text and contact lines) costs exactly the base amount, never more. - **A forwarded e-mail's body** always goes through this free-text AI reading, never the short-text or one-line-per-person shortcuts above — even a short forwarded note can contain a "From:"/"Von:" header that those shortcuts would misread as a name. In that header block, the original sender is the contact; you (whoever forwarded it) and the addressee on the "To:"/"An:" line are recognised as yourself and skipped, the same as everywhere else in the app. Only real people and real organisations someone would plausibly do business with become candidates: a venue, hotel or conference centre, an event or conference name, a product, a city, a country, a date, or a headline or button text in capitals ("BARCELONA", "FINAL DEADLINE") is never turned into a contact. When it's unclear, ListPlus leaves it out rather than guess. Hard material — long text, a newsletter with many all-caps headline-style lines, or a thread with several "From:"/"Von:" header blocks — is read by a stronger AI model instead of the standard one, because getting the right contact out of it is harder; this only changes the AI cost added on top of the base amount (see "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" for how that's shown before you click). Before longer free text reaches the AI, ListPlus strips noise that would otherwise slow it down without adding information: repeated `mailto:`/ `https:` links, quote markers, repeated From/To/Cc/Subject lines from a mail thread, image filename placeholders, and duplicate paragraphs (the same signature or disclaimer repeated in every reply). For material longer than about 24,000 characters, it keeps the beginning (roughly the first quarter) plus every line with a contact signal anywhere in the text — an email address, a phone number, a job title like "CEO" or "Head of", or a word like "Impressum" or "Vertrieb" — and fills in the rest as space allows; skipped stretches show as "[…]" internally but every value in the result is still checked against your original text. Even when the same person appears many times (a signature, quoted replies, forwarded threads), recognition produces exactly one candidate for them, merging their details. Every candidate is then checked for placeholder, test or generic role-address values. When an entry has 5 candidates or fewer, each is also matched against the web automatically, the same way Person Search does it. With more, click **Find person** on a row to look it up (free). ### You're never offered as a contact Recognition automatically drops your own account email address, and — for mail you forwarded — the address you forwarded from, along with any name-only mentions of that person (a "Hi Anna," greeting line, for example). This applies to every entry, not only forwarded email. ### Document header, for material about an organisation When longer free text is clearly from or mainly about one organisation (a brochure, a company newsletter, a letter), the result opens with a small header card naming that organisation and one sentence on what it does — only when the text makes that clear. A list of several people or a thread between different companies doesn't get a header, since no single organisation is central. ### The badges A recognized row shows at most one badge: - **Please check** — something about the row needs a look before you rely on it: it might be a placeholder, a test record or a generic role address, or the first name is only an abbreviation in the source text. When the person is only named in passing — a speaker on an agenda, a quote in an article, someone in a newsletter's attendee list — the row carries the same "Please check" badge with the hint "Only mentioned in the text – not a direct contact" instead, and always waits for you to decide; it never counts as confirmed. - **Already saved** — this person or company matches one you've already saved; it's linked to that existing record instead of duplicated. - **Saved**, **In list** (or **In list · [list name]**), and **Not saved** show once you've acted on a row: put on the Watchlist, sent to a list, or dismissed. - **No badge** — nothing looked like a placeholder and it isn't linked to an existing saved contact; it's ready to tick. ### Choosing the right profile If more than one LinkedIn profile could match a person, the row is locked with **Is this the right person?** and a list of candidates — pick one, or click **None of these** if none fit. The row unlocks and becomes selectable as soon as you decide. ### Correcting a candidate Expand a row with the arrow on its right. Under **Review details**, type a correction into any field — first name, last name, job title, company, email or phone for a person; company name, domain, website or industry for a company. It saves as soon as you leave the field. Corrections are free, don't trigger a new recognition run, and are possible until you save, list or dismiss the row. **Related topics:** inbox · saved-contacts. ### FAQ #### Why do some Inbox rows say "Please check" and others don't? "Please check" appears when the row looks like it could be a placeholder, a test record or a generic role address, or when the first name in your source text is only an abbreviation. A row with no badge raised none of these flags. #### What does "Already saved" mean on a recognized row? It means this person or company matches someone you've already saved — ListPlus links the row to that existing record instead of creating a duplicate. #### Does recognition work differently for a calendar invite than for a pasted table? Yes. An invitation turns its organizer and attendees into one candidate each, a vCard becomes one candidate per card, and a table of 10 rows or fewer becomes one candidate per row with columns matched automatically — bigger tables (up to 50 rows) need one extra click on Recognize here anyway, or go straight to the list import. Only longer free text is read by AI to extract several candidates, which is the one case with an AI charge on top of the base cost. #### I pasted several contacts as plain lines of text — does each line become its own candidate? Yes, for a short list of lines (up to 40): each line starting with a name becomes its own candidate, with any following line (email, phone, title) attached to it. This still costs the base charge like every recognition run, but never the extra AI charge — it's not the free-text extraction path. #### Can I fix a wrong name, title or email before saving or adding to a list? Yes — expand the row with the arrow on its right and type the correction under Review details; it saves as soon as you leave the field, with no extra charge or new recognition run, and stays editable until you save, list or dismiss the row. #### Is there a limit to how much text ListPlus can extract candidates from? Yes. Before sending long free text to the AI, ListPlus removes repeated quote headers, signatures and disclaimers, then — if what's left is still over about 24,000 characters — keeps the beginning plus every line with a contact signal (an email, a phone number, a job title, "Impressum") rather than just cutting off the end, so contact details near the bottom aren't lost. Extraction stops at 50 candidates per paste either way; split a very long or contact-dense document into smaller pastes for full coverage. #### Does recognizing a document tell me what it's about? For longer free text clearly from or about one organisation (a brochure, a newsletter, a forwarded PDF), the result opens with a header card naming that organisation and a one-sentence summary, drawn only from your text. Material without a single central organisation — a contact list, a thread between several companies — doesn't get one. #### Will recognition ever suggest me as a contact? No. Your own account email address is always excluded, and for a forwarded email, the address you forwarded from is excluded too, along with plain name mentions of that same person (like a greeting line). This applies to every entry, not just email. #### How does recognition handle a forwarded e-mail? It always reads the body as free text, even a short one, because a "From:"/"Von:" header could otherwise be misread as a name. In that header block, the original sender becomes the contact; you and the addressee are recognised as yourself from the "To:"/"An:" line and skipped, the same self-exclusion that applies everywhere else. #### Why didn't ListPlus turn a venue, event or headline into a contact? By design. Recognition only creates candidates for real people and organisations someone would plausibly do business with — a hotel, conference centre, event name, product, city, country, date or an all-caps headline is never treated as a contact, and anything unclear is left out rather than guessed. #### What does "Only mentioned in the text – not a direct contact" mean? It means the person is only named in passing in your text — a speaker on an agenda, someone quoted in an article, a name in a newsletter's attendee list — not someone the material is actually reaching out to. The row still shows for you to review, but it never counts as a confirmed contact. #### Why did this entry cost more than the usual base amount of credits? Hard material — a long text, a newsletter with many all-caps headline-style lines, or a thread with several "From:"/"Von:" header blocks — is read by a stronger AI model than the standard one, because picking out the right contact is harder. The base amount stays the same; only the AI cost added on top for free text goes up, and the Recognize contacts button always shows the price (an upper bound for free text) before you click. --- ## The Watchlist (saved contacts) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts Last updated: 2026-10-16 **Watchlist** (formerly **Saved**, German formerly "Gemerkt") is where people wait for their list. Every profile you load in Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research or the Inbox is recorded automatically, and it lands on the Watchlist as soon as a lookup finds data, or when you file it or save it from the Inbox, so you can collect over days and then move a whole folder into a list at once. The Watchlist is deliberately not a CRM: there are no notes, statuses or deal stages. The Watchlist belongs to the **workspace**: everyone in the workspace sees the same contacts and folders, and can file, enrich or remove them. If you work in several workspaces, each has its own Watchlist (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). The page's address is listplus.ai/app/watchlist. ### How people get here Loading a profile anywhere in the app is recorded automatically, and it lands on the Watchlist as soon as a lookup finds data, or when you file it or save it from the Inbox. In the Inbox, **Save** puts a recognised person on the Watchlist too, regardless of what any lookup found. Someone you already have is recognised by LinkedIn URL, email, or name and company, so nothing is saved twice — a richer result just updates the existing entry. The button that puts someone there is still called **Save** (Merken), and a person on the Watchlist shows the badge **Saved** (Gemerkt). ### On the Watchlist versus just viewed Contacts you **keep** — saved, filed into a folder, or enriched (a profile where at least one lookup found data, including a cache hit) — are on the Watchlist and don't expire. Profiles where nothing was found are only kept briefly as **viewed** — for example a result loaded straight onto the page from a LinkedIn URL, email or domain with no match. They are not on the Watchlist: they show under **Recently viewed** (Zuletzt angesehen) at the bottom of the Watchlist page's left column. (The idle Person Search page has its own short Recently viewed list: the 6 contacts opened most recently, on the Watchlist or not.) Viewed entries drop out after 30 days of no further activity (up to 50 are kept per workspace). To keep one, click **Save** in its row's **⋯** menu or tick several and click **Save** in the selection bar — it moves onto the Watchlist and no longer expires. ### The Watchlist page Click **Watch** in the left navigation to open the Watchlist; its header reads **"Watchlist"**. As long as nothing is on the Watchlist yet, it shows a start page, "Keep interesting contacts in view", with the four ways contacts get there: **From Person Search**, **From Segment Search**, **From AI Research** and **From the Inbox**, each with a button that takes you there. Once something is on it, the page has its own left column next to a table. From top to bottom: - **News** — what the alerts found, about people and companies, with one line per kind (**Job change**, **LinkedIn posts**, **Job postings**, **Funding**) to show only that kind. A kind nobody is watched for yet is shown greyed. - **People** — every saved person; **With alerts** below it shows only the ones that have alerts. - **Companies** — every company on the Watchlist, with **With alerts** below it (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). - **Folders**, and **Recently viewed** at the bottom. The page opens at **News** when there is news you haven't seen, otherwise at **With alerts** when you have alerts, otherwise at **People**. The folder column is open by default; you can drag it wider or narrower and collapse it (⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L, or click **Watch** in the left navigation again to reopen it), and on phones it becomes a side panel titled "Folders". The table shows contact, company, what's reachable (email, mobile, phone), where the person was found, the pipelines the contact went into, folder and when it was added. **Add from a list** in the page header of People puts the people of a list on the Watchlist — each once; rows that only name a company are left out. People added this way are kept in a light form (name, role, company, email, LinkedIn profile), so a whole list of thousands fits; a workspace can hold up to 5,000 of them. As soon as you set an alert for such a person, file them in a folder, or send them to a list or a pipeline, they become a full saved contact with the data of their list row. Search with the field in the page header, sort by a click on a column's title and filter with the funnel beside it (for example by where a contact was found, or by with / without alert), and open a row to see the full profile again, free of charge. Open a folder or Recently viewed and the page header becomes a breadcrumb, **Watchlist / [folder name]**, with **Watchlist** as the way back to People. ### Folders The left column's **FOLDERS** section has a **+** button next to its title to create one (up to 50 total); until you make one, it shows the hint "Create a folder with '+', then drag entries into it." File people into a folder by **dragging table rows** onto it (a dragged selection carries every selected row) in the left column, or via a row's **⋯** menu or the bulk **Move to folder** action. Dropping rows on **People** takes them out of their folder. Each folder has its own **⋯** menu with **Add to list** (for everyone in it at once), **Rename**, and **Delete folder** — deleting a folder, or removing someone from one, **keeps that person on the Watchlist**; they stay under People, just no longer filed anywhere. Up to 300 people can be filed across all folders combined. Both limits (50 folders, 300 filed) apply per workspace, shared by all its members. ### Getting people into a list or a pipeline Tick rows and click **Add** → **Add to list**, or use a folder's menu. Adding merges with rows that already exist in the list by email, LinkedIn URL, or name and company, filling empty cells instead of creating duplicates. The enrichment results and their sources travel along, so the list shows where each value came from. **Add** → **Send to pipeline** puts the selected people into one of the workspace's pipelines instead (see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)"). When you open a contact from the Watchlist that has been sent to a pipeline, the profile drawer shows an **In pipelines** section with each pipeline's state for that person (waiting, data check, sent, failed or removed) — see "[Seeing which pipelines a record went through](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-marks)". ### Enriching from the Watchlist Opening someone from the Watchlist always reloads them for free. If the basics (LinkedIn profile and company profile, which cost credits) haven't been loaded yet, click **Load** in the profile drawer; add-on cards for a verified email, phone or mobile number run only when you click them and show their price first. The result is saved in place, so the data is there when the person moves into a list. Keeping people on the Watchlist costs no credits. Only **alerts** you set on contacts (next section) cost credits — per contact and month, renewed monthly until you stop them. All prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". ### Alerts on contacts The Watchlist can also keep an eye on people for you. Tick contacts on the Watchlist page and click **Set alert** (bell icon), or click **Set alert** in the **Alerts** box at the top of a saved contact's detail. The **Set alerts** dialog opens; ListPlus then checks the contacts regularly and reports what changed. Under **What to watch** two alerts are available, each billed per contact and month: - **Job change** — reports a new company, a new role, or that the person left the company. - **New LinkedIn posts** — reports the person's own posts, at most 3 per check. **How often.** Under **Check frequency** you choose **Weekly** or **Daily** for the contact. Daily pays off when you want to react fast, for example to a new post. Both alerts cost credits per contact and month, and a daily check costs more than a weekly one; the prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". The foot of the dialog shows the sum per month and how many alerts your plan has left. The first check runs within about 6 hours of starting. The first month is charged when you click **Set alerts**, then monthly from the workspace owner's balance. Switching a contact from weekly to daily during a paid month charges the difference and brings the next check forward to within a day; switching back to weekly gives no refund, the lower price applies from the next renewal. If the balance can't cover a renewal, the alerts pause ("Paused – no credits") until there are credits again. **Stop alerts** ends the checks without a refund for the current month; the contact stays on the Watchlist. Each plan caps how many contacts of a workspace can have alerts: Basic 100, Pro 1,000, Premium 5,000. With several contacts selected, the dialog starts on **Keep** when some of them already have alerts: each keeps its own frequency unless you pick Weekly or Daily for all of them. A contact without a LinkedIn URL is looked up for free; if no profile is found, the contact waits ("LinkedIn missing") and is not billed. **Reported vs. held back.** A job change is reported only when ListPlus is sure. Doubtful changes appear as **Held back – not certain enough** with the reason — a new company without a LinkedIn page, a side role (board, advisor, investor, part-time), self-employed, a new job that began long before the old one ended, a profile with very few connections, or no title for the new job — and are applied only when you click **Take it over anyway**. "Left the company" is reported only after two empty checks in a row. **Send news to a pipeline.** In the alert dialog you can pick a pipeline under **Send news to**: a contact with news then goes into that pipeline with the new company and title — for example to Slack or your CRM. Held changes go there only once you take them over. **The bell.** Every row of People and Companies has a bell in the **Alerts** column: grey when nothing is watched, violet when alerts are running (amber when they wait, for example for credits), with a dot while there is news you haven't seen. Click it to set an alert, or to see what is watched, change it or stop it. The column's filter narrows the list to entries with or without an alert. For companies the bell sets the alert on their job postings and funding rounds (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). **The Alerts box.** A saved contact's detail shows an **Alerts** box at the top. A pill says where the alert stands: **On**, **Waiting** (with the reason, for example "Paused – no credits" or "LinkedIn missing") or **Not set**. With alerts on you see what is watched, the frequency, the next check, the pipeline the news goes to, and below that the news found so far. **Change** opens the dialog again; **Stop alerts** is in the **⋯** menu next to it. **When alerts are switched off.** If the owner has switched off the monitoring of people in the workspace policy, the dialog shows "People monitoring is off in this workspace" and what would be available, and nothing can be set. The owner switches it on under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. **The "With alerts" view.** In the left column of the Watchlist page, **With alerts** below People lists every contact that has alerts. Its table shows the **Checks** column (which alerts), a small number beside it for how often they are checked (7 = weekly, 1 = daily), the **Latest news** and the **Next check**; "Check is due" means the check runs with the next hourly round. The Watchlist icon in the left navigation turns **violet** when contacts have news you haven't seen yet; clicking it opens **News**, where **Mark all as seen** clears the badge. In **With alerts**, **With news** filters to the contacts with unseen news. ### Companies on the Watchlist People and companies are kept apart: **Companies** in the left column lists every company on the Watchlist, each once, by its domain. A company you save from a search is put there automatically; **Watch company** in a contact's **⋯** menu and **Add from a list** in the Companies view add more. Companies can have alerts of their own — on new job postings and funding rounds — and go into a pipeline as company records. All of that is in "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)". ### FAQ #### What is the Watchlist? The Watchlist (formerly called Saved, German "Gemerkt") is the holding place for people you found and want to keep — from Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research or the Inbox. You collect there, organise in folders, enrich if needed, and move people into a list or a pipeline when ready. It's not a CRM: no notes, statuses or deal stages. #### How do I save a contact to my watchlist? Open the person's profile anywhere in the app: once a lookup finds data, they're on the Watchlist automatically. To keep someone regardless, choose a folder under Save in … in the profile drawer's header, tick them in the Inbox and click Save, or click Save on their row under Recently viewed on the Watchlist page. Profiles loaded from a bare email or domain have no Save in … button, so save or file them from the Watchlist page instead. #### Why did a contact disappear from my watchlist? Only contacts you keep — saved, filed, or enriched with a lookup that found data — are on the Watchlist. A profile where nothing was found (viewed only) shows under Recently viewed at the bottom of the Watchlist page's left column and drops out after 30 days of no activity. Click Save on it there to put it on the Watchlist, where it no longer expires. #### How do I organise contacts on my watchlist? Create folders (up to 50) with the + next to "Folders" in the Watchlist page's left column, or from Save in … → New folder … in the profile drawer. Drag table rows (or a whole selection) onto a folder, or use a row's ⋯ menu. A folder's own ⋯ menu offers Add to list, Rename and Delete folder any time — deleting one keeps the people on the Watchlist, it just unfiles them. #### How do I move contacts from my watchlist into a list? On the Watchlist page, tick rows and click Add → Add to list, or open a folder's menu and choose Add to list for everyone in it. Pick an existing list or create a new one; people already in that list are matched by email, LinkedIn URL, or name and company and merged instead of duplicated. #### Are contacts saved twice if I find them again? No. ListPlus recognises the same person by LinkedIn URL, email, or name and company and updates the existing Watchlist entry with the richer result instead of creating a second one. #### Can I enrich a contact directly from the Watchlist? Yes. Open the person and use the profile drawer: load the basics if they aren't loaded yet (they cost credits), reveal a verified email, phone or mobile number, or run other add-ons — each shows its price before it runs. The Watchlist entry is updated in place, so the data travels with the person into a list. #### Can I export my watchlist to a file? Not directly — there's no export button on the Watchlist page. Add the people to a list first, then export the list as CSV or Excel. #### Where are folders and Recently viewed, and how do I delete a contact from the Watchlist? Folders live in the Watchlist page's own left column, under the "FOLDERS" title with its own + button, with Recently viewed at the bottom; the column can be collapsed (⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L, or click Watch in the left navigation again to reopen it), and on phones it's a side panel titled "Folders". The idle Person Search page also shows a short Recently viewed list of the last 6 contacts you opened, on the Watchlist or not. To delete a contact, use Delete in its row's ⋯ menu on the Watchlist page; it removes right away, with no confirmation step. #### Where did "Saved" go — why is it called Watchlist now? Saved (German "Gemerkt", Spanish "Guardados") was renamed to Watchlist in all languages; it's the same place with the same contacts, now at listplus.ai/app/watchlist. The button that puts someone there is still called Save (Merken), Open a folder and the header becomes a breadcrumb, Watchlist / [folder name], so Watchlist is your way back to "All". #### What do News, People and Companies mean in the Watchlist's left column? News shows what the alerts found, with a line per kind such as Job change. People lists every saved person and Companies every company on the Watchlist; With alerts below each shows only the ones that are watched. Folders are below. #### Can my colleagues see my watchlist? Yes. The Watchlist belongs to the workspace, so every member sees the same contacts and folders and can file, enrich or remove them. If you work in several workspaces, each one has its own Watchlist; switch workspaces to see the other one. #### Why is my Watchlist page empty or showing a start page? As long as nothing is on the Watchlist in the current workspace, the page shows the start page "Keep interesting contacts in view" with four ways to add contacts: from Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research or the Inbox. If you expected contacts there, check that you're in the right workspace, because each workspace has its own Watchlist. #### Where do I see whether a contact on my watchlist was sent to a pipeline? Open the contact from the Watchlist: if it has been sent to a pipeline, the profile drawer shows an "In pipelines" section with each pipeline's state (waiting, data check, sent, failed or removed) and the date. Click a row to open that pipeline; the section is hidden when there's nothing to show. #### How do I set an alert for job changes or new posts of a contact? On the Watchlist page, click the grey bell in a contact's row (or tick several contacts and click Set alert), then choose Job change (new company, new role, left the company) and/or New LinkedIn posts (at most 3 posts reported per check) and how often to check: Weekly or Daily. The first check runs within about 6 hours; news shows under News in the left column, and the Watchlist icon turns violet while there is news you haven't seen. #### What does an alert on a contact cost, and when is it charged? Alerts cost credits per contact and month, and daily checks cost more than weekly ones; the exact prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". The first month is charged when you set the alert, then monthly from the workspace owner's balance; if the balance can't cover a renewal, the alerts pause until credits are available. Keeping people on the Watchlist without alerts costs no credits. #### Can alerts check daily instead of weekly? Yes. In the alert dialog choose Daily under "Check frequency"; it applies to all alerts of that contact and costs more credits a month than weekly checks (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). Switching from weekly to daily in a paid month charges the difference and brings the next check forward to within a day; switching back gives no refund, the lower price applies from the next renewal. #### For how many contacts can I set alerts? Per workspace: 100 contacts on Basic, 1,000 on Pro and 5,000 on Premium. The alert dialog shows how many are left; above the cap you need to stop alerts on some contacts or upgrade. #### What if a contact with an alert has no LinkedIn URL? ListPlus looks the profile up for free when you set the alert. If none is found, the contact waits with the note "LinkedIn missing" and is not billed until a profile is there. #### Why is a job change shown as "Held back – not certain enough"? ListPlus reports a change only when it's sure; doubtful ones are held with the reason — a new company without a LinkedIn page, a side role (board, advisor, investor, part-time), self-employed, a new job that began long before the old one ended, very few connections, or no title for the new job. Click "Take it over anyway" to apply it; "Left the company" is reported only after two empty checks in a row. #### Can contacts with alert news go straight into a pipeline? Yes. In the alert dialog pick a pipeline under "Send news to": a contact with news goes into it with the new company and title, for example to Slack or your CRM; held changes go there only once you take them over. #### How do I stop the alerts on a contact? Open With alerts below People in the left column of the Watchlist page, select the contact and click Stop alerts. The checks end without a refund for the current month, and the contact stays on your Watchlist. #### What does the violet Watchlist icon mean? Contacts with alerts have news you haven't seen yet. Click the icon to open News in the left column; Mark all as seen clears the badge. #### What does "Check is due" mean in the Next check column? The planned time has come and the check runs with the next hourly round. Nothing is charged for the wait; the result appears under Latest news once the check has run. --- ## Watchlist vs. Lists: why both exist Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-vs-lists Last updated: 2026-10-15 The **Watchlist** (formerly Saved) and **Lists** both hold contacts, but they're for two different stages of the same job: the Watchlist is where people wait before you've decided what to do with them, and a list is where you actually get them ready for something — checked, enriched, exported. ### What each one is for The **Watchlist** is a lightweight holding area. Anyone you look at in Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research or the Inbox lands on it automatically once a lookup finds data, sorted into folders you create, with no notes, statuses or deal stages — it's deliberately not a CRM. You can reopen and reload anyone on the Watchlist for free at any time, whether or not you've decided on a list for them yet. A **list** is a real, structured table: columns, checks, evaluations (Cold Email, CRM Quality, …), enrichment, and export or sync to another tool. Working on a list is where credits get spent and where data actually becomes usable for a campaign or a CRM push. Both belong to the **workspace**: every member sees the same Watchlist and the same lists, and each workspace has its own of both. ### The practical differences - **Structure.** The Watchlist has no columns of its own beyond what a person's profile carries; a list has whatever schema you or an import gave it, and every list can look completely different. - **Record limit.** Rows in lists count toward the record limit of the workspace owner's plan; people on the Watchlist do not — the Watchlist has its own, separate caps per workspace (up to 1,000 people outside folders, up to 300 more filed across the folders, plus up to 50 viewed-only entries kept for 30 days under Recently viewed, up to 5,000 people added from lists, and up to 5,000 companies) that have nothing to do with the plan. - **What you can do there.** On the Watchlist you can reload a profile, run add-on reveals like a verified email or mobile, **set alerts** for job changes and new LinkedIn posts (paid per contact and month; news can go straight to a pipeline — see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)") and, for companies, new job postings and funding rounds (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"), and move people to a list. Alerts run only on the Watchlist, not in a list; full enrichment jobs, quality checks, evaluations, exports and syncs only run inside a list. - **Lifetime.** People you've saved, filed into a folder, or enriched stay on the Watchlist indefinitely; merely-viewed entries (Recently viewed) drop out after 30 days. A list stays until you delete it. ### Moving between them From the Watchlist into a list is one direction: tick people on the Watchlist and click **Add** → **Add to list** to send them into an existing or new list, merging with matching rows instead of duplicating. **Add** → **Send to pipeline** is the third destination: it hands the selected people to a pipeline (for example your CRM or Slack) straight from the Watchlist, without a list in between — see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)". A contact with alerts can also reach a pipeline by itself: pick one under **Send news to** in the alert dialog and the contact goes there when a job change or new post is found. The other direction works too: on the Watchlist, open **People** and click **Add from a list** in the page header to put every person of a list on the Watchlist (each once, up to 5,000 per workspace); the list itself stays as it is. ### FAQ #### Why does ListPlus have both a Watchlist and Lists? They cover two stages: the Watchlist (formerly Saved) is a lightweight place to collect people as you find them, without deciding on a list yet; a list is where you structure, check, enrich and export contacts for a specific job like a campaign or a CRM push. #### Do people on my watchlist count toward my plan's record limit? No. The record limit only counts rows inside lists, against the plan of the workspace owner. The Watchlist has its own separate limits per workspace instead — up to 1,000 people outside folders, up to 300 more across the folders, plus up to 50 viewed-only entries (Recently viewed) kept for 30 days, up to 5,000 people added from lists and up to 5,000 companies. #### Can I run enrichment or checks on people while they're still on the Watchlist? You can reload a profile, run individual add-ons like revealing a verified email, and set alerts for job changes or new LinkedIn posts (paid per contact and month) on the Watchlist — alerts work only there, not in a list. Full enrichment jobs, quality checks and evaluations only run inside a list, so add the people to a list first for those. #### Does adding someone to a list remove them from the Watchlist? No. Adding a person to a list doesn't remove them from the Watchlist — they stay there too, so you can still find them later, add them to a second list, or file them into a folder. #### Can I move a contact from a list back onto the Watchlist? Yes — on the Watchlist open People and click Add from a list to put every person of a list on the Watchlist, each once. For a single person, choose a folder under Save in … in their profile drawer, or click Save on their row under Recently viewed on the Watchlist page. The list rows stay where they are either way. #### Can I send contacts from my watchlist to a pipeline without putting them in a list first? Yes. On the Watchlist page, tick the people, click Add and choose Send to pipeline, then pick the pipeline. They wait there as entries until someone clicks Send in the pipeline (or go out by themselves if the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic); see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)" for how that works. #### Which one should I use to start finding new contacts? Either works — opening someone's profile from Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research or the Inbox puts them on the Watchlist automatically once a lookup finds data, so it fills up as you search. Use it to collect over several sessions, then send a batch to a list once you know which campaign or CRM push they're for. --- ## Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies Last updated: 2026-10-16 The Watchlist keeps **people and companies apart**. A company is on it once, by its domain, however many of your contacts or lists name it. You can put a whole sub-market there — a few thousand companies — and let ListPlus tell you when one of them gives you a reason to get in touch. ### Getting companies onto the Watchlist Open **Watchlist** and click **Companies** in the left column. The table shows each company with its domain, LinkedIn page, where it came from (**Found via**) and when it was added; the search field in the page header searches by name or domain. There are four ways in: - **From a search** — a company you save from Person Search or Segment Search is put there automatically. - **From a contact** — in a contact's **⋯** menu choose **Watch company**. - **From a list** — in the Companies view click **Add from a list** in the page header and pick the list. Every company of its rows is added once. A row's company is recognized by its domain: the company domain, the website, or a business email address. Rows without one are left out, and the message says how many. - **From a company's detail** — open any company, anywhere in ListPlus, and click **Set alert** in its Alerts box: the company is put on the Watchlist first. A workspace can hold up to 5,000 companies. Putting companies on the Watchlist costs no credits. Remove one with **Remove from watchlist** in its row's **⋯** menu, or tick several and click the Remove button, which shows how many. With companies ticked, **Add** puts them into a list or sends them to a pipeline as company records (see "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)"). ### Alerts on companies An alert watches a company for reasons to get in touch: its **job postings** on LinkedIn, and its **funding rounds**. Click the bell in a company's row and choose **Set alert**, or tick several companies and click **Set alert** above the table. The **Set alerts** dialog is the one contacts have: - **What to watch** — **New job postings** and **Funding rounds**; tick one or both. - **Check frequency** — **Weekly** or **Daily**. - **Send news to** — optional: a pipeline the company goes into when there is news, for example a Slack channel or your CRM. - **Send its contacts to** — optional: a pipeline that gets the contacts of this company that are on your Watchlist when there is news — the occasion to get in touch, for example a sequence or a task. People that came from a whole list are saved as contacts first. The foot of the dialog shows what the companies cost per month. Alerts on companies cost credits per company and month, charged like the alerts on contacts: the first month when you set the alert, then monthly from the workspace owner's balance. Without credits the alert waits, and stopping gives no refund for the running month. The prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". What the checks report: - The first check only records where the company stands. What is posted already is not reported as news. - After that each check reports once what is new — for example "3 new job postings" with the first job titles. - **Hiring a lot** is reported when a company posted 10 or more new jobs within 30 days, at most once in 30 days. - **Funding rounds** reports a new round with its name, amount and date, for example "Series A · $22.3M". Rounds from before you set the alert are not reported. For job postings a company needs its **LinkedIn page**. ListPlus looks the page up by the company's domain when you set the alert. If none is found, the job postings of that company are not checked and not charged; funding rounds work without the page. **Complete profile** can find the page (see below); set the alert again afterwards. ### Complete a company's profile Select one or more companies under **Companies** and click **Complete profile** above the table. ListPlus fills what is missing: industry, size, location and a missing LinkedIn page. It uses what it already knows about the company first, which costs nothing; only a company it knows nothing about is looked up by its domain, for the price of a domain lookup. A company that already has a profile is left alone, so clicking again never pays twice. Up to 50 companies go at once; the message afterwards says how many profiles were filled, how many were complete already and how many were not found. ### Where the news shows up - **News** in the left column lists people and companies with news; the lines **Job postings** and **Funding** below it show only the companies. - **With alerts** below Companies lists every watched company with its **Checks**, a small number for the frequency (7 = weekly, 1 = daily), the **Latest news** and the **Next check**. - The bell in a company's row is grey when nothing is watched, violet when the alert runs, amber when it waits, with a dot while there is news you haven't seen. ### A company's detail Click a company — in Companies or in News — to open it in the detail view every company has: profile, enriching, **Add**. For a company on the Watchlist the button at the top reads **On the watchlist**; its menu removes the company again. The **Alerts** box sits at the top: - A pill says where the alert stands: **On**, **Waiting** (with the reason, for example "Paused – no credits" or "LinkedIn missing") or **Not set**. - With an alert set you see what is watched, the frequency, the next check and the pipeline the news goes to. **Change** opens the dialog; **Stop alerts** is in the **⋯** menu next to it. - **New job postings** shows the new postings of the last 30 days as a small chart, one bar per day, and below it the news found so far. A message about new postings links to the first of them (**Open posting**). Below the box, **People on the watchlist** names the contacts of this company that are on your Watchlist. Click it to open the contact; with several it unfolds into a list. ### When alerts are switched off If the owner has switched off the monitoring of people in the workspace policy, the dialog shows "People monitoring is off in this workspace" and what would be available, and nothing can be set. The owner switches it on under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. ### FAQ #### How do I put companies on my watchlist? Open Companies in the left column of the Watchlist page and click Add from a list to add every company of a list at once, or choose Watch company in a contact's ⋯ menu. Each company is there once, by its domain, and adding costs no credits. #### Why were some rows of my list not added as companies? A company is recognized by its domain: the company domain, the website, or a business email address. Rows without any of these are left out, and the message after adding says how many. Addresses at Gmail and similar providers, and LinkedIn or other platform links, don't count as a company's domain. #### Can I get an alert when a company is hiring? Yes. On the Watchlist open Companies, click the bell in a company's row and choose Set alert; ListPlus then checks the company's job postings on LinkedIn weekly or daily and reports new ones under News. It also reports "Hiring a lot" when a company posted 10 or more new jobs within 30 days. #### Why does a company show "LinkedIn missing" instead of an alert? Job postings are found through the company's LinkedIn page, so a company without one cannot be checked and is not charged. Select the company and click Complete profile to find its page, or add it again with its LinkedIn page, then set the alert once more. #### Why did my new company alert not report the jobs that are already posted? The first check only records where the company stands, so existing postings are the starting point and not news. From the second check on you get one message per check with what is new. Until the first check has run, the company's Alerts box says "Starting point pending". #### How do I send a company to Slack or my CRM when it posts new jobs? In the Set alerts dialog pick a pipeline under Send news to. When the alert finds something, the company goes into that pipeline as a company record with the news, for example as a Slack card with the number of new postings and the first job titles. #### Can a hiring signal start outreach to the people I know at that company? Yes. In the Set alerts dialog pick a pipeline under Send its contacts to: when the company has news, its contacts on your Watchlist go into that pipeline, for example a sequence or a task. People that came from a whole list are saved as contacts first. #### Can I get an alert when a company raises a funding round? Yes. In the Set alerts dialog for a company tick Funding rounds. When the company raises a new round, it appears under News with the round, the amount and the date; rounds from before the alert was set are not reported. #### How many companies can I watch? A workspace can hold up to 5,000 companies on the Watchlist. Each company with an alert is charged per company and month; the plan's limit on alerts counts contacts, not companies. #### Where do I see what a company's alert has found so far? Open the company from Companies or News. The Alerts box at the top shows the new job postings of the last 30 days as a small chart and lists the news found so far; a message about new postings links to the first of them. #### How do I fill in a company's industry, size or LinkedIn page? Select the company under Watchlist → Companies and click Complete profile. What ListPlus already knows about the company is used at no cost; otherwise one lookup by the domain runs, and a company that already has a profile is never looked up again. --- ## Section: Data sources, privacy & legal ## Where does the data come from? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from Last updated: 2026-10-17 ListPlus does not own a contact database. Every lookup calls a specialised data provider at the moment you ask for it, and the result is written into your list. Which provider answers depends on what you're doing. ### Who answers which lookup | You use… | Data comes from… | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Segment Search**, and "Contact Brief" (by LinkedIn URL or by Name & Company), "Reveal Mobile Number" | Prospeo — a licensed B2B contact database, refreshed by the provider weekly | | **Contact Profile** (by Email) and the deeper "Find Email"/"Find Email + Phone" searches | FullEnrich, which checks 20+ underlying sources one after another; if it finds nobody for an email, CompanyEnrich is asked (its answer counts only when the name fits the address) | | **Company Lookup** (company details from a domain or company name), and the cheaper "Contact Profile (by Email)" in the single-cell fill window | CompanyEnrich | | **Markets** in Find (company counts and the companies you load) | CompanyEnrich | | **LinkedIn Company Page (by Domain)**, and the funding alert for watched companies | Crustdata — receives only the company domain; the LinkedIn page lookup costs no credits | | **Company Profile Crunchbase** (funding, tech, growth) | Crunchbase | | Email verification (valid / invalid / catch-all / disposable) | MillionVerifier, checked live against the mail server | | LinkedIn profile and company data, profile search, URL verification | A specialised LinkedIn data provider (never your own LinkedIn account) | | Finding a LinkedIn URL or a company website by name | Google search — free | | **AI Research** matches | Live web search across job posts, press, company pages, and (if enabled) the B2B database, LinkedIn people and posts, Reddit and X | This is a short summary. The full table with inputs, coverage and charge rules per provider is in "[Data sources: the full provider table](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/data-sources-table)", and each provider also has its own topic with more detail. ### LinkedIn imports Importing from LinkedIn (a Sales Navigator search, a company's employees, a profile search, or a post's reactions or comments) runs through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side. It never signs in with your LinkedIn account and never uses your session. ### The company cache Company data (industry, size, location and more) is the same for every customer who looks up the same domain, so ListPlus keeps a shared result per domain and reuses it for free when anyone looks up that domain again — no new provider call, no credits charged. Person data (emails, phone numbers, job titles) is never shared between customers. Repeating one of your own LinkedIn lookups within 30 days reuses your earlier result for free; person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) that returned data are reused for 7 days in your account, and lookups that found nothing are run again. ### How current the data is Prospeo's own figures for Segment Search: roughly 300 million profiles and 143 million verified email addresses, updated weekly by the provider — that claim is theirs, not independently verified by ListPlus. Other lookups query the provider when you ask. If you repeat a lookup, ListPlus may reuse an earlier result instead of charging again: company details from the shared company cache, your own LinkedIn lookups for 30 days, and your person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) and email checks for 7 days. **Related topics:** data sources table · what-does-one-contact-cost · categories-audience-database · ai-research. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus have its own contact database? No. ListPlus holds no contact database of its own; every lookup calls a specialised data provider live, and the result is saved into your list. Segment Search is the one exception where you're browsing a provider's database directly through ListPlus's filters. #### Which provider powers Segment Search? Prospeo, a licensed B2B contact database. By the provider's own figures it holds roughly 300 million profiles and 143 million verified email addresses, refreshed weekly. #### Which provider finds an email from just a name and company? Prospeo for the cheaper "Contact Brief" lookup, and FullEnrich for the deeper "Find Email (by Name & Company)" search that checks 20+ sources when Prospeo doesn't find a match. #### Which provider looks up company details from a domain? CompanyEnrich. When ListPlus's company cache already holds current data for a domain (industry, employee count, location and more), the lookup costs nothing. #### How is my email verification checked? By MillionVerifier. Obvious cases such as disposable addresses are caught by a free pre-check first. Everything else is checked by MillionVerifier, and a result is reused for 7 days if you verify the same address again. #### Where does LinkedIn profile data come from? From a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side (named at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors), never from your own LinkedIn account or session. #### Does ListPlus use my LinkedIn account? No. LinkedIn data comes from a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side; ListPlus never signs in as you and never uses your LinkedIn account or session. #### Where do AI Research results come from? From a live web search: job posts, community threads, press, company pages, and the B2B database, LinkedIn people and posts, Reddit or X when you switch those on. Every match also gets a free LinkedIn lookup to confirm the person is real before it's returned. #### How current is the data ListPlus shows me? Lookups query the provider at the moment you ask, so you get their current data. When you repeat a lookup, ListPlus may reuse an earlier result for free: company details from its company cache, your own LinkedIn lookups for 30 days, and your person lookups (Prospeo, FullEnrich) and email checks for 7 days. #### Is any of this data made up or guessed by AI? Contact details such as emails, phone numbers and profiles come from data providers' lookups or public web sources with evidence — they're not invented by AI. Fields you create yourself with AI Analysis or an AI Column (such as gender, seniority or industry) are AI-derived, and you run those explicitly. --- ## Data sources: the full provider table Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/data-sources-table Last updated: 2026-10-17 This is the full provider-by-provider table behind "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)". For exact prices, see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" — this page links to it instead of repeating every number. ### Provider table | Provider | What it delivers | Where in ListPlus | Inputs needed | Charge rule | | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Prospeo** | Segment Search results; a verified email + the company's main phone + basic company data; a verified personal mobile number | Segment Search; "Contact Brief" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window; also appears as "Find Email (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu) / "Verified Email & Company Phone" (Person Search); "Reveal Mobile Number" | Segment Search: your search filters; lookups: a LinkedIn URL, or a name + company | On a hit, except a Segment Search page (charged per page, see price list) | | **FullEnrich** | Name, job title, company, LinkedIn URL and location from an email; the same from a name + company when Prospeo finds nothing; email + phone together | "Contact Profile (by Email)"; "Find Email (by Name & Company)" / "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" / "Deep Email Search"; "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" / "Deep Mobile Search" | An email address, or a name + company | On a hit (returns data); the chained "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" costs its base price, and twice that only if the follow-up also succeeds. If FullEnrich finds nobody for an email, CompanyEnrich is asked — charged at its own rate, only when its answer is accepted | | **CompanyEnrich** | Company details (industry, employee count, location and more) from a domain or company name; a cheaper, lower-coverage email-to-person lookup | "Company Lookup" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) / "Company Profile" (Person Search); "Contact Profile (by Email)" (single-cell fill window, and automatically when FullEnrich finds nobody for an email — the answer counts only when the name fits the address) | A domain or company name; an email | On a hit | | **LinkedIn data provider** (a specialised provider — never your LinkedIn account) | Profile and company data by URL, profile search by name + company, profile verification | "LinkedIn Profile" / "LinkedIn Company", "LinkedIn Profile Search", "Verify LinkedIn Profile" | A LinkedIn URL, or a name + company | LinkedIn Profile / Company whenever found; LinkedIn Profile Search per attempt, even without a match; Verify LinkedIn Profile per check, even without a match | | **Crustdata** | A company's LinkedIn page (and name) from its domain — only an unambiguous match counts; new funding rounds of watched companies | "LinkedIn Company Page (by Domain)" (single-cell fill window; also picked when only the domain is known and the LinkedIn company page is wanted); Watchlist → Companies → funding alert | A company domain | LinkedIn Company Page: no credits; funding alert: per company and month, like the other Watchlist alerts (see price list) | | **Data-collection platform** | LinkedIn imports — Sales Navigator search, Company Employees, Profile Search, Post Reactions, Post Comments | New List → LinkedIn import options | A LinkedIn search, company or post URL | Base + per result — see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" | | **Google search** | Finds a LinkedIn URL or a company website from a name; searches the open web throughout an AI Research run | "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)"; used throughout AI Research | A name + company, or your research brief | Always free | | **MillionVerifier** (email verification) | Checks whether an email is valid, invalid, catch-all or disposable, live against the mail server | "Verify Email Deliverability" | An email address | Costs credits, only for a valid, invalid or disposable result; catch-all and unknown cost no credits. Obviously invalid addresses are caught before the call at no charge; a result is reused for 7 days | | **Crunchbase** | Funding, technology and growth data for a company | "Company Profile Crunchbase" (Enrich menu, record panel) | A domain or company name | On a hit | | **Reddit / X (Twitter)** in AI Research | Community threads (Reddit) and posts (X) used as evidence for a match | AI Research → **Allowed AI tools** switches | Your research brief — no manual query needed | Per search call, whether or not it's useful (see AI Research pricing) | | **ListPlus company cache** | Reuses company data another customer already looked up for the same domain, instead of calling a provider again | Automatic inside "Company Lookup" — ListPlus checks the cache before calling CompanyEnrich | A domain | Always free — no provider call | ### Notes on this table - **"On a hit"** means the provider is only charged when it actually returns a value; a miss costs nothing. The exceptions are noted in the table and detailed in the price list. - Several rows share the same underlying provider under different button labels depending on where you start them (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window, or a Person Search card) — see "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" for how to tell them apart. - The ListPlus company cache is separate from any single provider's own caching: it's domain data shared across all ListPlus customers, and free to reuse. Person data (emails, phone numbers, job titles) is never shared between customers. - AI Research's core reasoning is billed by usage, not per provider call; only the opt-in sources in this table (Reddit, X) have a fixed per-call rate. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact numbers. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · price-list · what-does-one-contact-cost · categories-audience-database · ai-research. ### FAQ #### Is there one table that lists every data provider ListPlus uses? Yes — this page. Each row names the provider, what it delivers, where you trigger it in ListPlus, what input it needs, and when it charges. For the short version grouped by task, see "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)". #### Which provider does Segment Search use? Prospeo. It's a licensed B2B contact database that also powers "Contact Brief" and "Reveal Mobile Number" elsewhere in ListPlus. #### Which provider verifies my email addresses? MillionVerifier, checked live against the mail server. It charges credits only when the result is valid, invalid or disposable — catch-all and unknown results cost no credits, and obviously invalid addresses (bad format, disposable domains, role-based addresses) are marked invalid at no charge before the service is called. #### Does Google search cost credits anywhere? No. Google search is always free, whether it's finding a LinkedIn URL or company website by name, or searching the open web throughout an AI Research run. #### What's the difference between CompanyEnrich and the ListPlus company cache? CompanyEnrich is the provider that looks up a company's details from its domain or name, charged on a hit. ListPlus's company cache sits in front of it: when the cache already holds current data for a domain, the lookup is free and no new provider call is made. #### Where do Reddit and X results in AI Research come from, and do they cost extra? They're opt-in paid switches under **Allowed AI tools** in AI Research: Reddit search and X (Twitter) search, each charged per search call the agent makes, whether or not it turns up something useful. Exact rates are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### Which provider gives me funding and technology data for a company? Crunchbase provides funding, technology and growth data via "Company Profile Crunchbase," and Deep Company Profile in Person Search brings funding, technologies and open job titles together; each is charged on a hit. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the prices. #### Why do some providers appear twice under different labels? The same provider lookup can show a different button label depending on where you start it — the Enrich menu, the record panel, the single-cell fill window, or a Person Search card. "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" and the price list spell out every label for each lookup. #### What does Crustdata do in ListPlus? Crustdata finds a company's LinkedIn page from its domain ("LinkedIn Company Page (by Domain)", no credits) and checks watched companies for new funding rounds for the Watchlist funding alert. It receives only the company domain — no personal data — and only an unambiguous match is used. --- ## When enrichment sources disagree, which value is offered? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/which-source-wins Last updated: 2026-10-17 Looking up the same person or company more than once, or through more than one provider, can produce different values for the same field. This explains how ListPlus decides which one to offer, and the rule that comes first: **by default, enrichment only fills empty cells.** ### By default, enrichment only fills empty cells An enrichment you run on a list fills the cells by itself once results arrive — only the empty ones. The "Fill empty cells with enrichment data?" dialog appears only after an AI Analysis. The **Fill empty** tab of "Apply values" also writes only into empty cells. A value already in a cell, whether you typed it, pasted it or imported it, is left alone — except a first or last name cut to an initial ("Z."), which the full name completes. An existing value is replaced only when you set it up on purpose: the **Overwrite all** tab in "Apply values" (you tick each field), **Take over** in the Record panel on a value under "Different from the list", **Overwrite existing** when joining columns from another list, an AI command or cleanup you run that changes values, or a list rule's **Enrich** action whose **Cells** setting is "Replace empty and invalid values" or "Overwrite everything – including values entered by hand". ### One rule picks the best value When more than one source has returned a value for the same field on a row, ListPlus picks one value per field with one rule, used for filling cells, the Record panel and the best-value columns. - **Job title, company and seniority:** the most recent value wins, because people change jobs; source reliability only breaks a tie. - **E-mail:** an address a check found invalid loses; then an address at the row's current company; then, at the same domain, a verified address beats a catch-all or unchecked one; then the more recent one. - **Phone:** invalid loses, then a mobile beats a landline or main line, then a valid number, then the more recent one. - **Names, LinkedIn URL, domain:** by source reliability, then the newer value; AI-inferred values come last. - **City, state, country:** from the person's sources on a person row and from the company's sources on a company row. A check older than 90 days counts only as a hint. The rule decides which value is offered; it doesn't override a value already in the grid. ### Seeing every source for a row Click a row and open the **Record** panel. Under **From sources**, **Best values** shows the value ListPlus picked from all sources; hover its source icon to see the source, when it was retrieved and, for e-mail and phone, the last check. Below it, each source has its own line with all its values. **Related topics:** fill-empty-cells · take-over-and-join · list-editor-tour · enrichment-overview. ### FAQ #### If I've already typed a value into a cell, can enrichment overwrite it? Not by default. Filling cells from enrichment writes only into empty cells, so a value you typed or pasted is left alone unless you choose "Overwrite all" in Apply values, **Take over** in the Record panel on a value marked "Different from the list", "Overwrite existing" in a join, or run an AI command that changes it. A list rule's Enrich action can also be set to "Replace empty and invalid values" or "Overwrite everything – including values entered by hand". #### How does ListPlus pick a value when two providers found different data for the same field? It depends on the field. Job title, company and seniority take the most recent value. E-mail and phone follow their own order (invalid loses, current company and mobile first), and every other field goes by source reliability, with AI-inferred values last. #### Does a verified email always beat an unverified one? Not always. An address at the person's current company beats one at another company, even a verified one, and verified beats catch-all or unchecked only when both are at the same domain. A check older than 90 days counts only as a hint, but an address once found invalid keeps losing unless a newer check says otherwise. #### Where can I see which source a value came from? Open the Record panel for that row. Under "From sources", Best values shows the value ListPlus picked from all sources; hover its source icon to see the source, when it was retrieved and, for e-mail and phone, the last check. Below it, each source has its own line with all its values. #### Which job title or company does ListPlus use when sources disagree? The most recent one, because people change jobs. Source reliability only decides when two values are equally recent. #### Which email address does ListPlus pick when several sources found one? An address a check found invalid loses first. Then an address at the person's current company wins, then a verified one over a catch-all or unchecked one at the same domain, then the more recent address. #### Why was an older verified email replaced by a newer unverified one? A check older than 90 days counts only as a hint, so it no longer outweighs a newer address. An address with no check date still counts as freshly checked. #### Why does ListPlus prefer the work address at the current company over a verified one? A working address at the person's current company is more likely to reach them than a verified address from a former employer. Verified beats unchecked only when both are at the same domain. #### Which phone number does ListPlus pick, mobile or landline? An invalid number loses first, then a mobile beats a landline or main line, then a valid number, then the more recent one. A number from a company source is never treated as mobile. #### Is a city or country taken from the person or the company? On a person row it comes from the person's sources, on a company row from the company's sources. #### How do I deliberately replace a value that's already in a cell? Use "Overwrite all" (from "Apply values" in the Enrich menu), "Overwrite existing" (when joining columns from another list) or **Take over** in the Record panel on a value under "Different from the list" — all explicit, per-field choices, never automatic. #### Can an AI command change a value that's already in a cell? Yes — unlike enrichment fill, an AI command or cleanup you run acts on the cells you target and can change values that are already there, so review its result: changed cells are shown as suggestions until you click Apply in the list header. --- ## Wrong result or outdated data — what now? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/accuracy-and-wrong-results Last updated: 2026-10-17 Enrichment providers are good, but none of them are right 100% of the time. This topic covers the two most common ways a result can be wrong — namesakes and outdated job data — how to check a value you're unsure about, and what to do when you find one that's incorrect. ### Why a result can be wrong The two most common causes: the provider matched the wrong person because two people share a name (a namesake), or the person has since changed company or role and the data hasn't caught up yet. Less often, a provider simply holds a stale or mistyped record. See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for which provider stands behind each field, since accuracy depends on the provider, not on ListPlus. ### Namesakes and the wrong person If you're picking a person from search results and suspect you've got the wrong one, that's covered in "[Person not found — what now?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/not-found-what-now)" — it explains the ✓/✗ match badges on look-alike candidates and how to refine your search. If a row already in your list turns out to hold the wrong person's data, check the source first (see "Verify a value" below), then correct or re-run the lookup with more specific input (adding the company or a location helps the provider disambiguate). ### Outdated job or company data People change jobs, and a provider's record doesn't always update immediately. "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)" covers the automatic and on-demand ways ListPlus flags a row whose current company no longer matches what's in your list. When several sources hold a job title or company, ListPlus uses the most recent one. A LinkedIn headline is never used as a job title. ### Emails that bounce or look wrong For an email that looks suspicious or that bounced after sending, see "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)" — it covers the free format checks and the paid deliverability check that asks a mail server directly. ### A LinkedIn URL that looks wrong or dead To check whether a LinkedIn URL in your list still points to a real, existing profile, see "[LinkedIn data: find, fill and verify](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/linkedin-data)." ### Verify a value before you trust it Click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of the row. The Record panel opens. Under **From sources**, **Best values** shows the picked value with a source icon; hover it for the source and date. Below, every source has its own line, for example "Prospeo · Contact", "LinkedIn" (with Experience and Education), "LinkedIn search (Google)", "AI web research" or "AI analysis" — so you can see exactly which lookup produced the value and cross-check it against another source if you're unsure. ### What to do with a wrong result There's no in-app button to "report" a wrong result to ListPlus or to the provider behind it. Fix it yourself: edit the cell directly, or delete the row if it's simply the wrong person (select it and use the trash icon, or the selection bar's Delete option) — edits and deletions are saved automatically. If you believe a provider is returning wrong data systematically rather than a one-off mismatch, contact support — see "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" A single wrong enrichment result can also be removed on its own from the record panel: open the "⋯" menu on that source's line, choose **Remove data** and confirm with **Remove**. Its values are no longer used for best values or filling. **Related topics:** not-found-what-now · job-change-detection · email-quality-and-bounces · linkedin-data · where-does-the-data-come-from · contact-support. ### FAQ #### Is the data ListPlus shows me always accurate? No — no enrichment provider is right 100% of the time. The most common causes of a wrong result are namesakes (the provider matched a different person with the same name) and outdated job or company data. #### How do I check which provider a specific value came from? Click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of the row; in the Record panel that opens, Best values shows the picked value with a source icon (hover it for the source and date), and below it every source has its own line, such as "Prospeo · Contact", "CompanyEnrich · Company" or "LinkedIn". #### A row in my list has the wrong person's data — what do I do? Check the record panel to see which provider and lookup produced it. Then correct the cell yourself, or clear the wrong cells, add more specific input (company or location) and run the lookup again. Filling only writes into empty cells, so a wrong value that is still there isn't replaced; if it's the wrong person entirely, delete the row — changes are saved automatically. #### The company or job title looks out of date — how do I catch that? When several sources hold a job title or company, ListPlus uses the most recent one. Run "Detect Company Changes" from the Enrich menu, or the "Detect Job Changes" wizard for a fresh check — see "[Detecting job changes](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/job-change-detection)" for both. A flagged row shows the previous and new company in that row's record panel, under Signals. #### An email bounced even though ListPlus showed it as valid — what does that mean? A "valid" format doesn't guarantee delivery on its own; see "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)" for the paid deliverability check that asks a mail server directly, and what a verified result does and doesn't guarantee. #### Can I report a wrong result to ListPlus or to the data provider? There's no in-app "report this result" button. Correct the cell yourself, or delete the row if it's the wrong person entirely — edits and deletions are saved automatically. If you think a provider is returning wrong data as a pattern rather than a one-off, contact support and describe what you found. #### If I fix a wrong value myself, will ListPlus overwrite it again later? By default, filling from enrichment results never replaces a value that's already in a cell; the one exception is a first or last name cut to an initial ("Z."), which the full name completes. Only settings you choose on purpose can replace a value: **Take over** in the Record panel on a value under "Different from the list", "Overwrite all" in "[Transfer data record by record, or join columns from another list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/take-over-and-join)", an AI command that edits that column, or a list rule's Enrich action set to replace invalid values or overwrite everything. Your fix is saved automatically. #### Why is the LinkedIn headline not in my job title column? A LinkedIn headline is a tagline ("Helping teams grow"), not a job title, so no provider's headline is written into the job title. The job title comes from the person's current position. --- ## Where is my data stored? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-is-my-data Last updated: 2026-10-15 Your lists are stored by ListPlus, hosted on Vercel in the EU region Frankfurt. There's no separate "where is my data" toggle to check — this article covers where things are, how long they're kept, and what happens when you delete them. ### Hosting and storage location ListPlus runs on Vercel, with its servers and file storage in the EU region Frankfurt. A working data cache used for fast reads is also in Frankfurt. Some processing, such as AI features and enrichment lookups, is done by the providers named in "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)", and transfers are covered by data processing agreements. ### Your lists: stored until you delete them A list you create is kept indefinitely — there's no automatic expiry and no "inactive list" cleanup. It stays exactly as it is until you delete it yourself. Deleting a list is immediate and permanent: the list and all its rows are removed from ListPlus right away, and there's no trash, undo or restore, so export anything you want to keep first (see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)"). Lists belong to a workspace, and only the workspace's owner or an admin can delete one; for members the delete option isn't available (see "[Workspace roles and permissions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/roles-and-permissions)"). ### Your workspace's data Lists, the Watchlist and its folders, the Inbox, AI Research runs, the **History** in Find, pipelines, connected accounts and the Block List all belong to the **workspace**, and every member can see them (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). Your credit balance and plan belong to you personally, not to a workspace. When the owner deletes a workspace (**Delete workspace** in the workspace settings), everything in it is removed at once and permanently: all lists and their data, the Watchlist, the Inbox and its forwarding addresses, research runs, Find's History, pipelines and the links they sent, connected accounts, API connections, the Block List and the usage history. Credits and plan are not affected. See "[Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete)" for the steps. ### Data that expires automatically A few places are deliberately temporary, because they're meant to be picked up and saved, not stored indefinitely: - **Inbox**: a raw entry you drop into Inbox — pasted, sent by a tool, or an email you forward to your personal Inbox address (an inbound email service passes it to ListPlus first) — is deleted automatically **14 days** after it arrives. People you saved or added to a list from it stay. - **Shared result links** (the "Copy result link" on a person's result): each link works for **7 days from the moment it was created** — opening it doesn't extend that, so after a week it stops working however often it was viewed. Anyone with the link can open it; creating one needs a ListPlus account. - **AI Research runs**: every research is kept for **7 days** after it was started, whether it's still running, finished, or stopped (a research with your own AI: 1 to 7 days, as chosen under "Link valid for"). A research that adds its hits to a list automatically is kept **30 days**. Researches are stored in your workspace, so every member sees them on any device. - **Links in pipeline e-mails**: an e-mail sent by a pipeline contains links to a contact card per entry and an overview with a download. These links work for **30 days from sending** for anyone who has them, even without a ListPlus account, so forwarding the mail shares them. They stop working earlier if the pipeline or the workspace is deleted, and the pipeline's History is also kept for 30 days. See "[Sending entries by e-mail to your team](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-pipeline)". - **Recently viewed**: a contact you merely looked at (never saved, filed into a folder, or enriched — a profile where at least one lookup found data counts as enriched) isn't on the Watchlist — it only shows under "Recently viewed" at the bottom of the Watchlist page's left column (and among the last 6 on Person Search; up to 50 kept in storage, beyond 50 the oldest drop out first) and drops out after **30 days** of no further activity. Contacts you keep — saved, filed into a folder, or enriched — are on the Watchlist and don't expire. - **Help chat**: every question you ask the help chat and its answer are kept for **30 days**, with the page, the language and your plan — never your name, user id, email address or IP address. They are used to improve the answers. None of this touches your lists — expiry only applies to these temporary, not-yet-saved places. ### Usage events ListPlus records which features are used, as pseudonymous usage events in PostHog's EU cloud (Frankfurt): a hashed account id, your plan and the event — never names, email addresses or list contents. You can turn it off for your account under Settings → Profile & sign-in → **Usage evaluation**, and a workspace owner can switch it off for the whole workspace in the Workspace policy. See "[Usage evaluation: what ListPlus counts and how to switch it off](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/usage-evaluation)" for details. ### Backups Apart from **Undo** (⌘Z / Ctrl+Z) for edits and deleted rows while the list is still open in the same session, ListPlus has no self-service "restore a previous version" or "undo a delete" feature, so treat every delete as final and export what matters first. For questions about backups and retention at ListPlus's hosting providers, email support@listplus.ai. ### Closing your account Deleting individual lists, contacts on the Watchlist or Inbox entries is something you do yourself in the app, and a workspace owner can delete a whole workspace with everything in it. You can also delete your entire account and all associated data yourself: the **Delete account** button in Settings → Profile & sign-in deletes your account, every workspace you own and your personal data in one step, with no undo. The deletion runs in the background and, if it's interrupted, is resumed automatically until it's complete. See "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for what that covers, and "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)" for cancelling a subscription without deleting anything. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · delete-account-and-data · cancel-downgrade-leave · export-overview. ### FAQ #### Where is my data physically stored? ListPlus is hosted on Vercel in the EU region Frankfurt, and its working data cache is also in Frankfurt. AI features and enrichment lookups are processed by the providers named in "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)", under data processing agreements. #### How long are my lists kept? Indefinitely — a list stays exactly as it is until you delete it yourself. There's no automatic expiry or inactivity cleanup for lists. #### If I delete a list, can I get it back? No — deleting a list removes it from ListPlus immediately, with no trash, undo or restore. Export the list first (⋯ menu → Export Data) if you might want the data later. See "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for how to delete a list. #### How long do Inbox entries stay before they're deleted? 14 days after they arrive; each entry shows its expiry date. People you saved or added to a list from an entry stay — only the raw entry is deleted. #### How long does a shared result link stay active? 7 days from the moment it was created. Opening it doesn't extend that window, so the link stops working a week after creation however often it was viewed; share the profile again for a fresh link. #### What happens to the data when a workspace is deleted? Everything in the workspace is deleted permanently at once: lists and their rows, the Watchlist, the Inbox and its forwarding addresses, research runs, pipelines and the links they sent, connected accounts, API connections, the Block List and usage history. Only the owner can do this, and there's no undo, so export anything you want to keep first. The owner's credits and plan are not affected. #### How long are AI Research runs kept? 7 days from when the run was started, regardless of whether it's still running, finished, or you stopped it (a research with your own AI: 1 to 7 days, as chosen under "Link valid for"). A research that adds its hits to a list automatically is kept 30 days. Add any results you want to keep to a list before that window closes. #### Do "recently viewed" contacts disappear? Yes, if you only viewed them. A contact you looked at but never saved, filed into a folder, or enriched (a profile where at least one lookup found data counts as enriched) isn't on the Watchlist — it shows under "Recently viewed" on the Watchlist page (beyond 50 stored, the oldest drop out first) and drops out entirely after 30 days of no further activity. Contacts you keep — saved, filed into a folder, or enriched — are on the Watchlist and don't expire. #### Does ListPlus back up my data? Apart from Undo (⌘Z / Ctrl+Z) for edits and deleted rows while the list is still open in the same session, ListPlus has no self-service "restore a previous version" or "undo a delete" feature, so treat every delete as final and export what matters first. For questions about backups and retention at ListPlus's hosting providers, email support@listplus.ai. #### Is ListPlus GDPR-compliant? ListPlus hosts your data in the EU (Frankfurt) and has a data processing agreement (DPA) that applies to every plan (listplus.ai/dpa); for a signed copy, email support@listplus.ai. See "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for exercising deletion rights on your account. #### Can I delete my whole account and all my data? Yes — the Delete account button in Settings → Profile & sign-in deletes your account and all your data together, immediately and with no undo; see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for exactly what's covered. To just stop paying without deleting anything, see "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)" instead. #### Do enrichment providers store my data too? Providers receive only the identifier needed for that lookup — an email address, a domain, a LinkedIn URL, a name and company, or a company name — never your other columns. See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for which provider handles which lookup. #### Does ListPlus keep what I ask the help chat? Yes, for 30 days: the question, the answer, the page, the language and your plan — never your name, user id, email address or IP address. After 30 days each exchange is deleted automatically. --- ## Who processes your data (subprocessors) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/subprocessors Last updated: 2026-10-19 A subprocessor is another company that processes data on ListPlus's behalf to run part of the product — hosting your lists, verifying an email, or taking a payment. This page lists ListPlus's subprocessors by category. The complete, current list with every provider's name, seat, the data it receives, its third-country safeguard and the workspace switch that stops the transfer is published at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors (German: listplus.ai/de/subprocessors) — it is the same list as Annex 3 of the DPA. ### Hosting and file storage **Vercel**, in the EU region Frankfurt. Runs the ListPlus application, stores your lists and uploaded files, and collects usage and performance statistics. ### Working data store A database used for fast reads while you work in a list, located in the EU (Frankfurt region). It is separate from the long-term storage above. ### Data providers (lookups) When you enrich or search for a contact, the specific provider for that lookup — Prospeo, FullEnrich, CompanyEnrich, MillionVerifier, Crustdata, a specialised LinkedIn data provider, or Google search (also used for the web searches in AI Research) — receives only the identifier needed (an email, domain, LinkedIn URL, a name and company, or a company name), never your whole list. Crustdata receives only a company domain: it finds a company's LinkedIn page and checks watched companies for new funding rounds. See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for which provider handles which lookup. ### Data collection for imports and AI Research A data-collection platform runs LinkedIn imports (Sales Navigator, Company Employees and others), Crunchbase company lookups (the Crunchbase page is found with a Google search for the company name), and the optional Reddit and X sources in AI Research. **Algolia** powers the optional Hacker News search in AI Research. They receive the search URL, the company URL or the research query, never your list. ### Email service (inbound and outbound) When you forward an email to your personal Inbox forwarding address, an email service receives it first and passes the message to ListPlus, which keeps the body and supported attachments as Inbox entries (see "[Where is my data stored?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-is-my-data)" for how long). It only processes mail sent to that one address, never your regular mailbox. The same email service also sends the emails ListPlus sends on your behalf from notifications@listplus.ai: workspace invitations (the invitee's address, your name and the workspace name) and the digest mails of an Team email pipeline (the recipients' addresses and, per entry, name, position, company and links). It also delivers a help chat conversation you send to support with "Send to support". It doesn't send the one-time login codes; those come from the sign-in service below. ### AI model providers AI model providers process the text ListPlus's AI features send them (commands, checks, AI Column, AI Research, Inbox recognition). See "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)" for exactly what each request includes. ### Authentication A sign-in service handles your email address and sends your one-time login codes by email. If you choose "Sign in with Google", Google confirms the sign-in and learns that you sign in to ListPlus. ### Usage analytics and error logs **PostHog** (EU cloud, Frankfurt) receives pseudonymous usage events — which feature was used when, with a hashed account id and your plan. It never receives names, email addresses or list contents. You can turn it off under Settings → Profile & sign-in → **Usage evaluation**, and a workspace owner can switch it off for everyone in the Workspace policy. Server logs stay with our host Vercel; an error in your browser is only counted (on which kind of page), without the error text. ### Realtime updates A messaging service delivers live status updates to your browser (for example, when an import or enrichment finishes). ### OAuth connector When you connect a CRM, spreadsheet or other tool (HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Google Sheets, Airtable, Notion, Slack, Lemlist, Instantly and others), a dedicated connector service holds those login credentials — ListPlus itself doesn't store those logins. The connector service also carries the records you import, sync or send to a connected tool, and the events of App events (form answers, bookings, messages). ### Account emails When you sign up, ListPlus adds you to its CRM system: your email address and user ID, later your plan and key account events (sign-up, first list, first enrichment, first flow, joining a workspace, buying a plan or credits, cancelling) — never the contents of your lists. The CRM system sends you a welcome email about your new account; it is part of your account, not advertising. Deleting your account deletes these entries; only your email address stays on a suppression list so you are never contacted again. ### Account record Your account, your workspaces and your plan are kept in ListPlus's own working data store in the EU (Frankfurt region). When you pay, Stripe notifies ListPlus, which sets the purchased plan on your account. ### Payment Subscriptions and credit packs are sold through **Stripe Managed Payments**. **Sold Through Link, LLC** (South San Francisco, USA), a Stripe company, handles the sale for us as merchant of record: it runs the checkout, calculates and collects the VAT, issues receipts and invoices, handles refunds and payment questions, and keeps your Link account if you create one. Stripe processes the payment (in the EU, Stripe Technology Europe, Limited), screens it for fraud and handles disputes. For the purchase and the Link account, Link and Stripe decide for themselves how they use the data; their own privacy notices apply. Some subprocessors process data outside the EU. The safeguard for each transfer is on listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. ### Switching a provider off A workspace owner can switch off individual providers and features for the whole workspace under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. The public list names the switch for each provider. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · where-is-my-data · dpa-avv. ### FAQ #### Which other companies process my data? Each subprocessor handles one part of the product: hosting (Vercel, EU Frankfurt), a working data store, the data provider of a lookup, a data-collection platform for imports and AI Research, an email service, AI model providers, sign-in, usage analytics and error logs, realtime updates, a connector for connected tools, account emails, an account record and payments (Stripe). The complete list with every name and seat is at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. #### Who processes emails I forward to my Inbox? An email service receives mail sent to your personal Inbox forwarding address and passes the message to ListPlus, which stores the body and supported attachments as Inbox entries. It only sees mail sent to that one address, never your regular mailbox. #### Which company hosts ListPlus? Vercel, in the EU region Frankfurt. ListPlus's application and your uploaded files run and are stored there. #### Do data providers see my whole list when I enrich a contact? No. A data provider (such as Prospeo, FullEnrich or CompanyEnrich) receives only the identifier needed for that one lookup — an email, domain, LinkedIn URL, or a name and company — never the rest of your list. #### Who manages my login when I connect a CRM or Google Sheets? A dedicated connector service holds those credentials on ListPlus's behalf. ListPlus itself never stores or sees your CRM or Google login. The connector service also carries the records you import, sync or send to that tool. #### Who stores my email address when I sign up? ListPlus's CRM system stores your email address, user ID, plan and key account events (never list contents) and sends your welcome email. Your account itself, with the plan you bought, stays in ListPlus's own data store in the EU. #### Which company handles payments? Stripe, through Stripe Managed Payments: Sold Through Link, LLC, a Stripe company, handles the sale for us as merchant of record and is the name on your checkout and invoice, and Stripe processes the payment, for subscriptions and credit packs on every plan. #### Does ListPlus use its own database, or another company's? ListPlus uses a working data store, hosted in the EU (Frankfurt region), for fast reads while you work in a list, separate from the long-term file storage on Vercel. #### Which AI provider processes ListPlus's AI features? AI model providers process the text ListPlus's AI features send them. See "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)" for exactly what's included in a request — never your whole list. #### Is there a complete subprocessor list with exact locations for every provider? Yes. The complete list with every provider's name, seat, the data it receives, its third-country safeguard and the workspace switch that stops it is published at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. It is the same list as Annex 3 of the DPA. #### Who sends workspace invitations and pipeline emails? The same email service that receives forwarded Inbox mail sends them, from notifications@listplus.ai. It processes the recipients' email addresses and the mail content — for an invitation your name and the workspace name, for a pipeline digest each entry's name, position, company and links. Login codes are sent separately by the sign-in service. #### Does ListPlus track how I use the app? ListPlus sends pseudonymous usage events (which feature was used when) to PostHog in its EU cloud — never names, email addresses or list contents. Turn off **Usage evaluation** under Settings → Profile & sign-in, or, as workspace owner, switch usage events off for the whole workspace in the Workspace policy. #### Can I stop ListPlus from sending data to a specific provider? Yes. The workspace owner can switch off individual data providers and features under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy; no member and no agent can use them afterwards. listplus.ai/en/subprocessors names the switch for each provider. --- ## Data processing agreement (DPA / AVV) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/dpa-avv Last updated: 2026-10-11 A data processing agreement (DPA), called Auftragsverarbeitungsvertrag (AVV) in German, is the contract that governs how ListPlus processes personal data on your behalf under GDPR. It's separate from your subscription terms. ### The DPA applies to every plan The DPA applies to every plan — Basic, Pro and Premium — as part of the user agreement: you do not have to request or sign anything for it to hold. You can read it at listplus.ai/dpa. If your company needs a signed copy, email support@listplus.ai with your company name. ### What ListPlus does and doesn't claim ListPlus hosts your data in the EU (Frankfurt) and the DPA applies on every plan, but ListPlus itself holds no security certification of its own (no ISO 27001, SOC 2, or similar). Vercel, ListPlus's hosting provider, holds its own certifications (including SOC 2 Type 2 and ISO 27001:2022) — that's Vercel's certification, not ListPlus's, and covers Vercel's infrastructure. Some processing, such as AI features and enrichment lookups, is done by subprocessors, and transfers are covered by data processing agreements; see "[Where is my data stored?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-is-my-data)". This article explains how the DPA applies and what ListPlus does and doesn't claim about it — it is not legal advice. For your own obligations when using contact data (legitimate interest, informing people you've added them, cold-outreach rules), see "[Your responsibilities under GDPR](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities)." **Related topics:** where-is-my-data · subprocessors · gdpr-your-responsibilities. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus offer a DPA / AVV? Yes. The data processing agreement (AVV in German) applies to every plan — Basic, Pro and Premium — as part of the user agreement, and you can read it at listplus.ai/dpa. You do not have to request it. #### How do I request a DPA? You don't need to: the DPA applies automatically on every plan and is published at listplus.ai/dpa. For a signed copy, email support@listplus.ai with your company name. #### Is a DPA available on the free Basic plan, or only paid plans? Every plan, including Basic. The DPA isn't gated by plan: it is part of the user agreement for all customers. #### Does ListPlus hold ISO 27001, SOC 2, or similar certifications itself? ListPlus doesn't hold a certification in its own name. Its hosting provider, Vercel, holds SOC 2 Type 2 and ISO 27001:2022 for the infrastructure ListPlus runs on. For security questions, email security@listplus.ai. #### Does signing a DPA with ListPlus cover the data providers you use (Prospeo, FullEnrich, and so on)? The DPA covers ListPlus as the party you contract with; the providers behind individual lookups act as subprocessors. See "[Who processes your data (subprocessors)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/subprocessors)" for the categories and named providers, or email support@listplus.ai for the full list with locations. #### Is this page legal advice? No. This page explains how to get a DPA and what ListPlus does and doesn't claim; it isn't a substitute for legal advice about your own GDPR obligations. #### Where else can I read about ListPlus's data handling? See the help topics "[Where is my data stored?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-is-my-data)", "[Who processes your data (subprocessors)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/subprocessors)" and "[What the AI sees of your data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/what-the-ai-sees)." For anything else, email support@listplus.ai. --- ## Your responsibilities under GDPR Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities Last updated: 2026-10-15 This page is general orientation, not legal advice — talk to a lawyer about your specific outreach before relying on it. ListPlus helps you find and enrich B2B contact data, but you decide who to contact and how, so under GDPR you are the controller for that use. ### You are the controller for your outreach ListPlus processes data on your behalf when you search, enrich or export a list, but once you use that data — for example to send an email — you decide the purpose and means of that processing. That makes you the controller for your own outreach, with the obligations that come with it (a lawful basis, honesty about where the data came from, and honoring objections). ### Legitimate interest needs a balancing test B2B outreach is commonly based on "legitimate interest" (GDPR Art. 6(1)(f)) rather than consent. That basis is not automatic: it requires weighing your business interest in reaching out against the individual's interest in not being contacted, considering things like their role, whether the outreach is relevant to their job, and whether they'd reasonably expect it. It does not cover every kind of contact or every audience — a lawyer can help you judge where your outreach falls. ### The duty to tell people where their data came from When you didn't collect someone's data directly from them — which is the normal case for enriched or purchased contact data — GDPR's Art. 14 requires telling them certain information, including the source of their data, within a reasonable period and at the latest within one month — and if you use the data to contact them, at the latest when you first contact them. You also need to tell people about their right to object when you first contact them (Art. 21(4)). See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for the specific provider behind each lookup, which you'll need to answer that question accurately. ### The right to object, and suppressing contacts Anyone you contact under legitimate interest has the right to object at any time, and once they do, you should stop contacting them. ListPlus's Block List (Settings — the gear icon at the bottom of the left rail → Block list) is built for exactly this: add an email or domain once and ListPlus flags every matching row across your lists with the "On the block list" check, so you don't re-contact them by accident. It only flags matches inside ListPlus — it does not filter Segment Search results or block enrichment. The full mechanics, including the separate automated do-not-contact check, are covered in "[Block List and the do-not-contact check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/do-not-contact-and-block-list)." ### Cold email and cold-call rules in Germany and DACH In Germany, the Act Against Unfair Competition (UWG §7(2)) generally requires the recipient's prior express consent before you send marketing email — to businesses as well as consumers. There is a narrow exception for existing customers (§7(3)), which does not cover contacts you sourced to approach for the first time. B2B marketing calls need at least the recipient's presumed consent. Austria and Switzerland also generally require consent for marketing email — get advice from a lawyer familiar with your market before running a cold outreach campaign. ### Exported files carry no source note A file export (CSV/Excel) writes out only the columns you select, with no added "source" or "provenance" field — so if you need to state where a contact's data came from, keep track of it yourself before or after export. Inside ListPlus, click the small number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of a row to see that row's enrichment results, each labelled with the provider it came from. For someone asking about their own data (a deletion or information request), see "[Someone asks where I got their data, or wants it deleted](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/data-subject-requests)" for what to do and what ListPlus can provide. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · do-not-contact-and-block-list · data-subject-requests · dpa-avv · subprocessors. ### FAQ #### Is this page legal advice? No. This page explains general principles so you know what to think about; it is not a substitute for advice from a lawyer about your specific outreach, market and audience. #### Am I allowed to email a business contact I find through ListPlus? That depends on your legal basis and, in Germany and similar markets, on cold-email rules like UWG §7 — ListPlus doesn't determine or guarantee this for you. Get advice from a lawyer before running outreach based on data you sourced through ListPlus. #### What is "legitimate interest" and does it cover B2B outreach? Legitimate interest (GDPR Art. 6(1)(f)) is a lawful basis some companies rely on for B2B outreach instead of consent, but it requires weighing your interest in contacting someone against their interest in not being contacted. It's not automatic or unconditional — whether it applies to a given contact and message is a legal judgment call. #### Do I have to tell someone where I got their data? Generally yes, when the data wasn't collected from them directly — GDPR's Art. 14 requires giving them certain information, including the source, within a reasonable period (at most one month), and no later than your first message if you contact them. "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" names the provider behind each ListPlus lookup so you can answer accurately. #### What happens if someone asks me to stop contacting them? They have the right to object, and once they do, you should stop contacting them going forward. Add their email or domain to your Block List (gear icon → Block List) so ListPlus flags any matching row in your lists before you contact them again. #### Does ListPlus check my lists against a do-not-contact or suppression list? Yes — your Block List (Settings — the gear icon at the bottom of the left rail → Block list) flags rows whose email, company domain or website matches (subdomains included) an entry you've added with the "On the block list" check, and a separate automated check flags obviously unreachable addresses like noreply or unsubscribe. See "[Block List and the do-not-contact check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/do-not-contact-and-block-list)" for how both work. #### Can I send cold emails to businesses in Germany? Generally, German law (UWG §7(2)) requires the recipient's prior express consent before you send marketing email to a business, with a narrow exception for existing customers that doesn't cover new contacts. B2B marketing calls need at least the recipient's presumed consent, and these are general rules with exceptions, so confirm your approach with a lawyer. #### Do exported files show where each contact's data came from? No — a file export contains only the columns you select, no added source or provenance field, so it doesn't carry over. To check a value's source before exporting, click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of a row to see that row's enrichment results labelled by provider. #### Someone is asking where I got their data or wants it deleted — what do I do? See "[Someone asks where I got their data, or wants it deleted](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/data-subject-requests)" for the steps to take and what ListPlus can provide to help you respond. #### Is ListPlus responsible for making sure my outreach is GDPR-compliant? No. You decide who to contact and how, so you are the controller for your outreach and responsible for its legal basis. ListPlus can't guarantee that any use of the data is lawful. --- ## Someone asks where I got their data, or wants it deleted Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/data-subject-requests Last updated: 2026-10-03 If someone in one of your lists asks where you got their information, or asks you to delete it, that request is addressed to you, not to ListPlus. As covered in "[Your responsibilities under GDPR](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities)," you're the controller for the contacts you source and contact through ListPlus, so answering data-subject requests like these is your responsibility. ListPlus is not a party to that conversation and doesn't answer on your behalf. ### What the person can ask for Under GDPR a person can ask for access to their data, including any available information about its source (Art. 15, 15(1)(g)). They can ask for erasure (Art. 17) and object to direct marketing (Art. 21). You generally have to respond without undue delay and within one month; that can be extended by two further months where necessary (Art. 12(3)). Exceptions exist, so check with a lawyer. ### What ListPlus gives you to answer with - **The source of a value.** Click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of the row. The row's record panel opens, and each enrichment result there is headed with its provider and type, for example "Prospeo · Contact". See "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" for what each provider covers. The record panel only shows sources for enrichment results — for rows you imported from a file or from LinkedIn, the source is that file or import, so keep track of it yourself. - **Removing a row.** Select the row (or rows) and use the selection bar's **⋯** menu → **Delete**; the deletion is saved automatically about a second later — see "[Selecting rows and the selection bar](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/selecting-rows)" for the exact steps. This removes the row from that list only, not from other lists, the Watchlist, the Inbox, a file you exported, or a CRM you pushed it to. - **Several workspaces.** Each workspace has its own lists, Watchlist, Inbox and pipelines, so if you work in more than one, check each of them for the person (switch workspaces in the Home header or the avatar menu). If a whole workspace is no longer needed, its owner can delete it with everything in it at once — see "[Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete)". - **The Block List.** Add the person's email or domain in the Settings panel (gear icon at the bottom of the left rail) → **Block List** so ListPlus flags any matching row across the workspace's lists going forward (each workspace has its own Block List) — useful once someone objects to being contacted again. It flags rows for review; it doesn't delete anything by itself. See "[Block List and the do-not-contact check](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/do-not-contact-and-block-list)." ### What ListPlus does not do ListPlus does not contact the person for you, does not confirm deletion to them, and does not keep a record you can hand over as proof of a completed request. A file export carries no added source field, so if you'll need to answer "where did this come from" later, note the provider from the record panel before you export or delete the row. This page is general orientation, not legal advice — for how to phrase a response, applicable deadlines, or anything beyond what's described here, talk to a lawyer. **Related topics:** gdpr-your-responsibilities · where-does-the-data-come-from · do-not-contact-and-block-list · selecting-rows · delete-account-and-data. ### FAQ #### Someone asked where I got their data — what do I do? Answer them yourself; you're the controller for the contacts you source through ListPlus, not ListPlus. Click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of the row to open its record panel, where each enrichment result is headed with its provider and type, for example "Prospeo · Contact", then use that in your reply. #### How long do I have to respond to a data request? You generally have to respond without undue delay and within one month of the request, extendable by two further months where necessary under GDPR Article 12(3). People can ask for access to their data including its source, erasure, or to object to direct marketing. Exceptions exist, so check with a lawyer for your specific case. #### Someone asked me to delete their data — does ListPlus do that for me? No — ListPlus doesn't contact people or process deletion requests on your behalf. You remove the row yourself: select it, use the selection bar's ⋯ menu → Delete, and the deletion is saved automatically about a second later. #### Does deleting the row also remove it from an export or CRM I already sent it to? No — this removes the row from that list only, not from other lists, the Watchlist, the Inbox, a file you exported, or a CRM you pushed it to. Remove it separately wherever else you've already sent it. #### I work in several workspaces — where do I have to look for someone's data? In every workspace you belong to, because each one has its own lists, Watchlist, Inbox and pipelines. Switch workspaces in the Home header or the avatar menu and search each one; if a whole workspace is no longer needed, its owner can delete it with all its data at once. #### How do I find which provider a specific value came from? Click the number badge in the sparkles column at the right edge of the row; the record panel that opens headers each enrichment result with its provider and type, for example "Prospeo · Contact". #### Should I add the person to the Block List after a request like this? It's a sensible step if they've objected to being contacted again: add their email or domain in Settings (the gear icon at the bottom of the left rail) → Block list, and ListPlus flags any matching row across that workspace's lists going forward (each workspace has its own Block List). It doesn't delete the row for you — you still do that yourself. Keeping their email on the Block List after an erasure request means you keep that one data point; ask a lawyer whether to keep it. #### Can ListPlus confirm to the person that their data was deleted? No — ListPlus isn't party to that request, so it can't send a confirmation on your behalf. Any reply to the person has to come from you. #### Is this page legal advice on handling data-subject requests? No. It describes what ListPlus provides so you can respond; it isn't a substitute for legal advice on deadlines, required content, or how to phrase your reply. #### What if I want to delete my whole account, not just one contact's data? That's a different request — see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)" for how to close your own ListPlus account, which is separate from responding to someone else's data request. --- ## LinkedIn imports and your responsibilities Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/linkedin-imports-legal Last updated: 2026-09-25 This page covers the two questions people ask before running a LinkedIn import in ListPlus: does it touch my own LinkedIn account, and whose responsibility is it to make sure this fits LinkedIn's rules and the law where I operate. It's general orientation, not legal advice. ### Your account is never used Every LinkedIn import — a Sales Navigator search, a company's employees, a profile search, or a post's reactions or comments — runs through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side. It never signs in with your LinkedIn account, never uses your session, and doesn't need you to connect or share a LinkedIn login. The same is true for individual LinkedIn lookups elsewhere in ListPlus (profile and company enrichment, profile search, URL verification) — see "[Where does the data come from?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-does-the-data-come-from)" ### Whether to run an import is your call LinkedIn publishes its own User Agreement and professional community policies covering automated data collection from its site, and those terms can change. Whether running a LinkedIn import, and what you then do with the result, fits those terms and the law that applies to you (including data protection law) is something only you can judge for your situation — ListPlus doesn't determine or guarantee this for you, and this page doesn't interpret LinkedIn's terms on your behalf. Read LinkedIn's current terms directly on linkedin.com, and check with a lawyer before relying on imported LinkedIn data for anything with legal weight, especially commercial outreach. ### Once you have the data, GDPR responsibilities still apply A LinkedIn import gives you personal data about people who didn't hand it to you directly, so once you use it — for example to contact someone — the same controller responsibilities apply as to any other enriched contact: a lawful basis, telling people where their data came from, and honoring objections. See "[Your responsibilities under GDPR](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities)" for what that involves. **Related topics:** linkedin-imports · where-does-the-data-come-from · gdpr-your-responsibilities · data-subject-requests. ### FAQ #### Does a LinkedIn import in ListPlus use my own LinkedIn account or session? No. It runs through a specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side; it never signs in as you and never uses your LinkedIn account or session, so you don't need to connect a LinkedIn login. #### Is it legal or allowed to import data from LinkedIn this way? ListPlus doesn't determine or guarantee that for you — it depends on LinkedIn's own terms and the law that applies to your situation. This page is general orientation, not legal advice; check LinkedIn's current terms and talk to a lawyer before relying on this data, especially for commercial use. #### Who is responsible for making sure a LinkedIn import fits LinkedIn's terms? You are. ListPlus provides the import feature and runs it through its data provider, but deciding to run an import against a specific search or page, and what you do with the results, is your decision and your responsibility to check against LinkedIn's rules. #### Where can I read LinkedIn's own rules about this? Directly on linkedin.com — LinkedIn publishes its own User Agreement and professional community policies, and ListPlus doesn't reproduce or interpret them here since they can change independently of ListPlus. #### Does this apply to all LinkedIn-related features, or only the five import types? The same "your responsibility, never your account" answer applies to every LinkedIn-related feature in ListPlus — the five import types (Sales Navigator, company employees, profile search, post reactions, post comments) and the individual profile/company lookups and URL verification in the Enrich menu. #### Do I still need to tell people where I got their data if it came from a LinkedIn import? Generally yes, the same as for any enriched contact: GDPR's Art. 14 duty to name the source applies (with narrow exceptions). See "[Your responsibilities under GDPR](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/gdpr-your-responsibilities)" for what that requires and when. #### Is this page a substitute for legal advice about scraping or data protection law? No. It explains what ListPlus does (never your account) and points out that fitting LinkedIn's terms and applicable law is your responsibility; for an actual legal opinion, talk to a lawyer familiar with your market. --- ## Provider: CompanyEnrich Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-companyenrich Last updated: 2026-10-15 CompanyEnrich is ListPlus's primary provider for company details, and also powers a shared, free company cache and a few record-panel extras built on top of the same company data. **What it delivers.** Company Lookup: name, domain, website, industry, employee count, LinkedIn company URL, address, revenue, founded year and social links, from a domain (or a company name in the wizard and single-cell window). A paid email-to-person lookup (single-cell fill window, and automatically when FullEnrich finds nobody for an email — the answer counts only when the name fits the address). Record-panel extras: "Workforce Insights" (observed employee count and headcount by department), "Find Employees" (adds up to 10 decision-makers as new list rows) and "Similar Companies" (5 lookalike companies). **Markets** in Segments: the number of companies that match a set of filters, per region, industry, NAICS code, size and more, and the companies themselves on request. **Where in ListPlus.** "Company Lookup" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window); "Company Profile" (Person Search); "Contact Profile (by Email)" in the single-cell fill window, and as the fallback behind FullEnrich's "Contact Profile (by Email)" in the Enrich menu and the record panel; "Workforce Insights," "Find Employees" and "Similar Companies" in the record panel's company section. **Inputs needed.** A domain or company name for Company Lookup; an email address for the person lookup; a domain for Workforce Insights, Find Employees and Similar Companies. **Coverage & freshness.** CompanyEnrich looks up its own current company dataset live at the moment you run the lookup; ListPlus doesn't hold a separate freshness figure for it. **Credits & charge rule.** Charged only on a hit; a miss, or a domain already in the free company cache, costs nothing. Markets does not follow this rule, it is priced by itself: a calculation of a new filter combination costs credits (also when the result is zero), and so does each company loaded. Exact amounts are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" and "[Company data: by domain vs by name](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/company-data)." **What the provider receives from us.** Only the domain, company name or email needed for that one lookup — never your whole list. An email address also reaches CompanyEnrich when FullEnrich finds nobody for it. In Markets it receives the filters you set and what you type to search keywords or technologies — nothing about you or your lists. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** According to CompanyEnrich's privacy policy and Trust Center (checked September 2026), its legal entity is registered in Turkey and its production compute, databases and backups are hosted in Finland. Its public privacy policy cites legitimate interests and, where required, your consent as its legal bases for processing. **Caching.** Company data is the same for every customer who looks up the same domain, so ListPlus keeps a free, shared cache per domain: once anyone has looked up a domain, a later Company Lookup for that domain costs nothing and doesn't call CompanyEnrich again. The extras (Workforce Insights, Similar Companies and Find Employees, each charged on a hit) are not cached and are billed again each time. The email lookup is reused for 7 days in your account when it returned data. **Related topics:** company-data · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · price-list. ### FAQ #### What does CompanyEnrich do inside ListPlus? CompanyEnrich is ListPlus's main provider for company details — industry, employee count, location and more — looked up from a domain or company name, plus a few record-panel extras (Workforce Insights, Find Employees, Similar Companies). #### Where do the company numbers in Markets come from? From CompanyEnrich's company database: ListPlus asks it how many companies match your filters and, on request, for the companies themselves. Only the filters, and what you type to search keywords or technologies, are sent — nothing about you or your lists. #### Does CompanyEnrich work by domain or by company name? In the Enrich menu, Company Lookup works by domain only. To search by company name, use the Company Enrichment wizard or the single-cell fill window on an empty company cell; a name match is less certain than a domain match, so check that the company found is the one you meant. #### What is the free company cache, and is it CompanyEnrich's own caching? It's ListPlus's own cache of company details. When it already holds current data for a domain, the lookup costs no credits and CompanyEnrich isn't called again. #### What does CompanyEnrich receive from ListPlus? Only the domain, company name or email needed for that one lookup — never the rest of your list. #### What are Workforce Insights, Find Employees and Similar Companies? Three record-panel extras built on CompanyEnrich data: Workforce Insights gives observed employee count and headcount by department, Find Employees adds up to 10 decision-makers as new list rows, and Similar Companies returns 5 lookalike companies. All three need a company domain, cost credits and are charged on a hit (the prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). #### Are the record-panel extras cached like Company Lookup is? No. Workforce Insights, Find Employees and Similar Companies are billed again each time you run them, even for the same company. #### Where is CompanyEnrich based, and where is the data hosted? According to CompanyEnrich's privacy policy and Trust Center (checked September 2026), its legal entity is registered in Turkey and its production compute, databases and backups are hosted in Finland. --- ## Provider: Crunchbase Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-crunchbase Last updated: 2026-10-15 Crunchbase supplies funding and investor data for companies. It's available from a list: **Company Profile Crunchbase** in the Enrich menu or a row's record panel, and as an optional step in the enrichment assistants. **What it delivers.** Funding rounds, investors, revenue estimates, founding year, tech stack and growth signals for a company, pulled from its public Crunchbase profile. **Where in ListPlus.** "Company Profile Crunchbase" in the Enrich menu's company section (appears whenever your list has a company-name column), a matching card in a row's record panel, and an optional step in the enrichment assistants. It isn't currently offered from Person Search, Segment Search or the Analyze panel's fix-it suggestions. **Inputs needed.** A company name; the record panel prefers a domain when one is known. An uncommon name can be ambiguous, so check the result against the company you meant. **Coverage & freshness.** Only companies with a Crunchbase profile return data — many smaller or non-US companies have none. Results reflect whatever is currently published on that company's Crunchbase page. **Credits & charge rule.** Costs credits, charged only when a matching Crunchbase profile is found; no match costs nothing. The price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". **What the provider receives from us.** Only the company name (or domain) being looked up, never the rest of your list. ListPlus finds the Crunchbase page with a Google search for the company name and reads that public page through its data-collection platform — there is no contract with Crunchbase itself. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** The data-collection platform and the search service are named, with seat, data transmitted and safeguard, on ListPlus's public list at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. **Caching.** If you look up the same company again within 7 days, ListPlus reuses your earlier result for free. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### What does the Crunchbase lookup in ListPlus return? Funding rounds, investors, revenue estimates, founding year, tech stack and growth signals for a company — whatever is published on that company's public Crunchbase profile. #### Where do I run a Crunchbase lookup? It's available from a list: "Company Profile Crunchbase" in the Enrich menu or a row's record panel, and as an optional step in the enrichment assistants. #### How much does it cost, and when am I charged? It costs credits, charged only when ListPlus finds a matching Crunchbase profile for the company name; no match costs nothing. The price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### How does ListPlus find the right Crunchbase company? It looks the company up by name (in the record panel it uses the company's domain when there is one). With a very common or ambiguous name, check the location and funding details before you rely on the result. #### Does every company have Crunchbase data? No. Only companies with a Crunchbase profile return anything — many smaller or non-US companies aren't listed there, and the lookup then simply finds nothing. #### Is Crunchbase data available from Person Search or Segment Search? No. Crunchbase is only available inside a list: the Enrich menu, a row's record panel, or the optional Crunchbase step of an enrichment assistant. It isn't offered in Person Search, Segment Search or the Analyze panel. --- ## Provider: Email verification Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-email-verification Last updated: 2026-10-10 MillionVerifier checks whether an email address is real by asking the mail server for its domain directly, live at the moment you run the check. **What it delivers.** One of six results per address: valid, invalid, catch-all, disposable, unknown or error. See "[Email quality checks and verification](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/email-quality-and-bounces)" for what each result means and how it's shown in your list. **Where in ListPlus.** "Verify Email Deliverability" in the record panel and in the Enrich menu under Verify. **Inputs needed.** An email address — nothing else. **Coverage & freshness.** Checked live against the mail server at the moment of the check; verifying the same address again within 7 days reuses that result. **Credits & charge rule.** Each address costs credits, charged only for a valid, invalid or disposable result (the price is in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). Catch-all, unknown and error results cost no credits. Addresses the free pre-checks already flag (bad format, disposable or test domain, role account, typo, numeric-heavy) never reach MillionVerifier and cost nothing. **What the provider receives from us.** Only the one email address being checked — never the rest of your list. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** According to its privacy policy (checked October 2026), MillionVerifier is operated by Southern Vector Limited, Christchurch, New Zealand. It processes data in New Zealand, Hungary and other EEA countries, the USA and other countries, and it names contract performance, legitimate interests, legal obligations and, where required, consent as its legal bases. **Caching.** A result is reused for 7 days if you verify the same address again — no new check, no credits charged. **Related topics:** email-quality-and-bounces · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · price-list. ### FAQ #### Which service verifies my email addresses? MillionVerifier. It checks each address live against the mail server for its domain and returns one of six results: valid, invalid, catch-all, disposable, unknown or error. #### What does MillionVerifier receive when I verify an address? Only that one email address — never the rest of your list or any other column data. #### Is every address actually sent to MillionVerifier? No. Free local pattern checks catch obvious cases first — bad format, disposable domains, role accounts, test domains — and mark those without ever calling MillionVerifier. #### Does checking the same address twice cost credits again? No, not within 7 days. A result is reused for a week before ListPlus checks the same address again. #### Where is MillionVerifier based, and what's its legal basis for processing? According to its privacy policy (checked October 2026), MillionVerifier is operated by Southern Vector Limited, Christchurch, New Zealand, and processes data in New Zealand, Hungary and other EEA countries, the USA and other countries. It names contract performance, legitimate interests, legal obligations and, where required, consent as its legal bases, and may also process data in other countries depending on the service provider involved. #### What's the difference between the free checks and MillionVerifier's check? The free checks in Analyze only look at the text of the address (format, known disposable domains, role accounts); MillionVerifier is the only check that actually contacts the receiving mail server to confirm the mailbox is real. --- ## Provider: FullEnrich Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-fullenrich Last updated: 2026-10-17 FullEnrich is the waterfall provider ListPlus calls when a person's email needs to come from checking 20+ underlying sources — either starting from an email you already have, or from just a name and company. **What it delivers.** From an email: name, job title, company, LinkedIn URL and location. From a name + company: a verified email, and optionally a direct phone number. **Where in ListPlus.** "Contact Profile (by Email)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window). The name + company email search is "Find Email (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu, "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" in the single-cell window and "Deep Email Search" on a Person Search profile. The email + phone search is "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu and "Deep Mobile Search" in Person Search. **Inputs needed.** An email address for the reverse lookup, or a first name, last name and company name/domain for the name-based search. The phone-inclusive searches also send a flag telling FullEnrich to look for a phone number, not just an email. **Coverage & freshness.** FullEnrich checks its waterfall of 20+ underlying sources live at the moment you run the search, rather than serving from a fixed, dated dataset. **Credits & charge rule.** Charged only on a hit (FullEnrich returns data); a miss costs nothing. Searching for a phone number alongside the email costs several times as much as an email-only search, and the phone tier is only charged when a phone number is actually found — otherwise just the email part. If FullEnrich finds nobody for an email, ListPlus asks CompanyEnrich. Its answer is used, and charged at CompanyEnrich's rate, only when the person's name fits the address. From the Enrich menu or record panel, "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)" costs the email-search price and a further amount only if the follow-up profile lookup also succeeds. The follow-up is a second FullEnrich lookup with the e-mail just found, only for records that had no e-mail before and still miss a job title or LinkedIn URL. Exact amounts are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" and "[Find a verified email address](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/find-verified-email)." **What the provider receives from us.** For the reverse lookup, only the email address (and, when FullEnrich finds nobody, CompanyEnrich receives the same address). For the name-based search, only the first name, last name and company name or domain — never your whole list. For the follow-up of "Contact Profile (by Name & Company)", it also receives the e-mail address found in the first step. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** According to FullEnrich's public privacy policy (checked September 2026), it relies on legitimate interests, contract performance and, for some purposes, consent, and uses standard contractual clauses for transfers outside the EU. FullEnrich Corp is headquartered in San Francisco, California, USA. **Caching.** A lookup that returned data is reused for 7 days in your account, so repeating it sooner doesn't charge again; a lookup that found nothing is run again. **Related topics:** find-verified-email · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · price-list. ### FAQ #### What does FullEnrich do inside ListPlus? FullEnrich finds a person's contact and profile details by checking 20+ underlying sources: it can turn an email into a full profile, or a name and company into a verified email (and optionally a phone number). #### When does ListPlus use FullEnrich instead of Prospeo? FullEnrich is the deeper, more expensive fallback: it runs when you search "Find Email (by Name & Company)" or "Find Email + Phone (by Name & Company)," typically after a cheaper Prospeo lookup hasn't already found a match. In the Enrich menu, "Find Email (by Name & Company)" can itself be Prospeo or FullEnrich, depending on the row — the price shown tells them apart. #### What does a FullEnrich phone search cost compared to an email-only search? An email + phone search costs several times as much as an email-only search, and the phone tier is only charged when a phone number is actually found — if the search only turns up an email, you pay just the email part. The prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### What does FullEnrich receive from ListPlus? Only what the specific lookup needs: an email address for a reverse lookup, or a first name, last name and company name/domain for a name-based search — never the rest of your list. #### Is a FullEnrich result reused if I search the same person again? Yes, for 7 days — a FullEnrich lookup that returned data is reused in your account, so repeating it sooner doesn't charge again. A lookup that found nothing is run again. #### Where is FullEnrich based? FullEnrich Corp is headquartered in San Francisco, California, USA, according to its public privacy policy. #### What is FullEnrich's legal basis for processing data, and does it move data outside the EU? According to FullEnrich's public privacy policy (checked September 2026), it relies on legitimate interests, contract performance and, for some purposes, consent, and uses standard contractual clauses for transfers outside the EU. #### What happens when FullEnrich finds nobody for an email? ListPlus then asks CompanyEnrich with the same email address. Its answer is used — and charged at CompanyEnrich's rate — only when the person's name fits the address; otherwise nothing is filled and nothing is charged. --- ## Provider: Google search Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-google-search Last updated: 2026-10-16 ListPlus uses Google search results for a handful of lookups where a full data-provider call isn't needed — finding a URL or a fact that's already public on the open web. A search service on ListPlus's side returns Google's results; it is named on the public list at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. **What it delivers.** Free lookups: a person's LinkedIn profile URL from their name and company, a company's website from its name, and the "Company News" and "Person in the News" add-ons on a Person Search profile. The same search also powers the live web search in AI Research. **Where in ListPlus.** "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" (Enrich menu); "Company Website (by Name)" (single-cell fill window, also run automatically before a company lookup when only a name is known); "Company News" / "Person in the News" (Person Search profile); throughout an AI Research run. **Inputs needed.** A name and company for a person's LinkedIn URL, or a company name for its website. AI Research builds its own search queries from your research brief. **Coverage & freshness.** Whatever is currently indexed on the open web at the moment of the search — there's no stored copy or delay, and no guarantee a page will be found if it isn't publicly indexed. **Credits & charge rule.** The search itself never costs credits, found or not. Features that use it internally, such as AI Research runs and web research, are billed at their own price (see "AI, research and import costs"). **What the provider receives from us.** Only the search query itself — a name and company, a company name, or your Person Search query, or (during AI Research) the query terms built from your research brief. It never receives your list. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** The search service is on ListPlus's public list of service providers at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors, with its seat and safeguard. A workspace owner can switch Google search off under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. **Caching.** Not cached — each search runs live, though it costs nothing to repeat since it's always free. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · ai-research · price-list. ### FAQ #### How does ListPlus find a LinkedIn URL for someone without one? "LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company)" in the Enrich menu runs a free Google search for the person's name and company and fills the LinkedIn URL cell if it finds a match — it doesn't fetch the profile itself. #### Does this search cost credits? No. Every Google search lookup in ListPlus — finding a LinkedIn URL or a company website, or reading company/person news — is always free, whether or not it finds a result. #### Which company runs this search? A search service that returns Google's results. It is named, with its seat and safeguard, at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors, and it receives only the search term. #### What does the search provider receive from my list? Only the search terms for that one lookup — a name and company, or a company name — never the rest of your list or any other row data. #### Does Google search play a role in AI Research? Yes. The same search powers the live web search AI Research runs while looking for and confirming matches, alongside optional paid sources like Reddit and X you can switch on. The search adds no charge of its own; the run is billed as described in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". #### Is a Google search result ever cached or reused? No — each search runs live against the current web index every time, but since it's always free there's no cost to running it again. #### Can this search find a person's email address? No. It finds public URLs (LinkedIn profiles, company websites) and news items, never an email address. --- ## Provider: LinkedIn imports Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-linkedin-imports Last updated: 2026-10-16 Building a list straight from LinkedIn (Sales Navigator, a company's employees, a keyword search, or post reactions/comments) runs through a data-collection platform on ListPlus's side, separate from the specialised LinkedIn provider that answers individual profile, company, search and verify lookups elsewhere in the app — see "[Provider: LinkedIn profile data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-linkedin-profile-data)" for that one. This page covers where an import's data comes from and what it returns; see "[Importing from LinkedIn (Sales Navigator, employees, profiles, posts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/linkedin-imports)" for how to run one. **What it delivers.** Whatever LinkedIn itself shows on the pages the import reads: names, job titles, companies and LinkedIn profile URLs for people, plus comment text, reaction type or post date for the two post-based imports. It never returns email addresses — add those afterwards with enrichment. **Where in ListPlus.** The five **Collect from LinkedIn** tiles in the New List wizard: Sales Navigator, Company employees, Keyword search, Post reactions, Post comments. **Inputs needed.** A Sales Navigator search URL, up to 10 LinkedIn company page URLs, a keyword search, or one or more LinkedIn post URLs, depending on the import type. **Coverage & freshness.** Reflects what LinkedIn shows for that search or page at the moment the import runs — not a static, pre-built database. **Credits & charge rule.** A base fee plus a per-result rate, shown in an **Estimated cost** box before you start. The base fee is charged when the import starts and kept even if the run finds nothing or fails on the provider's side; the per-result rate is charged for the rows actually delivered. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for exact rates. **What the provider receives from us.** The search URL, company URL(s) or post URL(s) you're importing from — never the rest of your list, and never your own LinkedIn account or session. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** The data-collection platform is based in the EU and processes data there; the scrapers it runs come from third parties and run on its infrastructure. Its name, seat and safeguard are at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. A workspace owner can switch scrapers off under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. **Caching.** Not cached — each import run reads LinkedIn fresh. **Related topics:** linkedin-imports · linkedin-imports-legal · provider-linkedin-profile-data · where-does-the-data-come-from. ### FAQ #### Where does the data in a LinkedIn import actually come from? From the public LinkedIn pages the import reads — a Sales Navigator search, a company's employee list, profile search results, or a post's reactions or comments — run through a data-collection platform on ListPlus's side, not from a stored database. #### Is this the same provider that answers a single LinkedIn Profile or Company lookup? No. Imports run through a data-collection platform; individual LinkedIn Profile, Company, Profile Search and Verify lookups run through a separate, specialised LinkedIn data provider — see "[Provider: LinkedIn profile data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-linkedin-profile-data)." #### Does the import use my own LinkedIn account? No, never. See "[LinkedIn imports and your responsibilities](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/linkedin-imports-legal)." #### How current is the data an import brings back? It reflects what's publicly visible on LinkedIn at the moment the import runs, not a stored snapshot from an earlier date. #### What does the provider receive when I run an import? Only the search, company or post URL(s) for that one import — never the rest of your list. #### Which LinkedIn import types run through this provider? All five "Collect from LinkedIn" tiles in the New List wizard: Sales Navigator, Company employees, Keyword search, Post reactions and Post comments. --- ## Provider: LinkedIn profile data Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-linkedin-profile-data Last updated: 2026-10-15 A specialised LinkedIn data provider on ListPlus's side answers every LinkedIn lookup in the product. ListPlus never signs in with your LinkedIn account and never uses your LinkedIn session. When the provider doesn't answer a profile lookup, a second provider steps in. Both are named on the public list at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. **What it delivers.** A person's full profile (current job title, company, location, experience) from a LinkedIn URL; a company's profile (industry, size, headquarters, website) from a company URL; a profile found by searching a name + company when you don't have the URL; and a check for whether a profile exists for a name and company, without pulling the full profile. These lookups return profile and company data only, never an email address or phone number. **Where in ListPlus.** "LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL)", "LinkedIn Company", "LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company)" and "Verify LinkedIn Profile" — in the Enrich menu, the record panel and the selection bar's Enrich. See "[LinkedIn data: find, fill and verify](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/linkedin-data)" for which button to use when. **Inputs needed.** A LinkedIn profile URL, a LinkedIn company page URL, or a first name + last name + company name/domain for the two name-based lookups. **Coverage & freshness.** The provider doesn't publish coverage figures ListPlus can verify or repeat here. Every lookup reflects what's currently visible on the public LinkedIn profile or company page at the moment you run it — it's not a static snapshot. **Credits & charge rule.** See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" and "[LinkedIn data: find, fill and verify](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/linkedin-data)" for the exact numbers. Profile and company lookups by URL charge only on a hit; Profile Search and Verify charge per attempt, even without a match, because the search or check itself still runs against LinkedIn. **What the provider receives from us.** Only the identifier needed for that one lookup — a LinkedIn URL, a company URL, or a name and company — never the rest of your list. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** Both providers are on ListPlus's public list of service providers at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors; their seats and safeguards are still marked as being confirmed there. A workspace owner can switch LinkedIn data off for the whole workspace under Workspace settings → Workspace policy. **Caching.** Repeating a LinkedIn Profile, LinkedIn Company or LinkedIn Profile Search that found data within 30 days reuses the earlier result for free. The same Verify LinkedIn Profile check is also reused for 30 days, found or not. A Profile Search that found nothing is charged again when you retry it. **Related topics:** linkedin-data · where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · price-list. ### FAQ #### Which company runs ListPlus's LinkedIn lookups? ListPlus works with a specialised LinkedIn data provider rather than your own LinkedIn account — the provider's name isn't published, but every LinkedIn action in ListPlus (profile, company, search, verify) runs through this one service. #### Does ListPlus ever sign in as me on LinkedIn? No. ListPlus never signs in with your LinkedIn account and never uses your LinkedIn session for any lookup or import. #### Can a LinkedIn lookup return someone's personal email address? No. LinkedIn Profile, LinkedIn Company, LinkedIn Profile Search and Verify LinkedIn Profile return profile and company data only, never an email address. To find an email, use "Contact Brief" (from a LinkedIn URL or a name and company) or "Find Email (by Name & Company)". #### What does the provider receive when I run a LinkedIn lookup? Only the identifier the lookup needs: a LinkedIn profile or company URL, or a name and company for a search or verify check. It never receives the rest of your list. #### Does the provider return the same data every time I look up a profile? It returns what's currently visible on the public profile or company page at the moment of the request, so results can change if the person updates their profile. Repeating your own successful lookup within 30 days reuses the earlier result instead of running it again. #### Is Verify LinkedIn Profile from this same provider? Yes. It uses the same LinkedIn provider for a lighter search that only confirms a profile exists. If it first has to identify the company from the email domain, that company lookup runs through CompanyEnrich, which is why it then costs more credits. #### Where is this provider based, and what's its legal basis for processing data? The provider and its fallback are named at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors, where their seats and safeguards are still marked as being confirmed. Neither ever uses your own LinkedIn account. --- ## Provider: Prospeo Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-prospeo Last updated: 2026-10-17 Prospeo is the licensed B2B contact database behind **Segment Search**, and also powers several email, phone and company-contact lookups elsewhere in ListPlus. **What it delivers.** Filtered audience results in Segment Search; a verified work email plus the company's main phone number via "Contact Brief"; a verified personal mobile via "Reveal Mobile Number"; and up to 25 company decision-makers with contact teasers via "Company Contacts (Prospeo)." **Where in ListPlus.** The Segment Search page; "Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL)" and "Contact Brief (by Name & Company)" (Enrich menu, record panel, single-cell fill window) — in the Enrich menu, Prospeo's name lookup can also appear as "Find Email (by Name & Company)"; "Verified Email & Company Phone" in Person Search; the **Contact Profiles** option of the "Enrich LinkedIn Data?" prompt after a LinkedIn import; the **Reveal** button next to Mobile number under a profile's Reachability section (it shows the price), also available in the record panel and the single-cell fill window as "Reveal Mobile Number"; "Deep Company Profile" and "Company Contacts" on a Person Search profile, and "Company Contacts (Prospeo)" in the record panel. **Inputs needed.** For Segment Search, your filter selections (role, industry, seniority, company size, location, funding stage and more) — Prospeo receives the filters, not any of your existing contacts. For a lookup, a LinkedIn profile URL, or a first name + last name + company name/domain. Company Contacts needs a company domain. **Coverage & freshness.** By Prospeo's own figures: roughly 300 million profiles and 143 million verified email addresses, refreshed weekly — that claim is the provider's, not independently verified by ListPlus. **Credits & charge rule.** Charged only when Prospeo returns a value (a Segment Search page with zero matches costs no credits). Exact amounts are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)," "[Get emails and phone numbers](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/reveal-email-and-phone)" and "[Person Search: the profile drawer and its add-ons](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/profile-and-add-ons)." **What the provider receives from us.** For Segment Search, only your search filters. For a lookup, only the identifier needed: a LinkedIn URL, a name and company, or (for Company Contacts and Deep Company Profile) a company domain. It never receives your whole list. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** ListPlus's public list of service providers names Defastra Tech Inc. (Prospeo), Toronto, Canada, with an EU representative in Paris and hosting in the USA (AWS us-east-1). Canada is covered by an EU adequacy decision; for the USA, Prospeo's privacy policy names Standard Contractual Clauses. Seat, data transmitted and safeguard are at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. **Caching.** An identical Segment Search you repeat within 30 days is free. A Contact Brief or mobile reveal that returned data is reused for 7 days in your account, so repeating it sooner doesn't charge again; lookups that found nothing, and Company Contacts, are run again. **Related topics:** where-does-the-data-come-from · data-sources-table · categories-audience-database · reveal-email-and-phone · price-list. ### FAQ #### What does Prospeo do inside ListPlus? Prospeo is the licensed B2B contact database behind Segment Search, and also finds verified work emails, company phone numbers, personal mobile numbers, and company decision-maker lists elsewhere in ListPlus. #### How current is Prospeo's data? By Prospeo's own figures, its database holds roughly 300 million profiles and 143 million verified email addresses, refreshed weekly — that's the provider's claim, not independently verified by ListPlus. #### What does Prospeo receive when I run a Segment Search? Only the filters you set (role, industry, seniority, company size, location and so on) to match against its database — not any data from your existing lists. #### What does Prospeo receive when I look up one person? Only the identifier needed for that lookup: a LinkedIn profile URL, or a first name, last name and company name or domain. It never receives the rest of your list. #### Does repeating a Prospeo lookup cost credits again? An identical Segment Search repeated within 30 days costs no credits, and a Contact Brief or mobile reveal that returned data is reused for 7 days in your account without charging again. Lookups that found nothing are run again, and Company Contacts is billed again on each hit. #### What is "Company Contacts (Prospeo)" in the record panel? A lookup that returns up to 25 decision-makers at a company, with masked email and mobile teasers, added to your list as new rows. It needs a company domain and appears in the record panel's company section. It costs credits, charged only when contacts are found (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"); it is also a Person Search add-on called "Company Contacts." #### Where is Prospeo based, and is it GDPR-compliant? Prospeo is operated by Defastra Tech Inc., Toronto, Canada, with an EU representative in Paris; its data is hosted in the USA (AWS us-east-1). Canada is covered by an EU adequacy decision; for the USA, Prospeo's privacy policy names Standard Contractual Clauses. The details are at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. --- ## Provider: AI Research's web sources Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-research-sources Last updated: 2026-10-17 AI Research reads the open web while it looks for matches. This article covers which sources it can reach and what's free versus paid; for exact per-call pricing and how metering works, see "[How is AI Research metered, and what do paid sources cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-costs-and-sources)" **What it delivers.** A free Google-powered web search, scoped on demand to a specific site (Reddit, Hacker News, GitHub, LinkedIn or a company's own domain) or left unscoped for press and team pages; a free news search for announcements and funding news; a free, structured Hacker News search (story and comment authors); open job postings as a free hiring signal; a free page-reading tool that fetches the text of any URL the agent finds (a forum thread, a team page, a GitHub profile); and a free LinkedIn lookup that grounds a real profile before a match is returned. On top of that, up to five opt-in paid sources: a B2B database lookup, LinkedIn people search (by employer, place and role), LinkedIn post search (plus the people engaging with a post), Reddit search and Twitter / X search, for records, posts and profiles the free sources don't otherwise surface well. **Where in ListPlus.** Runs automatically during every AI Research run; every source is its own switch under **Allowed AI tools**. Web search, reading pages, job postings, news, Hacker News and finding a real LinkedIn profile are free and on by default; the database lookup, LinkedIn people, LinkedIn posts, Reddit and X are paid per call and off by default until you tick them. **Inputs needed.** The research brief you describe when starting a run — AI Research builds its own search queries from it. **Coverage & freshness.** Whatever is currently indexed or postable on each site at the moment of the search — there's no stored copy or delay. **Credits & charge rule.** Web search, news search, Hacker News search, job search, page reading and the LinkedIn lookup are always free. The database lookup, LinkedIn people search, LinkedIn post search, Reddit search and Twitter / X search are billed per call, whether or not the call finds anything; see "How is AI Research metered" for current rates. **What the provider receives from us.** Only the search query the agent builds for that one call, never your list or brief in full. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** Web search and news come from a Google search service, Hacker News from Algolia's public search, Reddit and X are read by scrapers on a data-collection platform in the EU, and LinkedIn posts come from the LinkedIn data provider. Every one of them is named, with seat and safeguard, at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. A workspace owner can switch individual sources off under Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy. **Caching.** Not cached — a research run searches live each time. **Related topics:** research-costs-and-sources · ai-research · provider-google-search. ### FAQ #### Which web sources can AI Research search? Google-powered web search (which it can scope to Reddit, Hacker News, GitHub, LinkedIn or a company's own site), a news search, a free Hacker News search, job postings, a page-reading tool that fetches any URL it finds, and a LinkedIn lookup to ground real profiles. A B2B database lookup, LinkedIn people search, LinkedIn post search, Reddit and Twitter / X are five further, opt-in paid sources. #### Is there a dedicated GitHub source, or does it use web search? There's no separate GitHub tool — the free web search is scoped to github.com when the agent judges that useful, the same way it scopes to Reddit or Hacker News. #### Are Reddit, X and the database free like the others? No — those are opt-in paid switches under **Allowed AI tools**, alongside the database lookup, LinkedIn people search and LinkedIn post search; every free source (web search, news, Hacker News, job postings, reading a page, finding a real LinkedIn profile) is on by default. Reddit search and Twitter / X search cost credits per call, each charged whether or not it finds something. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the current rates. #### How does AI Research read a company's own website or team page? The same free page-reading tool that opens any URL the agent finds — it fetches the text of a team, about or press page once a search points to it. #### Does AI Research use a stored index, or search live each time? Live each time. Every source reflects whatever's currently on the web or postable at the moment of the search, with no stored copy or delay. #### What does a source receive when AI Research calls it? Only the search query the agent builds for that one call — never your full research brief or list. --- ## Provider: signal add-ons (jobs, traffic, maps, email) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/provider-signals-add-ons Last updated: 2026-10-17 Person Search and Segment Search results carry a set of small, single-purpose add-on cards on top of the main contact and company data — signals that help you judge fit or timing rather than reach someone. Four exist in ListPlus today: **Open Jobs**, **Google Maps Profile**, **Web Traffic** and **Email Infrastructure**; a fifth, **Deep Company Profile**, bundles open jobs with funding data and technologies in one lookup. **What it delivers.** Open Jobs: active job postings — a buying-intent signal. Google Maps Profile: rating, review count, phone and address. Web Traffic: monthly visits and global rank. Email Infrastructure: the domain's mail provider and SPF/DMARC posture. Deep Company Profile: funding rounds, tech stack and open job titles together in one card. **Where in ListPlus.** All five show as cards in the company section of the Person Search / Segment Search result profile (the same drawer used from either finder); exact prices are in "Person Search: basics and profile add-ons." **Inputs needed.** A domain for Web Traffic and Email Infrastructure; a company name for Google Maps Profile; a LinkedIn company URL or company name for Open Jobs; a domain or the company's LinkedIn page for Deep Company Profile. **Coverage & freshness.** Each card looks up its source live at the moment you click it; a card with nothing to show (no jobs open, no listed map profile) simply reports "Nothing found" instead of returning stale data. **Credits & charge rule.** Every card is charged only on a hit — a miss costs nothing. Exact per-card amounts are in "Person Search: basics and profile add-ons." **What the provider receives from us.** Only the one identifier the card needs — a domain or a company name — never the rest of your list or search. **Company seat, data location, legal basis.** Open Jobs comes from the LinkedIn data provider; Google Maps Profile and Web Traffic are read by scrapers on the data-collection platform; Deep Company Profile comes from Prospeo; Email Infrastructure is a plain DNS lookup that sends the domain to no data provider. Seat, data transmitted and safeguard of each provider are at listplus.ai/en/subprocessors. **Caching.** Not cached — each card runs again even for a company you've already looked up. **Related topics:** profile-and-add-ons · price-list · data-sources-table. ### FAQ #### What signal add-ons can I see on a Person Search or Segment Search result? Four: Open Jobs, Google Maps Profile, Web Traffic and Email Infrastructure, plus Deep Company Profile, which bundles funding data, technologies and open job titles into one lookup. #### What does "Open Jobs" tell me? Active job postings for the company — a signal it may be growing or hiring into the area you care about. It needs a LinkedIn company URL or a company name. #### What does "Email Infrastructure" show? The domain's mail provider and its SPF/DMARC setup — useful for judging how a domain sends email before you rely on an address at it. #### Are these signal cards charged even if they find nothing? No. Every card is charged only when it returns data; a miss costs nothing. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for the exact per-card price. #### What does "Deep Company Profile" add over the individual cards? It's one lookup that returns funding rounds, technologies and open job titles together, instead of running Open Jobs separately. #### Do these add-ons work in a list's Enrich menu, or only in search results? Only as cards in the Person Search / Segment Search profile drawer. None of them is a button in a list's Enrich menu. --- ## Section: Workspaces & team ## What is a workspace? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace Last updated: 2026-10-15 A workspace is the place where you and your team work on the same lists, contacts and pipelines. Everyone you invite sees and works on the same data, and everything paid in the workspace runs on the plan and credits of one person: the workspace owner. ### What you get when you sign up Every account gets its own workspace on sign-up, named "Workspace" — rename it in Workspace settings. You can work alone in it, invite teammates into it, or create more workspaces. Creating workspaces and adding members is free and unlimited. ### What is shared in a workspace Everyone in the workspace sees and works on the same: - Lists and projects - The Watchlist (saved contacts) and its folders, watched companies and the alerts on people and companies - Inbox entries - AI Research runs (a teammate's run shows "by" and their name) - Pipelines, list rules (triggers) and app events — everything in Flows - Find's search history (colleagues see each other's recent searches) - Connected accounts (CRM, Google Sheets and other apps) and API connections - Block List - Usage history for the workspace ### What stays personal - Your login, your display name and your app language - Your own credit balance and plan, which pay for the workspaces you own - Your AI request limits - Your personal Inbox forwarding address (one per workspace) ### Who pays The workspace owner's plan and credits cover everything in that workspace. Members spend the owner's credits and never need a plan of their own. See "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)" for the details. ### Typical setups - **A team:** one workspace, the person with the subscription is the owner, colleagues join as members or admins. - **An agency:** one workspace per client ("e.g. Client Miller"), so each client's lists and contacts stay apart. - **Freelancer working for a client:** the client invites you into their workspace, and the client's plan and credits pay for your work there. ### Per-list sharing no longer exists You no longer share single lists with single people. Instead, invite the person into the workspace that holds the list. To give someone a list from a different workspace, export it and import it there. **Related topics:** invite-teammates · roles-and-permissions · switch-and-create-workspaces · leave-remove-transfer-delete · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### Can I use ListPlus with my team? Yes. Invite your colleagues into your workspace (workspace menu in the Home header → Members & invites), and everyone works on the same lists, Watchlist, Inbox, research and pipelines. Members are free, and all paid actions run on the workspace owner's plan and credits. #### What is a workspace in ListPlus? A workspace is a shared space with its own lists, Watchlist, Inbox, AI Research runs, pipelines and connected accounts. Everyone in it works on the same data, and one person, the owner, pays for it with their plan and credits. Every account gets its own workspace on sign-up. #### What do the members of a workspace share? Lists and projects, the Watchlist with its folders, watched companies and alerts, Inbox entries, AI Research runs, pipelines, list rules and app events, Find's search history, connected accounts, API connections, the Block List and the workspace's usage history. Everyone in the workspace sees and works on the same data. What each person may change depends on their role (Owner, Admin or Member). #### What stays personal when I'm in a workspace? Your login, display name and app language stay yours, and so do your own credit balance and plan. AI request limits count per person, and each person gets their own Inbox forwarding address in each workspace. Your credits only pay for workspaces you own. #### Does every colleague need their own ListPlus account? Yes. Each person signs in with their own e-mail address and one-time code, which is why nobody shares a login. A colleague without an account creates one while accepting your invite ("Sign in and join"), and gets no bill: members work on the owner's plan and credits. #### Do workspaces or extra members cost anything? No. Creating workspaces and inviting members is free, and there is no per-seat price. All credits spent in a workspace come from the owner's balance, and the owner's plan sets the limits for everyone in it. #### How many workspaces can I have? As many as you like. You can own several workspaces and be a member of others at the same time. Your plan covers every workspace you own. #### I run an agency. How should I set up my clients? Create one workspace per client (workspace menu → Create workspace), so each client's lists, contacts and connected accounts stay separate. Your plan and credits pay for all workspaces you own, and the record limit counts across all of them. If a client should pay, let the client own the workspace and invite you. #### Can I still share a single list with one person? No, per-list sharing was replaced by workspaces. Invite the person into the workspace that holds the list, or export the list and let them import it in their own workspace. --- ## Invite teammates to a workspace Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/invite-teammates Last updated: 2026-10-03 Invite colleagues into your workspace by their e-mail address. Each invite gives you a link to copy; if the workspace's owner has Pro or Premium, ListPlus also sends it by e-mail. An invite is valid for 14 days and can only be accepted with the invited e-mail address. ### Invite someone 1. On Home, click the workspace name in the header (or open your avatar menu and click the workspace row). 2. Choose **Members & invites**. 3. Under **Invite**, enter one or more e-mail addresses, separated by commas (up to 20 at a time). 4. Owners and admins can pick the role, **Member** or **Admin**. Everyone else invites as Member. 5. Click **Invite**. Every invite shows its link with **Copy link**. - **On Basic** the link is the invitation: copy it and send it yourself, by e-mail or in a chat. ListPlus sends no e-mail and says so ("Invitation created — copy the link and send it yourself"). - **With Pro or Premium** (the plan of the workspace's owner) ListPlus also e-mails the invite. "Invitation sent by e-mail" confirms the mail. If the mail could not go out, you see "Copy the link – e-mail not sent" with the reason ("daily limit reached", "address blocked" or "sending failed"). The invite still works: copy the link and send it yourself. The invitation e-mail comes from ListPlus with the fixed subject "You've been invited to ListPlus", names you and the workspace in the text, and has an **Accept invitation** button. It is written in your app language. ### Open invites Invites that nobody has accepted yet appear under **Open invites** in the same window. - **Resend** sends a fresh e-mail with a new link. The old link stops working and the 14 days start again. The same address gets at most 3 mails a day (invite and resends together); beyond that, Resend still creates the new link without a mail — copy it and send it yourself. - **Withdraw** cancels the invite, and its link stops working. The person who sent the invite, the owner and admins can resend or withdraw it. Inviting an address again also replaces its open invite and its old link. An address that already belongs to the team is not invited again ("is already on the team"). ### Limits - Up to 20 addresses per invite. - With Pro or Premium, a workspace can send up to 100 invitation e-mails per day, and the same address gets at most 3 a day (invite and resends together). Above either limit, the invite is still created and only the mail is skipped, so copy the link. - Each invite link works once and expires after 14 days. ### Accepting an invite The invited person clicks the button in the e-mail or opens the link: - **Not signed in, or no account yet:** click **Sign in and join**, then sign in or sign up with the invited e-mail address and a one-time code. - **Signed in with the invited address:** click **Join**. - **Signed in with a different address:** the page says "This invite was sent to …. Sign in with that address to join." Sign out and sign in with the invited address. Signed-in users also find invites for their address in the workspace menu under **Invites**, with **Join** and **Decline**. A dot on the workspace icon shows that an invite is waiting. **Related topics:** what-is-a-workspace · roles-and-permissions · leave-remove-transfer-delete · billing-in-workspaces · sign-in-problems. ### FAQ #### How do I invite a colleague to my workspace? On Home, click the workspace name in the header (or the workspace row in your avatar menu) and choose Members & invites. Enter one or more e-mail addresses under Invite and click Invite. You get a link per person to copy and send yourself; if the workspace's owner has Pro or Premium, ListPlus also e-mails it. #### Who can invite people to a workspace? Every member of a workspace can invite people as Members. Only the owner and admins can invite someone directly as an Admin. #### Does my colleague need a ListPlus account before I invite them? No. They open the invite link, click "Sign in and join" and sign up with the invited e-mail address and a one-time code. They join your workspace right away and work on your plan and credits. #### How long is an invite link valid? An invite link is valid for 14 days and works once. It can only be accepted with the e-mail address it was sent to. After that, send a new invite or click Resend under Open invites. #### My colleague didn't get the invitation e-mail. What can I do? On Basic, ListPlus sends no invitation e-mail, so copy the link from the invite window and send it yourself; with Pro or Premium, ask them to check their spam folder or send the link yourself. Resend under Open invites (workspace menu → Members & invites) creates a new link and mails it with Pro or Premium. If you saw "e-mail not sent (address blocked)", the address refused earlier mails, so send the link another way. #### What happens when I click Resend? Resend creates a new link, e-mails it (with Pro or Premium) and restarts the 14 days. The previous link stops working, so only the newest link can be used; inviting the same address again has the same effect. The same address gets at most 3 mails a day, so a further Resend creates the link without a mail — copy and send it yourself. #### How do I cancel an invite? Open the workspace menu → Members & invites and click Withdraw next to the invite under Open invites. The link stops working immediately. The person who sent it, the owner and admins can withdraw an invite. #### Is there a limit on how many people I can invite? You can enter up to 20 addresses at a time. With Pro or Premium, ListPlus sends up to 100 invitation e-mails per workspace and day, and at most 3 a day to the same address; above a limit, the invite is still created and you see "Copy the link – e-mail not sent (daily limit reached)", so send the link yourself. There is no limit on the number of members. #### Why did ListPlus not send my invitation by e-mail? On the Basic plan an invitation is a link: copy it in the invite window and send it yourself. ListPlus e-mails invitations when the workspace's owner has Pro or Premium. This keeps invitation e-mails from being misused to write to strangers. #### How do I accept an invite to a workspace? Open the link from the invitation e-mail and click "Join", or "Sign in and join" if you are signed out. If you are already signed in, you also find the invite in the workspace menu under Invites, with Join and Decline. Use the e-mail address the invite was sent to. #### The invite link says it was sent to a different e-mail address. What now? An invite can only be accepted with the address it was sent to. Sign out and sign in with that address, or ask the person who invited you to invite the address you actually use. There is no way to move an invite to another address. #### The invite says it no longer exists. Why? The message "This invite no longer exists — it expired or was already used" appears when the link is older than 14 days, was withdrawn, was already used, or was replaced by a newer link (Resend or a new invite). Ask the person who invited you for a new invite. #### In which language is the invitation e-mail? The invitation e-mail is written in the app language of the person who sends it. The invited person can switch their own app language after joining. --- ## Workspace roles and permissions Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/roles-and-permissions Last updated: 2026-10-17 Every person in a workspace has one of three roles: **Owner**, **Admin** or **Member**. The role decides who manages the workspace and its lists. The day-to-day work (editing, enriching, AI, import, export) is open to everyone. ### The three roles - **Owner:** exactly one per workspace. Pays for the workspace with their plan and credits, and is the only one who can delete the workspace or transfer it. - **Admin:** manages the team and the workspace's lists, pipelines and API connections, but doesn't pay and can't delete the workspace. - **Member:** works on all lists and contacts in the workspace, and can invite colleagues as members. ### Who can do what | Action | Owner | Admin | Member | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ----- | ----- | -------------- | | Edit rows, enrich, run AI commands, import, export | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | Use the Watchlist, Inbox, AI Research and the Block List | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | Add entries to a pipeline and send them | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | Connect an account (CRM, Google Sheets …) and use connected ones | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | Disconnect an account | ✓ | ✓ | only their own | | Invite people as Member | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | Invite people as Admin | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Resend or withdraw an invite | ✓ | ✓ | only their own | | Change roles (Member ↔ Admin), remove members | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Rename the workspace | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Delete or duplicate lists, move lists into projects | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Create, edit or delete pipelines | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Set up a list's rules (triggers), statuses and reference list | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Add or remove own provider keys | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Create and manage API connections | ✓ | ✓ | – | | Transfer ownership, delete the workspace | ✓ | – | – | | Change the workspace policy | ✓ | – | – | | Buy credits or change the plan for the workspace | ✓ | – | – | Creating, renaming and deleting projects is open to every member. Every member can leave a workspace; the owner has to transfer it first. ### Change someone's role 1. Open the workspace menu (workspace name in the Home header) → **Members & invites**. 2. Under **Members**, pick **Member** or **Admin** in the dropdown next to the person. The owner's role can't be changed there. To hand over the owner role, use **Transfer ownership** (see "[Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete)"). ### Connected accounts When someone connects an app (for example HubSpot or Google Sheets), the connection belongs to the workspace: everyone on the team can use it, and actions run in the name of the person who connected it. The owner, an admin or the person who connected it can disconnect it. Pipelines stop using an account once the person who connected it leaves, and a pipeline sends, replies or forwards mail only from a mailbox its creator connected (drafts may go into any current member's mailbox — see "[Whose connected account a pipeline uses](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts)"). **Related topics:** what-is-a-workspace · invite-teammates · leave-remove-transfer-delete · billing-in-workspaces. ### FAQ #### What roles are there in a workspace? There are three: Owner, Admin and Member. The owner pays with their plan and credits and alone can delete or transfer the workspace. Admins manage members, lists, pipelines and API connections, and members do the everyday work on lists and contacts. #### What can a member do in a workspace? Members can edit rows, enrich, run AI commands, import and export, and use the Watchlist, the Inbox, AI Research and the Block List. They can add and send pipeline entries and invite colleagues as members. They can't delete, duplicate or move lists, set up pipelines or API connections, or change roles. #### What can an admin do that a member can't? Admins can invite people as admins, change roles, remove members, rename the workspace, delete, duplicate and move lists, and create or change pipelines and API connections. They can't delete or transfer the workspace or buy credits for the workspace. Those belong to the owner. #### What can only the owner do? Only the owner can delete the workspace and transfer ownership. The owner's plan and credits pay for everything in the workspace, so only the owner can buy credits or upgrade for it. #### How do I make someone an admin? Open the workspace menu in the Home header → Members & invites and choose Admin in the dropdown next to the person under Members. Only the owner and admins see this dropdown. You can switch an admin back to Member the same way. #### Why can't I set up a pipeline? Only owners and admins create and change pipelines, and the Pipelines page says so for members. As a member you can still add entries to existing pipelines and send them. #### Can there be more than one owner? No, every workspace has exactly one owner, because the owner's plan and credits pay for it. Add more admins to share the management work, or transfer ownership to someone else. --- ## Switch, create and rename workspaces Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/switch-and-create-workspaces Last updated: 2026-10-10 The workspace menu shows which workspace you are in, lets you switch to another one, and is where you create new workspaces. Everything you see in the app (lists, Watchlist, Inbox, research, pipelines) belongs to the workspace that is active right now. ### Open the workspace menu - On **Home**, click the workspace name in the header. - Or open your **avatar menu** and click the row with the workspace name. This works on every page and on phones. The menu shows: - your workspaces, each with its number of members and a check mark on the active one - **Invites** for your e-mail address, with **Join** and **Decline** (only when you have any) - **Members & invites** and **Workspace settings** - **Plan in this workspace**, with the plan name and whose subscription pays for it ("Through your subscription" or the owner's name) - **Create workspace** ### Switch workspaces Click another workspace in the menu. The app reloads in that workspace, and other open ListPlus tabs follow. ListPlus remembers the active workspace, also on your other devices. If you belong to more than one workspace, the browser tab title also shows the workspace name. ### Create a workspace 1. Open the workspace menu and click **Create workspace**. 2. Enter a name (up to 80 characters), for example "Client Miller". 3. Click **Create**. The new workspace starts empty and becomes active. Its credits and plan are yours, because you own it. Creating workspaces costs no credits and is unlimited. ### Rename a workspace Open the workspace menu → **Workspace settings**, change the **Name** and click **Save**. Only the owner and admins can change the name. Each workspace gets a colour automatically; it can't be changed. ### Moving a list to another workspace There is no move between workspaces. Export the list (for example as CSV or Excel) and import the file in the other workspace. The import counts as a new list there, with the usual import cost and the record limit of that workspace's owner. **Related topics:** what-is-a-workspace · invite-teammates · roles-and-permissions · leave-remove-transfer-delete · export-files · create-list-and-import-file. ### FAQ #### How do I switch to another workspace? On Home, click the workspace name in the header, or open your avatar menu and click the workspace row. Pick the workspace you want; the app reloads in it and your other open tabs follow. #### I can't find my lists. Where did they go? You're probably in a different workspace, because lists, the Watchlist, the Inbox and pipelines belong to one workspace each. Open the workspace menu (workspace name on Home or the workspace row in your avatar menu) and switch to the workspace that holds them. #### How do I create a new workspace? Open the workspace menu (workspace name in the Home header or the workspace row in your avatar menu) and click Create workspace. Enter a name and click Create. The new workspace costs no credits, starts empty, and runs on your plan and credits. #### How do I rename a workspace? Open the workspace menu → Workspace settings, change the Name and click Save. Only the owner and admins of the workspace can rename it. #### Can I change the colour of a workspace? No. Each workspace gets a colour automatically, so you can tell them apart in the menu. You can change its name in Workspace settings. #### How do I move a list to another workspace? There is no direct move between workspaces. Export the list as a file (CSV, Excel or JSON) and import it in the other workspace. The import creates a new list there, with the usual file-import cost in credits. #### Which workspace am I in right now? The active workspace's name shows in the Home header and in your avatar menu. In the workspace menu, the active one has a check mark. If you belong to several workspaces, the browser tab title also shows its name. #### Where do I see which plan applies in this workspace? Open the workspace menu and look at "Plan in this workspace". It shows the plan name and either "Through your subscription" or the name of the owner whose subscription pays for it. --- ## Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete Last updated: 2026-10-17 This article covers the ways a workspace membership ends or changes hands: leaving a workspace, removing someone, transferring ownership and deleting a workspace for good. ### Leave a workspace 1. Switch to the workspace, open the workspace menu → **Workspace settings**. 2. Click **Leave workspace** and confirm. You lose access to the workspace's lists, contacts and pipelines right away. The lists and contacts you added stay in the workspace for the others. You can only come back with a new invite. The owner can't leave; they transfer the workspace first or delete it. ### Remove a member Owners and admins open the workspace menu → **Members & invites**, click the remove icon next to the person and confirm ("Remove … from the workspace?"). Their access ends immediately, and any open invites they sent are withdrawn. The data they added stays in the workspace. The owner can't be removed. ### Transfer ownership The owner pays for the workspace with their plan and credits. To hand that over to someone else: 1. The new owner must already be a member (Member or Admin). 2. Open the workspace menu → **Workspace settings** → **Transfer ownership**, select the member and click **Transfer**. 3. The member sees the offer in **Members & invites** and clicks **Accept**. After the transfer, plan and credits run through the new owner, and you stay in the workspace as an admin. The offer is valid for 7 days, and you can take it back with **Withdraw** until it is accepted. Credits are not moved: the new owner's own balance pays from then on, and the workspace's lists count toward the new owner's record limit. ### Delete a workspace Only the owner can delete a workspace, and it can't be undone. 1. Open the workspace menu → **Workspace settings**. 2. Under **Danger zone**, click **Delete workspace**. 3. Type the workspace name and click **Delete permanently**. This deletes all lists and their data, the Watchlist (with watched companies and alerts), the Inbox (including its forwarding addresses and app events), Find's search history, AI Research runs, pipelines (and the links they sent out), connected accounts, API connections, the Block List and the usage history of that workspace. All other members lose access. Your credits and plan are not affected. If the app says "Not everything could be deleted", click Delete again to remove the rest. After deleting, you land in another workspace you belong to. If it was your only one, ListPlus creates a new, empty workspace for you. ### Deleting your whole account Deleting a workspace doesn't delete your account. To delete your account, see "[Deleting lists, contacts, and your account](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data)". **Related topics:** what-is-a-workspace · roles-and-permissions · billing-in-workspaces · delete-account-and-data · export-files. ### FAQ #### How do I leave a workspace? Switch to the workspace, open the workspace menu → Workspace settings and click Leave workspace, then confirm. You lose access to its lists, contacts and pipelines immediately and can only come back with a new invite. The owner can't leave without transferring the workspace first. #### What happens to my lists when I leave a workspace? They stay in the workspace, because lists and contacts belong to the workspace, not to the person who created them. Export the lists first if you need a copy. Accounts you connected stay connected, but no pipeline uses them any more; your own workspaces and credits are not affected. #### How do I remove someone from our workspace? Owners and admins open the workspace menu → Members & invites, click the remove icon next to the person and confirm. Their access ends right away and their open invites are withdrawn. Everything they added stays, but accounts they connected are used by no pipeline any more — choose another account in those pipelines. #### Why can't I leave a workspace I own? The owner pays for the workspace, so it can't be left without an owner. Transfer ownership to another member first (Workspace settings → Transfer ownership), then leave, or delete the workspace. #### How do I transfer a workspace to someone else? Open the workspace menu → Workspace settings → Transfer ownership, select a member and click Transfer. The member has 7 days to accept it in Members & invites. After that, their plan and credits pay for the workspace and you stay as an admin. #### Do my credits move with the workspace when I transfer it? No. Credits and plans stay with each person. After the transfer, the new owner's balance pays for everything in the workspace, and its lists count toward the new owner's record limit. #### How do I delete a workspace? Only the owner can: open the workspace menu → Workspace settings → Danger zone → Delete workspace. Type the workspace name and click Delete permanently. This can't be undone. #### What is deleted when I delete a workspace? All its lists and their data, the Watchlist, the Inbox and its forwarding addresses, AI Research runs, pipelines and the links they sent, connected accounts, API connections, the Block List and the usage history. All other members lose access. Your credits and plan stay untouched. #### Can I get a deleted workspace back? No, deleting a workspace is permanent and there is no trash. Export any list you want to keep before deleting. --- ## Credits, plan and limits in a workspace Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces Last updated: 2026-10-17 In a workspace, one person pays: the **owner**. Everything that costs credits in the workspace is deducted from the owner's balance, and the owner's plan decides the record limit and which integrations are available. Members are free and don't need a plan or credits of their own. ### What members see - The credit balance shows as the owner's, for example "Anna's credits". - Settings → **Plan & billing** says "This workspace runs on the plan and credits of Anna. Only Anna sees invoices and the payment method." Members see no **Buy credits**, payment-method or invoice buttons there. - Settings → **Credits & usage** shows the same balance with an **Ask for credits** button instead of **Buy credits**. Where the owner would see the purchase window, members see "Balance empty – please ask Anna to top up", with **Got it**. Let the owner know; only they can buy credits. - At the record limit, members see that only the owner can upgrade. If the owner's workspaces hold more records than the plan edits, every list shows a read-only banner ending in "Only Anna can upgrade." — without the **Upgrade to edit** button the owner gets. Members can still subscribe to a plan or buy credits for themselves. That pays for workspaces **they** own, never for someone else's workspace. ### What the owner pays for - All paid actions of every member in the owner's workspaces: enrichment, reveals, AI commands and AI columns, AI Research, Markets, imports, Inbox recognition, Watchlist alerts (monthly), requests to connected tools and pipeline deliveries (per record). - The plan (Basic, Pro or Premium) applies to every workspace the owner owns. Connected tools such as Google Sheets (Pro) or HubSpot (Premium) are available to all members of those workspaces; their requests are paid from the owner's credits. - The record limit (Basic: edit 5,000, import up to 25,000 · Pro 100,000 · Premium 1,000,000 records) counts the rows of all lists across **all** workspaces the owner owns. One list holds at most 50,000 records on every plan. Lists in a workspace where you are only a member count toward that workspace's owner, not toward you. Above the limit, the lists in all of the owner's workspaces become read-only until the owner upgrades or deletes lists. - The price per credit: lower with Pro or Premium than on Basic (see "[Buying credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/buying-credits)"). Workspaces, members and invites themselves cost nothing. ### Seeing who spent what Open **Settings → Credits & usage** — the gear icon in the left rail, the credit balance row in your avatar menu's workspace card, or ⌘K → "Credits & usage". The section "Usage by person" lists this month's credits per person in the active workspace. Members only see the active workspace's usage ("You only see this workspace's usage. The balance belongs to …"), without purchases. The owner also sees their full credit history across all their workspaces. ### When the balance runs out Everyone in the workspace spends the same balance. A job that is refused at the start opens the buy window for the owner and the "ask the owner" window for members. If the balance runs out while a batch enrichment is running, the batch stops: the remaining rows are not charged and show as failed in the task card. After a top-up, run the enrichment again on the rows that are still empty. ### AI request limits are per person The fair-use limits for AI requests (1,000 per day and 20,000 per month) count per person, not per workspace, and don't draw on the owner. The credits those requests cost still come from the owner's balance. **Related topics:** what-is-a-workspace · roles-and-permissions · credits-explained · buying-credits · record-limit · not-enough-credits · where-did-my-credits-go. ### FAQ #### Who pays for credits in a workspace? The workspace owner. Every paid action by any member in the workspace is deducted from the owner's credit balance, and the owner's plan sets the limits and integrations for everyone in it. Members don't need a plan or credits of their own. #### Why can't I buy credits in this workspace? The workspace runs on the owner's balance, and only the owner can top it up. As a member you see "Balance empty – please ask … to top up" instead of the buy window, so let the owner know. Credits you buy for yourself only pay for workspaces you own. #### What does "Balance empty – please ask … to top up" mean? The workspace you're in uses its owner's credits, and that balance is empty. Only the owner named in the message can buy credits, so ask them to top up. Click Got it to close the message. #### Can I transfer or give credits to a teammate? No, credits can't be moved between people. Instead, invite the teammate into your workspace: everything they do there is paid from your balance. The owner's credits pay for all members' work in the owner's workspaces. #### Can I get one invoice for my whole team? Yes, in effect: the workspace owner holds the subscription and buys all credit packs, and members never pay. So there is one subscription and one set of invoices, those of the owner. For invoice questions, see "[Invoices and VAT](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/invoices-and-vat)". #### How does the record limit work with several workspaces? The record limit belongs to the owner's plan and counts the rows of all lists across every workspace that person owns (Basic edits 5,000 and imports up to 25,000, Pro 100,000, Premium 1,000,000; one list holds at most 50,000 on every plan). A new workspace doesn't bring extra room. Above the limit, all of the owner's lists become read-only, and members see that only the owner can upgrade. #### Can I see how many credits each teammate used? Yes. Open Settings → Credits & usage (gear icon, or the credit balance row in your avatar menu); the section "Usage by person" shows this month's credits per person in the active workspace. Members only see the active workspace's usage, without purchases. #### Are AI limits shared across the workspace? No. The AI request limits (1,000 per day and 20,000 per month) count per person, so one busy teammate can't use them up for everyone. The credits those AI requests cost still come from the owner's balance. --- ## Section: AI agents & API ## Give an AI agent access to one list Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-connection-overview Last updated: 2026-10-16 Any list can get its own private connection that lets Claude, ChatGPT or another AI agent — or a script — read, add, update, tag and enrich rows in that one list, and nothing else in your workspace. It works as both a REST API (a standard web interface any script or Claude can call) and an MCP server (the protocol ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible tools connect through). It's included on every plan, including Basic. ### Who can set it up Only the **owner or an admin** of the workspace can create, view and manage a list's API connections. Members work with the list as usual but don't manage its agent access. The workspace owner can switch agent access off for the whole workspace: Settings → **Privacy & compliance** → **Workspace policy** → **Agent API and MCP**. While it is off, every connection URL of the workspace stops working; switching it back on restores them. ### Where it lives Open the list, click **More** in the list header, then **Automation**. A list without a connection yet shows **Set up agent access**; a list that already has one shows **Add API Endpoint**. See "[Creating and connecting your agent](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-connection-setup)" for the full setup walkthrough. ### What an agent can do Exactly what's allowed is up to you, set per connection under **Permissions** (see "[API connection: permissions and presets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-permissions)"). Depending on what you turn on, an agent can: - Query, count, add, edit, tag or ignore (soft-delete) records - Set a record's list status, and hand records to the pipelines you pick (both off until you allow them) - Fill columns using AI, or run ListPlus's free quality checks - Look up companies, LinkedIn profiles, verified emails and phone numbers through the enrichment types you allow — billed at the same credit rate as doing it in the app - Use free research tools (Google Search, Hacker News Search, Website Scrape) and, if you allow them, paid ones (Reddit Search, Twitter/X Search) A brand-new connection can add, query, count, tag and ignore records, look up Company Profiles, and use the research tools, including the paid ones. Editing records, AI column filling and the other enrichment types stay off until you turn them on. Review the Permissions tab before you share the URL. ### REST or MCP — which one connects? Both point at the same list and obey the same permissions; you don't choose between them, an agent uses whichever it supports: - **REST** — the plain URL. Any script, Zapier/Make/n8n's HTTP modules, or Claude on a paid plan can call it directly once you paste the URL into the chat. - **MCP** — the same connection exposed as an MCP server; this is what ChatGPT connects through (see Creating and connecting your agent). ### Cost Setting up and calling the connection itself is free. Only the actions an agent performs that would also cost credits in the app — enrichment, AI column filling and paid research — are billed, at the same rate, and they are paid from the workspace owner's credits. Records an agent hands to a pipeline are charged per delivered record when the pipeline sends them, at the pipeline's own price. See "[What agent actions cost and how they're secured](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-costs-and-security)" for the details, and "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)" for what an agent sees if your balance runs out. A connection only reads and writes its list. To hand records on to a CRM, Slack or your own webhook from ListPlus, use a pipeline instead (see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)"). **Related topics:** api-connection-setup · api-permissions · api-costs-and-security · zapier-make-n8n · pipelines-overview · roles-and-permissions · billing-in-workspaces · not-enough-credits. ### FAQ #### Can I connect Claude, ChatGPT or my own AI agent to ListPlus? Yes, on every plan. The workspace owner or an admin opens the list, clicks More in the list header, then Automation, and clicks Set up agent access. You get one connection for that list that works as both a REST API and an MCP server, with permissions you control. #### Which plans include the API connection? All of them, including Basic — it's not gated to Pro or Premium. Any actions an agent performs that use credits, like enrichment, are billed the same as they would be in the app. #### Can the AI agent see my other lists? No. A connection is created inside one specific list and only ever reads or writes that list's records; it has no access to your other lists, the Watchlist or workspace settings. The only thing outside the list it can reach are the pipelines you tick under Permissions → Hand over to pipelines, and only to hand that list's records to them. #### What's the difference between the REST API and the MCP server? They're the same connection with the same permissions, exposed two ways: REST is a plain URL that scripts, webhook tools, and Claude can call directly, while MCP is the protocol ChatGPT (and other MCP-compatible clients) use to connect to outside tools. You don't have to choose — both URLs are available on every connection. #### What can an agent actually do once it's connected? Only what its permissions allow. By default it can add, query, count, tag and ignore records, look up Company Profiles and use the research tools; editing, AI column filling, quality checks and other enrichment types are separate switches. See "[API connection: permissions and presets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-permissions)" for the full list and the ready-made presets. #### Does giving an agent access cost credits? See "[What agent actions cost and how they're secured](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-costs-and-security)" — in short, only actions that cost credits in the app too (enrichment, paid research) are billed. #### Who in my workspace can create or manage an API connection? Only the workspace owner and admins can create, view, change or delete a list's API connections. Members can still work with the list, but ask an owner or admin to set up or change agent access. #### Is this the same as the Zapier/Make/n8n webhook in Export? No, they're different tools for different jobs. The Export webhook is a one-way push of your current data out to a URL you paste in; the API connection is a two-way, always-on link an AI agent or automation tool uses to read and write that list on its own. #### Do I need to write code to use it? No. Pasting the URL and the ready-made instruction into Claude or ChatGPT is enough for most uses — the AI reads the schema and figures out the rest. Code samples (curl, Python, JavaScript, and snippets for Zapier, Make and n8n) are also provided for anyone building something custom. --- ## Creating and connecting your agent Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-connection-setup Last updated: 2026-10-15 ### Create the connection You need to be the workspace owner or an admin. Open the list, click **More** in the list header, then **Automation**. Click **Set up agent access** (or **Add API Endpoint** if the list already has one) — it's created immediately, no form to fill in. The success screen shows your **API URL** and a **Quick Start** snippet; click **Done** to go to the connection's Overview. You can always find the URL again on the connection's Overview tab. ### Give the URL to an AI On the **Overview** tab, the **API Access** card has a **Copy AI instruction** button. It copies a ready-made instruction plus your URL: > "This is an open REST API (no authentication required). Start by fetching the URL below — it returns the full schema, available columns, actions, filter syntax, and usage instructions as JSON. Read and understand the response thoroughly before doing anything else." Paste that into Claude (any paid plan), Google Gemini, Cursor/Windsurf/Cline, VS Code with GitHub Copilot, or any other assistant that can fetch a URL — it reads the schema on its own and starts working. The same card also lists a few example prompts you can copy, such as "add 3 test records" or "find LinkedIn URLs for every person missing one." ### Connect ChatGPT (MCP) ChatGPT doesn't take a plain URL the way Claude does — it connects through MCP instead. On the Overview tab, open the **MCP Server (ChatGPT)** card and copy the **MCP URL**. The card shows the path in ChatGPT (currently Settings → Connectors → Developer Mode → Create). ChatGPT's menus and plan availability can change, so check ChatGPT's own help if they differ. ### Connect Claude Desktop, Claude Code, or another MCP client Any MCP-compatible client can use the same MCP URL from the Overview tab — add it as a custom MCP server in that client's settings. For a plain chat conversation in Claude, you don't need MCP at all: pasting the REST URL and instruction above is enough. ### Code samples The **Code Examples** card on the Overview tab has ready-made snippets in **curl**, **Python**, **JavaScript**, **Zapier**, **Make** and **n8n** — each one shows a discovery `GET` call followed by a `POST` with `{"action": "add_records", "records": [...]}`, using your actual URL and up to your first few column names as example fields. Copy the tab you need. Two rules to keep in mind when building on them: reads (`query`, `count`, `find`, `column_summary`, `credit_balance`, `list_pipelines`) also work as `GET` requests, while every other action — including `add_records`, `update`, `set_status`, `set_tags`, `ignore`, `send_to_pipeline`, `enrich`, `derive` — must be a `POST`. And the list's system columns (status, tags and the `ar_*` fields) can't be written with `update` — use `set_status`, `set_tags` or `ignore` for those. Sublists can't be written at all: a sublist is a saved rule, so an agent marks records with `set_tags`. ### Cost of setting up and connecting None. Creating the connection, copying URLs or code, and an agent's first discovery call are all free — only the actions it goes on to perform that cost credits in the app (enrichment, paid research) are billed, at the same rate. See "[What agent actions cost and how they're secured](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-costs-and-security)." **Related topics:** api-connection-overview · api-permissions · api-costs-and-security · zapier-make-n8n. ### FAQ #### How do I create an API connection for a list? As the workspace owner or an admin, open the list, click More in the list header, then Automation, and click Set up agent access (or Add API Endpoint if one already exists). It's created instantly — no setup form — and the next screen shows your API URL and a quick-start snippet. #### What is the "Copy AI instruction" button for? It copies a ready-made instruction plus your connection's URL in one click, worded so you can paste it straight into Claude, Gemini, Cursor or a similar assistant — the AI fetches the URL itself, reads the schema, and starts working from there. #### How do I connect ChatGPT to my list? ChatGPT uses the MCP URL, not the plain API URL: open the MCP Server (ChatGPT) card on the Overview tab and copy the MCP URL. The card shows the current path in ChatGPT's own menus (Settings → Connectors → Developer Mode → Create) — check ChatGPT's own help if that's changed. #### Can I connect Claude Desktop or another MCP tool instead of pasting the URL into a chat? Yes — the same MCP URL from the Overview tab works as a custom MCP server in Claude Desktop, Claude Code, or any other MCP-compatible client, in addition to pasting the plain REST URL into a Claude chat. #### Do you provide code examples for building something custom? Yes. The Code Examples card on the Overview tab has ready-to-copy snippets in curl, Python, JavaScript, Zapier, Make and n8n, each showing how to read the schema and add a record with your actual URL and column names filled in. #### Which API actions work as GET, and which need POST? (technical) Reads — query, count, find, column_summary, credit_balance and list_pipelines — also work as GET requests. Every other action (including add_records, update, set_status, set_tags, ignore, send_to_pipeline, enrich, derive) must be sent as a POST. #### Can an agent write the status, tags or ar_ fields with update? (technical) No — the system columns (status, tags and the ar_* fields) are rejected by update. Use set_status for the status, set_tags for tags and ignore to ignore a record instead. There is no action for sublists — a sublist is a saved rule; an agent marks records with set_tags, and a sublist with a Tags rule then shows them. #### What happens if I lose the API URL? Open the list's Automation panel and select the connection — the Overview tab's API Access card shows the same URL again, with a copy button, for as long as the connection exists. If the connection itself was deleted, there's no way to recover its old URL; create a new connection to get a new one. --- ## API connection: permissions and presets Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-permissions Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every connection's **Permissions** tab controls exactly what an agent can see and do in that one list. Start from a preset, then adjust. Choosing a preset also resets Visible Columns (all visible again), Write Protection, Deduplicate by and Record Quality, and turns all research tools on — check those sections after picking one. ### Presets | Preset | What it turns on | | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Read Only** | Query, count, run quality checks. No adding, editing or enrichment (research tools stay on unless you uncheck them) | | **Data Assistant** | Query, count, edit, ignore, tags, status, quality checks. No adding, no enrichment | | **Enrichment** | Query, count, edit (empty cells only), quality checks, plus six enrichment types: Company Profile, LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL), LinkedIn URL (by Name & Company), LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company), Contact Profile (by Email), Contact Profile (by Name & Company) | | **Data Collector** | Add, query, count, ignore, tags, Company Profile, all research tools. Makes all columns visible, limits writing to typical lead columns, deduplicates by the LinkedIn column if there is one | | **Full Access** | All actions including setting the status, AI column filling and creating/deleting its own columns, plus the same six enrichment types (not Contact Brief) | | **Custom** | Your own combination — selected automatically once you change anything a preset doesn't match | A brand-new connection can add, query, count, tag and ignore records, look up Company Profiles, and use the research tools, including the paid ones. Editing records, AI column filling and the other enrichment types stay off until you turn them on. Review the Permissions tab before you share the URL. ### Actions The core actions are **Add records**, **Query records**, **Count records**, **Edit records**, **Ignore records** and **Manage tags** — on a new connection add, query, count, ignore and tags start on; only **Edit records** stays off until you allow it (as do Set status, Hand over to pipelines, AI column filling and Run quality checks below). Two more switches matter beyond basic data access: - **Set status** — lets the agent set a record's list status (for example "Qualified") and read, query and count records by status. Off on a new connection. The agent can only use statuses the list already has; it cannot create new ones, and a hidden record keeps being hidden. A status the agent sets can start the list's triggers, exactly as if you had set it. - **Hand over to pipelines** — tick the pipelines this connection may hand records to. None are ticked on a new connection, and a preset never ticks one. The agent sees only the ticked pipelines. Handing over works like **Add to pipeline** in the app: the pipeline's data check and its release mode stay in force, so in a pipeline with manual release the records wait for your click on Send. - **AI column filling** — lets the agent fill a column with AI-derived values (for example gender from a name, or continent from a country). - **Run quality checks** — ListPlus's deterministic data-quality checks; free, no credits. Off on a new connection. Free research tools (**Google Search**, **Hacker News Search**, **Website Scrape**) and paid ones (**Reddit Search**, **Twitter/X Search**) are each their own switch, so you can allow research without allowing enrichment or vice versa — all five are on by default on a new connection. **Create columns** lets the agent add new columns to the list's schema (with an optional cap and permission to delete only columns it created itself). ### Enrichment types Only **Company Profile** is allowed by default. Each type you check is a separate lookup with its own credit cost, shown next to the checkbox — for example Company Profile, LinkedIn Profile (by LinkedIn URL), LinkedIn Profile Search (by Name & Company), Contact Brief (by LinkedIn URL or Name & Company), and Contact Profile (by Email or by Name & Company). Only checked types are available to the agent; the exact credit amounts and when they're charged are the same as everywhere else in ListPlus — see "[What does one contact cost?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/what-does-one-contact-cost)" and the price list. A connected **Max records per enrich request** setting caps how many rows one enrichment call can touch at once. A provider the workspace owner switched off in the workspace policy is refused even when its type is ticked here. ### Data safety controls - **Sublist Visibility** (when your list has sublists) limits the connection to the records that match the sublists you select; leave none selected to see everything. The limit is checked live on every request: a record is visible as soon as it matches the sublist's rule and stops being visible when it no longer does — there is nothing to refresh. It is bound to the sublist itself, so renaming the sublist changes nothing. If the sublist is gone, the agent sees no records at all. A record the agent adds is visible to it only if it matches the rule. An agent can't put records into a sublist; it marks them with tags. - **Visible Columns** lets you hide specific columns from the agent entirely — it never sees or receives them. New connections hide likely email, name and phone columns automatically; you can uncheck any column to hide it, or re-check it to reveal it. - **Write Protection** offers **Only fill empty cells** (updates can't overwrite a value that's already there) plus a column-by-column whitelist of which columns the agent is even allowed to write to; leave the whitelist empty to allow writing to any visible column. - **Record Quality** rejects incoming records that aren't identifiable enough: **Accept all**, **Person identity required** (default — a valid email, LinkedIn URL, or name plus company), **Company identity required**, **Person or company**, or **Custom rules** where you pick specific checks yourself. ### Deduplication and default values **Deduplicate by** turns the duplicate check on: a new record that is already in the list (same email, LinkedIn URL, or name plus company) is not added again — it fills the existing record's empty cells and counts as `rowsMerged` in the response. A connection limited to sublists always adds new records. **Default Values** auto-fills fixed values into specific columns on every record the agent adds — useful for tagging where a batch of records came from. **Related topics:** api-connection-overview · api-connection-setup · api-costs-and-security · what-the-ai-sees · price-list · list-statuses · pipelines-overview. ### FAQ #### What permission presets can I start from? Six: Read Only, Data Assistant, Enrichment, Data Collector, Full Access, and Custom (selected automatically once your settings don't match any preset) — see the preset table above for what each one turns on. #### What actions can I individually allow or block? Add records, Query records, Count records, Edit records, Ignore records, Manage tags and Set status, plus handing records to the pipelines you tick, AI column filling, running quality checks, creating columns, and each research tool (Google Search, Hacker News Search, Website Scrape, Reddit Search, Twitter/X Search) are each their own switch — turn on only what that agent needs. #### Can an AI agent set the status of a record? Yes, if you turn on Set status in the connection's Permissions tab (it is off on a new connection). The agent can then set any status the list has, clear it, and query or count records by status. It cannot create new statuses and cannot unhide a hidden record this way. #### Can an AI agent send records to a pipeline? Yes, if you tick the pipelines it may use under Hand over to pipelines in the connection's Permissions tab — none are ticked by default. The agent can then list those pipelines and hand records of its list to them, up to 500 per call. Their data check and release mode apply as in the app, so with manual release the records wait until you click Send. #### Which enrichment lookups can an agent use, and how do I turn them on? Only Company Profile is allowed by default. On the Permissions tab's Enrichment section, check each other lookup you want to allow (for example Contact Profile by Email) — each shows its own credit cost — and set a maximum records-per-request if you want to cap how much one call can spend. #### Can I hide specific columns from the agent? Yes. Visible Columns lets you uncheck any column so the agent never sees or receives it; new connections hide likely email, name and phone columns by default, and you can adjust that per connection. #### Can I stop the agent from overwriting data that's already there? Yes, with Only fill empty cells, which restricts updates to blank values only. You can also whitelist exactly which columns the agent is allowed to write to at all — leaving that list empty allows writing to any visible column. #### What does "Record Quality" do? It rejects incoming records the agent tries to add that aren't identifiable enough, based on a mode you pick: Accept all, Person identity required (the default — needs a valid email, LinkedIn URL, or name plus company), Company identity required, Person or company, or a Custom set of rules you choose yourself. #### Can I restrict a connection to only part of my list? Yes, if your list has sublists — Sublist Visibility lets you select which ones the connection can see; with none selected, it sees the whole list. The limit is checked live on every request against the sublist's rule, so there is no snapshot and nothing to refresh. #### What happens to an agent when I rename or delete the sublist it is limited to? Renaming is harmless — the limit is bound to the sublist itself, not to its name. Deleting is refused while an agent is limited to the sublist; the message names the agent. If the sublist no longer exists anyway, the agent sees no records until you change its Sublist Visibility. #### Can an agent add records to a sublist? No. A sublist is a saved rule, so nobody adds records to it by hand — not you and not an agent. An agent marks records with tags (Manage tags); a sublist with the rule "Tags is one of …" then shows them. A record an agent adds is visible to a sublist-limited agent only if it matches that sublist's rule. #### Can I stop duplicate records, or auto-fill a value on everything an agent adds? Deduplicate by turns the duplicate check on: a record already in the list (same email, LinkedIn URL, or name plus company) is not added again but fills the existing record's empty cells. Default Values auto-fills fixed values into chosen columns on every record the agent adds, regardless of what it sends. --- ## What agent actions cost and how they're secured Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-costs-and-security Last updated: 2026-10-16 ### What it costs Reading, counting, adding, editing, tagging and running quality checks are free. Everything an agent spends comes from the **workspace owner's** credit balance, the same balance the members of that workspace use. AI column filling is billed by usage, like AI derivations in the app. Credits are also spent when the agent triggers an enrichment type you've allowed (see "[API connection: permissions and presets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/api-permissions)" for the list and exact per-lookup credits) or a paid research tool like Reddit Search or Twitter/X Search. Google Search, Hacker News Search and Website Scrape are always free. See "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)" for exact per-action amounts, and "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)" for what an agent gets back if the balance is too low (an HTTP 402 error over REST, a tool error over MCP). Over REST, an agent can check your balance first with the `credit_balance` action. Records an agent hands to a pipeline (`send_to_pipeline`) cost nothing at hand-over; the pipeline charges its per-record delivery price when it sends them (see "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"). The workspace policy comes first: the workspace owner can switch off the Agent API itself, each data provider and each research source (Settings → **Privacy & compliance** → **Workspace policy**). A call that needs something switched off there is refused — an enrichment through a refused provider fails with "switched off by the workspace owner" — even when the connection's permissions allow it. ### Limits on a single request Four separate limits, all set on the Permissions tab, cap how much one call — or the connection overall — can do: - **Max records per enrich request** — how many rows one enrichment call can touch at once (only shown once you've allowed at least one enrichment type). - **Max rows per query** — how many records a single query can return. - **Max total rows** — a lifetime cap on how many rows this connection can ever add (0 = unlimited). - **Requests per minute** — the connection's overall rate limit; calls above the connection's limit are refused with an error until the minute is over. Two more refusals come from the list, not the connection: on a reference list fed by its source an agent can't change the source data (tags, status and ignore still work), and while the workspace is over its plan's record limit an agent can only read and analyse. ### Executions log Every call a connection handles — success or error — is logged on the **Executions** tab: the action, a short detail line, credits spent, the time, and how long it took, grouped by day with a running Calls/Errors count and a **Download CSV** button. If nothing has called the connection yet, the tab just says "No executions yet." ### The secret URL The connection's URL is the credential: whoever has it can act within that connection's permissions, so treat it like a password — don't paste it somewhere public, and only share it with the AI or tool you intend to use it with. It's shown in full on the Overview tab for as long as the connection exists. ### No rotation — delete and recreate There's no button to generate a new secret while keeping the same URL. If a URL may have leaked, or you just want a fresh one, delete the connection (Permissions tab → **Delete API Endpoint**, which immediately stops the old URL from working) and create a new one from the list's Automation panel — it gets its own new URL. ### Turning it off without deleting it The **Active/Inactive** switch next to the connection's name turns access off and back on without losing your permissions or execution history — while inactive, every call to that URL is refused. **Expires on** (Permissions tab) does the same thing automatically on a date you set, after which calls get an HTTP error stating the endpoint has expired. **Related topics:** api-connection-overview · api-connection-setup · api-permissions · billing-in-workspaces · not-enough-credits · price-list. ### FAQ #### Does it cost credits just to let an agent connect to my list? No. Creating the connection and letting an agent query, add, edit, tag or run quality checks is free — credits are only spent on actions that cost credits in the app too, like enrichment, AI column filling or paid research tools, at the same rate. Those credits come from the workspace owner's balance. #### How much does an enrichment an agent triggers cost? The same as the identical lookup costs in the app — see the price list for exact per-action credits. You also choose which enrichment types a connection may use at all, so an agent can never spend credits on a lookup you haven't explicitly allowed. #### What's the maximum an agent can do in one request? Four separate caps: max records per enrich request, max rows returned per query, a lifetime max total rows the connection can add, and a requests-per-minute rate limit — calls above the connection's limit are refused with an error until the minute is over. #### Where can I see what an agent has done with my list? The connection's Executions tab lists every call — action, result, credits spent, time and duration — grouped by day, with a Download CSV button for the full history. #### Is the connection's URL secret, and what happens if it leaks? Yes — the URL itself is the credential, so anyone who has it can act within that connection's permissions; treat it like a password. If it may have leaked, delete the connection and create a new one to get a fresh URL, which stops the old one from working immediately. #### Can I rotate the URL, or just pause access without losing my settings? There's no separate "rotate" button — the way to get a new URL is to delete the connection and create a new one, which also means reconfiguring its permissions. To pause access temporarily instead, switch the connection to Inactive next to its name; every call is refused while it's off, and your permissions and past executions stay exactly as they were when you switch it back on. #### Can I make a connection expire automatically? Yes. Set Expires on (Permissions tab, date picker) and the connection stops accepting calls after that date on its own, without you having to remember to disable or delete it. --- ## Running AI Research through your own AI (URL and MCP endpoint) Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/ai-agents-api/research-with-your-own-ai Last updated: 2026-10-15 "Your AI" in AI Research is a small, self-documenting API rather than a chat prompt: your AI tool fetches one URL, reads what it's told to do, and reports matches back by calling a handful of actions. This article covers the technical shape of it; for the product-level setup, see "Letting your own AI research for you." ### The URL and the MCP endpoint Generating a research gives you two equivalent doors onto the same run: a plain **URL for your AI**, which any AI tool that can fetch a URL and make JSON requests can use directly, and an **MCP URL**, the same research exposed as an MCP server for Claude Desktop, ChatGPT connectors and other MCP-capable agents. Both are read with a GET request first — it returns a self-describing brief (your mission, a deadline, the rules to follow, a worked example and the exact actions available) — then driven with POST requests (or MCP tool calls) from there. Neither needs a user session; the secret is the token in the URL itself. ### What your AI can do Every research token can call **log** a progress update (the only way you see what it's doing live), **add_hit** to report a match, **complete** when the mission is done, and **fail** if it can't proceed. **find_linkedin** and **web_search** come with the Find LinkedIn and Web search switches (both free and on by default), plus whichever other sources you switched on when generating the link — the same per-source switches as a ListPlus-run research — and, only in Your AI mode, **verify_email** and **enrich_hit**. A hit needs a stable `id` (its email or LinkedIn URL, never invented); re-posting the same id with more fields enriches that hit instead of duplicating it. ### enrich_hit needs a target list **enrich_hit** completes an already-reported hit with real provider data — email, phone, LinkedIn, job title, company — but only once that hit has reached a target list (see "[Getting AI Research hits into a list automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/research-results-to-a-list)"); called before a target list is set, it's rejected and nothing is charged. ### The credit cap is enforced on every call Every paid call — **database**, **LinkedIn people search**, **LinkedIn posts**, **Reddit**, **X**, **verify_email** or **enrich_hit** — is checked against two things before it runs: the research's own spending cap (a credit limit you chose when the link was generated) and the workspace owner's actual balance. A call that would push spend over either one is rejected and charged nothing — reserved credits are rolled back on any failure — so a leaked link can never spend more than the cap allows, and a workspace that runs out of balance simply stops it from spending further. Paid sources are only offered when you set a credit limit, and sources your workspace owner switched off in the workspace policy are never offered. ### How long it lives The link accepts new results for about 24 hours after you generate it; after that, writes are rejected and your AI needs a fresh link. The research itself — and everything already reported — is kept for the number of days you chose when generating it (1, 3 or 7), unless you also turned on automatic hand-off to a list, in which case the research becomes standing and is kept for 30 days (the link then accepts results for 30 days too). ### For advanced users The GET response includes both deadlines explicitly (`writeWindowEndsAt` for the 24-hour link, `campaignEndsAt` for the keep-time) so an agent can pace itself without guessing. Every action call is untrusted input from the agent's point of view in reverse too: ListPlus treats page content the agent fetches as data, never instructions, and the briefing tells the agent the same about what it reads on the web. The toolset is generated per run from the same switch permissions a ListPlus-run research uses, so a link minted with only the database and news switches on exposes only those tools in its schema — nothing to discover or guess. **Related topics:** your-ai-researches · research-results-to-a-list · research-costs-and-sources · api-connection-overview · api-costs-and-security. ### FAQ #### What do I get when I generate a research link for my own AI? Two equivalent doors onto the same research: a plain URL any AI tool can fetch and POST JSON to, and an MCP URL for Claude Desktop, ChatGPT connectors and other MCP-capable agents. Both start with a GET request that returns a self-describing brief — your mission, the rules, a worked example and the exact actions available. #### Does my AI need to sign in to use the research link? No — the link's own secret token is the only authentication; there's no user session or separate API key involved. Anyone holding the link can use it for that one research, so treat it like a password. #### What actions can my AI call? Always available: log (progress updates), add_hit (report a match), complete and fail. find_linkedin and web_search come with the Find LinkedIn and Web search switches (both free and on by default), plus whichever other sources you switched on when generating the link. Verify_email and enrich_hit are Your-AI-only and both cost credits. #### How does re-reporting the same hit work? Every hit needs a stable id — its email or LinkedIn URL, never invented — and posting add_hit again with the same id merges new fields into that hit instead of creating a duplicate. This is also how enrich_hit and later corrections work. #### Why did my AI's enrich_hit call get rejected? enrich_hit only works on a hit that has already reached a target list, so turn on automatic hand-off to a list before your AI tries to enrich anything. A rejected call charges nothing. #### How is the credit cap actually enforced on the API? Every paid call — database, LinkedIn people search, LinkedIn posts, Reddit, X, verify_email or enrich_hit — is checked against both the research's own spending cap and the workspace owner's real balance before it runs; either being insufficient rejects the call and charges nothing, with any reserved credits rolled back. This makes it safe to hand a capped link to an AI you don't fully control. #### How long does my AI have to call the research link? About 24 hours from when you generated it — the GET response states the exact deadline, and writes are rejected after it passes. Generate a fresh link if your AI needs more time. #### Does the research link expire, separately from the 24-hour window? Yes — you also pick how long the whole research (and its matches) is kept, 1, 3 or 7 days, which is longer-lived than the 24-hour write window and only affects when it's deleted, not when writes stop. Turning on automatic hand-off to a list keeps the research, its matches and the link for 30 days instead. #### Can I see which tools a given research link exposes? Yes — a GET request to the link returns the exact toolset for that run, built from the sources you switched on when generating it; a link minted with fewer sources on genuinely doesn't list the others; there's nothing extra for an agent to discover. --- ## Section: Outlook add-in ## The ListPlus add-in for Outlook Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/outlook/outlook-addin Last updated: 2026-10-15 The ListPlus add-in for Outlook is a sidebar that shows who a sender, recipient or meeting attendee is — their LinkedIn profile, company and contact details — without leaving your inbox, and lets you enrich or save that contact. It's a separate product from the Inbox (Eingang) inside the ListPlus web app; the two don't share data. ### Getting it Install the add-in from Microsoft AppSource (search for ListPlus) into Outlook for Windows, Mac or the web. Some Microsoft 365 organizations let you install add-ins yourself; others require an administrator to approve it first — follow your organization's policy. The add-in is free to install and works on the Basic plan. ### Signing in Click **Enrich Contacts** (reading a message), **Enrich Recipients** (writing one) or **Enrich Attendees** (a calendar event) in the ListPlus group of the Outlook ribbon, then sign in with the same email-address-and-one-time-code sign-in as the ListPlus web app (create an account first if you don't have one). The add-in works in the **workspace you last used** in the ListPlus web app; to change it, switch workspaces in the web app. It shows and spends that workspace's credits, which belong to the workspace owner. ### What it shows and where - **Reading a message** — the sender and other recipients. - **Composing a message** — the people you're addressing. - **A calendar event** — the organizer and attendees. Opening the sidebar doesn't run any paid lookup on its own. It lists the people in the header (sender, To, Cc or attendees). For messages it also scans the message text for further email addresses and shows them under "From thread". Only email addresses are taken from the text, and nothing is looked up until you choose an action. ### Enriching a contact Pick a contact and choose an action under Enrich: **Company Lookup**, **Find LinkedIn Profile** / **LinkedIn Profile**, **Contact Profile Lite** (email and phone from LinkedIn or name + company), **Contact Profile Waterfall** (name, job title, phone and LinkedIn from the email) or **Crunchbase**. Each action shows its credit cost before you run it, uses the same managed enrichment providers and credit rates as the rest of ListPlus (all prices are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)"), and is only charged when it finds something. Running out of credits stops paid lookups: the sidebar says **Not enough credits**, and **Buy Credits** opens Billing in the web app; see "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)". ### Where the results go Every enrichment saves to an auto-created **Outlook Contacts** list in that workspace (one per workspace, shared with its members), updating the same contact if you look them up again. Use **Add to List** to also copy a contact into another list of the workspace. From there, the contact behaves like any other row: checks, further enrichment, CRM sync and export all happen in the ListPlus web app, not inside Outlook. **Related topics:** credits-explained · price-list · not-enough-credits · inbox · which-enrich-button · switch-and-create-workspaces · billing-in-workspaces · pipelines-overview. ### FAQ #### Where do I get the ListPlus add-in for Outlook? Install it from Microsoft AppSource — search for ListPlus there. It's free to install and works with any Outlook that supports AppSource add-ins (Windows, Mac, web), so no separate download is needed. #### Does my Microsoft 365 admin need to approve the add-in? It depends on your organization's Microsoft 365 settings: some let you install add-ins yourself, others require administrator approval first. If installing is blocked for you, ask your admin to approve or install ListPlus from AppSource. #### How do I sign in to the add-in? Open the add-in sidebar from a message or calendar event and sign in the same way as the ListPlus web app: your email address and a one-time code, no password. You need a ListPlus account first (sign-up is free); the add-in then works in the workspace you last used in the web app. #### What does the add-in show me about a sender or attendee? Opening a message shows the sender and other recipients; composing shows who you're addressing; a calendar event shows the organizer and attendees. It doesn't look anyone up automatically — you pick a contact and choose company lookup, LinkedIn profile or a full contact profile. #### Does the add-in read my emails? It reads the message only to find email addresses: the sender and recipients from the header, plus any further addresses in the message text, which it shows under "From thread". It doesn't save or forward the text itself. Nothing is looked up until you pick a contact and an action. #### Which workspace and whose credits does the Outlook add-in use? The add-in works in the workspace you last used in the ListPlus web app, saves to that workspace's Outlook Contacts list and spends that workspace's credits, which belong to its owner. To work in another workspace, switch to it in the web app first. #### Where do enriched contacts end up? Every enrichment saves to an "Outlook Contacts" list created automatically in the workspace you last used in the web app, updating the same row if you look up that person again. Each workspace has its own Outlook Contacts list, shared with its members; use Add to List in the sidebar to also copy a contact into another list. #### Can I sync contacts from Outlook straight to my CRM? Not from inside the add-in itself. Continue with the contact in the Outlook Contacts list (or a list you added it to) in the ListPlus web app, and send it with a pipeline or the export you've set up there. From the sidebar you can also **Send** a contact to your own webhook (Power Automate, Zapier, Make; set the URL in Settings). #### Is the Outlook add-in the same as the ListPlus Inbox? No — they're separate. The Outlook add-in enriches senders, recipients and attendees right inside Outlook; the Inbox (Eingang) in the ListPlus web app is a place to paste text, receive it from tools, or forward emails to a personal address and turn it into contacts. See "[The Inbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/inbox)" for that feature. --- ## Section: Account ## Account and sign-in Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/account-and-login Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus signs you in with your email address and a one-time code — there is no password to create; you can optionally add a passkey under Settings → Profile & sign-in. ### Without an account You can look around before creating one: the Home page, the import wizard, **Person Search**, **Segment Search** and **AI Research** all open without signing in, and Person Search even gives you a few free full-profile lookups. See **Person Search** for exactly what's free there. Nothing is saved for you until you have an account — the moment you do something that needs saving or spends credits (creating or importing a list, adding a contact to a list, enrichment, research, an AI command), a sign-up dialog opens. Your current search or selection is kept — in Person Search, the search you were running continues right after sign-up. ### Signing up Click **Start for free** in the account menu (the avatar at the bottom of the left navigation), or just start an action that needs an account — either opens the **Get Started** dialog. Enter your email address, then enter the one-time code sent to that address; there is no password to create or remember. Every new account starts with **25 free credits**, and no credit card is required. Temporary or disposable email addresses are not accepted — see below. Your account comes with its own workspace, where your lists, saved contacts and Inbox live (see "[What is a workspace?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/what-is-a-workspace)"). If a colleague invited you, open the link from the invitation e-mail and click **Sign in and join** instead. Sign up with the address the invite was sent to, and you land directly in their workspace (see "[Invite teammates to a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/invite-teammates)"). ### Signing in Signing in works the same way: click **Start for free** in the account menu, enter your email address and the one-time code sent to it. If an account already exists for that address, you are signed straight in. If you open a link to a list while signed out, you'll see a **Welcome Back** dialog with the same two steps. ### Disposable email addresses If you sign up with a temporary or disposable email address, you'll see a **Temporary Email Address Detected** page right after sign-in, and you can't use the app with that account. Click **Sign Out & Register with Real Email**, then sign up again with a permanent address such as Gmail, Outlook or your work email. ### The account menu The avatar at the bottom of the left navigation opens your account menu. For a signed-in account it shows: - your name and email, then a card for the active **workspace**: its plan badge, a switch icon (switch, invite, create), and your credit balance with **+ Top up** for the owner, opening the credit purchase dialog, - **Settings** — opens the Settings page in full: your profile & sign-in, and the workspace's general settings, members, plan & billing, credits & usage, connected accounts and block list, - **Plan & billing** — a shortcut straight to that section of Settings, - **Help** — opens the help for the page you are on (see "[Help in the app: guides, video and AI help](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/help-in-the-app)"), - **Language** — English, German or Spanish (French is also selectable, partly translated), - **Sign out**. Anonymous visitors see "Guest – Browsing without an account", a **Start for free** button ("25 free starter credits · sign in with an email code"), and the rows **Plans & Billing** (to browse pricing), **Help** and **Language**. ### Signing out and switching accounts Choose **Sign Out** in the account menu to end the session in this browser. Signing in on a different device or browser needs the email + code step again — a session isn't shared across devices, only across pages in the same browser. To use a different account, sign out first, then sign in again with the other email address. Credits and your plan belong to your account; lists, the Watchlist and the Inbox belong to the workspace they were created in. ### FAQ #### Do I need an account to use ListPlus? Not to look around. You can browse the Home page, the import wizard, Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research without signing in, and Person Search gives you a few free lookups. An account is needed as soon as you want to save something or spend credits, for example to create a list or run an enrichment — the sign-up dialog opens automatically at that point. #### How do I sign up or sign in? Click Start for free in the account menu (the avatar at the bottom of the left navigation), or start an action that needs an account. Enter your email address, then the one-time code sent to it — there is no password. New accounts get 25 free credits and no credit card is required. #### Why is my email address rejected during sign-up? ListPlus doesn't accept temporary or disposable email addresses. Sign up with a permanent address, such as your work email or a Gmail or Outlook account. #### Do I get free credits when I sign up? Yes. Every new account starts with 25 free credits, and no credit card is required. See "[How credits work](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/credits-explained)" for what credits pay for and how to top up. #### Where do I sign out? Open the account menu via the avatar at the bottom of the left navigation and choose Sign Out. This ends your session in this browser only. #### Can I add or change the email address on my account? To change the email address your account uses, contact support@listplus.ai from your current address. Your lists and credits stay with your account. #### Do I stay signed in if I switch devices? No. Your sign-in is tied to the browser you signed in on, not synced across devices. Signing out ends the session only in that browser; on a new device or browser, sign in again with your email address and a fresh one-time code — there's no password to remember, so it only takes a moment. #### What can I do before I create an account? You can browse the Home page, the import wizard, Person Search, Segment Search and AI Research, and Person Search lets you open a few full profiles for free. Nothing is saved and no credits are spent until you sign up; see Person Search for the exact free allowance there. #### Is there a password I need to set? No. ListPlus signs you in with your email address and a one-time code; there's no password. Adding a passkey in Settings → Profile & sign-in is optional. #### When does ListPlus ask me to create an account? As soon as you do something that needs saving or spends credits: creating or importing a list, adding a contact to a list, running an enrichment, starting a research, or using an AI command. Browsing itself never asks you to sign up. --- ## Managing your account, language and installing ListPlus as an app Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/profile-language-install Last updated: 2026-10-01 A few things live in Settings or your avatar menu that don't fit elsewhere: your profile, switching the app's language, and your display name in a workspace. Installing ListPlus as a browser app is a separate, browser-level feature. ### Your profile Click the gear icon at the bottom of the left navigation, or "Settings" in your avatar menu, to open **Settings**, then **Profile & sign-in** under "My account" — your language, email, passkeys and the devices you're signed in on, plus "Delete account". Since sign-in is email address plus a one-time code only, there's no password to change here; see "[Account and sign-in](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/account-and-login)" for how sign-in itself works. ### Your name in a workspace Your teammates see your display name in the member list, next to AI Research runs you start, and in invitations you send. To change it, open the workspace menu (workspace name on Home, or the workspace row in your avatar menu) → **Members & invites**, click the pencil icon (**Change my name**) next to your own entry, type the new name and press Enter. The name belongs to your account, so it shows the same in every workspace. ### Language The app is available in **English**, **German** and **Spanish**; **French** can also be selected, but only parts of the app are translated so far, and the rest appears in English. Switch it from the avatar menu's **Language** submenu, or from the top of **Settings → Profile & sign-in** — both list all four and mark your current choice with a checkmark. The change applies immediately, no reload needed, and your choice is remembered in this browser. Invitation e-mails you send to colleagues are written in your current app language. ### Installing ListPlus as a browser app ListPlus isn't in the App Store or Google Play (see "[Using ListPlus on a phone or tablet](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/mobile-and-small-screens)"), but it can be installed as an app straight from your browser, since it's built to support that. On a computer, look for an install icon in the address bar (Chrome, Edge) and click it; on a phone, use your browser's own menu — usually **Add to Home Screen** on iPhone Safari, or **Install app** on Android Chrome. An installed ListPlus opens in its own window without the browser's address bar, at the same listplus.ai/app address either way. **Related topics:** account-and-login · mobile-and-small-screens · invite-teammates. ### FAQ #### Where are my settings? Click the gear icon at the bottom of the left navigation, or "Settings" in your avatar menu — it opens the Settings page, starting on "Profile & sign-in" under "My account" (your language, email, passkeys and signed-in devices). There's no password to manage, since sign-in uses only your email address and a one-time code. #### How do I change the app language? Open the account menu via the avatar at the bottom of the left navigation and choose Language, or open Settings → Profile & sign-in and change it at the top there. English, German and Spanish are fully available; French can also be selected, but parts of the app still appear in English. The change applies immediately. #### Does changing the language apply right away? Yes. Pick a language in the avatar menu's Language submenu and the interface switches immediately — no page reload or re-login needed. #### Is there a ListPlus app in the App Store or Google Play? No. ListPlus runs in your browser at listplus.ai/app; see "[Using ListPlus on a phone or tablet](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/mobile-and-small-screens)" for what works on mobile. #### How do I install ListPlus as an app on my computer or phone? Use your browser's own install feature: on a computer, click the install icon in the address bar (Chrome, Edge); on a phone, use the browser menu's "Add to Home Screen" (Safari) or "Install app" (Android Chrome). It then opens in its own window at the same listplus.ai/app address. #### Is my language choice saved to my account? No — your language choice is saved in this browser only, not on your ListPlus account. If you sign in on a different browser or device, or clear this browser's site data, you'll need to pick your language again. #### How do I change the name my teammates see? Open the workspace menu (workspace name on Home or the workspace row in your avatar menu) → Members & invites, click the pencil icon next to your own entry, type the name and press Enter. The name belongs to your account, so it shows the same in every workspace you're in. --- ## Deleting lists, contacts, and your account Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/delete-account-and-data Last updated: 2026-10-17 You can delete a list, a contact on the Watchlist, a folder, an Inbox (Eingang) entry, an AI Research run or a whole workspace yourself, right in the app, at any time. Lists, the Watchlist, the Inbox and research runs are shared in your workspace, so deleting something removes it for everyone in it. Deleting your whole account is different and far more sweeping: the **Delete account** button in Settings → Profile & sign-in deletes your account together with all of your data in one step, with nothing left for support to finish afterwards — and there's no way to undo it, so export anything you want to keep first (see "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)"). ### Delete a list The owner and admins of the workspace can delete a list: choose **Delete list** from the **⋯** menu on the list's card on Home or next to the list in the list tree of the **Lists** view, then confirm with **Yes, delete**. Deleting a list is immediate and permanent: there's no trash and no recovery, and it disappears for everyone in the workspace. Members can't delete lists; ask an admin or the owner. ### Remove a contact from the Watchlist or delete a folder On the Watchlist page (formerly Saved), open the contact's row **⋯** menu and choose **Delete** — it's removed right away, with no confirmation step. Folders live in the Watchlist page's own left column (a drawer on phones): open a folder's **⋯** menu → **Delete folder** and confirm. Deleting a folder, or removing a person from one, doesn't delete the contact — they **stay on the Watchlist**, just unfiled from that folder, so they're not subject to the 30-day "recently viewed" cleanup (see "[Where is my data stored?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/data-sources-privacy-legal/where-is-my-data)"). ### Inbox: Done vs. Delete Marking an Inbox entry **Done** moves it from **Collected** (All) to **Done** — it isn't deleted and still expires after 14 days like any untouched entry. To remove an entry immediately, hover it, click the trash icon and confirm **Delete** — this deletes it right away, before the 14-day window. Saving a contact from an entry or adding it to a list keeps that contact regardless of what you do with the entry. ### Delete an AI Research run Click the **×** on the run in the research panel and confirm **Delete**. The run and its matches are permanently removed. ### API connections and connected accounts To remove a list's API/MCP connection, open the list's **Automation** panel, go to **Permissions**, click **Delete API Endpoint** and confirm with **Delete**. The URL stops working immediately and any service using it loses access. To disconnect a connected CRM or Google Sheets account, see "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)". ### Delete a workspace The owner can delete a whole workspace with all its lists, the Watchlist, Inbox, research runs, pipelines and connections: workspace menu (workspace name on Home) → **Workspace settings** → **Danger zone** → **Delete workspace**, then type the workspace name and click **Delete permanently**. Your credits and plan are not affected. See "[Leave, remove, transfer or delete a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/leave-remove-transfer-delete)" for the details. ### Deleting your account Settings → **Profile & sign-in** has a **Delete account** button that deletes your account and your data together, in one step — there's no separate request to support, and no undo. Above the button, a note warns that deleting your account also deletes every workspace you own, with all lists and data, for their members too — and names those workspaces ("Your workspaces: …"). Deleting your account removes: - Every workspace **you own**, with everything in it — lists, Watchlist, Inbox, research runs, pipelines, API connections and connected accounts. Other members of those workspaces lose access; the data itself is gone, not handed to anyone. - Your own **membership** in workspaces owned by someone else — you leave them, but what you created there (lists, pipelines, research runs, anything you added) stays with that workspace for its owner and other members. - Your **personal data**: your profile and the accounts you personally connected (CRM/Sheets logins, etc.). - Your **credits** — any remaining balance is gone with the account and isn't refunded. - Your **subscription**, if you have one: it's cancelled immediately, so nothing further is charged. The deletion starts as soon as you confirm and runs in the background, so your data disappears shortly afterwards. If a run is interrupted, it is picked up again automatically (every 30 minutes) until everything is deleted — nothing is left half-done. If colleagues work in a workspace you own, transfer it to one of them first (workspace menu → Workspace settings → Transfer ownership) — once you delete your account, that workspace and its data are gone for everyone. Export anything you want to keep first (open a list's **⋯** menu → **Export Data**; see "Take your data with you before you leave" in "[Cancel, downgrade and leave](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/cancel-downgrade-leave)"). Your invoices are kept at Stripe and Link for legal record-keeping even after your account is deleted; for a copy, look in your emails from Link, at link.com, or contact support@listplus.ai. A Link account you created when paying belongs to Link and isn't deleted with your ListPlus account — ask Link to delete it. **Related topics:** cancel-downgrade-leave · where-is-my-data · export-overview · connect-crm-and-sheets · leave-remove-transfer-delete. ### FAQ #### How do I delete my account and my data? Open Settings → Profile & sign-in and use the Delete account button — it deletes your account and all of your data together, in one step, with no separate request to support needed. If colleagues work in a workspace you own, transfer it to one of them first, since that workspace is deleted along with everything in it. You can also delete individual lists, saved contacts, folders, Inbox entries and whole workspaces yourself at any time without deleting your whole account. #### What exactly does the "Delete account" button in Settings delete? Everything: every workspace you own and all its lists, Watchlist, Inbox, research runs and pipelines, your membership in any workspace you don't own (what you created there stays with that workspace), your profile and the connected accounts you added. An active subscription is cancelled immediately, so nothing more is charged; your Stripe invoices are kept at Stripe for legal retention. #### How do I delete a list, and can I undo it? The workspace owner and admins can: "..." menu → Delete list → Yes, delete, on the list's card on Home or in the list tree of the Lists view. Deleting a list is permanent for everyone in the workspace, with no undo and no trash. Members can't delete lists, so ask an admin or the owner. #### How do I remove a contact from my watchlist? Open the contact's row "..." menu on the Watchlist page and choose Delete — it's removed immediately, with no confirmation step. This doesn't affect any list you already added that contact to. #### If I delete a folder on the Watchlist, are the contacts in it deleted too? No. Deleting a folder only removes the folder — the people in it stay on the Watchlist, they're just no longer filed anywhere, so they still show under "All" and don't fall back into the 30-day "recently viewed" cleanup. #### What's the difference between marking an Inbox entry Done and deleting it? Done moves the entry from "Collected" (All) to "Done" — it still expires automatically after 14 days like any Inbox entry, same as if you'd done nothing. Delete (the trash icon on the entry) removes it immediately instead of waiting for that window. Either way, any contact you already saved or added to a list from that entry is unaffected. #### Can I delete an AI Research run? Yes — click the × on the run in the research panel and confirm Delete. The run and its matches are permanently removed. #### How do I delete a list's API connection or token? Open the list's Automation panel, go to Permissions, click Delete API Endpoint and confirm with Delete. The URL stops working immediately and any service using it loses access. #### Is deleting my account instant, and can I undo it? Clicking Delete account in Settings starts the deletion right away and it runs in the background, so your workspaces, lists and other data disappear shortly after; if it's interrupted, it's resumed automatically every 30 minutes until everything is deleted. There's no undo once it's started, so export anything you want to keep first. #### What happens to a workspace I own if I delete my account? It's deleted completely, along with every list, Watchlist contact, Inbox entry, research run and pipeline in it — other members lose access, the data isn't transferred to anyone. Transfer ownership to a colleague first (workspace menu → Workspace settings → Transfer ownership) if you want that workspace to continue. #### What happens to workspaces I'm just a member of, not the owner? You simply leave them — your own membership ends, but the lists, pipelines and anything else you created or contributed there stays with that workspace for its owner and the remaining members, exactly as if you'd left it yourself. #### What happens to my remaining credits if I delete my account? They're deleted with your account and aren't refunded, so use them up first if you want to. The Delete account button can't be undone. --- ## Usage evaluation: what ListPlus counts and how to switch it off Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/usage-evaluation Last updated: 2026-10-16 ListPlus counts which functions are used and how often, so we can see what helps and what needs work. The count is linked to your account by a pseudonym, works without cookies, and never includes the contents of your lists. You can switch it off for your account at any time in **Settings → Profile & sign-in** (Einstellungen → Profil & Anmeldung) with the switch **Usage evaluation** (Nutzungsauswertung). ### What is counted Events of the kind "a list was created", "an enrichment was started", "a column of kind Score was added", "an export in format CSV was done", "a page of the kind list was viewed". Each event carries only kinds, choices and counts — for example the import source, the number of rows, the export format, which panel was opened — plus your plan and the page it happened on as a pattern (see below). On the server, every AI call and every call to a data provider is counted as well: which feature asked for it, which model or provider answered, whether it succeeded, how long it took, how many tokens or items it used, and the credits charged for it. These counts are also what keeps our own cost and quality figures right. Your browser also sends what analytics libraries usually add: browser and version, operating system, device type, screen and window size, time zone and browser language. No location is derived from your connection. ### What is not counted - The contents of your lists: no cell values, no names, no e-mail addresses, no company names, no column names, no tags. - What you type: no search texts, no AI instructions, no chat messages. (The help chat keeps its questions and answers for 30 days without your identity — see "[Help in the app: guides, video and AI help](https://listplus.ai/en/help/getting-started/help-in-the-app)"; that is separate from this evaluation.) - Addresses with identifiers: a page is recorded as its pattern, for example "list/[id]/export" — never with the id of the list, a token or a link. The page you came from and any campaign parameters are removed before an event leaves the browser. - Clicks and keystrokes in general: nothing is recorded automatically. Only the named events above are sent, and only the moment you start the action. - No session recordings, no heatmaps, no surveys. ### No cookies, nothing kept in the browser The usage evaluation sets no cookie and keeps no identifier in your browser's storage — which is why ListPlus shows no cookie banner. The library runs in page memory only; what it needs is gone when you close the tab. Two small notes stay in the browser so the same browser isn't counted twice: which views were already counted as a "first visit" (a list of view names), and, right after you create an account, which account was counted as a sign-up (your account id). Neither is a cookie, neither is sent to the analytics service, and both go when you clear the browser's site data. ### How you are told apart When you're signed in, events carry a pseudonym: a hash computed from your account id. It is not your name, not your e-mail address and not your account id, and the analytics service never receives any of those. Your workspace is named the same way, by a hash. Without an account you're not told apart at all: an anonymous visitor gets a throw-away id for the page load, and no profile is made of it. ### Where the data goes Events are sent through listplus.ai to **PostHog**, a product-analytics service, on its EU cloud (the EU endpoint eu.i.posthog.com). PostHog processes the data on our behalf. Our own daily totals — how many AI calls, provider calls and credits per feature and day — are kept by ListPlus itself, without any person attached. ### Switching it off Open **Settings → Profile & sign-in** and turn off **Usage evaluation**. From then on: - your browser sends nothing at all — no events, no page views; - what the server counts for your actions (AI and provider calls, credits) is recorded without any person: it can't be linked to you; - the daily totals without a person keep running, as they do for everyone. The choice is stored on your account, not in the browser, so it applies on every device you sign in on. Turn the switch back on to be counted again. The last event your browser sends is the switch-off itself. ### Switched off for the whole workspace The workspace owner can switch usage events off for everyone in the workspace: Settings → **Privacy & compliance** → **Workspace policy** → **Usage events (pseudonymous) — PostHog (EU)**. Then nothing is sent for anyone working in that workspace, whatever their own switch says; only the daily totals without a person keep running. ### Not covered by the switch The listplus.ai website and the app also use Vercel Web Analytics, a cookieless page-view count without any identity, as described in the privacy policy at listplus.ai/privacy. The switch covers the usage evaluation above; it does not change the cookieless page count. **Related topics:** profile-language-install · where-is-my-data · subprocessors · delete-account-and-data. ### FAQ #### What does ListPlus count about my usage? Which functions are used and how often: events like "list created", "enrichment started" or "export done", each with kinds and counts only (source, number of rows, format), plus your plan and the page as a pattern without ids. On the server, AI and data-provider calls are counted with the feature, the model or provider, success, duration and the credits charged. It never includes the contents of your lists. #### Does the usage evaluation see my list data, names or e-mail addresses? No. Cell values, names, e-mail addresses, company names, column names, tags, search texts and AI instructions are never sent. Nothing is recorded automatically from clicks or typing; only named events are sent. #### Does ListPlus set tracking cookies? Why is there no cookie banner? The usage evaluation sets no cookie, and the analytics library runs in page memory only, which is why there's no cookie banner. Your browser only keeps two notes so nothing is counted twice: which views were already counted as a "first visit", and, after you create an account, which account was counted as a sign-up — neither is sent to the analytics service. #### How does ListPlus know it's me in the usage evaluation? Signed in, your events carry a pseudonym: a hash computed from your account id. The analytics service never receives your name, e-mail address or account id. Without an account you're not told apart at all. #### How do I switch the usage evaluation off? Open Settings → Profile & sign-in (Profil & Anmeldung) and turn off the switch "Usage evaluation" (Nutzungsauswertung). Your browser then sends nothing, and what the server counts for your actions is recorded without any person. Turn it back on the same way. #### Does switching it off apply on all my devices? Yes. The choice is stored on your account, not in the browser, so it applies wherever you sign in. Each person in a workspace decides for themselves, unless the workspace owner switched usage events off for everyone in the workspace policy. #### What still gets counted after I switch it off? Only totals without any person: how many AI calls, provider calls and credits per feature and day across all users. Nothing from your browser is sent, and nothing can be linked to you. #### Where does the usage data go? Is it stored in the EU? Events go through listplus.ai to PostHog, a product-analytics service, on its EU cloud (eu.i.posthog.com), which processes them on our behalf. ListPlus's own daily totals hold no person at all. The privacy policy at listplus.ai/privacy has the details. #### Are visitors without an account tracked? Anonymous visitors are counted without any identity: a throw-away id for the page load, no cookie, no profile. Pages are recorded as patterns without ids. #### Does the switch also stop the website's page-view count? No. The listplus.ai website and the app also use Vercel Web Analytics, a cookieless page-view count that carries no identity, as described in the privacy policy at listplus.ai/privacy. The switch covers the usage evaluation of your account. #### Are the page addresses with my list ids sent? No. A page is recorded as its pattern, for example "list/[id]/export"; the id of the list, tokens and links are replaced before the event leaves the browser, and the page you came from is removed too. #### Is anything recorded automatically, like clicks or screen recordings? No. Automatic click capture, session recordings, heatmaps, surveys and error screenshots are all switched off. Only the named events are sent, once per action you start. --- ## Section: Troubleshooting & support ## How do I contact support? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support Last updated: 2026-10-15 ListPlus has no live chat with a person. There are two ways to get help: the AI help in the help window, which answers right away, and e-mail to **support@listplus.ai**, which a person answers. The AI help can also pass your question on to support by e-mail. ### The AI help The round **?** button sits in the bottom-right corner of the main views (Home, a list, New list, Person Search, Segment Search, AI Research, Inbox, Watchlist, Pipelines and the other Flows pages). On a computer it flashes briefly once per view and browser session, about six seconds after the view opens, until you have opened the help there; nothing opens by itself. Click it; under the list of guides is a question field titled **Ask ListPlus** ("AI help · knows your plan and credits"). Type your question, or click one of the questions listed for the view above the field. The conversation opens in the same window, with the link **Guides** to go back. On any other page, open the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) and choose **Help**, or choose **Help** in the menu at your avatar. The same opens from **Contact support** at the bottom of the Home page; the cursor is then already in the question field. The answers come from an AI, not a person. It answers only from the ListPlus help articles and from your workspace's plan and credit balance; it does not see the contents of your lists. An answer can carry a button that opens the right page (for example **Open New list**), a link to a guide and the article it came from. Asking costs no credits. There is a daily limit of questions per person, and several questions in a row that are not about ListPlus pause the help for a while. ### Send to support When the help says nothing about your question, when the topic is one for a person (an invoice, lost data) or when an error occurred, the answer shows **Send to support**. Optionally add a line, then click **Send**. The conversation, your workspace, your plan and the page you are on are e-mailed to support, and you get a copy at your account's e-mail address. Support answers by e-mail to that address, usually within one working day. Without an account only the address and **Copy conversation** are offered. ### Email You can always write to **support@listplus.ai** yourself. It is the one address for every kind of request: billing, technical problems, account changes. The help card has the address as a link under the question field (**Prefer email? support@listplus.ai**), which opens a new mail directly. **Copy conversation** copies the chat so you can paste it into your mail. ### What to include The faster a request can be handled, the less back-and-forth it needs. Include: - the email address your account uses, - the name of the list involved (if any), - what you clicked and where, - the exact error or message text you saw, - roughly when it happened, - the browser you use. ### What support can and can't do for you The AI help can't see your screen, your list or your data, and it can't make changes to your account. For anything that needs a look at your specific list or account (fixing a stuck import, a billing correction, closing your account), use **Send to support** or write to support@listplus.ai with the details above. ### Sending a screenshot The easiest way to share a screenshot is to email it to **support@listplus.ai**, attached to your message, with a short description of what you were doing. **Related topics:** help-in-the-app · status-and-outages. ### FAQ #### How do I contact ListPlus support? Ask the AI help in the help window (the ? button in the bottom-right corner), and if it cannot solve it click "Send to support" under its answer. You can also write to support@listplus.ai at any time — the help card has the address as a link under the question field ("Prefer email?"); a person answers by e-mail, usually within one working day. #### Where is the chat button? Click the round ? button in the bottom-right corner of a main view (Home, a list, the searches, Inbox, Watchlist, the Flows pages); the question field "Ask ListPlus" is under the guides. If you don't see the button, choose Help in the search (⌘K / Ctrl+K) or in the menu at your avatar. #### Can I use the chat without an account? On the ListPlus website, the button "Questions about ListPlus?" at the bottom right of the website's pages (a small round button on blog posts, none on the legal pages) opens the AI help for visitors without an account, with a smaller daily number of questions. Without an account you cannot send a question to support from it; write to support@listplus.ai or use "Copy conversation". #### Does support know who I am when I chat? When you click "Send to support" while signed in, the e-mail contains your workspace, plan and the page you are on, and you get a copy at your account's e-mail address. If you write to support@listplus.ai yourself, mention the e-mail address of your account. #### Is the chat a bot or a real person? It is an AI, not a person. It answers only from the ListPlus help and your workspace's plan and credits. For a person, click "Send to support" under an answer or write to support@listplus.ai. #### Is there a live chat with a support person? No. A person answers by e-mail only, usually within one working day. The AI help in the help window answers immediately. #### How do I send my question to support? Click "Send to support" under an answer of the AI help, optionally add a line and click "Send". The conversation, your workspace, plan and the current page are e-mailed to support and you get a copy; support answers by e-mail. #### What should I include in a support request? Your account email address, the list name (if relevant), what you clicked, the exact error or message text, roughly when it happened, and the browser you use. This lets support act without a round trip to ask for details. #### Can support see my screen or my list? No. The AI help only answers from help content and your plan and credits, and does not see your lists. Describe what you saw instead, or email a screenshot to support@listplus.ai. #### How do I send a screenshot? Email it as an attachment to support@listplus.ai, together with a short description of what you were doing and roughly when. #### Can support or the chat change something on my account? The AI help can't make changes to your account. For anything that needs an actual change, such as a billing correction, closing your account or fixing a stuck import, use "Send to support" or email support@listplus.ai with the details. #### Does asking the AI help cost credits? No. Asking costs no credits. There is a daily limit of questions per person, and several questions in a row that are not about ListPlus pause the help for a while. #### Does Premium get faster support? No. Support answers every plan the same way, by e-mail and usually within one working day; see "[Plans and pricing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/plans-and-pricing)" for what each plan includes. --- ## Import problems Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/import-problems Last updated: 2026-10-17 Most import problems have one of these causes. This article routes you to the fix; for the full import flow see "[Create a list and import a file](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/create-list-and-import-file)" and "File import details." ### Columns look wrong, or characters are garbled ListPlus detects your file's delimiter and character encoding automatically — see "[File import details (encoding, sheets, JSON shapes, size limit)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-file-details)" for exactly how. If a _value_ ended up in the wrong column, or accented characters show as odd symbols, the most common cause is a source file that isn't cleanly formatted; re-export it as CSV or Excel from the original tool and import again. If the _type_ is wrong (for example an email column detected as plain text), fix it under Set up → Columns in the list — see "[How column type detection works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/column-detection)." ### No header row detected ListPlus expects a header row and skips any preamble rows above the data table automatically. If your first row looks like data rather than column names, ListPlus treats the whole file as headerless and names the columns `_1`, `_2`, and so on — add a proper header row to your source file and re-import, or rename the columns after import. ### Google Sheets link won't import The sheet must be shared as "Anyone with the link can view." Otherwise you'll see an error asking you to make the file publicly accessible, or a Google Sheets Import dialog with Download as CSV and Download as Excel buttons — download the file and select it on the New List page. You can also connect your Google account instead (Pro) — see "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)." ### File too large Every import format is capped at 100 MB; a larger file shows "File too large. Maximum size is 100MB." Split the file or remove unneeded columns and try again. ### Only some rows were imported If your import is larger than your plan's remaining record capacity, ListPlus imports what fits and shows "Importing X of Y rows due to your plan's record limit." — see "What is the record limit?" for the exact numbers and how to free up space or upgrade. The second cause is the per-list ceiling: one list holds at most 50,000 records, so a larger file shows "Importing X of Y rows – one list holds at most 50,000 records." with the hint "Import the remaining rows into a second list." **Related topics:** create-list-and-import-file · import-file-details · column-detection · record-limit · not-enough-credits · contact-support. ### FAQ #### Why did my columns come out wrong after importing? Delimiter and encoding are detected automatically, so this is usually either a wrong detected column _type_ (fix it under Set up → Columns in the list) or a source file that isn't cleanly formatted (re-export it as CSV or Excel and re-import). See "[How column type detection works](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/column-detection)" for fixing types. #### My imported text shows strange characters instead of accents Re-save the file as UTF-8 in the original tool and import again — see "[File import details (encoding, sheets, JSON shapes, size limit)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-file-details)" for how encoding is detected. #### ListPlus named my columns "_1", "_2" instead of using my headers This happens when ListPlus decides your first row looks like data rather than column names, so it treats the file as headerless. Add a real header row to your source file and re-import, or just rename the generated columns after import. #### Why won't my Google Sheets link import? The sheet must be shared as "Anyone with the link can view." Otherwise you'll see an error asking you to make the file publicly accessible, or a Google Sheets Import dialog with Download as CSV and Download as Excel buttons — download the file and select it on the New List page. You can also connect your Google account instead (Pro). #### I get "File too large" when I try to import You'll see "File too large. Maximum size is 100MB." — see "[File import details (encoding, sheets, JSON shapes, size limit)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-file-details)" for the size limit per format. #### My import only brought in some of my rows Either your plan's record limit was reached partway through the file ("Importing X of Y rows due to your plan's record limit." — delete unneeded lists or upgrade), or the file is larger than one list can hold ("Importing X of Y rows – one list holds at most 50,000 records." — import the remaining rows into a second list). See "What is the record limit?" #### Do I need to clean up my file before importing? No — delimiter and encoding are detected automatically; see "[File import details (encoding, sheets, JSON shapes, size limit)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/lists-and-import/import-file-details)" for what's automatic and how to skip a column. #### None of this fixed my import — what now? Contact support with the file (or a small sample that reproduces the problem) and what you expected to see — see "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for how to reach us. --- ## Enrichment problems: nothing found, cells not filled, blocked, run stopped Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/enrichment-problems Last updated: 2026-10-17 Enrichment trouble is almost always one of four things: a lookup genuinely found nothing, it found data but a cell stayed empty, ListPlus refused to start because AI suggestions are open or edits could not be saved, or the run stopped before it was done. Each has its own full article — this page routes you to the right one. ### A lookup found nothing If a run finished but returned no data for a row, see "[Why did enrichment find nothing?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-found-nothing)" — it covers the usual reasons (no starting point, no provider match, a wrong or outdated identifier) and what to try next, plus which lookups charge credits even on a miss. ### A lookup found data, but the cell is still empty First check the row: if it still shows the running ring, the run hasn't reached it yet — results are written into empty cells on the server as they arrive, and FullEnrich lookups can take a few minutes for a large list. A cell that already had a value keeps it; the found value is stored with the row and can be taken over from the record panel. Every lookup — the selection bar, the cell wand, the record panel, a check card — fills empty cells by itself; only an **AI Analysis** from the Enrich menu waits for the "Fill empty cells?" dialog. See "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)" for both cases and for "Apply values" in the Enrich menu. ### "There are open AI suggestions or changes that could not be saved" Your own edits never block an enrichment — they are written automatically before it starts. The Enrich menu only refuses while AI suggestions are still open or the list header shows **Not saved**, because the enrichment works with the stored data. You'll see: "There are open AI suggestions or changes that could not be saved. Resolve them first – the enrichment works with the stored data." Click **Apply · N** or **Discard** in the list header, or wait until the status shows **Saved**, then start the enrichment again. See "[Saving is automatic: undo and AI suggestions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/saving-is-manual)". ### A lookup failed with "switched off by the workspace owner" The workspace owner refused the data provider behind that lookup in the workspace policy (Settings → **Privacy & compliance** → **Workspace policy**), so every row of it fails and nothing is charged. Pick a lookup that uses another provider, or ask the owner to switch the provider back on. ### The run stopped A run that cannot continue stops and names the reason in the task indicator at the top of the screen. Nothing is lost in any of these cases: rows already enriched keep their results and their filled cells, and the rows that are left are not charged. Click **Continue** next to the stopped run in the task indicator to go on with what is left; if the run is no longer listed there (after a reload, or on a colleague's screen), start the same enrichment again on the remaining rows — rows that already have a result are not charged twice. - **"Stopped: not enough credits"** — the balance doesn't cover the next rows. If it was empty from the start, the run doesn't start at all: you see the credits window, or, as a member of someone else's workspace, "Balance empty – please ask … to top up" with the owner's name, because enrichment in a workspace spends the owner's credits (see "[Credits, plan and limits in a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/billing-in-workspaces)"). If it ran out while the run was going — other members may be spending the same credits — top up and click **Continue**. - **"Stopped: the provider is not answering"** — the data provider behind the lookup returned only errors for a while: an outage on their side, a problem with the key, or their quota used up. ListPlus stops instead of retrying blindly. Wait a little and click **Continue**; if it stops the same way for hours, contact support with the list name and the enrichment you ran. - **"Stopped at the maximum you accepted"** — the run spent the amount you accepted at the start ("at most N cr") and rows are left. **Continue** goes on without that ceiling; to set a new maximum instead, start the enrichment again on the remaining rows. If the task indicator shows a wait instead of a stop, the provider's daily limit is reached; the run continues by itself at the time shown. If an enrichment refuses to start ("These records are being enriched right now", "Nothing to enrich", "The enrichment could not start" …), the meaning of each message is in "[Enrichment runs: progress, limits and stopped runs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/running-jobs-and-limits)", along with how runs work, and "[Continue a stopped enrichment](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/continue-stopped-enrichment)" for the **Continue** button next to a stopped run and what it keeps. **Related topics:** enrichment-found-nothing · fill-empty-cells · running-jobs-and-limits · continue-stopped-enrichment · saving-is-manual · which-enrich-button · contact-support. ### FAQ #### Why does every row fail with "switched off by the workspace owner"? The workspace owner switched off that lookup's data provider in the workspace policy (Settings → Privacy & compliance → Workspace policy), and nothing is charged for those rows. Use a lookup that goes through another provider, or ask the owner to switch it back on. #### Why did my enrichment run find nothing for a row? See "[Why did enrichment find nothing?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-found-nothing)" — it lists the usual causes (no starting point on the row, no match at the provider, a wrong or outdated identifier) and what to try next. #### The cell is still empty even though enrichment said it found data — why? If the row still shows its running ring, the run hasn't written it yet — every lookup fills empty cells on the server by itself as results arrive. A cell that already had a value keeps it and the found value is stored with the row; only an AI Analysis from the Enrich menu waits for the "Fill empty cells?" dialog. To put stored values into cells, use "Apply values" in the Enrich menu (see "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)"). #### Why does ListPlus say "There are open AI suggestions or changes that could not be saved"? The enrichment works with the stored data, so it won't start while AI suggestions are open or edits could not be saved. Click Apply · N or Discard in the list header, or wait until the save status shows Saved, then start the enrichment again. Your own edits never block it — they are written automatically before it starts. #### I applied the suggestions and it still won't let me enrich — what now? Check the save status in the list header: if it shows a red "Not saved", the server can't be reached and ListPlus keeps retrying — wait until it shows Saved. If it stays blocked, reload the list; if the problem persists, contact support with the list name and what you clicked. #### Does a lookup that finds nothing cost credits? E-mail and phone lookups don't — see "[Why did enrichment find nothing?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/enrichment-found-nothing)" for the lookups that charge for the attempt itself. #### Do I need to save again after enrichment fills my cells? No. The cells a lookup fills are stored directly on the server, and the cells you confirm in the "Fill empty cells?" dialog after an AI Analysis are saved automatically too; ⌘Z / Ctrl+Z undoes a fill as one step. See "[Fill empty cells with enrichment data](https://listplus.ai/en/help/enrich/fill-empty-cells)". #### My enrichment stopped with "not enough credits" — what now? The credit balance ran out during the run, so the remaining rows were not charged; in a workspace it's the owner's balance, which other members may be spending too. Once the balance is topped up (only the owner can do that for a workspace), click Continue next to the stopped run in the task indicator — or, if it is no longer listed there, start the same enrichment again; rows already enriched are not charged again. #### What does "the provider is not answering" mean, and what do I do? The data provider returned only errors for a while (an outage, a key problem or a used-up quota on their side), so ListPlus stopped the run instead of retrying blindly; rows already done keep their results. Wait a little, then click Continue in the task indicator to go on with the rows that are left. If it keeps stopping for hours, contact support with the list name and the enrichment you ran. #### Do I lose anything when a run stops and I continue it? No. Rows already enriched keep their results and filled cells, and rows that were not reached are not charged. Continue (or a new start of the same enrichment) takes only the rows that are left, and a row that already has a result is not charged again. #### None of this matches my problem — what do I do? Contact support with the list name, what you clicked, and the exact message you saw — see "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for the ways to reach us. --- ## Sign-in problems Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/sign-in-problems Last updated: 2026-10-05 ListPlus signs you in with your email address and a one-time code — there's no password to reset. This article covers what to do when the code doesn't arrive or you're signed into the wrong account; for how sign-up and sign-in work step by step, see "[Account and sign-in](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/account-and-login)." ### The code isn't arriving Check your spam or junk folder first — the code email sometimes lands there. If it's still not there after about a minute, double-check you typed your email address correctly and click Send new code — if a countdown ("Request a new code in …") shows, wait until it runs out. ### Signed into the wrong account Choose **Sign Out** in the account menu (click your avatar at the bottom of the left navigation), then sign in again with the email address you actually want to use. Your credits and plan belong to your account, and you see the workspaces that account is a member of, so switching accounts switches everything you see. If you're in the right account but your lists are missing, you're probably in a different workspace — see "[My list looks wrong — rows, columns or whole lists are missing](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/list-looks-wrong)". ### "Your sign-in has expired" A sign-in ends after a while, and it ends early when you sign out on another device or when you are signed in on more devices than allowed at the same time — the oldest sign-in is closed then. ListPlus notices on the next page load and shows you as signed out; under **Settings → Profile & sign-in** you may see **Your sign-in has expired** with the button **Sign in again**. Sign in again with the same email address and everything is back; nothing is lost. ### An invite link doesn't work A workspace invitation can only be accepted with the email address it was sent to, and the link is valid for 14 days and works once. - **"This invite was sent to … Sign in with that address to join."** You're signed in with a different address. Sign out and sign in (or sign up) with the invited address, then open the link again. - **"This invite no longer exists — it expired or was already used."** The 14 days have passed, the invite was withdrawn, or someone sent you a newer one (a resend replaces the old link). Ask the person who invited you to send a new invite. - **"This workspace no longer exists."** The workspace was deleted. If you don't have a ListPlus account yet, click **Sign in and join** on the invite page; signing in with the invited address creates your account and joins you in one go. See "[Invite teammates to a workspace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/invite-teammates)" for how invites work. **Related topics:** account-and-login · contact-support. ### FAQ #### I never got my sign-in code by email — what do I do? Check your spam or junk folder first, since the email sometimes lands there, and give it about a minute to arrive. If it still hasn't shown up, confirm you typed your email address correctly and request a new code. #### Can I ask for a new code? Yes — on the code screen click Send new code. If a countdown ("Request a new code in …") shows, wait until it runs out. #### My email address was rejected as disposable during sign-up ListPlus doesn't accept temporary or disposable email addresses — see "[Account and sign-in](https://listplus.ai/en/help/account/account-and-login)" for the exact page you'll see and how to register again with a permanent address. #### I'm signed into the wrong ListPlus account — how do I switch? Open the account menu via your avatar at the bottom of the left navigation, choose Sign Out, then sign in again with the other email address. Each account keeps its own credits, plan and workspace memberships, so after switching you see that account's workspaces. #### I typed the wrong email address when signing in Go back to the sign-in box, clear the field and enter the correct address, then request the code again — a code is only sent to the address you enter. #### The code I received doesn't work anymore Codes expire after a short time and lock after too many wrong tries — you'll see "The passcode has expired…" or "…entered incorrectly too many times…". Click Send new code and use the newest code only. #### Why does ListPlus say "Your sign-in has expired"? Your sign-in ended: after a while by itself, or early because you signed out on another device or were signed in on too many devices at once (the oldest sign-in is closed then). Click Sign in again and use the same email address; your lists and data are unchanged. #### None of this gets me signed in — what now? Contact support with the email address you're trying to use — see "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for how to reach us. --- ## Export and sync problems Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/export-and-sync-problems Last updated: 2026-10-15 This article covers export and sync failures specifically. For how exporting, connecting and syncing normally work, see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)," "[Connecting a CRM, spreadsheet or other app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/connect-crm-and-sheets)" and "[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)." ### "Export failed" If an export doesn't go through, you'll see "Export failed. Please try again." and the wizard returns you to the step where you can adjust it. Retry first; if it keeps failing for the same destination, reconnect that destination's account and try again, or contact support. ### Columns missing from an export Check the column step in the export wizard — a column may simply be unchecked. Also remember export only sends what's actually saved in the list's cells: a run fills empty cells itself, but data a single-cell or record-panel enrichment found that you haven't accepted via "Fill empty cells?", or values stored for a cell that already had content, are left out for most destinations — see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" for the exceptions. ### CRM field mapping looks wrong For HubSpot, open **Field Mapping** in the export wizard and check or change the dropdown for each column — an unmapped column is skipped, not sent with a guessed field. Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead don't have a mapping step; see "[Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets)" and "[Sending contacts to Lemlist, Instantly and Smartlead](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/send-to-sequencers)" for how each one matches your columns. ### Rows skipped or marked failed HubSpot and the sequencers (Lemlist, Instantly, Smartlead) need an email address, read from your column named **email**. A row without one isn't sent — HubSpot, Lemlist and Instantly count it as "failed" in the result message; Smartlead leaves it out of its count. ### "Write to …" or "Sync failed" The button **Write to {source}** in the Changes panel (for example **Write to HubSpot**; **Sync** in the status bar opens it) only works for lists created by connecting Google Sheets, HubSpot, Notion, Salesforce or Attio (Attio: lists imported from People or Companies, not from "A list"). If Attio refuses a value (a select that is not an option, a phone without "+" and country code, a "Country" that is not a two-letter code), the change stays open with Attio's reason. Your own edits are already saved; open AI suggestions are not — click **Apply** or **Discard** in the list header first, then try again. If the source changed a field after you edited it, nothing is written yet: the panel says "{source} has changed in the meantime", marks those changes ("{source} now holds: … – the list takes that") — the source wins — and **Write anyway** writes all the other changes. **Related topics:** export-overview · export-to-hubspot-and-sheets · send-to-sequencers · sync-overview · push-changes-back · contact-support. ### FAQ #### I got "Export failed" — what do I do? Try the export again; this usually means the request to that destination didn't complete. If it keeps failing for the same destination, reconnect that account (HubSpot, Google, Lemlist and so on) from the export wizard and try once more. #### Some columns are missing from my export Check that the column is checked on the export wizard's column step. If the missing values were found by Enrich but never filled into the cells (a run fills empty cells itself; single-cell enrichments ask first, and a cell that already had content keeps it), fill them in first with "Apply values" in the Enrich menu — see "[Exporting your list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-overview)" for which destinations fill enrichment data automatically instead. #### My HubSpot field mapping looks wrong Open the Field Mapping section in the export wizard and check or change the dropdown for each column yourself — ListPlus only suggests a mapping, and any column left unmapped is skipped rather than guessed. #### Why were some rows skipped or marked "failed" in my export? HubSpot and the sequencers (Lemlist, Instantly, Smartlead) match and create contacts by email, read from your column named email. A row without one isn't sent — HubSpot, Lemlist and Instantly count it as "failed" in the result message; Smartlead leaves it out of its count. #### Writing changes back says "Sync failed" — what happened? Only stored data is pushed, so Apply or Discard any open AI suggestions in the list header and wait until the save status shows Saved, then try again. If the panel instead says the source "has changed in the meantime", those fields changed in the source after your edit: the list takes the source's value for them, and Write anyway writes all your other changes. #### I don't see a "Write to HubSpot" (or other source) button on my list The button appears in the Changes panel only for the workspace's owner and admins, and only on lists created by connecting a source that supports sync back — see "[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)" for the list of sources. If you're a member, ask an owner or admin of the workspace to write the changes back. #### Why can't I sync or reload a connected list in my workspace? A connected account belongs to the workspace it was connected in, so every member can use Reload, but the Changes panel's "Write to …" button is only shown to the workspace's owner and admins. If Reload says "This data source was connected in another workspace and can only be reloaded there.", switch to that workspace, or export the list and import it where you need it. See "[Keeping a connected list in sync](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/sync-overview)." #### Sync, reload or export says a higher plan is needed, what now? Connected systems need the Pro plan, or Premium for HubSpot and the Premium sources, and the message "Connected systems need the Pro plan…" (or "…the Premium plan…") means the workspace owner's plan no longer covers it. The owner can upgrade under Settings → Plan; the accounts stay connected, so sync, reload and export work again at once, and an automatic refresh resumes by itself. #### Sync, reload or export stops with "not enough credits" — why? Every request to a connected tool costs credits from the workspace owner's balance, so sync, reload, export and the automatic refresh stop when it is empty. Top up and start again; an automatic refresh resumes by itself after the top-up. --- ## My list looks wrong — rows, columns or whole lists are missing Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/list-looks-wrong Last updated: 2026-10-17 If a list suddenly shows fewer rows or columns than you expect, it's almost always a filter, a sublist or a display setting — not lost data. This article is a checklist; each cause links to the article that covers it in full. ### A whole list (or all your lists) is missing - **You're in a different workspace.** Lists belong to a workspace, and you only see the lists of the workspace that's active. Check the workspace name in the Home header, or open the avatar menu → **Workspaces**, and switch to the right one. If you belong to more than one workspace, the browser tab title also shows the active workspace's name. See "[Switch, create and rename workspaces](https://listplus.ai/en/help/workspaces/switch-and-create-workspaces)." - **The list tree is just collapsed.** Inside a list, the tree of projects and lists starts collapsed so the grid gets the full width. Press ⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L, or click **Lists** in the left navigation again, to show it. - **The list was deleted.** An owner or admin of the workspace can delete lists, and deleting is permanent, with no trash. Ask your workspace's owner or admins. - **You no longer have access.** If you left a workspace, were removed from it, or it was deleted, its lists are gone from your view; you can only get back in with a new invite. ### Rows missing - **The Open view.** Rows with a status that counts as done leave **Open**, the default view. When the status bar shows **Open** and **All**, click **All** to see them; clearing filters goes back to Open. - **An active search or column filter.** Look at the status bar at the bottom of the grid: if a **Filtered** chip is showing next to **All**, a search or column filter is narrowing the view. Click **All** to see every row again. See "[Search, filter, sort, and find & replace](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/search-filter-sort-replace)." - **A Selection or Suggestions chip is active.** These narrow the view to your ticked rows or the rows with open AI suggestions. Click **All** to clear either one. - **An active sublist (segment).** Open **More → Sublists** and check whether a sublist is active — a sublist only shows the rows that match its rule. Click it again or click **Show all rows**. See "[Sublists (segments) and tags](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/segments-and-tags)." - **Ignored rows.** Rows someone marked with **Ignore** disappear from every view. Bring them back via the **Ignored** chip in the status bar (or **Show Ignored Rows** in Commands), then select them and click **Restore**. See "[Ignoring vs. deleting rows](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/hide-or-delete-rows)." ### Columns missing Open **More → Columns** and check the checkbox next to each column — an unchecked column is hidden, not deleted. Tick it to bring it back into the grid; drag a column in that list to reorder it. See "Add, hide, reorder and rename columns" for the full column toolbox. ### Everything looks too small or too large The grid has its own zoom control at the bottom-right of the status bar, from 50% to 150%. Click the percentage in the middle to reset it to 100%. This only changes how large the grid looks on your screen — it never affects your data. **Related topics:** search-filter-sort-replace · hide-or-delete-rows · segments-and-tags · columns-formulas-ai-columns. ### FAQ #### The list tree on the left is gone while I'm in a list Inside a list, the tree of projects and lists starts collapsed so the grid gets the full width. Press ⌘⇧L / Ctrl+Shift+L, or click Lists in the left navigation again, to show it. #### Some rows I expect to see are missing — where did they go? First click "All" in the status bar if it shows "Open" and "All": rows with a done status leave the default Open view. Then check for a "Filtered," "Selection" or "Suggestions" chip (click All to clear it), then check More → Sublists for an active segment, or the "Ignored" chip in the status bar for ignored rows — none of these delete data, they only narrow what's shown. #### How do I tell if a filter or search is currently narrowing my view? The status bar at the bottom of the grid shows a "Filtered" chip next to "All" whenever a search or column filter is active; click "All" to see every row again. #### I can't find some rows anywhere in my views — could they be ignored? Possibly — rows marked with Ignore leave every view. Bring them back via the "Ignored" chip in the status bar (or "Show Ignored Rows" in Commands), then select them and click Restore. #### A column I need isn't showing in the grid — is it deleted? Probably just hidden. Open More → Columns and tick the checkbox next to it to show it again; nothing about a hidden column's data changes. #### Why does my list look tiny or huge compared to last time? Check the zoom control at the bottom-right of the status bar (50%–150%) — click the percentage in the middle to reset it to 100%. It only changes the on-screen size, never your data. #### Could a sublist be the reason I'm only seeing some of my rows? Yes — opening a sublist from More → Sublists shows only the rows that match it. Click the sublist again or click "Show all rows" in Sublists to return to your full list. --- ## Is ListPlus down, and what happens to jobs mid-run? Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/status-and-outages Last updated: 2026-10-16 The ListPlus status page is at [listplus.betteruptime.com](https://listplus.betteruptime.com). It shows whether the website, the app and sign-in are up, and any ongoing incident. ### Checking whether something is down Look at the status page first. If it shows everything as up but something still isn't working for you, contact support (the ? button in the bottom-right corner → ask the AI help and click "Send to support", or write to support@listplus.ai) and describe what you're seeing — an error message, a stuck import, or pages not loading. See "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for what to include so the team can check quickly. ### What happens to a job that's running when something goes wrong Imports, enrichment runs and AI Research are server-side jobs: their progress is stored as they go, not only in your browser tab. An AI Research that stops responding shows **"Stalled — no more response from the run"** instead of finishing normally, and everything it found up to that point is kept; clicking **Resume** starts a fresh working segment to continue it (see "[AI Research always runs on the server](https://listplus.ai/en/help/find-contacts/background-runs)"). The same principle applies to enrichment and import jobs: results already produced are kept, and reopening the list shows their current state. ### What about credits already spent? Some enrichment lookups are only charged when they find something (for example a person via Prospeo or a mobile number); others are charged per attempt. Two specific situations refund automatically — see "[Automatic credit refunds](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/refunds)" for exactly which ones. Outside those, credits already spent for work already done generally aren't refunded; for anything that looks wrong on your balance, contact support with the list or run involved. **Related topics:** contact-support · background-runs · refunds · enrichment-problems. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus have a status page I can check? Yes — [listplus.betteruptime.com](https://listplus.betteruptime.com) shows whether the website, the app and sign-in are up, and any ongoing incident. If it shows everything as up but something still isn't working for you, contact support — write to support@listplus.ai, or ask the AI help (? button in the bottom-right corner) and click "Send to support". #### How do I report that something seems down? Click "Send to support" under an answer of the AI help (? button in the bottom-right corner) or email support@listplus.ai, and describe what you're seeing (an error message, a page that won't load, a stuck job). See "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for what to include. #### If an import or enrichment run is interrupted, do I lose what it already found? No. These are server-side jobs, so results already produced are kept even if your connection drops or the page reloads; reopening the list shows the current state. #### Will I get my credits back if a run fails partway through? It depends on the lookup: some are only charged when they find something, others per attempt. A LinkedIn import that stops early (timeout, provider failure) still delivers the rows it produced and charges them, and its base fee is kept — only an error on ListPlus's own side is refunded. Beyond the two cases in "[Automatic credit refunds](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/refunds)," credits spent on work already done aren't refunded automatically — contact support for a specific concern. #### Should I keep retrying if something seems broken? A short retry is fine, but if it keeps failing, stop and contact support with what you were doing and which list or run it involved — that's faster than repeated attempts. #### What should I include when I report a problem? The more specific you are, the faster support can help — name the list or run involved, the exact error text and roughly when it happened. See "[How do I contact support?](https://listplus.ai/en/help/troubleshooting/contact-support)" for the full list of details to include. --- ## Section: Pipelines ## Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview Last updated: 2026-10-17 A pipeline hands records from ListPlus on to another tool: your CRM, a sequencer, a Slack channel, a Google Sheet, your own webhook or API, another list, or an e-mail to your team. You pick the records, they wait in the pipeline, and you send them with one click. A record is a row of a list, a contact on the Watchlist, or a company on the Watchlist (see "Pipelines to Slack, a CRM or a webhook" for what the targets do with a company). ### Where to find it Click **Flows** in the left navigation bar; the column at the left lists all pipelines of your workspace under **Goes out · Pipelines** (with a **+** for a new one). The pipeline you open shows three tabs: - **Entries** — records waiting to be sent, plus any that need attention. - **History** — every send attempt with its result, kept for 30 days. - **Configuration** — three steps as cards: the optional **Data check**, **Release** (manual or automatic) and the target step, with **Test connection** at the end of the target step. Click a card to open or close it; several can be open at once. A choice under Release is saved right away; the other two show **Save** and **Cancel** once you change something. The number on **Flows** in the left bar is everything that waits for you under **To do**, including pipeline entries to release and entries that failed. ### Create a pipeline 1. On the Pipelines page, click **New pipeline** (or pick one of the suggestions on the empty Pipelines page, such as "Contacts into your CRM" or "Notify your team in Slack"). 2. Choose what should happen to each contact, for example **HubSpot — Create or update contact** or **Slack — Post a message to a channel**. 3. Fill in the target's settings (account, channel, campaign, URL …) and, under **Data & advanced settings**, which fields to send and the optional data check. 4. Click **Create pipeline**, then run **Test connection** with a real record before you send anything for real. ### What a pipeline can send to - **Within ListPlus:** Another list, Email (a digest mail to members of your workspace). - **External:** Webhook (n8n, Make, Zapier or your own API), Slack, HubSpot, Attio, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Lemlist, Instantly, Google Sheets, Email draft (a draft in your own mailbox), and Other app for further tools. See "[Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook)" for what each target does, "[Sending entries by e-mail to your team](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-pipeline)" for the Email target, and "Enrich in a rule" for enriching (an action of a list's rule, not a target). "Enrichment by a rule" follows one record through it — from the trigger to the result in History, and why a manual one needs a second Send. ### Release: manual or automatic Every pipeline has a **Release** setting, on the Configuration tab. **Manual** (the default): entries wait under **Entries** until someone in your workspace clicks **Send** for the selected ones or **Send all**. **Automatic**: waiting entries are sent right away, optionally capped by a **daily limit** (records per day) — the rest waits for the next day. See "[Automatic release — sending without a click](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/automatic-release)" for pausing on repeated failures, the limit e-mail, and what happens to entries held by the data check. The **Active** / **Paused** switch at the top right still controls whether a pipeline can send at all, in either release mode: a paused pipeline keeps collecting entries but sends nothing until you activate it again. ### Who can do what Pipelines belong to the **workspace**, so everyone in it sees the same pipelines, entries and history. Owners and admins create, change, pause, duplicate and delete pipelines; every member can add records, send entries, remove entries and run a test. Members see the hint "Owners and admins of this workspace set up and change pipelines. You can add and send entries." ### Cost and limits Adding records to a pipeline costs no credits. A delivery costs a fixed number of credits per record that arrived — the price is shown on the target's tile and differs by kind of target (CRM, sequencer, Slack, Sheets, Webhook); all prices are in the price list. ListPlus checks your balance before the send and before each record, and charges a record only once it arrived. A target that reaches a connected tool (Slack, HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly, Email draft or Other app) needs Pro at least (HubSpot needs Premium). A Slack, Webhook or Email draft test really delivers and costs one record's price; a CRM, sequencer, Sheets, Other app or Another list test only checks (writes nothing) and costs nothing. Webhook, Team email and Another list need no plan; Team email and Another list cost nothing. Enriching is not a target but a rule's action, with its own per-record budget (see "[Enrich in a rule — fill a record's own missing fields](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrich-pipeline)"). The tool you send to may have its own costs (for example, Lemlist or Instantly credits for their own e-mail checks). Limits: 50 pipelines per workspace, 5,000 entries waiting in one pipeline, and 1,000 records per add. **Related topics:** send-records-to-a-pipeline · pipeline-marks · email-pipeline · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · automatic-release · pipeline-data-check · enrich-pipeline · enrichment-in-pipelines · list-triggers · roles-and-permissions · crm-credentials. ### FAQ #### What is a pipeline in ListPlus? A pipeline hands records from your lists or the Watchlist on to another tool, such as HubSpot, Salesforce, Slack, Lemlist, Google Sheets, a webhook for n8n/Zapier/Make, another list, or an e-mail to your team. You add records (or a Watchlist contact with alerts enters the pipeline chosen in its alert dialog when news is found), they wait under Entries, and they are sent when you click Send. #### Where do I find pipelines? Click Flows in the left navigation bar; your pipelines are listed in the column at the left under Goes out · Pipelines. Each pipeline has three tabs: Entries (waiting records), History (send results, kept 30 days) and Configuration (the setup and Test connection). #### Which tools can a pipeline send records to? Webhook (n8n, Make, Zapier or your own API), Slack, HubSpot, Attio, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Lemlist, Instantly, Google Sheets, Email draft (a personal email to each contact, as a draft in your own mailbox) and Other app, plus two targets within ListPlus: Another list and Team email. Enriching is not a target but an action of a list's rule. You choose the target when you create the pipeline with Create pipeline. #### Do pipelines send records automatically or on a schedule? Only if you set a pipeline's Release to Automatic on the Configuration tab: then waiting entries go out right away, optionally capped by a daily limit, with no delayed or date-based sending either way. Left on Manual (the default), records wait under Entries until someone clicks Send or Send all. A paused pipeline keeps collecting entries but sends nothing until it's activated again. #### Do pipelines cost credits or need a paid plan? Each record that arrives at the target costs credits — the price is on the target's tile and in the price list; Team email and Another list cost nothing. Targets that reach a connected tool (Slack, HubSpot, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly, Email draft, Other app) need Pro at least and HubSpot needs Premium; Webhook, Team email and Another list work on every plan. After a downgrade the connected accounts stay connected, but a send answers that the plan is needed. #### Who can create or change a pipeline? Only the owner and admins of the workspace can create, edit, pause, duplicate or delete pipelines. Every member can add records to a pipeline, send or remove its entries and run a test. #### Are pipelines shared with my team? Yes. Pipelines belong to the workspace, so every member sees the same pipelines, waiting entries and history, and anyone can send what a colleague added. If you have several workspaces, each one has its own pipelines; switch workspaces to see the others. #### How do I create a pipeline? In Flows, click the + beside Goes out · Pipelines (or New pipeline on the Pipelines page), choose what should happen to each contact (for example HubSpot, Slack or Webhook), fill in the target's settings and click Create pipeline. Then open Test connection on the Configuration tab and try it with a real record before sending entries. #### What happens when I pause a pipeline? Records can still be added and wait under Entries, but nothing is sent; Send shows "The pipeline is paused – activate it to send." Use the Active / Paused switch at the top right of the pipeline to change it (owners and admins only). #### How many pipelines and entries can I have? Up to 50 pipelines per workspace, up to 5,000 entries waiting in one pipeline, and up to 1,000 records per add. If a pipeline is full, send or remove some entries first; for larger selections, add them in several steps. #### Can I copy or delete a pipeline? Yes, owners and admins can open More actions (the ⋮ button in the pipeline's header, beside Pause) and choose Duplicate or Delete. A copy is created without its secrets (keys, tokens, signing secret), so set them again before you activate the copy. Deleting removes the setup and its secrets and cannot be undone. --- ## Adding records to a pipeline and sending them Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/send-records-to-a-pipeline Last updated: 2026-10-17 Records get into a pipeline through the **Add** menu, wait under **Entries**, and go out when you click **Send**. This article covers that day-to-day flow. Setting up a pipeline is covered in "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)". ### Add records 1. **From a list:** select the rows, then in the selection bar click **Add → Send to pipeline → (pipeline name)**. 2. **From the Watchlist:** select contacts and use **Add → Send to pipeline** the same way. 3. **From the contact drawer:** for a contact on the Watchlist, use **Add → Send to pipeline** in the drawer. 4. **From the Inbox:** select recognized contacts and use **Add → Send to pipeline**; they are put on the Watchlist first, then added. 5. **From an alert, by itself:** a Watchlist contact with alerts enters the pipeline chosen under **Send news to** in its alert dialog as soon as a job change or new post is found — with the new company and title; a change shown as **Held back – not certain enough** goes there only after you click **Take it over anyway** (see "[The Watchlist (saved contacts)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/saved-contacts)"). 6. **Companies from the Watchlist:** in **Watchlist → Companies** tick companies and use **Add → Send to pipeline**; they go in as company records. A company with an alert enters the pipeline chosen under **Send news to** by itself when its alert finds something (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). 7. **From a list trigger, by itself:** a trigger with the action **Hand over to pipeline** adds every record that meets its conditions (see "[Triggers — hand records on automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers)"). A confirmation shows how many contacts were added, how many were already in the pipeline, and how many are held for the data check; click it to open the pipeline. At the bottom of the pipeline menu, **New pipeline** starts a new one. Paused pipelines still appear in the menu (with a pause icon) and collect entries. Pipelines take stored records only. A result in Person Search, Segment Search or AI Research has to be saved or added to a list first. ### Send entries Open the pipeline on the Pipelines page. The **Entries** tab lists every waiting record with its origin (List or Watchlist) and when it was added. Select some and click **Send (number)**, or click **Send all**. Progress shows as "Sending 10 / 40 …". Sent entries leave the Entries tab and appear under **History**. If you close the tab while sending, the rest simply keeps waiting. Each record is read **at the moment it is sent**, so edits and enrichment you made after adding it are included. ### Records from a "Deleted record" trigger A list trigger set to **a record is deleted from the list** (its card says "Deleted record") can hand a deleted record to a pipeline (see "[Triggers — hand records on automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers)"). The pipeline sends the record as it was at the moment it was deleted. ListPlus keeps a copy for that, and removes it once the pipeline has sent the record or you remove the entry from the pipeline. A copy that no pipeline has sent is removed after 30 days at the earliest, so send such entries within that time. A pipeline that writes into another list cannot be chosen for this. The record no longer exists in the list, so a link back to it, for example in a Slack message, does not open it. ### Data check A pipeline can require records to meet conditions before they go out, set under **Data check** on the Configuration tab — the same field · operator · value conditions as list triggers. Some targets also add their own requirement (HubSpot, for instance, always needs an e-mail) shown as a fixed tag. Records that don't meet the check wait under Entries with the status **To review**, showing "Missing: …" for an empty required field or "Not met: …" for an unmet condition. They are not sent and nothing is written to the History. Enrich or fix the record, then click Send again: it is checked again and goes out if it now passes. See "[The data check — only send records that meet your conditions](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-data-check)" for how to build the conditions. ### When sending fails A failed entry stays under Entries as **Error** (with the number of attempts), and the reason is shown, for example "The Slack connection expired – reconnect the account." Fix the cause and send it again; nothing is retried automatically. Use the **Errors** filter to see only those. To drop entries you don't want to send, select them and remove them; the History records them as **Removed**. ### Test before you send **Test connection** sits at the bottom of the **Configuration** tab. Pick a sample record **From a list** or **From watchlist** to see exactly what would be sent, then: - **Webhook:** sends one real request, marked `"test": true`, and shows the response. - **Slack:** posts one real message to the channel. - **Email:** sends a test mail to you only. - **All other targets** (CRMs, sequencers, Sheets, Another list, Other app): **Check (writes nothing)** looks the record up in the target and reports what would happen, without writing anything. A Webhook or Slack test is a real delivery and costs that target's price per record. The test uses the saved setup, so save your changes first. ### History The **History** tab lists every attempt with its result (Sent, Failed, Removed), the time, and for each one the data that was sent and the target's answer. Filter by Sent or Failed. History is kept for 30 days. **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · pipeline-marks · email-pipeline · pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · automatic-release · pipeline-data-check · enrich-pipeline · selecting-rows · saved-contacts. ### FAQ #### How do I add records to a pipeline? Select rows in a list or contacts on the Watchlist (or open a single contact's drawer), then click Add → Send to pipeline and pick the pipeline. The records wait under the pipeline's Entries tab until someone clicks Send (or go out by themselves if the pipeline's Release is set to Automatic). A list trigger can also add records by itself. #### Can I send contacts straight from Person Search or the Inbox to a pipeline? From the Inbox, yes: select recognized contacts and use Add → Send to pipeline, and they are put on the Watchlist first. Results in Person Search, Segment Search or AI Research must be saved or added to a list first, because pipelines only take stored records. #### Can a contact with alerts enter a pipeline by itself? Yes. When you set an alert for a contact on the Watchlist, pick a pipeline under "Send news to" in the alert dialog: the contact enters it with the new company and title as soon as a job change or new post is found, and then waits or goes out according to the pipeline's release mode. A change held back as not certain enough enters only after you click "Take it over anyway". #### I added records, why haven't they been sent yet? On a pipeline with Release set to Manual (the default), entries wait until someone opens the pipeline, goes to Entries and clicks Send or Send all; with Release set to Automatic they go out by themselves. If nothing goes out, check that the pipeline isn't Paused and look for entries marked Check or Error. #### What does the status "To review" or "Missing" mean on an entry? The pipeline's data check requires a field or condition this record doesn't meet yet, for example an e-mail address, so it waits and is not sent. Fill or enrich the record and click Send again; it is checked again and goes out once it meets the check. #### Does the pipeline send the data as it was when I added the record? No, each record is read at the moment it is sent. Edits and enrichment results you added after putting it into the pipeline are included. #### What happens if I add the same record twice? It stays in the pipeline once. The confirmation counts it as "already in", and the existing entry keeps its state. #### A pipeline entry failed, how do I retry it? Failed entries stay under Entries as Error with the reason shown, for example an expired connection or a missing e-mail. Fix the cause and click Send again; ListPlus does not retry automatically. The Errors filter shows only the failed ones. #### How do I remove an entry from a pipeline without sending it? On the pipeline's Entries tab, select the entries and remove them. They are logged as Removed in the History, and the record itself stays untouched in your list or on the Watchlist. #### How do I test a pipeline before sending real records? Open the Configuration tab, expand Test connection at the bottom and pick a sample record From a list or From watchlist. A webhook gets one real request marked "test": true, Slack gets one real message and Email mails only you (a Webhook or Slack test costs one record's delivery price); CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and the other targets use Check (writes nothing) and only report what would happen. #### What does the History tab show and how long is it kept? Every send attempt with its result (Sent, Failed or Removed), the time, the data that was sent and the target's answer. History is kept for 30 days. #### What happens to a record that reaches a pipeline through a "Deleted record" trigger? The pipeline sends it as it was at the moment it was deleted, and the kept copy is removed once the pipeline has sent the record or the entry is removed from the pipeline. A pipeline that writes into another list cannot be chosen for this trigger. The record no longer exists in the list, so a link back to it (for example in a Slack message) does not open it. --- ## Seeing which pipelines a record went through Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-marks Last updated: 2026-10-15 Every list row and every contact on the Watchlist remembers the latest state it reached in each pipeline. You can see it on the record itself and turn it into a filterable column, so you always know whether a lead already went to your CRM, Slack or team mail. A company from the Watchlist carries no such mark: where it stands is shown in the pipeline itself, under Entries and History. ### Where you see it - **In a list:** open a row's record panel. At the bottom, the section **In pipelines** lists each pipeline the record was added to: the target's icon, the pipeline name, the state and the date. Click a line to open that pipeline. - **On the Watchlist:** open the contact drawer of a contact on the Watchlist; the same **In pipelines** section appears there. The section only shows up once a record has been added to at least one pipeline. Deleted pipelines drop out of it. ### What the states mean - **waiting** — added, not sent yet. - **data check** — held back because the pipeline's data check isn't met yet (a required field or condition). - **sent** — delivered successfully. - **failed** — the last attempt failed; the entry is still in the pipeline for another try. - **removed** — someone removed it from the pipeline without sending. A rule's Enrich action is not a pipeline and has no line here; while it works on a record, the row shows a moving ring. Only the most recent state per pipeline is kept on the record. The full sequence of attempts is in the pipeline's **History** tab (30 days). ### Filter a list by pipeline state In the record panel, click **As column** next to a pipeline ("Show as a list column – filterable and sortable"). A read-only column **Pipeline: (name)** appears with coloured state tags. Filter it like any column, for example to show only rows that are **sent**, or pick **(Blanks)** to find rows that were never added to that pipeline. The column is a view aid: it isn't saved with the list, so add it again after reopening the list. A duplicated list starts without pipeline marks. ### "Open in ListPlus" links Slack messages and pipeline e-mails can carry an **Open in ListPlus** link per record. It opens the exact row in its list (with the record panel open) or the contact on the Watchlist, after you sign in. Only members of the workspace can open it. **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · send-records-to-a-pipeline · enrich-pipeline · list-editor-tour · saved-contacts · search-filter-sort-replace. ### FAQ #### How can I see if a contact was already sent to a pipeline? Open the row's record panel in the list, or the contact drawer of a contact on the Watchlist, and look at the In pipelines section at the bottom. It lists every pipeline the record was added to with its latest state and date; click a line to open that pipeline. #### What do the pipeline states waiting, data check, sent, failed and removed mean? waiting = added but not sent yet; data check = held back because the data check isn't met; sent = delivered; failed = the last attempt failed and the entry waits for another try; removed = taken out of the pipeline without sending. Only the latest state per pipeline is shown on the record. #### How do I filter my list by pipeline status? In the record panel, click As column next to the pipeline; a read-only column "Pipeline: (name)" appears with state tags. Filter or sort it like any column, and use (Blanks) to find rows that were never added to that pipeline. #### Why did the pipeline column disappear from my list? The Pipeline column added with As column is a temporary view and isn't saved with the list. Open any record panel and click As column again to bring it back. #### Why don't I see "In pipelines" on a record? The section only appears once the record has been added to at least one pipeline, and pipelines that were deleted drop out of it. In the contact drawer it shows for contacts on the Watchlist only, and a duplicated list starts without marks. #### Where can I see every attempt, not just the latest state? The record shows only its latest state per pipeline. Open the pipeline (click the line in In pipelines) and go to the History tab for each attempt, its result and the target's answer, kept for 30 days. #### Why does a row show a moving ring in my list? A rule's Enrich action is working on that record right now — enrichment can take anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes. The ring disappears once it finishes; a rule's enrichment has no line under In pipelines, and if it failed it shows under Flows → To do → Failed or held, with the reason. #### What does "Open in ListPlus" in a Slack message or pipeline mail open? It opens that exact record: the row in its list with the record panel open, or the contact on the Watchlist. You need to sign in, and only members of the workspace can open it. --- ## Sending entries by e-mail to your team Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-pipeline Last updated: 2026-10-15 The **Team email** target sends the entries of a pipeline as one digest mail to members of your workspace, for example "new trade-fair leads for the sales team". The mail lists each contact with a link to a contact card, and a button to view and download all entries. To write personal emails to the contacts themselves, see "[Email drafts in your own mailbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-draft)". ### Set it up 1. On the Pipelines page, click **Create pipeline** and choose **Team email** ("Digest mail with links to members of your workspace"). 2. Under **Recipients**, tick the workspace members who should get the mail. You are preselected; up to 50 recipients. 3. Optional: enter a **Subject**. Left empty, it reads "12 new entries in “(pipeline name)”". Your own subject can use the two placeholders shown under the field, for the number of entries and the pipeline name. 4. Optional, under **Data & advanced settings**: choose the **Fields for overview and download**. The mail itself always shows only name · position · company. 5. Click **Create pipeline** and send a test (see below). ### What recipients get Each click on **Send** or **Send all** creates **one** mail with all the selected entries (up to 1,000; anything beyond stays waiting for the next send). It comes from ListPlus , in the language of the person who clicked Send. All recipients are on the same mail and can see each other's addresses. A company from the Watchlist appears with its name and, when it came from an alert, what was found — for example "3 new job postings". If the pipeline's Release is set to **Automatic** instead, the mail goes out by itself as soon as entries wait, in the language set when it was switched on, and it is still one mail per send. Because it is one batch, a single failure (for example, sending mail is temporarily down) pauses the pipeline right away and e-mails the person who set it up — see "[Automatic release — sending without a click](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/automatic-release)". For every entry the mail shows name · position · company with: - a link to a **contact card** that shows the contact's current data from ListPlus, and - **Open in ListPlus**, which opens the record in the app for signed-in members. The button **View all & download** opens an overview "(number) entries from “(pipeline)”" with **Download: XLSX · CSV · JSON**, containing the fields you chose. ### The links are public for 30 days Contact cards and the overview open **without a login** for anyone who has the link, and show the **full contact** as it currently is in ListPlus (not only the fields you selected). They stay valid for **30 days after sending**. The mail says so in its footer: "The links show the current data and stay valid for 30 days. Forwarding this mail shares the links." If a record was deleted in the meantime, its card shows "This entry is no longer available". To stop the links early, delete the pipeline (or the whole workspace); that ends every link it sent. Removing a member from the workspace doesn't end links they already received. ### Recipients must be members Only current members of the workspace can be recipients. Membership is checked again at every send: a person who left shows "No longer a member – deselect", and the send fails until you deselect them. ### Errors - **Recipient blocked (bounce/spam complaint)** — one recipient's address bounced or marked a mail as spam earlier. Because it is one mail, the whole send fails and all its entries show as failed. Remove that recipient and send again. - **Too many mails at once – try again in a moment.** - **The mail was rejected.** / **The mail could not be sent.** — send again later. ### Test and cost **Test connection** on the Configuration tab sends a test mail with a real record **only to you**, with "[Test]" in front of the subject. The Team email target costs no credits and works on every plan. After a send, the History shows "Mailed to (number) recipients". **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · send-records-to-a-pipeline · pipeline-marks · automatic-release · invite-teammates · where-is-my-data. ### FAQ #### How do I e-mail new leads to my team from ListPlus? Create a pipeline with New pipeline, choose Email, tick the recipients from your workspace and save with Create pipeline. Add records to it with Add → Send to pipeline, then click Send: everyone selected gets one digest mail with all the entries. #### Can I send the pipeline mail to people outside my workspace? No, recipients can only be current members of the workspace, up to 50 per pipeline. To reach someone else, invite them to the workspace first, or forward the mail (which shares its links). #### What is in the pipeline e-mail? One mail per send with every entry as name · position · company, each linked to a contact card and to Open in ListPlus, plus a View all & download button. There are no attachments; a single mail carries up to 1,000 entries, and any beyond that wait for the next send. #### Can I change the subject of the pipeline mail? Yes, enter your own Subject in the pipeline's settings; left empty it reads "12 new entries in “(pipeline name)”". Your own subject can use the placeholders shown under the field for the number of entries and the pipeline name. #### How do I download the entries as Excel, CSV or JSON? Click View all & download in the mail. The overview page offers Download: XLSX · CSV · JSON with the fields chosen under Fields for overview and download in the pipeline's settings. #### Do recipients need to log in to open the contact links? No, the contact cards and the overview open without a login for anyone with the link, and they show the full, current contact from ListPlus, not only the selected fields. Only Open in ListPlus requires signing in as a workspace member. #### How long do the links in a pipeline mail work? 30 days from sending. After that, or if the pipeline or workspace is deleted, the links stop working; a record deleted in the meantime shows "This entry is no longer available". #### What happens if someone forwards the pipeline mail? Forwarding shares the links: whoever receives the forwarded mail can open the contact cards and the download page for the rest of the 30 days. Forward only to people who may see this contact data. #### How do I stop the links in a mail I already sent? Delete the pipeline (owners and admins); that ends every link it sent. Removing a member from the workspace does not end links they already received. #### Can recipients see who else got the pipeline mail? Yes, all recipients are on the same mail, so each one sees the others' addresses. Use a separate Team email pipeline if some people should get their own mail. #### What does "Recipient blocked (bounce/spam complaint)" mean? One recipient's address bounced before or reported a mail as spam, so mail to them is blocked. Because every send is one shared mail, the whole send fails and its entries show as failed; deselect that recipient and click Send again. #### Where does the test mail of a Team email pipeline go? Only to you, the person who clicks Test connection, with "[Test]" in front of the subject and one real record. The chosen recipients get nothing until you send real entries. #### Can a Team email pipeline send the digest automatically? Yes, set its Release to Automatic on the Configuration tab and the digest mail goes out by itself as soon as entries wait, still as one mail per send. Because it's one batch, a single failed send pauses the pipeline right away and e-mails the person who set it up. --- ## Email drafts in your own mailbox Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-draft Last updated: 2026-10-17 The **Email draft** target writes a personal email to each contact from your template and puts it into the **Drafts** folder of your own mailbox (Gmail or Outlook). **ListPlus sends nothing.** You open each draft, read it, change it if you like and send it yourself from your mail program. ### Before you start - Connect your mailbox: **Settings → Connected accounts** (or **Flows → Connected accounts**), choose Gmail or Outlook and sign in. Each person connects their own mailbox. - The target needs the Pro plan at least, like every target that reaches a connected tool. Only owners and admins set up or change a pipeline; every member can send its entries. - The workspace owner can switch email drafts off for everyone in the workspace policy (**Email drafts in members' own mailboxes**), and they also need **Connected systems** to be on. A send then answers that the owner switched it off. ### Set it up 1. In **Flows**, click **Create pipeline** and choose **Email draft** ("A personal email to the contact, as a draft in your mailbox"). 2. Enter a **Subject**. **Variables** next to the field inserts placeholders such as **First name** or **Company name**. 3. Write the **Text** in the editor (see below). 4. Under **Signature**, choose **Our signature (below)** and write it, or **Add later in mailbox**. 5. Check the mail under **Preview with a contact** (see below), then click **Create pipeline**. ### The editor The toolbar has bold, italic, underline, strikethrough, link, bulleted and numbered lists, font size, text color and **Clear formatting**. Enter starts a new line, as in your mail program; press Enter twice for an empty line. - **Placeholders** are inserted with **Variables** at the right of the toolbar: search a field by name, grouped by contact, company and sender. They show as small chips in the text. **Your first name** and **Your name** are filled with the name of whoever sends. - **Click a placeholder** to set a fallback, the text that appears when a contact has no value, for example "there" for a missing first name. - **A placeholder without a fallback is required.** The pipeline's data check holds every contact without that value (at **To review**), so no draft ever says "Hello ,". - **Colors and font sizes** are allowed. The editor then reminds you that they make an email look like a newsletter: some spam filters count that against it, and some mail programs show them differently. - **AI paragraph** adds a paragraph the AI writes per contact. See "AI texts and the content check in email drafts". ### Whose mailbox The form shows under **Drafts** where your drafts go ("Your drafts go to …"), or offers **Connect a mailbox** when you have none. - **Release: Manual.** Whoever clicks **Send** gets the drafts in their own mailbox. Several colleagues can share one pipeline; each of them gets the drafts they send. - **Release: Automatic.** The drafts go into the mailbox of the person who set up the pipeline. If that person leaves the workspace, the pipeline pauses and the owner is e-mailed. - If you connected more than one mailbox, the one you connected last is used. - The Email draft target never puts drafts into a colleague's mailbox. (The **Other app** target can lay a draft into any current member's mailbox — see "[Whose connected account a pipeline uses](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts)".) Without a mailbox of your own, the entry fails with "You have not connected a mailbox yet". ### One draft per address A pipeline makes **one draft per email address, ever**. If the same person comes again, from another list or added again later, the entry ends with "Skipped – this pipeline already made a draft to this address", at no cost. Another pipeline (with another template) can still write to that address. The **Block list** (Settings → Block list) applies as for every external target: a contact on it is held at **To review** with "On the block list". A contact without an email address is held there too. ### How many at a time - One click on **Send** makes at most **50 drafts**; the rest keeps waiting for the next click, and a note says how many. - With **Release: Automatic** and no daily limit of its own, the pipeline makes at most 50 drafts a day. ### Preview with a contact **Preview with a contact** shows the mail as it would be drafted, from the form as it stands; you do not have to save first, and nothing is drafted. - Pick a list and a contact. You see **From**, **To**, **Subject** and the mail, and whether the contact is **Ready for a draft** or what is missing (the data check) or that it is on the block list. - **Required contact data** lists what every contact needs: the email address and each placeholder without a fallback. - AI paragraphs show as "[AI: …]". **Generate AI example** writes them for this contact; it costs what the AI uses but creates no draft, and the real draft of this contact does not pay for them again the same day. ### Test it first **Send test** (under **Test connection** at the end of the action) makes one draft from a real record in **your** mailbox, addressed to **you** and marked "[Test]" in the subject. It never reaches the contact and does not count for "one draft per address", but it costs the same as a draft (plus its AI texts). It uses the saved settings, so save your changes first. The preview above shows the mail before you test it. ### On the record The record's **In pipelines** box shows **draft created** with **Open in mailbox**, which opens the draft (or, once sent, the email) in Gmail or Outlook. ### Sending the drafts - **Gmail app on a phone:** a draft first opens for reading; tap the pencil (edit) to get the send button. - **Your own signature:** a draft made by ListPlus does not get your mail program's signature by itself. Insert it when you open the draft (Outlook: **Insert → Signature**; Gmail: the pen icon in the draft). - **Mail programs that connect via IMAP** (for example Apple Mail with a Gmail account) send a copy and leave the draft in the Drafts folder; delete it there. **Open in mailbox** then still points to the draft. ### What it costs A draft costs the credits shown on the target's tile, charged once it was created. A skipped repeat costs nothing. AI texts and the content check are charged on top by what the AI really uses (see "AI texts and the content check in email drafts"). ### Sending rules are yours You send these emails yourself, from your own address. In Germany, advertising by email usually needs the recipient's prior consent; in the US, CAN-SPAM expects your postal address and a way to opt out. Check what applies to you before you send. **Related topics:** email-draft-ai · company-knowledge · pipelines-overview · pipeline-data-check · automatic-release · connect-crm-and-sheets. ### FAQ #### Does ListPlus send the emails? No. ListPlus only puts drafts into your own mailbox. You read each one and send it yourself from Gmail or Outlook. #### Which mailboxes work? Gmail (including Google Workspace) and Outlook (Microsoft 365). Connect yours under Settings → Connected accounts. #### Why did a contact get no draft? Look at the entry in the pipeline. "To review" means the contact has no email address, a placeholder without a fallback has no value, or the contact is on the block list; "Skipped" means this pipeline already made a draft to that address. #### Can the same person get two drafts? Not from the same pipeline: it makes one draft per address, ever, and skips repeats at no cost. A different pipeline can write to the same address. #### Why do I only get 50 drafts at a time? A drafts folder with hundreds of new mails is hard to work through, so one Send makes at most 50. Click Send again for the next 50; an automatic pipeline makes at most 50 a day unless you set a daily limit. #### Where does my signature come from? Either from Our signature in the pipeline, or, if you choose Add later in mailbox, from your mail program. A draft made by ListPlus does not get that one by itself, so insert it when you open the draft. #### Can my colleagues use my pipeline? Yes. With manual release, each colleague who clicks Send gets the drafts in their own mailbox, never in yours. #### How do I send a draft from the Gmail app? Open the draft and tap the pencil (edit). The send button appears in the editing view. #### Why is the draft still in my drafts folder after sending? Some mail programs that connect via IMAP, such as Apple Mail with a Gmail account, send a copy and keep the draft. Delete the draft there; sending from Gmail or Outlook themselves removes it. #### What does "Open in mailbox" open? The draft in Gmail or Outlook, or the sent email once you sent it from there. It is shown in the record's In pipelines box. #### Can our data protection officer forbid email drafts? Yes. The workspace owner can switch off "Email drafts in members' own mailboxes" in the workspace policy; no member can then make drafts, while the other connected systems keep working. --- ## Whose connected account a pipeline uses Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts Last updated: 2026-10-17 Connected accounts belong to the workspace, so any member's pipeline can choose them. Two rules decide whether a pipeline may really use one: - **Mail is sent only from the creator's own mailbox.** A pipeline's **Other app** target can run actions of a mail app such as Gmail or Outlook. An action that sends, replies, forwards or reads mail runs only on an account the **pipeline's creator** connected. Nothing leaves a colleague's mailbox without that person reviewing it. - **Drafts may go to any current member.** An **Other app** action that only lays a *draft* may use any current member's mailbox: a manager's pipeline can put a prepared mail into each rep's drafts, and the rep reviews and sends it. The built-in **Email draft** target is different: it writes only into the sender's own mailbox, never a colleague's (see "[Email drafts in your own mailbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-draft)"). ### When someone leaves An account connected by a person who has left the workspace is used by no pipeline, for drafts as well as sends and for every target (Slack, HubSpot and so on). The account stays connected, but entries for that pipeline are held with "The connected account belongs to someone who is no longer in this workspace — held, not sent." Connect an account of your own and choose it in the target. An automatic pipeline normally carries on as the workspace owner when its creator leaves. An **Email draft** pipeline pauses instead and the owner is e-mailed, because its drafts must not land in the owner's mailbox. ### Where the rules are checked When you save the target, before every send (so a pipeline built earlier stops too) and on a **test** that really delivers (Slack, Webhook, Email draft). A test that only checks (the CRM, sequencer, Sheets, Other app and Another list targets write nothing) delivers nothing and therefore needs no account check; the rules were already checked when you saved. **Related topics:** pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook · email-draft · automatic-release · roles-and-permissions · leave-remove-transfer-delete. ### FAQ #### Can a pipeline send e-mail from a colleague's Gmail or Outlook? No. An Other app action that sends, replies, forwards or reads mail runs only on an account the pipeline's creator connected. A colleague's mailbox is never used for sending; choose your own account, or use a draft action. #### Can a manager's pipeline put drafts into each rep's mailbox? Yes, with an Other app draft action of a mail app: it may use any current member's mailbox, and the rep reviews and sends the draft. The built-in Email draft target does not: it writes only into the sender's own mailbox. #### Why are my entries held with "This action sends from a mailbox you did not connect"? The pipeline's Other app action sends mail, and the chosen mailbox was connected by someone else (or by a person unknown to the workspace). Choose your own mail account in the target, or switch to a draft action; nothing was sent. #### What happens to pipelines when the person who connected the account leaves? The account stays connected, but no pipeline uses it any more, for any target. Entries are held until someone chooses another account in the pipeline's target. #### Why are entries held with "The connected account belongs to someone who is no longer in this workspace"? The account used by this pipeline was connected by a person who has left the workspace, so it is refused and nothing was sent. Connect an account of your own and choose it in the target, then send again. #### My automatic Email draft pipeline paused itself — why? The person who set it up has left the workspace. Drafts go only into the sender's own mailbox, so the pipeline pauses and the owner gets an e-mail instead of writing into the owner's drafts. #### Does the test send follow the same account rules? Yes, whenever the test really delivers (Slack, Webhook, Email draft — a real send that costs one record's price). A test that only checks, as for CRM, sequencer, Sheets and Other app targets, delivers nothing; the account rules were already checked when the target was saved. --- ## Pipelines to Slack, CRMs, sequencers, Sheets and webhooks Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-crm-slack-and-webhook Last updated: 2026-10-17 This article explains what each external pipeline target does and how to set it up. For creating a pipeline, adding records and sending them, see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)" and "[Adding records to a pipeline and sending them](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/send-records-to-a-pipeline)". The Team email and Email draft targets have their own articles. ### Connected accounts Slack, CRMs, sequencers and Google Sheets use a **connected account**. In the pipeline setup, pick one under **Choose account …** or click **Connect new account**; the service's own sign-in window opens. Connecting needs the Pro plan; using HubSpot needs Premium, and a delivery costs a fixed number of credits per record that arrived — shown on the target's tile, see the price list. Connected accounts belong to the workspace: every member's pipelines can use them, and actions run in the name of the person who connected the account (exceptions: see "[Whose connected account a pipeline uses](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts)"). Manage them under **Settings → Connected accounts**. See "[What access you grant when connecting a CRM or app](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/crm-credentials)". ### Slack **Post a message to a channel.** Choose the Slack account and the **Channel**. Messages appear under the name of the person who connected the Slack account, and that person must be a member of the channel. Each record becomes one card: an optional **Intro line** (with placeholders and @here), name and job title · company, up to 10 fields, and optional buttons **Open in ListPlus**, **LinkedIn** and **Website**. Slack posts about one message per second, so large sends take a moment. ### CRMs: HubSpot, Attio, Salesforce, Pipedrive Each record is matched by **e-mail address**, so a record without an e-mail is held by the data check. New contacts are always created. For an existing one you choose: **Only fill empty fields** (default), **Leave it – only create new ones**, or **Overwrite with our values**. - **HubSpot:** creates or updates a contact; optional **Add to list** (static list; existing contacts are added too). - **Attio:** creates or updates a person; optional list of people. - **Salesforce:** **Create as** Lead or Contact. A new lead needs a last name and a company, a new contact a last name. - **Pipedrive:** creates or updates a person and links the company as an organization (created if needed). The History shows the outcome per record, for example "Contact created", "Contact updated", "2 empty fields filled" or "Skipped – already exists". A pipeline sends record by record, so every record has its own result and its own retry. For a large number of contacts at once, **Export** to HubSpot is the cheaper way, because it writes many contacts per request (see "[Exporting to HubSpot and Google Sheets](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/export-to-hubspot-and-sheets)" and the price list). ### Sequencers: Lemlist and Instantly Both **add a contact as a lead to a campaign**. If the campaign is running, the sequence starts right away for new leads. - **Lemlist** needs an e-mail or a LinkedIn profile and a Lemlist plan with API access (from "Email Pro"). Options include skipping leads already in another campaign and letting Lemlist find or verify e-mails, which uses Lemlist credits. - **Instantly** connects with an API key (API v2) and needs a paid Instantly plan and an e-mail per lead. You choose whether to skip contacts already in a campaign, anywhere in the Instantly workspace, or add them anyway. ### Google Sheets **Append row** to a spreadsheet and sheet you pick. Columns are matched by the header row and shown under **Map columns** for you to check; an empty sheet gets a header row on the first send. Options: **Skip if the e-mail is already in the sheet** and **Add missing columns at the end**. Columns added to the sheet later stay empty until you map them. ### Webhook (n8n, Make, Zapier or your own API) Paste the **Webhook URL** (HTTPS, public host; redirects are not followed). The Webhook needs no plan; each record delivered costs credits (the price is on the tile). Under Data & advanced settings, choose the method (POST, PUT or PATCH), **Auth** (None, Bearer token, API key header or Basic auth) and additional headers; their values are stored encrypted and never shown again. Each record is sent as its own JSON request; a response within 15 seconds with a 2xx status counts as sent. ### Another list and Other app - **Another list** appends each contact as a row to a list of your workspace. Choose **Merge – only fill empty cells** or **Always append a new row**. It can't write into the list a record came from. - **Other app** runs a ready-made action of another connected app. You map each action field; most such actions only create records, so duplicates can occur. An action of a mail app that sends, replies or forwards runs only on a mailbox the pipeline's creator connected; draft actions may use any current member's mailbox (see "[Whose connected account a pipeline uses](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts)"). ### Companies in a pipeline A pipeline also takes **companies from your Watchlist** — as company records, not as contacts. They get in two ways: tick companies in **Watchlist → Companies** and choose **Add → Send to pipeline**, or pick a pipeline in a company's alert (**Send news to**), so the company arrives whenever its alerts find something. A company record carries the company's name, domain, website and LinkedIn page, industry, size and location once the company was enriched, and the last news its alert found, if any. What the targets do with it: - **Slack** shows a company card: the name linked to its LinkedIn page, the domain, and the news in your language, for example "3 new job postings" with the first job titles. - **Team email** lists the company with its news. - **HubSpot** creates or updates a **company**, found by its domain. **Salesforce** writes an **Account**, found by its website. **Attio** writes a record in **Companies**, found by its domain. The setting for existing records applies in the same way; the contact list of the target is not used for companies. - **Webhook** sends it like any record, with `source.type` "company". To fill a watched company's profile (industry, size, location, a missing LinkedIn page), use **Complete profile** under Watchlist → Companies — that is not a pipeline. - Targets that need an email address (Instantly, Pipedrive) hold a company at **To review**: they only know contacts. **Lemlist** takes the entry but the send fails, because a lead needs an email address or a person's LinkedIn profile. ### For advanced users **Payload (version 1).** Each webhook request body is JSON with `version`, `test` (true for tests), `pipeline` (`id`, `name`), `delivery` (`id`, `attempt`, `sentAt`), `source` (`type` "list" with list id, list name and record id, "saved" with the record id, or "company" with the domain of a watched company) and `record`. In `record`, known columns appear under their content type (`email`, `first_name`, `company_name` …) regardless of the column name, so one pipeline works for every list; with **All fields**, other columns go under `extra` with their original name. Empty values are left out. A company whose alert has found something also has `signal`: `at`, `text` (the news in plain English) and `events`, each with `type` ("new_jobs" or "hiring_spike"), `count`, and where they apply `titles`, `days` and `url`. **Headers.** `X-ListPlus-Delivery` is stable for one entry across all attempts, so use it as your idempotency key. `X-ListPlus-Pipeline` carries the pipeline id. `X-ListPlus-Signature: sha256=…` is an HMAC-SHA256 of the exact request body, keyed with the pipeline's **Signing secret**. **Signing secret.** It is shown once, when the pipeline is created, and can't be displayed again. **New secret** replaces it; the old one stops working right away. To verify a request, compute the HMAC-SHA256 of the raw body with your secret, prefix it with `sha256=` and compare it to the header in constant time. **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · send-records-to-a-pipeline · email-pipeline · crm-credentials · zapier-make-n8n · send-to-sequencers. ### FAQ #### How do I post new leads to a Slack channel? Create a pipeline with New pipeline, choose Slack, pick the connected Slack account and the Channel, and optionally set an intro line and the fields for the card. Each record you send becomes one message card; the person who connected the Slack account must be a member of that channel. To post new decision makers by themselves, use the trigger template Notify your team in the list. #### Whose name do the Slack messages from a pipeline appear under? Under the name of the person who connected the Slack account in your workspace. If Slack says "You're not a member of this channel – join it in Slack", that person needs to join the channel. #### Which connected account does a pipeline use, and can my colleagues use mine? Each pipeline uses the account chosen in its setup. Connected accounts belong to the workspace, so pipelines of any member can use them, and actions run in the name of the person who connected the account. Two exceptions: an Other app action that sends, replies or forwards mail runs only on a mailbox the pipeline's creator connected (draft actions may use any current member's mailbox), and an account connected by someone who has left the workspace is used by no pipeline — its entries are held. #### How does a CRM pipeline handle contacts that already exist? HubSpot, Attio, Salesforce and Pipedrive match by e-mail address and always create new contacts. For an existing one you choose Only fill empty fields (default), Leave it – only create new ones, or Overwrite with our values. #### Why is my record not sent to HubSpot or Salesforce? CRM targets match contacts by e-mail, so a record without one waits under Entries as To review with "Missing: …" naming the e-mail field. Salesforce also needs a last name and a company for a new lead, or a last name for a new contact. #### Can a pipeline add leads to a Lemlist or Instantly campaign? Yes, choose Lemlist or Instantly and pick the campaign; if the campaign is running, the sequence starts right away for new leads. Lemlist needs a plan with API access (from Email Pro), Instantly an API key (v2) and a paid Instantly plan. #### How does a Google Sheets pipeline decide which column gets which value? Columns are matched by the sheet's header row and shown under Map columns for you to check; an empty sheet gets a header row on the first send. Columns added to the sheet later stay empty until you map them. #### How do I send records to n8n, Zapier or Make with a pipeline? Create a pipeline with the Webhook target, paste your n8n, Zapier or Make webhook URL (HTTPS) and optionally set method, Auth and headers. Each record is sent as one JSON request; use Test connection to send a sample marked "test": true first. #### Can a pipeline send a company to my CRM as a company? Yes. Companies from your Watchlist go into a pipeline as company records: HubSpot creates or updates a company, Salesforce an Account, and Attio a record in Companies, each found by the company's domain or website. Targets that need an email address, such as Instantly or Pipedrive, hold a company at To review. #### How do I get a Slack message when a company I watch is hiring? Create a Slack pipeline, then on the Watchlist set an alert for the company and pick that pipeline under Send news to. When the alert finds new job postings, the channel gets a company card with the number of new postings and the first job titles. #### How do I verify that a webhook request really came from ListPlus? Every request carries X-ListPlus-Signature: sha256= followed by an HMAC-SHA256 of the raw body, keyed with the pipeline's Signing secret. Compute the same value with your secret and compare; the secret is shown only once, and New secret replaces it immediately. #### What does the webhook payload of a pipeline look like? JSON with version, test, pipeline, delivery (id, attempt, sentAt), source (list, saved or company) and record, where known fields use fixed keys like email, first_name and company_name whatever your column is called. The X-ListPlus-Delivery header stays the same for every attempt of one entry, so you can use it to ignore duplicates. #### Can a pipeline copy contacts into another list? Yes, choose Another list and pick a list of your workspace; decide between Merge – only fill empty cells and Always append a new row. It can't write into the list the record came from. #### My tool isn't in the pipeline catalog, what can I do? Use the Webhook target with n8n, Make or Zapier, or Other app to run a ready-made action of another connected app, where you map each field yourself. Other app actions usually only create records, so duplicates can occur. #### Which plan do pipeline targets need, and what do they cost? Slack, Salesforce, Pipedrive, Attio, Google Sheets, Lemlist, Instantly, Email draft and Other app need the Pro plan, and HubSpot needs Premium. A delivery costs a fixed number of credits per record that arrived, shown on the target's tile (see the price list); the Webhook, Team email and Another list targets need no plan, and Team email and Another list have no delivery charge. After a downgrade a send answers that a higher plan is needed, and the accounts stay connected. --- ## Automatic release — sending without a click Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/automatic-release Last updated: 2026-10-17 Every pipeline has a **Release** setting on its Configuration tab: **Manual** (the default) waits for you to click Send, **Automatic** sends waiting entries by itself. This article covers Automatic; see "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)" for the rest of a pipeline's setup. ### Turning it on Open the pipeline, go to the **Configuration** tab and click the pencil on the **Release** step. Choose **Automatic** — optionally with **At most … records per day** (leave it empty for no limit) — and click **Save**. Entries already waiting are sent within moments of saving. ### Who it sends as An automatic pipeline sends in the name of the person who created the pipeline. If that person later leaves the workspace, it sends as the workspace owner instead — with two exceptions. An **Email draft** pipeline pauses (the owner gets an e-mail), because drafts go only into the sender's own mailbox. And a target that uses an account the departed person connected holds every entry until you choose an account of your own (see "[Whose connected account a pipeline uses](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-accounts)"). ### The daily limit With a daily limit set, a run stops for the day once it's reached and the rest of the waiting entries continue the next day. The person it sends as gets one e-mail the first time in a day a run hits the limit, so nothing goes quiet without a reason. The button still ignores the limit: clicking Send yourself always goes out. ### Pausing on failures An automatic pipeline that keeps failing pauses itself — after 5 failed attempts in a row for most targets, or on the very first failure for a target that sends one batch for everyone (Team email) — and e-mails the person who set it up. Fix the cause (for example, reconnect an expired account), then switch the pipeline back to Active; nothing is retried by itself, so failed entries need the Send button afterwards. ### Credits and plan Each record sent costs the target's price per record (shown on its tile; all prices are in the price list), automatic or not. If your credits or your plan no longer cover a send, the run stops quietly: the pipeline is not paused, the entries keep waiting and go out by themselves once the balance or plan allows it again. ### What happens to entries held by the data check On a manual pipeline, an entry held as "To review" waits until you click Send again. An automatic pipeline rechecks those entries itself on every run — after first trying the ones that are simply waiting — so a record that becomes complete later (an e-mail gets enriched, say) goes out on its own, without anyone clicking anything. ### Switching back to Manual Switching Release back to Manual leaves every entry exactly where it is; nothing is sent until someone clicks Send. A daily limit you had set stays stored, so it's there again if you switch back to Automatic. **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · send-records-to-a-pipeline · pipeline-data-check · pipeline-marks · enrich-pipeline · list-triggers. ### FAQ #### What's the difference between Manual and Automatic release? Manual (the default) holds every entry under Entries until someone clicks Send or Send all. Automatic sends waiting entries by itself, right away, optionally capped by a daily limit you set when switching it on. #### How do I switch a pipeline to automatic sending? Open the pipeline's Configuration tab, click the pencil on the Release step, choose Automatic, optionally set a daily limit, and save. Entries already waiting go out within moments. #### Whose name does an automatic pipeline send under? The pipeline's creator. If that person later leaves, the pipeline sends as the workspace owner — except an Email draft pipeline, which pauses and e-mails the owner, and a target that uses an account the leaver connected, which holds every entry until you choose an account of your own. #### What happens when a pipeline reaches its daily limit? Sending stops for the rest of that day and the remaining entries continue the next day. The person the pipeline sends as gets one e-mail the first time a run hits the limit, so you know why it slowed down. #### Why did my automatic pipeline pause itself? It failed 5 times in a row (or once, for a target like Team email that sends one batch for everyone) and paused to stop wasting attempts, e-mailing the person who set it up. Fix the cause shown on the failed entries, then set the pipeline back to Active. #### Does automatic release retry failed entries? No. Failed entries stay under Entries as Error and need the Send button, exactly like on a manual pipeline; only entries held by the data check are rechecked automatically on each run. #### Can I still send manually while a pipeline is set to Automatic? Yes, clicking Send or Send all yourself always goes out immediately and ignores the daily limit — the limit only applies to what the pipeline sends by itself. #### If I switch a pipeline back to Manual, what happens to entries that were waiting? Nothing changes for them — they stay under Entries exactly as they were, and nothing is sent until someone clicks Send. Any daily limit you had set stays stored for if you switch back to Automatic. --- ## The data check — only send records that meet your conditions Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipeline-data-check Last updated: 2026-10-12 The data check decides which records a pipeline is allowed to send. It uses the same conditions editor as a list's own triggers — field · operator · value, grouped with AND and OR — plus whatever the target itself always needs. A record that doesn't meet it waits under Entries as **To review** instead of being sent. ### Where to find it Open a pipeline, go to the **Configuration** tab and click the pencil on **Data check**. With nothing set, it reads "None – every contact is sent." ### Building conditions Add conditions the same way as in a list trigger: pick a field, an operator and a value, then **AND condition** to add another requirement to the same group or **OR group** for an alternative set of conditions. A pipeline can check: - **Contact fields** — the record's content types (e-mail, first name, company, job title, country …), since a pipeline takes records from any list and from the Watchlist, never a specific list's own columns. - **E-mail verification** — whether the address is valid, business, catch-all, disposable and so on. - **Pipeline marks** — whether the record is already waiting in, or was already sent to, another pipeline. - **Reference lists** — whether the record is in one of the workspace's reference lists (existing customers, competitors, partners, a block list, or one of your own), with **is in it** / **is not in it**. Reference lists are a Premium feature: below Premium the picker shows a greyed entry "Existing customers, competitors … — with Premium". See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for how to set one up. ### The target's own requirements Some targets always need a field, shown as a fixed tag above your conditions — for example HubSpot always needs an e-mail address. These apply on top of whatever conditions you add and can't be removed. A **company** from the Watchlist is checked as a company: HubSpot, Salesforce and Attio then need its domain instead of an e-mail address. Targets that only know contacts and need an e-mail address, such as Instantly or Pipedrive, keep asking for it and so hold a company at **To review**. ### What happens to records that don't meet it They wait under Entries with the status **To review**: "Missing: …" names an empty required field, "Not met: …" names an unmet condition. Nothing is sent and nothing is written to the History until the record changes. Enrich or edit it, then click Send again (or, on an automatic pipeline, it is rechecked by itself on the next run) — it passes if it now meets every condition. ### Preview while editing While you edit the conditions, a line below them shows "**x** of **y** waiting entries meet this" so you can see the effect before saving. With more than 500 entries waiting, only the first 500 are checked for the preview; saving still applies the check to every entry. ### Older pipelines A pipeline set up before this conditions editor existed shows its old "required fields" as "is not empty" conditions automatically — nothing changes in what it sends, and saving it once converts it to the new form. **Related topics:** send-records-to-a-pipeline · pipelines-overview · automatic-release · pipeline-marks · list-triggers · reference-lists. ### FAQ #### What is a pipeline's data check? It's a set of conditions — field, operator, value, grouped with AND and OR — that a record must meet before a pipeline sends it. Set it under Data check on the pipeline's Configuration tab; without any conditions, every record is sent. #### What fields can a pipeline's data check look at? The record's contact fields (e-mail, name, company, job title, country …), its e-mail verification result, whether it's already in or was already sent to another pipeline, and whether it's in one of the workspace's reference lists. It can't check a specific list's own columns or statuses, since one pipeline can take records from any list. #### Can a pipeline's data check use a reference list like "Existing customers"? Yes, with Premium — once a list is set up as a reference list (Set up → Reference list in that list), it appears as its own condition with "is in it" / "is not in it", for example "only send if company is not in it for Competitors". See "[Reference lists (customers, competitors, partners, block)](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/reference-lists)" for setup and how matching works. #### Why is my record stuck with the status "Check"? It doesn't meet the pipeline's data check yet — "Missing: …" names an empty required field, "Not met: …" names an unmet condition. Fill or enrich the record and click Send again; it's rechecked and goes out once it passes. #### Does a target like HubSpot add its own requirement to the data check? Yes, some targets always need a field — HubSpot and the other CRMs always need an e-mail address — shown as a fixed tag above your own conditions. It applies on top of whatever you add and can't be turned off. #### How do I combine several conditions in a data check? Conditions in the same group all have to be true (AND); add another group with OR group for an alternative set of conditions. For example "country is Germany AND job title contains Head" OR "seniority is VP". #### Can I see how many waiting entries would pass before I save the data check? Yes, a line under the conditions shows "x of y waiting entries meet this" as you edit, checking up to the first 500 waiting entries. Save applies the check to every entry, not just the ones previewed. #### When is a held-back record checked again? On a manual pipeline, when someone clicks Send again. On an automatic pipeline, it's rechecked by itself on every run, so a record that becomes complete later goes out without anyone clicking anything. #### What happened to the old "required fields" setting? It still works exactly as before, shown as "is not empty" conditions in the same editor. Nothing about what the pipeline sends changes; saving the pipeline once converts it to the new form. --- ## Enrich in a rule — fill a record's own missing fields Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrich-pipeline Last updated: 2026-10-17 **Enrich** is an action of a list's rule (trigger). It doesn't send a record anywhere — it fills the record's own missing fields, using the cheapest route ListPlus can find from the data it already has. Its credits go to lookups, not to requests to a connected tool. Enrich is not a pipeline target: a pipeline takes records somewhere else (a CRM, Slack, an e-mail, another list). An enrichment belongs to exactly one rule, is set up in that rule and is removed with it. It is not listed under Pipelines and has no Entries tab. ### Set it up 1. Open the list, click the lightning icon (**Triggers**) and create or edit a rule. Under **Then**, click **Add action** → **Enrich**. Or start from the templates **Find work emails** or **Enrich, then pass on**. 2. Under **Fields to reach**, pick up to 8 content types (e-mail, phone, job title, company …). 3. Set **At most per record**, a credit limit you choose — a step that would exceed this budget is not started for that record. 4. Choose what happens to the cells: **Fill empty cells only** (default), **Replace empty and invalid values**, or **Overwrite everything — including values entered by hand**. 5. Save the rule. From then on it enriches every record that meets its conditions by itself; there is no release by hand. To change the settings later, edit the rule. Deleting the rule, or taking the Enrich action out of it, ends the enrichment. ### List records only A rule belongs to a list, so Enrich works on that list's records. A contact on the Watchlist is enriched by adding it to a list. A **company** on the Watchlist has its own button: select it under Watchlist → Companies and click **Complete profile** (see "[Companies on the Watchlist and company alerts](https://listplus.ai/en/help/inbox-and-saved/watch-companies)"). ### What it costs Credits are only spent for the route that was actually used, up to the budget you set — a cheaper route that already gets everything needed never reaches the maximum. Whatever ListPlus finds is kept in the record's enrichment data even in "Fill empty cells only" mode, so it's available later even for a cell that stayed untouched this time. ### What you see while it runs Enrichment can take from a few seconds to a few minutes. While a record is being enriched, its row carries a moving ring and the last column (the data column) is animated; the cells fill in as results arrive, for everyone who has the list open. What could not be enriched — not enough credits, a provider that doesn't answer — shows under **Flows → To do → Failed or held**, with the reason and **Try again**. **Related topics:** list-triggers · enrichment-in-pipelines · watch-companies · pipeline-marks · credits-explained. ### FAQ #### What does the Enrich action do? It fills the record's own missing fields instead of sending it anywhere else, using the cheapest route ListPlus can find from what the record already has. It is an action of a list's rule, set up there; its credits pay for the lookups. #### Does Enrich cost credits? Yes, for the lookups it runs. You set a credit budget per record (At most per record), and a step that would exceed it simply isn't started for that record. #### Can Enrich work on contacts on my watchlist, not just list records? Not directly: a rule belongs to a list, so add the contact to a list first. A company on the Watchlist has its own way: select it under Companies and click Complete profile. #### What does the "running" ring on a row mean? A rule is enriching that record right now; this can take from a few seconds to a few minutes. The ring and the animation in the last column go away once it's done, and the cells show what was found. #### What happens to cells that Enrich doesn't fill? That depends on the option you chose: Fill empty cells only (default) leaves anything already filled untouched, Replace empty and invalid values also overwrites values that look wrong, and Overwrite everything replaces even values you typed by hand. Whatever is found is kept in the record's enrichment data regardless, even for a cell that stays as it was. #### Can I try Enrich without spending credits? There is no dry run for a rule's enrichment. The rule's preview shows how many records meet its conditions before you save; to try it on a few, narrow the conditions and set a low limit per record first. #### Can a trigger enrich a record directly? Yes. In the rule, click Add action and choose Enrich, then pick the fields to reach, the limit per record and what happens to filled cells. The enrichment belongs to that rule and goes when the rule is deleted. --- ## Enrichment by a rule: what happens to a record from rule to result Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrichment-in-pipelines Last updated: 2026-10-17 A rule's **Enrich** action doesn't send a record anywhere: it fills the record's own missing fields. This article follows one record through it — from the rule that picks it up to the filled cells — and explains what you see while it runs and what is charged. For setting it up, see "[Enrich in a rule — fill a record's own missing fields](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrich-pipeline)". ### What Enrich does with a record The action has three settings: the **fields to reach** (up to 8 content types — e-mail, phone, job title, company …), **At most per record** (a credit limit per record that you choose; a default is preset) and the **fill rule**, by default **Fill empty cells only**. For each record ListPlus looks at what the row already holds and plans the cheapest route to the missing fields — a domain is better than a company name, a LinkedIn URL better than a name, and so on. A field the record already has is not bought again. ### From rule to run When a record meets the rule's conditions, the rule starts an **enrichment run for that one record** by itself — the same kind of run as an enrichment of selected rows, just with one row. Nobody releases it. The run calls the provider, charges, stores the answer with the record and fills the cells. While it works, the record shows a moving ring in the list and the last column is animated. ### Multi-step plans Often one call isn't enough — a job title may need a LinkedIn URL first. The plan runs **one step at a time**: when a run ends, the next step is planned again from what the record holds *now*, so a found LinkedIn URL opens the next route. A route that was already tried (hit or miss) is never called twice, a step whose nominal cost would push the record over its budget is not started, and there are at most 12 calls per record. If another enrichment of the list is already doing the very same call for this row, the rule waits for it instead of paying for a second one. ### How fast it goes The end of a run starts the next step within seconds; a check every five minutes catches anything that was missed. Records are taken up to 10 at a time, in the order they came, and the providers set the pace — a few hundred records take a while. ### When a record could not be enriched A record whose enrichment failed shows under **Flows → To do → Failed or held**, under the rule's name, with the reason: **"Not enough credits."**, **"Stopped – the provider is not answering"**, **"The enrichment run was cancelled"**, **"The enrichment run stopped"** or **"The enrichment run is gone – try again"** (the run's record was deleted after 48 hours or with the list). Fix the cause and click **Try again**: the record is planned afresh from what it holds now, and fields already reached are not bought again. A record for which nothing could be found, or from whose data no route starts (a name without a company, say), is simply left as it is. ### What is charged The runs charge exactly as runs started from the list do: an e-mail or phone lookup only when it finds one, other lookups per call as the price list says, and nothing for an answer that is still in the cache. The budget per record caps the **nominal** cost of the planned steps — a step that would exceed it is not started. In a workspace the runs spend the workspace owner's credits, and when the balance is empty the record fails with "[Not enough credits](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/not-enough-credits)." instead of starting a run. ### Everything found is kept Choosing three fields doesn't throw the rest away. Whatever the provider returns is stored in the record's enrichment data, and with the default fill rule every **empty** column that has a matching value is filled — not only the chosen ones. A cell that already has a value keeps it (unless you chose one of the replace rules); the found value stays in the record panel and can be taken over later. **Related topics:** enrich-pipeline · list-triggers · pipeline-marks · running-jobs-and-limits · continue-stopped-enrichment · fill-empty-cells. ### FAQ #### Can hundreds of records be enriched by a rule at once? Yes. They are taken 10 at a time, in the order they came, until none is left — paced by the providers, so a few hundred records take a while. #### How do I see that an enrichment is running? The record's row shows a moving ring and its last column is animated until the enrichment is done; the cells fill in as results arrive. There is no Entries tab for a rule's enrichment. #### Does the rule fire again when the enrichment writes the row? No. The run's writes do make the rule look at the record again, but a record it has already enriched is not taken a second time — so Enrich acts once per record. Only a condition like "Pipeline X last more than N days ago" (N at least 1) can take the record again — the next time the record changes after those N days, not by itself. #### Does Enrich take several steps for one record? Yes, one at a time: after each run the next step is planned from what the record holds now, a route is never called twice, a step over the per-record budget is skipped, and there are at most 12 calls per record. Fields the record already has are never bought again. #### What if nothing is found for a record? Then the record stays as it is: either calls were made and none of the missing fields could be reached, or no provider can start from what the record holds, so nothing was called. Add a starting point (a company domain, a LinkedIn URL) and the rule can try again once its conditions take the record again. #### Are only the chosen fields filled, or everything the provider returns? Everything the provider returns is kept in the record's enrichment data, and with "Fill empty cells only" every empty column with a matching value is filled, not just the chosen fields. Cells that already have a value keep it; the found value stays in the record panel for taking over later. --- ## Flows — everything that moves records, on one page Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/flows-overview Last updated: 2026-10-15 **Flows** in the left bar shows, on one page, everything that moves records through your workspace: where they come in, what happens to them, and where they go. You no longer have to open every list to see which rules it has. Clicking **Flows** opens **To do**, the records that wait for you; **Overview** in the left column opens the overview. The column is the same on every page of Flows: **To do** at the top — the records that wait for you: entries of a pipeline to release, entries whose send failed or that the data check holds back, and places where a rule or an input stopped — then **Overview**, then **Comes in** (the **Inbox**, beneath it its ways in — **App events**, **Email forwarding**, **Webhook & automations**; a pause sign or an empty ring marks one that is paused or not set up yet, what runs carries no mark), **Lists with their own way in** (each list with a webhook or an app event of its own), **AI research** (with the number of new hits your research runs found) and **Goes out · Pipelines** (your pipelines, with a **+** for a new one), and at the bottom **Connected accounts** — click a line to open it. **Comes in** and **Lists with their own way in** are folded until you click their name; folded, they still show their number and a pause sign when a way in is paused. Your browser remembers which group you opened, and a group stays open while you are on one of its pages. Clicking **Flows** again (or ⌘⇧L) hides or shows that column, which has a fixed width; on a phone the **Pages** button at the top right opens it. On the overview, **Only places with rules** hides everything that has no rule. ### The overview Every place records live in is one row: the **Inbox**, each **list**, and the **Watchlist**. Sources, the place and its processing, and destinations are aligned in three columns. Inbox and Watchlist sit below the lists. - **Comes in** — the sources of that place: an import from HubSpot, Google Sheets or another connected tool (with "refresh daily" when it updates itself), a file import, a form, a webhook, an app event, the list's API, and records another list or the Watchlist sends into it. - **Place** — its name and how many records it holds. A note appears when something needs you, for example a rule that could not act or a refresh that did not run. A rule or a way in you paused yourself is marked "paused" where it is, but it does not count as something to do. - **What happens there**, inside the place — click a rule count to see the individual rules, then expand a rule for its trigger, conditions and ordered actions. Computed columns also expand. In the Watchlist, click the alert count for the watched people and companies, checks, frequency, status and pipeline settings. - **Goes out** — where records leave: a pipeline's target such as Slack or HubSpot, another list, or writing changes back to the source. **Stays here** means nothing leaves that place by itself. The Inbox instead shows a dashed manual handover: its destination is chosen on review. Click a place's name to open it. Click a blue chip under **Goes out** for a side panel with the pipeline behind it: its data check, release and target, which rules and alerts use it, and links to **Open configuration** and to its entries. Click **Details** for a read-only view of a place, or **Flow funnel** on a list's card for the list's own Flow funnel (see the article on the Flow funnel of a list). Selecting a source or a route-focus button highlights its connections; **Show all routes** clears the selection. On phones, flows stack into cards without sideways scrolling. Lists with only an import or manual input and no rules, computed columns, outgoing route or warning are grouped in an expandable section. Connected forms, webhooks and online sources stay individually visible. ### By source The switch at the top right turns the same information around: **By source** lists every source once and shows the places it leads to. Where records go is in the **Goes out** column of the view by place. ### The Pipelines page **Pipelines** is the second page of Flows. To get there, click a pipeline in the left column; **Overview** at the top of that column leads back. It is the page where you create pipelines, set their target and fields, release waiting entries and look at the history. Under a pipeline's name, **Used by** lists the rules and alerts that hand it records, paused ones included. A pipeline no rule and no alert is assigned to says so: records reach it only when someone adds them by hand. The small number at the top is how many entries wait for you: waiting for release, or failed. **Related topics:** pipelines-overview · list-triggers · list-webhooks · app-events · watch-companies. ### FAQ #### Where can I see all my rules and pipelines at once? Click Flows in the left bar. Every list, the Inbox and the Watchlist are one row each, with what comes in, the rules and computed columns there, and where records go out. #### Where did Pipelines go in the left bar? Pipelines is now part of Flows. Click Flows in the left bar: your pipelines are listed in the left column, under Goes out · Pipelines. Click one to open it; the page itself is unchanged. #### How do I see what feeds a pipeline? Open the pipeline on the Pipelines page of Flows: under its name, "Used by" lists the rules and alerts that hand it records, with their list or the Watchlist, and says so if none is assigned. On the overview, clicking the pipeline's blue chip shows the same in a side panel. #### How do I see everything that is sent to one tool, such as HubSpot? On the Flows overview, look at the Goes out column: every place that sends to HubSpot shows a blue chip naming it. Click the chip to open the pipeline behind it. #### Can I change a rule or a source on the Flows page? Not yet. Flows shows what is set up; you change a rule in its list, a source in the list or the Inbox, and a pipeline on the Pipelines page. Clicking a place's name takes you there. #### What does "Stays here" mean on the Flows page? Nothing leaves that place by itself: no rule hands records to a pipeline, and the list does not write back to a source. Records stay there until someone exports or sends them by hand. --- ## Section: Chrome extension ## The ListPlus extension for Chrome Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension Last updated: 2026-10-19 The ListPlus extension for Chrome is a saved list that lives in your browser. You collect the people and companies you come across while browsing, LinkedIn above all, add a note if you like, and hand them over to a ListPlus list when you are ready. ListPlus then does the rest: enrich them, sort out what does not fit, draft the first email and send the leads on to your CRM through the rules and pipelines of that list. The extension itself stays small on purpose. It has three jobs: keep a saved list in the browser, read whole pages that list people or companies, and hand selected entries over to ListPlus. ### Getting it Add the extension from the Chrome Web Store. The link is on the page listplus.ai/en/chrome-extension, under **Add to Chrome**. Afterwards, pin the icon to the Chrome toolbar so it is always one click away. The extension starts as a **popup**. Press the dock button (**Dock as side panel**) and it becomes a **side panel** that stays open next to the page while you browse; from then on the icon opens the panel. The undock button (**Undock**) turns it back into a popup. ### Account You do not need a ListPlus account to save. Saving, notes, folders and export work without one. To hand entries over, and to use **Open in ListPlus**, log in to ListPlus in the same Chrome profile. The Basic plan is enough. If you are not logged in when you hand over, the extension tells you (**Log in to hand over**); your saved list stays where it is. ### Where your data lives Your saved list lives only in this browser, in your Chrome profile. It holds up to 5,000 entries with their notes, and it is not synced to other devices or to ListPlus. Nothing of it reaches ListPlus until you hand entries over, and then only the entries you selected. The header says it as well: **Local**. If you want leads on another device, hand them over to a ListPlus list or export them as CSV or Excel. ### Languages The extension speaks English, German, Spanish and French, the same languages as ListPlus. It follows your browser's language. To pick another one, open the settings with the arrow button at the right of the footer (**Detections & settings**) and choose the language in the menu under **Settings**; **Browser language** goes back to the default. ### What it costs The extension is free. Saving and reading pages cost nothing. Only the optional enrichment at the hand-over uses credits: it is switched off until you tick it, it is charged per hit, and the price is shown before you confirm. ### Privacy in short - The extension sends nothing by itself. Only a hand-over sends the entries you selected to ListPlus. - On LinkedIn it saves the address and the title of the page by default. It reads details such as headline, location and photo only after you switch on **Read details from LinkedIn pages**. Please mind LinkedIn's User Agreement when you do. - Reading whole pages uses the AI built into Chrome, on your own computer. The page's content stays on your device. ### What to read next - **Save people and companies with the Chrome extension**: one click, notes, auto mode, folders. - **Read whole pages with the Chrome extension**: turn a page of speakers, exhibitors or investors into records. - **Hand over from the Chrome extension to ListPlus**: choose the list, enrich, and what happens after. ### FAQ #### How do I install the ListPlus Chrome extension? Add it from the Chrome Web Store through the **Add to Chrome** button on listplus.ai/en/chrome-extension. Then pin the icon to the toolbar. It opens as a popup first. #### Does the ListPlus Chrome extension cost anything? No, the extension is free. Only the optional enrichment at the hand-over uses credits: it is off until you tick it, charged per hit, and the price is shown before you confirm. #### Do I need a ListPlus account to use the extension? Not to save. Saving, notes, folders and export work without an account. To hand entries over to a list or use **Open in ListPlus**, log in to ListPlus in the same Chrome profile; the Basic plan is enough. #### Where is my saved list stored? In your Chrome profile on this computer only, up to 5,000 entries with notes. Nothing of it goes to ListPlus until you hand entries over, and then only the ones you selected. #### Is my saved list synced across my devices? No, the saved list is not synced. To use leads on another device, hand them over to a ListPlus list or export them as CSV or Excel. #### What happens to my saved list if I remove the extension? Chrome deletes an extension's stored data when you remove it, so your saved list is gone with it. Hand over or export what you want to keep first. Entries you already handed over stay in your ListPlus list. #### Does the extension work in Edge, Firefox or other browsers? The extension is made for Google Chrome and offered in the Chrome Web Store. Reading whole pages also needs Chrome's built-in AI on a computer that meets its requirements; elsewhere that feature stays off and everything else still works. #### Which languages does the extension support? English, German, Spanish and French. It follows your browser's language by default; to change it, open **Detections & settings** (the arrow button in the footer) and pick the language under **Settings**. #### Should I use the popup or the side panel? The side panel stays open while you browse, so it suits saving several leads in a row. Press the dock button (**Dock as side panel**) to switch to it and **Undock** to go back to the popup. #### Does the extension send my browsing or page content to ListPlus? No. It sends nothing by itself; only a hand-over sends the entries you selected. Page details are read only if you switch on **Read details from LinkedIn pages**, and whole-page reading runs on the AI built into Chrome on your own device. --- ## Save people and companies with the Chrome extension Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-saving Last updated: 2026-10-19 The ListPlus Chrome extension keeps a saved list of the people and companies you come across on LinkedIn, with a note if you like. The list lives only in your browser (the header says **Local**). Nothing reaches ListPlus until you hand entries over yourself (see "[Hand over from the Chrome extension to ListPlus](https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-hand-over)"). ### Save from a page Open a LinkedIn person or company page. The card **On this page** shows what was recognised (Person or Company) with its name. 1. Optionally type a text into **Add a note …**. 2. Click **Save**. The button changes to **Saved**. 3. Click **Saved** again to remove the entry. Each page address has exactly one entry: visiting a profile again never creates a second one. ### What is stored from a LinkedIn page By default the extension stores only the page's address and the name from the tab's title. It does not read the page itself, on purpose: LinkedIn's User Agreement forbids add-ons that copy data from its pages. If you want more, switch on **Read details from LinkedIn pages** in the settings (see below). The extension then also stores what the page shows: headline, company, location and the photo or company logo. The switch is off until you turn it on, and the note next to it reminds you to mind LinkedIn's User Agreement. Whether to use it is your decision. ### Detections: what do you want to save? Open the settings with the arrow button at the right of the footer (**Detections & settings**), by clicking **Auto mode** in the footer, or with **Adjust detections** on a page where nothing was recognised. The view is called **What do you want to save?**. Its groups (**LinkedIn**, **Websites**) are folded; click a group to open it. Each detection has one of three modes: - **Off**: the extension ignores these pages. - **On click**: the page's card offers **Save**, and you decide. - **Automatic**: the page is saved by itself, but only while auto mode is on. The defaults are **LinkedIn profiles** on Automatic and **LinkedIn companies** on On click. The **Read details from LinkedIn pages** switch sits in the LinkedIn group and is shown while one of the two LinkedIn detections is not Off. #### Auto mode **Auto mode** is the switch in the footer, and it is off when you install the extension. While it is on, the extension saves every page that matches a detection set to Automatic as you browse. Only the LinkedIn detections can be Automatic; other websites are never saved by auto mode. When something is saved automatically, the extension's icon shows a badge with the number of new entries, and an open extension plays a short sound. Opening the extension resets the badge. If you remove an automatically saved page, auto mode does not save it again for 30 minutes. Hover over an entry's time to see whether you saved it yourself (**Saved by you**) or the extension did (**Saved automatically**). ### Save any page as a link On a page that is not recognised, the card says **Nothing recognised here**. Click **Save page manually** to keep it as a link entry. The first time, Chrome asks for a permission so the extension can see the address of the page you are on. Links stay in your saved list: they cannot go into a ListPlus list, but they are included in an export. ### Your saved list The main view shows your latest entries (**Saved today** or **Saved lately**). Click **See all** to open **All entries**: a calendar (**Saved per day**) to pick a day, a search for names, companies or notes, and all entries by day. Click an entry to open its page; hovering over a LinkedIn person or company shows **Open profile in ListPlus**. #### Select and delete Click **Select** above the list and tick the entries you want. The footer then shows the number selected, **Move to folder**, **Delete** (after a confirmation) and the hand-over button. **Done** above the list leaves select mode. ### Folders Folders keep a group of entries together instead of a long flat list. - Create an empty folder with the folder button in the list's header (**New folder**), then drag entries onto it. - Or tick entries and use **Move to folder** in the footer: pick a folder or **New folder**. Inside an open folder the same menu offers **Take out of the folder**. - Open a folder to see **In this folder**. Click its name to rename it; **Hand all over** hands its entries over, **Delete folder** deletes it. There is one level of folders, and auto mode never puts entries into a folder. Deleting a folder deletes the entries inside it too, after a confirmation. ### Export as CSV or Excel **All entries** and every folder have an export button (the download icon). It exports what is currently shown (for example one day or a search result), or only your selection if you ticked entries. Choose **Excel (.xlsx)** or **CSV (Excel, Sheets, CRM)**. The columns are: Type, Name, LinkedIn, URL, Position, Company, Location, Email, Phone, Website, Street, Postcode, City, Country, Note, Folder, Saved at, Saved and Handed over to. Columns without data stay empty. ### Limits The saved list holds up to 5,000 entries; when it is full, the oldest fall off. Clearing the browser's data for the extension or removing the extension deletes the saved list, so export or hand over what you want to keep. ### FAQ #### Why is only the name and address saved from a LinkedIn profile? By default the extension stores only the page address and the name from the tab's title, because LinkedIn's User Agreement forbids add-ons that copy data from its pages. To also store headline, company, location and photo, switch on **Read details from LinkedIn pages** in **Detections & settings**, in the LinkedIn group. #### How do I get headline, company and photo into my saved entries? Open **Detections & settings** (the arrow button in the footer), open the **LinkedIn** group and switch on **Read details from LinkedIn pages**. It applies to LinkedIn profiles and companies you save afterwards. It is off by default; please mind LinkedIn's User Agreement. #### Does auto mode save every website I visit? No. Auto mode only saves LinkedIn pages whose detection is set to **Automatic**, and only while **Auto mode** in the footer is on. It is off by default, and other websites are never saved by it. #### What do the detection modes Off, On click and Automatic mean? **Off** ignores the pages, **On click** offers **Save** on the page's card, and **Automatic** saves them while auto mode is on. By default LinkedIn profiles are Automatic and LinkedIn companies are On click. #### Why does the extension icon show a number? The badge counts the entries saved automatically since you last opened the extension. Opening it resets the badge; while it is open, a short sound marks each new entry. #### I removed a saved page and it came back. Why? It should not come back right away: a page you remove is not saved again by auto mode for 30 minutes. After that, visiting it again with auto mode on saves it again. To keep a page out for good, set its detection to **On click** or **Off**. #### Is there a limit to how many entries I can save? Yes, the saved list holds up to 5,000 entries, and the oldest fall off when it is full. Export what you want to keep with **Export**, or hand it over to ListPlus. #### How do I delete saved entries? Click **Select** above your saved list, tick the entries, and click **Delete** in the footer. To remove a single entry while you are on its page, click **Saved** on the page's card. Deleting a folder deletes the entries inside it. #### How do I export my saved list to Excel or CSV? Click the **Export** button in **All entries** (or in a folder) and choose **Excel (.xlsx)** or **CSV (Excel, Sheets, CRM)**. It exports what is shown, or only your selection. #### Why does the extension ask for a browser permission when I save a page as a link? To save any page as a link with **Save page manually**, the extension has to see the address of the page you are on, and Chrome asks for that permission the first time. LinkedIn people and companies do not need it. #### What happens to the entries in a folder when I delete the folder? They are deleted with it, after a confirmation. To keep entries, open the folder, select them and choose **Take out of the folder** under **Move to folder** first. --- ## Read whole pages with the Chrome extension Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-read-pages Last updated: 2026-10-19 On a web page that lists people or companies, the ListPlus Chrome extension can read the whole page for you. Instead of saving one entry at a time, you press **Find people & companies** and the cards on the page become records: name, role, company, place, and contact data wherever the page shows it. The reading is done by the AI built into Chrome, on your own computer: nothing of the page is uploaded to ListPlus or to any AI service. ### Which pages work The extension looks for repeated cards, rows or list items that each describe one person or one company: conference speaker pages, exhibitor and startup directories, investor and VC lists, team pages, member and partner lists. A page without such cards, for example an article, a product page or a page with a single contact, has nothing to find: the extension says **Nothing found.** Cards that are product tiles or teasers without a person or a company are skipped on purpose. The feature is made for websites outside LinkedIn; on LinkedIn the extension saves the profiles and company pages you open (see "[Save people and companies with the Chrome extension](https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-saving)"). ### What your computer needs Reading whole pages uses Chrome's built-in model (Gemini Nano). It runs only where the device meets Chrome's requirements: - Chrome 138 or newer - about 22 GB of free disk space - 16 GB of RAM or a graphics card with more than 4 GB of memory Where a device does not qualify, the extension says so ("Local AI is not available on this device"), the reading stays off and nothing is sent to a cloud model instead. Everything else in the extension works in every Chrome. ### Switching it on 1. Open the settings with the arrow button at the right of the footer (**Detections & settings**) and open the **Websites** group. 2. Set **Lists of people and companies** to **On click** (and, for imprint pages, **People from the imprint**). These detections have no Automatic mode: a page is read only when you press the button. Chrome asks once to let the extension see the address of the page you are on. 3. Press **Activate**. Chrome downloads the model once and the extension shows the progress ("Local AI is downloading"). When it says **Local AI ready (Gemini Nano)**, you are set. ### Reading a page Open the page, open the extension and press **Find people & companies**. The first time on a site, Chrome asks for access to that site; without it nothing can be read, and the extension tells you so. - Results appear while the page is being read: a counter ("12 found") and a progress bar. A long page is read in parts ("Reading part 2 of 5"), and if a very long page is read only to a point, the extension says so. - When reading is done, the found cards are outlined on the page. Click an entry's name (**Show on the page**) and the page scrolls to its card. - Pages whose cards all look the same are read quickly; pages with many differently built cards take longer, because more of them need the AI. Then save single entries, or press **Save as folder** to keep all hits as one folder in your saved list instead of flooding it. An entry whose card links to a LinkedIn profile is saved under that profile. ### Imprint pages On an imprint page (Impressum, mentions légales, aviso legal) press **Read the imprint**. The extension reads the company with its address, phone and e-mail, plus the named representatives, and marks the names on the page. The representatives are saved as people, the company as a company. ### How accurate is it Contact data, such as e-mail addresses, phone numbers and postcodes, is read by fixed rules from the card's text, not guessed by the AI. Every name the extension returns has to stand in the text of the page; a name that does not appear there is dropped. The result still depends on how the page is built: a card that hides its role, a name that is only in an image, or entries the page loads only when you scroll can lead to missing or incomplete records. Check the results before you hand them over. ### Next step: hand over to ListPlus Select the entries and hand them over. People go to a contact list, companies to a company list. Enriching at the hand-over is optional and shows its price first; for companies found on a website, ListPlus first looks up the company's website. See "[Hand over from the Chrome extension to ListPlus](https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-hand-over)". **Related topics:** price-list · which-enrich-button. ### FAQ #### The "Find people & companies" button is missing or off. What now? The button appears only when **Lists of people and companies** is set to **On click** in the **Websites** group of **Detections & settings** and the model was downloaded with **Activate**. It stays off on devices that don't meet Chrome's requirements for its built-in AI (Chrome 138 or newer, about 22 GB free disk space, 16 GB RAM or a graphics card with more than 4 GB). Everything else in the extension keeps working. #### Which computers can use local AI reading? You need Chrome 138 or newer, about 22 GB of free disk space and either 16 GB of RAM or a graphics card with more than 4 GB. The model downloads once, after you press **Activate**. On other devices the feature stays off; there is no cloud fallback. #### Does the extension send the page to ListPlus or an AI service? No. The page is read by the AI built into Chrome on your own computer, and nothing of the page is uploaded. Only a hand-over you start yourself sends the selected entries to ListPlus. #### Why are some cards on the page missing from the results? The extension finds cards by their repeated structure and keeps only names that stand in the page text, so cards without a clear person or company, or names that exist only in an image, can be left out. Entries a page loads only when you scroll are not there yet: scroll until all are shown, then press **Find people & companies** again. Check the results before handing them over. #### Which pages work, and which don't? Pages with cards or rows for people or companies work: speaker pages, exhibitor and startup directories, investor lists, team pages, member and partner lists. Articles, product pages and pages with a single contact have nothing to find, and the extension says "Nothing found." #### Does it work on LinkedIn search results? No, reading whole pages is made for websites outside LinkedIn, such as speaker or exhibitor pages. On LinkedIn the extension saves the profiles and company pages you open, one at a time or with auto mode. Please mind LinkedIn's User Agreement. #### Is this scraping, and is it allowed? The extension reads only the page you have open in your own browser, on your own computer; it does not crawl sites or open further pages by itself. You are responsible for using the data you collect lawfully, for example under data-protection rules and the terms of the site you read. #### What permissions does the extension ask for when reading a page? Chrome asks to let the extension see the address of the page you're on (once, when you switch the detection on) and for access to each site you want to read. Without access to a site nothing is read. #### How do I save everything I found at once? Press **Save as folder**. All hits not yet saved are stored as one folder in your saved list, which you can rename, hand over together (**Hand all over**) or delete with its entries. Entries stay in your browser until you hand them over. #### What does it read on an imprint page? Press **Read the imprint** on an Impressum or imprint page. You get the company with its address, phone and e-mail as one record, plus the named representatives as people, and their names are marked on the page. #### Are the contact details found by the AI? No. E-mail addresses, phone numbers and postcodes are read by fixed rules from the text of the card; the AI is used to tell people and companies apart and to read names, roles and places. Contact data appears only where the page shows it. --- ## Hand over from the Chrome extension to ListPlus Source: https://listplus.ai/en/help/chrome-extension/chrome-extension-hand-over Last updated: 2026-10-19 A hand-over writes entries from the extension's saved list into one of your ListPlus lists, optionally enriched, or sends them to an endpoint of your own. Until then nothing of your saved list reaches ListPlus. ### Hand entries over to a ListPlus list 1. In your saved list, click **Select** and tick the entries you want. 2. Click **To listplus** in the footer. (With your own endpoint set up, the button is called **Hand over** and opens a menu: choose **To ListPlus …**.) In a folder, **Hand all over** takes all its entries. 3. The dialog **Hand over to listplus** shows a short preview. Pick the target list, tick the options you want and click **Hand over entry** (or **Hand over n entries**). You need to be logged in to ListPlus in the same Chrome profile; the Basic plan is enough. Otherwise the dialog shows **Log in to hand over**. #### Which list gets what A list holds one kind of record (see "[Contact list or company list — the kind of a list](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-kind)"): **people** go to a contact list, **companies** to a company list. With both in your selection the dialog shows two pickers, **Target list · people** and **Target list · companies**, each offering only lists of that kind and starting with the one you used last. **Links** stay in your saved list; the dialog says how many. #### Create a new list right there Choose **New list** at the bottom of the picker, type a name and click **Create**. If you have no list of that kind yet, the name field is shown straight away. A new contact list gets the columns First Name, Last Name, Job Title, Company, Email, Phone, LinkedIn, Location and Notes. A new company list gets Company, Website, Industry, Employees, Phone, Email, Street, Postcode, City, Country, LinkedIn and Notes. **Hand over notes too** (off by default) writes your notes into the list's Notes column. ### Enrichment on the way in **Enrich in listplus** is off by default. Ticked, the new rows are completed in ListPlus after they arrive: - People with a LinkedIn profile: ListPlus fetches the profile data. - People found on a website: ListPlus looks for their LinkedIn profile by name and company, then fetches it. Without a company there is nothing to look up from. - Companies with a LinkedIn page: ListPlus fetches the company data. - Companies found on a website: ListPlus first looks up the company's website, then the company data from it. Enrichment is charged per hit; the dialog shows the price next to the option before you confirm. The numbers are in "[Price list: what every action costs](https://listplus.ai/en/help/plans-credits-billing/price-list)". It runs in ListPlus, so you can close the extension. Only newly added rows are enriched. The result says **Enrichment runs — see it in the list.** or why it did not start. The hand-over itself happens either way: - **Not enriched: not enough credits.** Top up, then enrich the rows from the list (see "Enrich selected rows: plan, steps and the \"at most\""). - **Not enriched: nothing to enrich from.** No new row had anything to look up from, for example a web person without a company, or every entry was already in the list. - **Not enriched: enrichment is not available right now.** Try again later from the list. ### Duplicates are merged A hand-over never adds the same person or company twice. If a record is already in the list, the hand-over fills its empty cells instead of adding a row. The result shows both numbers, for example "12 added to “LinkedIn contacts” · 3 already there". Each entry in your saved list then shows **Handed over to** with the list's name; a click opens the list. ### After the hand-over The rows are normal rows of the list; see "[Enrich in a rule — fill a record's own missing fields](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/enrich-pipeline)", "[Tidying up a list step by step](https://listplus.ai/en/help/check-and-clean/tidy-up-a-list)", "[Email drafts in your own mailbox](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/email-draft)", "[Pipelines — send records on to your CRM, Slack, e-mail or API](https://listplus.ai/en/help/pipelines/pipelines-overview)" and "[Triggers — hand records on automatically](https://listplus.ai/en/help/working-in-a-list/list-triggers)". ### Open a saved person or company in ListPlus **Open in ListPlus** on the page card (or **Open profile in ListPlus** when you hover over a row of your saved list) opens the full profile in the ListPlus app, with every enrichment. Links and people found on a website have none. ### Your own endpoint You can also send entries to an address of your own, such as an n8n, Make or Zapier webhook or your server (see "[Zapier, Make and n8n via webhook](https://listplus.ai/en/help/export-sync-integrations/zapier-make-n8n)"). This works without a ListPlus account. 1. Open **Detections & settings** (the arrow button in the footer) and, under **Settings**, open **Connect your own endpoint**. 2. Enter the **Endpoint address**. Use https; a plain http address works, but the extension warns that the data is sent unencrypted. 3. Optionally add an **Authentication header (optional)**: a name such as Authorization and its value. The value stays in this browser. 4. Click **Send test** to post a made-up sample entry, or **Save**. Chrome asks once for permission to reach that address. **Remove** deletes the settings. With an endpoint saved, the hand-over button becomes a menu with **To ListPlus …** and **Send to personal endpoint**. The second one sends the selection in one click, with your notes, and shows the endpoint's answer for a few seconds. Links are sent too. Entries sent this way show your endpoint's host under **Handed over to**. ### For advanced users Every send is one JSON POST (no cookies, 20-second timeout; any 2xx answer counts as delivered). Empty fields are left out. A send of one entry looks like this (**Send test** adds `"test": true`): ```json { "event": "listplus.entries", "source": "listplus-chrome-extension", "version": "1.0.0", "sentAt": "2026-10-19T09:30:00.000Z", "count": 1, "entries": [ { "kind": "person", "name": "Jane Doe", "url": "https://www.linkedin.com/in/jane-doe-example", "linkedinUrl": "https://www.linkedin.com/in/jane-doe-example", "headline": "VP Sales", "company": "Example Inc", "location": "San Francisco, CA", "note": "Met at SaaStr", "savedAt": "2026-10-18T14:30:00.000Z", "savedBy": "manual" } ] } ``` `kind` is `person`, `company` or `page`; `savedBy` is `manual` or `auto`. Further optional fields: `detail`, `email`, `phone`, `website`, `street`, `zip`, `city`, `country`, `folder`, `sentTo`. ### FAQ #### What does a hand-over to ListPlus cost? A plain hand-over costs no credits. Only the optional **Enrich in listplus** costs credits, charged per hit, and the dialog shows the price before you confirm. A miss is not charged. #### Why did my enrichment not start? The result of the hand-over names the reason: not enough credits, nothing to enrich from (also when every entry was already in the list), or enrichment not available right now. The rows are in your list either way. Fix the reason and enrich them from the list. #### Does a hand-over add duplicates? No. A person or company already in the list is merged into its row (empty cells are filled), and the result shows how many were **already there**. Merged rows are not enriched again. #### Which list do companies go to? Companies go to a company list, people to a contact list. If you hand over both at once, the dialog shows two pickers, and you can create a new list of the right kind with **New list**. #### Why can't I pick a list for my links? Links (pages saved as a plain link) are not people or companies, so they stay in your saved list. The dialog tells you how many stayed. Export them as CSV or Excel if you need them elsewhere. #### Do I need to be signed in to hand over? Yes, for a hand-over to ListPlus you must be logged in to ListPlus in the same Chrome profile. Otherwise the dialog shows **Log in to hand over** with **Open listplus**. Saving, export and sending to your own endpoint work without an account. #### Are my notes sent to ListPlus? Only if you tick **Hand over notes too**, which is off by default. The notes then fill the list's Notes column. #### Can I send entries straight to HubSpot or another CRM? Not directly from the extension. Hand the entries over to a ListPlus list, then send them on with a list pipeline to your CRM (HubSpot needs the Premium plan). Alternatively, send them to your own endpoint and let n8n, Make or Zapier pass them on. #### Can I use Zapier, n8n or Make? Yes, and without a ListPlus account: in **Detections & settings**, open **Connect your own endpoint**, paste your webhook URL, click **Send test** and **Save**. After that, **Send to personal endpoint** in the hand-over menu posts your selection in one click. #### What data is sent to my own endpoint? One JSON POST per send with each entry's type, name, page and LinkedIn address, headline, company, location, contact details, folder and save date. Notes are included, and saved links are sent too. #### What does Open in ListPlus do? It opens the person's or company's full profile in the ListPlus app, with every enrichment, where you can enrich field by field and take over values. You need to be logged in to ListPlus. Links and people found on a website have none; a company found on a website opens by its website. #### Can I see which list an entry went to? Yes. Each entry shows **Handed over to** with the list's name (the date in the tooltip), and a click opens the list. Entries sent to your own endpoint show the endpoint's host name. ---